i it ir ] i { i fi i Wait Aan a He a an Haier ey Sis aes ae cy ANNUAL REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, SHOWING THE OPERATIONS, EXPENDITURES, AND CONDITION OF THE INSTITUTION Ee oY WA BR t8Sss. WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 1885. ~ revues ica: FORTY-FIGHTH CONGRESS, FIRST SESSION. The following resolution was agreed to by the Senate June 10, 1884, and concurred in by the House of Representatives June 24, 1884: Resolved by the Senate (the House of Representatives concurring therein), That the annual report of the Smithsonian Institution for the year 1883 be printed; and that there be printed sixteen thousand and sixty extra copies, of which three thousand shall be for the use of the Senate, six thousand and sixty for the use of the House of Representa- tives, and seven thousand copies for the use of the Smithsonian Institution, i LETTER FROM THE SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ACCOMPANYING The annual report of the Board of Regents of that Institution for the year 1883. JUNE 24, 1884.—Ordered to be printed. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, Washington, D. C., January 21, 1884. Sim: In accordance with section 5593 of the Revised Statutes of the United States, I have the honor in behalf of the Board of Regents to submit to Congress the annual report of the operations, expenditures, and condition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year 1883. I have the honor to be, very respectfully, your obedient servant, SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary Smithsonian Institution. Hon. GEORGE F’. EDMUNDS, President of the United States Senate. Hon. JOHN G. CARLISLE, Speaker of the House of Representatives. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION FOR THE YEAR 1883. SUBJECTS. 1. Proceedings of the Board of Regents for the session of January, 1884. 2. Report of the Executive Committee, exhibiting the financial affairs of the Institution, including a statement of the Smithson fund, the re- ceipts and expenditures for the year 1883, and the estimates for 1884. Report of the same committee on the inauguration of the Henry Statue. 3. Annual report of the Secretary, giving an account of the operations and condition of the Institution for the year 1883, with the statistics of collections, exchanges, &c. 4, General appendix, comprising a record of recent progress in the principal departments of science, and special memoirs, original and selected, of interest to collaborators and correspondents of the Institu- tion, teachers, and others engaged in the promotion of knowledge. RV ee ee CONTENTS. Page. Resolution of Congress to print extra copies of the Report....-..----..----- ik Letter from the Secretary, submitting the Aunual Report of the Regents to RE REERM Dan Se oat ota Acta a Puts ae nos sie Jane = nein atins suse mereneneuees tik General subjects of the AnnualReport - 5... ..-225- 0-6 Ronineworkiol the vat tMblON see anos sceces ce ecine ec ens oemalcsee cemman 1k VI CONTENTS. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY.—THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—Continued. a AGMINISHALION sacisaie cos oe «cia cieeiate sie eclel ne aan nin\sioe meine setae ates eine all Correspondence! ea -ces cn sseeniosesrelsetees (santas cusicwe ene camcnce 11 Explorations. .---- BeGoWG Bund EOaE BIOS OA OOS CaOeSos SoA begesIcb Hnod SOeSD¢ 11 abradorand Newioundland 2202 coscmosmecneccesres cece cco ese 12 Sy a ASR eae neice a obacintos 232005 bos Ie oBoOuSOoOnmaCans 14 ATOULC COBBU es: (ose seta eeale eet Ge Ee a ee econo teaiceasae coca 14 PATS SAN oa ieee eke cies Sie alelneeioec awele ielaloretele esas alee tatermietetere ete a arete ee 15 British Columbia, Washington, and Oregon Ba oP ae eee 19 COED ios0) oR Sec paosa oe SSab er QSeG5o Se cHotoa cade Scenb aeise 20 Lower California, Arizona, and New Mexico.........-......-...---- 20 The Atlantic sea-board..............- (eG pasos. sememnipe cans =ncmewes 22 NSCS STi oe ES Be Bee Bein Gee a Go SSco Apcoon mAboneCoScEoS Easiooc 24 Wien Gann. See ie tetas ela pie cole ae ee ee eee 24 Central Ameritaperens te sricce cee siecle ss sintcneele as claw ancien eerie 25 SouthvAmenicareeterrcwecc sees tec ncloscicsectseimer closer ete eeeeee 26 Japan, China ands oresen.creeacccsimaec 3.2) 22S es cen See eee oases 28 Twenty-sixth volumes... aoe oe eee eee ee 28 Twenty-seventh volume. ue. 32. cl ocice eee snciee « eeeaet see 28 Separate: publications)... 5). sae wise ee wr oastemaereneereeens 20 General catalogue of scientific periodicals.............-.----- 30 Physical and meteorological tables ........-.-.-.------.----- 31 Bulletins of the National Museum.......--...---.------.---.. 31 Proceedings of the National Museum.-..-......---.------..... 32 Smivbsonian Annual Report).-- co. ses cs ees «se acm eealenmaieeee 33 Contents of Reportifor 1882-2202: vsslse. so ee eee eens 33 Astronomical announcements by telegraph..-.......-. .-----.---.------- 33 Transfer of the same to Harvard College Observatory.....--..--.-- 34 Dite P Re SI he ead Neca Bue beese peedind Ses bdroost detides koeceote dese 35 International exchanvess.- S22 fcc. heiste = ce aches seme eee eaieeee emacs 35 Government exchanves i sac--cis= secu ccce scenes aeaeiaeweeelcciese cies 38 UAE Epo emeadecsre Cod SSon sa Sa adas ods Sse mecsace feeccinae scone 38 Additions forthetyedtasaqea as sateen apse (al aie inten a etcetera eters 39 Relations of the Institution to other bodies ...--.-...........-.--.----- 39 TheywNav ye Weparimenitvesn metre cme set ene tee er tee eet eae eee eat 39 The War Deparhmentias sess settee se seus peel ic eae sate caret ee 41 The United States Signal Service-.-..... Pperison Coo SHedboschaone 41 The Treasury Depaxrtnient--.--.-ssssseese essen ee ceeicee eds Se. eee: 42 Phe Wicht-House (Board eye tesa rset cerns esses aah ee wanna 42 The Interior Department. 2. 225. Saees Seseee eo eace aks soe kecaacee 42 Relations to foreien Governments). sceecsseses acer encase: ee emenes 42 Transportation! facilities) 22225 ccass > cece Scone sees seis setae clct= 43 International and State Exhibitions: 2. .sc fecees aes see. -- he noms 43 Electric-lizht accommodation ...!:2 see sewer daewe eens sceeeen 44 HOLeStryuIugUWITIeS 2 -.os 2 aoe ce ce ace cite eaeiemenee Sesh Jatiesy 44 INGOMMNO Rye Seika eee poe cece sce paces e CREE eae aaene ioe enaiseds 45 Baward 1H. Knight: oo 02654 did .2 pace aieense ete tne iets erates 45 Paul Schumacher ..-...... ess ORS ocrinoe 45 CONTENTS. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY.—THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—Continued. Necrology—Continued. Hemmanie Die htusO Me me- jase cate seis nanaieciauecick viccets wleaeas steeoeute Bonn aw KONGoS he Merl) en vaca cocalncecosicnee snwacsewcutoase SEER GRIN OE ea on aa'ne someon dle ee een ar Weeae) vaclewensasacoeas appara AGalon MM. De psstil. cs scecdiceselenivtublocvoct soveudeucres Tenn wrence oe; CONnLes: Ms, LD) Ssuccs. ccunecsceeclsiescca lneesicmcces Breas eer aie late eita) Galan icleielneta ee mele minieefas sini aeielae aienisiclonaaieeus PRB Mercen BeQuOst s<2 52 «<2 scicineoes secs cena eianeslaconueltccase Navan RAGHM Of EY OIONG. = 2~)scceicnmnineeicceie eclccweees secon a Ssin POLUGAE OL WAL WAN a cio sn) csin coclecin aig cues aeons rowelesee eer acotnaese PME Sten. Mrinal 5 vos sk lio inka i, Jako es Memorial objects in the new Pension building... .............--.---- Impiroemens) tor Cave ReseIChh ccs oe <) << se cncisisma een cauccsrses - Obsequiesiof John) Howard, Paynes. 2/22 2555 25 ce oceoc oeaclesem odes PATTON AESMUSMURE Cocca cnec cece siesictacciecae secccses cccesceswciscetcaucpe PTAA D DHNOEO GY. a= ceciccce ic cicic sot er ecenaenlccecanwesle ecnicosaceces RRR DRODARES: GHOLOGICAT: SURVEY cic cccc covccdcaucvesiscceeccacecccves URALE STATES MISH: COMMISSION 6. cous sbcecdlesececeeeuiseee Lose cbee sce = EMRE OTOS MS see cee eae oan vets sce somniacie nite tot wciccmelGnacecsidese Sriine Oretne _VALDALTONS, 22 ose ociicasecteseei-oSelseac sacciceaeiseicces PCED Po ea os 5 oa males pesuimede oe owaeldcueead muekeomnse Bulletin of the Fish Commission....-..--.......-...---- «- Ficebaonos The London International Fisheries Exhibition, 1883............-.. Hisheries branch.of the census: of 1880). 5). s)sac sect oSaseciesciowenrcccens APPENDIX TO THE REPORT OF THE SECRETARY .«... --6- cess -ccoes cence ccce Correspondence on Astronomical Announcements .........--- ---+. -2---- Reaper on.exchanges for 18855220. 2 02s. . s-5 estes ecicceces stot oo see Receipts of packages for distribution .--....----. -----2 escens cece ONOUNNE ae ao eee te ae ee rennet. Soe ale a ailani ea eiae ane aewnieetatas MIOMESING) 2 ante joe seal eae is bine sae seaueniaseeemeeloess ONO MBs eraes Soe see de ses apse see ee a ieeen nt Salon ctetaws Domestic ..-... SBC oc CAR BRO RCCL CCU REAC ERC COCO ECC Ene TEE ror Governments 2225 secs LOL se tcsae tins euwslendv cin cadets cgsecnse Correspondence relating to Government exchange........---..--.-- International Conference on Exchanges, at Brussels..-.-.......---- List of official publications from Public Printer, 1883 .......-...... aad apes on National Museum by Assistant Director and Curators .-.....-. SeSSL HG IPeCLON A TepOMii. see clas a4 cas ten"s ees one cncsmacce|-wee cone Materia MeHICn COUGG ION Ges cnet an acsle ns scic'sie sale/saseoclmcaeacivawe Foods and textile industries collection .......-.--.-----.----------- ATCHS OOPIGALCOMCCHION: ccaecs sas ccs cacesslse cco ssuslacecurissessa verry HOnt <2... cc ucn oe man peeinieeeeeieerieinae as 443 Geography, by P.M. Greens. 62 co5c2. 205 ccscce seeeaee en seeecenianeee 465 Meteorology, by Cleveland Abbe ..............-sceeee Sco canoes Hasced 483 iPhysics,. by George Es Barker! .sss.0:ssssesiccs aoe toceseecicneeeneeene 571 Chemistry, by H. Carrington Bolton . 52. 52 ccs desesecaciccee pamene oe 629 - Mineralogy, by Edward S. Dana......-.......-. ..--- csimmeoces scene 661 Botany; by WG. Parlowses-.sc. cise sess cease eee eee eee eee ee 681 Zoology, hy, Theodore Gul-u.. 02. 6125. ceee eee aeemaete eee es 699 Anthropology, by Otis‘T. Mason i. 1.2. \-sadscdebaceee enone ee eee ae ee 753 TT—MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS... 20/:515 J) cnse sceciecc cen teeandepaeeeenan seeeme 797 Papers relating to Anthropology /2..0/.2.2.- 2.23 Asus sees cose ane 797 Australian Group relations, by A. W. Howitt ...-....--....---....- 797 Mounds of Sangamon County, Illinois, by James Wickersham .. ... s 825 Mounds in Spoon River Valley, Illinois, by W. H. Adams... -........ 835 Ancient relics at Dayton, Ohio, by Aug. A. Foerste ..--..-..--.--.-- 838 Mounds in Butler County, Ohio, by J. P. MacLean...............-.. ~ 844 Earth-work in Highland County, Ohio, by J. P. MacLean ..........- 851 Mounds in Berrien County, Georgia, by William J. Taylor.......... 853 Mounds and shell-heaps on west coast of Florida, by S. T. Walker... 854 Stone mounds of Hampshire County, W. Virginia, by L. A. Kengla .. 868 Remains in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, by John A. Ruth......-.... 872 Relics in Poughkeepsie, N. Y., by Henry Booth ...............-.... 876 Notes on the Wampanoag Indians, by Henry E. Chase...........--. 878 Antiquities from Ometepec, Nicaragua, by Charles C. Nutting...... 908 On the Phonology of four Siouan Languages, by J. Owen Dorsey ... 919 InpExX to the volume ................... Lecce teteeces SE ee Coty ses 931 CONTENTS. IX LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Page. Statue of Joseph Henry, on Smithsonian Grounds.................--...+--- xvii Brepi imap ol Avgiralis) <3 . - =. +. 2-- -senitos eee sine eee e twee eeeeee 7,000 00 Mor contin ENCES L305 (ie oiistei vin claw mle malaise wisi eit one 2,680 00 Total ...... Dia wiais Wie alneleyeisie Se a nc eae eae hci $42, 180 00 NATIONAL MUSEUM, AND OTHER OBJECTS COMMITTED BY CONGRESS TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. The following is a statement of the accounts of appropriations made by Congress for disbursement under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution : PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS, NATIONAL MUSEUM. Balance available January 1, 1883 .......2-...... seeees $44, 823 30 Appropriated for fiscal year ending June 30, 1884 ($96,000, AUD BS) (ee Ma erc aiviw ly Sie aa in e/a's Stbie eye tale ate eh ered 100, 112 82 144,936 12 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XV Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury PORIVEMINO IGS Samp cts: «ln fol Bae ese aiil ba ce yap wares $98, 277 61 Balance January 1, 1884, (available for six months ending with fiscal year June 30, 1884)... - 2. ee cee e wees 46,658 51 ARMORY BUILDING. Balance available January 1, 1883..... Cal seet eA aS one ib $1,495 79 Appropriated for fiscal year ending June 30, 1884........ 2,500 00 3,995 79 Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury LIST ECOG UTTS] 1 SUE Pt Ea Oa ne ee eh Re ee 2,470 29 Balance January 1, 1884 (available for six months ending PUMA RCEE Nia rrch ais (aia ss canola mw cares Sale SOY cralsidee able 1,525 50 FURNITURE AND FIXTURES. Balance available January 1, 1883...........-...-...... $31,182 12 Appropriated for fiscal year chats June 30, 1884 megs Hise 60, 000 00 91,182 12 Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury WPS PALUMIOND..' 1022. seic- feet Behera On Sof ceo NDA A 55, 161 63 Balance January 1, 1884 (available for six months ending ame AO, Oot ree Sey oa SS ke. SR Rd Soe 36, 020 49 NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. Balance available January 1, 1883.....-.....-.......... $20, 440 44 Appropriated for fiscal year ending June 30, 1884 ....... 40, 000 00 60,440 44 Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury MPM rED ERE LENS OEM pera perens pe oy stn wma na Seika sad g iwi pected ales ee 40,495 04 Balance January 1, 1884 (available for six months ending SBE ALE PRUE oA ale ect alia CeNershld elmo ceibiales 19,945 40 INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. Balance available January 1, 1883....................-.. $2, 500 00 Appropriated for fiscal year ending June 30, 1884.......- 7,500 00 10, 000 00 Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury DAMON ete rain ie ain che nie neal terse we, gai na soa alas 6, 500 00 Balance January 1, 1884 (available for six months ending RIS MEOREE ro eveyone peels alee seve ba bie vis ass see < 3, 500 00 XVI REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE, RECONSTRUCTION EASTERN PORTION SMITHSONIAN BUILDING. Appropriated by act of Congress March 3, 1883 ......... $50, 000 00 Expended as per vouchers audited by the Treasury De- RIQEROIGIED BE LOGO ora acres ain’s aisle nine lelateereo eltee eects hele 37,322 86 Balance January 1, 1884..... Bears tyre 3 Sse Re Ae a 12, 677 14 POLARIS REPORT, Balance available of $8,000 appropriated by act of Con- PMA ABS. cca bs chaiaintsloe sienna cn nie ciney eee ett tae eae $1,918 90 Expended in 1883, as per vouchers audited by the Treasury OMA LEMOML 2) 2 oe cnctewee gine ne ts ssh eee ee eee 1,116 73 Balance January 1 ylestvc a. at qen.c\- be. ess acetepie se eee 802 17 CONCLUSION. The Committee has examined 835 vouchers for payments made from the Smithson income during the year 1883, and 2,014 vouchers for pay- ments made from appropriations by Congress for the National Museum, making a total of 2,849 vouchers. All these bear the approval of the Secretary of the Institution, and a certificate that the materials and services charged were applied to the purposes of the Institution or of the Museum. The balances above given correspond with the certificates of the dis- bursing clerks of the Interior and Treasury Departments. The quarterly accounts, the bank and check books and journals have been examined. and found correct. Respectfully submitted. PETER PARKER, W. T. SHERMAN, Executive Committee. WASHINGTON, January 16, 1884. ae ee Pa”: Has Vadis } “ate i rs te 4 q . ar ae bebea el eee het Aad Oee th VeH Ie: * enc tak : ty, >» » i aan & } , * Rea | jo li ; : : nn a ait Haun ales i AN i) (ining bint OS ee ag ny BRONZE STATUE OF JOSEPH HENRY. KRECTED ON THE SMITHSONIAN GROUNDS BY AUTHORITY OF AN ACT OF CONGRESS APPROVED JUNE 1, 1880; AND UNVEILED APRIL 19, 1883. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE OF THE BOARD OF ' REGENTS ON THE HENRY STATUE. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution : GENTLEMEN: An act of Congress (No. 71), approved by the Presi- dent June 1, 1880, authorized “the Regents of the Smithsonian Insti- tution to contract with W. W. Story, sculptor, for a statue in bronze of JOSEPH HENRY, late Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, to be erected upon the grounds of said Institution; and for this purpose, and for the entire expense of the foundation and pedestal of the monument, ‘the sum of $15,000” was appropriated. In accordance with the authority conferred in the above act, the Regents of the Institution executed a contract with Mr. Story on the 8th of December, 1880, for the statue. At Mr. Story’s request a num- ber of photographs of Professor Henry were sent to him to be used in preparing the model of the statue, and also a cast of the face and bust executed by Mr. Clark Mills, together with an academic gown similar to the one used by the professor when a member of the faculty of Princeton College. A contract was made with the Maine Red Granite Company and the Quincy Granite Polishing Works for a pedestal ac- cording to a design furnished by Mr. Story—the die of Red-Beach granite finely polished, octagonal in shape, 4 feet in diameter, 4 feet high, and the cap and bases of Quincy gray granite, fine-axed, the whole pedestal being 7 feet 3 inches in height. The statue itself is nine feet high. Owing to certain imperfections found in the statue after it had been cast, it became necessary to reproduce it, and it was not until Novem- ber, 1882, that it was actually completed and shipped from Rome. The statue was received in Washington in December, but, owing to the late- ness of the season, it was decided to defer its erection until the follow- ing spring, and the date selected was the 19th of April, 1883, that being the time when the National Academy of Sciences (of which Professor Henry had been president at the time of his death) would hold its semi- annual meeting in Washington. For the site of the statue a triangular plot on the Smithsonian grounds, about 150 feet to the northwest of the building, was chosen by the Regents, and the selection met the full ap- proval of Mr. Story, who visited Washington in the winter. The Chancellor of the Institution was requested by the Regents to perform the ceremony of unveiling it. H. Mis. 69——11 xvul XVIII REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. Hon. Hiester Clymer was selected to deliver an address appropriate to the occasion, but on account of ill health declined the appointment, and President Noah Porter, of Yale College, one of the Regents, was invited by the Executive Committee to perform the service. Rev. Dr. John Maclean and Rey. A. A. Hodge, of Princeton, N. J., were invited to offer prayer on the occasion. By reason of ill health, however, Dr. Maclean was prevented from attending. The direction of the executive details of the occasion were assigned by Professor Baird to Mr. William J. Rhees, the chief clerk. By direction of the Board of Regents, the following letter was ad- dressed by Professor Baird, Secretary of the Institution, to the Hon. Speaker of the House of Representatives, January 17, 1883: ‘Sir: I have the honor to inform the House of Representatives that in accordance with the act of Congress of June 1, 1880, providing that the Regents of the institution be ‘authorized to contract with W. W. Story, sculptor, for a bronze statue of Joseph Henry, late Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, to be erected in the grounds of said insti- tution,’ the statue has been executed and received in Washington, and that Thursday the 19th of April has been selected as the day for the public unveiling of the same. ‘The Congress of the United States having ordered this statue and made the appropriation necessary therefor, the Board of Regents re- spectfully invite the Senate and House of Representatives to be present on the occasion of its formal presentation to the public. ‘ ‘‘T am, sir, very respectfully, your obedient servant.” A joint resolution was passed by Congress, February 24, 1883, accept- ing the invitation to attend the inauguration of the statue. “No. 16. Joint resolution accepting the invitation of the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution to attend the inauguration of the statue of Joseph Henry. ‘Whereas, in a communication from Spencer F. Baird, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, Congress was informed that in accordance with an act of June first, eighteen hundred and eighty, the bronze statue of Joseph Henry, late Secretary of the Smithsonion Institution, had been completed; and whereas, in the same communication, Con- gress was respectfully invited to be present on the occasion of its formal presentation to the public, upon Thursday the nineteenth of April next; Therefore be it Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the said invitation be, and the same is hereby, accepted by the Senate and House of Representatives ; and that the President of the Senate select seven members of that body, and the Speaker of the House of Representatives fifteen members of that body, to be present and represent the Congress of the United ee REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XIX States upon the occasion of the presentation and inauguration of said statue.” Approved February 24, 1883. (Statutes, volume XxIl, page 659.) The following gentlemen were selected as the joint committee to rep- resent Congress: Senators: Hon. George F. Hoar, of Massachusetts; Eli Saulsbury, of Delaware; Samuel J. R. McMillan, of Minnesota; Joseph R. Haw- ley, of Connecticut; William Mahone, of Virginia; Omar D. Conger, of Michigan; James B. Groome, of Maryland. Members of the House of Representatives: Hon. John T. Wait, of Con- necticut; William Aldrich, of Hlinois; Thomas M. Browne, of Indiana; John A. Kasson, of lowa; George M. Robeson, of New Jersey; John W. Candler, of Massachusetts; R. J. Walker. of Pennsylvania; A. H. Pettibone, of Tennessee; J. Proctor Knott, of Kentucky; J. Randolph Tucker, of Virginia; Andrew G. Curtin, of Pennsylvania; Randall L. Gibson, of Louisiana. In accordance with the previous arrangements, the statue was un- veiled on Thursday afternoon, April 19, 1883, at 4 o’clock. The day was clear, mild, and propitious, and about ten thousand people assem- bled to witness the ceremonies. The invited guests met in the lecture hall of the National Museum, and proceeded to the platform which had been erected around the statue. General O. M. Poe acted as chief marshal, and Messrs. Daniel Leech, John D. McChesney, and George S. Hobbs as assistant marshals. The following order of arrangement was adopted: The President of the United States ;* the Chief Justice of the United States, Chancellor of the Institution; the orator of the day, President Noah Porter, LL.D., of Yale College; the chaplain of the day, Rev. A. A. Hodge, D. D.; the family of Professor Henry. The establishment of the Smithsonian Institution, viz, the Vice- President, Secretary of State, Secretary of the Treasury, Secretary of War, Secretary of the Navy, Secretary of the Interior, Postmaster-Gen- eral, Attorney-General, Commissioner of Patents. The Regents and Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, and Ex- Regents; the Joint Committee of the Senate and House of Representa- tives, appointed to represent Congress ; the Diplomatic Corps; the As- sociate Justices of the Supreme Court of the United States; Judges of United States Courts; Claims Commissions; Judges of the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia; Senators and Members of the House of Representatives; Commissioners of the District of Columbia; the General and Officers of the Army ; the Admiral and Officers of the Navy; Ex-Members of the Cabinet and Ex-Ministers of the United States; Na- tional Academy of Sciences; Founders of the Henry trust fund for Science; the Commissioner of Agriculture; the Assistant Secretaries of *The President was absent from the city at the time. xX * REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. Departments; Solicitor-General and Assistant Attorneys-General; the United States Marshal and Officers of courts; the Light-House Board ; the Heads of Bureaus; the Superintendent of the Coast Survey, the Superintendent of the Naval Observatory, the Superintendent of the Nautical Almanac, the Director of the Geological Survey, the Li- brarian of Congress; the Commissioner of Public Buildings, the Archi- tect of the Capitol, the Superintendent of the Government Printing Office, the Superintendent of the Botanical Gardens, the Visitors of the Government Hospital for the Insane; officers of the Senate and House of Representatives; Trustees of the Corcoran Gallery of Art; the Washington Monument Society ; officers and employés of the Smithso- nian Institution, Bureau of Ethnology, National Museum, and United States Fish Commission; Alumni of the College of New Jersey; mem- bers of scientific organizations, &c. While this procession was moving from the hall in the Museum build- ing to the platform at the statue, the Marine Band, furnished through the courtesy of Hon. William E. Chandler, Secretary of the Navy, and of Colonel McCawley, Commandant of the Marine Corps, played a grand march, ‘Transit of Venus,” composed by J. P. Sousa, the leader of the band. The following was the order of exercises : I. Musitc—Marine Band (J. P. Sousa, conductor), ‘‘The Hallelujah Chorus” (Messiah), Handel. II. PRayER—Rev. A. A. HopGE, D. D., of Princeton, N. J. III. AppREss—Chief Justice WAITE, Chancellor of the Institution. IV. UNVEILING THE STATUE. VY. Music (Philharmonic Society and full Marine Band, R. C. Bernays, con- ductor)—Grand chorus, ‘‘The Heavens are Telling” (Creation), Haydn. VI. OraTioN—Rev. Dr. Noau PORTER, President of Yale College. VII. Music (J. P. Sousa, conductor)—Grand March Triumphale, ‘ Schiller,” Meyerbeer. The Philharmonic Society was assisted by members of the Washing- ton Operatic Association, the Rossini and Church Choir Choral Socie- ties, the Washington Sangerbund and Germania Mannerchor. The arrangements for the music were made by a Committee of the Philhar- monic Society, of which Prof. F. Widdows was chairman. The Chief of Police furnished a detail for the grounds; Mr. Edward Clark, Archi- tect of the Capitol, supplied music stands and stools for the Marine Band; the Quartermaster’s Department lent flags, and the Department of Agriculture living plants for decorating the platform. Mr. W. R. Smith, Superintendent of the Botanic Gardens, also furnished floral decorations. Tbe platform was constructed under the superintendence of Mr. C. W. Schuerman and Mr. G. W. Field, and the mechanical arrangements for unveiling the statue were devised by Mr. Joseph Palmer. At the REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXI moment of unveiling the statue the news was telegraphed from an in- strument on the platform, which had been placed there by Mr. L. Whit- ney, the Superintendent of the Western Union Telegraph Company. The ushers on the platform were Messrs. W. C. Lewis, Harry C. Shus- ter, Henry D. Finckel, William T. Wyman, Edward C. Bryan, Frank Bryan, William B. Stimpson, and Ellis Lammond; Mr. Henry Horan, Superintendent of the National Museum, having general charge of the accommodations of the public. Res»vectfully submitted. PETER PARKER, W. T. SHERMAN, Executive Committee. WASHINGTON, December 15, 1883. XXII REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. PRAYER BY REV. DR. HBopmaeam Eternal and almighty God, Creator, Preserver, and Governor of the world, we have gathered here to adore Thy holy name, to implore Thy divine protection, and to invoke Thy blessing. We bless Thee that, having brought the physical universe to its pres- ent perfection and made it the vehicle of reflecting and expressing Thy transcendent perfections, Thou hast made man in Thine own likeness and endowed him with intelligence, capable of discerning and of inter- preting the intellectual basis of all phenomena, the personal element in alllaw. We bless Thee that Thou hast never left Thyself without a witness even in the darkest period of human history; that wherever men have sought the Lord, however feebly, if haply they might feel after Him and find Him, He has been found always to be not far from any one of us, seeing that He is imminent in all existence and in all life, and that in Him we live and move and have our being. We bless Thee that Thou hast sent through the ages a long line of inspired prophets and teachers, crowned by the incarnation in human flesh of Thy co-equal Son, to reveal in ever-increasing fullness the nature of Thy moral government, the method of Thy redemption, and the glory of Thy kingdom; so Thou hast in these later days sent into the physical. universe many intelligent and earnest students, who, in various depart- ments, are investigating the secrets of nature, and interpreting the methods of Thy sublime working throughout the vast areas of time and space. We bless Thee that Thou art gathering to Thyself so vast and rich and constant a revenue of glory through the loving ministry of science in all her various provinces. We thank Thee that so many of her princes have been loyal to Thy service and have rejoiced to make all men to realize the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and of the knowledge of God. Especially we thank Thee for the spotless example of Thy servant, whose illustrious career is to be commemorated throughout all time by the monument we are now unveiling. We bless Thee that he was as humble and simple in his Christian faith as he was great in his intel- lectual achievements or pre-eminent in his world-wide fame. We pray Thee that his memory as a Christian philosopher may be preserved in imperishable freshness and force through succeeding generations, that his influence for good may be ever extended, and that his example may REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXIII be followed as his serene fame excites the emulation of multitudes of the interpreters of nature and of the teachers and benefactors of man- kind. And now, in anticipation of the general judgment, when in the res- urrection the perfected Church shall enter the new heavens and the new earth of the perfected physical universe, we ascribe unto Thee, at once the Lord of nature and of grace, blessing and glory, and wisdom, and thanksgiving, and honor, and power, and might, unto our God that sit- teth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb, for ever andever. Amen. ADDRESS OF Cr bY SUS hie By NW ACE EH. On the 1st of June, 1880, at the instance of Mr. Morrill, of Vermont, in the Senate, and of Mr. Clymer, of Pennsylvania, in the House of Repre- sentatives, Congress authorized the Regents of the Smithsonian Institu- tion to contract with Mr. W. W. Story “for a statue, in bronze, of Joseph Henry, late Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, to be erected on the grounds of the Institution”; and the Regents, availing themselves of the presence in Washington of the members of the National Academy of Sciences, with which Professor Henry was so prominently and so hon- orably connected for many years, have asked you here to-day to witness the presentation to the public of the result of what has been done under this authority. On the 10th of August, 1846, Congress established the Smithsonian Institution, to take the property which had been given to the United States by the will of James Smithson, of England, to found an estab- lishment of that name “for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men.” The business of the Institution was to be managed by a Board of Re- gents, and they were required to elect some suitable person as Secretary of the Institution. On the 3d of December, 1846, the Board met to per- form that duty, and before entering on the election adopted the follow- ing resolution : “ Resolved, That it is essential for the advancement of the proper in- terests of the trust that the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution be a man possessing weight of character and a high grade of talent; and that it is further desirable that he possess eminent scientific and general acquirements; that he be a man capable of advancing science and promoting letters by original research and effort, well qualified to XXIV REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. act as a respected channel of communication between the Institution and scientific and literary individuals and societies in this and foreign countries; and, in a word, a man worthy to represent before the world of science and letters the Institution over which this Board presides.” Immediately after the adoption of this resolution the Board proceeded to the election, and the first ballot resulted in the choice of Professor Henry, then occupying the chair of natural philosophy in Princeton College. Experience has shown that the world possessed no better man for such a place. He was all the resolution required, and more; and from the day of his election until now, the wish has never been ex- pressed that another had been chosen in his stead. He accepted the appointment on the 7th of December, and on the next day, the 8th, finished and sent to the Regents an elaborate paper ~ giving his views of the will of Smithson, and presenting a plan for the organization of the Institution. He entered on the performance of his duties on the 21st of December, and from that day until his death. on the 13th of May, 1878, almost one-third of a century, he was engaged in making the Smithsonian Institution what its munificent founder de- sired it to be—an active and efficient instrument for the increase and diffusion of knowledge. The statue which will now be unveiled has been erected by the United States as a token of gratitude for the labors of his useful life, and for his faithful administration of the important public trust so long in his keeping. ORATION BY PR SED NE IN _OLACEL, PP) @ Bt Wy x0-E.. Weare assembled to complete the long series of public honors to the late Joseph Henry by unveiling the statue which has been erected to his memory. These honors have been manifold, but each one of them has been well deserved and most cordially bestowed. His funeral obsequies were attended by the President of the United States and other officials of the Government which he had so faithfully served, by representatives from the many learned and scientific socie- ties of which he had been a conspicuous member and ornament, and by a large following of those who honored and mourned him as a friend. Subsequently a more formal commemoration of his scientific and pub- lic services was held at the Capitol, at which were present the Execu- tive of the nation, the Judiciary, the Senate, and the House of Repre- sentatives. On this occasion a discriminating and sympathizing sketch of his personal and public life was given by one who had known him long and was singularly qualified to do him justice in every particular. This was followed by other warm and eloquent tributes to his genius as a philosopher and his excellence as a man. Memorable among these were the ringing words of the noble Rogers, whose own sudden euthanasia was like the translation of a prophet; and the warm- hearted eulogy of the generous and glowing Garfield, whose noble life was slowly wasted that it might measure the intensity of the nation’s grief. Many, if not all, of the institutions of the country with which Pro- fessor Henry had a more or less intimate connection have also honored him by records and estimates of his services to science, education, and philosophy. The tributes to his honor from other countries -have also been cordial and numerous. . Last of all, the two Houses of Congress, with the approval of the President, have ordered that a statue in bronze should be erected within the grounds of the Institution, which was the creation of his genius and industry, as a permanent memorial of his services and his worth. This statue is now completed, and has this moment been unveiled to public view. Weare here to receive the first impressions of this endur- ing monument. which we trust will stand for many generations, to declare XXV XXVI REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. the fame and attest the manifold excellences of this eminent servant of science and benefactor of the American people. The proprieties of the occasion forbid that I should recite the events of Professor Henry’s life or attempt a critical judgment of his services or his merits as a philosopher. To do either were superfluous, in view of the accuracy and fullness with which both have been done by others. All that I shall aim to do is to give a Summary expression to that esti- mate of the man and his work which I am confident other generations will accept, and which this statue is designed to suggest and perpetuate. It is pleasant for us to notice that Professor Henry was born on the eve of this century,eso memorable for the development of the sciences of nature and their splendid applications to art; that just as this new era was opening, the wonders of the physical universe were begin- ning to be explored by the wondering eyes of our infant philosopher. They were wondering eyes indeed, wakeful, sensitive, and responsive from the first. It is a mistake to suppose, because Professor Henry’s external circumstances were unfavorable to the early discipline of books and the school, that his mind was ever crass and inactive. His own testimony and that of his friends is positive that from the first he was a sensitive and dreamy boy, who found enough in the common earth and air, and the play of common scenes to stimulate his creative powers and to furnish material for his long day dreams, :as he lay on the sunny hillside and looked up into. the glowing sky. Against the animalism and sensuality which are incident to an aimless youth he was defended by the stern moralities and the wholesome religion of his domestic training, enforced as these were by the economies of a straitened but not ignoble household. Indeed, the household was far removed from either. Were we curious in these matters we should find that he was born of gentle blood, being of Celtic stock on the mother’s side, running back through many generations to a noble house, and preserving its coat of arms and motto, ‘‘ I fear no one, I despise no one,” which this noble descendant never dishonored. His mother was beautiful and refined and full of spirit, who had a home in Albany, and but little else, when her husband died, the son being then seven years of age. Before this event he had been removed to the country, the mother’s original home, the family retaining their house in Albany as their principal reliance. In this village young Henry was the pet for several years, handsome, frolicsome, and venturesome on the one hand, and dreamy, wondering, and self-reliant on the other, rejoicing in adventure rather than in books, till a romance suddenly falling in his way kindled his imagination, and unveiled human life as pictured by the fancy with prismatic hues—awakening thus a brief passion for fiction and the drama. The transition to the acted drama was natural to his inventive and energetic nature, and for a time he delighted to attend dramatic representations when at Albany for longer or shorter periods, and to reproduce them at home, as his changing life led him — ee oe eR * REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXVII from one occupation to another. If we connect these well-known facts with what he himself has written of the elements and order of educa- tion, we conclude that his early musings and questionings, his boyish sports and adventures, were fondly remembered by him as the inspira- tion of his rational and scientific life. ‘The cultivation of the imagi- nation,” he writes, “‘ should be considered an essential part of a liberal education, and this may be spread over the whole course of instruction, for, like the reasoning faculties, the imagination may continue to im- prove until late in life.” ‘Memory, imitation, imagination, and the faculty of forming mental habits exist in early life, while the judgment and reasoning faculties are of slow growth.” ‘The order of nature is that of art before science, the entire concrete first and the entire ab- stract last.” These are wise and weighty words, but they are of special interest when we bethink ourselves that the writer, when he penned them, was doubtless al] the while thinking of a dreaming boy, half buried in the grass, looking up wistfully into the sky, thinking won- drous thoughts too deep for tears, perhaps peopling with phantoms and fairies that world of nature which he subsequently penetrated by those wise questionings and ingenious theories which his sagacious experi- ments turned into solid verities. He certainly could have been think- ing of no one else when in the same connection he so positively affirms, “The future character of a child, and that of a man also, is in most cases formed probably before the age of seven years.” From these musings he was awakened in his later boyhood suddenly and abruptly, as by a call from nature herself. During a week of indis- position, perhaps of serious reflection over an aimless and possibly a tempted life, he was suddenly aroused by the consciousness that the common phenomena of nature are the products of forces acting under laws, and that it is possible for man to interpret these mysteries. It was a simple sentence or two from a common-place though useful book, but the thought in that sentence kindled a fire in the mind prepared for a flame which was never extinguished. This thought held his attention; it took possession of his memory; it quickened the imagination already glowing with romances of another sort; it decided his life. These words had been read and recited by thousands of boys before, but to this boy they were spirit and life. They became a fire in his bones, and proved the intellectual energy which had been slumbering within, by the force of the reaction which they aroused. So definite was the impression which they made, and so fervent and serious the resolve which they called into life, that he promptly summoned his companions, that he might solemnly announce to them his purpose henceforth to dedicate himself to a priesthood of love and service at the altar of science. To prepare for this service was no holiday work. His novitiate involved labor and self-denial. He must earn the means which would buy not only books and leisure and tuition, but also food and clothing. How these difficulties were surmounted it is needless to recite. The story is more or less familiar to you all. XXVIII REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. It is important to notice that this work of preparation was neither ‘hasty nor superficial. He did not rush with reckless impetuosity within the temple, nor leap with a bound to the footsteps of the altar. He mastered the geometry, without which Plato admitted no man even to the vestibule of science. He became familiar with the Calculus, as the magic spell by which to interpret her inner mysteries. Experiments with that wondrous chemistry which was then at its most brilliant stage of promise and performance fascinated and quickened his imagination and his intellect. Each forward step was taken in orderly succession, though each single step was the stride of a giant. At the age of twenty-eight we find him a professor in the Albany Academy, of which he had been a graduate, charged with the work of teaching several hours every day, and tasking himself with burning zeal over every possible inquiry in chemistry and physics. As we have said already, it was in the brilliant dawn of modern chemistry. As this new science steadily rose above the horizon, one new discovery after another flashed its light toward the zenith and indicated its up- ward path of triumph. In its train appeared those new and mysterious agencies which were then just beginning to fix the attention and to task the analysis of the oldest and the newest discoverer. To these novel phenomena the young Professor Henry devoted his special attention, and soon astonished the world by achievements which first awakened the excitement of bewildered wonder, to convert it into the homage of amazed conviction. There was nothing to be said when, as the plunger went down into its bath, the impotent bar of iron became possessed of a giant’s strength, and could pick up and hold a weight of more than a solid ton, and as the same plunger was lifted this gigantic energy van- ished as at the word of an enchanter. The speaker well remembers the excitement which this discovery occasioned when the first experiment was tried at Yale college, in presence of a few spectators who casually met at the call of Professor Silliman, who was glowing with animation and delight. The ponderous platform was loaded with pig-iron and other heavy weights, with a few slight additions of living freight. Among the last was the speaker, being the lightest .of all, and therefore con- venient to serve on the sliding scale. It is more than fifty years ago, but the scene is as vivid as the events of yesterday. The question went around, ‘Who is Professor Henry, and how did it happen that nature revealed to him one of her choicest secrets?” Thoughtful men asked, ‘What is this wondrous Protean force which he was the first to follow in its sinuous hiding places and evoke by a magician’s wand; and what are its relations to its kindred agents, and, above all, to the mat- ter about us, which we can measure and weigh and see and handle?” Others asked the still more important question, ‘‘How came the dis- coverer to surmise its mysterious capacities and to penetrate to the laws of its action?” To some it seemed but a successful guess by a daring adventurer, a happy hit by a rude fumbler among nature’s tools, —$—__ REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXIX a lucky accident, like the drawing of a prize in a lottery. It was not so with those who retraced the successive steps of close observation, of sagacious interpretation, of boundless invention, of ingenious construc- tion, of patient trial, of loving sympathy, which preceded this single achievement, and all of which combined lifted at once this youth, hith- erto unknown, into the rank of the most eminent discoverers, brilliant as was their company then and since. This achievement was not soli- tary. It was quickly followed by others almost as fruitful as the parent discovery. Conspicuous among these were the possible and certain application of the electro-magnetic power to distant communication, by the alternate lifting and dropping of the armature, moving as a lever, when conjoined with the indefinite linear extension and multiplied intensification of the subtile and enormous agency. Herein was dis- covered the scientific secret and the assured prophecy of telegraph and) telephone, with their wonders of written language and audible speech. From Albany, in the year 1832, Professor Henry was transferred to Princeton, through the wise sagacity of our honored associate, Rev. President John Maclean, and the generous and cordial recommendations of some of the most honored leaders of American science. The step was a bold one, and might seem almost rash, to transfer to a college a man who had himself lacked the breadth of early culture and the discipline and acquisitions of scientific thought which the college curriculum is sup- posed to give. His insight into nature’s secrets might seem to be mag- ical; but for this very reason could he share these secrets with his pupils? Would not the very swiftness of his own processes of thought disqual- ify him from imparting them to others? Would not the lightning rapidity with which, as a discoverer, he had leaped from indication to theory, and combined probabilities into evidence, hinder him from dis- cerning that there were any steps in the process or any articulation in the proofs? Whatever misgivings of this sort there might have been— and the failures of many eminent scientists have proved that they were not without reason—were all set aside by his acknowledged skill as an instructor at Albany and his pre-eminent success at Princeton. Not only did he give himself to instruction with exemplary zeal and pains- taking, but he studied the theory of teaching as he studied electro- magnetism, by reflecting upon its conditions and laws, and using wise experiments in concrete applications. He did more. He used his special studies as examples of general philosophical inquiry, whatever might be the subject-matter, and sought by means of these to introduce his pupils to the theory of inductive research and the nature of scien- tific evidence, however these should be applied. This was a subject which he had ever at heart—the discipline of the mind to a true philo- sophic method, as the best preparation and security for sound science, clear insight, strong convictions, and practical wisdom. But he was none the less but rather the more active and enterprising in his favor- ite studies, a living and inspiring example of scientific ardor, of wake- Xxx REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. ful enterprise, and unceasing experimentation. It would seem as though every thunder storm brought him a new opportunity; every gale of wind swept into his mind some new freightage of thought; every apartment proposed or solved some problem in acoustics; every - morning dawn waked him for some fresh experiment, and every even- ing shut down the day with some new acquisition. His very house was made an enormous electric accumulator and conductor of electric energy. In all these varied avocations it was not in that he was busy or many-sided that his marked superiority was seen, but in that he was original, wide-minded, and persevering. His insight seemed to pene- trate at a glance into the secrets of nature, and his capacity for saga- cious hypothesis almost to call into being the forces which it uncovered and to impose the laws which it interpreted. Besides this there was a largeness and originality in his experiments which invested him with the authority of priest and magician in the presence of nature. In all combined there was the strength and simplicity of scientific genius. This active and fruitful life continued for fourteen years, when, at the age of forty-eight, in the year 1846, he was called to Washington as the first Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. At first it might seem that a situation like this would be attractive to any man, but on second thought many reasons would suggest themselves why, to a man like Professor Henry, interested as he was in teaching, devoted to research, and with the scientific world watching eagerly his experiments, the attractions of the place should be scanty and feeble. It is only when we learn how he regarded the possibilities and demands of the place, and his own capacity and purpose to meet them, that we can explain the readiness with which he responded to this call. The Secretary was to initiate and control the policy of a novel institution, with a handsome but not extravagant endowment given to the United States, for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men. Loosely interpreted, the terms of the gift might admit any application of pop- ular usefulness. But when read in the light of the known tastes of the giver and the previous bequest of his estate to a society which was se- _ verely scientific in its functions, and especially when interpreted by the eminent need and certain usefulness of a special application, it became clear to Professor Henry that this gift should be used exclusively in the interests of the increase and diffusion of scientific knowledge. He fore- saw and foretold that his theory would at first encounter active dissent and opposition. He was equally confident that it would finally become popular and attractive. Before he entered upon his duties the Jnstitu- tion had been partially committed to another policy. It was not till after eight years of discussion and reports in committees and in both houses of Congress, in which some of the ablest and most brilliant mem- bers were conspicuous, that the policy of Professor Henry at last pre- vailed, and has ever since justified itself to the approval of the nation. It was not because Professor Henry despised literature that he did not REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXXI favor the attempt to found a splendid library, for few men were more sensitive to its charms or appreciative of its power. Much less that he did not understand the value of a museum to an ardent interest in which he was pledged by his fondness for natural history and his curious zeal in ethnology and archeology, but because he saw a need and opportu- nity for an institution that should be limited to the increase and diffu- sion of scientific knowledge. Finis coronat opus. The experiment has justified the theory. Not only have the workings of the Smithsonian Institution vindicated the wisdom of his anticipations, but it is itself a monument to his strong convictions and unyielding tenacity, tempered as these were by singular simplicity, patience, and unselfishness. Had it not been for these characteristics the Smithsonian Institution as we know it would never have existed at all. Were it not for the modesty of the man we could hear this statue speak as it surveys the scene of his life-work, Si monumentum queeris, cireumspice. More than this should be said. Every one of the great interests which were at first loaded upon the Institution, as the National Library, the Museum, and a collec- tion of Art, has in the end been better provided for and attained a more vigorous growth or a more hopeful promise than had Professor Henry’s policy failed. Had he relaxed from his tenacity, or had a man of less commanding influence represented his opinions, these separate interests might have foundered with the central bureau, or had the Smithsonian Institution survived, it might have been what it seems to many a casual visitor—merely a show place to stimulate and gratify an aimless curi- osity, or in which to pass an idle hour of gazing and wonder—instead of being what it is, a busy working place, where research is devised, di- rected, stimulated, and rewarded, at which its results are reported and thence diffused through the countless nerve centers which animate and build the complicated organism'which maintains the scientific life of the civilized world. In this organism this Institution holds a place and performs a function which has no exact counterpart. It is a function which is specially needed in a young and growing country like our own, so vast in its spaces, so comprehensive in its geology, so varied in its climate, so ample in its physical resources, so fascinating in its archer- ology, 80 mysterious in its ethnology, so instructive in its history—all the parts of which are connected by political bonds with its capital, and respond with a more or less ready sympathy to the pulses of life which throb at the Nation’s heart. It was no slight service which Pro- fessor Henry rendered to his country as well as to the world when he gave character and efficiency to this new agency in the life of both. To mature and carry into effect the conceptionof such an institution, with no model after which to copy, wasthe work of a master mind and was worthy of a devoted and laborious life. That Professor Henry gave to this work the best activities of more than thirty years no man will doubt; that he was unwearied in his labors and cares, faithful to the minutest details and energetic in administration, isconfessed by all XXXII REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. men. His official correspondence would have been burdensome had it been merely a correspondence of routine, but much of it involved pro- found reflection, productive invention, and the skillful enforcement of principles. Into all these services he entered with a spirit which was conscientious and patient in the extreme. It would not have been surprising if his scientific ardor had thereby been cooled, his invention had been limited, and his many-sidedness had been curtailed. This does not seem to have been true. From the beginning to the end of these more than thirty years he was almost as inventive, ingenious, alert, and wide-minded as when he achieved the triumphs of his earliest manhood. Though many of his discoveries and inventions were in the line of his official responsibilities, they all bore the stamp of scientific genius. During all this period, it should be re- membered, the sciences of nature were making a progress such as the world had never witnessed before—progress in every form, from the. severest mathematical analysis, through the ever ascending steps of ad- venturous speculation, up to the most gorgeous cloud-lands of theory. Experiment, too, had never made such daring ventures, whether in the form of applications to art or the determination of problems purely scientific. With every one of these onward movements, whether of theory or experiment, Professor Henry was in active sympathy. In many of the most important he was the leader of thought and act, as witness his place in the very earliest anticipations of the doctrine of the correlation of force; his prophetic experiments and suggestions in re- spect to the use of the telegraph in meteorological observations and the reports of astronomical discovery; his devices to render available the’ reports and essays scattered over the scientific world by a systematized bibliography; his long-continued researches in respect to light and sound which were incidental to his official experiments as a member of the Light-House Board; his comprehensive experiments inrespect to the sustaining capacity of building stone; and his never-ceasing study of acoustics in every possible production, prolongation, and disturbance of sound, whether in his own parlor, in solitary walks, in fog or sun- shine, or in travel by land or sea. It was, as I have said, a great thing for science and for the country, that in this formative and fermenting period such a man resided at the capital and represented the interests of science by his official connec- tion with this one nationad institution which was sacredly devoted to scientific research and information. He had foreseen and foretold from the first that Washington would certainly become a great center of sci- entific activity; that it must inevitably be the residence and resort of an increasing number of men of scientific tastes and pursuits. He had tais in mind from the first, and uttered it as a prophecy, before his own policy in respect to the Smithsonian Institution had been accepted, and long before the signs had multiplied of its speedy fulfillment. This fulfillment was indeed conditional on the continuance of the Re aie i ein ee REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXXII nation’s integrity and the perpetuation of its united life. There were times when this seemed doubtful, when from the Capitol itself, and even from this Institution below it, there might almost be descried the threat- ening lines and fortifications of those who would not scruple to sacrifice both to the impetuous necessity of what was called lawful war. During these years of agitating strife it was but the dictate of a well-poised self-command which kept Professor Henry quietly at his work, with no doubtful loyalty indeed, but in such singleness of aim, that when peace was conquered it found né personal bitterness towards himself in the ranks of scientific men. To his philosophic wisdom and his unques- tioned integrity it may, in part, be owing that, after the centennial anniversary of 1876, the nation was so ready to enlarge the appliances of science and at the same time to commemorate its own continued life by erecting upon these grounds, under the care of the Smithsonian Institution, the splendid National Museum, which all delight to visit and to praise. The fact cannot be disguised that the devotees of science have aliena- tions and strifes of their own, sometimes arising from personal jeal- ousies and more frequently from opposing theories. Professor Henry was lifted above all personal partisanship by the severe singleness with which he devoted himself to his scientific and official activities. He never sought for place or honor, directly or indirectly. He was fasti- diously sensitive in respect to the appropriation of bis own inventions by the production of a patent or a claim for extra compensation. His salary was notoriously smaller than he might have earned in other posts, but he never either desertéd his post, or asked for increase of pay. In- deed the last was declined more than once when suggested by his friends. It was only when his truthfulness was questioned in respect to one of the most important of his discoveries, that he vindicated his claims te scientific confidence. Whoever might be jealous of his fellow scientists, no one could question Henry’s even-handed justice or his personal up- rightness. In the wars of theory against theory he was recognized as an upright mediator, who thoroughly understood the criteria by which scientifie truth can be established and would impartially apply them. If political or ethical or theological traditions seemed to conflict with established scientific principles or facts, he calmly awaited the issue and insisted that science must have its rights whatever might be the consequences to any received ethical or theological interpretations. Though his own faith was fixed and fervent in respect to the leading Christian verities, he scorned with all the energy of scientific integrity to apply these con- victions as a test to any question that was properly scientific. It would have been strange if a man who was always learning something new had not modified his views of objective and practical Christian trath with the progress of his mind and his manhood, but he would never acknowledge any base compromise of sentimentalism or mysticism or H. Mis, 69——111 XXXIV REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. one-eyed dogmatism with the processes or conclusions of his scientific thinking. Within the domain of Science proper he was a clear-eyed, impersonal, and uncompromising arbiter and judge. Theorists might complain, dogmatists might rage, zealots might bemoan, but not one of them would dare accuse the judge of an ignorant or partisan decision. The multitude of fancied inventors, discoverers, and projectors who vame to him for help and encouragement, the crowd of scientific dreamers who craved a favorable decision or official help or patronage, the scores and hundreds whom he was forced to reject And disappoint often of the hopes and dreams of their lives, these all felt that however mistaken he might be, he was upright and kind so far as he knew. They were always patiently listened to and gently dismissed, though they did not always heed his benediction to go in peace. For all these high and varied functions, in his high position, Professor Henry had one supreme advantage, in that he had not only studied and mastered so many of the sciences of nature, but that he made science itself in its principles and processes the subject of his profoundest reflec- tion. We have abundant evidence that from the time when he made his earliest discoveries his mind was not content to search after the secrets of nature without, but was equally curious to discover the secret of the processes by which man interprets the forces and laws which nature hides with such studious reserve. From the time when he began at Albany till the end of his life this was prominently and avowedly the theme of his constant meditation. In making this a study he was not singular among eminent scientists, but only in that from the beginning to the end this seemed to haunt him as the most wonderful problem of all. This habit forced him to contemplate all the sciences of nature as an organic whole, having intimate relations that are broader and deeper than those which are limited to any single class of phenomena, It forced him to study and question most closely the process of knowledge, the sublimest and most fundamental phenomenon in nature, that he might know how far to trust its products and by what criteria to test its conclusions. We find evidence of this habit of mind in the questions which he suggests in his earlier essays and in the partial solutions which he gives in his miscellaneous writings. Such a habit would insensibly train him to exalt the human intellect in its higher functions, with its principles and laws, its axioms and intuitions, its theories and anticipations, its forecasting questionings, its creative hypotheses, its tentative theories, and its decisive experiments, and to assure himself that an agent or agency such as this could have no affinity with matter and own no allegiance to physical laws. Even in the suggestion that the thinking agency which interprets the universe by authoritative question and answer, could once have slumbered in a fiery cloud or could have been evolved from any material mind-stuff, by any series of physical processes, however daintily phrased, seems never to have been enter- tained by him for an instant as having the semblanée of scientific prob- Ss lc lg, el REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXXV ability. And yet there is abundant evidence from his writings, both early and late, that he was in no sense behind the times or ignorant of the fascinating plausibilities of the-newest and the most fantastic of theories. While he was almost the earliest in the field to formulate and defend the doctrine of the correlation of force and to concede that it may be applied to all the processes that are properly physiological, he was equally sharp and positive in the assertion that the mental agencies of every kind cannot be the correlate of any physical or biological agency. He insisted with equal positiveness that the so-called vital force cannot be the product of any mechanical or chemical activity, single or in com- bination, |'ut must be a directive and constructive agent of itself. Later in life he recognized the manifold indications of the presence of a law of progressive variation in the history of animal and vegetable life, and so far accepted evolution as a working hypothesis. But had he been asked at any time whether evolution as a force or evolution as a law, one or both, apart or together, could explain the origin of life and of living men, of intellect and will and the capacity for science and faith in science, I think he would have regarded the question somewhat as though he had been asked whether he believed in the vortices of Des- cartes or in Kepler’s directing angels. Had this doctrine been defended in a scientific association, either in the soaring gyrations of winged speech or the dry assertions of dogmatic positiveness, I am confident he would have remanded its champions at once to the blackboard, and have begged them first to explain whether evolution wvre an agent, a force, or a law, and then desired them to identify it if it were an agent, to define it if it were a force, or to formulate it if it were a law. Large as was the sphere which he assigned to the imagination, and important as the role which he allowed to hypotheses, he would bring every theory, however brilliant and plausible, to the triple test of co- herence, sufficiency, and experiment. Forward and hopeful as he had been all his life long to follow the ‘fruitful suggestions of analogy, he never would allow this winged steed to cross the chasms of scientific theory with any flying leaps, without insisting that it should first fold and pack its pinions, and then carefully retrace its steps along that hard pathway of fact and law which alone can carry us safely from a scientific hypothesis to a scientific truth. The science of America owes somewhat to his example and authority in this regard, that its brilliant promises aud solid achievements have _ been so far kept free from the speculative audacities and the physio- logical cosmogonies from which the science of England and Germany: has not been wholly exempt. This, be it observed, was his position within the domains of pure science. For the region beyond, whether it is called the domain of philosophy or the domain of faith, let it suffice to say that he had too positive a respect éor his own mind to doubt for an instant that this intel- lect was the reflex df that supreme intellect which sustains and controls XXXVI REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. the universe which the scientist interprets. The existence of a per- sonal God was accepted by him as a well nigh self-evident truth which is as necessary to our confidence in scientific study as to our hopes for man’s social and moral well being. The moral and spiritual capacities and destiny of man were regarded by him as dominant facts and chief ends in the universe made up of matter and spirit, facts and ends so important and so pressing as to create the need and establish the truth of the Christian’s faith and hope. He believed moreover in no inherent law of progress in human nature or human society as such. On the contrary he asserted often that our supreme hope of such progress, even in scientific culture and achievement, must rest on moral integrity and eulture.as the supreme conditions. In his closing address to the Na- tional Academy he urged ‘* that moral integrity is essential to conscien- tious fidelity in scientific research,” and added, ‘Indeed, I think that immorality and great mental power exercised in the discovery of scien- tifie truths are incompatible with each other; and that more error is introduced from defect in moral sense than from want of intellectual eapacity.” Tothe Philosophical Society of Washington he had designed to give, as probably his last forma] communication, an address upon the relations of science and religion, and also upon the true import of prayer. This he was not permitted to do, but those who knew him best knew most fully that in prayer he found constant delight and strength. Almost the last lines which he penned contain a positive and tender yet ra- tional confession of his Christian faith. Almost the last words which he uttered were with tearful eyes and from q uivering lips, “Upon Jesus Christ as the one who, for God, affiliates himself with man—upon Him T rest my faith and my hope.” Such a man was Joseph Henry. With eminent truth may we say of him, as Wordsworth wrote of Milton: Thy soul was like a star, and dwelt apart; Thou hadst a voice whose sound was like the sea, Pure as the naked heavens, majestic, free; So didst thou travel on life’s common way, In cheerful godliness; and yet thy heart The lowliest duties on itself did lay. For more than fifty years, the most memorable and critical which the sciences of nature have ever seen, he has been indeed a guiding star to their devotees in all this land, ever shining with a serene yet command- ing light. During the critical years of its young and buoyant life, American science has found much of the guidance and inspiration which it needed in his childlike yet kingly spirit. And now as it rejoices in the security of its position and its ever-increasing honors, it is most fit- ting that its assembled representatives should here gratefully acknowl- edge their obligations to their eminent benefactor and distinguished leader, and cordially welcome this statue, which by its gmmanding pro- portions gives new dignity to the ground so long honored by his pres- ence and associated with his name. Long may it stand to express to tt er Oe te REPORT ON THE HENRY STATUE. XXXVII them and to other generations the sturdy self-confidence, the keen in- sight, the benignant spirit, the soaring yet docile genius, the self-rely- ing yet devout temper which made JOSEPH HENRY a leader and com mander in their conquering hosts. And as here by day and by night, in sunshine and in storm, our honored friend shall ever as in his life- time keep watch and guard over the scene of his cares and iabors, of his conflicts and triumphs, so may his memory be kept in fresh and grateful recollection by the coming generations. And as this Institu tion, so eminently the creation of his mind, shall become more and more busy in its activities and more and more conspicuous in its usefulness and its fame, may the spirit of its eminent originator continue to inspire its aims and direct its counsels—to the strength and glory of this nation and the well-being of man. To the well-being of man. For let us never forget that science knows no nationality, least of all in this place and in this Institution, which was the gift from the mother to the daughter land, whose sacred trust and solemn duty has ever been, as it ever should be, to promote “ the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men.” THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. MEMBERS EX OFFICIO OF THE ‘‘ ESTABLISHMENT.” (January 1, 1884.) CHESTER A. ARTHUR, President of the United States. GEORGE F. EDMUNDS, President pro tempore of the United States Senate. MORRISON R. WAITE, Chief Justice of the United States. FREDERICK T. FRELINGHUYSEN, Secretary of State. CHARLES J. FOLGER, Secretary of the Treasury. ROBERT T. LINCOLN, Secretary of War. WILLIAM E. CHANDLER, Secretary of the Navy. W. Q. GRESHAM, Postmaster-General. HENRY M. TELLER, Secretary of the Interior. BENJAMIN H. BREWSTER, Attorney-General: B. BUTTERWORTH, Commissioner of Patents. REGENTS OF THE INSTITUTION. (January, 1884.) MORRISON R, WAITE, Chief Justice of the United States, President of the Board. GEORGE F. EDMUNDS, President pro tempore of the United States Senate. NATHANIEL P. HILL, member of the Senate of the United States. SAMUEL B. MAXEY, member of the Senate of the United States. J. 8. MORRILL, member of the Senate of the United States. O. R. SINGLETON, member of the House of Representatives. W. L. WILSON, member of the House of Representatives. W. W. PHELPS, member of te House of Representatives. JOHN MACLEAN, citizen of New Jersey. PETER PARKER, citizen of Washington, D.C. ASA GRAY, citizen of Massachusetts. HENRY COPPEB, citizen of Pennsylvania. WILLIAM T. SHERMAN, citizen of Washington, D.C. NOAH PORTER, citizen of Connecticut. Executive Committee of the Board of Regents. PETER PARKER. JOHN MACLEAN. WILLIAM T. SHERMAN. OFFICERS OF THE INSTITUTION. (January 1, 1884.) “SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary, Director of the Institution. WILLIAM J. RHEES, Chief Clerk. DANIEL LEECH, Corresponding Clerk. | var Fr as i ; j 4 REPORT OF PROFESSOR BAIRD, SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, FOR 1883. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution: GENTLEMEN: I have the honor to present herewith the annual report of the operations and condition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year 1883. This, in accordance with the usual custom, will include an account of the work performed by the Smithsonian Institution proper, and also that by the branches of the public service placed by Congress under its charge, namely, the National Museum and the Bureau of Ethnology. To this will be added a sketch of the work of the United States Fish Commission, which is also under my charge. THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. INTRODUCTORY. The principal points of interest to be considered in more or less detail, apart from an account of the regular routine work, are the arrival and inauguration of the memorial statue of Professor Henry, the recon- struction in a fire-proof manner of the eastern end of the Smithsonian building, and the use, under the authority of the Regents, of the halls of the National Museum by the National Academy of Sciences and the American Pharmaceutical Association. The general progress of the Institution and its dependencies has been very satisfactory. The funds are in good condition, those of the year being sufficient to meet all its liabilities. The publications of the In- stitution and of the National Museum have been much larger than usual, and constitute an important contribution to theoretical and prac- tical science. The labors of the Bureau of International Exchanges have been more extensive than ever; the additions to the library have been of unusual magnitude; while in no year of the history of the Institution, with perhaps the single exception of the Centennial year, have the collections received by the National Museum been more varied and important. THE HENRY STATUE. Iam gratified to announce the completion and erection of the statue of Prof. Joseph Henry, ordered by Congress in June, 1880. Mr. Story, the artist, visited Washington last winter, and fully ap. H. Mis. 69———1 1 2 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. proved the site for the statue which had been selected by the Executive Committee of the Board of Regents. It was deemed appropriate to have the ceremonies of unveiling per- formed at the time when the National Academy of Sciences held its annual meeting in this city, and April 19 was accordingly chosen. The day was propitious, the attendance of distinguished men of science — and an audience of ten thousand persons very gratifying, and the ceremonies in every respect were successful and satisfactory. The following was the order of exercises: I. Mustc—Marine Band, J. P. Sousa, conductor, ‘*The Hallelujah Chorus.” (Mes- siah.) Hdndel. Il. PrayEr—Rey. A. A. Hodge, D. D., of Princeton, N. J. Ill. Apprress—Chief Justice Waite, Chancellor of the Institution. IV. UNVEILING THE STATUE. V. Mustc—(Philharmonie Society and full Marine Band, R. C. Bernays, conductor.) Grand chorus, ‘‘The Heavens are Telling.” (Creation.) Haydn. VI. Oratron—Rev. Dr. Noah Porter, President of Yale College. VII. Music—J. P. Sousa, conductor. Grand march triumphale, “Schiller.” Meyer- beer. A full report by the Executive Committee in relation to the statue, with the addresses delivered on the occasion of its unveiling, accompa- nies the proceedings of the Board of Regents. It is proper to remark that the execution of the statue by Mr. Story has added to the high reputation of that eminent artist, and gives satisfaction to the family of Professor Henry to his former friends and associates, and to the public, and contributes a notable addition to the works of art which adorn the capital of the nation. SCIENTIFIC WRITINGS OF PROFESSOR HENRY. The Board of Regents having at its last meeting instructed the Sec- retary to collect and publish the scientific papers of Professor Henry, several assistants have been employed in collecting the material for this work, and a large amount of manuscript has been prepared to be carefully examined and edited for the press. It is proposed to reprint verbatim all the contributions made by Professor Henry to the Transactions of the Albany Institute, the Re- ports of the Regents of the University of New York, the Edinburgh Journal of Science, Silliman’s American Journal of Science, the Journal of the Royal Institution of Great Britain, the Transactions of the Amer- ican Philosophical Society, the Journal of the Franklin Institute, the Princeton Review, the Smithsonian Reports, the Agricultural Reports, the Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, the Proceedings of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Education, the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Appleton’s Cyclopedia, the Bulletins of the Philosophical Society of Washington, the Reports of the Light-House Board, Johnson’s Cyclopedia, the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, ete. Besides these published papers, others in manuscript and extracts _—= REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 3 * from his extensive correspondence will be collected, the whole forming one or more volumes of the series of “Miscellaneous Collections.” The printing will probably be commenced during the present year, and it is hoped that the work will be ready for distribution at the next meeting of the Board. THE BOARD OF REGENTS. The annual meeting of the Board was held on the 17th of January last,-and a special meeting on the 19th of April, for the purpose of attending the ceremonies of dedication of the Henry statue. The resignation of Senator Hoar, of Massachusetts, asa member of the Board of Regents, was followed by the appointment of Senator Ed- munds, of Vermont, in his place. That gentleman, however, declining to serve, Senator Justin S. Morrill was appointed to fill the vacancy. The terms of office of the members of the Board from the House of Representatives, Messrs. Deering, Cox, and Taylor, having expired with the termination of the Forty-seventh Congress, new appointments have been made by Hon. J. G. Carlisle, Speaker of the House, for the term of the Forty-eighth Congress, viz: Hon. O. R. Singleton, of Missis- sippi; Hon. William L. Wilson, of West Virginia; Hon. William Walter Phelps, of New Jersey. Provision for Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.—In the original law establishing the Smithsonian Institution the only officer recognized was the Secrétary, and no action was valid excepting as per- formed directly by him. In the event, therefore, of his death or disa- bility, the operations of the Institution would be greatly embarrassed, if they did not stop altogether; and it was for this reason that, on the death of Professor Henry, in May, 1878, his successor was appointed almost immediately. To provide for this contingency a bill was intro- duced by Senator Hamlin, shortly after Professor Henry’s death, and was, on’ January 24, 1879, enacted into a law, providing that “in the case of the death, resignation, sickness, or absence of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, the Chancellor thereof shall be, and he is hereby, authorized to appoint some person as Acting Secretary, who for the time being shall be clothed with all the powers and duties which by law are devolved upon the Secretary, and he shall hold said position until an election of Secretary shall be duly made, or until the Secretary shall be restored to his health, or, if absent, shall return and enter upon the duties of his office.” No appointment has been made under this provision until the present year. The Chancellor expecting to make a long trip in the West, re- quiring several wonths for its completion, and involving an interrup- tion of mail or telegraphic communication of possibly a week or more at a time, it was thought desirable that a provisional appointment of Acting Secretary shouid be made in readiness for any emergency that might arise. I therefore nominated for the position Mr. William J. Ithees, the chief clerk of the Institution, who, more than any one else, 4 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. is conversant with its working and policy, and he was accordingly so’® designated by the Chancellor. FINANCES. Nothing unusual has occurred in the financial affairs of the Institu- tion. The principal of the fund remains the same as at the last annual report, namely, $703,000, on which the interest at 6 per cent. is paid by the Treasurer of the United States on the Ist of each January and July. The appropriation by Congress for the international exchange system was increased last year from $5,000 to $7,500, half of which was available in 1883. The balance of the Smithsonian income on the Ist of January, 1884, is $25,914.20, which will be required for carrying on the operations of the establishment until the 1st of July next. BUILDINGS. Smithsonian Building.—In the last report an urgent plea was pre- sented for measures to secure the removal of the old combustible and decayed wood-work of the interior of the eastern portion of the Smith- sonian building and the substitution of fire-proof materials. The Re- gents having directed the Secretary to memorialize Congress on the subject, the facts in the case and the arguments in favor of the measure were presented by him. The result, I am happy to state, was the appropriation of $50,000 “for fire-proofing the eastern portion of the Smithsonian Institution.” The preparation of plans, the details of construction, and architect- ural requirements were placed in charge of Messrs. Cluss and Schulze. Advertisements of proposals for the work to be done were inserted in the newspapers, and the bids were opened on the 26th of April, 1883. The removal of the contents of the building was soon effected, the offices of clerks and others were transferred to the large hall on the first floor of the main building, and accommodation for storage provided by the erection of a temporary wooden shed on the south of the Institution. The following contracts were awarded : Description. Contractors’ names. Amount. Seg CTE ah ape Ai ae | Thomas Norm@eds):-2- 2.00225. caeeeeee | $4,699 00 IBLiGk@WOrk =.=) bi ose as eas (John Mi ilowalsersice so. oleae or eee | 10,500 00 Iron roof and floor beams .-...| C. A. Schneider’s Sons. .......--------- 8,219 00 CupistOnes ee 2s cele meee coe eee Rees Eiviansiesee eee esc dae eee | 5, 157 00 rem ceiling 32. sh..2 oe Phenix Iron Company ..-.--...--------- 892 00 Water and sewer pipes. ...---| EH. A. Ridgway -.52-- .2.--.-2ss6--=---- 828 00 Slegiinite: se enc sl ed AMR Rendlactome ease (Med | 134 20 Durretiskylioht 3 sss Gh2 Ye O. 3a. W olfateinerse 2.2260 See beee ee eee 150 00 Enis Moto, WAR RSSs5SeassoSsec Bi. As Ridig wiayiec asec sane 450 00 Cloekipipes)--.- 2 esse once Wenzel Pneumatic Clock Company -.--.- 156 00 Iron isiateseweese sjsccte tek oe George White dé Coxtec <5 h-2eemaeee 948 00 PlaStOriN Siatea as wielaeawiacieck 2 == James Hoghes hoi ce. ae ne ce eel 1,532 00 Slatemoonne, (ove ee ce C.J. Panag asec. cae pees 454 00 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 5 The work has progressed satisfactorily and without interruption, and the building will be ready for occupancy in a few weeks. The appropriation was found sufficient to secure the fire-proofing of the building, but a number of other desirable objects remain to be secured, such as a heating apparatus, a passenger elevator, a freight lift; the introduction of speaking tubes, electric bells, telephones; a concrete floor in the basement, an underground communication between the Smithsonian and the new Museum buildings, &c., for which an additional appropriation of $15,000 has been asked. As the whole interior of the eastern end of the Smithsonian building, including both range and wing, was to be torn out, it of course became necessary to provide accommodations elsewhere for the officers and employés, and as already stated the lower museum hall of the center building was made use of for this purpose. The table cases in the alcoves were removed elsewhere, and the spaces fitted up for the pur- poses in question. The Regents’ room was re-oceupied by the librarian, and my own offices were established in the northwest pavilion of the Museum building. The greatest difficulty was experienced in properly providing for the archives and the books and packages in storage. This matter was, however, ultimately arranged, and with much less inconvenience to the current work of the Institution than might be reasonably expected. It is hoped that by the 1st of April, 1884, a portion, at least, of the recon- structed part of the building can be occupied. The principal work of repair in the main building has been the renewal of the water-closets on the lower floors of the northeastern tower of the central edifice, the old ones having become unfit for use. Connections were prepared for closets on the upper stories of the recon- structed portion, should they be considered necessary. The west basement was provided with wire screens, dividing the room into two apartments—one for the storage of bird skins, and the other for alcoholic specimens of fishes. National Museum Building.—This building continues to preserve the reputation it has acquired as representing the maximum of convenience and adaptation to its purposes with the minimum of original cost and expense for repairs. The principal expenditure during the year for the latter object has been made in the tinting of the walls, mending of broken glass, occasional slight repairs to the plumbing, &e. Some of the down-spouts carrying off the water from the roofs were frozen up and burst during the cold of the past winter, causing leaks in the walls, which have all been duly repaired. Ever since the completion of the Museum building there has been more or less trouble in regard to the drainage, especially on the west- ern side, where the rain or melting snow banks up against the building and soaking down enters the basement rooms, and produces very serious inconvenience. Several temporary arrangements were made to obviate 6 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. this evil, but as these were not satisfactory, Colonel Rockwell, the Su- perintendent of Public Buildings and Grounds, very kindly undertook the work as a part of the general improvement of the Smithsonian reservation, which is in his charge. A trench was dug, and the water carried northward instead of discharging into an already overtaxed sewer on the south side of the building. No trouble has been ex- perienced since the work was completed, and itis hoped that there will be none at any time in the future. Armory Building.—This edifice has been used during the past year mainly for the purposes of the United States Fish Commission. The lower story has been converted into a fish-propagating establishment, for the hatching of shad, salmon, and other food-fishes; and as a store- house from which to distribute carp, black bass, &c. The second floor is devoted to a series of offices, laboratories, and rooms for the mes- sengers connected with the fish distribution service. The third floor is used as a depot for supplies and materials, and the fourth story as a storage room. . 25 ales laou oe csnciatenceoe se 5, 436 7, O56 6,218 Miran ACen eriG SOCICLIOS sree sem aie ce woe see in acc can sees telaceeins 3, 631 5,119 3, 900 From individuals ...--..-.--- st oo eeGo boone Soe aabUanoeEbErsodear 768 647 780 14, 161 19 292 18, 063 PM THI DIE IStLE DU UDI. 25 = Sain so cfocicis wcniieis oe wiunele> sisuls ule aisiem) (iceasisia= 7, 890 7, 187 8, 262 8. For Government exchanges .............-.-.. Socdecesacedtonobhcesees | 15, 550 31, 568 37, 569 Total receipts, packages ...-......-...2..22seeseeseeeceseeeeeeess | 37,551 | 58,047| 63, 894 Transmissions during the last eight years. 1. FOREIGN EXCHANGES. Items. | 1876. 1877. 1878. 1879 1880. | 1881. | 1882. 1883. — Mramber Of boxes: -..-.---2-------=. 323 397 309 311 268 407 422 495 ipAllciinienbic feet -2-- 2... 2. 2.2 2,261 | 2,779 | 2,160] 2,177 | 1,976) 2,800] 2,950 8, 228 Weight, in pounds...............-. 80, 750 | 99, 250 | 69, 220 | 69, 975 | 60, 300 1200 750 |105, 500 | 122, 265 ———— _ - — — : = | ~ | = 2. DOMESTIC EXCHANGES. Total addresses to institutions... -. lex S10)| ‘(392))>. | 392 444 385 600 | 548 423 Tutal addresses to individuals -..-. 328 | 374 370 341 560 454} 399 471 ——ee Ee = Yotal number of parcels to institu- } DTS Sg ee a 3,705 | -3,868 | 4,059] 5,786] 4,021| 7,086) 7,192] 8,677 Total number of parcels to individ- | | I) Rol A Ae eRe Senor 1,148 | 1,094 | 1,233 |} 1,185 | 1,566) 1,347) 1,167 2, 323 Total number of parcels.....| 4,853 | 4,962 | 5,292 | 6,971| 5,587| 8,433 | 8 359 | 11,000 3. GOVERNMENT EXCHANGES. Lotal number of boxes.........---. 122 73 | 73 67 35| 98] 122 | 76 \ | | Was 38 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Government Document Eachange.-—The exchange of official publica- tions of the United States Government for those of most other foreign nations has been continued, as in previous years, under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution, in accordance with the law of Congress, and a large number of valuable publications have been sent to agencies designated by their respective countries. Previous reports contain full details of the arrangement. The essen- tial points consist in the receipt by the Joint Library Committee of Con- gress of fifty extra copies of all Government publications to be used in the distribution. I regret to say that comparatively few of the nations, even of those which had formerly agreed to enter upon an exchange, have carried out their promises; and it is a somewhat serious question as to whether our own self-respect will permit us to continue all these transmissions with- out corresponding returns. We cannot, of course, ask for the equiva- lent in bulk, as no nation prints so large an amount of official matter as the United States does. It is, however, not too much to ask that what- ever may be published, however small in quantity, shall be forwarded. Some of the most important nations are conspicuous by their absence from this arrangement, notably Germany, with which we have found it impossible to make any arrangement. Great Britain, which, until 1883, has not been on our list, has, during the year, made the most satisfac- tory arrangements, and it is expected that a large number of works of important character will be received and transferred to the Library of Congress. It is of course understood that this entire. transaction was intended by Congress to be for the benefit of the Library of Congress, and all the publications when received are immediately transferred to Mr. Spofford’s care. = eae LIBRARY. The usual steady increase in the number of books reported by the library as received is indicated for 1883—12,675 pieces, as against 11,779 of 1882. These are, for the most part, obtained by exchanges; to a less extent by absolute donations, and still less by purchases. As heretofore, these books have been transferred on arrival to the Library of Congress, excepting where purchased expressly for the use of the National Museum, or needed for the service of that branch of the Institution ; all serials, however, being regularly transferred. In many cases we have been enabled to obtain a second series of many important journals and publications of societies, in exchange for the volumes of the Bulletins and Proceedings of the National Museum, which are eagerly sought after, and the acquisition of which is consid- ered to be a matter of great importance. In this latter establishment the same system as heretofore has been continued—namely, that of allowing all books on special subjects to be taken charge of by the curators of those branches, while mixed or oe Jiaetiil > REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 39 éeneral works are retained in the central library room. The librarian keeps, of course, an accurate record of the disposition of each book, so that any applicant can be referred at once to the place of deposit of such book in possession of the Museum that he may wish. Attention is again called to the importance of an arrangement by which a card catalogue of all books in the libraries of the various De- partments can be kept in charge of the Congressional Library, so that the actual depository, and the most convenient one, of any book may be indicated to an applicant. The following is a statement of the books, maps, and charts received by the Smithsonian Institution during the year 1883, and transferred to the Library of Congress and the National Museum: ] noes | Octavo or | Quarto or : Description. eo Ae larger. Total. PTET DSS. oR Sr ee re fe || 1,312 442° 1, 754 EMV OUINOS 5 592 2c sae 5s ho eees see wee 4, U60 4,170 8, 134 oO ee ee ee Se ere 2, 200 | 363 2, 568 iv L DING) CLC eae nse ee AO er cee (ae a ner Oi see oes 219 TRV EDT Se igs Sie oe es ee ae octets Rel (eee eee Se 12, 675 RELATIONS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION TO OTHER BODIES. The hearty co-operation of the various Departments of the Govern- ment in the scientific work of the Smithsonian Institution, whether re- lating more particularly to the National Museum or to the solution of scientific problems in general, has never been more strongly marked than during the past year; and itis with great pleasure that I take this occasion to make proper mention of the same. The Navy Department.—Previous reports have referred to the experi- ment initiated by the Navy Department of detailing six ensigns for the service of the National Museum. The object of this measure of the De- partment was to impart to a body of young naval officers such training as might enlarge their sphere of mental activity, and enable them to utilize in the interests of the Department and of science the many op- portunities of research and investigation presenting themselves in the course of their cruises and other duties. The first detail of this kind was made in the autumn of 1881; the second in 1882, and the third in the autumn of 1883. ‘These gentlemen, as mentioned hereafter, have all been assigned to duty with the curators of the Museum and assistants of the United States Geological Survey, their own preferences being considered as far as pos- sible. lam very happy to say that the experiment has proved to bea de- cided success, the officers applying themselves to their work with great diligence, and obtaining a fair knowledge of the subjects upon which 40 REPORY OF THE SECRETARY. they are engaged in a reasonably short time. There is every reason to believe that from year to year, as this service is continued, the Navy will receive back a body of officers who will reflect luster on the De- partment and on the country. The measure in question appears to be quite popular in the Navy, judging from the number of officers who have made application for par- ticipation in the benefits. The details for the past three years have been as follows : First year, 1881. . H. Miner, attached to Albatross. . EK. Honda in hospital at Portland, Me. . Blish, attached to Jamestown. S. Chase, National Museum. . M. Garrett, attached to Albatross. . C. Marsh, National Museum. Second year, 1882. . Dresel, National Museum. . Bernadou, ordered to Corea. . Ackerman, attached to Albatross. . Niblack, National Museum. ilkinson, National Museum. . Safford, National Museum. Bas Be Third year, 1883. H. M. Witzel, National Museum. O. G. Dodge, National Museum. J. H. Fillmore, National Museum. C. 8. McClain, National Museum. H.S. Knapp, National Museum. G. H. Harlow, National Museum. Lieutenant Winslow, who was detailed for duty in securing statistics of the production, distribution, and varieties of the oyster industry of the United States for the census of 1880, has completed his report on that subject, and was subsequently occupied in collecting material of a similar character for the London Fisheries Exhibition, and also in ar- ranging and labeling the collections made for that object. He is now devoting himself to the special investigation of a number of the useful mollusea of the country. Dr. J. M. Flint, of the medical department of the Navy, still continues the efficient relationship to the National Museum referred to in the pre- ceding report. Among the special divisions of the National Museum a collection of the medicines of all nations has been receiving much consideration, 33 See REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 41 With the co-operation of the leading druggists, and by means of ex- tended exchanges, a collection has been brought together superior to any other in the United States and scarcely excelled by any in Europe. Dr. Flint has had supervision of this collection, and has brought 1t into admirable condition, the specimens being all neatly put up and properly labeled with the scientific and common names, and made available for study. Further reference to this collection will be found in another part of the report. At the suggestion of the Institution, the Secretary of the Navy de. tailed Messrs. Dresel and Ackerman, two ensigns on duty at the [nsti- tution, to the Yantic—the naval vessel which convoyed the Proteus in her trip for the relief of Lieutenant Greely and his party at Lady Franklin Bay. These gentlemen made very valuable collections in zo- ology and mineralogy, which have been turned over to the National Museum, and have been absorbed in the general collections. The Secretary also assigned Ensign Bernadou, at the suggestion of the Institution, for duty with the steamer Alert, about to proceed to Corea, with the understanding that he was to be detached from that vessel on reaching Corea, and permitted to devote himself to scientific research, under the direction of the Institution. He is specially inter- ested in chemistry, mineralogy, and geology ; but he hopes to make com- prehensive coilections in many other branches. The Secretary of State also furnished Mr. Bernadou with aspecial pass- port to Corea, and a letter commending him to Mr. Foote, the United States minister to that country. The Pinta being under orders for Alaska, Dr. Crawford, of the Navy, offered his services as collector, and applied for the necessary appa- ratus for making alcoholic collections. Suitable tanks filled with alcohol and other supplies were forwarded to the vessel; but as Dr. Crawford was detached from service on her, his successor, Dr. Willson, very kindly renewed the offer, and will doubtless make due report of his labors. The War Department.—The United States Signal Service.—The close re- lationship existing between the objects of the Smithsonian Institution and the United States Signal Office, as established by the transfer to that Bureau of the entire meteorological organization, has continued to the present time. The most important connection is in the prosecution of scientific research in various parts of the country, as shown more par- ticularly in the establishment of stations in northern or Arctic America. Many of the persons selected by the Signal Office for carrying on re- search in the interests of climatology, either for its own special purposes, or in co-operation with the international arrangements, have been nom- inated by the Smithsonian Institution, at the request, or by the permis sion of the Chief Signal Officer. Instructions as to the special desiderata have been issued, and the additional expenses needed in the way of out- fit and supplies have been furnished by the Institution. The result has been to add a great amount of important information to what we pre- — 42 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. - viously knew of the natural history, geology, and anthropology of the regions north of the United States; while, of course, full provision has been made for the necessary physical research required by the Signal Office. The Treasury Department.—A somewhat similar arrangement to that of the Signal Office has been made with the Life-Saving Service, under the direction of Superintendent Kimball, who instructed the keepers of stations to carry out the provisions of a circular issued by the Institu- tion, requesting telegraphic announcement in regard to the stranding of cetaceans, strange fishes, and any other unusual inhabitants of the sea. In another part of this report will be found a full statement of the very important results already accomplished. The Light-House Board of the Treasury Department has also con- tinued its co-operation by requiring observations of ocean temperatures at various light-ships and light-houses along the coast. The data ac- cumulated in this way have been of the utmost importance in connection with the general problems of ocean physics, and have been used to very great advantage in solving many questions concerning the migrations of fishes along the coast. The Interior Department.—Another extremely important addition to the exhibits of the National Museum results from the transfer of the entire collection of Washington relics from the Interior Department, where they had been until now in the custody of the Commissioner of Patents. In this was included not only the old collection that had been on view for so many years, but also a large number of objects purchased some years ago by Congressional appropriation from Col- onel Lewis, and never unpacked after their arrival in the city. These articles have all been placed temporarily in large cases in the north hall, and will as soon as possible be transferred to more suitable de- positories, where they can be more readily observed and appreciated. The utmost care is taken of this collection, which is justly prized as one of the most valuable properties of the National Museum. Some other articles of historical interest were also received on the same occasion. Relations to Foreign Governments.— Under the head of ‘‘ Explorations in Labrador” will be found a reference to the researches of Mr. Lucien M. Turner. It became necessary in the earlier part of the year to renew the supplies of alcohol, ammunition, &c., to Mr. Turner; and as the vessel by which communication is effected starts for Montreal and Quebec, and not from any American port, the question of duties—on the alcohol especially—became one of some importance. By the assistance of the Department of State, the intervention of Mr. Robbins, United States commercial agent at Ottawa, with the Canadian minister of finance was secured; and it was finally arranged that on the request of the Secretary of the Treasury to that effect small pay REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 43 quantities of supplies for Mr. Turner or other agents of the Smith- sonian Institution in the Provinces might be sent in by it to several ports of entry free of duty, the collectors of customs at Montreal, Quebec, and Victoria being notified to that effect. Use was made of this privilege, not only in connection with Mr. Turner’s work, but also in the sending of alcohol to Mr. James G. Swan preliminary to his re- searches of the season in the Queen Charlotte Islands. Transportation Facilities—The occasion of having a large quantity of freight to forward to London, for the service of the International Fish- ery Exhibition in that city, made it of great importance to secure as low rates as possible, the quantity to be shipped representing an aggregate of about 24,000 eubic feet, or 600 measurement tons. The Pennsylvania Railroad Company promptly responded to an appeal for aid by furnishing cars at most favorable rates, to be loaded by the Institution, and made very satisfactory arrangements in regard to light- erage of the packages and their transfer to the steamers. An arrangement was also made with Messrs. Patton, Vickers & Co., agents of the Monarch Line of steamers, plying between New York and London direct, by which the goods were carried at reduced rates for the round trip. The gentlemen just referred to also kindly agreed to carry the regu- lar boxes of international exchanges system of the Institution free of charge, in this respect following out the liberal example of all the other lines between New York and the rest of the world. Very favorable offers for freights between New York and Wash- ington have also been made by the Inland and Seaboard Coasting Com- . pany, and accepted by the Institution. International and State Exhibitions.—Since the International Exhibi- tion in Philadelphia, in 1876, exhibitions of a somewhat similar char- acter, although more limited, have been held in many of the cities of the United States, these usually opening in August or September and lasting till towards the end of the year. Application is usually made to the In- stitution by the directors of these organizations for the loan of specimens from the National Museum. In most cases, however, it has not been considered expedient to take any action, excepting in cases where impor- tant contributions to the National Museum could be expected in return, or where Congress definitely authorized a loan in the particular case. It is not generally understood that, excepting where the Museum is to be benefited, there is no authority for allowing any specimens to leave the walls of the Museum buildings, and it was only by direct authority of Congress that displays were made at Philadelphia and in the Fishery Exhibitions at Berlin and London. Quite a large collection, however, of duplicate specimens was fur- nished for exhibition at the International Exposition held at Louisville during the year 1883, this consisting, in large part, of showy objects, such as an ethnological display from Alaska, the skeleton of a whale, 44 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. some mounted mammals, &e. The stipulation in the Congressional enactment, that they were to be taken from and returned free of expense to the Institution, has been carried out, and the various objects have been returned with but a moderate amount of deterioration. Earlier in the year similar action was taken in regard to the Chicago Railway Exposition, in the loan of one of the earliest locomotives used in Pennsylvania, and presented, at the Philadelphia Centennial, to the National Museum by the Pennsylvania Railroad Company. Some collections were lent to the Foreign Exhibition which opened in Boston September 14 and continued to the end of the year. This yas, however, on condition that a very valuable exhibit made by the Rajah of Lahore, and at the disposal of the authorities of the exhibition, be presented to the National Museum at the close. Hlectrie Light Accommodation.—The loan by the Brush-Swan Electric Company of a powerful dynamo machine of six 3,000-candle-power, and of a series of arc-lights for the purpose of experiment upon the lighting of the Museum building, as also for use in electric photography, has already been mentioned. A suitable engine for working the dynamo was obtained at the expense of the Museum, and the apparatus put in efficient running order. This has since been under the direction of Mr. A. A. Duly, the engineer of the building, and Mr. William J. Green, the electrician. On several occasions the halls of the building have been lighted with this apparatus; and very constant use was made of it in the prepara- tion of enlarged photographs of scenes connected with the fishery industries, to be used for exhibition at London. Several hundreds of these were enlarged from a size of 10 by 12 inches to that of 30 by 40; and, being finished up in crayon, constituted a very interesting and striking element of the international display at London. In December, Mr. A. A. Hayes, representing the Brush Company, asked the privilege of making an exhibition, in the lecture room of the Museum, of the Brush storage battery system, which was readily granted. ae F522 ee ee tee eee 2 otet 12 Le 12 EUROPE. PRAHA, (mis iss) cicsios Se ss = sae 2 15 17 TID 23 2 as ee ae eee as a ae 2 1 3 WS CIETU 3335 BAA 265 SRS R BD Snes Renee ee tee 2 3 5 LV PLEV TURD ELS pas a eee a ee ee See 2 4 6 OTIC Ae 2 103 105 Soo lpia! oe fee ee ee ee ee eee eer ee |e ee a 1 1 OUDDGE . te 55 eee ee ee ee 2 54 56 “3 DIU ie ee A ee Se 2 12 74 TEED Sb Ae ore ee ie Se ae oe pd ee aera 2 RITE re ate tree ics eera ce ye ioe Nwac Se oe ale oi 2 9 ily! PET 2 Se a Se 2 17 19 MEW AVE rr once teen ons See cees 2 3 5 RUM Ble Satire 6 ye Salonen ceca ots 32 == 2 d 6 TDI eek 2s ee eee eee eee al Sec cea oes 2 UOLESTD 2 AS Se eee a ee a oe ee 2 21 23 °) LUT 55 ci hic eine le ite pes ent ae 2 1 3 “EADIE & Scie ee 2 4 6 DESERT 2 8 10 PRACTICA SE ee 2 8 10 “DETLEGY, cect Se ae at eee ee re eee er | 2 3 5 TEP RELLL Gy a Sr Aaa aa pe ss. 2 TELUS 8 See Be a ete a 40 331 371 * The Smithsonian exchanges are included in the 72 cases for Germany. RECAPITULATION. | = é Government Smithsonian’ Countries. Boxcs. boxes. Total. | Id bi Cte ol age cel es SE sab at | 10 10 REI esa eS ee eas tee San sae 20 | 64 | 84 ol) Ta a eS ee a ee es 4 14 18 TTL ee en oe et cn ne ohn che eS 1 Ja ee eee 12 Ne ade peng eeee i ns ee ei 40 | 331 371 oF alee ep tegen all ein Ala Sea eae Sea 76 | 419 495 { H. Mis. 69 —7 ~~ 98 ' REPORT ON EXCHANGES. Transportation Companies.—The liberality of transportation companies and parties interested in shipping hitherto extended to the Smithsonian Institution in aid to the scientific exchanges, and thus far granted by thirty-three companies and foreign consuls in the United States, has, during the past year, again been demonstrated by the addition of nine- teen new firms, all desirous to further the object in question. These new additions now open channels for free transmissions to the following- named countries: Bahamas, Bolivia, Brazil, Colombia, Costa Rica, Den- mark, Dutch Guiana, England (and all its colonies through their respect- ive agents in London), Liberia, Nicaragua, Paraguay, Peru, Polynesia, San Domingo, Siam, Syria, Turk’s Island, Uruguay, and West Indies. These companies, granting free freight on all cases and parcels of ex- changes bearing the Smithsonian stamp, are: American Colonization Society, Washington, D. C. Anchor Steamship Company (Henderson & Bro., agents), New York. Atlas Steamship Company (Pim, Forwood & Co., agents), New York. Bailey, H. B., & Co., New York. Biddle, E. R., Philadelphia. Bixby, Thomas, & Co., Boston, Mass. Bland, Thomas, New York. Borland, B. R., New York. Cameron, R. W., & Co., New York. Compagnie Générale Transatlantique (lL. de Bébian, agent), New York. Cunard Royal Mail Steamship Line (Vernon, Brown & Co., agents), New. York. Dallet, Boulton & Co., New York. Dennison, Thomas, New York. Hamburg American Packet Company (Kunhardt & Co., agents), New York. Inman Steamship Company, New York. Merchants’ Line of Steamers, New York. Monarch Line (Patton, Vickers & Co. , agents), New York. Muioz y Espriella, New York. Murray, Ferris & Co., New York. Netherlands-American Steam Navigation Company (H. Cazaux, agent), New York. New York and Brazil Steamship Company, New York. New York and Mexico Steamship Company, New York. North German Lloyd (Oelrichs & Co., New York, Schumacher & Co., Baltimore, agents). Pacifie Mail Steamship Company, New York. Panama Railroad Company, New York. Red Star Line (Peter Wright & Sons, agents), New York. Spinney, Joseph 8., New York. Steainship Line for cSeen, Texas, Florida, and Nassau, N. P. (C. Ww. Mallory & Co., agents), New York. REPORT ON EXCHANGES. 99 White Cross Line (Funch, Edye & Co., agents), New York. Wilson & Asmus, New York. In addition, the following-named foreign consuls have consented to receive and transmit Smithsonian exchanges for their respective coun- tries, as follows: Carlos Carranza, New York, to Argentine Republic. Charles Mackall, Baltimore, to Brazil. D. de Castro, New York, to Chili. Hipolito de Uriarte, New York, to Cuba and Spain. Melchor Obarrio, New York, to Bolivia. Lino de Pombo, New York, to United States of Colombia. Henrik Braem, New York, to Denmark. Thomas Schmidt, New York, to Denmark. Francis Spies, New York, to Ecuador. D. W. Botassi, New York, to Greece. M. Rafto, New York, to Italy. Samro Takaki, New York, to Japan. Juan N. Navarro, New York, to Mexico. Alex. I. Cotbeal, New York, to Nicaragua. Christian Bors, New York, to Norway and Sweden. M. Severance, San Francisco, to Polynesia. Gustay Amsink, New York, to Portugal. John Stewart, Washington, D. C., to Paraguay. Isaac T. Smith, New York, to Siam. Enrique Estrazulas, New York, to Uruguay. Shipping List.—The following is the shipping list at present used in the transmission of the Smithsonian exchanges: Country. Shipping agent. IAS Pee es See ee Compagnie Générale Transatlantique, New York. Trans- fer made by the French Commission of Exchanges, in Paris. Consul-General Carlos Carranza, New York. Shipments to the United States are made through either Lewis & Co., Portland, Me., or George F. Brown, New York, rep- resenting Samuel B. Hale & Co., of Buenos Ayres. Thomas Dennison, New York. North German Lloyd, Baltimore. Felix Fliigel, Leipsic. Argentine Confederation. . Antigua Austria-Hungary Transfer made by Dr. Bana DIS. << a2 ose oes. Murray, Ferris & Co., New York. Bel anys oe i os ae Red Star Line, New York. | White Cross Line, New York. LEGO ee eae ek ee ' Consul-General Melchor Obarrio, New York. 15550 A See ea eee ae eae Consul Charles Mackall, Baltimore. R. B. Borland, New York. Baltimore and Ohio Express Company. Adams Express Company. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by W. Wesley, London, England. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by agent-gen- eral for Cape colonies in London, England. Consul D. de Castro, New York. REPORT ON EXCHANGES. a ae ig, Shipping agent. Colombia, United States of- WOShMeRIGR a ele te eee. Dintch Guiana, =.>2<5-ee HeuadORe- ase ness PAV Miss oSesieeesssoean cose PMlaM deseo nn Sacer ee ee Hrancey..- ==. Germanys poe sseeoela ace Great Britain] =o--eece.eee (OT OOCOF ais = ease eae asec Guatemala: 2c 2s. ses cents aiviiistec castes. jsceise ees Reelan dics 28a. Oe Sree Weal see ree pe ccrnemee sc Manns: pecs soe eee Mozambique -..---..--- Nex COM Sa er ke eee ieens Netherlandsh.o-<6 2--e ee Netherlands India... ----- New Calédonias-. 3: - =.= New South Wales. .-.-.--.-.- New Zealand s2seseres=e- INTCATA CUA =. 271 = ees Sasi ae INGIWaVaoececuscec ee eee Paraoualy se teats oom csc RET encee obs eccece Secete Philippine Islands .-.....- J EXO ATES (6 hha ear ae Portugal @mneenslandes. 2c. oss. == oe ISSIR acre ein cose sec cleo SENIU ADORE GAB S eee eee NpPaMee ws eee yekawlon te Straits Settlements ..--..-- SWedeMestetcse oseicniees Salter & Livermore, New York, direct to Shanghai. Monarch Line, New York. Transfermade through Crown agents for the colonies, London, England. Consul-General Lino de Pombo, New York. Munoz y Esprilla, New York. Pacific Mail Steamship Company, New York. Consul-General Hipolito de Uriarte, New York. Consul-General Henrik Braem, New York. Consul Thomas Schmidt, New York. Thomas Bixby & Co., Bostov, Mass. Consul Francis Spies. S. L. Merchant & Co., New York. North German Lloyd, Baltimore. Transfer made by T. A. Brockhaus, Leipsic, Germany. Compagnie Générale Transatlantique, New York. North German Lloyd, New York or Baltimore. Hambure-American Packet Company, New York. Monarch Line of Steamers, New York. North German Lloyd, New York or Baltimore. Cunard Royal Mail Steamship Company. Inman Steamship Company. Consul D. W. Botassi, New York. Consul Jacob Baez, New York. Atlas Steamship Company, New York. Consul Henrik Braem, New York. ‘Transfer made by K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Copenhagen. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by Secretary of State for India, India Office, London, England. Consul-General M. Raffo, New York. Consul Samro Takaki, New York. American Colonization Association, Washington, D. C. Monarch Line to Smithsonian agent, London. Consul Juan N. Navarro, New York. Consul R. C. Burlage, New York. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by Gordon & Gotch, London, England. R. W. Cameron & Co., New York. R. W. Cameron & Co., New York. Consul-General Alex. I. Cotheal, New York. Consul Christian Bérs, New York. Consul John Stewart, Washington, D. C. Joseph 8. Spinney, New York. Spanish consul, San Francisco. Consul Severance, San Francisco. Consul Gustay Amsink, New York. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by Queensland department, London, England. Hamburg-American Packet Company, New York. Trans- fer made by Russian consul-general, Hamburg, Ger- many. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by William Wesley, London, England. Consul Isaac T. Smith, New York. R. W. Cameron & Co., New York. Consul-General Hipolita de Uriarte, New York. Monarch Line, New York. Transfer made by William Wesley, London, England. Consul Christian Bérs, New York. North German Lloyd, Baltimore. Transfer made by Con- sul yon Heyman, Bremen. | Presbyterian Rooms, New York. a a i i i « ae ee REPORT ON EXCHANGES. 101 -Country. Tasmania Turkey Shami SANG = TTLICCTHED) 5 AAS ae Be Dee cee 1881 1882 1882 1883 1883 19 SMIRUOINDOLY s. ooo 2260 ---- J.S. Robinson. Does este es F. G. Galbraith. Indiana .....--- A.C. Black. ONO sos sece Dr. A. M. H. DeHaas. Louisiana ...... | J. M. Roberts. | Massachusetts..| U.S, Fish Commission ; Jib) Cee Brainerd Mitchell. | lk WeeNyes jr. Tennessee ..---. | C.S. Grigsby. Ometepec Isl- Wircimia. - =. Dr. E. R. Reynolds. and, Lake Ni- North Carolina .| J. A. D. Stephenson. Caragual.-.--- | C. C. Nutting. Alabama -.----- | Frank Burns. India ts: = 222/525 | J. H. Rivett-Carnac. A series of North American stone and bone weapons and implements in their original shafts and handles has been carefully arranged for per- manent exhibition. Visitors frequently make inquiries concerning the hafting of stone implements, and this series has been brought together for the purpose of illustration. A collection of 116 North American stone relics was made to be sent to the Museum at Havre, France, in exchange for flint objects received from that Museum. A collection of North American relies and casts, embracing 358 objects, was made for the American Antiquarian Society, Worcester, Mass. This collection is given in exchange for the well-known “ Kentucky mummy.” One thousand three hundred and twenty-nine specimens of stone im- plements, &c., collected under the auspices of the Bureau of Ethnology during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1883, were transferred from the new Museum to the Smithsonian building. They have been placed tem- porarily under table-cases, but will be assorted and exhibited early this year. Four boxes containing Californian specimens collected during the Wheeler survey were received in this department, but could not be opened for want of time. Researches prosecuted upon material belonging to the Department. The composition of my work on prehistoric fishing necessitated a careful study of all articles bearing on fishing. Dr. J. F. Bransford, U.S. N., was occupied during a part of the year in writing an account of his latest explorations in Central America, and describing the speci- mens there collected. Mr. W. H. Holmes, of the Bureau of Ethnology, has, for literary purposes, examined the shell objects and ceramic speci- meus in this department. 200 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. I have devoted all my time not spent in routine work to my publica- tion on fishing, and have therefore not composed smaller articles, ex- cepting one on ‘‘Indian Stone Graves,” which appeared in the American Naturalist for February, 1883, pp. 130-154. Present state of the collection. NUMBER OF SPECIMENS. AM POSELYG SETIGS 4/2 ciel Bhs Se spans =o te stacy, « pelea aie eke mete ime 8, 043 SAMA OY rep. 4 11011170 | ge geen amber paar Ina Zep erelaie teak ol A) AL 5) ad aS 24, 731 Sy DM PCATOS ie ni2)e 2 we icjals Syste iala a tenis « a elo ge aerate Sota Gg 4. Total ..... ae arial charac ete, aera NC ae attr cp ge ae eke ee 40, 491 ACCESSIONS DURING THE YEAR 1883. AD MEDS DPOM Bis te i cc eeeitic Se ele nee Bia phe i frail i a) Te a 3, 514 BEC SELVO OF SUMUIY SCLICN |S - ar) mals «2s kee moe tolemiaie ae ena teenie 655 SOU LCALES syst cic res eae Ses ots ee ee oe PEERS Fi seys PEPE RB SSS - 1,170 EAB otal ceare asin eect ae Galed a a Na doe Bee eacige 5, 339 Important additions during 1883. R. E. C. Stearns, Berkeley, Alameda County, California.—Collection of pestles, mortars, and baking-stones from Yuba, Nevada, Placer, and Alameda Counties, California. James Harrington, City of Mexico.—Three stone sculptures, one (mon- key-shaped) from Tamiahua, and the others (human figures) from Tam- pico, Mexico. Very fine specimens, and a valuable addition to the col- lection of Mexican antiquities. J. H. Rivett-Carnac, Allahabad, India.—Collection of nuclei and flakes of flint and chaleedony, and chipped and polished celts, from the Banda district, Northwest Provinces of India. Two of the celts were sent through Dr. EB. Meyer, Wilkesbarre, Pa. Albert I. Phelps, Damariscotta, Lincoln County, Maine.—Collection of flint flakes, rade implements, arrow-heads, bone implements, fragments of pottery, &e., from shell-heaps in Lincoln County. U. S. Fish Commission, assisted by Willard Nye, jr.—Collection of rude implements, cutting tools, perforators, scrapers, arrow-heads, sinkers, bone implements, fragments of pottery, &c., from Menemsha Pond and Roaring Brook, Martha’s Vineyard, and from Nonamesset Island, and Wood’s Holl, Massachusetts. This collection is of special interest, as it shows the stages in the manufacture of stone implements in those localities. J. HE. Gere, Riceville, Washington County, Wisconsin.—Collection from the vicinity of Riceville: Rude and leaf-shaped implements, cutting tools, scrapers, arrow- and spear-heads, grooved axes, and a copper spear-head or knife. In this collection are some fine types of arrow and spear-heads, and the grooved axes exhibit unusual forms. The REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 201 copper spear-head (or knife) is a valuable addition to the series of objects of that metal thus far acquired. August Shmedtie, Washington, D. C.—A stone sinker (notched), from a cave near Santo Domingo, Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico. Dr. D. 8. Kellogg, Plattsburg, Clinton County, New York.—Collection of rude scrapers, leaf-shaped implements, arrow-heads, fragments of pottery, and of bones of birds and quadrupeds, from old refuse-heaps at Plattsburg. The implements and pottery show nearly the same de- gree of skill in workmanship as those from the shell-heaps on the north- ern Atlantic coast. The animal bones have been identified as belong- ing to the deer (Cervus virginianus), and to some carnivore, probably the bear (Ursus americanus). C. L. Herrick, Minneapolis, Minn.—Collection of hammer-stones, chips, and flakes of fimt, chipped celts, arrow and spear-heads, shells and frag- ments of pottery, from a shell-heap on the Tennessee River, near Deca- tur, Ala. C. 8S. Grigsby, Fayetteville, Lincoln County, Tennessee.—The collections sent at different times during the past year comprise: Rude and leaf- shaped implements, scrapers, cutting-tools, perforators, arrow and spear- heads, hammer-stones, pitted stones, chipped and polished celts, grooved axes, discoidal stones, gaming discs (?),a pierced ceremonial weapon, and pierced tablets, all from the vicinity of Fayetteville. Representa- tive specimens of each class of objects have been placed on exhibition. Worthy of special mention are a leaf-shaped implement, partially “olazed,” a fragment of a large flint implement, showing patina of con- siderable depth, and some perforators, spear-lheads, aud a discoidal stone of very fine workmanship. J. M. Roberts, Clinton, Hast Feliciana Parish, Louisiana.—Collection from the vicinity of Clinton: Perforators, cutting tools, arrow and spear- heads, a hammer-stone (?), a small paint-mortar of remarkable form, a pestle, a small boat-shaped article, a large bead of compact quartzite, a pebble showing a slight cavity, and a fragment of a polished celt. Alto- gether a good collection. Dr. H. C. Yarrow, Washington, D. C.—A clay vessel with handles, from a child’s grave in Caldwell County, North Carolina. The grave was half filled with ashes intermixed with hair and teeth. On top of the vessel lay a round cover of native copper. W. 7. Knott, Lebanon, Marion County, Kentucky.—Collection of copper articles from a mound in Marion County: a celt, a breast-plate (?), 4 spool-shaped objects, and 2 concavo-convex discs. There were also found pieces of galena, one of which was sent by Mr. Knott. James 8. Robinson, M. C., Kenton, Hardin County, Ohio.—Collection of copper and stone implements and ornaments from a mound in Hardin County: 2 copper celts, a breast-plate (?), in 3 pieces, a fluted ornament with silver plating, and a crescent-shaped ornament, a thin sheet of silver, 9 sheets of mica, a flint scraper, an arrow-head, and a pierced tab- 202 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. let. The mound is situated on a slight rise of ground, abowt 10 rods south of the Scioto River, in Lynn Township, Hardin County, and on lands owned by Lester T. Hunt and General James S. Robinson. It is about 30 feet in diameter and 4 feet high, and was overgrown by large forest trees of white ash, beech, and oak. The mound has not been fully explored, but is believed to contain the remains of at least three per- sons. A quantity of charred corn was found near the place where the relics were taken out. Alexander C. Black, Surgcon-General’s Office, Washington, D. C.—Col- lection from Randolph County, Indiana: Flakes, scrapers, cutting-tools, leaf-shaped implements, arrow- and spear-heads, polished celts, notched and grooved axes, mauls, pestles, one ceremonial weapon, partly drilled, and two pierced tablets. The character of this collection, which con- sists of surface finds, is above the average, care having been taken to preserve the specimens in the condition in which they were found. W. Emmet Gatewood, Stockport, Morgan County, Ohio.—A large stone mortar with funnel-shaped cavity, taken from the foundation wall of a building at Stockport; originally from an Indian camp. Tennessee Historical Society, Nashville, Tenn.—A cast of an image of potstone, found in Bartow County, Georgia, and described by Col. Charles C. Jones in his work entitled “Antiquities of the Southern Indians,” p. 432, &c.; a cast of a stone image representing a woman, locality where found not yet known; a cast of a smoothing tool with handle. The original made of clay, was dug up in North Nashville, in 1866, by James Wyatt, superintendent of water-works. The originals were loaned, with other relics, by the above-named society, and the casts made in the National Museum. Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass.; through Prof. F. W. Putnam.— A cast of a fish carved from slate; original found near Ipswich, Mass. F. G. Galbraith, Bainbridge, Lancaster County, Pennsylvania.—Collec- tion of relics found on the surface near Bainbridge: Flakes of porphyry, jasper, quartzite, and slate, trimmed flakes, rude and leaf-shaped imple- ments, arrow and spear-heads, chipped celts with ground cutting edges, a chisel (small), grooved axes, large unfinished maul, a grinding- stone, notched sinkers, fragments potstone, clay vessels and sherds, and a paint-stone. Collection from Red Hill Cave, near Bainbridge: Fragments of animal bones and teeth, a rude stone implement, arrow and spear-heads, fragments of pottery, and a shell ornament. Collec- tion from Haldeman’s shell-heap, 2 miles south of Bainbridge: Jaws, bones, and teeth of animals, fragments of a human skull, fragments of quartz and other stone, fragments of pottery and of shells. Collection from Northumberland, Lancaster, Perry, and York Counties: 28 grooved axes, 6 polished celts, a cutter (chipped), a pestle, a mortar, a moccasin- last, a cup-stone with cavities on both sides, 3 unfinished ceremonial weapons, 4 small stone sculptures, a stone ball, and a hematite paint- stone. A number of the axes show the oblique groove often character- . ) ' ; REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 203 izing Pennsylvanian specimens of this kind. The moccasin-last is a re- markable specimen—a natural formation modified by pecking. S. T. Walker, Milton, Santa Rosa County, Florida.—Two arrow-heads, 2 fossil oysters, and 3 fragments of fossil bones from a clay bluff at the head of Tampa Bay, Fla. W. W. Evans, New Rochelle, Westchester County, New York.—Collec- tion of Peruvian relics: a bronze mace-head (star-shaped), a bronze spoon with ornamented handle, 4 bronze figures (human), a small group of 3 figures (human), one of bronze and two of gold, and 2 silver figures (human). In addition, a small terra-cotta head from the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico. Bugene A. Smith, Tuscaloosa, Ala.—Casts of an animal-shaped pipe and an engraved stone plate, from Hale County, and of a scraper-like imple- ment, from Tuscaloosa County, Alabama. The originals, on exhibition at the University of Alabama, were loaned, with other specimens, through the agency of Mr. Smith, and the casts made in the National Museum. The material of the pipe is pale-gray limestone, and that of the engraved plate, gray sandstone with particles of mica. The scraper- like implement is also composed of gray sandstone with mica. Frank Burns, Blountville, Blount County, Alabama.—Collections re- ceived during the past year: A large stone mortar, found 50 years ago in a creek, 5 miles from Blount’s Springs, Blount County, Alabama. Jollection from Blount and Winston Counties, Alabama: Arrow and spear-heads, celts, grooved axes, hammer-stones, discoidal stones, a paint- mortar, paint-stones, a hematite sinker, fragments of potstone vesseis, and of pottery, a silver ornament (perhaps Spanish), and human and animal bones. Collection (surface-finds) from Blount and Colbert Coun- ties, Alabama: Leaf-shaped implements, perforators, arrow and spear- heads, hammer-stones, chipped and polished celts, pestles, a stone bead, a bone implement, fragments of potstone vessels and of pottery. Col- lection from Colbert, Lauderdale, Saint Clair, and Blount Counties, Alabama: Rude and leaf-shaped implements, trimmed flakes, cutting tools; arrow and spear-heads, a muller, 2 boat-shaped objects, 2 polished celts, and 2 large stone mortars; a handled clay vessel, from a mound on the banks of the Tennessee River, near Florence, Lauderdale County, and fragments-of large wooden troughs, from a cave in Blount County, locally known as the Crump Cave. Concerning this cave, I copy the fol- lowing statements from a communication by Mr. Burns: ‘ When the cave was first discovered (in 1840) there were 8 or 10 of these troughs, but now they are all more or less split or injured, except this one. It is about 74 feet long, 10 or 20 inches wide, and 6 or 7 inches deep. It has been hollowed out by the use of fire, and stone or copper chisels, one of the latter having been found with the troughs when the cave was first examined. There were also found 12 or 15 skulls and a large number of other bones; 6 small wooden bowls, tolerably well polished, 5 or 6 wooden trays, somewhat like a modern bread-tray, but very rough 204 - REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. and unpolished; a small copper hatchet, a copper chisel 5 inches long, 20 copper ornaments, 6 or 7 large shells, some of which are said to hold a gallon of water; some shell discs or beads, and pieces of bark or cane- matting, 6 inches square, but very much decayed. Scattered among the bones were about 200 pounds of very fine lead ore. The troughs did not contain any bones, but some of the lead ore was in one of them. The ornaments mentioned were of native copper and perhaps beaten out with stone hammers, as the workmanship was very rude. The chisel and one of the ornaments are now at the residence of the late Rev. William Crump, in this county.” William Pengelly, Torquay, England.—Collection of bones, teeth, Xc., from Kent’s Cavern, near Torquay; 23 finds from the cave-earth or hyenine deposit, and 7 from the breccia or ursine deposit, the oldest in the cavern; in all, 1,270 specimens. It is to be regretted that Mr. Pen- gelly has sent the bones undetermined. They were for the present placed on exhibition according to the layers in which they occurred. L. Belding, Stockton, San Joaquin County, California.—Collection from the neighborheod of La Paz, Lower California: Arrow and spear-heads (some very fine), and a human skull and 10 bones. I take from the letter of Mr. Belding the following: “‘The skull and bones (which are probably those of the ancient Periciies) were dug out of coarse, dry, granite sand in a cave, or overhanging rock, at a rancho called Zorillo, 20 miles north of Cape Saint Lucas. They were neatly wrapped in cloth made from the fibre of the agavye—three-ply cord, made as sailors plait sennit.” H. EF. Emeric, Guaymas, State of Sonora, Mexico.—Two celt-shaped implements, 2 shuttle-shaped objects, an ornamented reel (?), carved from slate, and an amulet of alabaster (animal-shaped), found 63 feet under loose rock and on the original surface. The Indians here do not know anything concerning the relics, and there are no signs of a mound where they were found. Rev. Samuel Lockwood, Freehold, Monmouth County, New Jersey.—A cast of a human head carved in stone. The original, found within a mile of the shore of Raritan Bay, Monmouth County, N. J., was loaned by Mr. Lockwood for the purpose of making a cast at the National Museum. For a detailed account see “American Naturalist,” October 1882, p. 799. A. Fairhurst, Lexington, Ky.—Collection from Knox County, Indiana, and from Clark and Bourbon Counties, Kentucky: Arrow and spear- heads, hammer-stones, polished celts, grooved axes, a pierced tablet, and a ceremonial weapon. Mostly very good specimens. John EH. Younglove, Bowling Green, Warren County, Kentucky.—Col- lection from the vicinity of Bowling Green: Leaf-shaped implements, a cutting tool, a notched scraper, « perforator, arrow and spear-heads, and small pierced shell discs. Robert Ridgway, U.S. National Museum.—Small collection from W heat- land, Knox County, Indiana: Flakes, rude and leaf-shaped implements, ————— REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 205 arrow-heads, a spear-head, and fragments of pottery. The spear-head mentioned is of exquisite werkmanship, being strongly barbed and having very thin edges; length, 4 inches. S. W. Greer, Eddyville, Lyon County, Kentucky.—Collection from dif- ferent localities in Kentucky and Tennessee: Large flint implements, chipped celts and chisels with polished cutting edges, cutting tools, scrapers, perforators, hrrow and spear-heads, hammer-stones, sinkers, discoidal stones (a very fine specimen from a mound in Tennessee), mul- lers, gaming discs, stone beads, paint-stones, a small stone carving (hu- man face), animal teeth (one notched), clay vessels and handles of such in the form of birds, &c. Owing to a pressure of other work Mr. Greer was unable to copy from his note book the localities where the speci- mens were found, except in a general way, bat will send a full report later. Dr. G. H. Taylor, Mobtle, Ala.—Collection from shell-heaps near Mo- bile: Fragment of a large chipped celt, and handles of clay vessels in the form of bird-heads, &e. C. C. Nutting, U. 8. National Museum.—Collection from Cmetepec Island, Lake of Nicaragua: Round and shoe-shaped burial urns, small vessels of various shapes, some painted and others ornamented with incised lines or with figures in relief, toy vessels found in burial urns, clay sinkers, legs of tripod vases, rude stone carving (human head), flint flakes, an arrow-head, ashell implement, and a number of fragments of human skulls and bones. Also a large stone figure (human), to be described in Mr. Nutting’s report. The clay vessels arrived in a very fragmentary state, especially the large ones, but they have partly been restored. Among the painted vessels are some very fine specimens. José Zeledon, Costa Rica.—A stone carving (human head), a stone figure (animal-shaped), a small metate, a pestle, and 10 clay vessels, some painted, others ornamented with raised figures. There is no state- ment concerning the localities where the specimens were found, although (with the exception of one vessel, which is undoubtedly of Peruvian origin) they do not differ in character from other Costa Rican objects sent by Mr. Zeledon last year. Samuel Johnson, Parkersburg, Wood County, West Virginia.—Hight arrow-heads found in the vicinity of Parkersburg. Very good speci- mens. Ernest E. T. Seton, De Winton Farm, Carberry, Manitoba, Canada.— Two grooved mauls and 27 chips of chalcedony, jasper, &c., found on Big Plain, Carberry, Manitoba. Also 2 arrow-heads from Galt, Water- loo County, Ontario, Canada. The mauls are very good specimens. Minor CO. Keith, Timon, Costa Rica.—Twelve large sculptures repre- senting men and animals, and 3 small fragments. From Dos Novillos, on the line of the Costa Rica Railroad, about 49 miles from the coast. A valuable addition to the collection ot antiquities from Costa Rica. 206 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Dr. J. F. Bransford, U. S. Navy.—Two small stone sculptures (human) from the Pacuare Cut, Limon Railroad, Costa Rica. Capt. A. Briand, Havre, France.—A hammer-stone and 16 flint scra- pers (neolithic), from Elbeuf, Department of Seine-Inférieure, France. James Harrington, Tampico, Mexico.—Two stone sculptures in human shape. 7 A. R. Beck, Lititz, Lancaster County, Pennsyloania.—A carved stone pipe (obscene). Said. to have been brought from South America, but probably of Northwest Coast origin. J. A. D. Stephenson, Statesville, Iredell County, North Carolina.—A Scraper and 96 arrow-heads, from a deposit in Alexander County, North Carolina. I take from Mr. Stephenson’s letter the following state- ments: ‘‘ This deposit was found recently by some quarrymen near the Catawba River, in the southeast corner of Alexander County, buried in the soil against the side of a large rock. I know of no locality nearer than 70 miles from which the material composing the specimens could have been obtained.” EH. Stanley Gary, Baltimore, Md.—A. ceremonial weapon, from Elk Ridge, Howard County, Maryland. J. B. Aldrich, Memphis, Tenn.—A New Zealand war-club (mery), taken from a mound in Bent County, Colorado. Original loaned, and cast made in the National Museum. This specimen is identical in mate- rial and shape with a New Zealand war-club in the collection of the National Museum, and belongs to the class of so- eetes ‘¢ intrusive relics,” sometimes found in this country. Trocadero Museum, Paris, France.—Collection of large casts taken by M. Désiré Charnay corn sculptures in Mexico and Central America. The importance of this collection can hardly be overrated. The casts, entered under 57 heads, fill a large hall in the National Museum, and embrace the important bas-reliefs and glyphic inscriptions described and figured by Del Rio, Dupaix, Waldeck, Stephens, and other explor- ers. They offer to the investigator facilities for study which otherwise could only have been pursued in the far-distant regions of this conti- nent, where the traces of a higher aboriginal civilization are found. The casts are the duplicates of those exhibited in the Trocadero Mu- seum at Paris, the visible tokens of Mr. Lorillard’s munificence. J. C. Howell, U. S. Nawy.—A tombstone from the plains of Troy. Charles J. Turner, Brunswick, Chariton County, Missouri.—Collection from Chariton, Linn, Saline, Boone, and Howard Counties, Missouri. An arrow-head with strongly jagged edges, stone sinkers (some of hematite), hematite celts and axes, a polished cutter, a sickle-shaped natural formation, prepared for cutting purposes, a grooved double- pointed head of a war-club, carved pipes, ceremonial objects, a shallow stone dish, a stone ring with incised lines, a rubbing stone, a large grooved adze-head, a large stone slab with foot-shaped depression and cup-formed cavities placed around it, natural formations (clay iron ore), * REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 207 prepared to serve as receptacles, and a copper axe. This is one ot the best collections ever acquired by the National Museum. J. E. Adcox, Benton, Saline County, Arkansas.—Collection from Saline County: Rude implements, cutting tools, scrapers, perforators, arrow and spear-heads, a hammer-stone, celts, notched and grooved axes, and a muller. C. L. McKay (deceased).—Collection from Alaska: Six cutters (slate), 4 spear-heads, 4 chipped celts, a chisel (?), 2 adzes (one very fine), a piece of worked argillite, 2 oval pebbles, one with polished cavity, an un- finished bone socket for harpoon-head, and 2 clay vessels. J. F. Kummerfeld, Long Grove, Scott County, Iowa.—A grooved axe (very fine), from Pottawattamie County, Iowa. C. T. Wiltheiss, Piqua, Miami County, Ohio —Cast of an animal- shaped pipe. The original was found 3 miles from Piqua, near the Miami River, having been washed out by high water. Material, pale- gray limestone. G. B. Frazar, Mount Auburn, Middlesex County, Massachusetts.—Col- lJections from shell-heaps at Old Enterprise, Mellonville, Lake Munroe, Lake Harney, and Spear’s Landing, Saint John’s River, Florida: 32 shell adzes, 14 fragments of shell adzes, a shell chisel or gouge, a shell sinker, a shell bead, 23 fragments of pottery, 3 fragments of potstone vessels, a grinding-stone, 2 worked prongs of antlers, 3 bears’ teeth, and a small piece of galena. Ernest C. Brown, Warren, Jo Daviess County, Illinois.—Collection from mounds and their vicinity in Jo Daviess County: a large digging-tool, leaf-shaped implements, scrapers, perforaters, arrow- and spear-heads, polished celts, grooved axes, a pierced stone object of unknown use, a fragment of a platform-pipe, and fragments of pottery. I take from Mr. Brown’s letter the following: “The mounds are situated on a bluff about 100 feet high. So far as opened they appear to be sepulchral, the bodies lying with the heads to the south. They were all encased in Trenton limestone slabs of about 8 inches in thickness and from 2 to 5 feet long. Relics are very rare.” W. C. Brown, Liverpool, Perry County, Pennsylvania.—Collection from Perry County: Rude chipped implements, arrow-heads, rude celts, 1 pestle, notched sinkers, and fragments of pottery. G. W. Emrich, Northumberland, Northumberland County, Pennsylvania. —Collection from Northumberland County: Flakes, rude and leaf-shaped implements, scrapers, perforaters, cutting tools, arrow-heads, rude celts, an unfinished grooved axe, rude grooved axes, pestles, notched sinkers, fragments of ceremonial weapons, and a carved stone pipe. The pestles and grooved axes are good examples of aboriginal methods in working stone, being natural formations somewhat approaching in shape the im- plement desired, modified by flaking and pecking. 208 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALS. FREDERICK W. TRUE, Curator. Accessions. The accessions of the Department of Mammals during the past year were numerous, varied, and important. The number of specimens re- ceived from the collectors of the Smithsonian Institution and those of other Departments of the Government, and by gift, purchase, and ex- change, amounts to no less than 365. The numerical relations of the accessions from each of these sources are indicated in the subjoined table: : Table of accessions in 1883. aa | 32 qo a ao |2¢e a2 |s8 ¢i¢|o|#3| 38 S\e\8\2e\se\ sieis|8eisates SN ket Wee pei Rea ee ial Bee 3.22 = 2c. 33 Another important addition is that of the collection of the Fortieth Parallel Exploring Expedition. This includes representations of up- wards of one hundred species, many of which are types. This collection has not been recorded. ( Mr. U. P. James presented the Museum with a series of typical speci- mens representing seventy-eight species, described by him, from the Hudson River group of Ohio. Owing to the pressure of work in connection with the preparation of a report on the Paleontology of the Eureka Mining District, Nevada, I have not been able to give much time to arranging and classifying the collections except as incidental to that work. The study of the collections of the U. S. Geological Survey is prepar- ing a large amount of valuable material that will only need to be re- corded in the records of the Museum, to form the nucleus of a large col- lection from the regions of the Rocky Mountains. In my next annual report I hope to give a list of the genera and species in this collection. During the year no publications were made upon material recorded. A short paper in Science (vol. XI, p..808) notices the discovery of fresh- water shells from the Lower Carboniferous of Central Nevada, the types of which are now in my hands. The present state of the collections may be briefly stated: Ten standard cases of drawers containing about 20,000 specimens, representing nearly 1,800 species. These are arranged in stratigraphic order, and within that a z6ologic arrangement is more or less clearly defined. This col- lection includes the Smithsonian collections and those of the various Government surveys, up to the time of the organization of the present Geological Survey. I found it without systematic arrangement, on taking charge in May, 1883, and have given most of the time I could spare from paleontologic work in connection with the Geological Survey, to arranging it, and also in getting the laboratory rooms fitted up. The REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 263 latter are now in good order, and the facilities for work are such that little expenditure will be required the present year. In the laboratory rooms there are upwards of 15,000 specimens, rep- resenting over 1,000 species, that will be ultimately added to the col- lection. DEPARTMENT OF FOSSIL PLANTS. LESTER F.. WARD, Honorary Curator. Accessions. ‘he most important addition which was made to the department dur- ing the year was a large collection of fossil plants from the Green River group of Elko Station, Nev., Bell’s Fish Cliff, Alkali Stage Station, Wyoming, and Florissant, Colorado, but chiefly from the last named locality, consisting of more than 700 specimens belonging to nearly 100 species. These have been numbered and catalogued and form part of the reserve series. The only other addition of numerical importance consists of 256 specimens from various localities in Europe and America, which were found in the north tower of the Smithsonian building, and which have also been duly installed. The present state of the collection is as follows: Number of specimens. .............. SRE rie OPER Pin ee 4, 924 Number.of species ...-.....- 2-2. pea eee aegis a paid snes Y 871 Of which there are— ERI OSPR Olen ac ire onic wis tare SS ee Seah seek eases 236 SEPObACOOUS Sel. eet cosine ete 3a laurent. of Baki: eee 142 MRSTRIREN, reiats. wet ead yw ces Sah Sipe tans tide OM Eib dais ores 493 At the close of the year, in order to make room for a large collection of fresh material for study, it was found necessary to remove some of the duplicates. These were taken entirely from the Paleozoic and Me- sozoic series, 896 specimen from the former and 195 from the latter, making 1,091 specimens. They were all carefully selected from the least perfect of the most abundantly represented species and have been placed in drawers, properly labeled, and are ready to be sent to the Armory building for storage. DEPARTMENT OF LITHOLOGY AND PHYSICAL GEOLOGY. GEORGE P. MERRILL, Acting Curator. Accessions. The total number of entries upon the department catalogue during the year has been 2,311, comprising 2,738 specimens. Strictly speaking however these cannot all be considered as accessions of the year, since many of the specimens have been the property of the Museum for a much longer period, but never before catalogued. 264 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Below is given a list of the more important accessions : (1) Ten specimens Vermont marble, showing methods of cutting and polishing. Gift of the Vermont Marble Company. (2) Eighty specimens Kansas building stones. Gift of A. A. Robin- son, agent for Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé Railroad. (3) Eighty-two specimens North Carolina building stones. Collected by Prof. W. C. Kerr. (4) One hundred and four specimens building stones from the United States and foreign countries. Gift of John 8S. F. Batchen. (5) A collection of thirteen varieties of grindstone. Gift of J. E. Mitchell, Philadelphia. (6) Forty-five specimens of Italian marble. Gift of W. W. Story, Florence, Italy. (7) One hundred and seventy-five specimens drift and eruptive rocks from Montana. Collected by Dr. O. A. White and J. B. Marcou, U. 8. Geological Survey. (8) One hundred and ninety-four specimens rocks from Yellowstone National Park. Gift of W. H. Holmes. (9) Three hundred and eighty-five specimens typical rocks of New Hampshire, being the private collection of the late Dr.George W. Hawes. (10) Twenty specimens obsidian and tufa from Mono Lake, California. Collected by I. O. Russell and G. K. Gilbert, U. 8. Geological Survey. (11) Four large concretions from near the mouth of Cannon Ball River, Dakota. Gift of Brig. Gen. M. C. Meigs. (12) Thirty specimens Japanese marble. Received from Centennial Exhibition, Philadelphia. (13) Three hundred and fifty-five specimen rocks of Victoria, Aus- tralia. Received from Centennial Exhibition, Philadelphia. (14) One hundred and fifty-four specimens building stones of Portu- gal. Received from Centennial Exhibition, Philadelphia. | (15) A slab of Potomac breccia marble 2 x 3 feet, from Frederick County, Maryland. Gift of Col. Edward Clarke. ‘In arranging and classifying collections, the accurate determination of the specimens is the first essential. For this purpose the microscope is usually employed and some two hundred and fifty thin sections of rocks have been prepared. For exhibition purposes the building stones are dressed into 4-inch cubes, this being the unit size, while specimens of purely lithologic or geologic importance are broken with a hammer inte sizes of about 3 inches x 4 inches x 1 inch. Specimens illustrative of physical phenomena are prepared to suit indi- vidual cases. In the exhibition series the building stones are clas- sified by States, this method being deemed best calculated to meet the wants of the general public. Collections of lithologic and geologic in- terest, representing the formations of any definite area, or investiga- tions tending towards the solution of any particular problem, are pre- served intact. Miscellaneous collections are broken up and classified by kinds. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 265 No work upon the collections has been done by parties not officially connected with the Museum since the close of the census investigation of the building-stone industry of the United States early in the year. The number of specimens in the entire collection is not far from 12,500, of which 3,862 are building stones, while the remainder are mostly smaller specimens of more strictly scientific interest. Of the entire collection not less than 2,000 are duplicates. Of the 3,862 speci- mens of building stone 1,684 are dressed, and 1,332 already on exhibi- tion, though not yet fully labeled ; but 54 specimens were dressed during the past year. The following table gives the collection of building stone proper in de- tail, the majority of the specimens being of sufficient size to dress into 4-inch cubes, or to give at least 16 square inches of finished surface: UNITED STATES. COO ois a ees hae ae 6 Pennsylvania 2 oo bs<6 ss 331 Alabama | e262 ee ee oe Ishode: Islands. Ooe.<2 55 ca 42 Arkansas sha ake Reinet ie ae a : (PONINESHEG 5 fees sea 126 eA Sore xe Jai nae => : GS Rte Soe ee eed ps 41 PR ONNM As -)- ele 2. Se Bs 44 Miho ae 13 MTEL 22s Sho apa wiser stirs 31 TE ea oon Bmnnechiout 2-2. <22-. 225. 65 Vain te aa 71 a oa et ele ate a : Wes? Virginia: oo .s 6 oceqse 16 Disristof Columbia... 8 | yaammgton Tetons --- PUR ote. ee eh ee : UE TUES Sa Sie egeeae are ee a a (i OR Se Are ae at a 1a SS ls doi 9 FOREIGN COUNTRIES. PMP OAN oe oe ShL)2 Rails Su Se wig 110 API Ca Ws Shoe eee as Ieee By MMNIERIGE 8 oy cies aide we ei Sy 4O o> Rermude ©. 268 eer ee 75 MBN oe... ae TOS Canada i. foi 8a wie 16 UMD 5.5). ci Socios Sekt BOR Hl Ohana oo. ee eer 1 8 JUTE a Se are ear Gr yp soir. 0. oe eae 6 MaIRG 22105... pea 28S 12our Brance.. 252 Spee e sae 3 Massachusetts ........-..- 226 | Germany ...... INE ee Seta neh ji MEV IANO so io ole bee ote 3 nOS? |, Greece: {1 Ae ocean 2 MIEN Sores ois id < Siar sa, bis Aor brelandh: a5 6 ns iene eae di PIMINOBOED:. . <0 2. iu cces sees EOS ay ERR: sora e ners tee ionike Sa 3 89 DEMS oo Sos aae o4e 4 6 Lee| SABAD) © lok se ce Ook Lente 50 MEERA 2S si coke ws ec bme che 9 | New Brunswick ......... : 5 MPPDPARK OS. ssc yok ee Secs 8 | New South Wales......... 8 New Hampshire. .......... HOG Pontiigal. 2: 82h: Se SS 154 ew ACISGY =). 2 25.55.5055. Dee USBI aes ot eg! 22S 21 New Mexico ...... Sosa sk PG meotland ete e ces t : 24. WE ORIC 2 bso. s ewe Matera LUBEEY 95 one et less c's 2 2 MPGVAGA 21652502: epee 8 North Carolina ........... 120 Total No. of specimens. 3, 862 BIg oe sig les Eee Ole 266 ; REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Much work yet remains to be done in the way of cataloguing and labeling. During the greater part of the year no one but myself has been engaged in this work, and the progress has necessarily been slow. Some of the older collections are in a most deplorable condition, owing to the fact that many of the labels are lost, or, if present, were written with a common pencil and have become almost illegible. Moreover, the data given are frequently so scanty that they are of no possible value. The collections of the various U. 8. Geological Surveys are especially bad in this respect, and doubtless much of their material must ultimately be thrown away on this account alone. A swing saw, made on the same general plan as the saw ordinarily used by stone-workers for sawing marble, &c., but much smaller, has been added to the department, and promises to be very efficient in cut- ting all varieties of material not sufficiently hard to require diamond dust. Steam-power has been introduced into the work-room, and the preparation of microscopic sections is thereby greatly facilitated. The department of physical geology has been so recently assigned to my care that no report of progress can as yet be made. DEPARTMENT OF MINERALS. F. W. CLARKE, Honorary Curator. The report of Mr. W. S. Yeates, who for the past. year has had practically sole charge of the department of minerals, is here presented. Inasmuch as I only entered upon the duties as curator during the month of December, I have had as yet few opportunities of familiar- izing myself with the collections, and can add nothing of importance to what Mr. Yeates has said. I have already taken steps towards the organization of a system of exchanges, and have entered into corre- spondence with some collectors; but there has not yet been time enough to realize anything from my efforts. The department, in addition to the services of Mr. Yeates, now has the assistance of Naval Ensigns E. Wilkinson, H. 8. Knapp, and O. G. Dodge. These gentlemen have been detailed for Museum services by the Secretary of the Navy, and are to be regarded as students rather than regular aids. Although they are called upon for work in the arrangement for cataloguing of specimens, it is clear that their chief efforts should be in the line of study; and that with them mechanical labor should be reduced to a minimum. W.S. YEATES, Acting Curator. (Jan.—Nov.) Accessions. A large number of additions have been made to the collection during the year; and a large number of specimens, which had been tempo- rarily under the care of this department, have been turned over to the de- REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 267 partments to which they properly belonged. Special mention may be made of the following contributions: From Mr. John W. Lee, of Balti- more, Md., a choice collection of twenty-six specimens, principally from Maryland and Pennsylvania, for exchange; from Mr. F. L. Moore, of Georgetown, D. C., a contribution of six hundred pounds of gypsum from Windsor, Nova Scotia, which furnished us several handsome speci- mens for the reserve series, and two hundred and fifty-one specimens for the duplicate series; from Prof. F. W. Clarke, as an officer of the U. S. Geological Survey, we received a collection of beryl crystals, hyalite, &c., from Ashe County, North Carolina, consisting of thirty- seven specimens; a collection of muscovite, tourmaline, &c., from New Hampshire, consisting of twenty-four specimens; and a collection of allanite, triphylite, lepidolite, &c., from Maine, consisting of one hun- dred and forty-three specimens. Besides these, from his private collec- tion we received a contribution of thirty-one specimens from various localities. In the collection from North Carolina there were three hand- some specimens of hyalite and an exceptionally interesting crystal of quartz. All these specimens were received from Professor Clarke, prior to his official connection with this department. From Mr. N. H. Perry, of South Paris, Me., we received a collection from Oxford County, Maine, consisting of eighty-six specimens. These specimens were obtained for the Museum by Mr. George P. Merrill, of the department of rocks and building stones. From Dr. Wm. H. Jones, U.S. N., a box of garnets, both-detached and in mica schist, from Alaska, consisting of one hun- dred and ninety specimens. This contribution was one of the most de- sirable received during the year. From Mr. George P. Merrill, a collec- tion of minerals from Maine, consisting of one hundred and two spéci- mens. Besides other good specimens in this lot, there was an inter- esting group of calcite crystals from Rockland, Me. From Mr. Joseph Willcox, of Delaware County, Pennsylvania, a collection of minerals from various localities, consisting of one hundred and nineteen speci- mens. Besides the gift of these, Mr. Willcox has been kind enough to lend to the department one thousand three hundred and thirty-four of the choicest specimens from his handsome collection of American min- erals, to assist in filling a deficiency in our exhibition series. This col- lection being a loan, its withdrawal would leave quite a gap in our exhi- bition series. From Dr. Theo. Schuchardt, of Gorlitz, Germany, was purchased a very good set of sixty specimens of minerals representing the Vesuvius lecality. The private collection of Dr. George W. Hawes (late curator of this department), consisting of over five hundred spec- imens, has recently been turned over to me. The specimens are small, but some of them are very desirable. From the dump heap of the ex- cavation for the foundation of a large building on Connecticut avenue, in this city, I obtained one hundred and twenty specimens of vivianite in clay, a mineral new to this locality. 268 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Administration. It may not be amiss to indicate the routine of this department. Specimens upon being received are carefully examined and named; they are then entered on the register, cleaned, trimmed, labelled, num- bered, and assigned to that series of the collection, which is deemed best. Classifying and arranging specimens for exhibition constitute a large part of the work. The preliminary classification has been based upon Dana’s System of Mineralogy. Attending to correspondence and preparing card catalogues are other work of the department. In the reserve series of the department there are 7,150 specimens, of which 1,152 are on exhibition. In the duplicate series there are about 7,400 specimens, which, with the reserve series, make a total of about 14,550. DEPARTMENT OF METALLURGY AND ECONOMIC GEOLOGY. FRED. P. DEWEY, Curator. During the past year, as it will be for several years to come, by far the larger portion of the material administered upon in this department was from the Centennial collections. Aside from this material, among the most interesting additions the department has received may be mentioned an extensive series of cokes, for the most part kindly sent by the various manufacturers, upon solicitation, for the purposes of an ex- tended examination into its physical properties as affecting its employ- meng as a metallurgical fuel (the series already represents most of the chief coking regions and is being increased from time to time); an ex- tensive series of the iron ores and their associates and of apatite and its associates from Canada, collected by myself during my summer vacation; a small suite of Virginia gold ores from various parties, and especially Mr. W. G. Love, of Richardsville; a full suite of the recently discovered tin ore and its associates from Irish Creek, Virginia, collected by Mr. F. W. Taylor, U.S. N. M; asuite of specimens collected by Ensign E. Wil- kinson, U.S. N., in Colorado, which is especially interesting from its rich- ness in coal specimens, both bituminous and anthracite; and, finally, two very important suites of specimens representing the production of cast iron of extraordinary strength ; the first is from Mr. Edward Gridley, of the Wassaic Furnace, Dutchess County, New York, where on a short run, on a carbonate ore, No. 4 charcoal pig iron of 47,500 pounds tensile strength per square inch was produced; and embraces the ore, both raw and roasted, the flux, the slag, and several pieces of the metal, includ- ing some of the test pieces; the second suite is from the Hon. C. E. Coffin, of the Muirkirk Furnace, in Prince George’s County, Maryland; at this furnace charcoal pig iron of unusual strength has been regularly made from a carbonate ore for a number of years, some recent tests of the No. 4 pig iron running up to the very extraordinary figures of 52,475 2 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 269 pounds tensile strength per square inch. This suite includes a very full series of the different varieties of the ore and its associates from a pure siderite through its various stages of decomposition to a limonite, the flux (oyster shells), the charcoal, both kiln and meiler, the slag, and a very extensive and valuable collection of test pieces, with full records of the tests extending over a series of years. In cataloguing the collections, 1,257 entries have been made upon the Museum register, embracing 1,918 specimens; of these, 535 entries were of the 83 accessions received during the year, embracing 882 specimens, and including 190 specimens received from Surveyor-General J. W. Rob- bins, of Arizona, through the General Land Office; the remaining 722 entries of 1,036 specimens were of material previously received, but of which no entry had been made, derived from four sources; 81 entries of 109 specimens from the U. 8S. Geological Surveys; 172 entries of 206 specimens from the U.S. General Land Office; 86 entries of 100 specimens from the old Smithsonian collection, and 383 entries of 621 specimens from the Centennial collections. In the preparation of the card catalogue 3,321 entries, embracing 5,265 specimens, have been made ; these specimens have all been carefully examined by the curator in per- son and 7,314 determinations of mineral species made in the ore speci- mens. For the Smithsonian Institution 36 specimens have been examined and the necesssary reports prepared to accompany them, and two let- ters of information upon special topics have been written. Ensign A. A. Ackerman, U.S. N., rendered valuable aid in the work of the de- partment until the 1st of June, when he was detailed to accompany the Greely relief expedition. Ensign H. M. Witzel, U.S. N., was detailed to the department December 1, and has scarcely had time to become familiar with the operations of the department. The clerical work has been ably performed by Mr. F. J. Offutt. There have been two researches commenced during the year, neither of which, however, has been completed. The first is an extended exam- ination into the physical properties of coke with especial reference to its employment as a metallurgical fuel and the prerequisites of a good coking coal. There have already been examined 153 specimens from 12 localities, and a synopsis of the results already obtained has been pub- lished by the American Institute of Mining Engineers, covering 15 pages of their Transactions, under the title of ‘‘ Porosity and Specific Gravity of Coke.” The second investigation is upon the occurrence of free gold in galena, and will soon be ready for publication. Any statement of the total number of specimens in the collections must be largely of the nature of an estimate, as there are still a great many boxes and packages of Centennial remaining unpacked. With the additions received from the permanent exhibition at Philadelphia dur-- ing the year, I would place the total number at 30,000 or more. As will be seen from what has gone before, the principal attention of 270 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. the department has been devoted to the preparation of the card cata- logue of the ores; and although many specimens are visible, yet it was only towards the close of the yearthat any attempt was made at placing the specimens on exhibition, so that only 763 specimens can be said to belong to the exhibition series; the large bulk of the material is there- fore considered as being for the present in the reserve series, although there have been 321 specimens definitely assigned to the reserve series proper and 465 specimens to the duplicate series. The general condition of the ore collection has been greatly improved by the care and attention devoted to it during the past year; the most part of it is now thoroughly identified, catalogued and provided for, at least temporarily, in cases; it is no longer subject to the unfavorable influences which in the past have tended so much to impair its utility, so that its further deterioration is guarded against as securely as pos- sible. A beginning has been made upon the metal specimens, and while - many of them are badly injured from the exposure and want of care to which they, in common with the ore specimens, have been subjected, others are not so far gone but that they can be made useful, while a few are in a tolerably good state of preservation. The ore collection, while large and in general quite complete, yet con- tains a few prominent deficiencies, for the filling of which some steps should be soon taken, and this is especially so in regard to the ore of a few regions, as Arizona, New Mexico, and the Menominee region, which have come into prominence since the close of the Centennial. Illustrations of the various steps in the extraction of the metals, to- gether with the incidental and by-products, are not as full and complete as could be desired. This being a subject of instruction in the science of metallurgy rather than a matter of the exhibition of showy and attract- ive specimens, it is not at all to be wondered at that the Centennial col- lection from which we derived so much should be deficient in this re- spect. A few complete series in this direction would very greatly en- hance the instructive value of the extensive collections of ores and finished products by providing the necessary connection between the two. An excellent illustration of what is desired in this direction is furnished by the collection already mentioned from the Muirkirk Fur- nace. This collection embraces 75 specimens, and shows everything con- nected with the production of No. 4 iron at that furnace. Besides this, Mr. Coffin has very kindly furnished the department with full analyses and with the record of the running of the furnace, the whole formimg a complete and very instructive exhibit. In this connection it might be well to say that manufacturers are not always willing to give such full illustrations of their operations, and, when they are willing, they do not always take the necessary care in selecting illustrations, so that it will not be so easy to procure just what we need as it might at first ap- pear. ees REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. PA A As indicated in my last annual report, the least satisfactory portion of the collections is that of the methods and means of metallurgical op- erations, the illustration by means of drawings, views, models, and, where practicable, the actual tools used, of the art of metallurgy. This is one of the most interesting and valuable portions of the subject, and at present is so poorly represented as to be scarcely illustrated at all. This deficiency of the collection could very readily be supplied, and it is so important, that a beginning should be made upon it as soon as pos- sible in the coming year. The construction of a special chemical laboratory for the use of this department, which has been approved and ordered, will facilitate greatly the work of the department in making chemical examinations and analyses. The present chemical laboratory, besides being crowded with other work, is inconvenient for this department. There aremany subjects for chemical examination coming up almost daily in the work of cataloguing the collection, while the opportunities and demands for research upon the collections are almost unnumbered, so that the laboratory will be well occupied just as soon as it can be completed. This being the first complete year since the establishment of the de- partment, a great deal of care and attention has been absorbed in its proper inauguration, and, on account of the difficulties of handling so much bulky material as must necessarily constitute the exhibition se- ries, the department has not made as much progress in the exhibition of specimens as could be desired; but most of the difficulties of inaugura- tion are now passed, and, with a sufficient force of laborers to prepare and handle the specimens, there is no reason why the exhibition of this department should not begin to assume the prominent position in the Museum which it is entitled to hold from its interest and great value. THE MUSEUM LIBRARY. F. W. TRvE, Librarian. The following report upon the operations of the library in 1883 is re- spectfully submitted. In the present condition of affairs it is perhaps impossible to furnish a report of a general character suitable for publi- cation. I have therefore confined myself entirely to the simple details of administrative work. The recommendations which I have already made relative to addi- tional assistance, the establishment of more definite relations between this library and that of the Smithsonian Institution, an increase of reg- ularity in the receipt of periodicals, it is unnecessary to repeat in this connection. 272 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Accessions. The accessions for 1883 surpassed in number those of the preceding year. The following table shows the proportion of quarto and larger books, to the octavos and those of smaller size, and the total for the year: Table showing the number of accessions in 1883. Sizes. Volumes.| Parts. phiote.* Total. Quartos and larger .-----.----..------b-<6 17 7 73 97 Octavos and samaller-.-->- s-c2t-5+-5- 2 52- 147 44 389 580 Total eeeect tp cosee hae ee eee ee 164 51 462 677 *Any work of less than 100 pages is regarded as a pamphlet. The accessions of public documents, except those relating to the natural sciences, are not included in this table. The majority are not properly within the scope of the library, and if entered and put upon the shelves, would occupy space which should be devoted to works more directly of use. The works included in the table were received from 73 societies, museums, and other organizations, and from 74 indi- viduals. Only 14 were obtained by purchase. The following persons and institutions have contributed four or more works during the year: Octavo | Quarto Octavo | Quarto Contributors. volumes. | volumes. stat stata, IProtis jb alt ese ses ee beer ae ei 52 367 5 Geological Survey of Great Britain and ireland 255 coat ooeeecoes seceieae eee 49 61 14 Drvhrancis Day. Wondone seems seco oe ee ean e aera eee ela tenial= Me Bedeos'Sso- Profswalliam El. blower WOngon ees ee ss Soe eseeeelleaeee = eae a 5 Dr. Charles A. White, U.S. Geolog. Survey. 1 ee Sera MO) Wesados Sa84 Portland Society of Natural History --....|..---...-.|---------- OO ee a Mr. Walter Faxon, Cambridge, Mass...-..|---------.|---------- rf eer 355 Royal Society of New South Wales ...-.-.|-.-.-..--.|.--------- Val Aerts Late in the year, the United States Fish Commissioner deposited in thelibrary 140 volumes upon ichthyology and kindred subjects. A com- plete set of the reports upon the scientific results of the Challenger Ex- pedition and other equally important works are included in this series. Loan and return of books.—For the record of these most important transactions of the library, two large record-books are in use. In one of these the books borrowed are entered by the names of the authors, with cross-reference to the name of the person borrowing and the date of the loan. In the second record all the books borrowed by each person are recorded under his name. This system, which might be impracticable in a large library, is very useful and desirable in a _ REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 273 smaller one in which the books are much handled. In addition, each person is required to sign a call-card for the books received and to de- mand the same when they are returned. : The number of names now included in the list of those entitled to draw books is sixty-seven. The number of books issued and returned during the several months is as follows: Months. Drawn. Returned. EMIS es onion so Se a alea sean ee Smee se wae sae esaee re Saas 119 92 MCE VR ee So ONES cet nee coe te aree seme ete mato ais 199 57 ESSN Ti Se Ses a ae nd ee A Soe | te ES Sere Seek ewes 174 138 PAE e ae ee cea one a Sie ee = ein el acini enero eaes 95 65 NICS eee of eins see ee Sais rinis = Goeeenc eases 767 412 RUE ee eee oo Means oe oe aise ase ches. Sacet so waren. 144 238 TADIAY ~c SE es SE Re eee ee ese, Sree Sele 149 185 J.) ETSI ooamoe osc sone God rene sdes Bos soescces teroar sagese Re sHOM DOE ce ta os sinew has psa S055 cake dias aca sraweicle sacicicwe 334 176 DIGI BOES Se ee he oes cee ees Bde eee oe ete ale bidet bese 206 68 LA OOSPELEEL Die SE pe a ne gs Sa ee eae 143 276 PEPER OT ee ene Oe te SRO oe ocak cmap useless 295 477 Rea cal ee a ee AN a cr ae a re eae 2S eas 2,184 During the period of active work in winter and until May, the num- ber of books drawn exceeds that of those returned, while the reverse is ~ usually the case upon the approach of summer. The abnormal condi- tion in November and December is due to the fact that certain rearrange- ments in the Museum made it necessary that the whole of one sectional library should be returned. For the benefit of the clerks, messengers, and other employés who are debarred by the regulations from withdrawing books regularly from the library, it has been deemed advisable to set apart a certain num- ber of works of general interest. ss Now sem se EES) OMe. suet Sore tase =. wiein ne 46 MIRREN ie Do So hs weg DO AMOUR oe ce ete ain ss Sos tae 0 LE NE a ees Se eee Pi POPUOMIDARE ect. s 2... oe aos 47 UE ae Re ae eee De MOOEGUORT S25. oss wo te 40 RNS Se Sienna a Go i November 2222.20... .5-223 eae ee eos ee By | PEEOMDED a5. 0.9. <2 - see da te H. Mis, 69———18 274 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. In the periodical register, in which all journals are entered number by number, with the date of receipt, 2,639 entries have been made. Catalogues.—The card-catalogue by authors has been very consider- ably added to during the year. The number of books catalogued each month is as follows : MRA MADY oi Os nth he Le Se 148; August...... . ee 0 HeEWRUATY cico es ss cokes se. 152 | September: :> tc. - roe. 133 MATCH Ao coe sews Cee ice ors 147) October. 1. 2225. eee se te 97 PAIN ciel oie tani e catalan 62) NOveEMBDEr 22:2 8 iape ences 119 MAY). is ch sree ec kbs S 262 | December ...-............ 43 June oe hoseb ake Ike ee 126 SERED July 66 Totales Joos ee oe if 335 The catalogue includes, in addition to titles of the books in the Mu- seum library, and those of the books in the library of the U. S. Fish Commission. a The number of cards in each case is as follows: VE TIS 0 ei ei eee eee ee Sa Pree ep atinc ae Sepia i canic yeas 9, 557 iiss. eish Commission UDIary. <2 oerselees once ore ce cite arenes 634 PRO GaM orcas Bese Rae win cae ieee mete) ae ae ee 10, 191 Sectional libraries.—Two new sectional libraries have been established, those in charge of the honorary assistant curator of invertebrate fossils and the acting curator of foods and textiles. There are, in all, 13 similar libraries. The number of volumes of monographic books and pamphlets in each is as follows: Secsionror building stones 2 3.252 Sa Si as See es 110 Department Of mammals: ess oo eels4 Beni ctelape cle casio eles opt nee 122 Department of invertebrate fossils: INTE SOZOLC IE. Lee aM SS: ORE ssarete ve ae ee ene eaPataleeatct eta aoe 96 Paleozoic. 225. - sea TRS SE Tas a ah A Re RII ate ane ett are taeee 17 Department of birds):2es haa salar wee kee he oelets chebiet es, aepciae 92 Seewen -OF Materia: MeOMICA (220,02 2.6 ok whe Giarstajae ei ae ale aisle Seto eieiee ale fee Department of fishes............ Sve Seicietsre ane 8 Sie eet are 54 Department of chemistry ......-..-...-.-.3 _ EEE ee os | 64 Wepariment.ot archwmology 52-25 Pees see ee Seek 2 ok hc eee 25 Department .of metallurgy -'.....2- hse ets Ah ose ews e' Se oe aera 26 PpHarMNent OL TOPOS isis. crtee a ieeehise~ ues oslo eee eeeoee See 22 Department of marine invertebrates......... ..-....2..----0--. 29 Sectionint s0008, and textiles.) vie eke kise oo ate eee nee 6 WGA Pe os disks sa pei, a els ees ites Number of books.—On page 3 of the report of the assistant director for 1882, the number of books in the library is estimated at 5,800, and of pamphlets, 5,500. By the additions of the past year the number of books now reached is about 6,015, and of pamphlets, 5,962, REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 275 APPENDIX A.—OFFICERS OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM. SPENCER F. BAIRD, LL. D., Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, Director of the Museum. G. BROWN GOODE, A. M., Assistant Director ; Curator, Dep’t of Arts and Industries. TARLETON H. BEAN, M. S., M. D., Curator, Department of Fishes: Editor. CAPT. CHARLES BENDIRE, U.S. A., *Curator, Section of Oology. A. HOWARD CLARK, Assistant, Department of Arts and Industries. FRANK W. CLARKE, A. M. (U. 8. Geol. Sur.), * Curator, Department of Minerals. JOSEPH W. COLLINS, Acting Curator, Section of Naval Architecture. WILLIAM H. DALL (U. 8S. Coast Survey), * Curator, Department of Mollusks. FRED. P. DEWEY, S. B., Curator, Department of Metallurgy. R. EDWARD EARLL, S. B., Acting Curator of the Fisheries Collection. JAMES M. FLINT, M. D., U.S. N., *Curator, Section of Materia Medica. ROMYN HITCHCOCK, Acting Curator, of the Textile Collection. FREDERIC A. LUCAS, Assistant, Department of Comparative Anatomy. GEORGE P. MERRILL, M.S., Acting Curator, Depart. Lithology and Physical Geology. RICHARD RATHBOUN, M. S., Curator, Department of Marine Invertebrates. CHARLES RAU, Ph. D., Curator, Department of Archeology. ROBERT RIDGWAY, Curator, Department of Birds. CHARLES VY. RILEY, Ph. D. (Depart. Agr), *Curator, Depart. of Insects. ROBERT E. C. STEARNS, Adjunct Curator, Department of Mollusks. FREDERICK W. TRUE, M.S., Curator, Depart. of Mammals and Compar. Anatomy. CHARLES D. WALCOTT (U. 8S. Geological Survey), *Curator, Department of Fossil Invertebrates (Paleozoic). LESTER F. WARD, LL. B. (U. S. Geological Survey), *Curator of Department of Fossil Plants. CHARLES A. WHITE, M. D. (U. S. Geological Survey), *Curator, Department of Fossi Invertebrates (Mesozoic and Cenozoic). HENRY C. YARROW, M.D., *Curator, Department of Reptiles and Batrachians. WILLIAM §. YEATES, Aid, Department of Minerals. STEPHEN C. BROWN, Registrar. HENRY HORAN, Superintendent of Buildings. * Honorary. 276 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. APPENDIX B.—BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR 1883. Norr.—The annotations, unless otherwise signed, will be understood to have been made by the curator of the department to which the paper relates. ANALYSIS. PART I.—PUBLICATIONS OF THE MUSEUM. PART II.—PAPERS BY OFFICERS OF THE MUSEUM. x PART III.—PAPERS BY INVESTIGATORS NOT OFFICERS OF THE MU- SEUM, BASED ON MUSEUM MATERIAL. PART I.—PUBLICATIONS OF THE MUSEUM. Department of the Interior. U. S. National Museum. 34. Proceed- ings of the U.S. National Museum. Vol. v, 1882. Published un- der the direction of the Smithsonian Institution. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo, pp. i-xii, 1-703. The first twenty-eight signatures, viz, pp. 1-448, were published in 1882. Sigs. 29, 30, Feb. 13, 1883; 31,32, Feb. 28; 33-35, March 21; 36, March 23; 37, Apr. 19; 38, Apr. 25; 39, May 12; 40, May 22; 41, May 28; 42, June 26. This volume contains 91 papers relating to the work of the Museum, pre- pared by 35 authors. All published in 1883 are enumerated under the au- thor’s name in this appendix. Proceedings of the U.S. National Museum. (Vol. VI.) Signatures 1-22 inclusive were printed and distributed in 1883. Department of the Interior. U.S. National Museum. Bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. No.16. Synopsis of the Fishes of North America. By David 8S. Jordan and Charles 8S. Gilbert. Washing- ton: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo. pp. i-lvi, 1-1018. Department of the Interior: U.S. National Museum. Bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. No. 20. Bibliographies of American Nat- uralists. I. The publishers writings of Spencer Fullerton Baird, 1843-1882, by George Brown Goode, Assistant Director of the Na- tional Museum. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo. pp. 1-xvi, 1-377. Department of the Interior: U.S. National Museum. Bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. No. 24. Check List of North American Reptilias and Batrachia, with Catalogue of Specimens in U.S. Na- tional Museum. By H.C. Yarrow, M. D., Honorary Curator De partment of Reptiles. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1883, 8vo. pp. (6) 1-249, ee REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 277 ~ Department of the Interior: U.S. National Museum. Bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. No. 26. - Avifauna Columbiana: Being a list of Birds ascertained to inhabit the District of Columbia, with the times of arrival and departure of such as are nenesideuts. and brief notices of habits, &c. The second edition, revised to date, and entirely re-written. By Elliott Coues, M. D., Ph. D., Professor of Anatomy in the National Medical College, &c., and D. Webster Prentiss, A. M., M. D., Professor of Materia Medica and Therapeu- tics in the National Medical College, etc. Washington: Govern- ment Printing Office. 1883. 8vo. pp. 1-133. 4 maps. The following Museum circulars which were printed as ‘‘ separates” dur- ing the year, were also published in the Appendix to volume VI, Pro- ceedings of the U. 8S. National Museum, for 1883. No. 19. Classification of the Materia Medica collection of the U. S. Na- tional Museum, and Catalogue of Specimens. By James M. Flint, Surgeon U.S. Navy, Curator of Materia Medica. 8vo. 1-14 pp. No. 20. Request for Specimens of Drugs, and Information concerning them. 8vo.1p. No. 21. Circular relative to contributions of Aboriginal Antiquities, to the U.S. National Museum. By Charles Rau. 8vo. 4 pp. No. 22. Brief directions for removing and preserving the skins of Main- mals. By William T. Hornaday, Chief Taxidermist. 8vo. 1-6 pp. No. 23. Instructions for taking paper moulds of inscriptions in stone, wood, bronze, &c. By Ensign A. P. Niblack, U.S. N. 8vo. pp. 1-17. Parts A, B, C, D, E, F, G, Bulletin 27, U. S. N. M., were printed as ‘‘ sep- arates” in 1883, and are mentioned in this bibliography under the names of the authors. See GooDE, RATHBUN, RIDGWAY, WINSLOW, BROWN, BEAN. PART II.—PAPERS BY OFFICERS OF THE MUSEUM. BAIRD, SPENCER F.—The instruction of naval midshipmen in taxi- dermy, ichthyology, etc., at the United States National Museum, and on board the steamers of the United States Fish Commission. (Bull. U. 8. Fish Commission, 111, pp. 239-243. 1883.) BEAN, TARLETON H.—Description of a species of whitefish, Coregonus hoyi, (Gill) Jordan, called “smelt” in some parts of New York. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v, pp. 658-660. 1883.) List of the FisHes. (In Stearns’ ‘ Notes on the Natural His- tory of Labrador.”) (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Aug 1, 1883,) vol. v1, pp. 123-125.. The names of seventeen species collected for the U.S. National Museum by Mr. W. A. Stearns in 1882. The common names and the remarks are by Mr. Stearns. One of the most interesting of the species is Scomber scom- brus, from Labrador. 978 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. BEAN, TARLETON H.—Directions for collecting and preserving fish. (Bull. U. S. Fish Com. Sept. 3, 1883, vol. 1, pp. 197-200. Reprinted from Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. iv, pp. 235-238.) The first occurrence of Pseudotriacis microdon, Capello, on the coast of the United States. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 147-150.) This shark stranded, February 8, 1883, at the Amagansett life-saving sta- tion, on Long Island, and was forwarded to the Museum by Mr. J. B. Ed- wards. It is the first result of a request by Prof. 8. F. Baird to the superin- tendent of life-saving stations, Mr. 8. I. Kimball, for information from points along the entire coast concerning the movements and the stranding of marine animals and for the sending of desirable specimens to the National Museum, Pseudotriacis microdon is a rare shark which was first observed on the coast of Portugal. : The genus Pseudotriacis is redefined and the species fully described. — — Description of anew species of Alepidosaurus (A. wesculapius) from Alaska. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. March 23, 1883, v, pp. 661-663.) Alepidosaurus esculapius, n. 8. (Lliuliuk, Unalaschka, p. 661.) Great International Fisheries Exhibition; London, 1883. United States of America. TF. Catalogue of the Collections of Fishes ex- hibited by the United States National Museum, by Tarleton H. Bean, Curator of the Department of Fishes in the United States National Museum. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo, pp. 1-124. (Forms part of Bull. 27, U.S. Nat. Mus.) This catalogue relates to about 450 species of North American fishes, or nearly one-third of the known fauna. The principal common names are given, and the geographical distribution is stated as fully as possible. The maximum size of the species, their importance as food or bait, and their re- productive habits are briefly noticed. In the remarks upon the several groups of fishes exhibited will be found a sketch of the most recent information con- cerning the fish-fauna of the regions from which they were obtained. The survey of Alaskan fishes is the most detailed, and brings the list of known species up to the date of printing of this section of the catalogue. Notes on some fishes collected by James G. Swan in Washing- ton Territory, including a new species of Macrurus. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, v1, pp. 362-364.) Macrurus acrolepis, nu. 8., besides information concerning Delolepis virgatus, Bramaravi, and 8 other species. Notes on fishes observed at the head of Chesapeake Bay in the spring of 1882, and upon other species of the same region. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, v1, pp. 362-364.) Concerning 31 species for the most part taken in the seine by the U. 8. Fish Commission, June 9 and 10, 1882. The common names in use at Havre de Grace are recorded,and brief notes are given about spawning habits and times of arrival and departure. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 279 BEAN, TARLETON H.—Condition and methods of administration of the department of fishes in the U. S. National Museum in 1882. (Report Asst. Director U. S. Nat. Mus., 1, 1882, pp. 19-21; 49-50; 87-96.) BRown, JAMES TEMPLE.—Great International Fisheries Exhibition; ' London; 1883. United States of America. (K.) The Whale Fish- ery and its Appliances. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo. pp. 1-116. Contains (a) classification of apparatus used in American whale fishery ; (b) catalogue of whaling apparatus sent by United States to London, includ- ing: 1. Apparatus used by the white man; 2. Apparatus used by the Cape Flattery Indians, with a brief account of these Indians, their manners, habits, and customs; 3. Whaling and sealing apparatus used by Eskimo. Some notes on whales. (Bull. U. 8. Fish Com., vol. m1, p. 411.) CLARK, A. HowARD.—NStatistics of the whale fishery. (In United States Catalogue of London Fisheries Exhibition (section E). “The whale fishery and its appliances,” pp. 26-29, inclusive. ) Reviews the past and present extent of the American whale fishery, gives the distribution of the fleet, the relative importance of the various whaling grounds during the years 1870 to 1880, and exhibits statistical tables showing (1) the number and tonnage of vessels engaged in the fishery for the years 1870-1880, (2) the value of sperm-oil, whale-oil, and whalebone landed by the American fleet, the value of the consumption in the United States, and the value of the exportation annually from 1870 to 1880, and (3) the number of barrels of sperm and whale oil and pounds of whalebone landed by the Amer- ican fleet, the quantities consumed in the United States, and the quantities exported annually from 1870 to 1880. International angling tournament. (Forest and Stream, New York, June 28, 1883.) Letter from London, giving an account of an angling tournament at Welsh Harp, near London, June 11, 1883. — — London Fisheries Exhibition. (Chelsea Record, Chelsea, Mass., July 8, 1883.) Letter from London, descriptive of incidents connected with the Interna- tional Fisheries Exhibition. The United States display at the London Exhibition. (Boston Herald, September 9, 1883.) Communication concerning the exhibit of the United States at the Interna- tional Fisheries Exhibition. —— Methods of packing [mackerel] and inspection laws. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 137-161; Rep. U. 8. Fish Com., Part ix, for 1881, pp. 227-252.) —— Statistics of inspection of mackerel from 1804 to 1880. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 162-213; Rep. U. 8. Fish Com., Part ix, for 1881, pp. 252-307.) 280 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. CLark, A. HowARD.—{The mackerel] inspection laws of the United States. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 354-394; Rep. Us §. Fish Com., Part ix, for 1881, pp. 444-484.) ——— [Statistical description] of the American whale fishery. (Goode’s fishery industries of the United States, Loudon, 1883, pp. 37-39). —— Table.—Statistics of the menhaden industry in 1880. (Goode’s fishery industries of the United States, London, 1883, opp., p. 41.) COLLINS, JOSEPH WILLIAM.*—Notes on the movements, habits, and capture of mackerel for the season of 1882. (Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 11, pp. 273-285.) Notes on the herring fishery of Massachusetts Bay in the au- tumn of 1882. (Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 11, pp. 287-290.) ——— Notes on the halibut fisheries of 1881-’82. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 1, pp. 311-316.) Success of the gill-net cod-fishery on the New England coast, winter of 1882-83. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 11, pp. 441-443.) Chronological notes [on the mackerel fishery, 1621-1881 ]. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 217-353 ; Rep. U. 8. Fish Com., Part ix, for 1881, pp. 307-443.) DALL, WILLIAM HEALEY.—Ciree versus Gouldia. (Journal of Conchology, Leeds, April, 1883, pp. 60-63). —— Year book of the German Malakozodlogical Society. (Review in American Naturalist, May, 1883, xvu, pp. 521-523.) Pearls and pearl fisheries. (American Naturalist, vol. xv11, No. 6, June, 1583, pp. 579-587, and No. 7, July, 1883, pp. 731-745.) —— Norwegian North Atlantic expedition, 1876~78. (American Naturalist, xvu, No. 6, pp. 628, 629, June, 1883.) Notes on the Pacific coast trade in shells, shrimps, cod, and salmon (during the year 1882). (Bull. U. 8. Fish Com., 1883, 111, p. 425.) —— Note on eluster flies. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Museum, 1888, v, pp. 635-636.) ——— More about the “ stickfish” ( Verrillia blakei Stearns). (Forest and Stream, June 14, 1883, vol. xx, p. 384.) *See also under GoopE and COLLINS. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 281 Dai, WitL1AM HEALEY.—The snail nuisance. (Evening Star, Washington, June 30, 1883. ) NotTE.—This is in regard to a plague of slugs which appeared to annoy house- keepers in an unusual way. The Department of Mollusks in the U.S. National Museum. (Rep. Asst. Director U. S. Nat. Museum for 1882, pp. 21-24, 50-57, 96; Smithsonian Report for 1882 (1884), pp. 139-142, 168, 169, 214.) On a collection of shells sent from Florida by Mr. Henry Hemp- hill. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Museum, Dec. 27, 1883, v1, pp. 318-342.) —— History and distribution of the fresh-water mussels. (Science, vol.1, No. 1, p. 22, Feb. 9, 1883.) — Studies of the Italian cretaceous fossils. (Science, vol. 1, No. 1, p. 22.) _——— Tryon’s conchology. (Ibid., No. 2, p. 40.) —— A remarkable molluscan type. (1bid., p. 51.) —— First use of wire in deep-sea sounding. (Ibid., p. 65.) —— Trade in California invertebrates. (Ibid., p.78.) — Mollusks of the family Cocculinide, (Ibid., p. 130.) —— American paleozoic fossils. (1bid., p. 173.) —— Use of wire in sounding. (Ibid., p. 191.) _—— European land shells. (Ibid., p. 202.) —— Shells from the Colorado region. (Ibid., p. 202.) —— Variations of Pompholyx. (Ibid., p. 202.) —— Report of the Connecticut Shell-fish Commission, 1883. (Ibid., p. 223, 224.) —— Soft parts of Ammonites. (Ibid., p. 230.) —— Report on mollusks of the North Atlantic. (Ibid., p. 259.) 282 DAL, WILLIAM HEALEY.—Disease in oysters. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. (Science, vol. 1, p. 316.) Venus mercenaria in Britain. (4bid., p: 316.) Large American pearls. (Ibid., p. 371.) Ottawa Unionide. (Ibid., p. 371.) Fossils of the Rizzolo clays. (Ibid., p. 371.) White’s Fossil [non-marine] mollusks of North America. (1bid., p. 425.) 4 . The position of Rhodope. (Ibid., p. 443.) Fischer’s Manuel de Conchyliologie. (Idid., p. 443.) Anatomy of Parmacella. (Ibid., p. 443.) Curious slug from Madagascar. (Ibid., p. 443.) Italian limaces. (1bid., p. 466.) Molluscan fauna of Sardinia. (Ibid., p. 466.) East Indian Pulmonata. (Ibid., p. 466.) Snails used for food in Spain. (Ibid., p. 492.) Extraordinary Eulima. (Idid., p. 492.) Arctic mollusks. (Ibid., p. 492.) North German miocene. (Ibid., p. 492.) Variations in Unionide. (Ibid., p. 523.) Action of the heart [in Helix] during hibernation. (Ibid., p. 523.) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 983 Dai, WILLIAM HEALEY.—Malacological notes. (Science, vol. I, p. 524.) — Land-snails from Bering Strait and Alaska. (Ibid., pp. 583, 584.) —— A man-eating mollusk. (Idid., p. 584.) —— Monograph of Onchidium. (Tbid., p. 584.) —— The coloring matter of the bile of invertebrates. (Ibid., p. 612.) _— — First use of wire in sounding. (Science vol. u, pp. 12, 13.) ——— Abyssal mollusks. (Ibid., pp. 22, 23.) ——— Mediterranean mollusca. (Idid., p. 113.) -— Structure of the shell in brachiopods and chitons. (Idid., p. 113.) — Economic mollusks at the Fisheries Exhibition. (1bid., p. 117.) ——— Existence of a shell in Notarchus. (Ibid., p. 206.) ——— New abyssal mollusks. (Ibid., p. 206. ) ——— Pleurotomide of Senegambia. (Ibid., p. 381.) ——— Mollusca of the Caucasus. (Ibid., p. 382.) -——— Monograph of Ringicula. (Idid., p. 382). ——— The Chesapeake oyster beds. © (1bid., pp. 440-443. ) —— Astarte triquetra Conrad. (Ibid., p. 447.) —— Anatomy of Urocyclus. (Ibid., p. 447.) —— Tryon’s conchology. (Ibid., pp. 658, 659. ) 284 - REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Dau, WitL1AM HEALEY.—Land shells of Gibraltar. (Science, vol. 11, p. 663.) — Absorption of the shell in Auriculide. (1bid., p. 663.) ——— Organization of chitons. (Ibid., p. 691.) —__— Pulmonata of Central Asia. (Idid., p. 721.) —— Mediterranean oysters. (Ibid., p. 721.) — Mollusks at the Fisheries Exhibition. (Idid., p. 721.) —— Abyssal mollusks. (Ibdid., p. 748.) ——— Further researches on Nudibranchs. (1bid., p. 748.) ——— Extra marine mollusks of New Guinea. (Ibid., p. 773.) ——— Structure of the oyster shell. (Ibid., p. 773.) —— Spinning by Arion hortensis. (1bid., p. 773.) ——_ Fossils of Pachino. (Ibid., p. 803. ) ——— Spicula amoris of British Helices. (1bid., p. 803. ) ——— Shell structure of Chonetes. (Idid., p. 803. ) DEWEY, FRED. P.—The condition and prospects of the department of metallurgy and economic geology in the U. S. National Mu- seum. (Rep. Asst. Director U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, 1883, pp. 34, 37, 105; Smithson- ian Report for 1882, 1884, pp. 152-155, 223.) Biographical sketch of the late Dr. George Wesson Hawes. (Smithsonian Report for 1882, pp. 35-38.) Some practical applications of combustion. (Journ. U. 8. Assoc. of Charcoal Iron Workers, April, 1883, vol. Iv, pp. 105-115. ) Gives a review of the applications of heat. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 285 DEWEY, FRED. P.—Connellsville v. New River Coke. (‘The Virginias,” April, 1883, p. 51.) A criticism of some published results of determinations of physical proper- ties of coke. The porosity and specitic gravity of coke. (Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers, vol. xi, pp. 111-125.) Gives the results of a series of experiments made in the Museum upon the porosity and specific gravity of various American cokes. Some Canadian iron ores. (Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers, vol. x11, pp. 192-204.) Gives the results of an examination of some of the Canadian iron-ore fields, EARLL, R. EDwAaRrpD.—The present condition of fish culture. (Nature, vol. xxv, No. 23, October, 4, 1883, pp. 542-544.) Contains a comparison of the more important forms of apparatus employed for heavy semi-buoyant floating and adhesive eggs. The methods of collect- ing and transporting eggs, and of retarding their development by reduction of temperature. The possibility of retarding the spawning season by judi- cious feeding is also referred to, together with a brief summary of the results of fish culture in different countries. Statistics of the mackerel fishery in 1880. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 124-131; Report U. S. Fish Commission, part ix, for 1881, pp. 214-221.) The mackerel canning industry. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery, 1883, pp. 131-137; Report U.S. Fish Commission, part ix, for 1881, pp. 221-227.) —— A brief history of fish culture in the United States. (Goode’s Fishery Industry of the United States, London, 1883, pp. 14-18.) ——— Statistics of the work of the U. 8. Fish Commission. (Goode’s Fishery Industry of the United States, London, 1883, pp. 68-73.) —— Remarks on fish culture in America. (Goode’s Fishery Industry of the United States, London, 1883, pp. 75-79.) —— On possibilities for the development of Irish fishery. (Conference papers. International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 30, pp. 26-30.) —— On the soft clam of the United States. (Conference papers. International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, June 21, pp. 16-18.) — Remarks on the Alaska seal fisheries. (Conference papers. International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 6, pp. 20-21.) FLin1, JAMES M.—Report upon the section of materia medica in the _ U.S. National Museum. (Report, Asst. Director U. S. Nat. Mus., for 1882 (1883), pp. 107-112; Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (1884), pp. 225-230.) 286 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. GoopE, G. BRown.—Notes on the Lampreys—Petromyzontide. (Bull. U. 8. Fish Comm., Apr. 25-May 4, 1883, vol. 11, pp. 349-354.) ——— The generic names Amitra and Thyris replaced. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., July 27, 1883, vol. vi, p. 109.) Amitra replaced by Monomitra and Thyris by Delothyris. Great International Fisheries Exhibition. London, 1883. United States of America. A preliminary catalogue and synopsis of the collections exhibited by the U. S. Fish Commission and by special exhibitors, with a concordance to the official classification of the exhibition. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1883. 8vo., pp. 1-107. (A. Howard Clark and J. W. Collins assisted in the preparation of this part of the London catalogues. ) Plan of inquiry into the history and present condition of the fisheries of the United Sates. (Report U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, for 1880, part viii, pp. 1-52.) A reprigf of a circular printed by the Census Office in 1879, 8vo., pp. 54. Circular 29 in Appendix B was prepared by C. G. Atkins. ——— The first decade of the U.S. Fish Commission; its plan of work and accomplished results, scientific and economical. Read at the Boston meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, August, 1880. (Report U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 1880, Part viii, pp. 52-62. Bull. U.S. Fish Commission, 0, pp. 169-178.) Reprint with slight modifications, from the Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, 1881. ——— Materials for a history of the sword-fishes. (Report U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 1880. Part viii, pp. 287-394 (with plates i-xxiv and index.) ’ Materials for a history of the sword-fishes by George Brown Goode. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo., pp. [1]-[106] plates i—xxiv. Extracted from the annual report of the Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 1880. Natural history of the mackerel. Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery. (Title in full below.) 1883, pp. [3]-[48]. — Statistics of the fisheries of the United States in 1880. (Compendium of the Tenth Census, Part ii, Table evi, pp. 1402-1403.) (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., m1, pp. 270-271; also in Fishery Industries of the United States, and in Part A of the Official Catalogue of the Fisheries Exhibition.) —— Outline of a scheme of museum classification. (Trans. Anthropological Society of Washington, 11, 1883, pp. 5-7.) Notice of reading with abstract and remarks of Prof. O. T. Mason, Dr. Miles Rock, Dr. Robert Fletcher, Mr. Hutcheson, and Mr. F. W. True, with teplies of author. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 287 GooDE, G. BRown.—Report of the assistant director of the U.S. Na- tional Museum for the year 1881. (Report of the Smithsonian Institution for 1881, pp. 81-159; also as sepa- rate with title, pp. (2) 1-79. The first of the series. Review in Science. Boston, 11, pp. 63-66; 119-123. — — The fisheries of the United States. (Official Catalogue, Great International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, Ist ed., pp. 283-5; 2d ed., pp. 189-91.) A review of the fishery industries of the United States and the work of the U. 8. Fish Commission by G. Brown Goode, M. A., assistant director of the U. S. National Museum, and commis- sioner to the International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, Read at a conference of the International Fisheries Exhibition June 25, 1883, his excellency James Russell Lowell in the chair. London, William Clowes & Sons, Limited, International Fisheries Exhibition, and 13 Charing Cross, 8. W. 1883, 8vo, pp. 1-84. Full text with remarks of Professor Huxley, Mr. Earllg the Marquis of Exeter, the Marquis of Hamilton, and Mr. James Russell Lowell. — Salmon culture in the United States. Papers of the conferences, International Fisheries Exhibition, June 21, 1883, pp. 28-29. — On the land-locked salmon. Papers of the conferences, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, June 21, 1883, pp. 29-31. The uses of the round clam of the United States. Papers of the conferences, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, June 21, 1883 (No. 2), pp. 19-20. The suitability of the black-bass for introduction into En g- land. Letter to R. B. Marston, esq. ’ Papers of the conferences, International Fisheries Exhibition, June 29, ; ~ pp. 1883, 18-19. —— Recent progress of the Canadian fisheries. (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 2. pp. 46-47.) —— American investigations upon the food of fishes. (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 12. pp. 29-33.) —— The development of the American mackerel fisheries. Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 13. pp. 30-32.) The successes of fish culture in the United States and Canada. Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 17. pp. 27-29). 288 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. GoopE, G. Brown.—Motion of thanks to Sir Henry Thompson for papers on “Fish as food.” (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 17, 1883. No.2, pp. 31-32.) The scientific results of the Fisheries Exhibition. (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 20. pp. 23-26.) Importance of forest protection to fish culture in the United States. (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 20. No.2, pp. 13-14.) On methods of protection of fisheries. Motion of thanks to C. E. Fryer for paper on ‘‘ A National Fishery Society.” (Conference papers, International Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, July 27. pp. 36-32.) The International Fisheries Exhibition. (Science, 1883, vol. 1, pp. 447-450; pp. 564-565, m1, pp. 129-131; 612-615, with illustrations. ) Report of the assistant director of the U. S. National Museum for the year 1882. From the Smithsonian report for 1882. Wash- ington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo., pp. 1-145. Obituary notice of Dr. G. W. Hawes. (In report assistant director U. 8. N. M., 1882, pp. 40-48, with bibliography prepared by George P. Merrill.) Bibliography of the published writings of Spencer Fullerton Baird. GoopE, G. Brown, and BEAN, TARLETON H.—Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, at Harvard College. Vol. x, No.5. Re- ports on the results of dredging, under the supervision of Alex- ander Agassiz, on the east coast of the United States, during the summer of 1880, by the U. S. Coast Survey steamer Blake, Com- mander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., commanding. Published by per- mission of Carlile P. Patterson and J. E. Hilgard, Superintendents of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. x1x.—Report on the fishes. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, vol. x, No. 5, pp. 183-226, April, 1883.) A list of 52 species collected at stations 302-346 of the Blake dredgings. Only the new genera and species are fully discussed; they are the following: Aphoristia nebulosa, n.s8.; Notosema dilecta, n. g.and n.s.; Macrurus asper, n. s.; Coryphenoides carapinus, n.s.; Chalinura simula, n.g.and u.s.; Barathro- demus manatinus, n. g. and n.s.; Dicrolene introniger, n. g. and n.s.; Laemonema barbatula, nu. s.; Lycodes paxilloides, n.8.; Lycodonus mirabilis, n. g. and n. 8. ; Prionotus alatus, n.s.; Cottunculus torvus, Goode, n.s.; Poromitra capito, n. g. and n.s.; Bathysaurus Agassizti, n.s.; Alepocephalus Agassizii, n.s.; Cyclothone jusca, n. g.and n.8.; Nettastoma procerum, n, 8, REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 289 GoopDE, G. Brown, and JOSEPH W. CoLLiINns.—The mackerel fishery of the United States. (Materials for a history of the mackerel fishery (full title below). 1883. pp. (48)-(118).) GoopE, G. BROWN, JOSEPH W. CoLuins, R. E. EARLL, and A. How- ARD CLARK.—Materials for a history of the Mackerel Fishery. by George Brown Goode, Joseph W. Collins, R. E, Earll, and A. How- ard Clark. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 7617. 8vo, pp. [1]-[441.] Extracted from the Annual Report of the Commissioner of Fish and Fish- eries for 1881. GooDE, G. BRown, and NEwron P. ScuDDER.—Bibliography of the writings of the alumni and faculty of Wesleyan University. (Alumni Record of Wesleyan University. Middletown, 1883. pp. 529- 668. ) GoopRicH, J. Kinc.—The Pacific coast fisheries viewed from a non- professional standpoint. (American Field, 1883, vol. x1x, No. 11, pp. 185-186.) Fish and Fishing. The Beluga or White Whale. (American Field, 1883, vol. x1x, No. 9, pp. 152-154.) Describes the methods employed in the capture of the white whale by na- tives in the Arctic regions, together with a complete and illustrated descrip- tion of the implements of a beluga hunter’s outfit. Hitcncock, Romyn.—Water-bottles and thermometers for deep-sea research at the International Fisheries Exhibition [London]. (Science, August 10, 1883 vol. 11, p. 155.) In this article is described the apparatus exhibited by the United States, Swedish apparatus devised by Professor F. L. Ekman, Arfwidson’s water-bottle, Captain Rung’s apparatus for temperature, the Negretti and Zambra ther- mometers, and Commander Magnaghi’s device for inverting the same. HORNADAY, WILLIAM T.—Mental capacity of the elephant. (Popular Science Monthly, August, 1883, vol. xxu, No. 136, pp. 497-509. ) An array of facts drawn from the observatious of the author on the Indian elephant to show the elephant’s powers of observation, memory, and reason, and an argument to show the possibilities of education in elephants. ' Every boy his own taxidermist. (Mastery, vol.1, eight chapters, p. 131, July 5, 1883; p. 147, July 12; p. 167, July 19; p.185, July 26; p. 337, October 4; p. 353, October 11; p. 369, October 18; p. 385, October 25. Illustrated by sixteen figures. ) One series of four chapters, describing the methods employed in skinning, preserving, mounting, and finishing a small mammal, and another treating of the same processes with small birds. — A review of Maynard’s Manual of Taxidermy. (Science, September 7, 1883, vol. 11, No. 31, p. 312.) Lucas, FREDERIC A.—Nature’s Surgery. (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, January, 1883, p. 9.) Noting instances in which the bones of wild animals had been broken and healed. H. Mis, 69-——19 290 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Lucas, FrEDERIC A.—Our walruses. (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, January, 1883, p. 9.) Notrre.—With cut of three Pacific walruses sent to Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., New York. Contains a criticism on Mr. H. W. Elliott’s remarks on walruses. — Our osteological department. (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, January, 1883, pp. 11 and 12.) . Description of the skeletal work at Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, Rochester, N.Y. : The London Fisheries Exhibition. ¢(Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, April, 1883, p. 7.) A brief description of the exhibit prepared by the U.S. Fish Commission. How to skin turtles; with diagrams. (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, April, 1883, p. 8.) Dental abnormalities ; with cuts. - (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, April, 1883, p.3.) Notes on malformed or aberrant teeth of woodchuck, hog, orang, narwhal, and gorilla. The American Museum of Natural History. (Ward’s Natural Science Bulletin, April, 1883, pp. 10 and 11.) A description of the origin, growth, conteuts, work, and plans of the Am. Mus, Nat. Hist., New York City. The shark’s attendants; with cut. (Mastery, July 19, 1883, p. 169.) Popular account of pilot-fish and remora. How to mount a bird. (Sport with Gun and Rod, pp. 833-853.) Pub. by Century Co., New York, 1883. With many irrelative illustrations from the Century Magazine. MERRILL, GEORGE PERKINS.—On the black nodules in the Maine granites. (Proc. Nat. Mus., 1883, vol. vi, p. 137.) On the collection of Maine building stones in the U.S. National Museum. : (Proc. Nat. Mus., 1883, vol. v1, p. 165.) Preliminary note on the crystalline schists of the District of Columbia. (Proc. Nat. Mus., 1883, vol. v1, p. 159.) Bibliography of writings of Dr. George W. Hawes. (Report of assistant director U. 8. National Museum for 1882, pp. 42-48.) Note on a Potsdam sandstone, or conglomerate, from Berks County, Pennsylvania. (Proc, U. S, Nat, Mus., 1883, vol. v, p. 660.) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 291 MERRILL, GEORGE PEKKINS.—The department of rocks and building stones, U. 8. National Museum, 1882. (Report assistant director U. S. Nat. Mus. for 1882 (1883), pp. 105-106, 112, 113; Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (184), pp. 223-227, 230-231. RATHBUN, RICHARD.—Great International Fisheries Exhibition. Lén- don, 1883. United States of America. B. Collection of Economic Crustaceans, Worms, Echinoderms, and Sponges. By Richard Rathbun, Curator of the Department of Marine Invertebrates in the United States National Museum. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo., pp. 31. Section of the catalogue of the American exhibit at the London Fisheries Exhibition, published in advance of the full catalogue. Contains a résume of the industries afforded by the marine and fresh-water invertebrates (ex- clusive of the mollusca) of the United States, based upon the fishery census investigations of 1880 (pp. 3-20); a list of the species of economic crustaceans, worms, echinoderms, and sponges, and a list of the photographic views illus- trative of the lobster fishery, exhibited at London (pp. 21-31). Great International Fisheries Exhibition. London, 1883. United States of America. G. Descriptive catalogue of the col- lection, illustrating the scientific investigation of the sea and fresh waters. By Richard Rathbun, Curator of the Department of Ma- rine Invertebrates in the United States National Museum. Wash- ington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo., pp. 1-109. Section of the catalogue of the American exhibit at the London Fisheries Exhibition, published in advance of the full catalogue. Contains an intro- duction (pp. 3-29) discussing the extent and character of American explora- tions, with reference to the biology of the sea and fresh waters of the globe, and a descriptive catalogue (pp. 31-109) of the articles exhibited. Very full descriptions are given of the vessels and of all the apparatus now employed by Americans in deep-sea explorations. The descriptive catalogue is divided according to subjects, into the following sections: Vessels employed in deep- sea research ; apparatus for collecting zoological materials; accessory appa- ratus used in connection with deep-sea dredging and trawling; appliances for the examination and storage of zoological materials; appliances for deep- sea sounding; apparatus for physical observations, &c.; marine zoological stations; maps, models, and collections of natural history, illustrating results of explorations. The United States Fish Commission steamer Albatross. (Science, 1883, vol. 11, pp. 6-10, 66-72, with 7 cuts.) A popular description of the steamer Albatross, and of her equipment for deep-sea research. : Sponge culture in Florida. (Science, 1883, vol. 11, p. 213.) An account of recent experiments in growing the sheep’s wool sponge from cuttings for commercial purposes, as exemplified by specimens received at the National Museum from Key West, Florida. 292 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM RATHBUN, RicHARD, and TARR, R. 8.—List of duplicate marine in- vertebrates distributed by the United States National Museum, Series IV, Educational Series No.2. Prepared by R.S. Tarr, un- der the direction of Richard Rathbun. -@ —» (Moc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1883, vol. v1, pp. 212-216.) A list of 124 species of duplicate Crustacea, Annelida, Mollusca, Tunicata, Molluscoida, Echinodermata, Celenterata, and Porifera, selected from the collections made by the U. S. Fish Commission on the New England Coast, for distribution to institutions of learning. About 200 sets, in all, will be pre- pared. ——— The Department of Marine Invertebrates in the U.S. National Museum. (Rep. Asst. Director U. 8. Nat. Mus. for 1882, 1883, pp. 27-31 ; 52; 98-103; Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (1884), pp. 145-149 ; 170; 216-221.) RAU, CHARLES.—Indian stone graves, (American Naturalist, vol. xv, 1883 (Feb.), pp. 180-134. ) A short sketch of the so-called ‘‘ Indian stone graves”, frequently found in some of the States of the Mississippi Valley, with interesting description of their construction. It is explained that, although the practice of burial in stone graves may belong to a remote period, there is good reason to believe that some of these graves are of more recent date, and that the practice of constructing them had not ceased in the present century. —— Accessions to the Department of Antiquities of the U.S. Na- tional Museum in 1882. (Rep. Asst. Director U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1882 (1883), pp. 77-80; Report Smithsonian Institution, for 1882 (1884), pp. 195-198. ) RIDGWAY, ROBERT.—Catalogue of a collection of birds made in the interior of Costa Rica, by Mr. C. C. Nutting. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 493-502. ) An annotated list of 32 species from the Volcan de Irazii and 33 species from San José. The notes on habits, color of eyes, etc., by Nutting. Description of a new Warbler from the Island of Santa Lucia, West Indies. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 525, 526.) Dendreca adelaide delicata ; type, No. 80,909, U. S. Nat. Mus. coll. Description of a supposed new Plover, from Chili. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 526, 527.) Lfigialites albidipectus ; type No. 26,997, S. U. Nat. Mus. On the genus Tantalus, Linn., and its allies. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 550, 551.) The genus Tantalus restricted to the American Wood Ibis, the name Peeu- dotantalus being proposed for the several Old World species. — — Description of a new Petrel from Alaska. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus,, vol. v, pp. 656-658. ) Gstrelata fisheri, type No. 89431, U, S. Nat, Mus., from Kodiak, June 11, 1882, William J. Fisher, collector. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 293 RmGway, Ropurt.—Descriptions of some Birds, supposed to be unde- scribed, from the Commander Islands and Petropaulovski, collected by Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, U. S. Signal Service. (Proc: U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 90-96.) (1) Haliaétus hypoleucus Stejneger, MS. ; (2) Acrocephalus dybowskii, Stejneger, MS. ; (3) Anorthura pallescens, Stejneger, MS.; (4) Hirundo saturata, Stejneger, MS. The type specimens of all in the National Museum collection. On the probable identity of Motacilla ocularis, Swinhoe, and M. amurensis, Seebohm, with remarks on a supposed species, M. blakistoni, Seebohm. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol vi, pp. 144-147.) Based principally upon specimens collected on Bering Island, Kamtschatka, by Dr. L. Stejneger. —-— Descriptions of some New Birds from Lower California, col- leeted by Mr. L. Belding. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 154-156. ) (1) Lophophanes inornatus cinerascens ; (2) Psaltriparus grinda@, Belding, MS.; (3) Junco bairdi, Belding, MS. ——— Anthus cervinus (Pallas) in Lower California. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 156, 157.) A specimen (No. 89,799, U.S. Nat. Mus.) shot by Mr. L. Belding at San José del Cabo, January 6, 1883. ——— Note on Merula confinis (Baird). (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 158, 159.) Two additional specimens collected by Mr. Belding at Laguna, Lower Cali- fornia, early in February, 1883, fully confirm the validity of the species, the type specimen of which, collected at Todos Santos, in 1860, had remained unique for twenty-three years. ——— On Leconte’s Bunting (Coturniculus lecontei) and other Birds observed in Southeastern Illinois. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. vi, p. 58.) ——— The Scissor-tail (Milvulus forjicatus) at Norfolk, Va. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. v111, p. 59.) Based upon specimen No. 85,934, U.S. Nat. Mus. —~—— On some Remarkable Points of Relationship between the American Kingfishers. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. vii, p. 59.) Based entirely upon specimens in the National Museum collection. ——— Geographical variation in size among certain Anatide and Gruide. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. vit, p. 62.) Refers to the larger size of American specimens, as compared with Euro- pean examples of the same species, and to several exceptions to the supposed law of increase of size to the northward. Notes upon some Rare Species of Neotropical Birds. (The Ibis, fifth series, Oct., 1883, vol. 1v, pp. 399-401. ) These species noticed are (1) Harporhynchus ocellatus, Scl., (2) Pyranga ery- throcephala (Sw.), (3) Zonotrichia quinquestriata, Scl. & Salv., (4) Peucwa notos- ticta, Scl. & Salv., (5) Contopus ochraceus, Scl. & Salv., and (6) Panyptila cay- ennensis (Gm). None of these are in the National Museum collection, the specimens being borrowed for study. 294 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RipGway, RoBERT.—(Letter to the editors of ‘The Ibis,” concerning the National Museum exhibit of North American Fish-eating and Aquatic Birds at the Great International Fisheries Exhibition, London.) (The Ibis, fifth series, October, 1883, vol. me pp. 578-580. ) Great International Fisheries Exhibition; London, 1883. United States of America. (C.) Catalogue of the Aquatic and Fish-eating Birds exhibited by the United States National Museum. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1883. 8vo, pp. 1-46. (The condition of the department of birds in the U.S. National Museum in 1882.) (Report Asst. Director U. 8S. Nat. Mus. for 1882 (1883), pp. 13-17; 53-56, 83-86: Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (1884), pp. 182-135; 171-174; 201-204, ) (See also papers by L. BELDING and C. C. NuTTING.) RILEY, CHARLES V.* Emulsions of petroleum as insecticides. (Scientific American, Jan. 6, 1883.) Wotice of experiments made, in 1882, in the use of emulsions of kerosene oil to kill insects injurious to orange trees; report of H. G. Hubbard upon ex- periments made by him; critical review of S. F. Chapin’s ‘‘scale-insects on deciduous and ornamental trees” (Pacific Rural Press, , 1882); effect of pure kerosene, of emulsions, and of lye upon trees. An internal Mite in Fowls. (Rural New-Yorker, Jan. 13, 1883.) (Amer. Naturalist, Apr., 1883, xvi, pp. 422, 423.) Discovery, by T. Taylor, of mites determined as Cytoleichus sarcoptoides, by Riley, lining the interior membranes of fowls; habits and ravages of this mite in Europe. A new Enemy to Wax Beans. (Rural New-Yorker, Jan. 13, 1883.) ba Reprint, entitled ‘‘Zpilachna corrupta as an injurious insect.” (Amer. Nat- uralist, Feb., 1883, xvi1, pp. 198-199. ) [Extract from letter of Prof. G. H. Stone, on the food-plants, habits, and ravages of [/pilachna corrupta; geographical distribution of this beetle. The Lignified snake of Brazil. An explanation of the phe- nomenon. (Kvening Star [Washington, D. C.], Jan. 20, 1883.) Reprint, entitled. The Lignified Snake of Brazil. (Scientific American Sup- plement, Feb. 17, 1883.) Discussion of a specimen of problematical character supposed to be a ligni- fied snake, but believed by author to be the burrow of a larva under bark; notice of writings on the subject; frequency with which the true nature of natural objects is mistaken; letter from J. H. Hutchins, accompanying a gall of Cecidomyia vitis-pomum mistaken for a hybrid fruit. Pyrethrum, an important insecticide. (Prairie Farmer, Jan. 27, 1883.) History of the general introduction of pyrethrum plants into cultivation; method of growing the plants and of preparing the pyrethrum for use as an insecticide ; experience in the cultivation of the plants. * This bibliography was chiefly prepared by Mr. B. Peckman Mann. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. - 995 RILEY, CHARLES V.—Utilization of ants in horticulture. (Scientific Amer., Jan. 27, 1883.) Abstract of C. J. Macgowan’s “ Utilization of Ants as Insect Destroyers in China” (North China Herald, April 4, 1882), and of H. C. MeCook’s *‘Ants as beneficial Insecticides” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1882, pp. 263-271), with additional matter; notices of published accounts of ants which con- struct nests on plants, especially of Azteca mirabilis on Ceeropia trees in South America; possibility that the introduction of ants into this country might involve objectionable consequences; probability that ants would not be of service in protecting orange trees from the scale insects which mainly injure those trees in this country. New lists of North American Lepidoptera. (Amer. Naturalist, January, 1883, xxvii, pp. 40-82.) Reviews of the Brooklyn Entomological Society’s ‘Check List of the Macro-lepidoptera of America, North of Mexico, Brooklyn, N, Y., January, 1382 ;” C. H. Fernald’s ‘‘A Synonymical Catalogue of the described Tortricidae of North America, North of Mexico” (Trans. Amer. Entom. Soc., May-July, 1882, x, pp. 1-64); and A. R. Grote’s ‘‘ New Check List of North American Moths. [N.Y.], May [Aug.], 1882 :” remarks upon the rules of nomenclature adopted in these works; faults found in Grote’s work ; notice of B. Gerhard’s ‘«Systematisches Verzeichniss der Macro-lepidopteren von Nord-Amerika. Lpz., 1878.” The “Cluster Fly.” (Amer. Naturalist, January, 1883, xvu, pp. 82-83.) Abstract of communications by W. H. Dall and F. Baker to the Biological Society of Washington, D. C., on the habit of a fly, resembling the house-fly, of collecting in swarms or clusters in houses in winter; determination of the species as Pollenia rudis, Fabr.; synonymy of this fly; little known of the larval habits and development of the species of Pollenia ; accounts and at- tempted explanations of the swarming of other Diptera. Reprint (Prairie Farmer, December 23, 1882). . Naphthaline cones. (Amer. Naturflist, January, 1883, xvi1, pp. 83-84.) Remarks supplementary to author’s “ Naphthaline Cones for the protection of Insect Collections” (Amer. Naturalist, May, 1882, xvi, pp. 409-410), in reply to C. A. Blake’s objections ; author’s former criticism in the main main- tained; Blake’s naphthaline cones stain the paper lining of boxes, and seem to destroy mites and Psoci very soon, but to have little effect on Dermestida, Spread of the 12-punctured Asparagus Beetle. (Rural New-Yorker, Jan. 13, 1883, xvu.) (Amer. Naturalist, Feb., 1883, xvii, sto! ) Increasing destructiveness of Crioceris duodecimpunctata, recorded by O. Lugger to have been introduced near Baltimore, Md., from Europe; descrip- tion of the imago of this species as compared with that of C. asparagi. Hibernation of the Cotton Worm. (Scientific Amer., Feb. 3, 1883.) Abstract of paper read before American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Montreal, Aug., 1282; proof of the hibernation of Aletia rylina as a moth, and of the perpetual existence of the species in tlorida, (Also, under title of “ The hibernation of Aletia xylina (Say) inthe United States a settled fact.” Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advance. Sci. for 1882, XXxXI, pp. 468-469. ) 596 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Ritfy, CHARLES V.—Entomological Notes. Phylloxera laws. (Rural New-Yorker, Feb. 27, 1883.) Adoption by Belgium of the rules of the International Convention of Berne, relative to the prevention of phylloxera ravages; abstract of those rules. Trogoderma tarsale as a museum pest. (Amer. Naturalist, February, 1883, xvi, p. 199.) Notice of F. H. Snow’s “A new Museum Pest, Trogoderma tarsale, Mels.” (Psyche, June, 1882, ili, pp. 351-352), with remarks on the abundance and ravages of Trogoderma tarsale, and the habits of its larva ‘in the field.” Natural sugaring. (Amer. Naturalist, February, 1883, xvu, pp. 197-198. ) Excessive and wide-spread abundance, in 1882, on sycamore trees [ Plata- nus] of Lachnus platanicola n. sp.; description of this species; attraction of great numbers of insects to its saccharine exudations, and growth of Pumago salicina upon these exudations; the conditions which permit the sudden and excessive increase of a given species of insect are often widely prevalent. Epilachna corrupta as an injurious insect. (Amer. Naturalist, Feb., 1883, xv11, pp. 198-199.) Extract from letter of G. H. Stone on the food-plants, habits and ravages of Epilachna corrupta; geographical distribution of this beetle. ——— Notice of an “Illustrated essay on the Noctuwide ot North America.” Ball. Brooklyn Entom. Soc., Feb., 1883, v, pp. 77-79.) ——— Alsoseparate. 4p., O. Critical review of A. R. Grote’s “ Illustrated Essay on the Noctuide of North America, .., 1883”; the matter of Grote’s work chiefly second-hand and much of it false; citation and criticism of false and erroneous passages. ——— Dipterous enemies of the Phylloxera vastatrix. (Canadian Entomologist, Feb., 1583, Xv, p. 39.) Crit. rev. of T. W. Fyles’ ‘‘ Description of a Dipte®ous Parasite of Phyllox- era vastatriz” (Canadian Entomologist, Dec., 1882, xiv, pp. 237-239;) the char- acters given of Diplosis grassator are not sufficient to distinguish the species ; the galls of Phylloxera vastatrix are inhabited by another enemy, named Leu- copis phylloxere in author’s MS.; comparison of Jarvie and pup of these two Diptera. — —— Food habits of Megilla maculata. (American Naturalist, March, 1883, xvi1, pp. 322-323. ) Summary of S. A. Forbes’s observations upon the food of Megilla maculata, with statement of the results of the author’s and other observations on this subject, showing that the species is vegetarian. Jumping seeds and galls. (Sci. Amer., Apr. 14, 1883.) A paper read before the Biological Society of Washington, D. C., Nov. 24, 1882 (Reprint, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, pp. 632-635). Figures of larva, pup, and imago of Carpocapsa saltitans, with figure and description of seeds inhabited by the larva of this moth, and description of the plant bearing these seeds; vernacular names of the plant and insect; transformations of the insect ; movements imparted by this insect to the seeds containing it, and by Cynips saltatorius to the galls of the Cynips. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 297 RILEY, CHARLES V.—Mosquitoes vs. malaria. (Sei. Amer., Apr. 14, 1883.) Reprint (Am. Naturalist, May, 1883, XVII, p. 549). Statement and criticism of the views of Dr. A. F. A. King, in support of the thesis that malarial disease is the result of inoculation of the body with malarial poison by the bites of insects; citation of twenty correspondences in the conditions affecting the prevalence of mosquitoes [ Culex] and malarial disease. Larval stages and habits of the Bee-fly Hirmoneura. (Science, April 27, 18838, 1, pp. 332-334, 3 fig.) Summary of the life-history of Hirmoneura obscura, condensed from A. Handlirsch’s ‘‘Die Metamorphose und Lebensweise von Hirmoneura obscura Meig.”... (Wiener Entom. Zeit., Sep., 1832, i, pp. 224-228 [Jan., 1883, ii, pp. 11-15, pl. 1]), and Dr. F. Brauer’s ‘‘Ergiinzende Bemerkungen” .. . (op. cit., Feb., 1883, ii, pp. 25-26), with figures of the several stages of this fly; corre- spondence of the structure and early history of the larva with the author’s predictions in reference to the larve of Bombyliida. ——— The food relations of the Carabide and Coccinellide. (Amer. Naturalist, April, 1883, xvi1, pp. 417-419.) Summary of the general conclusions arrived at in 8. A. Forbes’ [‘‘ The food relations of the Carabidew and Coccinellide” (Bull. No. 6 of Ill. State Laboratory of Nat. Hist., Jan., 1883)], in regard to the proportionate amount of various animal and vegetal ingredients in the food of Carabide and Coccinellide; cor- respondence of the structure of the mandibles of Carabidw with the nature of their food. ——— Possible Food-plants of the Cotton-worm. (Amer. Naturalist, April, 1883, xvi, pp. 421-422.) Notice of Dr. J. 8. Bailey’s ‘‘Aletia argillacea Hiibn.” (Papilio, Nov.—Dec., 182, ii, p. 189); occurrence of newly issued imagos of Alelia xylina at Karner, N. Y., 7th and 8th Oct., 1882, seeming to prove that the larva of this insect may feed upon some genus of plants other than Gossypium in the Northern States. e Agrotis messoria Harr. vs. Agrotis scandens Riley. (Amer. Naturalist, April, 1883, Xvit, p. 422, 2 fig.) Crit. rev. of A. R. Grote’s ‘‘Note on Agrotis repentis” (Papilio, September, 1881, v. 1, pp. 126-128), and of his ‘‘New Check List of North American Moths, . . . 1882,” in regard to the synonymy of Agrotis lycarum, d. re- pentis, and A. cochranii, all of which are the same as 4. messoria; A. scandens is a distinct species; figures of larve and imagos of the two species, and comparison of the imagos. Prevalence of the Screw-worm in Central America. (Amer. Naturalist, April, 1883, xvu, p. 423.) Extract from a letter of J. E. Zeledon on the abundance and ravages of Lu- cilia macellaria and related flies in Costa Rica. Dried Leaves as Food for Lepidopterous Larve. (Amer. Naturalist, April, 1883, xv11, pp. 423-424.) Review of A. H. Mundt’s ‘‘ New Method of Feeding Larve”(Papilio, January, 1883, iii, pp. 25-26); larve of Papilio cresphontes and Apatura clyton success- fully fed on leaves dried when gathered and moistened when to be used; di- rections for this process and suggestion of improvement upon it; larvee suc- cessfully fed upon fresh leaves transported trom a distance under pressuze. 298 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RILEY, CHARLES V.—Observations on the Fertilization of Yucca and ou structural and anatomical Peculiarities in Pronuba and Prodowus. (Proc. Amer. Asso. Advance. Sci. for 1882, 1883, xxx1, pp. 467-468. (Gar- deners’ Monthly, April, 1883, pp. 118-119.) Abstract of a paper read at the Montreal meeting of the American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science, —— August, 1882; description of the manner in which Pronuba yuccasella gathers the pollen in flowers of Yucca; the work of this insect is necessary to the fertilization of the capsular species of Yucca, the irregularity of whose fruit is due to its punctures; description of the egg and of the manner of oviposition of this insect. Cluster-F lies. (Proc. U.S. National Museum, May 12, 1883, pp. 636-637.) Paper read before the Biological Society of Washington, D. C. Covering the same ground in detail as the abstract given in Amer. Naturalist, January, 1883. Appears, by error, as a part of a ‘“‘ note on cluster-flies” by W. H. Dall, the quotation marks being omitted. ——— Elephantiasis, or Filaria disease. (Science, May 18, 1883, I, pp. 419-421, with fig.) Criticism of the views of Dr. A. F. A. King, set forth in [author’s] ‘‘ Mos- quitos vs. Malaria” (Amer. Naturalist, May, 1883, xvii, p. 549), and notice of the writings of Dr. P. Manson and others on the connection of Culex mosquito with the life-history of Filaria sanguinis-hominis, and on the production of clephantiasis and related diseases by the Filaria. ——— Number of Molts and Length of Larval Life as influenced by lood, (Amer. Naturalist, May, 1888, xvi, pp. 547-548.) Remarks on the variability in habits as in characters of insects; periods and number of molts observed in larvae of Tenebrio molitor, T. obscurus, and Trogoderma tarsale; conclusion that insufficient nutrition retards development and occasions frequent molting. —— The new Classification of the Coleoptera of North America. (Amer. Naturalist, June, 1883, xv, pp. 660-661.) Notice of J. L. Le Conte and G. H. Horn’s ‘‘ Classification of the Coleoptera of North America. . . 1883.” ——— A pretty and unique gall-making Tortricid. (Amer. Naturalist, June, 1883, xvil, p. 661, fig: 1.) Description and figure of imago of Grapholitha ninana un. sp., reared from galls found on stems of Acacia filicina in Arizona. Synopsis of the N. A. Heliothine. (Amer. Naturalist, June, 1883, x VII, pp. 662-663. ) Review of J. B.Smith’s “Synopsis of the N. A. Heliothine” (Trans. Amer. Entom. Soc. for 1882, x, pp. 205-255, pl. vii, viii); nature of the generic char- acters of Noctuide ; neglect of these characters by A. R. Grote. ——— Protection of Insect Collections. (Amer. Naturalist, June, 1883, XVII, pp. 663-664.) Statement of the power of Dermestid larve to endure the effects of certain insecticides, and of the requisites more important than the use of insecticides for the protection of collections from pests; seasons inv which collections are most endangered. . REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 299 RILEY, CHARLES V.—The “ Pine Moth of Nantucket.” (Amer. Naturalist, June, 1883, Xv1I, pp. 665-666. ) Notice and crit. rev. of S. H. Seudder’s. ‘‘[The Pine Moth of Nantucket. A. Williams & Co., Boston, 1883]”; Zetinia frustrana considered to be widely distributed, wherefore the suggested means against it lose much of their efficacy ; number of broods of this species; principles on which popular names for injurious lary should be chosen. —— Insect Plagues. Locusts, Saw- Worms, and Caterpillars in New England. Professor Riley’s proposals to exterminate them. Prac- tical Advice to Farmers and Woodmen. (Boston Herald, July 22, 1883.) Newspaper interview, in which the author treats of the ravages of and means against Caloptenus atlantis, Nematus erichsonii, and Orgyia leucostigma. —— A unique and beautiful Noctuid. (Amer. Naturalist, July, 1883, xvi, pp. 788-790, with fig.) Figure of imago of Cirrhophanus triangulifer ; description of its generic char- acters and discussion of its affinities : criticisms of A. R. Grote’s writing on the species; its probable habits; synonyms of this species, and statement of circumstances attending the original description of it; inference from struct- ure as to larval habit. — Insects affecting stored rice. (Amer. Naturalist, July, 1883, xv11, p. 790.) List of insects, mostly Coleoptera (Tenebrio molitor, T. obscurus, Murmidiua ovalis, Trogosita mauritanica, Calandra oryz@, Silvanus surinamensis, Attagenus megatoma, Lepisma saccharina), found in a lot of damaged rice from the Chi- nese centennial exhibit in the National Museum; two species of these are carnivorous. Hyper-metamorphoses of the Meloida. (Amer. Naturalist, July, 1883, xvu, pp. 790-791.) Proposal of simpler and more natural terms than heretofore used to desig- nate the successive stages of development of larve in Meloida. (Triungulin= Ist larval stage; Caraboid =2d larval stage; Scarabeoid = 3d and 4th larval stages; Coarctate= 5th larval stage ; Scolytoid = 6th larval stage.) Hackberry Psyllid galls. (Canadian Entomologist, August, 1883, xv, pp. 157-159, figs. 6-7.) Critical review of T. W. Fyles’ “The Parasite of Phylloxera vastatrix, and the Gall Insect of the Nettle Tree” (op. cit., May, 1883, xv, pp. 88-84); Phyl- lorera vastatrix has many parasites and Celtis is attacked by many species of gall-insects; description of characters of Pachypsylla n. gen.; figures of galls of Pachypsylla venusta and P. celtidis-mamma, to the latter of which species belongs the insect described in Fyles’ ‘‘ Notes on a Gall Mite of the Nettle Tree, Celtis occidentalis” (op. cit., Oct. (872, xiv, pp. 198-199); Psylla celtidis- grandis = Pachypsylla venusta; derivation and orthography of the generic term Celtis. Some recent discoveries in reference to Phylloxera. (Science, September 7, 1883, 11, p. 336.) Abstract of paper read before American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Minneapolis, Augnst, 1883; summary statement of the cycle of development in the genus Phylloxera ; variation of development in the same geuus; character of the gall of P. spinosa and place of deposit of the impreg- nated egg of this species. But two generations annually, the second giving the sexes and the impregnated egg passing the summer, fall, and winter. 300 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RILEY, CHARLES V.—The Psyllid@ of the United States. (Science, September 7, 1883, 11, p. 337.) Abstract of paper read before American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Minneapolis, August; 1883; list of new genera species of Psyllide described in the paper, and of their respective food-plants; with general state- ment of the character of the egg and larva in this family. Improved method of spraying trees for protection against in- sects. (Science, September 14, 1883, 11, p. 378.) Abstract of paper read before American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Minneapolis, August, 1883; description of principles embodied in apparatus devised at the U. 8S. Department of Agriculture for spraying trees with insecticides from the ground. The old, old question of species. (Amer. Naturalist, September, 1883, xv, p. 975.) Comments upon a discussion between H. A. Hagen and W. H. Edwards as to the number of North American species of Papilio of the P. machaon group ; the views of both parties extreme; views of the author in regard to the true nature of species. Myrmetophila. (Amer. Naturalist, September, 1883, XVII, pp. 985-976. ) Record of recent captures of Myrmecophila in Oregon and in District of Co- lumbia, and reference to records of former captures in United States; the habits of the genus the same in this country as in Europe. Salt-water Insects used as food. (Amer. Naturalist, September, 1883, Xvul, pp. 976-977.) Occurrence of a species of Ephydra, supposed to be E. hians, in Lake Tet- scoco, in Mexico; £. gracilis found in Great Salt Lake, Utah, and £. califor- nica in lakes in California ; account given by W. H. Brewer of the manner in which the last-mentioned species is gathered and used for food by the Indians living near Mono Lake. Food-plants of Samia cynthia. (Amer. Naturalist, September, 1883, xv, p. 977.) Review of H. H. Birney’s *‘ Samia cynthia feeding on the Sassafras and Tulip tree” (Amer. Naturalist, August, 1883, xvii, p. 879); list of plants on which Samia cynthia has hitherto been found feeding ; some of these are the favorite food-plants of Callosamia promethea. Steganoptycha claypoleana. (Amer. Naturalist, Septemver, 1883, XVII, p. 978.) Description of the imago of Steganoptycha claypoleana Riley, in comparison with that of Proteoteras aesculana Riley ; notes on the habits of both species with larval differences they exhibit. A parasite of the Cabbage-worm. (Rural New Yorker, October 6, 1833. Letter from J.H. B , with answer; parasitism of Pteromalus pupa- rum in larve and pupe of Pieris [rape]. The Handmaid moth. (Rural New Yorker, October 13; 1883.) Answer toinquiry of H. B.S ; description of larva, pupa and imago of Datana ministra, from hickory and walnut trees, and of a phytophagic va- riety of the iarva from apple and other trees; habits of the larve; the lar- vee unusually numerous in 1883. ‘ REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM, 301 RILEY, CHARLES V.—The Potato-stalk Borer® (Rural New Yorkez, Octuber 20, 1883.) Letter from 8. C. R , With answer; habits of and means against Gor- tyna nitela; description of imago of this species; means against Paria ater- rima, Heteraspis pubescens, and other Chrysomelid larve injurious to the roots of strawberry plants. — Recent advances in horticultural entomology. . . . (Rural New Yorker, October 20, 1883.) Stenographic report, by H. H , of an address delivered by C. V. Riley before the American Pomological Society, at Philadelphia, September (13), 1883; discussion of measures reconimended for adoption to prevent the ravages of insects injurious to horticulture, especially of Carpocapsa pomonella and Con- otrachelus nenuphar ; correction of popular statements in regard to the ovipo- sition of Saperda bivitiata and Bembecia marginata; advance in knowledge of the life-history of Aphidide and in the development of machinery for the ap- plication of poison sprays to plants; relative value of the principal insecti- cides now in use. —— On a gall-making genus of Apionine. F (Bull. Brooklyn Entom. Soc., October 1883, vi, pp. 61-62.) List of gall-making Coleoptera hitherto found in North America; descrip- tion of the new genus Podapion, and of the gall and imago of P. gallicola n. sp., found on twigs of Pinus inops; probable life habits, inquilines, and para- site of this insect. [United States] Department of Agriculture—Entomologist, 1883 (C. Valentine Riley). Report of the entomologist.. (Rept. [U. 8.] Commiss. Agriculture for 1883.) Separate, author’s ed., entitled ‘‘ Report of the Entomologist, Charles V. Riley, M. A., Ph. D., for the year 1883.” From the Annual Report of the Department of Agriculture for the year 1883. Issued October 31, 18e3. Wash., [Oct. 3L], 1883. t. p. cover + t. p., 5p. + p. 99-180 + 2+ 6- pp., 13 pl., O. Consists of an ‘‘ Introduction” (p. 99-101), giving a sketch of the report and of the work of the entomological division and its assistants and agents during the past year; and of chapters to be cited, unless otherwise indicated, under the name of C. V. RILEY as author, bearing the following titles: —— Silk-worm notes (pp. 101-107). — Cabbage worms (pp. 107-138; pl. 1, 10, 11; pl. 12, fig. 1-2). — PAcKarD, A.S.,jr. Report on the causes of destruc- tion of evergreen forests in Northern New England and New York (pp. 138- 151; pl. 3, 13). — Hupparp, H. G. Report of progress in experiments on scale insects, with other practical suggestious (pp. 152-159). — The im- ported elm-leaf beetle. Galeruca xanthomelaena, Schrank (pp. 159-170; [pl. 4-6]; pl. 12, fig. 3). — The lesser migratory locust, Caloptenus atlanis, Riley (pp. 170-180; pl. 2, 7-9). The chapter on ‘‘ Cabbage worms” treats of the geographical distribution, ravages, characters, habits, food-plants, seasons, enemies, and parasites of and means against Pieris rape, P. protodice, P. oleracea, P. monuste, Plusia bras- sicae, Mamestra chenopodii, Ceramica picta, Pionea rimosalis, Botis repetitalis, and Plutella cruciferarum. Packard’s chapter treats.of the characters, habits, and ravages of and means against, Nematus erichsonii and, Tortrix fumiferana, and the characters of Nematus integer and Gelechia abietisella n. sp. The subjects of the other chapters are indicated in their titles, . 302 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RILEY, CHARLES V.—FPatomology at Minneapolis. (Amer. Naturalist, Oct., 1883, Xv, pp. 1068-1070; Nov., 1883, xvii, pp. 1169- 1174.) ; Minutes of the meetings of the entomologists in attendance at the meeting of the American Association for the Advancement gpScience, at Minneapolis, Minn., 15-17 Augwist, #883; list of persons present; reorganization of the En- tomological Club of the A. A. A. 8,; election of officers and modification of constitution thereof; abstracts of papers read at these meetings. Contents further analyzed under the f ollowing captions: EDwWaRDs, W. H.: Life histories of butterflies, pp. 1068-1069. — RiLry, C. V.: Notes on Pe- disca scudderiana, pp. 1069-1070. — Ritry, C. V.: A Myrmicophilous Lepi- dopteron, p. 1070. — RiLtry, C. V.: Remarks on Arzama obliquata, p. 1169. Forses, S. A.: The use of contagious germs as insecticides, pp. 1169-1170. — OsBorn, H: Bombus pennsylvanicus in a deserted wren’s nest, p. 1171. — Hoy, P. R.: Plusiodonta compressipalpis, p. 1171. — HeERRIcK, C. L., et al. [Frost flies], pp. 1171-1172. — OsBorn, H.: Food habits of Gortyna nitela, p. 1172. — Forbes, S. A.: Gall-mites, p.1172. — SasunprErs, W.: Black- knot, p. 1172. — KeE.LiicoTr, D. 8.: Notes on certain boring Lepidopterous larve, p. 1172-1174. — Rivey, C. V.: Cantharis nuttalli injuring wheat, p. 1174, Notes on Peedisca scudderiana. (Amer. Naturalist, Oct., 1883, xvi11, pp. 1069-1070.) Remarks on the habits of Pedisca scudderiana, showing their variation, and that the published statements of Dr. D. 8S. Kellicctt about them are correct so far as they go; difference between the gall of this insect and that of Ge- lechia gallesolidaginis. ——— A Myrmicophilous Lepidopteron. (Amer. Naturalist, Oct., 1883, xXv11, p., 1070.) Larva of Helia americalis found in nests of Formica rufa; this is the first Lepidopterous insect known to the author todevelopin ants’ nests in America, ——— Enemies of the egg-plant. (Amer. Naturalist, Oct., 1883, xv11, p. 1070.) Extract from a letter from Dr. A. Oemler, proving that the occurrence of Cassida texana and Doryphora juncta on Solanum melongena, as recorded in author’s ‘‘Change of Habit; two new enemies of the Egg-plant” (op. cit., Aug., 1882, xvi., pp. 678-679), was not accidental or temporary. ——— Habits of Murmidius. (Amer. Naturalist, Oct., 1883, xv11, p. 1071.) List of insects found in a lot of damaged rice from South America; occur- rence of Murmidius [ovalis] in vast numbers in this rice; its probable food habits ; description of its cocoon; list of families of coleoptera some of whose larve spin cocoons; habitat and abode of Mychocerus. ——— Emulsions of petroleum and their value as insecticides. (Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advance. Sci., for 1882, 1883, xxx1, pp. 469-470.) (Kan- sas City Review of Science and Industry, Nov. 1883, v. 7, pp. 447-448.) Abstract of paper read before American Association for the Advancement of Science at Montreal, Aug. 1882; description of modes of making emulsions of petroleum to use against insects. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 303 RILEY, CHARLES V.—A satisfactory remedy for melon-bugs, flea- beetles, &e. (Rural New-Yorker, Nov., 1883.) Probably the most satisfactory general preventive of the ravages of Dia- brotica vittata ayd of Halticide on cucurbitaceous plants is Mr. P. T. Quinn’s method of sprinkling the vines with a mixture of tobacco water and soft soap, and then dusting them with lime ; description of J. M. Nicholson’s siphon arrangement by which to keep the vines constantly moist with liquid. Remarks on Arzama obliquata. (Amer. Naturalist, Nov., 1883, Xv11, p. 1169.) Description of the egg-mass of Arzama obliquata ; colors and abode of the larva; variations of the imago ; number of annual broods of this species stated by author to be two, and by D.S. Kellicott to be one. —- - Hymenorus rufipes as a Myrmicophilous species. (Amer, Naturalist, Nov., 1883, Xvi, p. 1176.) Corroboration of the statements in author’s ‘‘ Myrmecophilous Coleoptera,” (op. cit., Sept., 1882, xvi), p.748, regarding the habits of the larva of Hy- menorus rufipes; imagos reared from these larvie found in the nests of Formica fusca ; character of the nests of the Formica ; the food-habits of the Hymenorus still unknown. Some recent discoveries in reference to Phylloxera. (Amer, Naturalist, Dec., 1883, xvil, p. 1288.) Importance of a knowledge of the life-history of the species of Phylloxera ; outline of the life-history ; the several successive stages of some species have now been traced ; character of the gall and place of deposit of the egg of Ph. spinosa on Carya alba. The growth of insect eggs. (Amer. Naturalist, Dec., 1883, xvi, p. 1289.) Notice of J. A. Osborne’s ‘On Growth in the Eggs of Insects” (Hardwick’s Science-Gossip, Oct. 1, 1883, x1x, pp. 225-227), with an account of the swell- ing of the eggs of Phaneroptera curvicauda; this swelling seems to be con- nected with embryological development. —--— Protective device employed by a Glaucopid Caterpillar. (Amer. Naturalist, Dec., 1883, xv, p. 1289.) Notice of a paper by Dr. Fritz Miiller (Kosmos, , V1, p. 449); general use of shed hairs by larvie of Arctiidw in the construction of their cocoons; description of method in which the larva of Eunomia eagrus arranges its shed hairs to form a protection for the pupa. The genus Colias. (Amer. Naturalist, Jan., 1884, xv, pp. 74-76.) Review of H. A. Hagen’s “‘Coutributions from the Northern Transconti- nental Survey” (Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., , XXII, pp. 150-178); dis- cussion of the number of species of Colias in North America; plastic nature and classificational characters of the genus; the logic of Hagen’s reasoning combines all the commoner and well known forms under three well-marked species. 3804 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RILEY, CHARLES V.—Osage Orange vs. Mul erry for the Silkworm. (Amer. Naturalist, Jan., 1884, xviu, pp. 78-79.) Comparative value of leaves of Maolura aurantiaca and of Morus as food for Sericaria mori; critical review of the conclusions set forth by V. des Lauriers. The Chinch-bug in New York State. (Amer. Naturalist, Jan., 1884, xvI11, pp. 79-50.) Critical review of a circular issued from the office of the State Entomolo- gist, of New York, Oct. 18, 1883, and J. A. Lintner’s ‘‘The Chinch-bug in New York” (Science, Oct. 19, 1883, ii, p.540); the occurrence of Blissus leu- opterus in New York State, in unusual abundance, in 1882 and 1883, is not warrant for great alarm. - ——- Bacterial Disease of the imported Cabbage-worm. (Amer. Naturalist, Jan., 1884, xv111, p. 80.) Notice of observations by 8S. A Forbes on the death of larvw of Pieris rape from infection by Bacterium ; quotation of former mention of this disease by the author. The Department of Insects in the U. S. National Museum. Rep. Asst. Director U. 8. Nat. Mus. for 1882: Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (1884), pp. 174-183 ; 215-216). SHUFELDT, ROBERT W.—On the Ossicle of the Antibrachium as found in some of the North American Falconide. (Bull. Nutt. Ornithological Club, Cambridge, Mass., Oct., 1881, p. 197.) A description of the carpal sesamoid in Circus hudsonicus. The author gave this sesamoid the name of the “os prominens.” ——— The Claw on the Index digit of the Cathartida. (Amer. Naturalist, Nov., 1881, p. 906.) This is an account of the discovery of aclaw upon the pollex phalanx of all our American Vultures. Remarks upon the Osteology of Opheosaurus ventralis. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1881, p. 392.) A quite complete account of the Osteology of this apodal lizard. The dis- sections go to show that it possesses rudimentary femora, but the fore-limbs are entirely absent. Its skeleton is here compared with Gerrhonotus, Eumceces, and others. Note on Mimus polyglottus. (Bull. Nutt. Ornith. Club, Cambridge, Mass., July, 1882, No. 3, vol. vii, p. 180.) Notice of the capture of a specimen of this bird at Fort Fetterman, Wyo., latitude 42° 23/ 35” N., and longitude 105° 21’ 4 W., where it was breeding. This extended its geographical range. Notes upon the Osteology of Cinclus mexicanus. (Bull. Nutt. Ornithological Club, Cambridge, Mass., vol. vil, Oct., 1882, No. 4, pp. 213-221.) An account of the skeleton is given, and notice taken of the structure of the tarsal joint in the yoang of Cinclus, which presents many points of in- terest. The results of the examination show the close relation of the Dipper to the genus Siurus. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 305 SHUFELDT, ROBERT W.—The number of bones at present known in the pectoral and pelvic limbs of birds. (Amer. Naturalist, November, 1882, No. 2, vol. xvi, pp. 892-895. ) A review of the present knowledge of the various bones to be found in the appendicular skeleton of birds, both adult and young. A table is presented showing the number for the upper extremity, where they amount to twenty, and also one for the lower extremity, where twenty-nine bones have been described and attributed to thislimb. In neither case, however, do all these segments ever occur in the same subject. The bite of the Gila Monster (Heloderma suspectum). (Amer. Naturalist, Nov. 1882, pp. 907, 908. ) An account of the personal experi nee of the author, who was bitten by a Heloderm, at the Smithsonian Institution. No bad results followed after the recovery from the origins! wound, which was severe and caused serious symptoms at the time of its infliction. The saliva of the same specimen was subsequently examined by Dr. S. Weir Mitchel], of Philadelphia, then en- gaged in experimenting upon poisonous reptiles. This eminent investigator pronounced the mixed buccal secretions of the Gila Monster to be poisonous in their edfects when taken into the course of the human circulation. Contributions to the Anatomy of Birds. (Department of the Interior, United States Geological and Geographical Survey, F. V. Hayden, U.S. Geologist, in charge. Author’s edition, extracted from the Twelfth Annual Report of the Survey, pp. 593 to 806, inclusive. Twenty-four lith. plates and many cuts; Washington, October 14, 1882.) A collection of the author’s early papers, revised and rewritten. An account is given, for the first time, of the skeleton of Speotyto cunicularia hypogea. The osseus system of Cremophila alpestris, and Lanius ludovicianus excubitorides is also described. In the ‘‘North American Tetraonidz” full descriptions are presented, in systematic tables, of the geographical ranges and varia- tions of all the American partridges and grouse. These are followed by complete investigations of the osseous systems of the various species, and comparisons with a long list of kindred forms. A new bone, the ‘‘ pentosteon,” is described for the carpus of the young of Certrocircus, and the striking simi- larity between the skeletous of Cupidonia and Pediacetes is for the first time bronght before the attention of anatomists. The most complete of these pa- pers is that on the osteology of the Cathartidse. The Cathartide are shown to he entirely distinct from the Old World vultures and the Falconic@, and many points in the skeletons go to support this conclusion. The genus Pseudogry- phus, made by Ridgway, is confirmed by these studies, and an account is given of many of the bones of this rare vulture. —— The habits of Murwnopsis tridactylus in captivity ; witb obser- vations on its anatomy. (Science, Cambridge, Mass., August 10, 1883, No. 27, vol. 1, pp. 159-163, 4 figs. ) A quite full account of several individuals of the Three-fingered Siren, which the anthor kept in confinement while making collections in Louisiana. Attention is called to the prevailing superstition on the part of the people of all classes in that State in regard to the bite of this reptile, but froin personal experience the author proves its harmlessness. A very full description of the skeleton is given, with illustrations of the most important parts of its anatomy. H. Mis, 69 20 306 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. SHUFELD?, RoBERT W:—Observations on the habits of the American Chameleon (Anolis principalis). (American Naturalist, September, 1883, vol. xvi1, No. 9 pp. 919-926. One full-page cut.) Anolis is an exceedingly common lizard in all the gardens and parks in the suburbs of New Orleans, and the author availed himself of the opportunity during his collecting tours in that vicinity to make observations upon its habits, ete., which are fully set forth in this article. Attention is called to its breeding, method of capturing its food, and it chameleonic powers. This paper was reproduced by the American Field (January 14, 1884), but not properly accredited to the naturalist. A large series of specimens, col- lected at this time, is now in the Smithsonian Institution. Observations upon the osteology of Podasocys montanus. (Journal of Anatomy and Physiology; Londen, Oct., 1883, No. v, vol. XVII, pt. i, pp. 86-102, 1 plate.) In this paper the skeleton of a typical American plover has been thoroughly described, and its skull, with other parts compared with pluvialine forms. A lithographic plate accompanies the article, engraved by F. Huth, of Edinburgh, in which all the principal bones are shown from various points of view. Remarks upon the osteology of Phalacrocorax bicristatus. (Science, vol. 11, No. 41, Nov. 16, 1883, pp. 640-642, 3 cuts.) At different times ornithotomists have been attracted by the many interest- ing points in the skeleton of a cormorant. This bird has a peculiar bone ar- ticulating on a mid-point of the occipital ridge. This feature has been de- scribed and figured by Selenka and Eyton. Marsh called it the ‘nuchal bone” ia one of his papers on the osteology of cormorants. In this article it is again figured, being tipped up on its side, so that it may be fully seen. It does not belong to the skull, but is an ossification in mid-plane of the fascia between the heads of the biventer cervicis muscle, or what may be compared to the ligamentum nuche of birds. Other interesting features of the skeleton of this cormorant are reviewed. Romalea microptera. (Science, vol.a1, No. 47, Friday, December 28, 1883, pp. 811-814, 1 life-size lith. plate.) This paper is devoted to a study of the great black ‘‘lubber grasshopper ” of the South. The observations are upon Louisiana specimens, and treat particularly upon its breeding habits and behavior during captivity. The eggs and method of laying them are fuNy described. The paper is illustrated by a full-page lithographic plate, giving the eggs and life-size figures of a male and female. The author collected large series of this insect, in all stages of development, and these now form a part of the entomological collections of the U. S. National Museum. STEARNS, RopERT EH. C.—The edible clams of the Pacific coast and a proposed method of transplanting them to the Pacific coast. (Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 111, pp. 353-362. ) STEJNEGER, LEONHARD.—Remarks on the systematic arrangement of the American Turdide. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v, 1882, pp. 449-433.) This is by far the most important paper on the subject ever published. It is illustrated by numerous outline figures of the generic characters. (RB. Ridgway. ) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 307 STEJNEGER, LEONHARD.—Contributions to the history of the Com- mander Islands. No. 1.—Notes on the natural history, including descriptions of new Cetaceans. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v1, 1883, pp. 58-89.) Contains descriptions of Ziphius Grebnitzkii and Berardius Bairdii aud notes upon other species of mammals, also valuable contributions to ornithology. TRUE, FREDERICK W.—On the bite of the North American coral snakes (genus Hlaps). (Amer. Nat., Xv1I, 1883, pp. 26-31.) That the bite of the Floridan coral snakes, Zlaps fulvius, is poisonous is proven by the symptoms which appeared in consequence of a wound in- flicted by one of these serpents. Febrile symptoms lasted for about three days and were followed by ulceration in the bitten finger. The pain also re- turned from time to time after the normal condition of health had been re- covered. From other apparently authentic cases cited it appears that the bite of the coral snake may prove fatal to children and possibly even to adults. ——— Check list of the reserve and general series of North American tortoises. (Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 24, 1883. By H. C. Yarrow, M. D. Chelonian taxonomy and critical preface by F. W. True. pp. 26-38.) The folk-lore of flowers. (Notes and Queries, 6th ser., vir, 1883, p. 146.) The date of the advent of certain species of fishes on the New England coast is associated by some of the fishermen with the time of blooming of different flowers. The scuppaug, for example, comes when the dandelions begin to bloom, and the striped bass when the high blackberries are in blos- som. The antedating of books. (Nation, XXXVI, 1883, p. 12.) Calls attention to the growing practice of giving books published near the close of the year the date of the succeeding year. On a cinnamon bear from Pennsylvania. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., v, 1883, pp. 653-656. ) Allusions to the existence of a distinct species of American bear of a cin- namon color are to be found in the literature of the past hundred years. The opinion, however, that specimens of that color are simply the result of albi- noism in the common black bear, Ursus americanus, seems now to be well established, except, perhaps, so far as concerns the so-called cinnamon bear of the northwestern region. In the bear obtained in Pennsylvania is repre- sented a condition of semi-albinoism which extends to all parts of the body. The fur is of a clear, golden brown, while the naked portions of the body and the eyes are also brown, but duller. Ona pair of abnormal antlers of the Virginia deer. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., v1, 1883, p. 151, 1 fig.) The specimen in question represents a pair of antlers in which the tynes of the left axis are normally developed, while on the right side only a single, long brow-tyne is present. Movement of the arms in walking. (Science, 1, 1883, p. 11.) 308 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. TRUE, FREDERICK W.—Ziphius on the New Jersey coast. (Science, 11, 1883, p. 540.) In this note is recorded the first authenticated case of the occurrences of a species of Ziphius on the east coast of North America. A new sperm whale. (Science, 1, 1883, p. 470.) The Museum received in May, 1883, from the New Jersey coast a specimen of a pygmy sperm whale (Kogia), the first recorded from the North Atlantic. It was named Kogia Goodei. [The author is at present of the opinion that but one species of this genus, A. breviceps, exists, and that the species referred to above is invalid. ] ——— The Atlantic right whales. (Sci. and Lit. Gossip, 1, 1883, pp. 72-73.) Contains a brief review of Dr. Holder’s paper upon Balana eisarctica. Anatomy of the Ailuroidea. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 24. A monstrous orang. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 24.) Direct communication between the median vaginal cul-de-sac and uro-genital canal in marsupials after parturition. (AbDstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 24.) Mammals of Northeastern New York. (Abstract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 24.) Distribution of the genus Macroscelides. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 53.) Anatomical and external characters of Zalophus Gillespiit. (Ab- stract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 53.) Mammals of Essex County, England. (Abstract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 53.) Asymmetry of the turbinated bones in man. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 53.) Muscles of the raccoon’s limbs. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1833, p. 82.) Myology of Proteles. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 82.) Singing mice. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 82.) The evolution of deer-antlers and atavism in the hog-deer. ( Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1583, p. 184.) Behavior of the American flying-squirrel in confinement. (Ab- stract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 181.) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 309 TRUE, FREDERICK W.—Taxonomy of the hoofed quadrupeds. (Ab- stract.) (Science, 1, 1888, p. 182.) —— On Halicherus grypus. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 204. ) —-— Thearrangement of the turbinal bone in the fissiped carniv- ores. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 289.) —— Harder’s glands in rodents. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 289.) ——— Thecolor of horses. (Abstract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 289.) —— The baleen whales. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 289.) —— The domestic animals of Camargue. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 317. ) —— The nature of elephants’ milk. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 317.) —— American sirenians. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 346.) —— Duration of fecundity in man. (Abstract.) (Science, I, 1883, p. 346.) —— The intermedius of the carpus in man and other mammals. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 346.) ——-— The bottle-nose whale. (Abstract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 555.) ——— A hybrid between the gayal and zebu. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p. 89.) —— Homologues of the parts of the temporal bone. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p. 113.) —— Color-markings of mammals. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p. 144. Quar. Jour. Royal Micros. Soe., III, 1883, p. 631.) Epiphyses on the centra of the vertebre of the manatee. Ab- stract.) (Science, 1, 1883, p. 207.) —— The Os intermedium of the foot. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p. 448.) ——— The species of hogs. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p. 548. ) ——— Sexual variation of Rhytina. (Abstract.) (Science, 11, 1883, p, 694. ) 310 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. WaALcoTT, CHARLES DOOLITTLE.—Injury sustained by the eye of a Trilobite at the time of the moulting of the shell. (Amer. Jour. Sci., Oct., 1883, vol. xxvi, p. 302.) Description of the injury received by the eye of Jllenus crassicauda during the life of the animal.) New species of fossils from the Trenton group of New York. (Pamphlet in advance of 35th Rept. N. Y. State Museum, Nat. Hist., issued Oct. 15, 1883, 8 pp., 8 vo., 1 pl.) One new genus of crinoidea, Merocrinus, and the following species are de- scribed: Merocrinus typus, Merocrinus corroboratus, Glyptocrinus argutus, Glyp- tocrinus? subnodosus, Iocrinus Trentonensis, Dendrocrinus retractilis, Calceocrinus Barrandii, Metoptoma Billingsi, Beyrichia bella, Leperditia (I) armata. Cambrian System in the United States and Canada (abstract). (Bulletin Philosophical Soc., Washington. Read Nov. 24, 1883. Vol. v1, p. 97.) Defines the formations included within the Cambrian system on strati- graphic evidence. Pre-Carboniferous strata in the Grand Cafion of the Colorado, Arizona. (Amer, Jour. Sci., Dec., 1883, vol. XXvVI, pp. 437-442 and p. 484.) Describes the Potsdam and pre-Potsdam horizons of the Cambrian. Fresh-water shells from the Paleozoic rocks of Nevada. Notes and figures of. (Science, Dec. 21, 1883, vol. 11, No. 46, p. 809.) One genus, Zaptychius, and the following species are mentioned and illus- trated by outline figures: Zaptychius Carbonaria, n. g., n. sp., Physa prisca, n.sp., Ampullaria Powelli, n. sp. WARD, LESTER F.—Captain C. E. Dutton on the Hawaiians. (Science, February 9, 1883, 1, pp. 9-10.) Report of an oral communication made by Captain Dutton before the Anthro- pological Society of Washington, January 2, 1883, on the above subject, from notes taken down and written out. Plant life, past and present. (Science, May 4, 1883, 1, pp. 358-359. ) Abstract of a lecture delivered at the National Museum February 24, 1883. Gives the system of botanical classification proposed in the lecture, and a table showing the number of species of fossil plants belonging to each of the prin- cipal groups for the several geological horizons, as also the number of living plants of each group known or estimated. Dynamic sociology, or applied social science, as based upon statical sociology and the less complex sciences. Two volumes, 12mo. Vol 1, xx + 706 pp., vol. 11, vii-+ 690 pp. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1883 (published June 2). The principal aim of this work is to point out the superiority of the method of intelligent design over that of spontaneous self-adjnstment in the attain- ment of the objects of desire and of social advancement. It isa plea for the legitimacy of intelligent action on the part of society in securing its own in- terests and advantage as against the philosophy of inaction which, in recog- REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. SL nizing the great secular effects of non-intellectualized activities, neglects the factor of mind which entered into the problem at a certain point,and which tends to discourage the exercise of the legitimate power that mindis capable of exerting forthe general good. The work is anargument against the laissez faire docttine and in support of a general policy of regulation applied to so- cial operations according to the same principles as those on which physical phenomena are regulated by the inventive genius of man. Warp, LESTER F.—Marsh and aquatie plants of the Northern United States, many of which are suitable for carp ponds. Bulletin U. 8. Fish Com., 111, Sept. 6, 1883, pp. 257-265. ) The geographical range of the species is given, and those specially desig- nated that are found in the District of Columbia and vicinity of Washing- ton. On the position of the Gamopetale. (Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Montreal, 1882[Salem, 1883], vol. xxx1, pp. 460-462). Abstract of a paper read before the biological section, designed to show that the Gamopetale are the most highly developed type of Dicotyledons, were latest developed, and should occupy the highest place in the systematic arrangement. ——— The organic compounds in their relations to life. (Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Montreal, 1¢82 [Salem, 1883], vol. xxxI, pp. 493-494. ) Abstract. This paper was published in full in the American Naturalist, Dec. 1882, XvI, pp. 968-979, and its title appears in the report of the assist- ant airector of the National Museum for 1882, pp. 67-68. Classification of organisms. (Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Montreal, 1882 [Salem, 1833], vol. xxx1, pp. 493-494. ) Abstract of a paper read before the biological section. Organisms are classified according to their ability to appropriate nutriment from inorganic or only from other organic bodies. The paper was read from proof sheets of chapter iv of ‘‘ Dynamic Sociology,” (vol. 1, pp. 347-355, ) then passing throngh the press. Report to the Director of the United States Geological Survey on the operations of the division of paleobotany during the fiscal year 1882-83. (Fourth Annual Report of the U. 8. Geological Survey (Report of the Secre- tary of the Interior, vol. 111), pp. 50-51. Washington, Government Printing Office, 1883.) Scientific notes communicated to Science: 1. On the preliminary study of a collection of fossil plants from the Lower Yellowstone. (Science, June 15, 1803, 1, p. 559.) 2. On Gray and Trumbull’s review of De Candolle’s “ Origine des plantes cultivées.” (Science, June 29, 1883, 1, p. 616.) 812 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Warp, LESTER F.—Continued. 3. On a collection of fossil plants from the Fort Union group made by the writer during the months of July and August, 1883, in the Yellowstone and Missouri Valleys. (Science, October 12, 1883, 1, p. 517.) 4, On the descent of the Missouri River from Fort Benton, Mont., to Bismarck, Dak., in an open boat by a geological party of which the writer was a member, made in August and September, 1883. (Science, October 12, 1883, 11, pp. 517-518. ) Remarks before the Anthropological Society at its fifty-eighth meeting, held November 7, 1882, upon the address of Dr. J.C. Well- ing, vice-president of the Section of Sociology, on the “ Turning- point of modern sociological science.” (Transactions of the Anthropological Society of Washington, 1, pp. 31-33, Washington, 1883.) Criticism of the views of Messrs. Herbert Spencer, W. R. Greg, and others who oppose all humanitarian enterprises, on the ground that they are con- trary to the law of the survival of the fittest, and that they tend to produce social degeneracy. It was held that all distinctively human activity is op- posed to the natural method of development, and is far more effective. The department of fossil plants in the U.S. National Museum, 1882. (Report of Assistant Director U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1882, (1883). Smithsonian Report for 1882 (1884) pp. 150-151, 183-186. ) Wuitr, C. A.—Glacial drift in the Upper Missouri River region. (American Journal of Science, March, 1883, vol. xxv, p. 206.) On the Macrocheilus of Phillips, Plectostylus of Conrad, and Soleniscus of Meek and Worthen. (Proceedings U.S. National Museum, 1883, vol. v1, p. 184.) Progress of Invertebrate Paleontology in the United States for the year 1882. : (American Naturalist, June, 1883, vol. xv, p. 598.) Burning of Lignite in situ. (American Journal of Science, July, 1883, vol. xxv1, No, 151, p. 24.) Commingling of Ancient Faunal and eco Floral Types in the Laramie Group. (American Journal of Science, August, 1883, vol. XxvI, p. 120.) —— Existence ofa depositin Northeastern Montana and Northwest- ern Dakota that is possibly equivalent with the Green River Groups. (American Journal of Science, June, 1883, vol. xxv, p. 411.) —— The Department of Fossil Invertebrates in the U.S. National Museum in 1882. (Report Asst. Director U.S. Nat. Museum for 1882. Report Smithsonian Institute for 1882 (1884), pp. 149-150, 186, 221-222.) ~ REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 313 WINSLOW, FRANCIS.—Great International Fisheries Exhibition. Lon- don, 1883. (Section D.) Catalogue of the economic mollusca and the apparatus and appliances used in their capture and preparation for market exhibited by the United States National Museum. 8vo. pamphlet, 86 pages. Washington: Government Printing Office. 1883. YARROW, H. C.—Bulletin of the United States National Museum, No. ~ 24. Check List of North American Reptilia and Batrachia, with catalogue of specimens in U.S. National Museum, by H. C. Yar- row, M. D., Honorary Curator, Department of Reptiles. Wash- ington: Government Printing Office. 1883. 8vo. pp. i-v, 1-249. —— Accessions to the Department of Reptiles in the U.S. National Museum, 1882. (Report Asst. Director U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1682 (1883), pp. 86-87; Report Smithsonian Institution for 1882 (1884), pp. 204-2085. ) YEATES, WILLIAM S8.—Accessions to the Department of Minerals, U. S. N. M., 1882. (Report Asst. Director U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1882 (1883), pp, 104-105; Rep. Smithsonian Institution for 1582 (1884), pp. 222-223.) III.—PAPERS BY INVESTIGATORS NOT OFFICERS OF THE MUSEUM. [| ANONYMOUS].—Microscopical objects at the Fisheries Exhibition. (Am. Monthly Micro. Journ., Iv, No.7, pp. 128, 129, July, 1883. ) Describes briefly a collection of American fresh-water sponges, prepared by Mr. Edward Potts, of Philadelphia, and exhibited at the London Fisheries Exhibition by the National Museum. BELDING, L.—Catalogue of a collection of Birds made at various points along the western coast of Lower California, north of Cape Saint Eugenia. (Edited by R. Ridgway.) (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 527-532.) Catalogue of a collection of Birds made near the southern ex- tremity of Lower California. (Edited by R. Ridgway.) (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. v, pp. 532-550. ) List of Birds found at Guaymas, Sonora, in December, 1882, and April, 1883. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vol. vi, pp. 343-344.) ——— Second catalogue of a collection of Birds made near the south- ern extremity of Lower California. (Edited by R. Ridgway.) (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 344-352.) BREWSTER, WILLIAM.—On a collection of Birds made by Mr. F. Ste- phens in Arizona. (Concluded from vol. vu, p. 212.) (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, vol. vim, Jan., 1883, pp. 21-36.) Based in part upon ‘‘ material in the National Museum”; see under Calli- pepla squamata castanogastris, p. 34. 314 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. BREWSTER, WILLIAM.—On an apparently New Gull from Eastern North America. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, vol. vii, Oct., 1883, pp. 214-219.) Larus kumlieni, Brewster, the type being No. 76225, U. 8. National Museum, from Cumberland Sound. BusH, KATHARINE J.—Catalogue of Mollusca and Echinodermata dredged on the coast of Labrador by the expedition under the direction of Mr. W. A. Stearns, in 1882. (Proc. U. S. National Museum, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 236-247, pl. 9.) Enumerates seventy-nine species of Mollusca and fifteen species of Echi- nodermata, and gives a list of the species previously obtained in the same re- gion by Prof. A. S. Packard, jr., and not found by Mr. Stearns. Of the Echi- nodermata, three species belong to the Holothurida@, two to the Echinoidea, five to the Asteroidea, and five to the Ophiuroidea. Brief notes are given on the localities of occurrence, depths, &c. The collections of Mr. Stearns now be- long to the National Museum. Covuss, ELLIoTT.—Note on ‘“ Passerculus caboti.” (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. vu, p. 58.) Based upon ‘‘specimen No. 62373; Mus. Smiths. Inst., from Nahant, Mass.” —— Note on the Mississippi Kite. (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, Jan., 1883, vol. vim, p. 61.) Referring to specimen No. 89570, 1.8. Nat. Mus., from Bluffton, South Car- olina. GILL, THEODORE.—On the family Centropomide. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, Feb. 28, 1883, pp. 484-485, plate xi.) —— Nomenclature of the Xiphiids. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v1, Feb. 28, 1883, pp. 485-486. ) — —— On the family and subfamilies of Carangide. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vi, Feb. 28, 1883, pp. 487-493. ) Note on the Leptocardians. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v1, March 21, 1883, pp. 515-520.) Note on the Petromyzontids. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., v1, March 21, 1883, pp. 521-525.) Supplementary note on the Pediculati. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vi, March 21, 1883, pp. 557-558. ) —— Note on the Pomatomide. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vi, March 21, 1883. p. 557.) ——— Note on the Affinities of the Ephippioids. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vi, March 23, 1883, pp. 557-560. ) ——— On the relations of the family Lobotide. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. v1, March 23, 1882. pp. 560-561.) Note on the relationship of the Echeneidids, (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v1, March 23, 1883. pp. 561-566, pl. xii.) —— Note on the genus Sparus. (Proc. U, S. Nat. Mus., v1, Mareh 28, 1883, pp. 566-567.) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 315 GILL, THEODORE.—On the proper name of the Bluefish. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., March 23, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 567-570. ) Diagnosis of new genera and species of deep-sea fish-like ver- tebrates. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Nov. 27, 1883, vol. v1, pp, 253-260. ) GILL, THEODORE, and JOHN A. RYDER.—Diagnoses of new genera of Nemichthyoid eels. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Nov. 27, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 260-262. ) — On the anatomy and relations of the Eurypharyngide. (Proc. U. §. Nat. Mus., Nov. 27, Dec. 13, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 262-273.) HARGER, Oscar.—Reports on Results of Dredgings, under the super- vision of Alexander Agassiz, on the east coast of the United States, during the summer of 1880, by the U.S. Coast Survey steamer Blake, Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. 8. N., commanding. (xxmr.) Report on the Isopoda, by Oscar Harger. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. of Harvard College, x1, No. 4, September, 1883, pp. 91-104, pl. i-iv.) Enumerates 9 species, of which nearly all are described at some length, as follows: Cirolana spinipes Bate & Westwood, pl. 1, figs. 2-2d; pl. ii, figs. 1-1e, p. 91. Cirolana impressa, sp. noy., pl. 1, figs. 3-3d; pl. ii, figs. 3-3¢, p. 93. Aga psora Kroyer (not deser.), p. 95. ? Aga Webbii Schiddte & Meinert (not descr. ), p. 95. aga incisa Schiddte & Meinert, pl. 3, fig. 1, p. 96. Rocinela oculata, sp. nov., pl. ili., figs. 2-2a; pl. iv, fig. 1, p. 97. Rocinela americana Schiddte & Meinert, pl. iii, figs. 3-3a, 4; pl. iv, figs. 2-2a, p. 98. Rocinela, sp. (not descr.), p. 99. Sycenus infelix Harger, pl. iii, figs. 55a; pl. iv, figs. 3-3h, p. 100. Three of these species are also recorded from the collections of the U. S. Fish Commission—Cirolana impressa, Rocinela Americana, and Sycenus infeliz. The plates are photo-lithographs, from drawings by J. H. Emerton. HUBRECHT, A. A. W.—En verwaarloosd Volksbelang. (De Geds, Utrecht No. 7, 1883.) —-— Fish culture as seen at the London Exhibition, with special references to its history, apparatus, and the methods used in the United States. (Bull. U. S. Fish Commission, 111, pp. 337, 348. A description of the American section of the Fishery Exhibition and its teachings. A translation of the above. JORDAN, DAVID S., and CHARLES H. GILBERT.—On certain neglected generic names of Lacépéde. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., March 23, 1883, v, pp. 570-573.) —— On the synonyiny of the genus Bothus, Rafinesque, (Proc. U.S, Nat. Mus., v, pp. 576-577.) 316 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. JORDAN, DAvip S., and CHARLES H. GILBERT.—Description of a new species of Artedius (Artedius fenestralis) from Puget Sound. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., April 19, 1883, v, pp. 577-579. ) Description of a new species of Urolophus (Urolophus asterias) from Mazatlan and Panama. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., April 19, 1883, v, pp. 579-580. ) Notes on a collection of fishes from Charleston, 8S. Carolina, with description of three new species. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, v, pp. 581-620, April 19. ) 123 species are enumerated, 20 not before known north of Key West. (obius enceomus, D.8.,p.611; Gobius thalassinus, n. 8.,p. 612; Prienotus sarritor, n.s.,. p. 615. List of fishes now in the museum of Yale College, collected by Prof. Frank H. Bradley, at Panama, with description of three new species. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, v, pp. 620-632.) 96 species are mentioned, 18 new to Panama. A set of the duplicates is in the National Museum: Sidera Verrillit n.s., p.623; Emblemaria, u. g., p. 627; Emblemaria nivipes, n.8., p. 627; Dactyloscopus, n.8.(?), p.628; Arothron erethizon, n.8., p. 631. Description of two new species of fishes (Myrophis vafer aid Chloroscombrus orqueta) from Panama. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, v, pp. 645-647.) Myrophis vafer,n.8., Panama, p. 645; Chloroscombrus orqueta, nu. 8., Panama p. 646. — Description of a new eel (Sidera castanea) from Mazatlan. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, v, pp. 647, 648.) Sidera castanea, n.s8., Mazatlan, p. 647. On the nomenclature of the genus Ophichthys. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., May 12, 1883, v, pp. 648-651.) 17 species are enumerated. e —— Notes on the nomenclature of certain North American fishes. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. v1, pp. 110, 111, July 27, 1883.) Description of two new species of fishes (Aprion ariommus and Ophidium beani) from Pensacola, Florida. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Sept. 20, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 142-144.) ——- A review of the American Carangina. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 188-207.) Note on the genera of Petromyzontide. (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, p. 208.) ——— Description of a new Murenoid eel (Sidera chlevastes) from the Galapagos Islands. (Proc. U. S. Nat, Mus., Oct, 5, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 208-210.) —— REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 2 lt JORDAN, DAvip S., and CHARLES H. GILBERT.—Description of a new species of Rhinobatus (Rhinobatus glaucostigma) from Mazatlan, Mexico. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 210-211.) JORDAN, DAvip §., and JosEPH Swain.—List of fishes collected in the Clear Fork of the Cumberland, Whiteley County, Kentucky, with description of three new species. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Nov. 27, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 248-251.) , JouY, PIERRE Lovis.—Ornithological notes on collections made in Japan from June to December, 1882. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. vi, pp. 273-318.) An important annotated list of 100 species, nearly all represented by nu- merous specimens now in the National Museum collection. Lucr, THoMAS R.—Occurrence of Balistes capriscus, Gmelin (Leather- jacket or File-fish), at New Bedford, Mass. (Bull. U.S. Fish. Com., vol. m1, Dee. 7, 1283, p. 469.) LAWRENCE, GEORGE N. (New York City.)—Characters of a new spe- cies of pigeon of the genus Engyptila, from the island of Grenada, West Indies. The Auk, vol. 1. April, 1884, pp. 180,181. (EH. zellsi, Lawr., type in U. 8. National Museum collection.) LINDENKOHL, C.—Notes on the model of the Gulf of Maine, con- structed for the United States Fish Commission. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 111, pp. 449-454. ) LOWELL, JAMES RuSSELL.—Success of the United States Exhibit at the London International Fisheries Exhibition. (Dispatch No. 55 to Hon. Frederick T. Frelinghuysen, Secretary of State.) (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., m1, pp. 447-8.) NEWBERRY, JOHN S.—Brief descriptions of fossil plants, chiefly ter- tiary, from Western North America. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Feb. 28, 1883, v, pp. 502-574. ) 58 new species are described, chiefly from the collection of Dr. F. V. Hay- den. Nuttine, C. C.—On a collection of birds from the Hacienda ‘“ La Palma,” Gulf of Nicoya, Costa Rica. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1883, v, pp. 382-395. ) Contains also a few notes on the mammals of that region Nyk, WILLARD, jr.—Eels (Anguilla rostrata) in New Bedford water- pipes. Mackerel abundant in Amherst River. (Bull. U.S. F. C., vol. 11, 1882, Mar. 21, 1883,p. 272.) RYDER, JouHN A.—On the thread-bearing eggs of the silversides (J/en- idia). (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., u1, pp. 193-196. ) Preliminary notice of the development and breeding habits of the Potomac Catfish, Amiurus albidus (Le Sueur) Gill. (Bull, U, 8, Fish Com,, 111, pp. 225-230. ) 318 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. RYDER, JoHN A.—Rearing oysters from artificially-fertilized eggs, together with notes on pond culture, Se. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 111, pp. 281-294. ) ——— Report on the abnormal appearance of some shad eggs from a fish kept in confinement at Havre de Grace, Md. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 11, p. 440.) Rearing oysters from artificially impregnated eggs. (Science, 11, pp. 60-62.) The law of nuclear displacement and its significance in em- bryology. (Science, I, pp. 275-277, with cut.) Development of the membrane bones of the skull of the pike. (Science, I, p. 513.) ——— The protozoan parasites of the oyster. (Science, I, p. 567.) ——— Oyster culture in Holland. (Science, u, p. 79.) Rearing oysters from artificially fertilized eggs at Stockton, Md. Science, 11, pp. 463-464.) —— Primitive visual organs. (Science, 11, pp. 39-40.) (See, also, under GILL and RYDER, in Part 11.) SAUNDERS, HowarRD.—On the birds exhibited in the International Fisheries Exhibition. (The Ibis, fifth series, Oct., 1883, vol. 1v, pp. 346-352. ) Contains a very favorable notice of the U. 8. National Museum exhibit of North American aquatic and fish-eating birds, on pp. 350, 351. ScLATER, P. L.—Review of the species of the family Icteridw#. Part i, Cassicine. (The Ibis, fifth series, April, 1883, vol. Iv, pp. 145-163, pls. vi, vii.) Frequent reference to National Museum specimens. ——— A review of the species of the family Icteride. Part ii, Icte- rine. (The Ibis, fifth series, July, 1883, vol. Iv, pp. 352-374, pl. xi.) Contains frequent mention of National Museum specimens, loaned for exa:n- ination. SMITH, RosA.—On the life coloration of the young of Pomacentrus rubicundus. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., May 23, 1883, v, pp. 652-653. ) Specimen from La Jollas, near San Diego, Cal. The life colors of Cremnobates integripinnis. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, 1883, pp. 216-217.) —— Note on the occurrence of Gasterosteus williamsoni, Grd., in an artesian well at San Bernardino, Cal. (Proc. U.S, Nat, Mus., Oct. 5, 1883, vol. v1, 1883, p. 217.) REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 319 SMmiTH, Rosa.—Notes on the fishes of Todos Santos Bay, Lower California. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Oct. 25, 1883, vol. vi, 1883, pp. 232-236.) SmiTH, SipNEY I.—Preliminary report on the Brachyura and Anomura dredged in deep water off the south coast of New England by the U.S. Fish Commission in 1830, 1881, and 1882. (Proc. U.S. National Museum, vol. v1, 1883, pp. 1-57, pll. i-vi.) This report includes ‘all the species of Brachyura and Anomura obtained off Martha’s Vineyard, at depths greater than 50 fathoms. * * * The last season’s dredging off Martha’s Vineyard reveals the total, or almost total, disappearance of several of the larger species of crustacea, which were exceedingly abundant in the same region in 1880 and 1881.” Thirty-ono species are included in the report, and of these seven are new. Three new genera are also described. Very full notes, with complete lists of the locali- ties, including depths, nature of the bottom, dates when collected, number of specimens obtained, &c., are given under each species. Tables of measure- ments of many species are also given. The new genera described are: Sym- pagurus (p. 37), Eumunida (p. 44), and Anoplonotus (p. 50). The new species described are as follows: Brachyura.— Amathia Tanneri, p.4; Collodes robustus,p.5; Cymopolia gra- cilis, p. 20. Anomoura.—Sympagurus pictus (pl.5, figs. 2, 2a; pl. 6, Figs. 5-8), p. 37; Munida valida (pl.1), p.42; Eumunida picta (pl. 2, fig. 2; pl. 3, figs. 6-10; pl. 4, figs. 1-3a), p.44; Anoplonotus politus (pl. 2, fig. 1; pl. 3, tigs. 1-5a), p. 50. List of the crustacea dredged on the coast of Labrador by the expedition under the direction of W. A. Stearns, in 1882. (Proc. U.S. National Museum, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 218-222.) Enumerates 36 species distributed among the following groups: Brachyura, 2 species; Anomura, 2 species; Macrura, 9 species; Schizopoda, 1 species; Cumacea, 1 species; Amphipoda, 16 species; Isopoda, 2 species; Copepoda, 1 species; Cirripedia, 1 species; Rhizocephala, 1 species. Full notes are given on the localities of occurrence, depth, character of bottom, character of speci- mens, &c., and also, in some cases, on the sizes of specimens. This collection was made by W. A. Stearns, of Amherst, Mass., and a party of students from Yale College. The specimens belonging to Mr. Stearns were turned over to the National Museum, and those belonging to the remainder of the party to the Mnseum of Yale College. Review of the marine crustacea of Labrador (Proc. U.S. National Museum, 1883, vol. v1, pp. 223-232. ) Enumerates 65 species of crustacea as follows: Brachyura, 4 species; Ano- nura, 2 species; Macrura, 13 species; Schizopoda, 1 species; Cumacea, 1 species; Phyllocarida, 1 species; Amphipoda, 29 species; Isopoda, 7 species; Ostracoda, 1 species; Copepoda, 1 species; Cirripedia, 4 species; Rhizoce- phala,1 species. The localities in which each species was obtained are given, when known, and also occasional notes on abundance, &c. The material on which this review is based was principally obtained by Prof. A. 8. Packard, jr., in 1860 and 1864, and by W.A.Stearns in 1882. Almost the only previous source of information in regard to the crustacea of Labrador had been Pro- fessor Packard’s ‘‘A list of the animals dredged near Caribou Island, Southern Labrador, during July and August, 1860” (Canadian Naturalist and Geolo- gist, December, 1863), vir, pp. 401-429 (1-29), and his ‘‘ View of the recent invertebrate fauna of Labrador” (Memoirs, Boston Soc. Nat. History, 1867, I, pp. 262-303, pll.7, 8.) The collection of W. A. Stearns is now in the pos- session of the National Museum. 320 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. STEWART, T. E., M. D., Ph. G.—The Relation of pharmacy to Therapen- tics. A lecture delivered before the Alumni Association of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. (Druggists Journal, Dec., 1883; also separate, unpaged, 5 pages.) Suggests the plan of founding at Washington, in connection with the Smithsonian Institution, a laboratory of experimental pharmacology, with new apparatus and means for doing scientific work on drugs. After discuss- ing this paper it was voted by the meeting ‘‘that it is the seuse of this meet- ing that this suggestion be adopted, and the founding of such a laboratory at Washington, in connection with the Smithsonian, be recommended.” SWAIN, JOSEPH.—Description of a new species of Hadropterus (Ha- dropterus scierus) from Southern Indiana. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Nov. 27, 1883, vol. v1, p. 252.) (See also under JORDAN & SWAIN.) SWAIN, JOSEPH, and GEORGE Bb. KALB.—A review of the genus No- turus, with a description of one new species. (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., v, May 23, 1883, pp. 638-644). Seven species are mentioned, Noturus elassochir, n.s., Illinois R., 639. SWAN, JAMES G.—Report of investigations at Neah Bay, Wash., re- specting the habits of fur seals of that vicinity, and to arrange for procuring specimens of skeletons of cetacea. (Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 111, pp. 201-207. ) TARR, R. S.—Life at the bottom of the sea. (Forest and Stream, New York, Nov. 29, 1883, vol. xx1, pp. 344, 345. ) A popular account of the deep-sea explorations of the U. 8S. Fish Comunis- sion. THomaAs, Cryrkus.—Note on certain Maya and Mexican manuscripts. (Science, vol. 1, No. 20, pp. 585, 586. ) VERRILL, A. E.—Reports on the results of dredging, under the super- vision of Alexander Agassiz, on the east coast of the United States, | during the summer of 1880, by the U. 8S. Coast Survey steamer “Blake,” Commander J. R. Bartlett, U.S. N., commanding. (XXI.—) Report on the Anthozoa, and on some additional species dredged by the “Blake” in 1877-79, and by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer ‘“‘Fish Hawk,” in 188082. By A. E. Verrill. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, at Harvard College, No. 1, July, 1883, X1, pp. 1-72, pl. i-viii.) Enumerates 59 species, of which 23 are new. One new family and 5 new, genera are also defined. A large number of the old species are also described and figured, and the remainder are accompanied by more or less full notes and tables of synonymy. The plates are well-executed photo-lithographs from drawings by J. H. Emerton. The following are newly described : Families.—Ceratoiside Gray (emended), p. 9; Chrysogorgida, nov., p. 21: Primnoide (emended), p. 28. Genera.—Acanella Gray (emended), p. 13; Lepidisis, nov.,p. 18; Trido- gorgia, nov., p. 26; Stenogorgia, nov., p. 29; Actinuage, nov., p. 50; Actinostola, noy., p. 56. es ae ee ee Py Ree er ea ee ee REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 321 New species.—Kophobelemnon scabrum, pl. 1, figs. 5-5ce, p. 7; Acanella spicu- losa, p.17; Acanella simplex, p. 17; Lepidisis caryophyllia, pl. iv, figs. 1-1e, p. 18; Lepidisis longiflora, pl. iv, figs. 4, 4a, p. 19; Lepidisis vitrea, p. 20; Dasygorgia Agassizii, pl. li, figs, 4-4b, p. 22; Dasygorgia elegans, p. 23; Dasygorgia spiculosa, pl. ii, fig. 5, p. 23; Dasygorgia squamata, p. 24; Dasygorgia splendens, p. 25; Chrysogorgia Fewkesit, p. 26; Iridogorgia Pourtalesii, pl. ii, figs.7 Ta, p. 27; Primnoa Pour- talesii, pl. ii, figs. 2-2e, p. 28; Stenogorgia casta, pl. ii, figs. 1-1), p. 30; Acanthogorgia muricata, p. 34; Paramuricea grandis, pl. iii, figs. 3-36, p. 37; Paramuricea tenuis, p. 38; Eunicella modesta, pl. ii, fig. 3, p. 39; Gersemia longiflora, pl. iii, figs, 6,60, p.44; Sagartia, Acanella, pl. vi, figs. 2,2a, p. 46; Actinauge nodosa, Verrill, var. coronata, nov., pl. vi, figs. 8, 8a, p.53; var. tuberculosa, nov., pl. vi, fig. 7, p. 53; Actinauge lon- gicornis Verrill, var. Caribwa, nov., p.55; Actinauge nexilis, pl. vi, figs.4, 5, p. 55. VERRILL, A. E.—Reports on the results of dredging, under the super- vision of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico and in the Carib- bean Sea (1878-79), by the U. S. Coast Survey steamer “ Blake,” Lieut.-Commander C. D. Sigsbee, U. S. N., and Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N., commanding. XXIV.—Supplementary report on the “‘ Blake” Cephalopods, by A. E. Verrill. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., at Harvard College, No. 5, 1583, x1, pp. 105-115, pl. 1-3.) Two new genera—Nectoteuthis (p. 108) and Opisthoteuthis (p. 113)—are de- fined, and four new species are described as follows: Nectoteuthis Pourtalesii, pl. iii, figs. 1-1b, p. 108; Mossia brachyura, pl. iii, fig. 2, p. 110; Octopus pictus, pl. iii, fig. 3, p. 112; Opisthoteuthis Agassizii, pl. ffig. A; pl. i, fig. 1, p. 113. Four additional species are described, which have also been taken by the U.S. Fish Commission. They are Abrulia megalops Verrill, Sthenoteuthis Bar- tramii (Les.) Verr.(?), Cheiroteuthis lacertosa Verr., and Heteroteuthis tenera Verr. The plates are photo-lithographs from drawings by J. H. Emerton. Descriptions of two species of Octopus from California. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology at Harvard College, No. 6, 1883, x1, pp. 117-124, pl. iv—vi.) The two species described are: Octopus punctatus Gabb, pl. iv, pl. v, fig. 2, p. 117; and Octopus bimaculatus Verrill, sp. nov., pl. v, figs. 1-La, pl. vi, p. 121. The descriptions were partly drawn up from specimens furnished by the National Museum. The plates are photo-lithographs, from drawings by J. H. Emerton. Recent explorations in the region of the Gulf Stream off the eastern coast of the United States by the U.S. Fish Commission. (Science, 1883, vol. 1, pp. 443-447, 531-534; vol. 11, pp. 153-155; eight wood- cuts, charts and diagrams.) Descriptive of the physical and other characteristics of the regions ex- plored, and of the various appliances used, with a brief account of the ani- mal life. The paper is divided into the following sections: 1. Introductory (historical); 2. Physical features of the region; 3. Influence of the Gulf Stream; 4. Nature and origin of the deposits; 5. Fossiliferous magnesian lime- stone nodules. _ Waxxer, 8. T.—Fish mortality in the Gulf of Mexico. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., July 27, 1883, vol. v1, 1883, pp. 105-109.) Hy Mis) 69-21 par REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. APPENDIX C.—LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS TO THE MUSEUM IN 1883. Abbe, W. A. Specimens of menhaden scraps from Massachusetts. Ac- cession 12552. Abert, J. T., U. S. Engineers. Large collection of choice minerals col- lected by Col. I. 1. Abert, contained in four double cabinets which have been stored for many years with the Smithsonian Institution. Accession 12689. Adams Brothers. Slab of slate; from Adams Brothers’ quarry, Lynch- burg, Va. Accession 13385. Adams, J.B. Box containing living toads, lizards, snakes, bird-skins, and insects; from New Mexico. Accessions 13431, 13662. Adams, J. C. Modern Indian game (bone, wood, and strings); from Wisconsin. Accession 12672. Adams, Mayhew. Specimen of harpoon with semi-revolving head; from Massachusetts. Accession 13174. Adams, W. H. Three boxes, specimens of minerals and fossils; from Illinois. Accession 12537. Adcox, J. HZ. Box of Indian relics; from Arkansas. (Purchased.) Ac- cession 13541. Agassiz, Prof. Alecander,-Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, Mass. ‘Thirty-six species of echini (of the Blake collection). Accession 13738. Alaska Commercial Company, San Francisco, Cal. One pair of walrus tusks (loaned); from Alaska. Accession 12703. Albemarle Soapstone Company. Specimens of soapstone and tale; from Albemarle County, Virginia. Accession 13319. Aldrich, J. B. Specimen of Indian implement; dug from mound in Southeastern Colorado. Accession 13287. Alexander, Charles W. Specimens of bird-eggs; from Illinois. Acces- sion 13714. Allabach, P. H.. Specimen of wood thrush; from District of Columbia. Accession 13093. Allen, Frederick S. Model of life raft (presented); three swordfish irons (purchased). Accessions 12554, 12954. Allison, Hon. W. B. Package of minerals; from Iowa. Accession 12851. Auburndale Watch Company, Boston, Mass. Sample of metallic ther- mometer. Accession 13043. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, Rk. I. Model of steam windlass (loaned). Accession 12778. Ames, f. P. Fragments of bones from old Indian camp in Ohio. Ac- cession 13419. Anderson, Rev. D. Stuffed specimen of duck (Anas boschas) ; from Can- ada. Accession 13167. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 323 Anderson, Miss L. Z. Specimens of sulphide and carbonate of copper. Accession 13227. Andrews, Byron. Bird’s: nest and skin of pocket gopher (Geomys tal- poides bulbivorus); from Dakota. Accessions 13207, 13661. Aidrews, 2. F. Uife-size oil painting and frame of the late Charles. Darwin. Accession 12563. Apgar, Austin C. About one thousand specimens of mollusks, pisidium,. and sphoerium; from New Jersey. Accession 13597. Appleton, John W. M. Specimen of quartz, crystals, fossils, and lizard: (Plethodon glutinosus) ; from West Virginia. Accessions 13272, 13699.. Appleton, Nathan. Two photographs showing the American ambu- lance at Paris during the siege 1870 and 1871. Accession 13102- Arendell, Dr. M. F. (through 8. G. Worth). Samples of Yopon tea. Accession 13015. Arnheim, J. S. Specimens of silk-worms, insects, and snail shells; from California. Accession 13616. Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé Railroad (through John 8. F. Batchen). Specimens of building stones; from Arizona, New Mexico, and Texas.. Accession 13448. Atkins, A. L. Specimen of ore; from Louisiana, Accession, 12902. Atkins, Charles G. Alcoholic specimens of salmon eggs and embryos, and photo-negatives; from Maine. Accessions 12566, 12832, 12848. Atkins, Dr. H. A. Specimen of Towhee Bunting (Pipilo erythrophthal- mus), partial albino in flesh, and specimen of Hylocichla alicie ; from Michigan. Accessions 12866, 13005. Atwood Brothers. Model of center-board for small sail-boats and skiffs s from New York. Accession 12589. Atwood, N. E. Oil-can taken from stomach of large cod near Race. Point, Massachusetts. Accession 12808. Babcock, O. E. Two living alligators, juv. Accession 13170. Bailey, Arthur H., G Co. One can each mackerel roe, fresh mackerel., and Nantucket sturgeon; from Massachusetts. Accession 12844. Bailey, H. L. Skin of duck; from Washington Territory. Accessiom 13348. Baker, George O.,& Co. Samples cotton seed and its products, includ- ing the refined oil. Accession 12766. Baker, M. Specimens of minerals; from California. Accession, 12698~ Barber, Julia Langdon. Twoliving specimens of alligators. juv. Acces- sion 13487. Barbour, Hon. John S. Specimens of minerals and ores ; from Virginia.. Accessions 12837, 12901, 13056, 13589. Barker, Henry L. Specimens of Siren lacertina, living water-snakes, and rattlesnake (Caudisona miliaria); from South Carolina. Acces- sions 12888, 13045, 13102. Barker, 8S. C. Specimen of living siren; from Florida. Accession 12985. 324 REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. Barnes, William M. Beak and fins of sail-fish; from Ocean Island, Pacific Ocean. Accession 12676. Barnett, Edward (through Felix R. McManus). Pieces of the wood from spring-house which was used by General Washington as headquarters when he surveyed the Shenandoah Valley. Accession 13704. Bartlett, I. H., G Son. One slab each of Arctic and humpback whale- bone. Accession 12822, Barton & Logan. Specimen of monkey (Chlorocebus sabeus); from West Africa. Accession 13558. Batchen, John 8S. F. Twenty-seven packages building stones, granite and marble, from various States and Territories, also five photographs of old engines; from the Chicago Exhibition of 1883. Accessions 12770, 12841, 12916, 12929, 12950, 12969, 12993, 13000, 13003, 13027, 130141, 18088, 13117, 13163, 13186, 13199, 13224, 13299, 13327, 13368, 13433, 13443, 13445, 13460, 13477, 13511, 138534, 13556, 13576, 13708. Beall, L. A. Specimen of iron ore; from Maryland. Accession 13796. Beall, O. R. Specimen of pig (Sus scrofa) with two perfectly formed mouths; from Maryland. Accession 12984. Bean, Barton A. Tank of alcoholic fishes, reptiles, and invertebrates; from Susquehanna River, at Bainbridge, Pa. Accessions 12913, 13467. Bean, Dr. T. H. Specimens of the shad, herrings, rock-fish, and pick- erel; from Washington Market. (Purchased.) Accession 12935. Beck, A. R. Carved stone pipe; from Pennsylvania. Accession 13548. : Beckwith, Miss Iizzie. Large leaf-shaped stone implement; from Ala- bama. Accession 13607. Beetle, James. One model of whale-boat. (Purchased.) Accession 12909. Belding, L. Collections of bird-skins, Indian relics, bones, reptiles, &c.; from Lower California. Accessions 12828, 12911, 13115. Belfrage, G. W. (deceased). Specimens of natural history; from Texas. Accession 13253. Bell, James. Large collection of living snakes, bird-skins, eggs, in- sects, &c.; from Florida. Accessions 12746, 12814, 13016, 13081, 13114, 13270, 13533, 13778. Bell, Dr. Robert. Alcoholic specimens of lizard (Amblystoma), fishes (Cliola storeriana=Rutilus storerianus), and lamprey eel; from Can- ada. Accession 13038. Bendire, Charles, U. §. A. Collection of 223 bird-skins and 18 nests; from Oregon. Accession 12650. Benedict, J. E. Collection of worms, also bird-skins (Cymochorea leu- corrhoa, and Oceanites oceanicus); from Atlantic Ucean. Accessions 12856, 13753. Bereman, T. A. One box of geodes, 43 specimens, also 33 specimens (Lithostrotion canadense); from Iowa. Accession 13438. REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 325 Bertha Zine Company. Specimens of pure spelter and zine ore (silico- carbonate of zinc); from Virginia. Accession 13266. Bessels, Dr. HE. Specimen of bird-skin (Coccyzus americanus). Acces- sion 13166. Bhanmaugre, Somdet Chowfa (director-general of posts and telegraphs), Bangkok, Siam. Collection of postage-stamps; from Siam, Hong- Kong, and Singapore. Accession 13706. Bickford, Rev. W. F. Specimens of orthoclase crystals; from Colorado. Accession 13751. Biddle, Miss Lydia 8S. Specimen of an embroidered quilt over one hun- dred years old; from Carlisle, Pa. Accession 13288. Bille, Carl Steen Weiiclion de (minister resident and consul-general of Den- mark). Specimen of sonorous or singing sand; from Bornholm, Den- mark. Accession 13770. Binney, W. G. Twelve species of land shells; from New Jersey. Acces- sion 13639. Bishop, J. Specimen of insect (Phobetron pithecians); from Ohio. Accession 13470. Bishop, John. Model of ‘Grand Banker,” full rigged, complete. Scale, 4inch. (Purchased.) Accessions 12644, 12800. Black, Alexander C. One box of Indian implements and fossils; from Indiana. Accession 12897, Blackford, Eugene G. Living and fresh specimens of fishes, among which were Salmo gairdneri, Salvelinus malma, Salvelinus fontinalis, Salmo salar, Brevoortia tyrannus, Salmo poe Seriola lalandii, Scomber scombrus ; also large collection of alcoholic specimens of West Indian and South American fishes, collected by J. C. Brevoort; large collection of oyster and clam shells, fresh specimen of lobster weighing 18 pounds, one box of corals, one large tortoise, and fresh specimen of manatee (Trichechus manatus), from Drazil, and box of salamander eggs (Siredon pisciformis). Accessions 12505, 12515, 12521, 12557, 12585, 12639, 12659, 12684, 12687, 12747, 12759, 12826, 12978, 13065, 13138, 13146, 13157, 13178, 13196, 13539, 13620, 13626, 15737, 13759, 13808. Bland, Thomas. Water-color drawing of hunting monkeys with blow- gun, made by native Indian artist at the gold mines of Marmato in Autioquia, New Granada. Accession 13040 ‘Blinn, A. 8. Specimens of minerals; from Oregon. Accession 13785. Blochman, L. A. Small box of shells; pe California. Accession 13031. Bloomer, William. Bones of whale ((Balenoptera rostrata) 16 feet long, taken off Monomoy Point light-house, Harwick Port, Mass. i ~ REPORT ON NATIONAL MUSEUM. 349 _ Prather, John G. Dried skin of alligator gar (Lepidosteus spatula); from Black River, Arkansas. Accession 12745. Price, Dr. Henry M. Specimen of iron sulphide; from Virginia. = lunar-solar— and A = planetary precession): S = 0.92 + 0.46 dl —A = (Pp +4 dl) cos w—A g = 0.40 a + 0.15 dl (b + 3 dl) sin w — 0.05 al fo — 0.87 dl and we obtaiu iiereby from f and g, with only a very unimportant dif- fereuce, the precession with an error of 4 dl merely. A value of h exceeding 4 or 5” a century is moreover exceedingly improbable for those stars used by Bessel and Struve in the determination of precession, and the limits could be yet more closely drawn if the separation of the unknown quantities had not been made much more difficult by those quantities depending on the motions of the sun, by the systematic errors of the catalogues, and by the unfavorable distribution of the stars (a lack of such having tolerably large negative tangs 6d and sin 0). I “A secular rotation amounting to several seconds seems, aside from the smaller influence of the terms marked F, G, H, to be more readily derived from the fainter stars than from the brighter ones (if for no other reason than) because they are available in very large numbers. ‘The above equations, however, will not serve to completely separate the quantities 7 and dl unless at least one of the quantities w and 7 is known from another source. Tor this purpose star-ganges, and in fact all more thorough and fundamental astronomical work would, in the present state_of our knowledge, he of the greatest value. This method of determining both quantities affords us in the determination of 7b and dl from f, g, and h a check which is fully as valuable as the independent determination of g and h from both the co ordinates of stars.” The reviewer does not attempt to carry out in detail all these inves- tigations. He is convinced, however, that the hypotheses which must necessarily be assumed in doing this are not of so indefinite and arbi- trary a character, but that the treatment of the precession problem in the manner herein sketched will result in a closer approach to the true method than do those which have been hereto employed. Even the possible proof that the component of rotation h does not exist even down to the 8™ and 9" would be of great value. The prac- tical difficulties appear greater, perhaps, than they really are; and will be substantially diminished after the completion of the zone work of the Astronomische Gesellschaft, as Dr. Dreyer has particularly pointed out. Untersuchungen tiber die Pricessionsconstante auf Grund der Stern- cataloge von Lalande und Schjellerup. Inaugural-Dissertation von F. Bolte.*—In the preceding abstract the views of Professor Schonfeld - as to the relations between the precession, the motion of the solar * Bonn, 1883 (28 pp. 8vo). rz , ri on pd te ei i. as ae? Bae Seta a ae - " Ke ASTRONOMY. 369 system, and a systematic rotation of the fixed stars supposed to take place in a direction parallel to the plane of the Milky Way are given. In the present paper the author endeavors by using Professor Schén- feld’s formule to determine the amount of the constant of precession, and to find whether this hypothetical rotation exists or not. He uses the declinations of the stars common to Lalande and Schjellerup, having first reduced Lalande’s declinations anew by von Asten’s tables. The comparison showed not only a number of deviations arising from proper motion, but, in a number of cases, a reference to other star catalogues showed that Lalande had erred either 10.0 or 15.0. A complete list is given of all these errors, as also of the proper motion detected. The remainder of the investigation is carried on in three different ways, first, making use of all stars which showed large differences (Schj.—Lal.) which could not be clearly explained; next, excluding all these, and finally leaving out all stars possessing a proper motion of 0/.2 or more in a great circle, while in the two first calculations only stars with a proper motion in declination larger than 0.33 were excluded. The stars were furthermore divided into three groups, the first containing stars fainter than 8.3 mag.; the second, stars from 7.5 to 8.2 mag.; the third, from 5.5 to 7.4 mag.; all the magnitudes being taken from Argelander’s and Schénfeld’s Durchmusterungen. For every hour the mean value of dd was taken for each group of magnitudes, and 24 equa- tions of condition were formed of the form rgosa+ysnatz=d0, where 2, y, and z represent the coefficients in Sch6énfeld’s formula for do, the third and fourth term being = 0, on account of the stars being grouped round the Equator. The three groups did not show any sys- tematic difference in the values of xz, y, 2, depending on magnitude. They all give the same sign for the change of galactocentric longitude (dl) of the star, but the numerical values of this change are so small that the agreement of the signs probably only arises from some constant error. The three calculations give corrections to the lunisolar preces- sion (d 7), and adopting Peters’s values of the planetary precession, ete., the general precession for the year 1800 is found equal to 50.2197, 50.2183, and 50.2234, The author next makes use of the 24 values of OQ a given in Copernicus, vol. 11, pp. 152-153, first having reduced them to Newcomb’s system. They furnish 24 equations of condition, da=u+vsna+vw cos a, where u,v, and w likewise represent the coefficients in Schénfeld’s formula for d a. The combination of « with x and y gives, however, values of d 7 equal to about + 0.6, while the declinations alone gave about — 0.8. This discrepancy may either arise from the general uncertainty of the problem, or from the supposi- tion that the plane of rotation of the fixed stars is parallel to that of the Milky Way, but in the latter case we have not data enough to separate the precession from the rotation as long as not either the node _ or the inclination of the plane of rotation is known through other means. H. Mis. 69 24 370 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Combining R. A. and Decl. the three calculations give for the general precession for 1880, 50/.2407, 50/7.2417, and 50/7.2426., Dr. Bolte’s paper is chiefly interesting as a numerical application of Schénfeld’s formule, as the materials at present available are not extensive enough to enable us to prove clearly whether systematic motions in the plane of the Galaxy exist or not. As to the values pro- duced of the constant of precession, it is significant that the declina- tions when used by themselves give a value differing much more from the generally adopted value than the right ascensions do. Possibly this may to some extent be explained by errors in Piazzi’s or Lalande’s declinations.—( Copernicus, Nos. 29 and 30, 1883.) Star-gauges.—In the Philosophical Transactions for 1817 (p. 325), Sir William Herschel says, that, ‘‘ beside the 683 star-gauges published in the Philosophical Transactions for 1785 (p. 221), above 400 more have been taken in various parts of the heavens.” These 400 unpublished gauges have lately been extracted from the original observing-books preserved at the Herschel family residence at Collingwood, through the kindness of Sir William Herschel, the present baronet, and of his brother, Major John Herschel; and the manuscript has been presented to the Washburn Observatory, and will be printed in its Publications, vol. 1. The original records are in the handwriting of Miss Caroline Her- schel, and by her faithful care every detail necessary to their accurate reduction is preserved. It will be observed that only two-thirds of the star-gauges of Herschel have heretofore been known. The new acqui- sition will be welcomed by those interested in this class of observations. They are a new gift from an inexhaustible mine. In this connection it inay be permitted to express the hope that the Bonn Observatory will print the MS. tables prepared by Argelander, which give the counts of Stars in each square degree of the Durchmusterung. The systematic motion of the fixed stars.—Freyoid Rancken has pub- lished, in the Ast. Nach., No. 2482, a résumé of an investigation on the proper motion of the fixed stars, which he has undertaken by the advice of Dr. Gyldén. The stars employed were, Ist, Argelander’s 250 proper motion stars, and 2d, 80 stars whose proper motions have been investigated by Dr. Leo de Ball. From the stars of these two classes (with the exception of 0 Ceti, and 1830 Groombridge) the magnitude and direction of the solar motion have been determined by formule which involve the parallax of each star. The assumptions as to this parallax are derived from the hypothesis of Gyldén, given in V. J. S. der Astr. Gesellsch., vol. x11. Argelander’s proper motions in R. A. give the position of the solar apex in R. A. as A= 284° 58/.0. Argelander’s stars in Dec. give A = 284° 37’.8, ee ASTRONOMY. atk == +37° 27/.1, and »=10.85 radii of the earth’s orbit.» is the linear motion of the solar system. Dr. Ball’s 80 southern proper motions give from the Rh. A., A= 273° 46’.6; and from the Declinations, A= 244° 47.1, D=-+170 27’.1 and y= 4.59 radii. These results differ so much from each other, that the data have been combined anew by introducing the parallax of each star in such a way agto diminish the effect of proper motions much larger than tne average. ith the new equations the results are from Argelander tm RAG, A = 275° 15.2, in Deel. a= 288° 3)/3,:D=-- 41° 21.4, and p=10.61 radii. Ball’s 80 stars give in R. A., A= 281° 2/.8, and in Decl. A= 240° 24'.5, D= +119 54/.3, and »=7.83 radii. This transformation, then, has produced only a greater accordance in the values of the linear motion of the system. Both solutions show that the solar motion alone is not sufficient to account for the proper motions of the stars employed. . The next step in the process is to see if there is not some further systematic motion of the stars which will account for their proper motions. The first trial is to see if a common motion of all the stars parallel to the plane of the Milky Way will suffice. The position and motion of each star have been referred to that great circle which best represents the Milky Way. Those stars between + 30° and —30° galactic latitude whose proper motions are less than 0/’.25 have been separately considered. They are 106in number. From their proper motions in R. A. it follows A = 294° 28/.7. From those in Decl. A = 275° 47'.9, D=+ 31° 52.1, and » =9.79 radii of the earth’s orbit. If dw is the systematic motion of the 106 stars paralled to the plane of the Milky Way, there results from the proper motions in R. A., div = + 0.05645 + 0.01288, and from those in Decl., dw = + 0:02385 + 0.01464. These last values of dw have a sufficient agreement to give a great in- terest to this research and to those which Dr. Rancken intends to carry out using a greater number of stars. FIXED STARS. The constant of aberration.—M. Magnus Nyrén has published, in the Memoirs of the St. Petersburg Academy, a valuable paper on the deter- mination of this important astronomical constant. Various determina- tions of the value of the constant of aberration made by different observ- ers, with different instruments and by different methods, have gradually led astronomers to consider that there is a probobility, or, at all events, a possibility, that W. Struve’s value, notwithstanding the small prob- able error found for it, and notwithstanding the great care and skill be- stowed on the observations and on their reduction, may be several hundredths of a second too small. M. Nyrén points out two possible . 372 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. sources of error, viz, the assumed regularity of rate of the clock used for observing the transits and the assumed constancy of the azimuth of the hoizontal axis of the instrument in the interval between the transits of the same star east and west. Struve himself discussed these sources of error some years after the publication of his memoir, and was induced to alter his definitive value of the constant aberration to 20.463 with probable error of + 0.017. (It is strange that Struvg’s first value, 20/445 + 0.011, has universally been adopted, instead of this corrected value.) M. Nyrén also discusses an objection to the methods which have been adopted at Pulkowa for finding the aberration, raised by M. Yvon Villarceau on the grounds that they take no account of the abso- lute motion of the translation of the solar system, pointing out that on any reasonable hypothesis as to the velocity of this motion of transla- tion the effect on the value of the constant of aberration would be prob- ably quite inappreciable in the present state of the art of astronomical observation. The observations which form the materials for the determination in the memoir under consideration were made by M. Nyrén with the same instrument as that used by Struve, the transit in the prime vertical, and reduced and discussed generally in the same manner. The clock used is an excellent one by Dent, and from the attention which has been given to the matter, there is hardly a possibility of error creeping into the result from any error in its assumed rate. With regard to the azi- muth of the horizontal axis of the instrument, two azimuth marks have been set up and frequent determinations of this element made, and every care taken to insure accuracy, so that the present series of observations is probably free from any error arising from. this source. The number of stars observed is 24 (comparing favorably with Struve’s 7), very advantageously situated, having regard to the object in view, and the observations extended from December, 1879, to January, 1882, thus embracing two maxima and two minima of the aberration for each star. The final value found for the constant of aberration is 20.517 + 0.207 + 0.014 where z is the mean parallax. This latter quantity comes out positive for 10 stars and negative for 14; its mean value is +0/.002:+ 0.026 so that its effect on the deduced constant ‘is quite insignificant. M. Nyrén next proceeds to discuss certain observations of a Urse Minoris, 6 Urse Minoris, and Cephei 51 Hev., made by M. Wagner during the years 1861~72. These are observations of transits taken—some by the eye-and-ear method and some by registration on a chronograph— and their discussion gives 20’.483 + 0.012 for the value of the constant of aberration. ASTRONOMY. . owe Bringing together, then, the different values of this constant which have been found at Pulkowa from time to time, we have: 1. From declination observations of a Ursx Minoris, 20’.495-+ 0.013; 2. From R. A. observations of polar stars, 20/.491 + 0/7.009; 3. From observations in the prime vertical, 20/.490 + 0/.011; and, giving the same weight to these three mean values, the definitive value of the coustant of aberration is 20.492 + 0.006. This must be an extremely accurate value of this important constant, and will prob- ably have to be considered final until it can be corrected by an equally accurate and extensive series of determinations made in the southern hemisphere. Such a determination is at the present time a desideratum in astronomy. In combination with Cornu’s determination of the ve- locity of light, the above gives 8/’.777 for the solar parallax, whilst, if Michelson’s determination be adopted, it gives 8.791; a striking con- firmation of the value of the solar parallax found by Mr. Gill from his heliometer observation of Mars, made at Ascension, in 1877.—(A. M. Downing, in The Observatory, December, 1883.) Professor Peters, of Hamilton College, who is abroad investigating the star catalogue of Ptolemy with a view to an accurate edition, has been fortunate in finding, both at Venice and at Florence, several MSS. (Greek, Arabic, and Latin) of the “Almagest,” hitherto not utilized by modern scholars. He is now engaged in a prolonged research in the Vatican library. The Fundamental Catalogue of the Berliner Jahrbuch.—A very impor- tant comparison by Dr. Auwers, of the Fundamental Catalogue of the Berliner Jahrbuch with those of the Nautical Almanac, the Connaissance des Temps, and the American Ephemeris appears as a supplement to the Jahrbuch for 1854, and the following abstract of itis given. The year 1883 is the first in which such a comparison is possible. The Berliner Jahrbuch contains at present, and will contain for the future, 450 stars whose apparent places are given, and 172 stars for which only mean places are printed, i. ¢., 622 in all. The places of these stars, both in R. A. and Dec., depend strictly on the system of the Fundamental Catalogue of the Astronomische Gesellschaft (publ. xiv). They le between the north pole and —31°.3 declination. The American Ephemeris contains the mean places of 383 stars, for 208 of which ephemerides are given; 44 of these stars lie south of —31°. The Nautical Almanac has 197 stars (15 south of —32°), and ephemer- ides are given for all. The Connaissance des Temps has 310 stars between the north pole and —70°, and gives an ephemeris for each. Dr. Auwers’s account of the sources from which the star places of the various almanacs are taken, we omit. It shows how various these are. Four hundred and fifty stars have ephemerides in the -7ahrbuch ; 149 stars (mostly southern) which have ephemerides in the three other almanacs are not contained in the Jahrbuch. A table is given in Dr. Auwers’s paper, showing the comparison be- e Bye! SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. tween each star of each almanac and the Jahrbuch. From this table the elements by which the catalogue of each almanac can be reduced to the system of the Jahrbuch are deduced. A subsequent table gives the two reductions which must be added to each almanac R. A., and the two reductions which must be added to each almanac Dec., in order to reduce to the system of the Jahrbuch. The catalogue of each almanac, after the application of the system- atic reductions from this table, is then compared with the Fundamental Catalogue. For the Nautical Almanac the mean difference in declina- tion is 0.395; in R. A. (from 134 stars), 0°.0332. Of the 168 stars com- mon to both almanacs, there are 27 whose R. A. differs more than 08.067, and 8 whose declinations differ by more than 1’. These differences are, in the main, errors of the Nautical Almanac, and are largely due to the erroneous proper motions adopted in the Greenwich catalogues. For the Connaissance des Temps, the table shows large systematic errors. After these have been eliminated, the comparison gives for 229 stars, common to the Connaissance des Temps and the Berliner Jahrbuch, a mean difference of 0/.373 in declination, and a mean difference of (08,0282 (from 162 stars)in R. A. The errors here again are largely due to erroneous proper motions. The correspondence of the reduced positions of the American Ephemeris with those of the Jahrbuch varies according as one or another basis of comparisonis chosen. A complete comparison can only be made for those stars for which ephemerides are given, since the newer stars have their positions derived from several sources, not comparable among themselves. The declinations of the American Hphemeris and those of the Jahrbuch agree excellently for those stars which have been investigated by Boss. The mean difference (162 stars) is 0/.177. The other 111 stars do not agree so well, there being 12 differences between 0.5 and 1”. Thestars north of 64° depend upon Gould’s R. A.; and, of the 36 stars common to both almanaes, 15 differ by more than 08.15. Of the remaining 126 stars whose ephemerides are given, 8 have differences as great as 08.067. The mean difference for 100 stars between +40° and —20° is 08.0127. For 111 stars without ephemerides, there are seven cases where the difference is more than 05.067. For the stars south of —32° the Nautical Almanac will give the best positions, on account of its data being derived from the most recent catalogues. A comparison of the system of the Jahrbuch 1861~82 with the new system, and a general table for the reduction of the data of any almanac to the Berliner Jahrbuch system, concludes this very important paper. It appears to be highly desirable, in the interests of uniformity, that that the admirable star list of the Berliner Jahrbuch be adopted as the standard system, for all differential observations at least. The position of every star to the 9th magnitude, inclusive, from the pole to —239, willin a few years be determined on this system; and, except for weighty & — ee oe >, ASTRONOMY. at) and special reasons, it would seem unwise to choose another system for such observations. This system will also be adopted as fundamental by most of the observatories of Europe and by many elsewhere, and the perpetual revision of the system is provided for by the observatories at Bonn, Pulkova, and Strassburg, and by the discussion which these ob- servations and others will receive at the hands of a committee of the Astron. Gesellschaft. For special purposes a selection may be made from the larger list. Professor Hall has suggested that this selection be made by authority, and separately printed.—(Science, November 2, 1882.) New reduction of Lacaille’s observations.—A paper by Dr. Powalky is printed as Appendix 21 to the Report of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1882 (printed 1883), ‘‘on a new reduction of La- caille’s observations made at the Cape of Good Hope and at Paris be- tween 1749 and 1756, and given in his Astronomie Fundamenta, together with a comparison of the results with the Bradley-Bessel Fundamenta ; and also a catalogue of the places of 150 stars south of declination —30° for th® epochs 1750 and 1830.” The principal result of Dr. Powalky’s careful reduction is the cata- logue of 150 stars south of —30°, which were repeatedly observed with the six-foot sector and the sextant. It appears that Lacaille’s declinations are about of the same precision as Bradley’s; the right ascensions are somewhat less precise. This catalogue of Dr. Powalky’s must serve as a basis for researches on proper motions of southern stars, and a simple reduction of Stone 1880 to 1830, would determine quite a number with much accuracy. STAR CATALOGUES. "The Glasgow Catalogue-—Professor Grant, of Glasgow, speaks of the Glasgow Star Catalogue as if it were soon to be printed. It contains 6,415 stars, of which some 5,000 were selected from Weisse’s Bessel I. It appears that it must cover part of the field of Schjellerup’s 10,000 stars. In the course of his reductions Professor Grant has discovered 43 stars with proper motions. A list of these is given in Mon. Not. R. A. 8., January, 1883. Seven of these are noted in Bonn Observations, . vol. vir. None of the others seem to be noted in Schjellerup, of whose work Professor Grant, apparently, has made no use in the paper cited. The Paris General Catalogue of Stars.—In the last annual report issued by Admiral Mouchez we find particulars of the progress of formation of this extensive and important catalogue. It is intended to contain all the stars observed at Paris during the forty-five years, 1837 to 1881 inclu- _sive, about 40,000, but it is mainly the result of the revision of Lalande’s stars in the Histoire Céleste; indeed, for several years past, the merid- ian instruments have been almost wholly occupied upon this work, and upwards of 27,000 observations were made during 1882, the year to 376 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. which the report refers. The entire number of observations upon which the Paris General Catalogue will be founded is about 350,000. The po- sitions are referred to three principal epochs: 1845.0 for the years 1837- 53; 1860.0 for the years 1854~67, and 1875.0 for the years 1868-82. A specimen of the form in which it is intended to print the catalogue is appended tothe report. The right ascensions and declinations are given for each principal epoch, with the number and mean year of the obser- vations. The precessions are reckoned from the year 1875, with the term depending upon the square of the time. The magnitudes and the differences from the positions of the Histuire Céleste are annexed, and where a star has not been observed by Lalande a synonym in some other catalogue is given. In the first column we have the ordinal number, aud in the second the star’s number in the reduced catalogue of the Histoire Céleste. It is mentioned in the report that M. Bossert had undertaken anew determination of the places of the stars in that work, making use of the reduction tables of the late Dr. von Asten, which are more ex- act than the tablés of Hansen and Nissen, employed for the catalogue published in 1847. M. Bossert has already effected the reduction of 2,300 stars, a voluntary labor which has occupied his leisure hours. It would. add to the value of the columns, showing the differences between the new Paris positions and those of Lalande, if the comparisons could be made with places resulting from the application of von Asten’s tables, thongh it might be necessary to supplement M. Bossert’s laudable ef- forts. In the last Greenwich Catalogue (1872) the precessions are given to four places of decimals in right ascension (time), and to three places in north polar distance; the Paris Catalogue gives these quantities with a figure less, which we are inclined to regard as a retrograde step. This General Catalogue of the Observatory of Paris is to comprise two parts, which will be published simultaneously; the first part forming the catalogue proper, and the second containing details of the observa- tions upon which the mean positions are founded. Hach part will be composed of four volumes; the first volume of each is intended to ap- pear during the year 1884.—(Nature, June 21, 1883.) _ The revision of Besse?s Zones.—From a review by Dr. Schénfeld of vol. 37 (part I) of the Kénigsberg Observations (published in 1882 by Dr. Luther), the following abstract is made: It appears that it was Bes- sel’s intention to prepare a special volume on the Kénigsberg Zone Observations (—15° to + 45°), This he was never able to carry out, but his introductions and remarks on the Berlin Star Charts, and the paper of Winnecke (Ast. Nach., 1168), having showed the importance of a new reduction, the Berlin Academy undertook the expense connected with the plan, and Dr. Luther and Dr. Ruppel of the Kénigsberg Ob- servatory commenced the work, the first ‘part of which is now printed. Pages 1-181 of the work contain a list of about 1,300 zone stars in which some correction has seemed to be needed. The positions depend | | ASTRONOMY. att on an entirely new reduction quite independent of Bessel’s. The cata- logue is in tLe Zone form, and apparently the zero points of the zones are to be made to depend on new observations at Konigsberg. Catalogue of Stars occurring in the Astr. Nach.—Dr. N. M. Kam, at one timeassistant at the Leyden Observatory, has formed a catalogue of all the comparison stars which are contained in the first 66 volumes of the Astronomische Nachrichten. It consists of three parts. Part I gives the mean places for 1855 of all stars for which complete observations are published (4,890 numbers). Part II gives places which depend on independent meridian observations combined with places from catalogues (240 numbers). Part III contains stars observed in one co-ordinate only. Accurate precessions, with sec- ular variations, epoch of observation, and observer, are also given. It appears from A. N. No. 2548 that the MS. is deposited at the Leyden Observagory. Result@dos del Observatorio Nacional Argentino en Cordoba, B. A. Gould. vol. 11, Observaciones del Afio 1872 (Buenos Aires, 1882, Ixxviii, and 296 pp. 4to).—The greater part of this splendid volume is taken up by the first installment of the zone observations which were commenced at Cordoba on September 9, 1872, and closed on August 9, 1575, during which time about 105,000 single observations were made. Of these the present volume contains about 13,000. The zones comprise the part of the heavens between 23° and 80° south declination, and as a security against constant errors the plan included the formation of a more accu- rate catalogue, containing a number of stars from each zone observed three or four times each with all possible care. The meridian circle was constructed by Repsold; it has a telescope of 122™", and a circle of 716™" diameter, graduated to 4’. All the constants of the instrument have been investigated, and the results are all given in the introduction. The right ascensions of all the stars observed at Cérdoba depend upon those of the United States Coast Survey Catalogue of Fundamental Stars (2d ed., 1866), with a few slight modifications; the declinations are deduced from nadir observations, the latitude being assumed equal to —31° 25/ 15.0. The zones were 2° in width as far as 47° declination, thence increasing gradually with the declination ; they were generally one hundred minutes long. The transits were always observed by Dr. Gould, generally over three wires, and were registered on a chronograph, while an assistant read off one microscope, which was compared with the other three at the beginning and end of the zone. Four hundred and ten catalogue and time stars were observed in 1872, and the sepa- rate and mean results for 1875.0 are given. To this epoch the zone stars are also reduced, and as there is an index to the zones observed in 1572 at the end of the volume it is very simple to find any star required,— (Copernicus, February, 1883.) Uranometria Argentina.—The following alphabetical index to the con- 378 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. stellations will, I am sure, be found convenient by all who use this uranometry frequently : Constellation. Page. Constellation. Page. Constellation. Page. PATI TO Sate bee is nee L370) ei oqmolens)= eee ee 232 ull) Phoenixers See ees 157 PN DUS eee seine meeeee 134 || Eridanus -.....---. Loos ABRIChOR 22.) eh eee oe 149 Aquarius...--.-..... 2051)| POrmax -esaenreoe= « 186" Pistes =. -2- Joacee. 227 PACCHIIT Byeretine eee 220 /||SGRUS 2 oe aricie e psc. [ite ese See Prot. Walliambearknesseseceeee soem eee lesa a ee fener 1 a ee eS Com.) WL. Sampson ees ates |eareierete mere | etal 1 1 1 1 Lom OA NM Othe Shou Miceed Sdadllooeode otoc foomope Asp 1 1 1 1 Ensign 8. J. Brown... 2.22. 2-223 |0 oc cee cene|eneees ----|-o-+-e|---<-- 1 1 Mr. Joseph A. Rogers. ....---.-.|---2---+--|----------|------ it 1 1 Cedar Keys wha esn seman seis selee 176 tty in| RPK seal oeaalleoodcc He Ve Tk lyre oes obsacos|sccssa sacbllosoosesgen|[66es5+ 1 1 1 SaAnvAMLONIO, LOX a cesieamiesieceiemeeine 204 Oy i ee a Pale aml bee Ror Ss 0 Teton, Ne Eee ees s5 noseodlbsedse cood|boosooccsollessoab|isssebe 1 1 ever reelvichardsonmacsseesemee eee seis eete ear ttle mitted eerie 1 1 Capi.) W..idR. Livermore: ..25252-0 eee soe ee | “ee ee ae ese ae Lies ‘Cerro Roblero, N. Mex.......... ---- 216 O16 eteies ts oerseleeee mal teens IBroi George a ViGSON = seme seer aeaetese meee eise a 1 1 1 1 ites da Sh Wen eOnlged Geseeoee sacaladoctdo noon||coseeeoroc TD ys) iy pid 2 ee arr Ihe Uh Db eer ae petseeooe sor eeos| oo d4es acoollesod cosGeullboooaciiacbace 1 1 Princeton wNad teas ecs sec sles sees 190 1O7A| ce ore ONS eeaee sete | wore cee “ick Observatory, California....-.-- 123 D5 Ae Sea ae See aes ae | eee Total for northern hemisphere 961 795 4 7 11 9 ASTRONOMY. 397 | Photographic plates. Contacts observed. Stations. | < “6 | | Can be + 5 = += | Exposed. | neasured.| A S f= 5 | = mM a cd Wellington, South Africa........... 236 AND e556] Senn Bossa Bases PLORe Se NEW COMD a canst cnslaycecieillcin eset euis!| siseiaes cies ee 1 Ie | eaccee eee ne Wer se lee in CAREY soc bcs sctuewiallnoes as mec eeteetcjasee 1 | cpt | ce Bmsion ys El. G2 olcombe: J: 22| ssc ccc aoe scceees if Hsehewelo set MiseyM iE, CUMMINGS 1-02 sea5| ne swce Homalaste cela 1 Di seteessgethis iaarAn ria. MOLE SOM \icieloials wala Al cairo snr Siateiai|(ewiersince obra 1 i OF ee eee IMIRS Ie No TOWN s cnc Sh aoe cello setae s toatl ee nlece bale 1 P ssostules aaa. Santa Croz, Patagopia...-......-. -: 224 204) cokes eS eAloe seealeeneees DIRT Se AWA aee See SSeSc5 ae] paceporebe lose aeotees 1 1 1 1 MirOnBwWiheeleriso2... 25222. co oa cccstetsa|eacees cece 1 1 1 1 Santaco de Chile’... [22222525225 204 152" Me ccs te eoe acess |waeeere MOP PICAWISMDOSSess Son esis sa esc we ata esea las ae ctase 1 1 1 1 hire Miles wR OGkers sss Soest ce Seaebelste a) Shoe keene 4 1 1 1 1 Auckland, New Zealand ...-.......-.. 74 Sl illtors o% S| mince laos leer MIME WATS TNT LED ey are fers ceh cis Sills Saleem et cteh|lowina cia Saree | ae ami ficate aarelllwiwiavisie 1 Puree See ritChGturescnialsscises|s tes ateaee bed ewcledoe lecet@ar'lbiclos ce 1 1 Nera ONNey SUCVESOD 250 sense le dels ceo alle Sean Se celeaeeelloee es 1 1 Total for southern hemisphere. 738 587 10 10 6 7 Total for both hemispheres. -. 1,700 1, 382 14 7 17 17 From this it will appear that over a thousand plates are regarded as suitable for measurement. The Transit of Venus of 1882.—The Comptes Rendus of the Paris Acad- emy of Sciences for August, 1883, is almost wholly occupied by the preliminary reports from the various expeditions sent by the French commission for the observation of this phenomenon, and one or two expeditions acting in co-operation with the commission. The observa- tions of contacts, etc., appear in these reports. The stations included are Petionville, Hayti; Puebla, Mexico; Fort Tartenon, Martinique; Saint Augustine, Fla.; Santa Cruz, Patagonia; Cerro Negro, near San Bernardo, Chili; Chubut, Patagonia; Rio Negro (4% 21™ 20° W. of Paris and 40° 47’ 51” S.); Hoste Island, Orange Bay, Terra del Fuego; and Bragado, Buenos Ayres. Itis gratifying to note the general suc- cess which attended these expeditions, even at the most southern sta- tion in Orange Bay, the latitude of which was 55° 31/ 28”, VULCAN. (?) The editor of the Astronomische Nachrichten (Professor Kriiger) re- marks in No. 2547, with regard to the red star seen momentarily by M. Trouvelot near the sun during the total eclipse on the 6th of May, that, according to a communication he has had for some time in his hands from Professor Holden, there can be no doubt that the star in question was in fact a Arietis. No intra-mercurial planet, therefore, was seen during the eclipse.—(Atheneum.) 398 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. The conclusion above given receives additional confirmation from the report of M. Palisa, which has since been published. In fact the identification named is due to M. Palisa alone, and it was made in an ingenious manner. THE EARTH. The Geodetic Congress.—The most generally interesting part of the proceedings of the geodetic conference which met at Rome in: 1883 is that connected with the selection of a common first meridian. The report of the permanent committee of the International Geodetic Association recommends to the conference the general acceptance of the meridian of Greenwich; it was referred to a special committee composed of one representative for each of the following: England, the United States, Germany, Italy, France, and Hamburg. The report concludes thus: ‘We terminate our report by proposing to the assembly the follow- ing resolutions: ‘The seventh general conference of the International Geodetic As- sociation, held at Rome, and in which representatives of Great Brit- ain, together with directors of the principal astronomical and nautical almanacs, and a delegate from the Coast and Geodetic Survey of the United States, have taken part, after having discussed the questions of unification of longitude by the adoption of an initial meridian, and the unification of time by the adoption of a universal hour, have come to the following conclusions: “Firstly, that the unification of longitudes and hours is equally de- sirable in the interests of science as in those of navigation, commerce, and international communication. The scientific and practical utility of this reform considerably outweighs the sacrifices and the trouble of arrangement to which it will put the minority of civilized nations. It should, therefore, be recommended to the governments of all the states interested, that it may be arranged and confirmed by an international convention, so that henceforth one and the same system of longitudes may be employed in all the astronomical and nautical almanacs in all the geodetic and topographical bureaus and institutes, and in all geo- graphical and hydrographical charts. ‘‘Secondly, that the conference propose to the Governments to choose for the initial meridian that of Greenwich, inasmuch as that meridian fulfills, as a point of departure of longitudes, all the conditions required by science ; and that being already actually and most extensively used of all, it presents the greater probability of being generally accepted. ‘‘ Thirdly, that the longitudes should be reckoned from the meridian of Greenwich in the sole direction of from east to west and from zero to 360°, or from zero to 24 hours. The meridians on the charts and the longitudes in the registers should be indicated everywhere in hours and minutes of time, with liberty of adding the indication of the cor- responding degrees. ASTRONOMY. 399 “Fourthly, that the conference recognizes for certain scientific needs and for the service for the great administrations of the means of com- munication, such as railways, steamship lines, telegraphs, and posts, the utility of adopting a universal hour, side by side with the local or national hours, which will necessarily continue to be employed in civil life. ‘‘Fifthly, that the conference recommends, as the point of departure of the universal hour and of cosmopolitan dates, the mean noon of Greenwich, which coincides with the instant of midnight, or with the beginning of the civil day, situated at the twelfth hour or at 180° from Greenwich. It follows that the universal time will correspond every- where with the mean local time reckoned from midnight, less twelve hours and the longitude of the place, and that the dates change at the antipodes of Greenwich. ‘¢Sixthly, that it is desirable that those states which, in order to adhere to the unification of longitudes and of hours, will have to change their meridians, should adopt the new system of longitudes as quickly as pos- sible in their observations and official almanacs, in their geodetical, topographical, and hydrographical works, and in their new charts. As a means of transition it would be well that in new editions of old charts, on which it would be difficult to change the squares, the indications ac- cording to the new system should at least be inscribed alongside the enumeration of the old meridians. “‘Seventhly, that these resolutions should be laid before the Govern- ments and recommended to their friendly consideration, with the ex- pression of the hope that an international convention confirming the unification of longitudes and of hours may be concluded as quickly as possible by a special conference.” . The report of the special committee on the above resolutions was read on the 22d before the general meeting of the conference, and accepted after a very animated debate. Referring to the resolutions, it is only requisite to state briefly that, according to the Times’s report, as sent back to the conference by the special committee, they now stand as follows: Numbers 1, 2, 4, 6, and 7 were adopted by the committee without alteration; the other two were modified, or rather abbreviated, and now read thus: ‘Thirdly, that the longitude should be reckoned from the meridian of Greenwich in the sole direction of from west to east.” “Fifthly, that the conference recommends, as the point of departure of the universal hour and of cosmopolitan dates, the mean noon of Greenwich, which coincides with the instant of midnight, or with the beginning of the civil day, under the meridian situated at 12 hours or 180° from Greenwich ; the universal hour to be counted from zero to 24.” To these seven resolutions the speeial committee have added two others. 400 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. The first, inserted between numbers 1 and 2 of those referred to, reads thus: “That notwithstanding the great advantages which the general in- troduction of the decimal division of the quadrant for geographic and geodetic co-ordination and the corresponding expressions for time is destined to realize scientifically and practically, reasons eminently sound appear to justify the passing by the consideration thereof in the great measure of unification proposed in the first resolution. Mean- while, to satisfy at the same time important scientific considerations, the conference recommends on this occasion the extension, in multiplying and perfecting the necessary tables, of the application of the decimal divisions of the quadrant, at least for the great numerical calculations for which it presents incontestable advantages, even if it be desired to preserve the old sexagesimal division for observations, maps, naviga- tion, ete.” The other, inserted between numbers 6 and 7, is as follows: ‘““The conference hopes that if the whole world is agreed upon the unification of longitudes and hours in accepting the Greenwich merid- ian as the point of departure, Great Britain will find in this fact an additional motive to take on her side new steps in favor of the unifica- tion of weights and measures by joining the metrical convention of May 20, 1875.” The resolution as to the choice of the initial meridian was carried by 22 votes to 4; while Mr. Christie, supported by the French delegates, moved the substitution of Greenwich midnight for noon as the point of departure. This amendment was negatived by 20 votes to 8.—(Na- ture, October 25, 1883.) Telegraphic longitudes.—The Report of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1882 contains a very interesting sketch-map, which gives graphically the index to 105 determinations of telegraphic longi- tudes by the officers of the Coast Survey between 1846 and 1882.. It would add to the interest of this map if the telegraphic longitudes determined by various observatories (as the Naval Observatory, Cam- bridge, Clinton, Princeton, Albany, &c.), were to be separately indi- cated. Telegraphic determinations of longitude in Asia—The work of Lieu- tenant-Commanders Green and Davis and Lieutenant Norris, U.S. N., in determining telegraphic longitude has been previously noticed here. In 1877, 1878, and 1879 a chain of longitudes (telegraphic) was carried from Key West through the Windward Islands and to Panama, as well as from England to Lisbon, Cape de Verde, Rio, and Montevideo. The last station has been counected overland with Santiago de Chile, and Panama is now being connected with Santiago down the west coast. During 1881 and 1882 this important work was extended to the China seas, and the positions of Madras, Shanghai, Hong-Kong, Sin- gapore, Nagasaki, Vladivostok, etc., were fixed. The prime importance ASTRONOMY. 401 of the work is for hydrographic purposes; but it is almost equally valuable astronomically. Itis interesting to note that Captain Green’s longitude of Vladivostok is 8" 47™ 30°.92, while the direct (overland) longitude is 8® 47" 318.32. The small discrepancy of 0°.4 is a testimony to the accuracy of the work. Telegraphic longitudes in South America.—The following is an extract of a letter from Dr. Copeland, dated: Lima, January, 1883: “At Cho- rillos, near this, are staying M. Barnand, lieutenant de vaisseau, and M. Favreau, ensigne de vaisseau, members of the French Venus Ex- pedition to Chili. Chorillos is the landing point of the cable from Valparaiso and Panama. The French astronomers, in conjunction with two colleagues now at Valparaiso, are determining the difference of longitude; they have 2-inch transit instruments, with chronographs and chronometers, and the cable is led directly into the observatory. The instruments are similar at both stations; the observers do not in- terchange stations, but the personal equation has been determined for wire transits and signals transmitted by Thompson’s galvanometer. The strength of current is adjusted by a rheostat to a constant strength. A triangulation will connect Chorillos, Callao, and Lima, distant some 6 or 7 miles from each other. The connection of Valparaiso with Buenos Ayres on the one hand, and with Callao and Panama on the other, will complete the circuit of the greater part of South America, the chain from Greenwich to Buenos Ayres, through Lisbon, Madeira, St. Vincent, Pernambuco, Bahia, Rio Janeiro, and Montevideo, having been fin- ished by Lieutenant-Commander Green, U. 8S. N.,in 1879. Itis deeply to be regretted that a spirit of undue economy prevents the British Government from taking part in these important operations, which are so closely connected with navigation and geography on a large scale.”— (Copernicus, November 28, 1883.) ~ Chronometric longitudes.—The Comptes Rendus for January 8, 1883, contains an interesting note by M. de Magnac upon the accuracy of lon- gitudes determined by chronometers. A comparison is made with the values determined in 1871-1873 of the longitudes of Bahia, Montevideo, and Rio de Janeiro with the telegraphic values more recently obtained by officers of the United States Navy. The differences are as follows: Chronometric — Telegraphic. Bahia, —15.3. Bahia, +15.0 Montevideo, —0°.5 Rio de Janeiro, —1°.1 This surprising accuracy, for expeditions of over forty days, is due to the method adopted, that of M. Villarceau, in which the rate ob- served on the land before departure and after the return are made the basis of a calculation giving the rate from day to day as a function of the time and temperature. H. Mis. 69———26 402 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. The United States Lake Survey—There has just been issued by the Chief of Engineers, in a quarto of 920 pages, with thirty plates, a detailed re- port of the operations in the prosecution of the survey of the Great Lakes. This important work is now finished, and the report presents in a com- prehensive manner the methods used and results obtained. The report starts with a historical account of the survey, from its inception in 1841 to its completion; gives a synopsis of the work accomplished under the various officers who from time to time have had charge of the survey; gives an account of the standards of length upon which the surveys depend, of the measuring-bars used and methods of using them, and of the results obtained both insthe measurement of the base lines and in the results of their connection by triangulation, and of the geodetic and astronomical work. The part devoted to the discussion of the base ap- paratus will be found of special interest to geodeticians. Full account is given of the determination of the constants of the apparatus used, and of the coefficients of expansion. Also, there is a discussion of the “set” of a zine bar when heated. A portion of the book is devoted to the consideration of the mean levels of the Great Lakes, and the methods by which the results were obtained. The question of tides in the lakes had been previously considered (Report of Chief of Engineers, 1872). The tides are perceptible, but of scientific rather than practical importance, the maximum being less than 2 inches.—(Professional Papers, Corps of Engineers, No. 24.)—(Science.) General movements of the soil_—Dr. Hirsch, director of the Neuchatel Observatory, has published an account of the motions of the pillars wheh support his transit instrument, during the years 1860-1882. The whole series is analyzed and leads to the following conclusions : 1st. The hill on which the observatory is situated oscillates each year about the vertical. On the average it moves 39/.8 each summer from left to right, and 38.2 each winter from right to left. Thus there is a progressive twist, beside the periodic ones. 2d. The hill changes its level progressively 24 yearly, and always in the same direction. Thus since 1859 the change of level (towards the west) has been 550”. Dr. Hirsch compares the changes with the num- ber of spots on the sun, and finds a connection between the two phe- nomena. Mr. Faye,in reviewing this paper of Dr. Hirsch’s, points out that the phenomena can be explained by the geological structure of the strata below the Jura. They are calcareous and clay beds which can slip the one over the other. Water does not penetrate the layers of clay, but it lubricates their surfaces and facilitates the sliding of one layer relative to another. The layers of limestone are moreover filled with holes and fissures running in various directions, and theretore excellent reservoirs for subterranean water. Mr. Faye explains the phenomena in question by supposing a stratum of limestone which is turning periodically over ASTRONOMY. : 403 a lower layer of clay, under the influence of the change of seasons; while at the same time a progressive slipping of one layer on the other will account for the changes of level. In this connection, we may refer to diurnal movements of the soil derived from astronomical observations by Dr. Gould (U.S. Coast Survey Report, 1862~64, and Cordoba Obser- vations, vol. 1, p. lii), and by Mr. Fergola (R. Ac. Sci. Napoli, 1871), as well as to the special physical studies by D’Abbadie in France, G. Dar- win in England, and others. THE MOON. Semi-diameter of the moon.*—Prof. H. M. Paul, formerly assistant at the United States Naval Observatory, Washington, gives in Appendix 11 of the Washington Observations for 1879 the results of two occulta- tions of the Pleiades group by the moon, observed by himself to deter- mine the occultation semi-diameter of the moon, and also the corrections to the right ascension, declination, and parallax of the moon. these be- ing necessarily involved with the semi-diameter. The occultations oc- curred on July 6, 1877, and September 6, 1879, and were observed with the 9.6-inch equatorial of the Washington Observatory. The relative positions adopted for the stars were those of Wolf, with proper motions from comparison with Bessel, and the general proper motion of the group as given by Newcomb. The observations of 1877 were poorly placed for a determination of the correction to the semi-diameter; but those of 1879 give a much more reliable result. From the later (fourteen in all) the resulting correction to Hansen’s mean semi-diameter (15! 33/.47) is —1’.69+ 0.12; and the resulting value, is therefore, semi-diameter =15/ 31”.78+0.12. He gives also the results of Airy’s determination from 296 scattered observations from 1833 to 1860. From the immer- sions and emersions at the dark limb the resulting values are larger by 0.9 and 0.5 than those given by Professor Paul, and from immersions and emersions at the bright limb Airy’s results are larger by 2/’.3 and 4.4, Professor Paul concludes that the best way to observe the actual occultation at the bright limb is to use as high a magnifying power as possible, so as to obtain a decided difference of color between the star and the moon’slimb. Neither set of occultations observed by Professor Paul gives any evidence of deviation of the moon’s limb from a perfect circle.—( The Observatory, October, 1883.) The moon’s heat.—The Sidereal Messenger for August, 1883, contains an extract from a private letter of Professor Langley’s giving some re- sults of unpublished observations on the lunar heat: “We are measuring the heat of the moon by the bolometer, and the light in its spectrum by other methods, in order to ascertain the tem- perature of the lunar surface. Our preliminary measures already war- rant us in announcing a different conclusion from that reached by Lord Rosse, who, from the fact that a certain specimen of glass absorbed more * Science, vol. I, No. 20. 404 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. of lunar than of solar heat, drew (as is well known) the inference that the lunar surface in sunshine was nearly of the temperature of boiling water. We find no evidence whatever of this, but are led by other ex- periments to believe that the fact (which we do not question) that most kinds of glass absorb more lunar than solar heat has no such explana- tion as Lord Rosse assigned to it, but is due to selective absorption of the solar rays by the lunar surface. We find no evidence of any but reflected heat there, and so far as our experiments go, no indication that the absolute temperature of the lunar surface, under full sunshine, is high enough to give any indication whatever of its existence to the most sensitive apparatus we have.” Virtual change of the astronomical unit of time.—Mr. E. J. Stone has recently communicated to the Royal Society a paper on a virtual change of the astronomical unit of time, which has taken place in consequence of the difference between Bessel’s expression for the moon’s mean longi- tude and the corresponding formule of Hansen and Leverrier. The investigation was primarily undertaken for the purpose of finding an explanation of the rapidly increasing discordance between the moon’s place and that indicated by Hansen’s lunar tables; and, after a careful examination of a number of other hypotheses, Mr. Stone thinks he has found the cause as indicated above. Up to 1863, Hansen’s lunar tables were satisfactory; since then the error of the moon’s longitude has increased from +0/.121 to +10/.265. Mr. Stone thinks this will also clear up some perplexing discrepancies in results as to the moon’s secular acceleration. He points out that Hansen’s tables ‘cannot safely be used in the discussion of ancient eclipses until the effects of this confusion of units of time have been cleared.” — This paper has been replied to by various astronomers, notably Pro- fessors Adams and Cayley, who have shown that Mr. Stone is here in error. MINOR PLANETS. The part of the Berliner Astronomisches Jahrbuch for 1885 containing ephemerides of the minor planets for 1883 has been issued to the various observatories in advance of the publication of the annual volume. It contains approximate places for every twentieth day of 224 of these bodies, the latest being No. 225, with accurately calculated opposition ephemerides of 43, each extending over about five weeks. This division of the Jahrbuch occupies upwards of one hundred pages. There are six cases during the year where the planets,approach the earth about opposition, within her mean distance from the sun. On June 22 Phocea is at a distance of 0.93, declination +16°; on July 12 the distance of Clio is 0.96, declination —35}°; on August 1 that of Isis is 0.90, declination — 28°; on October 1 that of Polyhyumnia is 0.98, de- clination +84; on October 20 that of Virginia is 9.98, declination +139, i 2 7 a 2: 4 i ASTRONOMY. 405 and on December 11 Flora in perigee is at a distance of 0.97, with de- clination +18°. Galle’s method of determining the solar parallax, so strongly advocated and ably applied by Mr. Gill, is not likely to fail for want of opportunities of applying it. As regards the magnitude near opposition we have in the case of Phocea 9.0; Clio, 10.2; Isis, 8.8; Poly- hymnia, 9.7; Virginia, 9.9; and Flora, 8.2. During the year 1883 four of these planets descend below 14", from coming into opposition not far from aphelion.—(Nature.) New minor planets.—The following minor planets were discovered in the year 1883: No. Name. Discovered. Discoverer. PaO MIMUUSNIE = Hee et Aneto ese loe cee PO ANUALY: OL ec. coe a ecteties wes ares | alae et ek eee a ee a aie Si os ee ae Le is 2 are oh ORCL LY. Dae MEM NALA Soe). see las eee es | PAU OSG bee eee te. csi] POuerne BC VOlNA ae aos ence a tess se =|) NOVOMNGCE 26,.- 2-5 caemocrscicce ae MLIOD: JUPITER. Mass of Jupiter—Dr. Kempf has reduced a number of observations of difference of R. A. between Jupiter and the satellites III and IV, which were made by Dr. Vogel in 1868-1870. He has also re-reduced Airy’s similar measures of 1V (1832-36). The mass of the planet by various methods is thus summarized: I.—From satellite-observations. Heliometer observations: Bensel (Schur). t2.; 3:shs eee 2 1,048.629+ 0.134 26) 01 SS ER ee ne re eS 1,047.232 0.246 Transit observations: arty (Rempiyiie sie. cia scdstel- son ce? LOFT GEL 0.488 Worel: (Kempeby occ tins ose ie ae 1,047.767 0.310 IL.—From perturbations. Hansen—Hgeria....-.....+...- ons, L0DL Ae 0.81 Becker—Amphitrite. ............. 1,047.37 1.31 Moller—Faye’s comet ...--..-. sony D047. 190 1.185 Krueger—Themis...............-.- 1,047.538 0.192 v. Asten—Encke’s comet (1865-71). 1,047.611 0.171 Puviaco—Diana. 220520... st 1,045.25 0.46 The great red spot upon Jupiter’s disk.—Prof. A. Riccd, of the observ- atory at Palermo, in a communication to the Memorie della Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani, gives interesting details of his observations on the features of Jupiter’s disk during the last opposition. The red spot 406 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. had become very faint, indeed barely distinguishable, in April and May, and was invisible at the commencement of June, 1883. Professor Hough also continues his work upon this interesting phe- nomenon with the Chicago 18-inch refractor. SATURN. Mass of Saturn.—In the years 1875, 1876, and 1877 Professor Hall observed the difference of R. A. of Japetus and (both limbs of) Saturn by means of the chronograph, measuripg the difference of declination also. From 128 sets of observations (20 to 25 transits in a set) the mean distance of the satellite is deduced from each year separately. The probable accidental error of a single year’s determination of a is slightly over 0/.05 or zohon patt. The resulting mean is therefore probably nearly free from accidental error and is adopted by Professor Hall. It is 515’’.522 at Saturn’s dis- tance 9.53885. The periodic time of Japetus has been deduced by a comparison with one ot Sir W. Herschel’s observations, those of Sir John and Washing- ton observations. It is sidereal revolution=79.3310152 days. Neglect- ing the action of the rings and satellites the mass of Saturn is z;455- The Cassini division of Saturws ring.—At the January (1883) meet- ing of the Royal Astronomical Society, Prof. J. C. Adams made a very interesting communication on William Ball’s observations of Saturn, upon which much confusion and misapprehension have existed. Atten- tion has been directed to the subject lately by several astronomical con- temporaries, mainly with the view to show that William Ball was not, as he has been considered, the discoverer of the chief division of Saturn’s ting. Professor Adams has carefully examined letters from Ball pre- served in the Archives of the Royal Society, Huyghen’s Opera Varia, etc., and remarks: ‘TI find no evidence that Ball, any more than Huy- ghens, had noticed any indication of a division in thering.” This state- ment may be accepted as conclusive that the impression of several English writers as to Ball’s claim to the discovery of a double ring is a mistaken one, and the credit of the discovery rests with Cassini. The announcement of it made by the French astronomer of the Academy of Sciences is in the following terms: ‘‘ Aprés la sortie de Saturne hors des rayons du soleil Van 1675 dans le crépuscule du matin, le globe de cette planéte parait avec une bande obscure semblable a celle de Jupi- ter, étendue selon la longueur de ’anneau @orient en occident, comme elle se voit presque toujours par la lunette de 54 pieds, et la largeur de Vanneau étoit divisée par une ligne obscure en deux parties égales, dont Vintérieur et plus proche du globe étoit fort claire, et Vintérieur un peu obseur. Il y avoit entre les couleurs de ces deux parties, a-peu-prés la méme différence qui est entre ’argent mat et ’argent bruni (ce qui n’avoit jamois été observé auparavant), et ce qui s’est depuis vu ASTRONOMY. 407 toujours par la méme lunette, mais plus clairement dans la crépuscuel et Ala clarté de la lune que dans une nuit pilus obscure. Cette appar- cence donna une idée comme @’un anneau double, dont Vinférieur plus lar: e et plus obscur fait chargé dun plus étroit et plus clair.” In two figures attached to this announcement the ring is shown with the outer half shaded and the inner half white, and there is a central band across the globe.—(Nature.) Rings of Saturn.—Mr. William B. Taylor recalls attention to the an- nouncement made by Otto Struve in 1851, that the observations of two hundred years showed the rings of Saturn to be widening, and the inner edge of the inner bright ring to be approaching the budy of the planet. ‘‘Accepting the only tenable theory of the rings, that they are com- posed of discrete particles, each revolving in its own orbit, we may, by Kepler’s law, compute the period of rotation of any part of the ring. Assuming the period of the inner satellite (Mimas) to be 22h. 374m., the computed period of the outer edge of the ring is 14h. 30m ; of the dividing stripe, 11h. 20m.; of the inner edge of the bright ring, 7h. 12m.; of the inner edge of the dusky ring, 5h. 45m.; and of the ring as a whole (supposed solid), about 10h. 50m. The period of the planet is 10h. 14m. ‘¢ With the complex perturbations induced by the exterior satellites, it is evident that no particle of the ring can revolve in a circular orbit ; and it follows that, in a space so crowded with particles as to give a continuous light, there must be much interference. Whether the col- lisions at intercepting orbits result in heat or in disintegration, they necessarily tend to a degradation of motion, and hence to a shortening ° mean radius-vector and a diminishing period. ‘Tt thus appears that Struve’s conclusions have a rational theoretic basis. The rings are falling toward the planet and will eventually be absorbed. Indeed, on the generally received meteoric theory of their constitution, it is impossible to regard their present condition other- wise than as an evanescent phase of a progressive evolution.” Mr. Taylor points out that the relation between the rotation periods of the planet and the ring, and the relation between the rotation periods of Mars and its satellites, not only fail to impeach the nebular hypoth- esis, aS Some have supposed, but even fail to be anomalous. If the planet had a velocity of rotation equal to that of a satellite re- volving at its surface, it could not approach the spherical shape. And, the form having once been assumed, the rate of rotation must neces- sarily and continuously diminish through the influence of solar tides, until eventually the planetary day and year are identical.—(Phil. Soe. Washington ; meeting October 13, 1883.) The divisions in Saturn’s rings.*—Professor Kirkwood showed some * Astron. Nachr., No. 2527. 408 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. twenty years ago that Jupiter exercised a peculiar influence over the winor planets, tending to produce well-marked gaps amongst them at certain well-defined distances. For if the period of any minor planet were commensurable with that of Jupiter, the latter would exercise a perturbing influence upon it which would eventually result in a com plete change of orbit. Later on, in 1868, Professor Ki: kwood employed the same principles to account for the great division (Cassini’s) in Sat- urn’s rings. Maxwell had shown that the rings must be formed of sep- arate particles moving round the planet to a certain extent as independ- ent satellites. Buta body moving round Saturn at the distance of Cas- sini’s division would have a period that was very closely commensur- able with those of each of the six inner satellites, and it would therefore be especially exposed to perturbation. Dr. W. Meyer, of Geneva, has carried the princip!e yet further and has investigated every possible com- bination of the commensurabilities of the revolution periods of the sat- ellites, and he finds that, including the division of Cassini, there are seven places where the satellites would unite to exercise a perturbing influence on the members of the ring system. The first position is where the period would be one-fourth of that of Mimas, and marks the inner boundary of the dark ring. Particles moving at almost precisely the same dis- tances would have their times commensurable with each of the other five inner satellites; thus for a period of one-quarter of that of Mimas we have a distance of 10/.56 from the center of Saturn, for one-sixth of that of Enceladus 10/.43, and for one-eighth of that of Tethys 10/.66. Dr. Meyer sees a consequence of this close agreement in the well-defined character of the inner edge of the dark ring. Next comes Struve’s division in the dark ring. One-fifth the period of Enceladus corre- sponds to a distance af 11’.79; one-seventh that of Tethys11”.66; the three next satellites give a closely similar result. The position of Struve’s division is not very exactly known, and Dr. Meyer adopts 11/.79* as its distance, being the mean between the positions of the inner boundaries of rings C and B. One-third of the period of Mimas introduces a new series of commensurabilities in which all the six satel lites take a part, but the agreement is by no means so close as in the first two cases, and Dr. Meyer regards the indistinct character of the inner boundary of the bright ring B, which would about correspond to the mean of the distances indicated, as connected with this less perfect coincidence. The period of Enceladus is four times, that of Tethys six times, that belonging to a particle at this distance. Cassini’s division corresponds, as already stated, to a period commensurable with each of the six inner satellites, the period of Mimas being twice as long, En- celadus three times, Tethys four, Dione six, Rhea nine, Titan thirty- three. The commensurabilities in the case of the four nearest satellites are of the simplest possible character, and we find that the inner edge * There is a misprint here in Dr. Meyer’s paper; the observed and calculated dis- tances have been interchanged. ASTRONOMY. 409 of Cassini’s division, which is situated at the distance thus indicated, is especially distinctly marked. The outer edge is very indistinct, the influence of Rhea and Titan being much feebler on account of their greater distance. One-fifth the period of Dione corresponds to about the distance of Encke’s division. One-eighth of Rhea’s period and one-half of Titan’s approximate roughly to the same distance. The division is faint and ill-defined. One-third the period of Tethys, the simplest relation now - reinaining, indicates the outer boundary of the ring system, and one- seventh that of Rhea and one twenty-sixth that of Titan correspond to distances of nearly the same amount. The only simple relation omitted is that of one-fifth the period of Tethys, and thus closely corresponds to integral parts of the periods of the three next outer planets. There should, therefore, be another divi- sion at about 14.7. Dr. Meyer does not seem aware of the fact, but several observers of Saturn have noticed that ring B begins to shade off a little nearer Saturn than the center of the ring, which would correspond to a distance of about 14’.7 or 14.8. Professor Holden speaks of the point where this shading-off begins as “a definite point.” The corre- spondence between calculation and observation as to the divisions of Saturn’s rings would therefore seem to be complete.—(The Observatory, September, 1833.) The satellites of Saturn.—Dr. W. Meyer has published (in the Astr. nachr.) corrected elements of the satellites Enceladus, Tethys, Dione, Rhea, Titan, and Japetus, chiefly founded upon his observations ‘at the Observatory of Geneva in 1881, the mean motions, however, being determined from a comparison of the Geneva observations with the elenients assigned by Jacob from measures of the satellites made at Madras during the years 1856~58. The mean distances and periods resulting from Dr. Meyer’s investigations are as follows: Cate ce 7 Ts A Gia aie Mean . distance. Period. Radii of Sat.| d. h. m. 8 SMGELAIHSs © o5055 2 vbode vs Bee ee 3. 8661 1 853 6.92 Teunys:. --.. . AN MEE Fa ly Fie A Sete CR an & - 4,8116 P21. 18: 25. 62 LICR ek See oes Tee ae te Gk eee Oe 6. 1629 217 41° 9.29 iS GLI ERA EY Lite oe he ae eee 8. 6082 A512 2b LL.57 Pea eS oss ie Pints) ¢ s eRAR 19.9111 | 15 22 41 23.16 ME MRAETIRY ete eS oe os eo ye Re 8 ws Re 57.9303 | 79 7 49 24.84 (Nature, Aug. 16, 1883, vol. xxvil1I, p. 377.) 410 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. URANUS. Signor Schiaparelli, the director of the Royal Observatory at Milan, gives in Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 2526, the results of a series of ob- servations of the figure of the planet Uranus, which has been exception- ally favorably situated for that purpose. Hisresults (as to the amount ~aO € “J 1 bs a of oblateness), by two separate methods, are 10.98-1.0.93 and 10.91-.0.67, agreeing very well with that obtained in 1842 and 1843 (the last time when the planet’s position was equally favorable) by the late Professor Madler from his observations at Dorpat, and indicating that Uranus is the most elliptical of all the planets excepting Saturn. A similar result has been reached by Professor Young with the Princeton re- fractor. Mass of a planet from observation of two satellites —M. Struve recom- mends measurement of the position angle and distance of a satellite from another satellite, and not from the primary planet. A series of such measurements on satellites of Jupiter has been begun at Pulkova. The observations occupy one-third the time, and are considered to be two or three times as accurate as those by direct reference to thecenterof the planet. They are free, moreover, from the unknown constant errors inseparable from the latter—an advantage which Prof. A. Hall, in this paper, considers cheaply purchased at the price of greater difficul- ties in computation. He shows that while the solution of 6 normal equations requires 77 auxiliary quantities, that of 12 (the elements of both orbits being involved by the new method) requires 442, and there- fore nearly six times the labor. But these 12 equations give the period and mean distance of each satellite, and hence two values of the planet’s mass. (Phil. Soc. Wash., math. sect. ; meeting April 26.)—(Science.) COMETS. The Comet of 1771.—The comet discovered by Messier at Paris on April 1, 1771, and last observed by St. Jacques de Silvabelle at Mar seilles on July 17, has long been mentioned in our treatises on astron- omy as undoubtedly moving in a hyperbolic orbit. This inference was first drawn by Burckhardt, who considered that of all the comets cal- culated up to the time he wrote (Mémoires présentés par Savans étran- gers, 1805) that of 1771 was the only one of which it could be stated with some degree of certainty that the orbit was hyperbolic. Encke reduced anew the six observations employed by Burckbardt, and found that the most probable elements were hyperbolic with eccentricity = 1.00937, which is almost identical with Burckhardt’s value (1.00944). Nevertheless he did not regard the decided superiority of the hyper- bola in the representation of the six places as an indubitable proof of the necessity of admitting motion in that curve; the positions used were not normal positions, but the results of single and isolated ob- ASTRONOMY. 411 servations, and as such, the errors exhibited by a parabolic orbit had not so great a preponderance in his opinion as to enforce such necessity. He concluded that the subject still required examination by a combina- tion of all the observations, and especially if the originals of those at Marseilles could be found, Lately the orbit of the comet of 1771 has formed the subject of two memoirs, the first by Mr. W. Beebe, in the Transactions of the Connec- ticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. V; the second by Dr. H. Kreutz, published m the Proceedings of the Vienna Academy. Mr. Beebe gives also a hyperbolic orbit, accompanied by the most probable parabola for comparison. Dr. Kreutz is led to a parabolic orbit for the closest representation of the comet’s path, and though the original ob- servations at Marseilles had again been sought for unsuccessfully he does not think their recovery would affect the conclusion at which he has arrived. The elements of the definitive parabola are as follows: Perihelion passage, 1771, April 19.14144 M. T. at Paris. (e) / “ul Longitude of perihelion ...............-- 104 1 21.7 Longitude of ascending node. .......... 27 53 11.7 > M. Kq. 1771.0. MUNUEMIRI Ee tr Se Baa). fe Abe oy 11 15 53.1 Logarithm of perihelion distance, 9.955127. —(Nature.) Theory of Enckes Comet.—Nature, December 13, 1883, contains an abstract of the recent results of Dr. Backlund, whose paper has not yet reached this country. Dr. y. Asten, in August, 1878, showed that an acceleration of 0/.104 in the mean motion would satisfy all the successive revolutions of the comet between 1519 and 1858. The probable error of a normal posi- tion was 9” in each co-ordinate. The appearance of 1871 presented a striking exception to others, in that the acceleration had a quite differ- ent value, and Dr. v. Asten was led to the belief that some one of the asteroids had produced the retardation in question. In 1881 a similar retardation was indicated, and Dr. Backlund, employing v. Asten’s methods, was able to fix on the time and place where the retardation occurred, which was again in the region of the small planets. A complete revision of the formule by Dr. Backlund has led to the detection of a material error in the computations, which, being rectified, enables the whole of the observations of all the appearances, 1868-1881, to be well represented. The probable error of each co-ordinate of a nor- minal position, 1868-1881, is now not above 4.1. By introducing Schur’s reduction of Bessel’s mass of Jupiter, this error is finally reduced to 2/.8. and the resuiting acceleration for each revolution, 1868-1881, is 0/’.054. The precision with which the normal places are satisfied is truly re- markable. The theory for the years 1819-1868 will next be examined, and the 412 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. difference between the values of the acceleration for the two periods is to be examined. The great comet of 1882.—Mr. Winlock, of the Naval Observatory, has recently printed as an appendix to the Washington Astronomical Observations a valuable summary of the Washington observations of this comet. The paper includes interesting drawings of the comet at various dates, and also special diagrams of the head. The meridian observations of the comet are illustrated by a series of diagrams showing the particular part of the head which was observed ; and this will be found to be a valuable addition for the use of comput- ers, whose chief difficulty will be found in utilizing observations by dif- ferent observers whose data refer to different parts of the nucleus. Dr. Gould has communicated to No. 2538 of the Astronomische Nach- richten a long series of observations of the great comet (b, 1882) made at Cordoba, where it was observed by Mr. Thome, assistant at the ob- observatory there, until the Ist of June, a later date by twenty-six days than that at which it was seen at any other observatory. The comets of 1883 have been, a, that discovered by Mr. Brooks on Feb- ruary 23, and the Pons comet of 1812, rediscovered by Mr. Brooks Sep- tember 1, 1883. The variations in light of the latter comet have been noteworthy. REPORTS OF OBSERVATORIES, ETC. Reports of observatories for 1882.—The Vierteljahrsschrift of the Ger- man Astronomical Society for 1883 (part 2) contains a series of re- ports from various observatories, mostly European, of which we give the folowing abstract: It should be especially noted that a very large number of the European observatories are now engaged in remodeling their buildings or their instruments or both, and we may judge from their experience about how long it will be before a similar work will have to be done in America. Athens: The personnel of the observatory consists of the director, Dr. Schmidt, and an assistant, Dr. Wurlisch. The Sun has been ob- served on 356 days for spots. The chart of the Moon published in 1875 gave the results of observations for the years 1840-1874; the measures are still continued, and with even greater assiduity as may be judged from the fact that more measures have been made since the publication of the chart than were made for its construction. Three hundred and seventy drawings of Jupiter made in the years 1841-1879 have been deposited in Potsdam; since 1880, 350 drawings have been made. The other planets are often examined. but seldom drawn. Seventy-four variable stars have been observed, over 46,000 comparisons having been made. The Zodiacal Light and the Twilight Arch are observed at favor- able opportunities. Basle: This observatory is devoted chiefly to meteorology and its results are published in the Swiss Reports of Meteorology, annually. Berlin: The 9-inch equatorial has been remounted by Bamberg, of Ess a ASTRONOMY. 413 Berlin. The zone +20° to +25° is practically finished ; the reductions are now in progress. The equatorial has been used by Dr. Knorre, for observations of comets and asteroids. The Berliner Jahrbuch, with its two series of circulars, has been published as usual. Bonn: The zone +40° to +50° is still in progress, 1,020 observations of zone stars having been made; the observer, Dr. Deichmuller, took part in the Transit of Venus expedition to Hartford, Conn. The reduce- tions are well up to the observations. The Southern Durchmusterung now counts 307,490 star positions. The final positions of 78,317 stars are now prepared for printing. It should be noted that all the work of the Southern Durchmusterung is done by Dr. Schoénfeld. Breslau: The report for 1882 differs from that of 1881 in no important particular. Dresden (private observatory of Baron v. Engelhardt): Thirty-five ob- servations of 3 comets and 110 observations of 37 planets have been made and published, and some important changes have been made in the instruments.* Dusseldorff: In 1882 57 observations of 18 asteroids were made, and since 1847 1,102 observations of 141 planets. Hamburg: The zone +80° to +81° has been completed, and the ob- servatory has begun the zone between —15° and —16°. The divided circle of the meridian circle has been replaced by a new one, made by the Repsolds. Hereny (Hungary): In 1882 the spectra of 147 fixed stars and 2 comets were observed, besides miscellaneous observations. The stellar-spec- trum observations are classified in a table giving the types to which the stars belong. Kalocsa (Hungary): Regular drawings of the Sun (22 centimeters in diameter) have been made during the year, and also a determination of the latitude and the (telegraphic) longitude from Vienna. Karlsruhe: The instruments have been removed from Mannheim to a provisional observatory in Karlsruhe. With the 6-inch equatorial a se- ries of measures of star-clusters is kept up. The Reichenbach circle (made in 1811) has received thorough repairs and is employed in a de- termination of the places of stars south of the equator; the objective is only 3 inches, and the stars selected are therefore 8 magnitude or brighter. Each star is to be observed six times, and Dr. Valentiner hopes to determine the places to 08.01 and 0/.15. Kiel: The equatorial has received a thorough repairing by the Rep- solds and has been used by Dr. Lamp in a series of Victoria and Sappho observations for Dr. Gill, Dr. Krueger gives in a paragraph some criticisms of the programme prepared by Dr. Gill, which deserve atten- tion. Dr. Pape’s observations for the determination of the equinox, 1860, are printed. The printing of the zone +55° to +65° has been be- *A very interesting illustrated acconnt of Baron vy. Engelhardt’s observatory is given in Sirius for November, 1883. 414 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. gun. Kiel will be in the future the central office for international sci- entific telegrams. Leipzig: The buildings and instruments have received a thorough revision, in particular the meridian circle and the electric system. Small planets and comets have been observed on the equatorial, and since July, 1882, the sun-spot observations have been continued. The first part of the publications of the observatory is prepared for publi- cation. Leipzig (Dr. Engelmann’s private observatory): The principal instru- ment is an 8-inch refractor by Alvan Clark, which has been used for measures of difficult double stars. Milan: The 8-inch refractor has been used in observing double stars, of which 426 measures have been made. The topography of Saturn, Mars, and Mercury has been studied, and Professor Schiaparelli says that the spots on Mercury are not so difficult to recognize as is gener- ally supposed. The meridian circle has made 1,600 observations on the doubles discovered by Mr. Burnham; this work will be soon completed. The observations of Dembowski are not yet ready for publication ; the 18-inch refractor is in the hands of the Repsolds for mounting and will not be ready for work before the end of 1884. Moscow: The work of this observatory is given in vol. ix, part I, of- its Annals, which is just published. Munich: Besides smaller instruments the observatory has a Merz refractor of 103 inches, and a meridian circle of 44 inches aperture. The buildings are being rebuilt and these instruments will be remodeled. The meridian circle is in the hands of Ertel for this purpose; the hourly magnetic and meteorological observations are discontinued, but will probably be resumed elsewhere. A series at longer intervals is kept up to connect the new series with the old ; the Munich zones are being re- duced; Dr. Seeliger is now director of the observatory. Naples: A list of the publications of the observatory and of its ob- servers is given. 0’ Gyalla (Hungary): Besides miscellaneous observations 618 micro- metric measures of 182 sun-spots on 151 days have been made. Padua: The longitudes Rome-Padua, Rome-Florence, Padua-Flor- ence were telegraphically determined. The 7-inch equatorial of Dem- bowski has been acquired by the observatory and will replace the 4-inch equatorial made by Stark. Palermo: The sun-spots were drawn (scale of 0.51 meter to the solar di- ameter) on 315 days; the chromospbere and protuberances were drawn on 156 days. Observations of the reversal of the Frauenhofer lines, especially of 1474 K and b on 124 days. Drawings of Jupiter on 24 days. Observations of three comets on 78 days. Observations of 22 minor planets and of comets. A list of the publications of the observatory is given. Potsdam: A spectroscopic examination of the stars from —1° to -+20° Set Se RAE TTY ponies ASTRONOMY. 415 has been completed, and the results are nearly ready for printing ; it will contain 4,051 numbers. Two hundred and fifty groups of sun-spots have been observed. The observations of Secchi on the amounts of heat given out by different parts of the Sun’s limb from equator to pole, have been repeated by Dr. Spoerer, who, however, finds no such difference as was reported by Secchi. Photographs of the Sun have been made on 195 days. The photometric observations (Zollner’s photometer) will shortly be published in three parts: Part I will contain a description of the instrument and an investigation of the extinction of light; Part II will contain the observations of planets, and Part III the observa. tions of variable stars. The comet Wells was photometrically observed on 21 nights; the result of these observations showed the comet to shine partly by its own light. Variable stars have also been repeatedly ob- served. Prague: Professor Safarik gives an account of his observations of the Moon, Venus, Mars, and comets, and of 677 observations of vari- able stars, besides miscellaneous observations which cannot be sum- marized here. Stockholm: Dr. Gylden has devoted his time to the continuation of his theoretical work on the motions of the major planets ; the numeri- cal computations require much time, and it is probable that the Reichs- tag will furnish computers to aid in the work. The observations on stellar parallax are not fully reduced, but appear to lead to the conelu- sion that the mean parallax of the first magnitude stars is rather less than 0.1. Victoria and Sappho were observed in conjunction with Dr. Gill. Upsala: Victoria and Sappho were observed with the refractor for the solar parallax. The observatory is undergoing repairs. Zurich: The results of the observations of sun-spots are given in No. 59 of the Mittheilungen, and the contents of that publication are sum- marized. Besides this the miscellaneous observations of the observa- tory are given. The Greenwich Observatory.—Among the leading points referred to in the report of the astronomer royal, W. H. M. Christie, F. R. S., to the Board of Visitors of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, read at the an- nual visitation on June 2, 1883, are the following: Besides the regular subjects of observation with the transit circle, the sun, moon, planets, and fundamental stars, a new working list of 2,600 stars, comprising all those down to the sixth magnitude inclusive, and not observed since 1860, has been prepared, and was brought into use at the beginning of March. The entire number of transits observed with this instrument during the year was 4,488; determinations of collima- tion error, 354; determinations of level error, 323 ; number of circle ob- servations, 4,485; determinations of nadir point, 298; reflection obser- vations of stars, 484. 416 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Comet a 1882 was observed seven times on the meridian, and comet b 1882, three. The routine reductions of all the observations with this instrument are reported in an extraordinary state of forwardness. From the beginning of this year, a correction of —0’’.39, has been applied to the results of the nadir observations to make them agree in the mean with the results of the reflection observations of stars. This discordance was insignificant in 1878, and is on the increase; its source has not yet been traced. Three determinations of flexure have been made during the year. The correction for R—JD, the error of assumed co-latitude, and the position ot the ecliptic, have been investigated for 1882. The value for the co-latitude, from the observations of 1882, is 38° 31’! 21/.93. The correction to the tabular obliquity of the ecliptic is +0/.44. The mean error of the tabular right ascension of the moon, from observa- tions with the transit circle, is +0*.82. The observations of the moon with the alt-azimuth have been re- stricted to the semi-lunation between last quarter and first quarter. The moon’s diameter has been measured thirty-three times, counting measures in both co-ordinates with the transit circle and the alt-azimuth. A very valuable addition has been made to the instruments of the Royal Observatory by the gift of the Lassell 2-foot reflecting equatorial, generously presented by the Misses Lassell. This is the instrument with which the Saturnian satellite Hyperion was discovered in 1848. It was removed from Maidenhead early in March, and has been suitably mounted in the grounds of the Royal Observatory. The telescope has two large mirrors available for use; and the astronomer royal contem- plates attaching one of them to the tube of the *‘ southeast equatorial,” which has a firm mounting and a perfect clock-work, and employing it for spectroscopic and photographic work. The Lassell telescope itself is well suited for the observation of faint satellites and comets which are beyond the present instrumental means of the observatory. Spectroscopic observations of motion of stars in the line of sight have been made as follows: A hundred and forty-two measures of the dis- placement of the F line in the spectra of twenty-three stars, and twenty- six measures of the line 0, in nine stars. The observations of Sirius during the past winter tend, on the whole, to confirm the impression that the rate of recession of this star had diminished progressively since 1877, and that its motion is now on the point of being converted into one of approach. The spectrum of comet a 1882 was examined on three nights; that of the great comet b 1882, also on three nights; and that of comet a 1883, on one night. The spectrum of the first-named object showed the yel- low sodium lines with great brilliancy just before perihelion passage. The spectrum of the aurora was also examined in 1882, November 17. The spectroscopic observations of all kinds are completely reduced to 1883, May 20. During the year ending at this time, photographs of the sun were ASTRONOMY. 417 taken on 200 days, and 339 plates have been selected for preservation. The sun’s disk was free from spots on seven days; and, since the extra- ordinary outburst of last November, the sun has been comparatively quiescent. The astronomer royal proposes soon to employ a moditicd photo-heliograph for this work, so as to obtain photographs of the sun 8 inches in diameter instead of 4. The measurement of a large number of Indian and other photographs of the sun, required to fill gaps in the Greenwich series, has been completed, these photographs having been received from the Solar physics committee. The course of the magnetic observations has remained the same as in former years. Improvements have been made in the methods of photo- graphic registration. There has been considerable magnetic activily during the year. The disturbances of November last are to be detailed graphically in the “ Greenwich magnetic results for 1882.” Particulars of magnetic disturbances are regularly commuuicated to the Colliery Guardians newspaper, for the information of mining surveyors. The mean temperature of 1882 was 49°.6 or 0°.1 lower than the average. The highest air temperature was 81°.0, on August 6, and the lowest, 229.2, on December 11. The mean daily motion of the air was 306 miles, 27 miles greater than the average. The greatest daily motion was 758 miles, on November 4, and the least, 30 miles, on December 11. The greatest hourly velocity was 64 miles, October 24. The number of hours of bright sunshine, as recorded by Campbell’s sunshine instrument, was 1,245; that is, forty hours above the average of the five preceding years. The rain-fall of 1882 was 25.2 inches, slightly above the average. Examination of sextant glasses, &c., at Kew.—In the Proc. Roy. Soc. for 1867, Prof. Balfour Stewart described an apparatus designed and con- structed by Mr. T. Cooke for the determination of the errors of gradua- tion of sextants. This instrument has from that date been constantly in use at the Kew Observatory, and since the introduction of certain unimportant improvements has been found to work very well. No provision was made, however, for its employment in the determina- tion of the errors of the dark shades used to screen the observer's eyes when the sextant is directed to the sun or moon, and it has been found that errors may exist in the shape of want of parallelism in these glasses sufficiently large to seriously affect an observation accurate in other re- spects. It has also been found that sextant makers are desirous of having the shades examined before proceeding to fit them into their metal mountings, and also to have the surfaces of the mirrors tested for dis- tortion before making the instruments up. With a view to the accom- plishment of thesé ends, for some time past the Kew committee have undertaken to examine both dark glasses and mirrors, and to mark them with a hall-mark when they are found to answer the requirements nec- essary for exactitude. H. Mis, 69———27 418 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. For these purposes the following apparatus has been devised and brought into use at the observatory: A telescope of 34 inches aperture and 48 inches focal length, a pair of collimeters of 14 inches aperture and 10 inches focal length, and a heliostat are firmly fixed to a stout plank, so that their axes may be in the same horizontal plane. The eye-piece of the telescope carries a parallel wire micrometer. j In order to adjust the instrument the telescope is directed to theSun, a shade being fitted to the eye-piece and then placed in its Y’s focused for parallel rays. The collimators are then fixed on their table with their object-glasses opposed to that of the telescope, the eye-pieces and wires having first been removed and a metal plate with a sharply cut hole in its center fitted to their diaphragms. Light is next reflected down the collimator by the heliostat, and the aperture in the diaphragm being viewed through the telescope is care- fully focused by moving the object-glass of the collimator to and fro by _means of its rack and pinion. The diaphragm aperture is next collimated by rotating the collimator in its bearings. Both collimators being thus adjusted, they are placed side by side, so that their illuminated sight can be viewed simultaneously in the tel- escope, appearing as superimposed bright disks 12/ in diameter. They are next separated so that the disks remain merely in contact at the ex- tremity of their horizontal diameters. The instrument is now ready for use and the examination of the shades is performed in the following manner: The glass to be tested is fixed in a rotating frame in front of the ob- ject-glass of one collimator, a corresponding shade being placed between the heliostat and diaphragm of the other collimator. The Sun is now directed on to the diaphragms. The colored disks are viewed through the telescope, when, if the sides of the shade placed between the colli- mator and the object-glass of the telescope are perfectly parallel, the relative position of the disks is unchanged; if, however, the shade is not ground true, the disks will appear either separated or to overlap. In the first case the amount of separation is measured by the microme- ter, and serves to indicate the quality of the glass. In the case of over- lapping images the shade is rotated through 180°, and separation pro- duced which can be measured. A second examination is then made, the shade having been turned through 909°. If in no position a separation of images is found te exist to the extent of 20” the glass is etched K. O. 1; if more than 20” but less than 40”, the mark is K. O. 2; with greater distortion than this, the shade is re- jected and not marked. To examine the quality of the mirrors, a small table, on leveling screws, is put in front of the object-glass of the telescope. The mirror to be tested is placed on its edge on this table, and turned until a dis- ASTRONOMY. 419 tant well-defined object is reflected down the tube of the telescope. The object-glass of the telescope having previously been stopped down to an aperture corresponding to the size of the mirror the reflected image is contrasted with that seen directly, and if the definition is un- changed the mirror is marked K. O. with a writing diamond and returned to the maker ; if the object appears distorted its unfitness for use is sim- ilarly notified. A small fee is charged for the examination. Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope.—In the report for 1882, Dr. Gill states that the observations for the difference of longitude between the observatory anfl Aden are completed. The great comet was observed on every clear night from September 7, and photographs were obtained on six nights. The heliometer measures for the parallax of certain southern stars are nearly concluded. In connection with observations in the northern hemisphere, Victoria and Sappho have been observed for determining the solar parallax by Galle’s method. Time of contact at the Transit of Venus was noted by six observers, and heliometer measures were made during the transit.—(Monthly not., March, 1883.) The Observatory at Melbourne.—The seventeenth annual report of the board of visitors of this establishment, together with the report of the Government astronomer, Mr. Ellery, for the year ending June 30, 1882, has been received. The meridian work with the transit-eircle was for the most part limited to observations of standard stars, for the ordinary purposes of an observatory, and the determination of places of stars used for positions of comets. The 8-incb equatorial had been arranged for the observation of the small planets Victoria and Sappho during the last autumn, according to a programme agreed upon with several Kuropean and American and other southern observatories, with the view to another determination of the solar'parallax. The large reflector was employed on celestial photography, for sketching a number of Sir John Herschel’s smaller nebula, for drawings of comet 1881, IV, &c. The nebulz about 7 Argus was examined on three evenings, and was found to agree very closely with the drawing made in 1875. The majority of the smaller nebulze were found to accord well with Herschel’s de- scriptions. Nos. 57 and 1423, however, were much fainter than Her- schel indicated, and Nos. 1655 aud 2181 differed considerably from his description. Two hundred and seventeen photographs of the Sun were taken. A new transit circle has been ordered from Troughton and Simms.— Nature. The Sydney Observatory.—An octavo pamphlet of 16 pages has been distributed by the Sydney Observatory which gives the history and progress of astronomy in New South Wales from 1786 te 1883. The 420 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. first permanent observatory was Sir Thomas Brisbane’s, erected in 1821 and dismantled in 1847. The Sydney Observatory dates from 1858, and though at first poorly supplied with instruments, it is now excellently equipped. A list of the publications of the various directors, Rev. W. Scott, G. R. Smalley, and H.C. Russell, is annexed to the pamphlet. Paris Observatory.—Admiral Mouchez has issued his report on the work of the Paris Observatory during the year 1882~’83. He refers to the exceptionally bad state of the sky during the second half of 1882, and also to the derangements produced in tlhe regular course of proceedings by the preparations for the Transit of Venus, as well as hy the temporary absence of no less than five members of the personnel of the observatory for the purpose of taking part in it. Nevertheless the year will rank, he thinks, as one of importance in the history of the observatory on account of the installation of the new “ eguatorial coudeé,” and the nearly completed arrangements for the more extended study of magnetism and terrestrial physics generally, with a view to which six subterranean chambers have been built under the best possible condi- tions of isolation and stability, so as to obtain observations in a constant temperature. With regard to astronomical work, the bodies of the solar system (including the small planets) appear to have been observed at Paris as regularly as heretofore, and steady progress has been made with the reobservation of the stars of Lalande’s catalogue; during the last four years no less than 110,000 meridian observations have been made as part of the results to be incorporated in the new catalogue, the printing of which is now being commenced. The construction of the great refractor, of 16 meters focal length, is in an advanced state, the object-glass being finished; a dome 20 meters in diameter (equal in size to that of the Pantheon, and the largest movable dome ever made) is to be built to contain it, for which the ground has now been prepared, and special arrangements will be made to secure the building from any ill effects arising from displacement of the soil, particularly necessary from the circumstance that the ground below the observa- tory was mined for the catacombs. Admiral Mouchez is giving his attention also to the establishment of an astronomical observatory at the summit of the Pic du Midi, 2,859 meters high, where a meteorolog- ical observatory already exists, founded by General Nausouty. The advantages of this position for astronomical purposes, owing to the great clearness and transparency of the air, have been sufficiently man- ifested, and the admiral remarks that a telescope of comparatively very moderate power, if established there, might have led to the discovery of the satellites of Mars long before they were actually discovered at Washington. The intention is that any astronomer wishing to engage ip special researches may take advantage of the contemplated new observatory. ASTRONOMY. 421 American observatories.—(Albany, Clinton, Rochester, Toronto, Montreal, Cambridge, New Haven, Princeton, Washington.) American astromomers will be much interested in a very intelligent account of a scientific journey made by Dr. Ralph Copeland in 1883, which is printed in Copernicus No. 32. The observatories named above were seen, and their chief points of interest are briefly and pleas- antly mentioned. Dr. Copeland seems to have been most pleased with glass reticles, the American form of chronograph, Clark’s present man- ner of separating the lenses of objectives and their color correction ; while the chief fault found is with the too light mountings of Clark’s equatorials compared with Grubb’s, for example, and to a less extent their too great simplicity, as compared with Repsold’s. In regard to the first question it may be asked whether the steadiness of position of the Washington 26-inch is not all sufficient-; and as to the second it appears sufficient to mention that the mounting of the Milan refractor is to cost as much as the telescope itself, which seems extravagant to Americans. The United States Naval Observatory.—The report of Admiral Shu- feldt, under date of October 22, 1883, covers the work of the observa- tory. for the past year. The personnel of the observatory is as follows: Rear-Admiral R. W. Shufeldt, superintendent; Commander W. T. Sampson, assistant to superintendent; lieutenants, Pendleton, Moore, Bowman, Garvin, Wilson, Harris, Sewell; ensigns, Brown,* Allen, Tay- lor, Hoogewerff ; professors, Hall, Harkness, Eastman, Frisby ; assist- ant astronomers, Skinner, Winlock, Paul; clerk, Thomas Harrison ; computer, W. M. Brown, jr.; computers (Transit of Venus), Woodward, Flint, Wiessner, A. Hall, jr.; instrument-maker, W. F. Gardner; also three watchmen and nine laborers. The report, which is not yet published, contains a brief account of the work accomplished with the principal instruments of the observatory— the 26-inch and 9.6-inch equatorials, the transit circle, prime vertical and meridian transit—and the progress in the chronometer department, the department of nautical instruments, the library, and also in the re- ductions of Gilliss’s Zones of 1850, 1851, 1852. The 26-inch equatorial.—This instrument has been in charge of Prof. A. Hall, with Prof. E. Frisby as assistant. Mr. George Anderson is employed as an assistant in the dome. This equatorial has been em- ployed, as in preceding years, for the observation of double stars, satellites, and comets. The satellites of Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune have been observed; and we have now collected a large number of ob- servations of these satellites. The ring of Saturn has been observed, but no remarkable changes have been noticed. In fact, many of the strange phenomena frequently described in connection with this unique * Appointed professor of mathematics United States Navy October 13, 1883, 422 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. ring, the observers here fail to see on the best nights. During the greatest opening of the ring, which is near at hand, it is intended to make a set of micrometric measures of the dimensions of thering. Some observations for stellar parallax have been undertaken ; but as the ob- server resides at some distance from the observatory, such work is very laborious, and it seems better to defer it until more convenient arrange- ments are made. At the present time the pressing need on this instru- ment is, that the observations of satellites already made should be dis- cussed for the purpose of correcting the orbits of these satellites and of determining the masses of the planets. This discussion has been begun, and the numerical calculations are being made by Ensigns W. H. Allen and J. A. Hoogewerff. The transit circle—This instrument, in charge of Prof. J. R. Eastman, was employed in the same class of work as in 1881-82. The observers were Professor Eastman and Assistant Astronomers A. N. Skinner, Miles Rock,* and W. ©. Winlock. The whole number of observations made with the transit circle from October 18, 1882, to October 18, 1883, is 3,880. ; The meteorological observations have been continued, as in former years, by the watchmen. The 9.6-inch equatorial.—This instrument has been in charge of €om- mander W. T. Sampson, assisted part of the time by Lieut. W. E. Sewell, and part of the time by Lieut. John Garvin. It has been used, as in former years, in observations of the phenomena of Jupiter’s satel- lites, occultations by the moon, places of comets, and for obtaining cor- rections to the ephemeris places of minor planets. Prime vertical instrument.—This instrument is in charge of Lieut. C. G. Bowman, assisted by Ensign H. Taylor. Observations with it were recommenced November 14, 1882. Continuous observations have been restricted to about forty stars, in no case exceeding 2° zenith distance when on the meridian; and these, with one exception, have been closely eonfined to the time of the two maxima of aberration. The one excep- tion referred to was in the case of alpha Lyrae, which has been regu- larly observed throughout the twenty-four hours, having in view the possibility of a determination of its absolute parallax. Up to this time about 580 observations have been secured. In the reductions, Struve’s formulxz have been used, and the labor has been greatly lessened by the use of his auxiliary tables for the prime vertical transit. Meridian transit instrument.—This instrument has been in charge of Lieut. U. R. Harris, and Lieut. E. C. Pendleton has assisted. The meridian transit instrument has been used for the observations of stars of the American ephemeris for clock and azimuth corrections, and the de- terminations of the right ascensions of the sun, moon, and major planets. The total number of observations of the character mentioned is 1,408. “Succeeded November 1, 1883, by Prof. H. M. Paul. ASTRONOMY. 423 % Observations have been taken as often as practicable, to obtain each day the correction of the standard mean-time clock for setting to correct time the transmitting clock, which is used in sending out the time sig- nals from the chronometer room and in rating the chronometers. Harvard College Observatory.—The annual report of the director of Harvard College Observatory, for 1883, was submitted on the occasion of the annual inspection by the visiting committee. It is a document ot considerable length, and reviews in detail the doings of the year. The report begins with a statement that the annual donation or sub- scription of $5,000, which has continued for a term of five years, has now ceased. An attempt has been made to supply its place by a per- manent fund. For this $50,000 have been subscribed, and it is hoped that this will be increased to $100,000, so that the activity of the ob- servatory may be maintained. The working force of the institution now consists of the director and sixteen assistants of various grades, six of whom are womenand ten men. The photometric determinations of the times of eclipse of Jupiter’s satellites have been continued. The eclipses thus observed since October, 1882, have been 55, and from the begin- ning 240. . Experimental observations of occultations and transits of the satellites have also been made with a double-image micrometer. A part of the zone observations made under Professor Bond’s directions has been revised for the purpose of detecting cases of proper motion among small stars, for which this early work of the observatory fur- nishes valuable data. The present revision also includes photometric determinatious with a wedge of tinted glass. The construction of charts of small stars near certain selected bright stars, in accordance with a plan adopted some years ago by a committee of the Association for the Advancement of Science, has been begun. Similar charts of the neighborhood of variable stars have also been undertaken. Reference is made to successful distribution of early com- etary intelligence through the observatory. By this arrangement, the first accurate observations of the two comets discovered this year were made at this observatory, and the. positions obtained were extensively used in the computation of orbits. Experimental work has been done in anticipation of a systematic investigation of the spectra and color of the stars. Between February 8 and November 1 Professor Rogers made 2,640 observations of fundamental stars with the meridian circle, in- cluding 136 of Polaris and 121 of the sun. Mention is made of the determination during the year through observations at Cambridge of the longitude of McGill Observatory, in Montreal. In order to complete the series of zone observations which formed an important part of the work of the meridian circle from 1870 to 1879, it became necessary to reobserve a large number of stars, and to observe others which were found to have escaped notice previously. The faintness of many of these required a different system of illumination, which was successfully ar- 424 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. 6 ranged by Mr. George B. Olark, and at present the transit of stars of the tenth, and even of the eleventh, magnitude can be observed. | - The successful working of the meridian photometer is remarked upoa, and it is stated that since November 1, 1882, there have been made 133 series of observations of this kind, which required about 20,000 settings. The most important investigation made with the instrument relates to the magnitudes of the brighter telescopic stars in the northern hemis- phere. This will result in reducing to a single system the estimates of brightness made at thirteen observatories for ten or fifteen years, during the recent co-operative zone observations. It appears from the work of the meridian photometer that systematic errors in previous estimates of magnitude have occurred, owing to the presence of the Milky Way and of groups of bright stars, especially those in Orion. The equatorial ot the west dome has been actively employed by Mr. Chandler especially in the study of the variable stars. About one hundred and forty vari- ables of long period are definitely known to exist, and each of these objects is observed twice a month, according to the present plan of work, and still more frequently during its brighter phases. About three hundred observations of the color of variable stars have also been made, and telescopic stars suspected of variability are likewise exam- ined. Important experiments in astronomical photography have been made. It is thought that photographic methods will furnish very deli- cate tests of the color of stars, and a photographic map of the whole heavens is to be formed. A congratulatory reference is made to the adoption of the new stand- ard time, in respect to which it is remarked that the policy of the ob- servatory has been to avoid forcing the matter in anticipation of the public wishes. The Boston time-ball was dropped during the year at noon by telegraph on 321 days, and by hand on 40 days. On 4 days it failed to fall at noon, but was dropped five minutes later. The transfer of the Smithsonian Institution to the observatory of the responsibility of collecting and distributing intelligence of new discoveries is noted as one of the important events of the year. Among other matters the successful observations of the transit of Venus last December are men- tioned. - The report closes as follows: ‘“The director visited Europe during the summer, and, among other scientific results of his trip, obtained copies of valuable unpublished manuscripts of Sir William Herschel and of Argelander. The Herschel manuscripts complete the estimate of the light of all stars in Flam- steed’s Catalogue, and are of great importance in connection with the work of the meridian photometer. Thirty-one publications relating to science have been made during the year by the observatory or its officers individually.” (Boston Advertiser.) From the last annual report of Harvard College Observatory we learn that the search for new planetary nebule (by the spectroscopic method) ASTRONOMY. 425 has resulted in the discovery of seven such objects. Most of them are so minute that they cannot be distinguished from stars by the ordinary eye-piece. Photometric work on the satellites of Mars confirms that of 1877 and 1879, except that the brightness of Deimos, when preceding and when following Mars, does not seem to change, as formerly noticed. The determination of the brightness of various points on the Moon to aid the work of the Selenographical Society is now completed. From this investigation it appears that the scale of brightness, in use by common observers of the Moon, is closely expressed in terms of stellar magnitudes, each degree in the scale answering to the ratio of light equivalent to six-tenths of a magnitude. The wedge photometer has been used to measure the light of faint stars in zones. It is so placed in the instrument that the diurnal motion of the stars carries them from its thin to its thick portion, and the time of their disappearance is noted to determine their brightness. The careful study of Saw- yer’s variable star, D: M. + 1°, No. 3408, proves it to be a very inter- esting object. Its period of variability is 20h. 7m. 4s., 1.6 being the shortest known belonging to the Algol class. Its variation is from 6.0 to 6.8. The telegraphic system devised by those in charge of the Science Observer for the speedy transmission of comet news has been improved, extended, and will probably soon come into general use. Progress has been made in the reductions of the meridian circle work from 1870 to 1879. These observations will make about 1,200 printed pages, and will fill three volumes of the Annals. Volume I will contain an intro- duction with discussion of instrumental constants, &c.; 11 will contain all the zone observations in journal form, and I, observations of secondary polar stars made in 1872~73, a list of stars for United States Coast Survey in 1878, and other similar work in 1879. This important work is already well advanced, under the direction of Prof. W. A. Rogers. The Coast Survey Catalogue is now ready for publication. The work of the meridian photometer has been considerable. Over ninety thousand measures were made last summer on about 4,000 stars, visible to the unaided eye. This work involves the discussion of sev- eral problems of general interest in connection with the light of the stars, among which may be mentioned atmospheric absorption. The discussion of about fifteen thousand observations shows this curious result: That we may assume the absorption at any altitude exceeding 15° to be equal in stellar magnitude to one-quarter of the secant of the zenith distance, which agrees very closely with the empirical law de- duced by Seidel. Though some have claimed that the Pole Star is variable, its con- stancy is established by the photometer. Other valuable matter in this report pertains to variable star work, equatorial observations, scientific papers published, and plans for the future, (Sidereal Messenger.) | | 426 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. . It is desired to form, at the Harvard College Observatory, a-collection of all photographs of the heavenly bodies and of their spectra which can be obtained for the purpose, and Professor Pickering requests that both European and American astronomers will contribute specimens to this collection. Original negatives would be particularly valuable. It may happen that some such negatives, having slight imperfections which would limit their value for purposes of engraving, could be spared for a collection, and would be as important (considered as astronomical ob- servations) as others photographically more perfect. In some cases astronomers may be willing to deposit negatives taken for a special pur- pose, and no longer required for study, in a collection where they would retain a permanent value as parts of a historical series. Where pho- tography is regularly employed in a continuous series of observations it is obvious that specimen negatives only can be spared for a collection. But in such cases it is hoped that some duplicates may be available, and that occasional negatives may hereafter be taken for the purpose of being added to the collection, to exhibit recent improvements or striking phenomena. When negatives cannot be furnished, glass positives, taken if possi- ble by direct printing, would be very useful. If these also are not pro- curable, photographic prints or engravings would be desirable. In connection with photographs themselves, copies of memoirs or communications relating to the specimens sent, or to the general subject of astronomical photography, would form an interesting supplement to the collection. Field Memorial Observatory of Williams College.—The following brief description of this new observatory is based on a photographic view by Pach Bros., 841 Broadway, New York. The building is situated some three-fourths of a mile from the Hopkins Observatory, on the college grounds. * It consists of a large meridian room, a hall, a bed-room, and a large computing room. The building is of iron, on a stone foundation. The meridian instrument is a circle by Repsolds of 44 French inches aper- ture. The room is designed so as to give the best field for this beautiful instrument. The slit is 40 inches wide, covered by three hinged shutters. | : Windows allow ventilation, and a novelty in such construction is a tower or ventilating shaft. The wall shutters are arranged as doors. The whole aspect of the building is very pleasing to the eye and the situation is excellent. Professor Safford is engaged in a highly im- portant work on polar stars, the first part of which is about to be printed. Litchfield Observatory.—Dr. Peters, in his annual report, says: ‘* The work in the observatory was continued upon the same plan and directed to the same objects as in the years preceding. The number of stars ob- served since my last report, in zones, is 12,069—considerably more than —a se hc ee ts sh 3 ASTRONOMY. 427 in any former year, since the mapping of the skies approaching the Milky Way requires a greater number of fundamental positions. A new glass scale, which we owe to the kindness of Prof. W. A. Rogers, of Cambridge, as it is ruled so that one scale division in the focus of our refractor exactly equals 10 seconds of arc, has saved much time in the reduction. In all, we have now 87,982 zone star observations, which should be arranged in a catalogue. Twenty of the celestial charts, for which the zone stars form the skeleton, have been published during the year (at my private expense), and distributed gratuitously from the Litchfield Observatory to other observatories, learned societies, and private individuals to reciprocate favors received by our institution. ‘““ At the request of Mr. Gill, royal astronomer at the Cape of Good Hope, a number of observatories in the northern and in the southern hemispheres united to make corresponding observations upon two of the minor planets, in order to determine by this method the solar parallax. The Litchfield Observatory was the only one co-operating in the United States, and I have been successful in obtaining some good sets of ob- servations upon Victoria, but none upon Sappho, the opposition of which fell into the later part of autumn, when the sky was unfavorable, as usual, while a complete set, as demanded by the programme, each time required an uninterrupted clear sky of about four hours. Of the re- markable naked eye comet that showed itself last September and in the following months some positions have been determined which have peculiar value, as I believe, because the real, very small nucleus was discovered, for which most of the observers measured by mistake what was only an agglomeration of light in the narrow and very long bright jet. The hope of observing the Transit of Venus of last 6th of Decem- ber from this place made me decline the offer to go with one of the ex- peditions sent out by the Navy Department. But inexorable clouds brought sad disappointment here at home. Positions of minor planets have been determined only in cases where either the orbit seemed to need considerable correction or where the apparent smallness of the planetoid might be an obstacle to its being observed elsewhere. The variables here detected have been followed up at intervals in order to ascertain their periods. Meridian transit of stars have been taken as often as it seemed necessary to keep the rates of clocks and chronome- ters under control. ‘The instruments, on the whole, are in good condition, but I must re- port what I have said in former years, that it is desirable to have the object-glass of the Spencer refractor repolished, and perhaps even re- figured. I have mentioned, also, before the deteriorated state of the filar micrometer which, as is natural after so many thousands of meas- urements, is sensibly wearing out, so that soon it will be almost im- possible to get creditable results by it. Meanwhile the filar micrometer is one of the most essential apparatus for utilizing the great refractor. “The observatory building has stood now about thirty years. An ex- amination in the basement has revealed the unpleasant fact that the 428 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. sills and posts*ef the trusses, especially at the corners of the central square, are rotten, so as not longer to sustain the overlying weight. I call the earnest attention of the trustees to this. The ruthless destruc- tion (in October last) of the plantation of young trees that, cultivated with love and labor for fifteen years, with time were to give shelter against the predominant rough western winds, will seriously impair the work of the observatory in the future, when my place will be filled by an astronomer of less iron constitution than mine. The destruction was _ unwarrantable and without the knowledge of the curators of the grounds. I recommend the immediate replanting of forest trees on the plot.” The 30-inch Clark objective for the Pulkova Observatory.—This object- ive was finished early in 1883, and Director Otto v. Struve made a special visit to the United States to test it. Dr. Struve first visited Washington and observed various difficult or peculiar objects with the 26-inch telescope. Among these were Jupiter, Sirius, Procyon, the Orion nebula, ¥ 3121 (distance 0/.4), 42 Come, 7 Geminorum, etc. The same objects were then viewed at Cambridge with the 30-inch objective in a temporary mounting, and Dr. Struve was entirely satisfied with the performance of the objective. This was then carefully packed and sent to Hamburg to be mounted by Messrs. Repsold. The 36-inch objective of the Lick Observatory.—From articles in San Francisco papers it appears that M. Feil, of Paris, the glass founder, expects to send the crown disk in the rough to the makers, Alvan Clark & Sons, in December, 1883. The flint disk has been for a long time on hand. Private observatory of Mr. Robert McKim, Madison, Ind.—‘‘ Mr. Me- Kim has built the first observatory in Indiana at Madison. The building is situated on the grounds west of his residence in this city, and consists of a brick equatorial tower 12 feet square and 35 feet high. The tower is surmounted by a revolving hemispherical dome, which gives a clear view of the heavens in every direction. The in- instruments provided are a portable equatorial telescope mounted on a tripod stand; aperture of objective 4 inches; magnifying powers, 44 to 400; also a fixed equatorial telescope mounted in the dome; aperture of objective, 6 inches ; magnifying powers ranging from 35 to 500. Both of these telescopes were made by Messrs. Alvan Clark & Sons, of Cam- bridgeport, Mass. The mounting of the fixed equatorial was made by Messrs. TF'auth & Co., of Washington, D. C., who have done first-class work, and furnished all the accessories required for a complete equa- torial. An improved position micrometer is also provided, an excel- lent piece of workmanship of Messrs. Fauth & Co. Other needed ap- paratus will be provided to make the observatory complete and to contribute something to science,” MISCELLANEOUS. Notes on some recent astronomical experiments at high elevations on the Andes, by Ralph Copeland.—These experiments were made during the | ASTRONOMY. 429 first half of the present year (1883) at the cost of the Earl of Crawford. At La Paz, in Bolivia, 12,000 feet, with the full Moon in the sky, ten stars were seen in the Pleiades with the naked eye, and also two stars in the head of the Bull that are not in Argelander’s Uranometria Nova. The rainy season lasted roughly until the end of March, after which there was a large proportion of fine sky. At Puno, on Lake Titicaca, 12,600 feet, with a 6-inch telescope mounted on a lathe headstock, a number of small planetary nebule and some stars with very remarkable spectra were found by sweeping the southern part of the Milky Way with a prism on Professor Pickering’s plan. The most remarkable stars had spectra reduced almost to two lines, one near D and the other beyond F, with a wave-length of 467 millimeters, and apparently identical with a line in some only of the northern nebulz as observed by Mr. Lohse and Mr. Copeland. A few close double stars were also found, amongst them 2 Musce. At Vincocaya, 14,360 feet, the solar spectrum was examined with a somewhat damaged instrument. The chief fact noted was the relative brightness of the violet end of the spectrum. With a small spectroscope several lines were seen beyond H and H,. The prominences were vis- ible with almost equal facility in C, D;, F, and H,. Attempts to see the corona proved futile, nor were the prominences seen otherwise than in the speetroscope, the only difference being that the slit could be opened far wider than down at the sea level. A most careful exam- ination of the zodiacal light failed to show even the slightest suspicion of a line in its spectrum, which was continuous, although short. Both at Puno and Vincovaya the air was very dry; the relative humidity there and at Arequipa, 7,700 feet, being as low as 20 per cent. At - Vincocaya the black bulb at one time stood above the local boiling point, while the wet bulb was coated with ice. The author was of opin- ion that an observatory might be maintained without discomfort up to 12,000 feet, or even a little higher—the night temperature falling only slightly below the freezing point. At greater elevations the thermom- eter falls 1° for every 150 feet of height, the barometer sinking about 0.1 inch for the same change. At 15,000 feet it will thus be seen that arduous winter conditions are reached without any very material gain in the transparency of the atmosphere. From information received it _ seems possible to maintain a station for a short time in the early sum- mer as high as 18,500 feet ; later on the rains set in and render travel- ing very difficult. Railway and steamboat communication enable in- struments of any size and weight to be carried as high as 14,660 feet, and as far as the Titicaca shore of Bolivia. (Nature, October 18, 1883.) The English Nautical Almanac.—The volume of this ephemeris for 1887, was published in November, 1883, the contents being generally the same as in previous years. The track of the total solar eclipse of August 19 is given in detail for the greater part of the course, and the 430 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 183838. maximun duration of totality is found to be 3m. 50s., the central eclipse * with the sun on the meridian falling in longitude 102° 0’ E. and latitude 53° 47’ N. The Greenwich list includes four occultations of Aldebaran during the year and one of Regulus. ; The average annual sale of the Nautical Almanae during the last five years has exceeded 15,500, though many maritime nations have now their nautical ephemeris. (Nature.) It is stated in Nature No. 741 that in the French budget the sum of $200,000 is annually given by the Department of Public Instruction as a subsidy to astronomy and meteorology. This is exclusive of subsi- dies voted by the municipalities of Marseilles, Toulouse, Bordeaux, and Lyous for their astronomical observatories, as well as of the grants (by cities) which partly support the meteorological observatories of Besan- con, Puy de Déme, Montsouris, and Pie du Midi. New standard railway time.—The convention which wet at the Grand Pacific Hotel in Chicago, in the autumn of 1883, to fix upon a general standard of railway time, was presided over by P. P. Wright, general superintendent of the Lake Shore and Michigan Southern Rail- road, and W. F. Allen, editor of The Official Railway Guide, New York, acted as secretary... About sixty representatives of the principal rail- ways of the United States were present. Secretary Allen, who has taken the lead in this very important arrangement, announced to the convention that he had succeeded in getting companies representing 75,000 miles of road to favor the adoption of a uniforin standard time, and that the proposed system was already in use upon 10,000 miles of track in the Eastern States. The representatives of twenty-nine roads, representing 27,181 miles of road, voted in favor of the change, and the representatives of two roads, representing 1,714 miles of road, voted in thenegative. ‘ihe planistodivide the territory traversed by the railways into four sections, between which there will be exactly one hour’s dif- ference in the time, an. all the lines within each division are to be run upon wiuform time. The division lines of these sections are to be the 75th, the 90th, the 105th, and the 120th meridians, and the following, as adopted by the convention, will show the territory comprised in each section : “}. That all roads now using Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Balti- more, Toronto, Hamilton, or Washington time as a standard, based upon meridians east of these points or adjacent thereto, shall be governed by the 75th meridian or Eastern time (four minutes slower than New York time). This includes roads run by 1 vrtland, Providence, New London, Montreal, Albany, Richmond, and Charleston time, in addition to those specially named above. 2 “2. That all roads now using Columbus, Savannah, Atlanta, Cincin- nati, Louisville, Indianapolis, Chicag., Jefferson City, Saint Paul, or Kansas City time, or standards based upon meridians adjacent thereto, shall be run by the 90th meridian time, to be called central time, one hour slower than Eastern. time, and nine minutes slower than Chicago ASTRONOMY. 431 time. This includes roads run by Macon, Rome, Nashville, Salem, Mo- bile, Saint Louis, Vicksburg, Dubuque, Minneapolis, Saint Joseph, Gal- _ veston, Houston, and Omaha time, in addition to those named above; also, the Union Pacific to North Platte and Wallace, the Burlington and Missouri River to McCook, the Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé Railway to Coolidge, the Texas Pacific to Toyah, and the Galveston, Harrisburg and San Antonio to Sanderson. “3, That west of the above-named section the roads shall be run by the 105th and 120th meridian times respectively, two and three hours slower than Eastern time. “4, That all changes from one hour standard to another shall be made at the termini of roads or at the ends of divisions.” No general arrangement of the running of railway trains has ever _ before been attempted of equal importance to the public with this new movement, and it can readily be seen that*it cannot but very greatly simplify and systematize the present complex and almost infinite variety of running schedules upon our railroad lines. The matter has been - from the first in the hands of practical men who know their business, and the universal adoption of the system proposed on November 18, 1883, was a remarkable witness to the widespread intelligence and to the common sense of our people. A subject-index to scientific papers.—One of the most important works _ for the student of science is the ‘‘ Royal Society’s Catalogue of Scientific Papers,” a list of the articles on every branch of science published in periodicals and transactions of learned societies between 1800 and 1872. _ In these volumes the various articles are catalogued by authors, the _ arrangement being alphabetical. In answer to an inquiry, the secretary of the Royal Society recently informed Dr. H. Carrington Bolton that the society had abandoned the project of publishing a subject index te their “‘ Catalogue of Scientific Papers.” This is greatly to be regretted, for the utility of that monumental work is reduced one-half owing to _ the want of an index of topics. The chief reasons for this decision on _ the part of the Royal Society are the enormous expenses, and the diffi- culty of arranging the material in a systematic manner acceptable to all. The expense would be greater than mere clerical hire, for it is con- ceded that superior talent would be necessary to do this work in a satis- factory manner. Copernicus.—With the publication of volume 111 (1883), this valuable astronomical journal will come to an end. It has not had a sufficient number of subscribers to make it self-supporting. It is a matter of regret to astronomers that a journal which fills so excellent a place is to be discontinued, and for such a reason. It has been from the first _ admirably edited, and it contains so many excellent papers that a set of the three volumes of Copernicus is a necessary part of an astronomical library. At any rate, the editors may congratulate themselves that they and their friends have left nothing undone to found a first-class journal of astronomy in Great Britain. It appears from this failure that the 432 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Astronomische Nachrichten (which covers a different field from Coper- nicus), together with the proceedings and transactions of learned societies suffice for the present wants of the science. Astronomical telegrams.— The Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution notifies that arrangements have been completed with the director of the Harvard College Observatory for conducting the system of telegraphic announcements of astronomical discoveries which was established by the Institution in 1873, and that henceforward the American center of reception and distribution of telegrams will be “The Harvard College Observatory, Cambridge, Mass.,” to which all astronomical telegrams should in future be sent. American Astronomical Society—A society with this title has been formed in New York and vwieinity. It has as yet published no transac- tions, although it is intended to do this. ASTRONOMICAL BIBLIOGRAPHY, 1883. ” Following is given a list of the principal books of the year, includ- ing those memoirs which have been reprinted from the publications of observatories, scientific societies, ete. It is largely compiled from the excellent Nature Novitates of R. Friedlander, of Berlin. The prices are added in German marks, 4 marks equal to $1 very nearly: Anales del Instituto y Observatorio de Marina de San Fernando. Sec- cion Il: Observaciones meteorolégicas, a. 1879-81. 2 vol. San Fernando, 1880-82. fol. Anales del Instituto y Observatorio de Marina de San Fernando. Sec- cion IL: Observaciones meteorélogicas. Afio 1882. San Fernando, 1883. fol. Annales du Bureau des Longitudes et de VObservatoire astronomique de Montsouris. Tome 2. Paris, 1883. 4to. 18 Les mémes. Tome 3. Paris, 1883. 4to. 18 Annales de Observatoire de Moscou. Publiées par Th. Bredichin. Vol. Ix, livraison 1. Moscou, 1883. 4to. —— Vol. Ix, livraison 2. Moscou, 1883. 4to. 117 pg. av. 6 plehs. 8 Cont.: Belopolsky, Observat. héliograph.—Bredichin et Belopol- sky, Observ. spectr. du Soleil en 1881.—Bredichin, Rech. s. la gr. Cométe de 1882, II. Observ. de Jupiter, 1881-82. Observ. de qlqs. Cométes.—Ceraski, Photometr. Beobacht. Annales de VObservatoire de Paris, publ. sous la dir. de Mouchez. Ob- servations, 1879 et 1880. Chaque vol. M. 36. Mémoires, vol. xvu, M. 26. 3vols. Paris, 1883. gr. 4to. Annales de ’Observatoire de Paris, publiées sous la direction de Mon- chez. Mémoires. Tome xvi. Paris, 1883. 4to. 405 pg. 24 Annuaire de Observatoire de Montsouris pour 1883. Météorologie ap- pliquée a Vagriculture et a Vhygiéae. Année 12. Paris, 1883. 12mo. 450 pg., fig. 2 ASTROMOMY. 433 Annuaire du bureau des longitudes p. Pan 1883. Paris, 1883. 12mo. 864 pg., fig. Cont.: Faye, s. la figure d. cométes.—Janssen, les méthodes en astronomie. La prochaine Eclipse de Soleil. 6 Mai, 1883, ete. 1.50 Anton, F. Bestimmung der Bahndes Planeten (114) Cassandra. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 138 pg. 2 Arbeiten, Astronomische, f. die europiische Gradmessung im K@6nigr. Sachsen. Abth. 3. Die astronom. Arbeiten. Ausgefiihrt unter Leitung v. C. Bruhns, nach dessen Tode bearb. v. Th. Albrecht. Heft 1. Berlin, 1883. 4to. 10 Astronomical papers prepared for the use of the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac, under the direction of 8S. Neweomb. Vol. I. Washington, 1882. 4to. bd. 16 Cont.: Newcomb, Recurrence of solar eclipses.—Neweomb and Meier, Transformation of Hansen’s lunar theory.—Michelson, Exper- iment. determinat. of the velocity of light——Newcomb, Catalogue of 1,098 standard clock and zodiacal stars.—Hill, On Gauss’s method of computing secular perturbations, w. an. applicat. to the action of Venus on Mercury.—Newcomb, Discussion of observed transits of Mercury 1677-1881. Astronomical, and Magnetical, and Meteorological Observations made at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, in 1881. London, 1883. roy. 4to. Astronomische Beobachtungen auf der k. Universitiits-Sternwarte zu Konigsberg. Herausg. v. E. Luther. Abth. 37, Thl. 1. K6nigsb., 1882. fol. Astronomische Nachrichten, begriindet v. H. C. Schumacher. Unter Mitwirkung der astronomischen Gesellschaft herausg. v. A. Krue- ger. Bd. 104, 105, 106. (24 Nrn. each.) Kiel. 1883. gr. 4to. 15 Astronomischer Kalender fiir 1584. Nach dem Muster des k. v. Litt- row’schen Kalenders hersg. v. d. k. k. Sternwarte. Neue Folge. Jahrgang 3. Wien, 1883. 8vo. 150 pg. 1.20 L’Astronomie. Revue mensuelle d’astronomie populaire, de météoro- logie et de physique du Globe, publiée p. C. Flammarion. Paris. gr. 8vo. av. nombr. figures. Année II, 1883. 12 nrs. 12 Auwers, A. Neue Reduction d. Bradley’schen Beobachtungen aus 4d. Jahren 1750-1762. Bd. 11. Petersburg, 1882. 4to. Backeljau, F. Le calcul par les logarithmes et nouvelles tables du logarithme 3 des nombres. Gand, 1883. 12mo. 49 pg. 1.50 Becker, E. Die Sonne und die Planeten. Leipzig, 1883. S8vo. 296 pg.,m. 68 Abbildgn. Lwd. i Beckett, E. Astronomy without mathematics. 7 edit. London, 1883. 8vo. 4,20 H. Mis. 69 28 434 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Beobachtungen angestellt am astrophysikalischen Observatorium hk. O’Gyalla hersg. v. N. v. Konkoly. Bd. V, enthaltend Beobaech- tungen v. Jahre 1882. Halle, 1883. gr. 4to. 96 pg., m.1 Kpfrt. 10 Bremiker, C. Logar.-trig. Tafeln mit 6 Decimalstellen. 9. Aufl. Berlin, 1583. gr. 8vo. 4.20 Bremiker’s Logar.-trigon. Tafeln mit 6 Decimalstellen. Neu bearb. v. Th. Albrecht. 10. Stereotyp-Ausg. (Enth. auch die Tafel der Logarithmen der Sinus und Tangenten der Winkel bis zu 5 Grad " von Secunde zu Secunde.) Berlin, 1883. gr. 8vo. 18 u. 598 pg. 4.20 Bredichin, Th. Sur la cométe de 1825, 1V. (Roma. Mem. d. Soe. d. spettroscop. ital.) 1882. gr. 4to. 10 pg. av. 1 plehe. 2 Sur la cométe de 1882, [ (Wells). (Moscon), 1883. 4to. 15 pg. av. 4 plehs. 2.50 Sur la grande cométe de 1882, II. (Moscou), 1883. 8vo. 10 pg: 1 Sur la grande cométe de 1882, II. (Roma. Mem. d. Soe. d. spettroscop. it.) 1883. 6 pg. it Recherches sur la cométe de 1882, II. (Moscou), 1883. 4to. 30 pg. av. 5 plchs. 3 Brugsch, H. Astronomische u. astrologische Inschriften der altiigyp- tischen Denkmialer. Leipzig, 1883. 4to. 50 Bulletin astronomique et météorologique de ’Observatoire imp. de Rio- de-Janeiro. Année 1883. (12 nrs.) Rio de Janeiro, 1883. 4to. Bulletin des sciences mathématiques et astronomiques, réd. p. Darboux, Houel et Tannery. Paris. gr. 8vo. Année 1883. (Série II, tome VII.) 18 Camerano e Lessona. -Geografia fisica, astronomica e meteorologica. Milano, 1882. 8vo. 145 pg. ¢. 50 fig. 2 Catalogus van de Boeken aanwezig in de Bibliothek der Sterrenwacht te Leiden. Uitgegeven door H. G. v. d. Sande Bakhuijzen. Bij- voegsel bij de Annalen der Sterrenwacht. Suppl. 1 v.,1Jan., 1877 —1 Jan., 1879 en supl. 2 v., 1 Jan., 1879—1 Juli, 1882). ’s Graven- hage, 1883. gr. 8vo. 74 en 98 pg. 2 Cellerier, G. Réfraction cométaire. Geneve, 1883. 4to. 20 pg. 1.20 Celoria, Lorenzoni e Nobile. Operazioni eseguite nell’ anno 1875 negli Osservatorii astronomici di Milano, Napoli e Padova in corrispon- denza coll’ Uffizio Idrografico della R. Marina, per determinare le differenze di longitudine tra Genova, Milano, Napoli e Padova. Milano, 1883. 4to. 128 pg. 6.40 Chapel, F. Apercu sur le réle des astéroides inférieurs dans Ja physique du monde. Paris, 1883. 8vo. 158 pg. 2 Ciel et Terre. Revue populaire d’Astron, et de Aeeaione Brux. 4to. Année 1883. 8 Clark, L. Trausit tables for 1883, giving the Greenwich mean time of transit of the sun, and of about 20 stars for every day in the year. London, 1883. 8vo. cloth. 2.80 ASTRONOMY. 435 Coast Survey, U.S. Report of the superintendent of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, showing the progress of the work during 1879. Washington, 1881. 4 Connaissance des temps ou des mouvements célestes a l’usage des as- tronomes et des navigateurs, p. l’a. 1884, publiée par le Bureau des Longitudes. Paris, 1883. gr. 8vo. 830 pg. av. 2 cartes. 3.50 Coppernici, N. De bypothesibus motuum celestium a se constitutis commentariolus, ed. A. Lindhagen. (Holm), 1882. 8vo. 15 pg.c. tab. 2.50 Die Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete der Astronomie. Nr. 8. Cdéln, 1882. 8vo. 2 Dreyer, J. L. Mean places of 321 red stars, obs. w. the meridian circle at Dunsink. Dublin, 1882. 4to. 85 pg. 7 Dubois, E. Ephémérides astronomiques pour 1884. Paris, 1883. 12mo. 1.50 Faye, H. Cours @’Astronomie de Ecole Polytechnique. Vol.1. Thé- ories du soleil, des planétes, des cométes et de la lune. Applica- tion de ’astronomie a la navigation et aux vogages d’exploration terrestre. Paris, 1883. gr. 8vo. Vol. I. Astron. sphér., instru- ments, erreurs, géodésie. 1581. 11.50 Fiévez,Ch. Etude du Spectre solaire. Bruxelles, 1882. 4to. Spg. av. 7 piehs. 7 Flammarion, C. Les Terres du Ciel. Description compléte des pla- nétes de notre systéme et de la condition actuelle de la vie 4 leur surface. Paris, 1883. gr. 8vo. illustr. de photogr., de vues téles- cop., cartes et fig. i Fonvielle, W. de. Le passage de Vénus. Numéro de décembre 1882. Paris. gr. 8vo. "0.60 Franz. Ueber die Venusexpedition in Aiken. (K6nigsberg), 1883. 4to. 10 pg., m. 1 Holzschn. 0.40 Galle; A. Zur Berechnung der Proximititen v. Asteroiden-Bahnen. Breslau, 1883. 8vo. az Garrod, A. E. The Nebule: a Fragment of Astronomical History. London, 1883. 8vo. 44 pg. 1.70 Gauss, G. Fiinfstellige vollstandige logarithmische u. trigonometrische Tafeln. 18. Aufl. Halle, 1883. 8vo. 2 Gerst, J. Methode zur Bahnbestimmung aus 3 vollstiindigen Beobach- tungen. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 35 pg. 0.60 Glaisher, J. Factor table for the 6. million: Cont.: The least factor of every. number not divisible by 2, 3, or 5 between 5,000,000 and 6,000,000. London, 1883. roy. 4to. cloth. 21. Factor table for the 5. million. 1880. 21. Factor table for the the 4. million. 1879. 21 Gyldén, H. Undersékningar af theorien f. himlaksopparnes rorelser. (Du mouvement des corps célestes.) (Stockh.), 1882. 8vo. 64 pg. 3 -—— Undersékningar af himlaksopparnas rérelser, III. (Stockh.), 1883. 8vo. 165 pg. 4.50 436 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Haerdtl, E.v. Bahnbestimmung des Planeten “ Adria.” I. 1882. 0.30 i. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 12 pg. 0.30 Holetschek, J. Bahnbestimmung des 4. Kometen vom J. 1874 (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 27 pg. 0.50 Handbuch der mathematischen u. technischen Chronologie. 2 Aufl. Liefg.4u.5. Breslau, 1883. 8vo. Jede Liefg. — 5 Ideler, C.L. Handbuch der mathematischen u. technischen Chronologie. 2. Bde. 2 Aufl. (In 6 Liefgn.) Liefg. 6. (Schluss.) Breslau, 1883. S8vo. Jede Liefg. 5 Jahrbuch, Berliner astronomisches, f. d. J. 1885 m. Ephemeriden d. Planeten 1-225 f. 1883. Hersg. v. d. Rechen-Institute d. Kon. Sternwarte zu Berlin unt. Lietg. v. F. Tietjen. Berl., 1883. gr. 8vo. 543 pg. 12 Jahrbuch, Nautisches, oder Ephemeriden u. Tafeln f. d. J. 1886 zur Bestimmung d. Zeit, Linge u. Breite zur See nach astronom. Beo- bachtungen. Hrsg. v. Reichsamt d. Innern unter Red. v. Tietjen. Berlin, 1883. 8vo. Cart. 1.50 Journal Suisse d’Horlogerie. Revue horlogére universelle. Publ. sous les auspices de la classe d’Industrie et de Commerce. Genéve. 8vo. Année 8: 1883-84 (12 nrs.). 10.50 Kaiser, F. De Sterrenhemel verklaard. 4. druk, bewerkt door J. A. C. Oudemans. (In 16 aflevergn.). Afl. 1 en 2. Deventer, 1883. gr. 8vo. Jede Liefg. 1.60 Kayser, H. Lehrbuch der Spektralanalyse. Berlin, 1883. gr. 8vo. 370 pg. mit 9 Tafein u. 87 Holzschn. 10 Konkoly, N. Praktische Anleitung z. Anstellung astronomischer Beo- bachtungen mit besonderer Riicksicht auf die Astrophysik. Braunschweig, 1883. 8vo. fig. 24 Krech. Photometrische Untersuchungen. Berlin, 1884. 4to. 1 Kremser, V. Die Bahn des 2. Cometen v. 1879. Breslau, 1883. 8vo. 1 Kreutz, H. Ueber die Bahn des Kometen von 1771. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 34 pg. 0.60 Lalande, J. de. Tables de logarithmes pour les nembres et pour Jes sinus. Revues par Reynaud. Edition stéréotype, augmentée de ~ formules pour la résolution des triangles p. Bailleul, et dune nouvelle introduction. Paris, 1883. 16mo. 278 pg. 3 Lefebvre, B. Les passages de Vénus sur le disque solaire. Etude historique suivie dun appendice sur les observations du 6 décem- bre 1882 et du récit des expéditions belges. Louvain, 1883. 8vo. 70 pg. if Lehmann, P. Die Erde und der Mond. Vom astronomischen Stand- punkte aus betrachtet und fiir das Verstiéindniss weiterer Kreise dargestellt. Leipzig, 1883. 8vo. 272 pg., mit 65 Abbildungen. Lwd. 1 Tafeln z. Berechnung d. Mondphasen u. d. Sonnen- u. Mond- finsternisse. Berlin, 1882, 8vo, 3 ASTRONOMY. 437 Loewy, M. Ephémérides des étoiles de culmination lunaire et de longi- tude pour 1883. Paris, 1882. 4to. an Lohse, O. Abbildungen von Sonnenflecken, nebst Bemerkungen iiber astronomische Zeichungen u. deren Vervielfiltigung. Leipzig, 1883. 4to. 9 pg., mit 3 Tafeln. 4. Main, R. Rudimentary Astronomy. 3. edit. Revised and corrected by W. Thynne Lynn. London, 1885. 12mo. 2.20 Maurer, M. J. Die Extinction des Fixsternlichtes in der Atmosphire in ihrer Beziehung zur astronomischen Refraction. Ziirich, 1882. 8vo. 58pg. Memorie della Societa degli spettroscopisti italiani, raccolte e pubblicate p. cura di P. Tacchini. Vol. x1. Roma, 1883. 4to. gr. ¢. tavv. Meyer, W. Etude sur laréfraction cométaire. (Geneve), 1883. 4to. 1.20 Michel, A. Tables de division servant 4 remplacer cette opération par une simple multiplication. Alger, 1883. 8vo. 67 pg. 4 Miller, W. The Heavenly Bodies: their nature and habitability. Lon- don, 1883. 8vo. 354 pg. 7.80 Mommsen, A. Chronologie. Untersuchungen iiber das Kalenderwesen der Griechen, insonderheit der Athener. Leipzig, 1883. gr. 8vo. 571 pg., mit 1 Tabelle. 14 Mouchez. Rapport annuel sur état de Observatoire de Paris, pour VPannée 1882. Paris, 1885. 4to. 40 pg. Miiller,G. Photometrische Untersuchungen angestellt am astrophysi- kalischen Observatorium zu Potsdam. Leipzig, 1883. 4to. 66 pg., mit 2 Tafeln. 6 Nasmyth, J., u. J. Carpenter. Der Mond, betrachtet als Planet, Welt u. Trabant. Deutsche Ausgabe mit Erlauterungen und Zusatzen v. H. J. Klein. 3. Ausgabe. (In 5 Lieferungen.) Hamburg, 1883. er. 4to., mit 21 Tafeln (1 color.) u. 48 Holzschn. Liefg. 2. Jede Liefg. 2. Nautical Almanac (The) and Astronomical Ephemeris for the year 1885, for the meridian of the Royal Observatory at Greenwich. London, 1881. roy. 8vo. 530 pg. 2.80 Nell. Fiinfstellige Logarithmen der Zahlen, ete. 5 Aufl. Darmstadt, 1883. 8. 1.50 Newcomb, S. Astronomical papers prepared for the use of the Ameri- can Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac. Vol.1. Washington, 1883. 4to. 501 pg. 16.50 Popular Astronomy. 2 edit. London, 1883. 8vo. 596 pg., with 116 engravings and 5 maps of the stars. 18.50 - Niesten, L. Carte céleste avec horizon, comprenant les étoiles visibles a ’eil nu et les principales curiosités du Ciel, dressée pour la latitude de 50 degrés. Bruxelles, 1882. fol. 6 Oliver, J.O. W. Sunspottery, or what we owe to the sun. Popular account of the spots on the sun. London, 1883. 8vo. 56pg. 1.25 438 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Oppenheim, 8. Ueber eine neue Integration der Differentialgleichungen der Planetenbewegung. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 54 pg. 0.80 Oppolzer, Th. v. Ermittlung der Stérungswerthe in den Coordinaten durch die Variation entsprechend gewihlter Constanten. (Wien), 1883. 4to. 31 pg. 2 Ueber die Kriterien des Vorhandenseins dreier Lésungen bei dem Kometenprobleme. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 0.30 Beitrag z. Ermittellung d. Reduction auf d. unendlich kleinen Schwingungsborgen. (Wien), 1882. 8vo. 20 pg. 0.40 ——- Note iiber eine v. Archilochos erwihnte Sonnenfinsterniss. (Wien), 1882. 8vo. 4 pg. 0.25 Osservazioni di Stelle Cadenti, fatte nelle stazioni italiane durante gli anni 1868, 1869, 1870. Milano, 1882. 4to. 99 pg. Pein, A. Aufgaben der spharischen Astronomie gelést durch planime- trische Konstruktionen und mit Hiilfe der ebenen Trigonometrie. Leipzig, 1883. 4to. 56 pg. mit 3 Tafeln. 1.20 Peters, C. F. W. Die Fixsterne. Leipzig, 1883. 8vo. 169 pg., m. 69 Figuren in Holztich. Lwd. 1 Peters, C. H. J. Celestial Charts for the Equinox, 1860, made at the Litchfield Observatory, at Clinton, New York. (Last comparison with the sky during 1882.) Series I. 20 charts. Clinton, 1883. Imp. fol. : 40 Each chart covers 20 min. in R. A. a. 5 degr. in Decl. Pinelli, G. V. Breve esposizione della teoria degli errori di osserva- zione. (Metodo dei minimi quadrati). Genova, 1883. 8vo. 54. pg. Powell, H. J. The principles of glass-making. Together w. treat. on crown and sheet glass by H. Chance, and plate glass by H. G. Har- ris. London, 1883. 8vo. 3.70 Preston, 8. Tolver. Eine dynamische Erklarung der Gravitation. (Wien), 1883. 8vo, 11 pg. 0.30. Ueber die Méglichkeit vergangene Wechsel im Universum durch die Wirkung der jetzt thatigen Naturgesetze—auch in Ueber- einstimmung mit der Existenz eines Wirmegleichgewichtes in vergréssertem Massstabe zu erkliren. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 18 pg. 0.40 Proctor, R. A. Light science for leisure hours. Series JIJ. Familiar essays on scientific subjects, natural phenomena, etc. London, 1883. 8vo. 310 pg. 7.80 Mysteries of time and space. London, 1883. 8vo. 410 pg. with 24 illustrations. 7.80 Popular account of the past and coming transits of Venus from 1639 to 2112. New edit. New York, 1883. 8vo. Cloth. 10 The Stars in their Seasons. An easy guide to a knowledge of the stars in 12 maps, showing the stars at all hours all the year round. London, 1882. Imp. 8vo; cloth. 5.50 ASTRONOMY. 439 Pucci, E. Fondamenti di geodesia. Vol.1. Milano, 1883. 8vo. 424 pg. ¢. 52 figg. 8 Publicationen des astrophysikalischen Observatoriums zu Potsdam. Nr.13. (Bd. 10, Stiick 5.) Leipzig, 1883. 4to. pg. 293-301, mit 3 Tafeln. 4 Ent.: Lohse, O. Abbildungen von Sonnenflecken, nebst Bemerkun- gen tiber astronomische Zeichungen u. deren Vervielfiltigung. Publicationen des astrophysikalischen Observatoriums zu Potsdam. Nr. 12. (Bd. 11, Stiick 4.) Leipzig, 1883. 4to. pg. 227-292, mit 2 Tafeln. 6 Enth.: Miiller,G. Photometrische Untersuchungen. Publicationen des astrophysikalischen Observatoriums zu Potsdam. Nr. 11. (Bd. 11, Stiick 3.) Leipzig, 1883. 4to. pg.127-226. 6 Enth.: Vogel, H. C.,u. G. Miiller. Speectroskopische Beobachtungen der Sterne bis einschliesslich 7.5ter Grésse in der Zone von—1° bis +20° Declination. Publication des kodnigl. preussischen geodatischen Instituts. Regis- ter der Protokolle, Verhandlungen und Generalberichte f. die européische Gradmessung vom J. 1861 bis zum J. 1880. Bearb. v. M. Sadebeck. Berlin, 1883. 4to. 5 Publication des koénigl. preussischen geoditischen Instituts. Grad- messungs-Nivellement zwischen Swinemiinde u. Amsterdam. Bearb. v. W. Seibt. Berlin, 1883. 4to. 5 Publications of the Washburn Observatory of the University of Wis- consin. Vol.I. Madison,1882. 8vo. 180 pg; with portr. of Wash- burn and 10 plates; cloth. 8vo. Cont.: Descr. of the Observatory. Catal. of 195 stars for 1880. List of 23new Nebule. List of 60 and 88 new Double Stars. Measures of 150 Double Stars by Burnham. Observ. of 84 Red Stars, &e. Respighi, L. Osservazioni del diametro orizzontale del Sole. Roma, 1882. 4to. gr. 32 pg. 2.50 Reuter’s Wandkarte des noérdlichen gestirnten Himmels. 4 Blatt. 5 Aufl. Chromolithographie. Gotha, 1883. fol. 5 Revue Chronométrique. Journal des Horlogers, scientifique et pratique, publ. p. G. Saunier. Paris. 8vo. Année 1883. (12 nrs.) 12 Rosse, Earl of, and O. Boeddicker. Notes on the phys. appearance of the comets b and ¢ 1881, obs. at Birr Castle. Dublin, 1883. 4to. with 1 plate. 1.50 Riihlmann, M. u. R. Logarithmisch-trigonometrische u. andere fiir Rechner niitzliche Tafeln. 9. Aufl. Leipzig, 1883. Svo. ca. 300 pg- 2 Russell, H. C. Results of Double Star measures made at the Sydney Observatory, New South Wales, 1871-1881. Sydney, 1882. roy. Svo. 68 pg. with 4 plates. cloth. 5 Sang, E. New Table of 7-place Logarithms of all numbers continu- ously up to 200,000. 5. edit. London, 1883. roy.8vo. 334 pg. 22 440 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Schellen, H. Die Spectralanalyse in ihrer Anwendung auf die Stoffeder - Erde u. die Natur d. Himmelskorper. 3. Aufl. 2 Bde. Braunschweig, 1883. gr. 8vo. 334 u. 468. pg., mit 8 farb. Tafeln u. 362 Holzschn., u. m. e. Atlas v. 10 Tfln. in gr. 4to., von denen 1 color. 32 Schiaparelli, G. V. Misure di aleune principali stelle doppie di rapido movimento orbitato. Milano, 1882. 8vo. Schroeter, J.H. Areographische Beitrige zur genaueren Kenntniss u. Beurtheilung d. Planeten Mars. Herausg. von H. G. van de Sande Bakhuyzen. Leiden, 1882. 8vo. 447 pg., mit Atlas v. 16 Kpfrt. Schwarz, B. Astronomische Untersuchung tiber eine von Archilochus und eine in einer assyrischen Inschrift erwihnte Sonnenfinsterniss. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 14pg., mit Tafeln. 0.70 Secchi, A. Die Grosse der Schépfung. 2. Aufl. Leipzig, 1883. 8vo. 1.20 Pohle, J., Angelo Secchi. Ein Lebens- u. Culturbild. Céln, 1883. 8vo. 2.50 Siemens, C. W. On the conservation of the Solar Energy. London, 1883. 8vo. with illustr. 5 Sirius. Zeitschrift f. populére Astronomie. Red.: H.J. Klein. Leip- zig. 8vo. — Bd. 16 (N. Folge, Bd. 11): Jahrg. 1883 (12 Hefte). 10 Smyth, C. Piazzi. Madeira spectroscopic. London,1882. Imp. 4to. with illustrations. Cloth. 22 Souchon, A. Traité d’astronomie pratique comprenant lV’exposition du calcul des éphémérides astronomiques et nautiques, avec une in- troduction historique et de nombreuses notes. Paris, 1883. gr. 8vo. Fig. 13.50 Traité Vastronomie pratique. Paris,1883. 8vo. 95 et 396pg. 21 Spectrum Analysis.—Report of the committee (Dewar, Williamson, M. Watts, Abney, Stoney, Schuster, a. 0.) appointed for the purpose of reporting upon the present state of our knowledge of Spectrum Analysis (London). 8vo. I. Spectra of Metalloids (by Schuster). Influence of Temperature and Pressure on the Spectra of Gases (by Schuster). Emission Spectra of the Rays of High Refrangibility (by Hartley). Absorp- tion Spectra of the Rays of High Refrangibility (by Huntington). 1881. 60 pg., w. 2 plates. 4 II. General Methods of observing and mapping Spectra, by W. M. Watts. 1882. 107 pg., with 1 plate. 4.50 III. The Genesis of Spectra, by A. Schuster. 1883. 8vo. 24pg. 1.50 Sternfreund, G. Astronomischer Fiihrer pro 1884. Jahrg. 6. Miin- chen, 1883. 12mo. 2.40 Struve, H. Ueber d. Einfluss d. Diffraction an Fernréhren auf Licht- scheiben. Dorpat, 1883. gr. 4to. 104 pg. Struve, L., Resultate aus den in Pulkowa angestellten Vergleichungen von Procyon mit benachbarten Sternen. Petersburg, 1883. gr. 4to. 48 pg. 1.50 ASTRONOMY. 441 Tafeln, Nautische, der k.k. Kriegsmarine. Zusammengestellt u. hersg. . vom hydrographischen Amte der k. k. Kriegsmarine. Triest, 1883. 8vo. geb. 6 The Observatory. Monthly journal of practical astronomy. London. 8vo. Year 1883. (12 nrs.). 14 Thomson, W., and P. G. Tait. Treatise on natural philosophy. Vol. 1, part 2. London, 1883. roy. 8vo. Cloth. 18.50 WoloL, pt. 1. 16.50 Tischner, A. The sun changes its position in space, therefore it can- not be regarded as being ‘in a condition of rest.” Leipzig, 1883. 12mo. 0.50 Uhrmacher-Zeitung, Deutsche. Berlin. 4to. Jahrg.1883. (24 Nrn.). 6 Valentiner, W. Atlas des Sonnensystems. 24 Abbildungen in Licht- druck mit erliiuternden Texte, Jahr 1883. Folio Kart. 24 Van Tricht, V.. Le spectroscope et analyse spectrale. Namur, 1882. 12mo. 52 pg. 0.70 Vega’s logarithmisch trigonometrisches Handbuch. 67. Aufl. Berlin, 1883. gr. 8vo. 4.20 Vierteljabrsschrift der astronomischen Gesellschaft. Hersg. v. E, Scho- enfeld und A. Winnecke. Jahrg. 18. Heft 2. Leipzig, 1883. 8vo. pg. 73-152, mit 1 Lichtdruckbilde. 2 Vierteljahrsschrift d. astronomischen Gesellschaft. Hersg. v. E. Schon- feld u. A. Wienecke. Jahrg.18. Heft 3. Leipzig,1883. 8vo. 2 -Villicus, F. Die Geschichte der Rechenkunst mit besonderer Riicksicht auf Deutschland u. Oesterreich. Wien, 1883. gr. 8vo. 100 pg., mit 25 Illustr. 2.40 Vogel, H. C., u. G. Muller. Spectroskopische Beobachtungen der Sterne bis einschliesslich 7.5ter Grésse in der Zone von—1° bis x 20° Declination. Leipzig, 1883. 4to. pp. 127-226. 6 Wochenschrift f. Astronomie, Meteorologie u. Geographie. Red.: H.J. Klein. Halle. 8vo. Jahrg. 1883. (52 Nrn.) 9 Young,C.A. DieSonne. Leipzig,1883. 8vo. 318 pg., mit 2 Lichtdruck- tafeln u. 82 Abbildungen. 6 Young,C.A. Il Sole. Milano, 1882. 8vo. 336 pg..c. numerose illustr. 5 Young, J. R. Navigation and naut. astronomy in theory and prac- tice. New edit. with additions, London, 1883. 12mo. 2.70 Zeitschrift f. Instrumentenkunde. Organ f. Mittheilungen aus d. ge- samten Gebiete d. wissenschaftl. Technik. Redig. v. G. Schwirk- us, Berl. 4to. m. Zahlreichen Originalabbild. Jahrg. HI: 1883. (12 Hefte.) 18 Zelbr, K. Ueber die Bahn der kometari schen Nebelmasse Schmidt 1882. (Wien), 1883. 8vo. 0.25 NECROLOGY OF ASTRONOMERS, 1883. ALEX. Nic. SAwirscon, director of the Observatory at Cronstadt, d. —, 1883, at St. Petersburg, xt, 75. 442 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. VICTOR PUISEAUX, member of the Paris Academy of Sciences, d. —, 1883, at Paris. ARTHUR ROCHE, professor of astronomy at Montpelier, d. April 18, zt, 63. Sir EDWARD SABINE, whose pendulum observations are so well known, d. June 26, 1883, at London. Professor LISTING at Konigsberg, d. —, 1883. Prof. W. A. Norton, of Yale College, d. September 21, 1883, zt, 73. Sir CHARLES W. SIEMENS, d. November 18, at London. YVON VILLARCEAU, member of the Paris Academy of Sciences, d. December 23, 1883, zt, 70. GEOLOGY. By T. STErRY Hunt, LL. D., F. BR. 8. EOZOIC ROCKS. The question of the Eozoic or Primary rocks, details regarding which were given in the report of last year, continues to occupy a prominent place in geological literature. Giekie, the director of the geological survey of Great Britain, has, in a late communication to the Geological Society of London, attempted to set aside the conclusions arrived at by the later British geologists, and to maintain that the great groups of crystalline rocks which these observers have recognized as more or less distinct pre-Cambrian series are either altered Cambrian strata or erupted rocks of still later date. This conclusion, and the facts alleged in support of his view are denied alike by Hicks, Hughes, Bonney, and others, and we are promised an extended discussion and re-examination of the subject, which, it may be predicted, will lead to the final refuta- tion of the ideas of the old school, now defended only by the official geologists, and the correlation of these crystalline recks with those of North America and of the Alps, now shown to be of pre-Cambrian age. In this connection it may be mentioned that the familiar doctrine of the igneous and eruptive origin of the undoubtedly Eozoic, or pre-Cam- brian rocks has been of late resuscitated by C. W. Hitchcock and by Marr, among others. The latter, in an elaborate essay in the Geological Magazine (June, 1883), insists upon the supposed permanence of ocean- basins, and the growth of continents from their borders, as now main- tained by some geologists. Such a view presents great difficulties to those who maintain the marine origin of Eozoic rocks, and Marr proposes to regard them as of igneous and terrestrial origin; or, in other words, as derived from materials ejected from volcanic vents, either in liquid or in solid torm, which by subsequent changes have given rise to the granitoid gneisses and succeeding crystalline schists. This view, which is by no means new, fails to account for the intercalation with these stratified crystalline rocks of various special deposits, such as limestone, apatite, iron-oxyds, quartz, metallic sulphides, and silicates like olivine, serpentine, and pyroxene, all of which, in interstratified masses, form integral parts of the older crystalline series. These it is sought to ex- plain as the result of local metasomatism. The hypothesis which sup- poses them to have originated in an alteration of sediments like those of later times is equally untenable without invoking metasomatism, and 443 444 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. . we are led to look to a modified Neptunian view as a solution of the problem. The origin of continents and the supposed stability of sea-basins is ably discussed in the Geological Magazine for June, 1883, by W. O. Crosby, and reasons are there given for calling in question the doctrine lately maintained by Dana and others in opposition to the older and generally received view of the alternations of sea and land. The derived origin of vast continental areas made up of great thicknesses of Paleo- zoic and more recent sediments, in great part of mechanical origin, necessarily involves the destruction and the disintegration by chemical and mechanical processes of not less considerable masses constituting previous continents. In this connection Hunt has discussed the question of the sub-aérial decay of rocks. (Amer. Jour. Science, September, 1883.) This process consists in a more or less complete chemical decomposition of most of the silicates of the crystalline rocks, the feldspars being converted into clay by the loss of their protoxide-bases and a large part of their silica, all of which are removed in solution in water. The silicates of protoxide- bases, such as hornblende, are in like manner decomposed, with the so- lution of the lime and magnesia, and most of the silica, the iron remain- ing as peroxide; while certain silicates, such as garnet and tourmaline resist, like quartz and magnetite, the process of decay. These trans- formations being effected under the influence of the atmosphere, the bases are dissolved as carbonates. Thus the decay of crystalline rocks is “a necessary preliminary to glacial action and erosion, which removed previously softened materials.” The points insisted upon by the author are thus resumed: 1. The evidence afforded by recent geological studies in North Amer- ica and elsewhere shows the universality and the antiquity of the sub- aérial decay both of silicated crystalline rocks and of calcareous rocks, and its great extent in pre-Cambrian times. 2. The fact that the materials resulting from this decay are preserved in situ in regions where they have been protected from denudation by overlying strata alike of Cambrian and more recent periods, or, in the absence of these coverings, by the position of the decayed materials with reference to denuding agents, as in driftless regions or in places sheltered from erosion, as in the Appalachian and St. Lawrence valleys. 3. That this process of decay, though continuous through later geo- logical ages, has, under ordinary conditions, been insignificant in amount since the glacial period, for the reason that the time which has since elapsed is short, and also, perhaps, on account of changed atmospheric conditions in later ages. 4. That this process of decay has furnished the materials, not only for the clays, sands, and iron oxides, from the beginning of Paleozoic time to the present, but also for many corresponding rocks of Eozoic time. The bases thus separated from crystalline silicated rocks have been the source, directly and indirectly, of all limestones and carbon- GEOLOGY. 445 ated rocks, and have, moreover, caused profound secular changes in the constitution of the ocean’s waters. The decay of sulphuretted ores in the Eozoic rocks has given rise to oxidized iron ores, and also to de- posits of rich copper ores at various geological horizons. 5. That the rounded masses of crystalline rock left in the process of decay constitute not only the bowlders of the drift, but, judging from analogy, the similar masses in conglomerates of various ages, going back to Eozoic time, and that not only the form of these detached _ Inasses, but the outlines of eroded regions of crystalline rocks, were - determined by the preceding process of subaérial decay of these rocks. As regards the rocks of the Scottish Highlands noticed in the report of last year, and especially of the so-called younger gneiss, Callaway has continued his studies in that region, and has considered its relation to the Paleozoic series. This gneiss, the Grampian series of Hicks, is called Caledonian by Callaway, and, as we have previously said, is apparently identical with the series already named Montalban in North America, and includes in its lower part,in Scotland, the granulites of Nicoll. Some of its rocks have a certain resemblance to the older Hebridian (Lewisian or Laurentian) gneiss, which is often porphyritic and has been by some observers described as an igneous rock. The accompanying Paleozoic (Cambrian) strataare named by Callaway the Assynt group, and consist at the base of what has been called the Torridon sandstone, followed by a quartzite, sometimes with annelids, flagstones or grits with Salterella, and a mass of dolomite. The Caledo- nian gneiss appears in some cases to overlie directly this Assynt group, this relation according to Callaway being due to a dislocation of the strata, with a great thrust from the east which has squeezed together both series of strata into a succession of folds overturned to the west, giving to the whole series a general easterly dip. The Caledonian gneiss is seen in Glen Coul to overlie immediately the Hebridian gneiss, while elsewhere this same older gneiss is directly overlaid by the Cambrian quartzite, which again is seen resting in outliers upon the younger gneiss. This latter is penetrated by numerous granitic veins, which never pen- etrate the Assynt group. Callaway notes between the Hebridian or Lau- rentian gneisses on the west and the Caledonian on the east (the Assynt group occupying the interval), several nearly parallel north and south faults, which increase in upthrow from the west to the east. Thus the first of these brings up the basal sandstone through the quartzite, then faults more to the eastward bring up the sandstone through the over- lying dolomite, and finally the underlying Hebridian gneiss itself; the _ younger or Caledonian gneiss appearing in its proper place still farther to the east. This is very similar to the successive faults long since ob- served and described all along the western side of the Atlantic belt in North America, the general structure of which is repeated in the Scot- tish Highlands. Similar foldings have been pointed out by Brégger in Scandinavia, where lower Paleozoicrocks are closely folded in the Eozoic. 446 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. AL'TERED OR METAMORPHIC ROCKS. Broégger has also described the local changes of the Paleozoic strata near Christiania, where eruptive masses of granite and of syenite have caused the development of crystals of chiastolite in certain shales still retaining the marks of graptolites. Other beds are changed into a kind of hornstone, while in the limestones of the series the shells of Orthisare found associated with well-developed garnets. Similar facts to these are well known in other regions. These conditions are, however, very unlike those presented in disturbed regions where a process of folding and inversion having caused uncrystalline strata to pass below crystalline stratified rocks, these latter have been assumed, as in the Scottish Highlands, to have resulted from an alteration of still newer and originally superimposed uncrystalline sediments. Uncrystalline rocks thus enfolded seem occasionally to have suffered local changes, due apparently to the action of thermal waters coming up through fractures along the folds and giving rise to crystalline min- erals. Rénard has lately described an interesting example of the kind in a belt of graywacke and slates referred to the Devonian, and affected by a northeast and southwest plication. The change is very marked along the axis of this, but shades off on either side till the sediments are unaltered. Garnet, hornblende, mica, and titanite have here beer developed in the schists, and are associated with anthracitic matter. These minerals are mixed with grains of clastic origin, and the whole of the phenomena would appear to be due to infiltrating waters. There is, however, a wide difference between these mixtures of clastic mate rials with crystalline silicates which have been formed and deposited in their midst, and the wholly crystalline feldspathic and kornblendic rocks of the Eozoic ages. In this connection Bonney has lately studied the so-called metamor- phic conglomerate of Valorsine in the Alps, and has submitted to care- ful microscopic examination the layers of so-called gneiss and mica- schist in this conglomerate of carboniferous age. He shows that the mica and other constituent silicates of these were derived from pre- existing crystalline rocks, and that the material has been subjected to immense pressure, by which the quartz has been broken and the feld- spar crushed. From the latter, and from interposed earthy dust, minute scales of micaceous minerals have been formed by such micro-minera- logical changes as are always at work in similar rocks, and chalcedonic quartz has been deposited. He adds, however, that “ of metamorphism, in the technical sense of the word, there is no trace.” Bonney further remarks that “a few years since it would have been heresy to assert that very clear proof would be necessary before we could accept a crystalline schist as the metamorphosed representative of a rock of Paleozoic age. Yet at the present time many who have made a special study of this branch of petrology would not hesitate to go this far, and some would even declare that we do not know of any GEOLOGY. 447 completely metamorphic rock which is not of Archean age. Certainly the stock-instances of metamorphism in Wales, and especially in Angle- sea, in Cornwall, in Leicestershire, and in Worcestershire, have utterly broken down on careful study. Outside the English geological survey probably po person who can use a microscope believes that the schists ot Anglesea are altered Cambrian, or that the slates of this age were melted down into the quartz-porphyry of Llyn-Padarn.” Headds: ‘‘No inferences with regard to metamorphism can be accepted until they have been fully confirmed by the evidence of the microscope.” He concludes that his own and others’ studies show that the crystal- line schists and gneisses of the Alps existed in their present condition long before the carboniferous period, and insists upon the fact that throughout the various regions of the Alps we everywhere pass from comparatively unmetamorphosed rocks of known age to a highly meta- morphosed rock, of which it can only be said that it is immensely older. In this latter series, moreover, he declares we “ can trace a certain litho- logical and stratigraphical sequence leading upward through a series of groups - - - from the coarse granitoid gneisses and protogines to the topmost well-stratified but still truly metamorphic schists,” and con- clades that we have no evidence that any of these crystalline foliated rocks of the Alps are as young as the Cambrian period. Bonney has also described further the Miocene conglomerates of the so-called Nagelflue of the Rigi, and refers to the frequent indenting and pitting of the included pebbles, a phenomenon often noted and described in this and other similar conglomerates, which he ascribes in part to direct pressure and in part to the action of water, localized and intensi- fied by the pressure of adjoining pebbles. He objects to the notion that such mechanical changes depend upon high temperature, as some have suggested. THE SCOTTISH HIGHLANDS. A further contribution to the geology of the crystalline rocks of Seot- land has been given by Lapworth in an extended memoir entitled ‘“ The Secret of the Highlands,” in which he discusses the vexed question of the relations of the crystalline and the uncrystalline rocks, arriving at results similar to those of Callaway, already set forth. In the coast re- gion of Durness and Eriboll, in Sutherlandshire, it has been asserted by previous observers that we have a distinct ascending succession from the basal Hebridian gneiss through fossiliferous Paleozoic limestones to the micaceous gneiss and schists of the central Highlands. Accord- ing to Lapworth, we have at the base a great mass of coarse-grained massive gneiss, composed of feldspar and quartz, with hornblende, and more rarely with mica, the strata being nearly vertical, with a north- west and southeast strike, These recks are the Hebridian, Lewisian or Laurentian gneiss of aifferent observers. Resting unconformably upon this ancient gneiss is a second body of strata, gently inclined, with a general northeast and southwest strike, and consisting of two divisions, lithologically very distinct. The lower is made up of a quartzite with 448 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. annelid-markings, flags, and limestones, the latter holding Maclurea, Murchisonia, Orthoceras, and other Lower Paleozoicforms. These uncrys- talline rocks are described as the Durness or Eriboll series, and are sur- mounted, in apparent conformity, by the upper division. This consists of flaggy quartzose, micaceous and chloritic schists, with thick layers of hornblendi¢ and micaceous flaggy gneiss, and includes bands of dio- ritic and syenitic rock, described by some writers as igneous. There is no doubt that the older gneisses are more ancient rocks underlying un- conformably the fossiliferous group, the only question being as to the true relation of the latter to the younger schists and gneisses which, from their first appearance at their western outcrop, form an almost unbroken mass, extending south and east to the central Highlands, and covering an area of at least 15,000 square miles. This area includes the Caledonian and Grampian gneisses of other authors, and those who, fol- lowing Murchison, maintain the reality of the apparent supra-position, are forced to regard the crystalline rocks of this area as altered Paleo- zoic strata newer than the Durness limestone. Various hypotheses have been put forth to explain the relation of these without admitting such a conclusion; while the British geological survey have accepted the visible sequence, as it stands, with allits consequences. Murchison noticed to the east of the fossiliferous limestone of Loch Eriboll what he regarded as an upper quartzite, but this, according to Nicoll, was but a repetition of that below the limestone, and was newer than the upper gneiss, which he believed to be a pre-Cambrian series brought up by a fault. Callaway, in like manner, maintained that there are two Eozoic gneissic series unconformable the one to the other, and that the fossiliferous group was laid down in discordance on both, and owes its apparent infra-position to the younger gneiss to dislocations. The unconformable supra-position of the fossiliferous strata to the lower gneiss is, according to Lapworth, very clear. The limestone of the Dur- ness series, though apparently of great thickness, and with gentle dips, he finds to be made up of afew distinet lithological zones, repeated many times by a series of fanlts or of sigmoid flexures, and to be visibly over- laid at a low angle by wrinkled micaceous schists and flags, ineluding zones of gneissic and hornblendie schists. Even where faulted against the limestone, this upper series appears to correspond in dip and strike with the limestone series below, thus seemingly confirming Murchison’s view. All this is seen in the Durness area, but on proceeding to Loch Eriboll, which lies in a narrow valley a few miles to the south, we find on its western side the older gneiss which separates this from the valley of Durness, wherein are seen only the quartzites and limestones resting on this older or Hebridian gneiss. In the more eastern valley of Loch Eriboll, however, while the fossiliferous rocks of the Durness group over- lie on its western side the older gneiss, they are seen on its eastern side clearly to overlie the newer gneissof Murchison, upon which the quartz- ite rests unconformably, with a conglomerate at its base. The so-called upper quartzite is but a repetition of this. i 7 ee ee © GEOLOGY. 449 ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE. As regards the crystalline rocks of the southern part of the Appala- thian belt, J. B. Elliott has described several sections from the great ralley along the border of Georgia, Tennessee, and the Carolinas. He adopts the notions advanced by Bradley and some others as to the -aleozoic age of these crystalline rocks. The Ocoee and theKnox groups vf Safford, which include the Taconian and parts of the succeeding ‘Jambrian, are supposed, by Elliott to form, in a metamorphic condition, ‘he great gneissic, micaceous, aud hornblendic belt of the Blue Ridge. Che view here resuscitated is not sustained by any new facts. The rocks of this region, as seen and described by the writer, in northwestern feorgia, are pre-Cambrian schists, chiefly of Montalban age, with over- ‘ying Taconian quartzites, slates, and marbles, the age and relation of which were long ago correctly pointed out by Lieber in South Carolina. ‘The hypothesis of Bradley has no other argument in its support than shat deduced from apparent stratigraphical succession, which is as value- ess and misleading here as farther north along the same mountain-belt n the Alps, in Wales, or in the Scottish Highlands, in all of which *egions the fallacy of the metamorphic hypothesis and the pre-Cam- rian age of the crystalline schists is now established. The recent studies of Fontaine in Virginia are important in this con- aection as showing the relation of the crystalline rocks of the Blue Ridge . to the base of the Paleozoic series. In the interval of about sixty miles between Turk’s Gap and Balcony Falls he finds three groups of rocks. The oldest, referred by him to the Laurentian, is described as consist- ing chiefly of coarse heavy-bedded granitoid gneisses, destitute of mica, and containing asmall amount of hornblende, which is not well defined. Associated with and overlying these are massive bedded rocks, in which hornblende predominates, with a triclinic feldspar and some magnesian mica, doubtfully referred by him to the same series. The second group, called by him Huronian, includes chloritic, argillaceous, and hydro-mi- caceous schists, becoming epidotic, and passing into massive beds de- scribed as felsitic in character, often concretionary and amgydaloidal. This group abounds in copper, both native and in sulphuretted forms. The third group, recognized by Fontaine ag the Primal series of Rogers, has here a thickness of about 2,400 feet, and consists essentially of shales, flags, sandstones, and conglomerates. In its upper fourth is found a great inass of quartzite, carrying the Scolithus typical of this series in Penn- sylvania and elsewhere. Beneath it are intercalated quartzite beds, sometimes conglomerate, and holding pebbles of the ancient gneiss. The basal conglomerate, of unequal thickness, varies in composition with that of the adjacent Eozoic rock, of which it is chiefly composed; the peb- bles being in some cases derived from the Laurentian gneisses and in others from the Huronian schists. These basal beds are infiltrated with quartz and chlorite, and in some cases are only distinguished from the underlying Huronian schists, from which they were derived, by the pres- H. Mis. 69-———29 450 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18°23. ence of large included fragments of these. The slates and flags of the Primal series are described by Foutaine as sometimes talcose, pearly, or nacreous in character, and as changing to kaolin by decay. They in- clude large masses of limonite, and in some cases harder quartzose beds are charged with speculariron. The upper 500 feet of the series consists of shales, often kaolinized, containing both limonite and manganese- oxide, and graduating into the overlying magnesian limestones of the Auroral division of Rogers, which with the underlying Primal makes up the Taconian series. The great Appalachian belt of pre-Cambrian rocks, to which the Blue Ridge belongs, was overlaid in many other parts of its extent by strata of Paleozoic age, as is well known, and the rela- ~ tions of these give evidence that important movements of the region occurred at intervals until after the close of the Paleozoic period, and in many cases involved in folds portions of Paleozoic strata, thus giving a deceptive appearance of infra-position. The fractures which often accom- pany these folds still afford passage in many cases to thermal waters, and such waters, in past times, by their action upon the strata along their course have produced local changes by the development of crystalline minerals; a phenomenon alluded to above, which has been adduced as an evidence of the Paleozoic age of the true crystalline schists. The organic forms from Bernardston, Mass., have lately been studied by Whitfield, who describes them as occurring in “‘ metamorphic sandy shales,” and also in an underlying bed of crystalline limestone. In the limestone he finds two species of Favosites not certainly identified, a form resembling Syringopora, and stems of crinoids of large size. The sandy shales called by Dana “‘laminated quartzites” have yielded to Whitfield species of Strophomena, Spirifera, and Rhynchonella, ete., besides a form of Petraia. From all these he concludes that the limestones are Silurian, probably of Niagara age, while the shales are of the age of the Chemung or Middle Devonian. It is remarkable that these two rocks, which at Bernardston immediately overlie each other, are separated by so wide an interval in time; a fact testifying to great stratigraphical irregularities in the region. The fossiliferous limestones of Littleton, N. H., also intimately asso- ciated with crystalline schists, have in like manner been examined by Whitfield, who reaches the conclusion that these, including Halysites catenulata, Favosites Niagarensis, Astrocerium venustum Hall, and Pen- tamerus nysius are, like those of Bernardston, of Middle Silurian age, and probably belong to the Niagara. NORTH AMERICAN CAMBRIAN. In a late communication*to the Boston Society of Natural History, Hunt proposes to consider the Cambrian rocks of the great North American basin as represented in four typical areas: (1) the Appala- chian, (2) the Adirondack, (3) the Mississippi, and (4) the Cordillera area. To the first of these belongs the great thickness of much dis- GEOLOGY. 451 turbéd sediments along the whole eastern border of the basin, consti- tuting the First Graywacke and the Sparry Lime-rock of Eaton; being the Upper Taconic of Emmons, and the Potsdam and Quebec groups of Logan. The Hudson-River group, as originally defined, included the whole of the Cambrian Appalachian, besides some of the under- lying Taconian slates and portions of overlying Ordovician beds, of Lo- raine age, in consequence of which the name of Hudson-River group came to be regarded as the paleontological equivalent for the Loraine. The Adirondack area of the Cambrian includes the stable and little-dis- - turbed area around the Adirondack Mountains, embracing the Cham- plain and Ottawa Basins, in which the series is represented only by the Potsdam and Calciferous divisions, corresponding apparently to but a small portion of Cambrian time. The physical conditions of the Mis- sissippi area, as seen in the valley of the upper Mississippi, appear to have been similar to those of the Adirondack region. The region of the Cordilleras, in which great developments of Cambrian rocks are met with, presents conditions of deposition unlike the other. While in the Adirondack area there is a break, both paleontological and strati- graphical, between the Cambrian and the Ordovician, which begins in some places with the Chazy and in others with the Trenton, we have, - according to the late studies of Walcott in Nevada, a gradual passage from the Cambrian to the Ordovician (Lower Silurian or second fauna of Barraude). ‘In thissection,” he remarks, “ we have an illustration of the gradual extinction of an older fauna as a new one is introduced, the sedimentation continuing, and no physical disturbance occurring to change the conditions of animal life.” The break between the Calcifer- ous and the Chazy is here filled. It is to be remarked in this connec- tion that the fossils of the Levis limestone of Canada (the Sparry Lime- _ rock of Eaton) were long since declared by Billings to occupy an inter- inediate position, and constitute a passage from the Calciferous to the Chazy. From the incomplete data which we now possess with regard to the lower Paleozoic rocks of the northwest side of Newfoundland, there is little doubt that further studies there will add to our knowledge of the relations of the first and second faunas, and help to illustrate the conception of an unbroken succession. The notion that breaks, uncon- formities, and sudden transitions should form the basis of classification in stratified rocks, is growing obsolete. (See further, for details of the Paleozoic rocks of the Cordillera region, the account of the Geology of the Eureka district in Nevada.) In the Grand Canon of the Colorado there is found immediately below the Devonian a series of Cambrian strata, known as the Tonto group, containing an abundant fauna like that of the Potsdam of the Missis- sippi area. This group rests unconformably upon a vast series of un- crystalline shales, sandstones, and limestones, measuring over 11,000 feet, and including 1,000 feet of interbedded igneous rocks, constituting _ the Grand Cafion and Chu-ar groups of Powell. These have afforded 452 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. some few organic forms, as yet undescribed, which lead Walcott to regard this lower series, lying between the Tonto group and the crystal- line rocks below, as also of Cambrian age, though they had previously been regarded by Powell as pre-Cambrian. These rocks, judging from the collections seen by the writer, are wholly uncrystalline sandstones and shales, unlike the Taconian in character, and it is suggested by Wal. cott that they may correspond to the Keweenian, which occupies a po sition between the Taconian and the Potsdam, being separated from this latter by a great unconformity and vast erosion. The Keweenian, more: over, as the writer has shown, presents evidences of organic forms. Until, however, these rocks of the Grand Cafion and of the Keweenian series shall have been found to include the representatives of the first fauna of Barrande it would be unphilosophical to include either of them in the Cambrian. Few thoughtful geologists now suppose this fauna to mark the dawn of organic: life, and we may hope to find beneath its horizon a long series of organic forms stretching far backward through what have been aptly termed the Transition rocks to those of the Primi- tive time. The great series of silicious and argillaceous rocks, with some in- cluded limestones and beds of crystalline iron ores, found to the north- west of Lake Superior, which were provisionally designated by the pres- ent writer as the Animikie series, have since been studied by N. H. — Winchell, in Minnesota, and found to have a thickness of not less than 10,000 feet. These rocks, which underlie the Keweenian, are, in the ab- sence of these, unconformably overlaid by the horizontal Cambrian sandstones of the Mississippi area, as is well seen on the Saint Louis River, in Minnesota, and have been by the writer referred to the Taco. nian. They have lately yielded him the remains of an organism believed to be a sponge. The Keweenian series itself in places rests upon these rocks, as elsewhere upon the Huronian, the Laurentian, and at Duluth, upon rocks which have been referred by the writer to the Norian series. He has suggested that, as long since claimed by Emmons and Hough- ton, some of the iron-ore-bearing rocks of northern Michigan belong to the Animikie or Taconian series, although hitherto confounded with the Huronian rocks of the region, with which both here and in the Atlantie belt they have certain resemblances. The Cambrian rocks along the eastern side of the Atlantic belt, as seen in Newfoundland, New Brunswick, and Massachusetts, present an important field for-comparative study. W.S. Dodge has lately re- examined these rocks, as seen in the latter region. The argillites and conglomerates of the Boston basin, as has long been known, afford at Braintree a Cambrian fauna, which has been referred to the Menevian horizon. It is there found abundantly in argillite beds, which dip with a high angle to the south, and have a maximum thickness of 500 feet. Their precise relation to the conglomerates of the region is left undeter- mined. These strata are traversed both by feldspathic and by pyrox- GEOLOGY.. 453 enic eruptive rocks. Mr. Dodge there distinguishes an older (the Brain- tree) and a younger (the Quincy) syenite, the latter holding numerous fragments of a fine-grained black diabase, as well as fragments of a fine-grained syenite, but it is not clear that any of these are derived from the older syenite. The younger of these overlies the slates, and the older would also appear to be more recent than these, but the point is not clearly brought out. The slates in the vicinity of the intru- sive masses are altered, and present large oval cavities partially filled with epidote, sometimes irregularly distributed and sometimes scattered along discolored bands parallel to the stratification. The writer has _ observed similar conditions elsewhere in the slates of the Boston basin in proximity to intrusive rocks. SILURIAN, CAMBRIAN, AND TACONIAN. I. C. White, of the second geological survey of Pennsylvania, has described the unconformable superposition of the Oneida sandstone, the base of the (true) Silurian, to the Hudson-River group, as well seen on the Erie railroad near Otisville, N. Y., the dip of the former being there 28° and that of the latter 43° to the north, while the lower series has an eroded surface, and has, moreover, furnished fragments to the overlying sandstone. Similar evidences are seen at the Lehigh Water- gap. This stratigraphical unconformity, though sometimes questioned, was long since pointed out by H. D. Rogers, and was confirmed by the present writer in 1878. In this connection, there arises an important question as to the geological position of the so-called Hudson-River slates. The evidence from the valleys of central Pennsylvania, as well as on the north shore of Lake Ontario, is that there is ne unconformity nor stratigraphical break between the Oneida sandstone and the Lo- raine shales, which are often regarded as identical with the Hudson- _ Riverslates. As has, however, been pointed out by the present writer, the Hudson-River group, as at first proposed by Vanuxem, was by him made to include not less than three distinct groups of argillaceous strata, two of which he declared to be—in eastern Pennsylvania, at least—geographically distinct, namely, the fossiliferous Loraine shales of the central valleys, there lying conformably beneath the Uneida sandstones, and the non-fossiliferous argillites of the great Appalachian valley, which, as described above, are unconformably overlaid by this same Oneida sandstone. The Loraine shales, according to Hunt, are, so far as yet known, unrepresented in the great valley, where, however, besides the roofing-slates belonging to the Lower Taconic—the Trans- _ ition Argillite of Eaton—there is in many places a great development of red sandstone, conglomerates, and argillites, the continuation in _ Pennsylvania of the First Graywacke of Eaton, which from southern _ New York is traced east of the Hudson, and thence to Quebec and beyond. This is the Cambrian of the Appalachian area, the Upper Ta- conic of Emmons, and the Potsdam and Quebec groups of Logan, which, 454 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. from the valley of the Hudson to that of the Saint Lawrence, has been known as the Hudson-River group, with the inclusion, however, in parts of its distribution, as in Pennsylvania, of Lower Taconic slates, and elsewhere of overlying Loraine shales. The appended table representing the nomenclature of Eaton, as pro- posed by him fifty years since, with the medern names given to his divis- ions, will serve to show the relations of the great groups mentioned to the Silurian rocks above and the older crystalline strata beneath, and may be read in connection with the classification of Eozoic and Paleozoic rocks given in the report for 1882. The Potsdam sandstone had not, in the time of Eaton, been recognized as distinct from the Calciferous sand- rocks. The student of American geology familiar with its history will note that the great stratigraphical error of Mather and his followers was in denying the distinctness of the First Graywacke of Eaton, and in asserting its identity with the Second Graywacke, or, in other words, im denying the existence of a Graywacke series beneath the horizon of the Trenton limestone. There are, in fact, two such lower series, for the great mass of sandstones and shales which make up the Primal of Rog- ers, and, as they occur in Virginia, have been described above by Fon- taine, occupy a position below the granular lime-rock of Eaton, and con- stitute a Taconian Graywacke, not indicated in the table. Eaton’s Nomenclature (1832). Later Names. a 4 (Corniferous Lime-rock .....-...| Upper Helderberg. DEVONIAN. 6 '(Geodiferous WGMVe=TO Chee eee a Niagara....-.-..- ) H 3 ; SILURIAN. = = 2. Millstone-grit - -. reise! Oneida—Medina - E 1. Graywacke-slate - GRAM ACK) an iualaraileee i) } é 4 =H ORDOVICIAN. Metalliferous Lime-rock.-...--- Chazy—-Trenton.. ) ah see 3.{Sparry Lime-rock. Calciferous Z Sand-rochk 2224s: Saye Bs i -oTi Upper Taconic. 7 CAMBRIAN. = z Millstone-grit- - - - ean isin aes ae 3 Graywacke-slate - CEA WACEE, ’ Lower Cam- ay J brian.) Ae A POTTS cater ioe rererate eters clas (Itacolumitie Group.) 2, Granular Quartz-rock...--.-..- PRIMITIVE. HURONIAN. MONTALBAN. J iii rani lard dene rege eee eee fi TACONIC. Ica ; LAURENTIAN. NORIAN. ARVONIAN. ROCKS ys ose ee eee ae eee SO eS ee . GEOLOGY. 455 The distinctness of the Taconian from the overlying Cambrian, at one time included with it under the name of Upper Taconic, being apparent, there is no longer any reason for calling the latter Taconic, or using this name as a synonym for Cambrian, as is done by Marcou ; nor yet in arguing, from the Cambrian fauna found in the upper rocks, the Cambrian or Lower Silurian age of the Lower Taconic, as is done by Dana. In the last year’s report reference was made to the recognition by Crosby of a great series of rocks in Trinidad, the Caribbean group of Guppy, which are unconformably overlaid by fossiliferous Cambrian strata, and have moreover the lithological characters of the North American Taconian, the Lower Taconic of Emmons, and the Itacolu- mitic group of Lieber. Crosby has since noticed a great development in the mountains of eastern Cuba of a similar series, where they form a belt six or eight miles wide, and are highly inclined, with an east and west strike. They include great masses of white crystalline limestone, often micaceous and associated with hydro-micaceous and chloritic schists. . These, with the similar rocks of Trinidad and the Spanish Main, he com- pares with the Lower Taconic rocks of western New England, and des- ignates as Taconian. They are, according to him, entirely distinct from another great series of uncrystalline limestones with sandstones and fissile slates, with which they have been confounded, which, though they haveas yet yielded no fossils, are supposed to be equivalent to the Meso- zoic and Tertiary strata of San Domingo and Jamaica. GEOLOGY OF SPAIN. Barrois has lately published an important memoir on the ancient rocks of Galicia and the Asturias in Spain, some of the results of which throw light on American geology. The primitive rocks of the Cantabrian chain, granites, gneisses, and crystalline schists, are in these provinces overlaid by a great mass of strata including the whole Paleozoic suc- cession from the base of the Cambrian to the top of the coal meas- ures. In the province of Toledo the base of this series is a Scoli- thus sandstone, which, according to Cortazar, there rests directly upon the crystalline schists; but in the Asturias there are found beneath a similar sandstone a hundred meters or more of limestone and shales containing an abundant Cambrian fauna, including several species of Paradoxides, with Conocephalites, Arionellus, and a cystidean. Between these fossiliferous strata and the crystalline schists there intervenes in the region under notice a volume of not less than 3,000 meters of strata described as argiliites and quartzites, with dolomites and limestones, sometimes saccharoidal and cipolin marbles, with beds of specular iron. This great series of unfossiliferous strata is included with the overlying fossiliferous beds by Barrois, under the common name of Cambrian, which he defines as including the first fauna of Barrande. To these succeed immediately, and without a stratigrapbical break, the Scolithus beds ~456 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. ° ‘that contain, besides, Bilobites and Cruziana, and are described 45 wlen- tical in character with the Armorican sandstone of Brittany. They are followed by a great concordant series, in which the forms of Barrande’s second and third faunas are abundant. These strata, measuring in all about 600 meters, with the basal sandstone, have near the middle the roofing-slates of Luarca, which, like those of Angers in France, con- tain the forms of the second (or Ordovician) faunas, while higher in the series are slates and limestones with the third or true Silurian fauna. Barrois applies the name of Silurian to the rocks of both the second and third faunas, and includes therein, though not without hesitation, the Scolithus sandstone, which he admits should, in accordance with the views of British geologists, be included with the first fauna. The Scolithus of these sandstones would seem to be similar to that of the Potsdam of the Adirondack region (long since shown to be distinct from that of the Primal sandstone of Rogers), and is described by Bar- rois.as exhibiting an internal tube, and as resembling Verticillopora, to which he compares it. The Scolithus found at Port Henry on Lake Champlain shows this internal tube. The American geologist is here reminded of the typical Potsdam which rests on the crystalline rocks in the Adirondack region, while near by, in Vermont and New York, are found the slates and lime- stones of a still lower Cambrian horizon, the so-called Lower Pots- dam, between which and the ancient crystalline rocks are interposed, along the Appalachians, several thousand feet of quartzites, slates, and limestones, constituting the Taconian, which may well be repre- sented by the 3,000 meters of strata found by Barrois in Galicia be- tween the primitive schists and the base of the fossiliferous Cambrian. The Devonian, which overlies conformably the Silurian in this part of Spain, has a thickness of not less than 1,000 meters, and includes a great amount of limestones and an abundant fauna. It is sueceeded by the carboniferous, having at its base a great limestone member, and above, 2,000 or 3,000 meters of coai measures, with more than eighty coal seams, many of them of value. The carboniferous limestone is in part dolomitic, and is remarkable for its great deposits of ores of zine, lead, manganese, cobalt, and mercury, which are found in veins and fissures in these rocks, and according to Sullivan and O’Reilly are post-Eocene in age. TRIAS OF EASTERN NORTH AMERICA. Prof. George H. Cook has discussed the history of the Mesozoic areas of eastern North America, constituting the new red sandstone, which probably include both Jurassic and Triassic beds, and have already been considered in the report of last year. Cook regards those from South Carolina to Massachusetts, and probably also those of the Brit- ish provinces, as having been at one time in some way connected, and supposes thata great extent of these sediments thus defined was after ee ee ee GEOLOGY. | 457 wards broken up into the present areas by a number of axes of eleva- tion, or else by great faults. Dana has since reviewed this subject at some length and takes a dif- ferent view. Ie remarks that Cook’s supposed area, 1,000 miles or more in length, of Mesozoic sandstones, now covering regions that are 1,000 feet or more above sea-level, must either have been marine or lacustrine, neither of which conclusions is in accordance with what we know of the rocks in question. Those of the Connecticut valley are appar- ently of fluvatile and estuary origin, and the same is probably true of other areas. The deposits of coarse and fine material, as long since pointed out by Edward Hitchcock, came from rocks bordering on the existing areas, and show that the basin could not have extended much beyond its present limits. The materials bear evidence, in the distri- bution of materials of varying coarseness, of alternate swift and slow currents. ‘The coarser sediments are most common along the borders of the present areas, where, however, they occur interruptedly. P In all these respects their distribution corresponds to that of the latter valley-deposits of the @onnecticut River. The elements of the sandstones are the result of mechanical disintegration of the crystal- line rocks of the margin, including not only quartz but undecayed feld- spar, suggesting, as remarked by Dana, a disintegration of the adjacent crystalline rocks. He notes in this connection, that “ disintegration by the rusting of the mica (biotite) is now making (to the east of New Haven), just such granitic sand as constitutes the coarse (Triassic) sand- stone of East Haven.” Dana compares the material of the Trias of the Connecticut valley to the stratified drift of post-Pliocene age in the same valley, and conceives these Mesozoic sandstones and conglomerates to have accumulated in a great estuary in a glaciated region. The various Triassic areas are parallel to old lines of uplift, which in Pennsylvania correspond to the sigmoid form of the ancient topography. This great area was distinct from that of the Connecticut valley. SERPENTINES AND RELATED ROCKS. The question of the geological age and the origin of serpentines was discussed in the report for 1882. The present writer has since published an extended memoir on serpentines, repeating with detail many of the facts there noticed, and recalling the history of the ser- pentines as found at various geological horizons in the Laurentian, the Huronian, the Montalban, and the Taconian series, as well as the later development of it in the Silurian, in the remarkable bed of serpen- tine formerly exposed among the dolomitic strata of the Onondaga salt- group at Syracuse, N. Y. He has noticed the serpentine associated with limestone in the Laurentian series at New Rochelle, N. Y., where it occurs, both mingled with limestone, forming varieties of ophicalcite like those common elsewhere in the Laurentian, and also constituting 458 - SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. great bedded masses, the whole interstratified with the gneisses of the series. He has further described the remarkable locality of serpentine on Staten Island. This, which forms a bold ridge of some miles in length, was formerly described as eruptive, and correlated with the intrusive diabase belt of the Mesozoic, which extends parallel with it, a little to the west, on the same island. While the Triassic sandstone lies along the western base of the serpentine ridge, its southern and eastern bases are covered by nearly horizontal Cretaceous beds. Britton, who redescribed and mapped this region in 1880, regarded it as a protruding mass, belong- ing to the Eozoie rocks below, a view confirmed by the present writer, according to whom its prominent position is due to the fact that it was left exposed by the subaérial decay of the inelosing gneiss rocks—which became kaolinized, while the serpentine, though softer, resists to a greater extent chemical change—and was subsequently surrounded by Mesozoic strata, from the midst of which it now rises. The similar occurrences of serpentine in New York City, at Hoboken, and again in Chester County, Pennsylvarfia, are also redescribed by the writer. The latter appear as protruding masses among gneisses and mica-schists referred to the younger or Montalban series; but it remains uncertain whether their stratigraphical place is in these or in the older Laurentian gneisses, which underlie them directly in these regions. The Laurentian of the high lands on Manhattan Island appears to be overlaid in parts. by areas of younger gneisses and mica-schists, the remaining portions of a mantle of Montalban; a circumstance which makes it doubtful whether the serpentine masses are to be referred to the one or to the other series, though they are regarded as probably Laurentian. The writer has also described in detail the mass of serpentine and euphotide which rises from the Tertiary rocks at Monteferrato, in Tus- cany, and shows that it is not intrusive, but a protruding portion of the underlying Eozoic series, identical with the greenstone group of the Alps,and probably Huronian. He maintains the aqueous origin of ser- peutine, and its formation from sea-water through the intervention of solutions of silicate of lime or soda from subterranean sources. The relations of the serpentine to the limestones, with which they are often associated, are compared to those of bedded or concretionary flint or chert. While many geologists have concluded, from the results of micro- scopic study and the frequent association of olivine and enstatite with serpentine, that the latter has been formed by the hydration of the two silicates before named, several recent Italian observers, among them Issel, Mazzuoh, and Capacci, suppose the material of serpentine to have been ejected in a hydrated form from the earth’s interior into the sea, as an aqueous magma, which consolidated into serpentine, and by de- hydration gave rise to the olivine and enstatite often found with it. This hydroplutonic hypothesis, confessedly gratuitous, is a concession GEOLOGY. 459 to the evidence in favor of the apparently aqueous deposition of ser- pentine rocks. In this connection should be mentioned the recent conclusions with regard to the great deposits of olivine rock, once described as of igneous and eruptive origin, but, from recent observations in many parts of the globe, now coming to be regarded as a stratified indigenous rock. The recent studies of Térnebohm, Brégger, and others of the olivine rocks of Norway unite in showing it to be one of the stratified rocks of that re- gion, where it is intercalated with other crystalline schists. A similar conclusion was announced by the present writer, in 1879, with regard to the bedded olivine rocks of North Carolina; while the recent studies in Greece, by Diller, show that the olivine rock of Mount Ida, in the Troad, passes into olivine-bearing talcose schists, and is associated with erys- talline limestones and with other crystalline schists. Julien has recently discussed the olivine rocks of North Carolina, of which he recognizes the sedimentary character and their interstratification with hornblendie, tal- cose, and chalcedonic rocks, which he supposes to result from the alter- ation of the olivine; but he*seeks for the origin of all this in beds of olivine sand, for which he imagines an igneous source. Varieties of olivine are known to be formed by igneous fusion, but its mode of oc- currence in these and other crystalline schists, and in crystalline lime- stones, is incompatible with such an origin, and only explicable on the theory of its aqueous origin. This question assumes a curious geological importance in connection with the hypothesis of the permanency of oceanic basins. The little reefs which make up the islands of St. Paul are situated nearly under the equator, in the mid-Atlantic, longitude 29° 2’ west, and rise ab- ruptly from 400 or 500 fathoms of water, which are found within one and two miles of them. The rocks of which they consist have just been examined by Rénard and found to consist of a common variety of olivine rock, containing, besides this mineral, portions of actinolite, and a variety of pyroxene, with grains of chromite or picotite; the whole ar- rangement of these elements resembling greatly the so-called gneissic structure which characterizes certain crystalline schists. In a word, the rock of St. Paul’s has the characters of an Eozoic erystalline schist rather than those of an eruptive rock. It has been suggested that these little islands are the remaining summit of a submerged con- tinental area, a vanished Atlantis, the mountain peaks of which were of crystalline schists, a view to which Rénard inclines, and which co-in- cides with the conclusions now deduced from the study of similar rocks in Norway, in Greece, and in North America. The significance of the dis- covery in mid-ocean of stratiform crystalline rocks like those of our continental areas is obvious. SILICIOUS DEPOSITS. Sorby’s microscopical observations in 1880 showed that in many sand- stones there has been a deposit of silica in the form of quartz upon the: 460 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. detrital grains of this mineral composing the rock, in such a manner that there is perfect optical and crystalline continuity between these and the deposited layer, each fragment serving as a nucleus and having been changed into a definite crystal. This process, by infiltration, has served to consolidate the grains in many cases into a hard quartzite. The careful microscopic studies of Irving have furnished many illustra- tions of this process in the Potsdam and Saint Peter’s sandstones in Wis- consin. ‘The crystalline nature of many sandstones was long ago pointed out by Elie de Beaumont, and later by Daubrée. Brainard, of Ohio, in 1860, called attention to the crystalline character of certain sandstones in that State, which he then conceived to be due to chemical deposition from water. Young’s later observations are to the same effect, and show that the deposited quartz is oriented with the inclosed grain. Irving notices that the tendency of silica to deposit itself upon a erys- talline nucleus has been exerted on the surface of weathered sand- stones, forming thereon a vitreous crust. A deposition of dissolved silica is also conspicuous in the Potsdam sandstone of Lake Cham- plain, as described by the writer, where certain beds are changed into hard quartzite and others are made up of grains agglutinated by a chalcedonic cement. From similar facts Hall long since concluded that the beds of Potsdam sandstone in Iowa had been in great part depos- ited from aqueous solution. It is probably in the absence of nuclei which determine the crystallization of dissolved silica that this sub- stance often separates in a hydrated uncrystalline form as hyalite, opal, or silicious sinter. THE ORIGIN OF IRON ORES. The great deposits of magnetite and specular iron are generally held to be of aqueous origin, though some have maintained them to be erup- tive. It is known that magnetite crystallizes out during the slow cool- ing from fusion of basic ferriferous silicates, and is common in many eruptive rocks. Julian has suggested that the separation of magnetite from these, and its concentration by the action of water, as seen in the washing of sands on a beach, may have given rise to the beds of mag- netic iron ore found in crystalline stratified rocks. This view has been criticised by Newberry, who maintains the accepted theory, that they have been deposited from solution. He points out that these beds are often of great thickness, and are frequently directly inclosed in erystal- line limestones, or in highly argillaceous schists, both of which rocks in- dicate a very different mode of deposition to that required for iron sands, which, as concentrated on our sea-shores, are also accompanied by layers of quartz sand. PALEOZOIC ROCKS OF NEVADA. Arnold Hague, in a preliminary report of the Geological Survey of the United States, has given us the results of a detailed study of the TS ee ee ee ee oe GEOLOGY. 461 geology of the Eureka district in Nevada, with the help of Walcott in paleontology and Iddings in lithology. This district was selected both as a typical region for the study of the geology of the Great Basin, and also as one of economic importance from its mines of precious metals. From the great plateau, here about 6,000 feet above sea-level, the Eu- reka Mountains rise from 2,500 to 4,000 feet, and form an almost de- tached mass of Paleozoic strata, with eruptive rocks of Paleozoic and more recent dates. The Paleozoic sediments of the region have been broken up by an intricate system of faults, with flexures, into several great masses or blocks, from a comparative study of which it has been possible to reconstruct the geological succession, and with the aid of paleontology to give a more complete view than has yet been obtained of the Paleozoic series of the Great Basin. The stratigraphical col- umn, from the lowest exposed beds of the Cambrian to the summit of the coal measures, has a thickness of not less than 30,000 feet, of which over 11,000 feet are limestones or dolomites, and 5,000 feet quartzite, and presents but a single break, which, marked by tnconformity, ap- pear in the midst of the second fauna. The name of Silurian is given by the author to the rocks holding the second and third faunas of Barrande, that of Cambrian being reserved for the first, but in the great conformable sequence here displayed the transitions between these three faunas are marked by such gradations that the dividing lines adopted for these divisions are confessedly arbitrary. Of the 7,700 feet assigned to the Cambrian, the lowest member, the base of ee is not displayed, is the Eeosieet Hill quartzite, 1,50) feet in thickness, to which succeeds the great mass of more or less eee limestone of 3,000 feet, known by the same local name. Between these two occur the first fossiliferous beds, known as the Olenellus shales, which have afforded a fauna closely related to that of the slates of Georgia, in Vermont, a portion of the old Hudson-River group, subse- quently called Lower Potsdam by Billings. In the great mass of the Prospect Mountain limestone and its overlying Secret Canon shales, with more or less limestone (2,000 feet), followed by the Hamburg limestone (1,200 feet), and the Hamburg shales with chert nodules and layers (500 feet), which is regarded as the summit of the Cambrian, we have at va- rious horizons an abundant fauna, which is closely related to that of the Potsdam of the Upper Mississippi. We have thus in conformable succession in this region the divisions hitherto called Lower and Upper Potsdam, the two ranging through more than 6,000 feet of strata. To the Hamburg shales succeed the Pogonip group, consisting of 2,700 feet of limestones, with some argillaceous and arenaceous beds, overlaid by the Eureka quartzite, compact, vitreous, and 500 feet thick, without fossils. The forms of the first fauna pass upwards from the Hamburg shales some distance into the Pogonip group, which higher up contains an abundant fauna, compared with that of the Chazy, with some forms 462 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. characteristic of the Trenton. It is worthy of note that in this group but a single undetermined graptolite is as yet known. At the top of the Eureka quartzite is a marked stratigraphical break, above which occurs the Lone Mountain limestone 1,800 feet thick, containing Trenton fossils in its lower part, and corals, apparently of Niagara age, toward the top. Although this mass is assumed as the summit of the Silurian, it is said to graduate imperceptibly upward into the great Nevada limestone, which, with its interbedded shales and quartzites, has a thickness of 6,000 feet and is characterized throughout by a Devonian fauna, including rep- resentatives of Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, and Chemung. The 2,000 feet of the White Pine shales, above the Nevada limestone, containing some remains of land-plants, include an invertebrate fauna indicating a passage to the Carboniferous. This has as its lowest member the Dia- mond Peak quartzite, shaly at the base, but for the most part hard and vitreous, again becoming slaty near the summit, and including, about 500 feet from the base, a thin band of fossiliferous limestone. Above this comes the Lower Carboniferous limestone (3,800 feet), separated by the Weber conglomerate (2,000 feet) from the Upper Carboniferous, the sum- mit of the Paleozoiccolumn. Both ofthese limestones are highly fossilifer- ous. The Silurian and Devonian strata of the Lone Mountain and Ne- vada limestones are seen in places in the district to rest unconformably upon the Eureka quartzite, while elsewhere these Carboniferous lime- stones repose directly upon the Pogonip limestones, the whole interme- diate series of 10,000 feet being absent. The ancient crystalline rocks of this district are very few. A single small outcrop of granitic rock appears, and porphyroid granites and quartziferous porphyries are described as breaking through and locally altering the Pogonip limestone. The later eruptive rocks, Tertiary and post-Tertiary in age, are described as hornblende-andesite, augite-an- desite, dacite, or quartziferous hornblende-andesite, and rhyolite or quartziferous trachyte, together with basalt. The dacite followed the hornblende-andesite, and the rhyolite the dacite, all of which in turn are cut by the basalts. The rocks described as basalt vary greatly in coniposition from the ordinary type of about 50 per cent. to over 60 per cent. of silica. These more silicious basalts are descirbed as desti- tute of olivine. These igneous rocks do not appear to have come from central volcanic vents, but have been erupted along great meridional lines of faulting, and are often found bordering the uplifted blocks of Paleozoic sediments. The chief localities of these rocks are along the east and west sides of a great depressed block of Carboniferous strata, which is nearly sur- rounded by outflows of Tertiary lavas. Among these are noticed great numbers of local extrusions which are wholly independent at, the sur- face, from neighboring masses. . The whole condition of things suggests forcibly that these great accumulations of Paleozoic strata are or were immediately underlaid by a floor of crystalline rocks in a state of plas- ticity. GEOLOGY. 463 THE COMSTOCK LODE. G. F. Becker has given, in the reports of the United States Geological Survey, a preliminary account of a more extended study of the geology of the Washoe district and the Comstock lode, while for a detailed account of the lithology of the region we must await the final report. It is well known that this immense quartz lode, which has yielded over $315,000,000 of bullion in the last twenty-five years, is in great part included in erupted rocks of Tertiary age. The study of these, and of their changes under - the influence of the heated waters, which have doubtless brought in the materials of the lode, is full of interest, and shows the frequent produc- tion of epidote and of chlorite by the transformation of the original mineral species. The hypothesis which has been advanced, that the high temperature of the mine-waters and their inclosing rocks is due to the chemical changes in these, connected with kaolinization of the feld- spars, is discussed and rejected. The feldspars are not kaolinized, nor do the waters contain the large amount of dissolved silica and alkalies which would be derived from such a process. Furthermore, there is no reason for believing that such a transformation of the feldspars would generate heat. Analogy would suggest that heat should be rendered latent in such a process. It is suggested that the source of the abun- dant water of the mine is to be found in the precipitation on the high crests of the Sierras, to the west, and that it reaches the lode through deep-seated channels, in which it becomes heated. The mine-waters are charged with carbonic acid, and that encountered at a depth of 3,000 feet, having a temperature of 170° F., was found to be charged with hy- drogen-sulphide. Such waters have probably been the efficient agents in filling the lode with quartz and precious metals. The well-known Steamboat Springs, at a lower level, a few miles distant, still discharge waters at a boiling heat, along a fissure parallel to the great lode, and near to the contact of ancient massive rocks and andesites. The waters of these springs, impregnated with hydrogen sulphide, still deposit silica and cinnabar on the walls of the fissures, all of which facts are recalled by Becker in this connection. It may here be mentioned that evidence collected by the present writer at the locality shows that the discharge of water and vapor at the Steamboat Springs has diminished consider- ably since the opening of the deep levels of the Comstock lode. The theory that the filling of mineral veins, in many cases at least, comes from lateral secretion, is considered by Becker, and it is shown that the unchanged diabase of the Comstock lode contains, chiefly in the augite, a noteworthy amount of both gold and silver; and, moreover, that the diabase which has been modified by water has lost one-half of this amount. Itis also shown that the total exposure of diabase is sufii- cient to account for far more bullion than has been extracted from the mines. Itisin connection with this rock that the richest ore-bodies have been found, while those in contact with the ancient diorite are compara- 464 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. tively barren; all of which facts would seem to favor the hypothesis that the supply of the precious metals in the lode has been dissolved from the diabase. The present writer, twenty-five years since, called at- tention to the dissemination of small quantities of ores of copper and of nickel in the greenstones of the Huronian series, and also to the fact that, while the quartz lodes carrying copper (and sometimes nickel ores) pass from the greenstones into the adjacent quartzites, they become bar- ren; a fact which was regarded as evidence that these veins were filled by lateral secretion. ul GEOGRAPHY. By Commander F. M. GREEN, U.S. N. While the area of unexplored regions of the earth’s surface does not seem to have been materially decreased during 1883, a large amount of knowledge has been derived from the labors of travelers, explorers, and surveyors during that time. Among the problems affecting geography in general the one to which the most attention has been ion during the last year is that of a common prime meridian or the selection of a point from which all nations shall agree to reckon longitude. Strange as it may appear, sentimental considerations seem to have had a large share in forming the opinions expressed on this subject, and no plan appears to have met with such general approval as that of drawing the prime meridian through some point in the ocean away from the capital of any country, so that no national susceptibilities need be offended. It would seem that a very few words should serve to dispel such an idea. As longitudes are now measured, the starting point must be either a portable or permanent observatory, connected with a telegraphic system of cables and shore lines, in order that the local times of various places may be telegraph- ically compared. These conditions would be impossible with a prime meridian in the middle of the Pacific or the Atlantic Ocean, while they are completely fulfilled at Greenwich, where by the tacit or expressed consent of nearly all nations the prime meridian is now placed. At the seventh general conference of the International Geodetic Association, held at Rome, October 23, 1883, it was formally resolved to propose to the Governments interested to select for the initial meridian that of Greenwich, defmed by a point midway between the two pillars of the transit circle of the Royal Observatory. An international convention, called. at the instance of the United States Government, will meet ab Washington in the autumn df 1884 to endeavor to agree upon this or some other prime meridian. Pendulum observations of the force of gravity as a factor in the in- vestigations of the figure of the earth have been continued by officers of the United States Coast Survey. In the United States the princi- pal stations at which pendulums have been oscillated are Albany, Ho- boken, Baltimore, Washington, Saint Augustine, and San Francisco. The fanee invariable ped artuide previously hore at Greenwich, Kew, H. Mis. 69———30 465 466 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. London, and Washington having been left.in charge of the Coast Sur- vey, advantage was taken of the presence of observers skilled in pen- dulum work with the expeditions for the observation of the transit of Venus and of the total solar eclipse of May 6, 1883, to obtain results for gravity at widely separated stations. Observations were accord- ingly made at Auckland, New Zealand; Sydney, New South Wales; Singapore, Tokio, Garoline Island, Honolulu, (at a station in Maui occnu- pied by De Freycinet in 1819,) and at San Francisco. As indicating the widely spread interest in geographical study, ref- erence may be made to a list of geographical societies and geographical magazines recently published in the ninth volume of the Geographi- scher Jahrbuch, the former numbering seventy-nine and the latter one hundred and nineteen. HYDROGRAPHY. The only original survey of foreign coasts prosecuted under the di- rection of the United States Hydrographic Office during the year has been the continuation of the survey of the Pacific coast of Central America by the officers of the United States steamer Ranger. Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, in the United States Fish Com- mission steamer Albatross, has performed a most valuable work in run- ning lines of soundings during the last winter in the Atlantic Ocean and Caribbean Sea, and disproving the existence of alleged shoals and dangers which have for years disfigured the charts. The details of the work will properly be included in the summary for 1884. The United States Coast Survey have continued the deep-sea explo- rations which have been prosecuted for several years past in the west- ern part of the North Atlantic Ocean. During the winter of 1882-83 a systematic examination of the ocean bed between Bermuda and the Bahamas was made, extending to the eastward as far as St. Thomas. Numerous deep-sea soundings and dredgings were made, with observa- tions of surface, serial, and bottom temperature. One most noteworthy result of this cruise, which was performed by the steamer Blake, com- manded by Lieut. Commander W. H. Brownson, U. 8S. N., was the finding of the great depth of 4,561 fathoms, or 5.2 statute miles, nearly, about 75 miles to the northward of Porto Rico. ‘Bhe bottom temperature was found to be 364° F., and the specimen-cup brought up brown ooze. This is believed to be the greatest depth from which bottom has been brought up. The sounding was made with one of Commander Sigsbee’s piano-wire sounding machines. The British Admiralty have employed nine vessels, with fifty-seven officers and four hundred and sixty-eight men, in surveying the shores of the United Kingdom, the China Sea, Korea, Borneo, islands in the Western Pacific Ocean, Australia, Newfoundland, the Bahama Islands, the Rio de la Plata, and the Straits of Magellan. A careful examina- tion of the Straits of Sunda was also made to ascertain and lay down the chauges caused by the Krakatoa volcanic eruption. Pie PhS a ee Se eee ee GEOGRAPHY. 467 In June an expedition, organized by the French ministry of marine and under the superintendence of A. Milne-Edwards, sailed from Roche- fort on the French government steamer Talisman for the exploration of that portion of the Atlantic Ocean off the western coast of Africa in the vicinity of the Cape de Verde, Canary, and Azores islands and the Sargasso Sea. z Very numerous soundings and dredgings were made, the latter result- ing in the finding of very many new and interesting species. The greatest depth found seems to have beeen 3,427 fathoms, between the Cape de Verde islands and the Azores, about the 25th parallel of latitude. As the depths found indicate a contour of the ocean bottom largely differ- ing from that shown in a recent German bathymetrical chart, it is evident that the locality needs further examination. The bed of the Sargasso Sea was found to consist of a thick layer of fine volcanic mud, with fragments of pumice and rock. A vast voicanic chain appears to stretch parallel with the African shore, the Cape de Verde islands, the Canary group, Madeira, and the Azores being the only parts of it not submerged. About the Ist of September the Talisman returned to Rochefort. The physical survey of the Mediterranean Sea under the direction of the Italian Government, has been continued by Captain Magnaghi, of the Italian navy, inthe Government steamer Washington. This under- taking has now been in progress for three years, under the patronage of the Accademia dei Lincei. The official report of the Norwegian expedition for the exploration of the North Atlantic, in 1876~7 7~78, has been published. Volumes Iv and V contain a historical account of the expedition, with the geographical, astronomical, magnetic, and natural history observations. The general objects of the expedition were the determination of the contour of the bottom by sounding, the investigation of the rate and direction of cur- rents, and of the physical condition and chemical constituents of sea- water, as well as zoological, botanical, meteorological, and magnetic work. The region examined lies, generally speaking, between the west coast of Norway and a line drawn from Iceland to Spitzbergen. The greatest sea depth found was rather more than 2,000 fathoms, between Jan Mayen and Spitzbergen. Aside from the deep-sea work, the most interesting geographical results of this excellently managed expedition are derived from Dr. Mohn’s examination of the island of Jan Mayen, an extinct volcano 6,400 feet high, and from his remarks on Bear Island and Spitzbergen. The volumes of this report are most liberally cir- culated by the Norwegian Government. The preliminary report of the Superintendent of the United States Coast Survey states that the work of connecting points in the various States of the Union by triangulation has been carried on in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Virginia, Maryland, District of Columbia, West Virginia, Ohio, Ken- 468 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. tucky, Tennessee, Indiana, Illinois, Wisconsin, Nebraska, Arkansas, Mis- souri, Colorado, and Nevada. A special work of triangulation was done in connecting the survey of the Atlantic coast with that of the great Lakes. In addition the work of the Coast Survey proper has been industriously carried on by surveys for mapping the exact coast line and determining the depth of water in the various sounds, bays, and harbors. The line of transcontinental levels has been pushed from Mitehell, Ind., to Kansas City, Mo. Very many astronomical deter- minations of latitude and longitude have also been completed, and tidal observations have been carried on in numerous places along the coast. For the details of the invaluable labors of this admirably con- ducted branch of the public service, reference should be made to the annual detailed report. The work of the Northern Transcontinentai Survey, under the noe tion of Prof. R. Pumpelly, has unfortunately been suspended, owing to the necessity of a retrenchment of expenses by the Northern Pacific Railroad Company. During the year 1883 an approximate topograph- ical survey was made of the country, roughly corresponding to the ter- ritory lying between the 46th and 48th paraliels of latitude, and the 110th and 112th meridians, and also of the Flathead Basin in Western Montana, as well as the country lying between the Snake River and the southern boundary of Washington Territory, while in the central part of Washington Territory a survey has been made of nearly all the country ‘south of the 48th parallel and between the Cascades and the Columbia, in all amounting to about 70,000 square miles. | Besides this geograph- ical work, careful geological sections were made of the Belt and Main ranges in Montana, and much work was done on the geology of the Cretaceous. The plans for the geographical work of the United States Geological Survey for the season of 1883 contemplated the prosecution of work in nearly all the areas under survey during the previous year, viz, in Northern California, in Southern Montana, Northeastern Arizona and Western New Mexico, and in the region of the Southern Appalachians. Tn addition to these areas, work was commenced in the State of Massa- chusetts; a detailed survey of the Yellowstone Park, and of the Elk Mountains of Colorado was commenced; and, in connection with the geological investigations of the ancient lake basins of Western Nevada, considerable scattered topographic work was done. The work in Northern California was, as during the previous year, in charge of Mr. Gilbert Thompson. His division, consisting of two par- ties, took the field early in July, and was continuously occupied until late in October. The work was greatly delayed by smoke and haze which prevailed during the greater part of the season, owing to im- mense fires in the Cascade Mountains, so that the output of the season, amounting to about 4,000 square miles, was not as great as it would have been under more favorable circumstances. The area surveyed GEOGRAPHY. 469 comprises Mount Shasta and its foothills, and a considerable portion of the tangled mass of the Coast Range lying west of that peak. In the progress of his work Mr. Thompson succeeded in taking mules to the top of Mount Shasta, a feat never before accomplished. The work of the Wingate division lay, mainly, in Northeastern Arizona, the balance being in Western New Mexico. The country, as is well known, consists almost entirely of plateaus, presenting but little relief, but deeply scored by cafious and almost devoid of water, making traveling very difficult. This division, which, under the charge of Prof, A. H. Thompson, was composed of one triangulation party and three topographic parties, was very successful. The season’s work added in the neighborhood of 22,000 square miles to the mapped area of the country. This, with the work of the previous year. completed three atlas sheets, viz, the regions lying between longitudes 107° and 109° and latitudes 35° and 36°; between longitudes 109° and 111° and lat- itudes 35° and 36°; and between longitudes 109° and 111° and lat- itudes 36° and 37°. In the progress of his work Mr. H. M. Wilson, in charge of one of the topographic parties, succeeded in penetrating into the hitherto un- known country in the neighborhood of the junction of the San Juan and the Colorado, and ascended Navajo Mountain, a peak rising at the junction of these two streams, and hitherto unvisited. This region is inhabited by a band of renegade Indians, who have heretofore made it extremely dangerous for white men to approach. Recently, however, the prevalence of a contagious disease among them, which has been attributed by them to their hostility to white men, has made them much more friendly, and they gave ro trouble to this surveying party. At the close of the season’s work Professor Thompson determined the position of Fort Wingate by astronomical observations. The field work of this division, as well as that of the California division, has been upon a scale of 2 miles to an inch. In connection with the study of the mining region of the Elk Mount- ains or “Gunnison country” a detailed survey, upon a scale of 2 inches to a mile, was made of the area drained by the upper waters of Slate River and Ohio and Anthracite Creeks, under the direction of Mr. Anton Karl. After completing about 1,000 square miles of this area, Mr. Karl was called away by the pressure of other duties, and work was suspended for the season. It was decided to make a resur- vey upon a much more detailed scale than ever before attempted of the area of the Yellowstone Park. This work was assigned to Mr. J. H. Renshawe, who was, during the previous year, in charge of the work in Southern Montana. Commencing work in the northwestern part of the Park, he surveyed, on a scale of 2 inches to a mile, or about sotoo) an area of some 1,500 square miles, mainly with the plane table. Near the close of the season, after having been driven from the high country of the Park by the snows, he remeasured the Bozeman base, 470 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. which was laid out and measured originally by one of the parties of Licutenant Wheeler’s Geographical Surveys West of the 100th Me- ridian. In addition to a number of small sketch-maps upon a large scale in different parts of the basin region of Western Nevada, a considerable area, amounting to 1,500 square miles, was surveyed, upon a scale of 1 mile to an inch, in the high Sierra of Eastern California. This re- gion is very interesting to the geologist on account of the glacial phe- nomena, both actual and recent, there exhibited. Besides containing the remains of enormous glaciers, there still remain in this area a num- ber of small glaciers, which cover areas of from a fraction of a square mile to a number of square miles each. In the Southern Appalachian country work was prosecuted vigor- ously, no fewer than five topographic parties and two parties for trian- gulation being in the field. The area surveyed in this section during the season amounted to fully 22,000 square miles. It comprises the western part of Maryland with the northern portion of West Virginia, the southern portion of the latter State lying between the Kanawha and Big Sandy Rivers, the southwestern corner of Virginia, the northern half of the valley of East Tennessee, and nearly all the mountain region of North Carolina. Maps of this region have been prepared upon a scale of 2 miles to an inch in approximate contours 200 feet apart verti- cally. Work in this part of the country is necessarily slow, compared with that in the West, owing to the larger »roportion of bad weather and to the fact that the country is densely covered with forests, neces- sitating the employment of topographic methods which are slower and more expensive than those which can be used in the West. The work in the State of Massachusetts was placed in charge of Mr. H. T. Walling, and was commenced in Berkshire County, in the west- ern part of the State. Nearly all of the area of this county, with small adjacent portions of New York and Connecticut, was surveyed, amount- ing to 1,500 eure miles. A map of this region has been prepared upon a Gale of zoto5 in contours having a vertical interval of 50 feet. In the more level portions of the State the contours have necessarily smaller int:rvals. The result of this season’s work is to add between 50,000 and 55,000 square miles to the maps of this country. Lieutenant Schwatka, of the United States Army, the celebrated Arctic explorer, has made a journey from the Pacific coast to the head- waters of the Yukon River and down that river toits mouth. Lieuten- ant Schwatka states, in a commundcation to Science, that the expedi- tion arose from a desire of the commander of the military Department of the Columbia to gain some military knowledge of the Indian tribes in that district, and of the territory inhabited by them. The part of the route from the coast to the Yukon River was almost unexplored, the maps and books relating to it being grossly incorrect GEOGRAPHY. 471 and disagreeing in nearly every particular. Of the three or four passes known to exist over the mountain ranges which separate the headwaters of the Yukon from the Pacific coast, the best one is the Chilcoot trail, and was the one used by Lieutenant Schwatka’s party, which consisted of two officers and five other white men and a number of Indians, vary- ing from two to more than sixty. In order to monopolize the traffic with the Indians of the interior, the Chilcoot Indians, for whom this trail was named, formerly used every endeavor to prevent other tribes from using it, but lately Indians of several tribes have used it. Leaving Chilcat Inlet on the Alaskan coast, in latitude 59°, on June 7, 1883, Lieutenant Schwatka’s party proceeded by way of Dayay Inlet and the Dayay River flowing into it to the head of canoe navigation, 10 miles above the mouth of the Dayay River. From this point a journey of 26 miles was made over Perrier Pass through the glacier-clad mountain ranges. The pass was traversed at an altitude of 4,100 feet, and on June 12 Lake Lindemann was reached just below the extreme headwaters of the Yukon River. On Lake Lindemann, in about latitude 59° 50’, the voyagers embarked on a raft, but had to make a portage round the rapids and cascades at the northern end of the lake, where they again embarked, passing through a chain of lakes, among which were two, named by Lieutenant Schwatka Lakes Bennett and Marsh, for J. G. Bennett, esq., and Pro- fessor Marsh, of Yale College. Glaciers were constantly seen along the mountain sides. On the Ist of July, just north of Lake Marsh, the great rapids were reached. They were found to be nearly 5 miles long, the first part being through acafion lined with basaltic rocks which contract the river to about one-tenth of its width. After leaving the cafion there are about 4 miles of rapids 300 to 400 yards wide, broken by rocky bars and dams of timber, and ending in a cascade. On the 5th of July the last of the chain of lakes was reached. Lieu- tenant Schwatka thinks that these lakes are all gradually being filled up with sediment deposited by the passing water, and found traces of many such lakes which have been filled up in the same way. At short distances to the northward of the chain of lakes the Yukon receives three important affluents from the east, called by Lieutenant Schwatka the Newberry, D’Abbadie, and Daly Rivers, and one from the west ~named the Nordenskiold. On the 12th of July, Miles Caiion and rapids were reached. This Lieutenant Schwatka considers the head of navi- gation for powerful and light-draught river steamboats, 1,866 miles from the Aphoon mouth of the Yukon. From here to old Fort Selkirk, of the Hudson’s Bay Company, the journey was apparently uneventful. Lieutenant Schwatka settles definitely the heretofore doubtful point whether the Pelly or the Lewis River of the old traders should be con- sidered the Yukon proper as being the larger confluent. He found the Lewis by far the larger in at least the proportions of five to three. 472 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Lieutenant Schwatka states the length of the parts of his journey as follows: Miles PiromOhileat, to vuake Gime Ommanny woes eee ee estate losis eerie aie ert ee my) Gakewandemann to: PortiSelkirks] ce sce-ner sere teen ee eee cree oe eee Acaae Hakeshindemann to Nuklakayets 22-22. ecto. e tance Reta eee ee eeetaee 1 308s2 Motallencthof YuakonGhivers.cosceccmssn nets em eee meeeme see ele eettont 2,043.5 The map prepared by Lieutenant Schwatka’s assistant will be of great service in correcting the very erroneous maps now in existence. A new volcanic island has appeared in the Aleutian Archipelago very near the position of Bogosloff Island, which rose in the same way in May, 179. The old island seems to have disappeared, the new one oe- cupying a position about half a mile north-northwest of the old one. This island is said to be about 1,000 feet high, and is in a state of erup- tion still. It will be closely examined and reported upon during the present year. SOUTH AMERICA. In South American travel the subject of most interest has been the search for the remains of the ill-fated expedition, under Dr. Jules Orevaux, for the exploration of the Pilecomayo River. At a meeting of the French Geographical Society convened for the purpose, M. Emile- Arthur Thouar gave an account of his journey to inquire into the causes of the massacre of M. Crevaux and his party, and to rescue the survivors who were supposed to be prisoners in the hands of the Tobas Indians. Starting from Tacna in Peru in May, 1883, he hastily traversed the plateau between La Paz and Oruro, and descending the Pilcomayo from its source reached the place where the disaster took place in Sep- tember, 1883. One survivor, a stupid boy, was found; but no relics could be recovered except a broken barometer, a letter of Crevaux, and a sketch map of the Pileomayo. It was found that the attack by the Indians was made in revenge for some of their tribe having been killed by some white men from the garrison of Caiga, the Indians making no distinction between their assailants and the party of M. Crevaux. Two of the party escaped into the woods, but after four or five months of exposure and suffering they died. M. Thouar gave some interesting details of the manners and customs of the Tobas Indians, showing that they were especially savage. His account of the journey down the Pileomayo and across the Gran Chaco indicates that the Pilcomayo is navigable for nearly all its course, but the lower part of the river is obstructed by morasses. The gold medal of the French Geographical Society was awarded M. Thouar for his explorations, which it is thought may be the means of affording a much- needed outlet by way of the Pilcomayo and Paraguay Rivers for some of the products of Bolivia. In the Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society for June, 1883, is given a detailed account of the journey down the Beni River, by Dr. GEOGR4 PHY. 473 E. R. Heath, reference to which is made in last year’s summary. To this most valuable account is added a map of the journey, by Dr. Heath, who was acting as medical officer of the party engaged in investigating the capacities of the country under the direction of Mr. G. E. Church, who has made a comprehensive report to the United States Department of State on the general condtion of Ecuador, including a detailed de- scription of its geography, with especial reference to its river systems and its productive resources (Senate Ex. Doc. No. 69, Forty-seventh Congress). Mr. Church states that no census has ever been accurately taken, but he estimates the population at about one million, of which one-tenth are of the white race, three-tenths of mixed whites, Indians, and negroes, and six-tenths pure-blooded Indians. A very graphic ac- count is given of the topography and river systems. Mr. Church finds very little hope for the development of the country, in spite of its fine climate and great productiveness, on account of the indolent and dis- honest character of the people generally and the oppressive and anarch- ical government. In the Journal of the Royal Geographical Society for May, 1883, Mr. Robert Blake White gives an account of the physical features of those portions of the central provinces of Colombia of which no detailed account exists. Great interest has been manifested during the last few years in those countries, which it is supposed would be benefited by the completion of the Panama Canal, and their possible development. Of these countries none would be more favorably affected than Colombia, and the account of its topography and resources, accompanied as it is by a map corrected from Mr. White’s own surveys, is of great interest, especially when it is remembered that the last European traveler in this region whose works have been at all read was Alexander von Humboldt, who only passed through the country from southeast to northwest, leav- ing on one side the large district described by Mr.White. .Dr. Paul Giissfeldt has been, during the past vear, making interesting trigonometrical surveys in the Andes, and has attempted to ascend Mount Aconcagua in the Chilian Cordillera (22,750 feet high), but failed, owing to the intense cold. The published account of the journeys of Lieutenant Bove, of the Italian navy, in and about Southern Patagonia, Tierra del Fuego, and the Falkland Islands, does not materially add to our knowledge of the physical features of those regions. Lieutenant Bove now proposes a new expedition in order to investi- gate the present physical and economic condition of the Argentine Republic, with a view to establishing closer commercial relations be- tween that country and Italy. Under the command of Lieut. Commander C. H. Davis,U. 8. N.,a party of United States naval officers have been engaged in determining tele- graphically differences of longitude on the west coast of South America. The cables recently laid between Panama and Valparaiso were utilized 474 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. for this purpose, and the positions of Callao, Lima, Payta, Arica, and Valparaiso were carefully fixed, the latitude of each station being de- termined by the zenith telescope. Lieutenant-Commander Davis con- nected his chain of longitudes at the northern end with the station at Panama telegraphically determined in 1874 by Lieutenant-Commander Green, U. 8. N., and at the southern end with the observatory at Cor- doba, fixed in the same manner by Dr. B. A. Gould. This great work, which has been admirably executed, completes an enormous polygon or telegraphic chain of longitudes from Greenwich by way of Washington, Havana, Panama, Valparaiso, Cordoba, Buenos Ayres, Rio de Janeiro, Madeira, and Lisbon, back to Greenwich. EUROPE. A comprehensive idea of the work in progress by the Government surveys of the different countries in Europe is derived from the reports of the meetings of the International Geodetic Association. The pro- ceedings at the annual meeting at The Hague in September, 1883, have | recently been published, and are summarized by Mr. C. A. Schott in Science for November 16, 1883. The countries represented and from which reports of progress were received were Baden, Bavaria, Denmark, France, Hesse, Holland, Italy, Austria, Portugal, Prussia, Roumania, Russia, Saxony, Switzerland, Spain, Wurtemberg, Belgium, and Norway. Among the many interesting matters referred to in the reports of prog- ress the most striking is the demonstration that the average level of the Mediterranean is lower than the Atlantic by about two feet and one inch (0.64 meter). This conclusion had been stated by M. Bourdalou, in 1864, in his work Nivellements générale de la France, but was not gen- erally credited. In levelling across from the Atlantic to the Mediterranean the follow- ing differences in average level have been found: Meter. Between, Santander and: Alicamte 3... 22)22) 3/02 oe eins ois ieiseiey= ee ee eee ea ONObe Swinemunde and Marseilles by way of Switzerland .............-....-.---. 0.664 Swinemunde to Marseilles by way of Amsterdam ....-.--...-.-..-..-.-.--- 0.658 Amsterdam and Trieste 2 oe sseee ease cscs sealecises cele eaccee ees seam UO OU ASTA. A very serious change has been effected in the eastern part of the island of Java and the neighboring islands by the volcanic upheaval of Atigust, 1883. The small uninhabited island of Krakatoa, lying about the middle of the straits of Sunda, an important commercial passage between the islands of Java and Sumatra, was, at the time of the first obtainable accounts of it (A. D. 1681), in a state of erup- tion. The present eruption commenced on the 21st of May and con- tinued with great activity for eight or nine weeks, until the evening of August 26 and the morning of August 27, when tremendous explosions followed in rapid succession, tearing away and throwing into the sea a GEOGRAPHY. 475 large portion of Krakatoa island, causing immense waves, which, after retreating, rolled in on both sides of the straits, destroying towns and villages and drowning at least 100,000 people. Whole districts were covered with pumice and ashes, and the island of Krakatoa was reduced to a fraction of its original size—water a thousand feet deep being found where the greatest activity of the voleano was displayed. The chan- nels of navigation were very much changed, and surveys have been car- ried on since the outburst to lay down the changed depths in the differ- ent passages. At the time of the great explosion two enormous waves were set in motion, and the same afternoon were registered on the tide gauges at Mauritius, the Seychelles in South Africa, and at some of the Pacific islands, and there is evidence that, proceeding onward, these waves crossed each other on the antipodes of Krakatoa, thus returning to the place of their origin no less than four times before the equilibrinm of the sea was restored. Atmospheric waves were also sent round the globe by this terrific disturbance at very nearly the same velocity as that of sound, while such masses of dust and ashes were driven into the upper regions of the air as to cause unusually lurid skies and other remarkable atmospheric phenomena for some months all over the world. A committee of the Royal Society has been appointed to fully investi- gate all the physical phenomena connected with the subject, and their report will present an accurate account and examination of the effects of voleanic eruptions. In the last report of the operations of the great Trigonometrical Sur- vey of India, General J. T. Walker, R. E., the superintendent, states that the principal triangulation of all India on the lines originally marked out by Colonel Everest has now been completed. General Walker gives a brief review of the operations from 15800 to the present day. The details of the topographical surveys have been diligently carried on, and many maps have been published during the past year, but the chief geographical interest attaches to the trans-Himalayan explorations by native travelers. The regions explored as far as is made known were the water-shed of the Upper Oxus, and its chief trib- utaries, a large area in Great Tibet explored by a traveler known as A——K—, who has recently returned to Calcutta after an absence of four years, and who has been able to settle a vexed question as to the affluents of the Irawadi and the Brahmapootra. In addition to the re- ports of these and other native officers, the narratives of English officers included in this report contain a very large amount of information, es- pecially regarding little known portions of British Burmah. In an address to the Geographical Section of the British Association at Southport, in September, 1883, Lieutenant-Colonel Godwin-Austen.gave a description of the general structure of the mountain ranges popularly known as the Himalayas, especially dwelling on the indications of gla- cial action as compared with similar markings in the Alps. Colonel Godwin-Austen indorsed Sir H. Strachey’s conception of the general 476 ‘ SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. structure as the soundest and most scientific of those propounded, de- scribing it as made up of a series of parallel ranges running in an oblique line to the general direction of the whole mass, the great peaks being on terminal butt-ends of the successive parallel ranges, the water-shed following the lowest parts of the ridges, and the drainage crossing the highest in deep gorges directly transverse to the main lines of elevation. By order of the Russian governor of Turkistan an expedition was fitted out at Tashkend in the early part of 1883 for the thorough explo- rasion of the Pamir, or great central table land of Asia, its members being Captain Putiata, of the staff of the Russian army, Mr. Ivanoff, geologist, and M. Bendersky, topographer. By their labors the eastern half of the Pamir has been traversed in every direction, and on its southern border a connection has been made with the surveys and route maps of English travelers by careful astronomical observations at Tash-Kurgan and other points. Among the valuable results of this expedition are a five-verst nap of the whole region, numerous measurements of heights and astronomical determinations of latitude and longitude, and large geological collections throwing light on the formation of the region. Colonel Prjevalsky, the indefatigable Russian explorer, has com- menced another journey through Tibet. Starting from Kiachta, near the southern end of Lake Baikal, in Siberia, he crossed the Gobi desert late in 1883, and on January 20, 1884, was at Alashan on his way to Koku-nor. From here Colonel Prjevalsky will attempt the exploration of Eastern Tibet during the present year, then following up the Brah- mapootra to Ladak and Hast, and thence by way of Lob-hor and Aksu proceeding to Turkistan. This great expedition, fitted out at the ex- pense of the Russian Government, will thus attempt to bring within the knowledge of the civilized world such portions of Tibet as at present are only known from the desultory travels of a few pundits and mis- sionaries. A Russian Government expedition having been engaged in exploring the former channel of the river Oxus, or Amu-Daria, has reported, after running a line of levels between the Caspian Sea and Khiva, that the only way of restoring the river to its old course would be by the con- struction of an artificial canal 125 miles long. Under these circumstances there seems no probability of the task being attempted. A large amount of work is in progress by Russian geographers and surveyors; and at an exhibition in April, 1883, of geographical and as- tronomical works at St. Petersburg, many valuable maps of Russian ter. ritory in Asia were shown for the first time. A general description ot these is contributed by M. Venukoff to the Bulletin of the French Geo- graphical Society. The military operations undertaken by the French in Cochin China will have the effect of adding much to our knowledge of the Indo-Chi- nese peninsula, which, indeed, has been the ground of French explora- tion from a very early day. The Société Académique Indo-Chinoise have GEOGRAPHY. ATT recently published an account of all the scientific expeditions sent to this country by the French Government, commencing in 1680, and num- bering seventy-seven up to 1881. These are in addition to the military expeditions and Government surveys. In spite of all this research there are large tracts of country and very many water-courses about which little or nothing is known. Mr. Carl Bock, in a paper in the Geographische Mittheilungen for May, 1883, describes a journey undertaken by him from Bankok toward the Chinese frontier by way of the Menam River to Zimme and Kiangtsen on the borders of the Shan states. This account is chiefly important as indorsing and verifying Mr. Colquhoun’s conclusions as to the prac- ticability of a railroad from the sea to the southwestern frontier of China: Mr. Bock was prevented from traveling through the Shan states by native hostility. The general census of Japan, taken on January 1, 1883, gives 36,700,110 as the population of the country, made up of 18,598,998 males and 18,101,112 females. The population of the larger towns is given as fol- lows: Osaka, 1,772,333; Hiogo, 1,418,521; Nagasaki, 1,204,629; Tokio, 987,887; Kioto, 835,215. These figures do not represent the population of the towns named, but of the districts known as fu or ken bearing these names. In the Japan Gazette have appeared during the last year a series of valuable letters relating to the island of Yezo, its geography, geology, fauna and flora, its mineral productions and ethnology, as well as the records of numerous journeys over the island. The author is Captain Blakiston, who has been for many years a resident at Hakodate, and who has thus amassed an enormous quantity of valuable material. An admirable method of teaching physical geography has been de- vised and put in practice by the teachers at the school for the sons of Japanese nobles, at Tokio. A physical map of the country has been constructed between 300 and 400 feet long of turf and stone, showing every inlet, river.and mountain. The meridians and parallels are indi- cated by telegraph wire, and the positions of cities and towns‘are shown by tablets. In the hopes of securing a well-directed scientific exploration of the interior of New Guinea the British Association at their annual meeting at Southport appointed a committee to confer with the council of the Royal Geographical Society as to the best means of attaining that object. The result of their deliberations has been to recommend an expedition now preparing by Mr. Wilfred Powell, whose plan is to ascend the Am- bernoli River, which empties near Point d’Urville on the north coast, and when the river can be no farther ascended to cross the country to- ward the Finisterre Mountains, then, after renewing his provisions, to attempt to cross the island from Astrolabe bay to Port Moresby. The Melbourne Argus sent an expedition in July, 1883, under Captain Armit, with the intention of crossing the southeastern end of the island from 478 SOIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1833. Port Moresby to Dyke Acland bay, a distance of 100 miles in a north- east direction; but after the death of Professor Denton, the naturalist of the expedition, from fever, the party returned without having crossed the island, only having penetrated to a distance of 40 miles from the coast without making any discoveries of importance. Shortly after the return of this expedition, another one, dispatched by another newspaper concern, the Melbourne Age, under the command of Mr. G. E. Morrison, started from Port Moresby with a similar object, viz, to cross the island to the northeastern coast, but near the foot of the Central range the party was attacked by natives, and, Mr. Morrison being severely wounded, a hurried retreat was made to Port Moresby. Mr. Chalmers, an English missionary residing in Southeastern New Guinea, has been examining a part of the delta of the Fly River, and finds it more exten- sive than had been supposed. He determined the fact of the cannibal- ism of the natives as concerns their enemies, but found them generous and hospitable. The interest excited in the exploration of this practi- cally unknown island is so great that the labors of the present year will probably increase materially our knowledge regarding it, but its sickly climate and savage inhabitants make the task of exploration very diffi- cult. AFRICA. Many explorers and travelers for geographical and commercial ob- jects have, as for several years past, been engaged in journeys in Cen- tral Africa, but no specially striking discovery has been made, and the details of the numerous journeys are generally uninteresting and tedious, although, taking the aggregate of results, a large amount of detail has been added to the maps of Africa. English missionaries and consular officers have been prominent in furnishing valuable material of this kind. The expedition in charge of Mr. Joseph Thompson, and fitted out by the Royal Geographical Society, left England in December, 1882, and proceeded to Zanzibar; then proceeding inland from Mombasa, a port about 140 miles to the northward of Zanzibar, reached Taveta, at the the foot of Mount Kilimanjaro, on the 31st of March. On attempting to penetrate farther inland he met with determined hostility on the part of the Masai tribe, and was forced to return to Taveta. Starting again in July with a larger force, he has (March, 1884) been unheard of for several months. Among the numerous other travelers who have been exploring va- rious parts of Central Africa during the past year are M. Revoil, who has been traveling in the Somali country; M. Giraud, who has under- taken to cross Africa from Zanzibar by way of Lake Bangweolo and the Congo, but who was turned back to Karema by the hostility of the natives; and Mr. O’Neill, Her Britannic Majesty’s consulat Mozambique, who has made a journey to Lake Shirwa and back to the coast. Mr. R. Flegel has, under the auspices of the German African Society, been GEOGRAPHY 479 engaged in examining the course of the Binue River, an affluent or the Lower Niger, and has discovered its source, and also that of the Logué River, which discharges into Lake Chad. Dr. Fischer, whose quarrels with the natives while attempting to reach Lake Bahringo from the east coast through the Masai country, were the cause of Mr. J. Thomp- son’s delays, has been obliged to return without accomplishing his object. No region of Central Africa has been more thoroughly and system- atically explored of late years than the banks and surroundings of the Congo River Ina paper read before the Royal Geographical Society, and published in the Proceedings of that society for December, 1883, Mr. H. H. Johnston gives a very graphie account of that great river from its mouth-to Bolobo, with a description of the physical aspect of the surrounding country. Another good description was given in an address in March last before the meeting of the German Geographical Society at Frankfort, by Herr Pechuel Loesche, who served as second in command with Mr. H. M. Stanley at Stanley Pool. ARCTIC REGIONS. The expeditions sent to occupy stations in the far north for the pur- pose of making meteorological observations under an international ar- rangement have all’ returned safely, with the exception of the party commanded by Lieut. A. W. Greely, U. 8S. A., which has occupied a station at Lady Franklin Bay since the spring of 1881. Two ineffec- tual attempts have been made to reach the party by relief ships, one ship being turned back in 1882 by heavy ice, and another, the Proteus, being sunk by the ice in 1883. An expedition, consisting of three ships, under command of Commander Schley, U.S. N., is now fitting out, and n0 effort or expense is being spared to make a successful attempt to bring away the survivors of the party, if any. The Austrian party have returned from Jan Mayen, and the Swedish party from Spitzbergen, without casualty or illness. The Dutch expe- dition lost their ship, which was nipped by the ice in Waigatz Strait, but carried on all their observations successfully except those relating to magnetism, although they did not reach their intended station at Port Dickson. The other parties returned safely to their respective countries. Under the auspices of the Danish Geographical Society the Dijmphna, commanded by Lieutenant Hovgaard, of the Danish navy, was dis- patched from Denmark in the summer of 1882. Lieutenant Hovgaard intended to proceed first to the mouth of the Yenesei, then to Cape Chelyuskin, and then to penetrate northward aloug the east coast of Franz Josef Land. Leaving Vard6, in Norway, on August 3, 1882, the Dijmphna soon found the way blocked by heavy ice, and it took all of August to reach the Jugor Strait, between Waigatz Island and the mainland of Siberia. A short distance to the eastward, on September 480 . SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. 20, the Varna was met, beset in the ice, bound for Dickson Haven, with the Dutch meteorological party on board, and in two days more both vessels were frozen in. During October, November, and December both vessels drifted about with the ice, reaching nearly 71° north lati- tude. The Varna became uninhabitable, and all hands were taken on board the Dijmphna. No event of importance happened except the rapid erosion and disappearance of the ice during June and July, and on July 24 the Varna sunk, the Dijmphna drifting toward Karagate and being set free from ice on August 2. The crank-shaft breaking, the ship returned under sail to Vard6, arriving October 10. The great- est cold experienced seems to have been about February 1, when it reached 46°.8 C. During the time the ship was drifting in the ice soundings were constantly taken, so that valuable materials for correct- ing the charts were secured. Captain Sorenson, of the Norwegian sioop William, reports having seen high land northeast of the northern promont:ry of Spitzbergen and about 100 miles from Rep Island. Dr. Karl Pettersen, of the Tromsd Museum, points out that this land is probably the same as that seen by Captain Kjeldsen in 1876, and called by him Hvide-Oe, or White Island. A most valuable treatise on the Properties of Water and Ice, by Dr. Otto Pettersen, forms a volume of the publications of the Vega Expe- dition. The physical and chemical properties of both water and ice are discussed at length, and the nature of various kinds of ice are ex- plained very clearly. In Nature, for August 30, 1883, Dr. Karl Pettersen proposes a new system of Arctic research. On the hypothesis that the condition of the ice in the Arctic basin is not always the same, but undergoes periodical changes, Dr. Pettersen proposes that, selecting the most proper locali- ties, an arrangement should be made between the various European nations to equip a certain number of expeditions which should be sent to the same locality every summer for a period of ten or eleven years. Dr. Pettersen thinks that during certain years of such a period oppor- tunities would certainly occur for penetrating very far into the Polar Basin. In 1881, for example, Norwegian hunters found the sea north of Spitzbergen so clear of ice that a steamer could have apparently pro- ceeded northward to a considerable distance, and there is reason to believe that the sea to the northeast of Franz Josef Land is also navi- gable at times. Dr. Pettersen is convinced, from observing tlie motions of the ice north of Spitzbergen and Novaya Zemlya, that there is a strong probability of a more or less open Polar sea. GREENLAND. Under the command of Baron Nordenskjéld, a Swedish expedition has been engaged in an endeavor to explore the interior of Greenland from the east coast, one of the objects of the expedition being to fix the GEOGRAPHY. 481 sites of the ancient Norse colonies. The expenses of the journey were defrayed by the munificence of Mr. Oscar Dickson. A large party of _ scientific experts accompanied Baron Nordenskjéld, sailing from Goth _ enburg, on May 25, in a small steamer of 180 tons called the Sofia, and arriving at Iceland June 1. After coaling, the ship sailed for Southern Greenland, and on July 4 an ice party started inland from Auleitswik fiord, but were prevented from advancing with sledges nearer than about 90 miles to the border of the glaciers by soft snow; but the Laplanders, who had been taken for the purpose, advanced 140 miles farther on snow-shoes over a snow desert at a height of 7,000 feet. Baron Nor- denskjéld reports the whole inland covered with ice, with quantities of fine dust, which he considers as cosmical. The party landed twice on the east coast, but found it ice-bound almost everywhere. Some relies of the ancient colonists were said to be found. The predictions of Baron Nordenskjéld that the interior of Greenland would be found free of ice _ were therefore not verified. The expedition returned by way of Iceland, _ arriving at Thurso early in September. A Danish expedition, under command of Lieutenant Holm, has also been engaged in exploring the east coast of Greenland during the sum- mer of 1883. Several extensive fiords were discovered, and the charts as far north as latitude 61°, where the work terminated, will be seriously modified by the survey. After the summer’s work was done winter quarters were prepared at Nanortalik, where meteorological and mag- netic observatories were established. The same party will continue their work of exploration and survey during 1884. H, Mis. 69——31 Lao METEOROLOGY. By CLEVELAND ABBE. I.—INSTITUTIONS AND INDIVIDUALS. The second meeting of the International Committee was held at Co- penhagen August 1 to 5,1882. The principal resolutions related to the _ organization of an exhibit in London in connection with the Interna- tional Fisheries Exhibition, May, 1883; at which the proposed meteorolog- ical exhibit should Specially include whatever relates to (1) weather pre- - dictions and storm warnings; (2) the publication of meteorological data, especially the time of rainfall, the monthly mean for the preceding month, and the publication in full of meteorological observations during _ the year of international polar observations; (3) the preparation of daily charts of the Atlantic Ocean by the co-oporation of Captain Hoff- meyer and Dr. Neumayer; (4) the scientific and practical importance of the submarine cable connecting Iceiand and the Faroe Islands; (5) the publication of international meteorological tables as prepared by Mascart and Wild; (6) the preparation of individual catalogues of the meteorological literature of the respective nations. (Z. 0. G. M.,* XVU, p. 358.) Dr. Assmann states that means have been provided to re-establish on the Brocken (at the expense of the Magdeburg Brocken Club) the mete- orological station which has just been abandoned by the Prussian mete- orological office. He hopes before long to have a telegraph cable and continuous records. (Z. 0. G. M., XVIII, p. 68.) Prof. Emil Plantamour was born at Geneva May 14, 1815, and died on September 6, 1882. His life and energies were equally given to astronomy and terrestrial physics. After several years’ study under eminent astronomers in Europe he was settled, in 1839, as professor and _ director of the vbservatory at Geneva, which place he continued to fill - until his death, and whence he exerted a great influence both as an astronomer, geodesist, and meteorologist. (Z. 0. G. M., xvm1, p. 1.) Johann Albert Arndt, born May 27, 1811, in Saxony; died August 21, 1882. In 1847 Professor Arndt became one of the observers of the * The initials Z. 0. G. M. designate the Zeiischrift der Oesterreichischen Gesellschaft fiir Meteorologie. 483 484 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Royal Prussian Meteorological Institution at Torgau, where he had been professor since 1840. In 1866 he was called to Berlin, and in 1874 became Dove’s assistant at the insti:ute, since which time, both as an assistant and during the past three years as temporary successor to Dove, he conducted most of the work of that office. (Z. 0. G. M., xvu, p. 489.) Il.—GENERAL TREATISES. In general climatology the publication of Hann’s Handbuch der Kli- matologie (Stuttgart, 1883, 8vo, pp. x + 764), marks an important epoch by reason of the precision of thought and the extent and freshness of the numerical data. Many of the author’s views are worthy of wide attention and adoption, and are therefore here reproduced as follows: ‘‘ By climate we understand the sum total of the meteorological phe. nomena that characterize the mean condition of the atmosphere at any one place on the earth’s surface. That which we call the weather is only one phase, a single act, or part of the succession of phenomena whose complete course, more or less uniform, year after year constitutes the climate of any locality. The climate is the totality of the weather for a longer or shorter portion of time, as it ordinarily occurs on the average at this time of the year; but we speak of the weather of a special day or month or season; eé. g., the climate of England is mild and damp in December, although the weather of December, 1879, was. very cold. We never speak of the rainy climate of the summer of 1882 in Germany, but the rainy weather. The theory or philosophy of the weather and of climate will therefore respectively treat of the daily changes and the average condition of the atmosphere. ‘‘Meteorology includes both weather and climate, and shows the causal dependence of these upon the fundamental simple principles of physics. The principal climatic factors are temperature and moisture of the air, rain or snowfall, force and direction of the wind, &c. Of these the temperature is undoubtedly the most important, aud not only the temperature of the air itself as given by thermometers protected from radiation, but equally so the temperature, or rather heat, due to direct radiation of sun, air, and earth. This latter radiation is an extremely variable quantity,,even at one and the same locality, while the air temperature proper is comparatively uniform over a large extent of territory and time. “J, The elements of the air temperature that are most important for the correct presentation of any climate are the following: “1, The monthly and annual mean temperatures of the air. “2, The magnitudes for each month of the daily variation of tem- perature. “3. The mean temperature for at least one early morning hour and afternoon hour about the time of the lowest and highest temperatures, and if possible also for a later hour in the evening. ‘‘ 4. For long series of observations, the extreme limits between which lie the mean temperatures of the individual months. METEOROLOGY. 485 “5, The mean of the monthly and annual extreme temperatures as well as the resulting non-periodic variation of temperature within each month and the whole year. ’ 6, The absolute highest and lowest temperatures that occur within a given interval of time; the length of this interval should also be given. “7, The mean variability of the temperature, as expressed by the dif: ference of consecutive daily means and by the frequency of such changes in temperature arranged according to definite scale, e. g., from 2 to 2 degrees. ‘¢8, Mean limit or date of frosts in spring and fall, and the number of days free from frosts. “ As most of the published long series of temperature observations refer to stations within cities, it is also necessary to have in mind the systematic differences between city and country temperatures, the for- mer being generally warmer. The above requisites for complete clima- tological study are exemplified in the following table based on observa- tions within the city of Vienna: TABLE I.—Characteristics of the temperature of the air in the city of Vienna. {Temperatures by centigrade scale. Latitude, 48° 12’ north; longitude, 16° 22’ east of Greenwich. Altitude, 194 meters]. (od eae aa E P 3 Monthly | 42 | Means from.op- | Daily vart- | = Pe De |S means. ick : ationof | aS = Ok = 3 servations for faire AB he =s lab | 20 years, at foun mre SQ Sis eras 8 Seat) EES SS the respective | 9 nae f sh aS Is ee PY | 83/521 houre— pee Sew ao Ps eS ee 5 ne = o™= observation. | — | ae 3! rae Month. |2~ | 88! 22 | as | 8% i ich ° i |35e | A 3s | 29 Ae ~ S ae | go | &e | | 2 aa hss Bd ax Ba | 2 | Sa | | |s ag eae on Ea SS | Se] Sp | Wee ee hans 83/ en bad) 3e | 3 Be ae ae os VE lle fain aah = Seis ossrel pete ll neg ss a Es m alle Nira Se e S32) es | se - & a Reus Fe | § Bs 5 | Rs =| <1 8 ax o 2 4 =) Ethic, Neel ah hiees, cen eller Thy Oye = a 4 > a lomaly ts ° A ao ° One| a ° | Gre tio ae i fol December ..-| —0.8, —0.3; 2.3) —1.5) 0.6, -1.0 2.1) 4.7; 9.6,—11.2) 20.8 19.1) —22.6/ 2.0 January ..... =1.3| -1.7| 2.5|—23! 0.3} 16 27] 4.9! 9.7/-121| 21.81 18.8] —26.51 24 February .-- 0.4; 0.1) 2.2} —1.2) 2.6) 0.1) 3.8) 6.1) 11.4/—10.0| 21.4] 20.0) —20.0/ 2.0 Marnh: 32.5. 4.2, 4.3) 1.8 1.6 ° 7.4 3.6 5.9 7.8) 16.7)— 5.9) 22.6) 24.7 -—13.3) 1.8 PEpril 5. =- 1050) 9.9 led. 7 |) a6: 2} 14.0) 9.0| 7.8 9.6) 23.9\— 1.0] 24.9) 28.8 — 7.0) 1.9 Lib aeeeeeaee 15.1; 15.1) 1.5 | 11.4) 19.3) 13.8 8.2) 10.2) 28.5) 2.7 25.8 36.0) — 1.6/1.8 RNG) ~~. = = 18.6) 18.8) 1.2) 15.5) 22.4 17.1) 7.6) 9:9) 31.5) 9.1)- 22.4) 37.8 3. 8} 1.9 J) rae 20.3) 20.5) 1.3} 16.9, 24.3) 18.9 7.9) 10.1) 32.6) 11.0) 21.6) 33.8 8.0) 1.9 August ...... 19.6) 19.7) 1.3) 16.0) 23.7) 18.2) 7.9) 9.7| 32.9) 9.8) 23.1) .37.5 5. 6} 1.8 September..-| 16.1) 15.9) 1.2 | 12,2) 20.4) 14.8) 82) 9.6) 28.3) 4.9| 93.4] 335) — 0.6] 1.7 October..-.-... 10.5 10.0) 1.4 7.9) 14.3) 9.5] 6.6) 8.3] 23.21 0.6) 22.6] 27. 1 — 6.8) 1.5 November ... 3.7) 3.9), 1.4 2.5) 5 5) 3.3, 3.1) 49 14.9'— 5. | 20. 8) 21.3) —15. 0) 1.8 pe EE oe ee dd | a ee fe Seat ioe se). 3: Qt OST) Osa’ Vo | _ iS) © © o i © © —) w a) © _ or ‘gael _ © —s ive] © © | ~) wo or =) “TI. The elements of radiant heat that are important as climatologic factors cannot be stated so definitely as are those of air temperature. It would appear that we need to know the eNergy and the totality of the two radiations, i. e., that received from the sun and that given out by terrestrial objects, but unfortunately thus far satisfactory observa- tions of these phenomena are almost wholly wanting; even the appa- ratus proper for the measurements is as yet too crude to be available for accurate work. The solar radiations possess no such differences among themselves as to justify the terms ‘heat rays,’ ‘light rays,’ ‘chemical’ or 486 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883 ‘actinic rays;’ they have variations of wave length and intensity, @. e., rapidity and extent of vibrations, and one and the same ray will produce either or all of the above three effects (heat, light, chemism), according to the nature of the surface or body on which it falls. The energy or vis viva of aray of a given wave length and intensity is proportional to the quotient of the square of the amplitude divided by the square of the wave length; itis the total radiant energy that is desired in climatic researches. ‘he most recent observations indicate that the central part of the solar spectrum is most energetic not only in producing light, but also in respect to heat and chemical effects.” Meteorology still has to deplcre the absence of sufficient observations of the optical, thermal, and chemical effects of solar radiation. The im- portance of insolation (the amount of direct sunshine) has long been rec- ognized by physicians, and by agriculturists, by its effect on animal and vegetable life. Ofthe instruments with which regular observations have been made in the effort to obtain comparative data, Hann mentions the ‘‘black-bulb thermometer in vacuo,” as used by the English as of the firstimportance, and putsin the secondrank the Arago-Davy actinometer. [We may be allowed to add that this can only be allowable by reason of the fact that no satisfactory study of these instruments has yet been pub- lished, and our author’s decision will perhaps be reversed after the pub- lication of an exhaustive memoir by Ferrel, now in print.| “A record of phenological phenomena, such as times of blossoming, fruiting, &c., gives some interesting results bearing on the insolation. The amount of heat reflected from the soil and water into the atmos- phere has been approximately measured by Frankland, Dufour, &c., and may amount to as much as 70 per cent. “TIT. The nocturnal cooling of the free surface of bodies due to radi- ation of heat is another important subject that as yet eludes direct observation. An approximation is sought by observing minimum radia- tion thermometers fully exposed to the sky, and whose bulbs are respect- ively on the ground and directly above a close-cropped grass lawn. “TV. The temperatures of the ground at the surface, and to the depth of one or two meters, constitute a most desirable climatological element. “V, The measurement of atmospheric moisture, both vaporous and condensed, ranks next to temperature in importance. The following items are desirable : * (1) Monthly means of the absolute, and ““(2) Of the relative aqueous contentsof theatmosphere. The absolute measures are usually given in millimeters of vapor tension, but pret- erably in weight of vapor per cubic meter. The relative humidity is givenin per cent. The ordinary observations with hygrometricapparatus give the aqueous vapor in the immediate neighborhood of the observer, and tell nothing as to the amount or tensionat any considerable distance ; the relative humidity, with the temperature of the air and the wind, gives the evaporating power of the atmosphere, which has so great an influence on plants and animals. — ese eee 7 Tee Sa be OS ee ee j 4 METEOROLOGY. A8T “(3) The precipitation of moisture, as rain, snow, hail, dew, frost. Under this head the following are desirable: (a) The monthly and an- nual sums of total precipitations of rain and melted snow; ()) the max- imum precipitation per day and per hour; (c) the number of days having one-half millimeter or more of precipitation, including dew or frost ; (d) the percentage of rainy days in each month or the probability of a rainy day ; the number of rainy days is a better indication of a moist or dry climate than the total rainfall; (e) the number of days with snow, the depth of the snow covering, the duration of the snow covering, the dates of frost, and last snowfall; (/) similar data for the days with hail; (g} similar data for the days with thunder-storms. “‘(4) The precipitation of moisture as clouds. Under this head are important, (a) the amount of cloudy sky expressed in tenths or hun- dredths of the whole celestial hemisphere (the number of clear, cloudy, and threatening days does not seem sufficiently precise); (b) the per- centage of cloudiness is an ordinary substitute for the direct measuré of the intensity of solar radiation, and as it varies very regularly in diurnal and annual periods, it is desirable to give monthly means for three or more separate hours of observation; (¢) the thickness of the cloud layer is recorded by Campbell’s sunshine recorder by the eftect of a burning lens in charring prepared paper—this apparatus gives us the amount of clear sunshine whence we deduce the ratio of observed amount of strong sunshine to the greatest amount possible at the re- spective seasons and stations; (d) the number of foggy days, or the total number of hours of fog, and the times of forming and dissipating; (e) the number of nights or the quantity of dew. “VI. The wind affects humanity and equally the fauna and flora in innumerable particulars, but the comparison of observations, especially of force or velocity, is greatly hindered by the irregularities of methods of observing. It is, however, possible to draw some comparative con- clusions from the following data: ‘‘(1) The monthly means (or totals) of wind velocity or estimated wind force. ‘« (2) The frequency of winds from different directions (to eight prin- cipal compass points); this is most conveniently expressed in percent- ages of the total number of observations, or else the number of obser- vations of each wind is divided by the number of observations made each day, so that we receive as quotient the number of days that each wind has blown. ‘¢(3) The frequency of the winds for each hour of observation thus showing the diurnal changes in wind direction, this may generally be given for the annual sums instead of the individual months. ‘*(4) The meteorological peculiarities of each wind direction as to (a) temperature, (b) moisture, (c) cloudiness, (d) probability of rainfall, are shown by the respective wind-roses (thermic, atmic, nephic, aque- ous); one such series of wind-roses suffices to show the climatic char- acteristics of a large section of country. 488 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. ‘“VIT. The atmospheric pressure and its variations are climatologie factors of secondary importance in strong contrast to the important part that these elements play in meteorology. The mean annual pressure may be given to within a millimeter as an index to the density of the air and the facility of evaporation, but the variations that occur at any locality are too small to have any direct sensible effect on animal and vegetable life. Itis only as a basis for the explanation of the distribution of other climatic factors that we may need accurate barometric observations at numeroas stations. [The marked effect upon many persons of a gradual removal of residence from lowlands toregions higher by several thousand feet is daily exemplified by the experience of the numerous invalids who resort to the Rocky Mountain plateaus and the higher portions of the Appalachian Range. The freedom from noxious dust floating in the air and settling by its own weight or washed down by falling rain and snow, is, in the absence of direct observations, approximately indicated by the height of stations above sea-level or the annual barometric press- ure, combined with the height above lowlands in the neighborhood ; these heights may of course be deduced from accurate barometric obser- vations. | “VIII. The total effect of temperature, pressure, humidity, and wind upon free water surfaces respectively in the shade and in the sun is to produce an evaporation the measure of which should be of the highest importance in climatology. The apparatus hitherto devised for measure- ments of the amount of evaporation are, however, apparently very un- satisfactory. [Some adopt instead the depression of the wet bulb as indicative of the total effect of the preceding causes upon a moist sur- face that is very similar to that of leaves—the human skin, &c. It is perhaps proper to consider the depression of the dew-point temperature as indicating the need the air has of moisture, but the elevation of the wet bulb above dew-point, as showing the rate at which this need is being supplied, and the elevation of the air temperature above the wet bulb, as showing the rate of strain that every surface is under in its effort to give up its moisture to the absorbing atmosphere. | “TX. (1) The constitution of the air, so far as its dry gases are con- cerned, is too uniform throughout the world to allow of its entering as a factor in studying climatic differences; it varies but a fraction of 1 per cent. from 21 volumes of oxygen and 79 volumes of nitrogen, with 0.03 of one volume of carbonic-acid gas. The most important variable in the air is the amount of aqueous vapor (see V (1), above). The per- centage of volume of vapor to dry gases is given by dividing the tension of vapor by the barometric pressure. The result is, in extremely moist climates, equivalent to a dilution of the air to an extent of perhaps 3 per cent. of its volume. Thus for Batavia in one volume of the dry gases, we should have oxygen 21.0, nitrogen 79.0 per cent., but in one volume of the whole atmosphere, oxygen 20.4, nitrogen 76.8, aqueous vapor, 2.8 per cent. The direct effect of the slight change in oxygen must be im- perceptible. METEOROLOGY. 489 “«(2) Local or artificial impurities—dust, gases, or smoke from fac- ~ tories, burning forests, volcanic eruptions, the salts due to ocean spray, dust due to roads, sandy deserts, &e.—can hardly be considered as be- longing to general meteorology, but are important in local climatology. (3) More general and more important are the minute particles of dust that almost elude microscopic vision, and which are in reality spores or germs of organic life; to these are due the various processes of fer- mentation and putrefaction, and especially the large class of diseases known as miasmatic, which were formerly attributed to noxious gases, and to which all animal life is very susceptible. The warm, moist eli- mates are in general most favorable to these germs; they are compar- atively rare in very dry climates and over desert places; they are also rare over the sea and during sea breezes on the sea-coast, and also after a rain has washed the atmosphere pure and brought down fresh air from above. [The effect of rainfall in dragging down the air which then flows outward from under the rain was fully recognized by Espy and Henry in 1840, and has frequently been dwelt upon by the present writer, so that it can hardly be called a new observation, as is done by Hann on page 50. Experiments for the determination of the amount of air brought down were verbally suggested to Professor Pickering in 1871 as a subject for experimentation by his students in physics. | ““(4) Either ozone or the hyper-oxide of hydrogen, or possibly nitrie oxide, is apparently at times efficacious in increasing the oxidizing effect of the air, the result being that all organic matter is destroyed thereby. The methods of observing these gases are, however, too un- certain to allow of comparison between different localities, or even dif- ferent portions of the same series. . “6(5) The electrical condition of the atmosphere is not known to exert any considerable direct influence upon life, nor have we even observations that would allow of comparisons of various localities in respect to the electric potential. This subject is therefore to be omitted, at least at present, from climatology, notwithstanding many popular expressions of belief in its importance. The occurrence of thunder-storms has al- ready been considered—see V (3), (g)—but this is because of other feat- ures than the electric phenomena. ‘““X. Phenologic observations have frequently been introduced as a guide to comparative climatology, but the fact that plants can accom- modate themselves to climatic peculiarities renders this a study that must be pursued very cautiously. As yet it has not been possible to state the dependence of the development of plant life upon temperature so securely as to allow of inversely inferring the temperature from the ob- served stage of development. However, such studies are not to be wholly discarded; they are especially useful as indications of the cli- matic differences at different elevations on the slope of a mountain; also when a large number of special plants are studied they show the retardation of vegetation in northern regions. Thus, for example, the blossoming of plants in early spring is at Trieste, Gorz, and Villa Carlotta 490 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18383. twenty to twenty-five days earlier than at Vienna, and at Paris nine days earlier, but at Lemsberg sixteen days later, and Zlozow twenty-one days later. On the plateau of the Harz Mountains the retardation is thirty-four days, and the same also at Moscow. In the Alps, at 464° north latitude, 1700 meters altitude, the retardation is forty-five days, or the same as at St. Petersburg. It is, however, proper to consider such phenologic observations as illustrations of climatic characteristies rather than as defining them.” The following table gives for Vienna some of the preceding additional climatic characteristics. For want of space Hann omits the details of wind direction: TABLE II,.—Additional climatic elements for Vienna. | | | |jco “2 + | Aqueous vapor, obser- | Rain and ‘S™ | Sunshine, aver-| 3 BI Ba | , Ozone; vations for 20 years. snow. |2 | ageof3 years. | es -@ | Schonbein [3 = ao a © | papers, on a ee So Aad seg rroeee as [eo eS Oto 10 seale, ea Fi eae, (2H | PO |i = a Be Tics & 5, | 20 years of Monthe. les Relative humidity. ae A er Ages =i a2 a | x sé | heer canine £8 SOS Biman ey | | RSS Soper a) Ca a ene ea a= Bo pala 34 apa | 8s Sis) ale | ee ; @ [CS BD. I oF Cie tee Oe | lai Soe im Ala = Og galo Rao Porn Aree Fan |] 2 5 Ao ~ =) ae jae R Hoyos Ky ORs aod a Of ; = @ 14) /& |] aS SSsloghisoo) 28 | S22) gas |58) B | m PL PseS tea sf ee | A ea te lie eh ae ey ae el Pe ae | " | meters mm. \p.ct\p. ct\p. ct} p.ct.| mm.| ad. ° p. ct er sec.| mm. December .-| 3.7 | 86 er Pee ? 83 40 | 12.4 7.3 51.4 20 . 2.4 18 3. 1 5.5 January .-..| 3.6] 87 | 77 | 86 84 Biya a PAE IN |e RP) 86.1 31 1.7 1 ERO 5.8 February ...| 3.8 | 84 | 70 | 83 80 36 | 11.2 6.7 100. 8 35 2.6 27 4.2 6.0 iMareh).223.. 4.4] 81 | 58 | 76 71 43 | 13.1 6. 4 141.8 38 2.2 39 | 4.2 6.2 April aces. 5.7 | 76 | 48 | 68 63 42 | 12.3 5. 2 140.3 34 2.4 71 4.6 5.7 1 Cie Se aes 8.2] 76 | 49 | 71 64 64 | 13.0 5. 1 921.4 47 2.0 87 5.2 5.4 DUNE cei = 10.0! 75 | 50 | 71 64 66)! 12.7) 4:9 234.7 49 2.4 93 Do2 5. 6 dalyiee sees 10.9 | 75 | 48 | 70 63 65 | 13.3 4.5 290.4 60 2.2 113 5.3 De August..... 11:0 |) 79-150) | 73 66 12) |S in AON 2125 48 Pail 94 5. 1 5.4 September 9.3 | 82 | 53 | 75 69 45 8.3) 4.5 156. 9 42 2.0 TH 3.9 4.5 October. --.- 7.2 | 85 | 61 | 81 76 44 | 10.6 5.4 69. 3 21 2.0 47 3.0 4.3 November..| 4.8 | 84 | 72 | 83 80 43 | 12.6 7.4 65. 9 24 3.0 32 3.0 5. 1 Wear-- 4.6.9 | 80 | 59 | 77 72 | 595 144.1 | 5.7 | 1771.2 37 2.2) 711} 4:2 5.4 Having, in his introduction, thus defined our general conception of the range of climatology, Hann devotes 175 pages to a consideration of the principal features of the earth’s climate—first, as depending on the solar radiation; and, next, as modified by physical conditions, 7. e., moisture, altitude, distribution of land and water. This section of his work constitutes a popular treatise on meteorology that is fit to form a Separate treatise, and is by far the best at present extant, the only ones comparable for accuracy and clearness being that of Blanford in The Indian Meteorologist’s Vade-Mecum. The remaining 550 pages of Hann’s treatise are devoted to the de- scription of the special climatology of the zones and districts of the earth, constituting a very complete climate-geography. Through the: whole volume are distributed occasional notes and pages dealing with ~ the causes of atmospheric phenomena, so that the work is an indis- pensable and admirable preliminary to the study of, or development of, a systematic treatise on philosophical, deductive, and mathematical meteorology. METEOROLOGY. 491 {t may not be presumptuous to add that if the idea of climate is to cover every known relation of the weather to human affairs, then there are still many important features only lightly touched upon by Hann that must be more fully considered than they have been even in this introduction, which we have so fully analyzed in the preced- ing lines. Some of these have indeed been taken up by the author in his subsequent chapters on general or special climatology, and we enumerate them here in order to direct attention to them, and at least partially complete our enumeration of what data are called for in a treatise on ‘‘climate.” They are as follows: (1) Exhilarating and depressing weather is the effect of or may be represented as a function of the simultaneous temperatures (¢), wind (v), barometric pressure(p), and relative humidity (h), and is not fully ex- pressed by the enumeration of the simply hot and moist days, but must be determined by a special observation of the days in which the human organism experiences such special feelings as are defined by the expres- sions “closeness,” “oppression,” ‘‘ weakening,” *‘ harshness,” ‘ rawness,” “penetrating,” “chill,” ‘“mildness,” ‘‘softness,” “balmy,” ‘“soothing,” “invigorating,” “exhilarating,” ‘ stimulating,” “nervous,” ‘“restless- “ness,” ‘gloominess,” “cheerfulness,” &c. In the absence of this per- sonal or subjective record one may seek an approximate method by calculating such an arbitrary function of t, v, p, h as will give numerical results on a scale of 0 to 10. Personal records of this character were kept at Washington by J. W. Osborne and others as early as 1873. (2) The number of general storm-centers that pass over a locality,. and their general geographical distributions. As such storms are pre- ceded by southeast to southwest winds, warmer, cloudy and rainy weather, and followed by westerly winds, colder, clearing, drier weather, their frequency is directly indicative of the changeableness of the cli- mate, and presents in one datum a very concise summary of the features that bear on health, business, domestic life, forestry, and commerce. A map of storm frequency explains at a glance the distribution of north- west and southwest winds in the United States, and the peculiarities of our climate as given by Hann on page 556. Such charts were at- tempted by Espy in 1836, but actually compiled first by the present writer for the statistical atlas of the United States Ninth Census, Wash- ington, 1874. A general review for Europe and America has recently been given by Koéppen. (3) The frequency of severe local storms, such as the tornadoes of the United States. (A first attempt at collecting these data is given by Finley. Professional Papers Signal Service No. 4.) (4) The frequency of calms as causing poor ventilation, and being accompanied by stagnant or unwholesome air. .(5) The durations of twilight and the general color of the sky by day, and the special colors at sunrise and sunset, as indicative of the reflec- tion, transmission, and absorption of the solar radiation. In the tropics, 492 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. the blue sky is replaced by a white or opaline tint, and the total amount of light and heat thus diffusely reflected to the observer is one-half as much as that directly coming from the sun. The bluest skies are in- dicative of the absence of moisture, the reddest skies are apparently due to vapors or exceedingly fine particles of moisture or of dust, the white sky to the larger aqueous particles that are apparently of the size of the finest cloud or fog particles. (6) The number and extent of the sudden changes from warm and moist to cold and dry, or, vice versa, cold and dry to warm and moist, as distinguished from the general variability of these elements (shown for example in the next paragraph, without regard to the direction in which the change occurs. A few words on this subject by the author will be found in the Sanitary Record for July, 1879.) (7) The frequency and extent of changes in the mean temperature of successive days; this is held by Hann to be the best way of express- ing the effect upon mankind of variability of temperature, and on page 504 he gives the following valuable comparative table: Variability of mean daily temperatures, as shown by the frequency per month of 30 days of the occurrence on successive days of mean temperatures that differ by definite amounts. 5 =] ons a ~ a - 3 Ss a © ~ Ss : oo 2° ra] FI o a : of 7.8 aS ‘ : Bo zg ico) 2 é B= a aes Geographical dis- 22 = = 5 5 = eo a5 trict. 3 B ie>} ¢ © z=) oO b= 3S r= He E a S H a nD 3 2.8 oA re = a ~ Rn op ‘SB om 5 4 = 3 : : ze | ge ° 5 S o g & 5 oO A A ) A e cs a B p Number of stations. 3 5 5 4 4 8 5 5 Mean latitude .....| 529.0 N. | 48°.8N. | 569.3 N. | 559.4 N. | 549.7 N. | 39°.6N. | 349.18. | 42°. 9,N. Differences of mean temperature (de- FREQUENCY IN WINTER. grees centigrade). () iG). Raoaspecorrice 17.5 17.0 Sal 9.0 11.6 23. 3 20.2 9.9 8.4 8.5 7.6 7.1 9.0 5.4 7.6 8.2 3.1 3.1 5. 0 4.9 4.9 1.0 1.8 5.2 0.9 1.0 2.8 3.5 2.7 0.3 0.4 3.2 0.1 0.3 EYE 2.2 a eeeeteae 0. 04 1.6 0.1 0.8 1.5 10. DM eaceicchraae see eee eae 1.0 0.5 0.9 OM esopeopebalbeocuouccis 0.6 0.3 0.4 OME apa cd Sas] ctineeewres 0. 2 0.1 U5 74) Baeereioeimel acess aco leimceccEoos 0.1 0.1 UE r tee SoeSeoneod joe ac aabad bsossomaSctscagases-c Soscosecence bécciggeccallosssesccdclleccdsacoac (EU SSB Ssasccs|sctoncscod6ceaccedodicce pause ssccoshosscd| eer Goce secacoosallassccsc tins 0:03 | 2s..222 sae] cece neces pees seanee pose enenies FREQUENCY IN SUMMER. (Pity 2oadsceseescc 20.3 18.2 17.1 16.4 18.1 23.3 17.6 17.4 PATIO. CE RRB see seios 7.8 9.0 8.9 8.9 8.3 5.6 8.3 al Mt) Wsesoassasaes 1.6 2.2 2.7 3.0 2.7 0.8 2.8 2.5 GrtoreSrescenecra ee 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.3 0.6 0.3 0.9 0.7 SitolOceo sea ecuans 0. 04 0.1 0. 2 0.3 OVO) cee ee 0.3 0.2 2) WOM Pascoe eins) ooecodedse Esaoesoeor 0.1 0.1 OU0E sees 0.1 0.1 ey iE eels cone ficocooc ear} boSsaasecs 0. 03 0. 04 CRU ye siSeie seal aaaeae aber lscoocikiadicc METEOROLOGY. 493 (8.) The frequency of sudden irruptions of very dry winds (gen- erally but not necessarily cold) which by their desiccating power de- stroy tender vegetation, a factor that can of course be well presented by the changes from small to great daily evaporation or from great to small elevations of wet-bulb above dew-point temperature. In numerous suggestive notes Hann leaves the dry field of descrip- tive climatology proper and wanders a little over into the fascinating border-land of dynamic meteorology. Usually he thus intensifies our juterest in the subject by the clear and satisfactory explanations. But confining ourselves to the problems of the future, we quote the following. The annual mean distribution of atmospheric pressure reduced to standard gravity and at sea-level and for all meridians is given for each 5° of latitude in the second column of the following table: : | | | Mean annual— * Mean annual— | amass Che Te Ratio of land || frelon Thames Ratio of land P emper-| to water. : emper- to water. Latitude. ature. |proaanre.| Foster an = Latitude. | ature. [preganre,| Foster and | Ferrel | yerrel.4 Dove. Ferrel enrol Dove. and hil and z Hann. | | Hann. | | Degrees. °C, ™m. Per cent. Degrees. oC. | m. | Percent. NOD OOU Ns 275.0" joe ese aae |soaeeeececa et POW oh |Gasea as Seine 758. 3 22. 6 Bs mech ose to ee eel oeten oe Shean e 10 25.9% | 759.1 | 20.4 22.6 80 | —15.8 N@OSBT | scmees sete 3 (Baer 760. 2 22.6 THD ||heeeasae se TOOA OM amaccin aster 20 23. 53 761.7 22.5 22.6 | 70 | —10.2 758.6 | 48.3 2B! |p seaciehs 763. 2 22.6 GaN lovy= eae ai TOSSED le aac a sSeee caps 30 19. 23 763.5 | 20.5? 20.5 60}; —2.2 758. 7 56. 8 35 15. 63 762. 4 9.7 oi) BO eae seer LES ATE en ss emepdces 40 12. 98 760.5 412, 4S) 50 + 6.5 750.7 | 56.3 45 10. 13 757.3 3.1 Ea Ga fa ye ee eet ROL TOW |loeasso ceeeaes 50 6. 73 753, 2 abies ad) 40) 414.4 762.0 | 44.5 55 3.8 | 748.2 1.8 1.3 Bui eiercles omiatals Thiago | Ses SPS ar 60 0. 33 (6 OC ela Aree taaerie 30 20.4 | 761.7 | 43.4 (hh Peace a eaoe W89i%. lee wicecuccnece Depa aiatonae ate Ie ROO SANS, | Sopra hE reteset 70; — 4.83 138. ON | Stocetccceanen 20 24.3 | 759.2 | 30,8 ON pre sccm mae (BA) Baa eee OF Nisecicwicce. UB OST a RSs sae ere tric 80 — 8.23 (BG)2 Ss fos aeceeee eee 10 26.4 757.9 | 23.4 Ol Ree eee Bene Josce ol lesereenna ASS Ss DP eerie ncaa tascetas se fracsacteeticee 90 ar i ae en a eA SS RTS Fe | 0 | 26.8 758.0 | 21.6 20.8 | 1Hann, Klimatologie, pp. 92, 93, and 742. 3 Hann, Rp. 92, 93. 2Dove, Zeit. Erdkunde, 1862, xii, and Hann, p. 90. ‘Ferrel, Met. Researches, part 1. ‘‘ The pressures here given agree with the distribution of the atmos. phere required by the mechanical conditions for the general circulation of the atmosphere as published by Ferrel in 1858 and 1860. We see that the pressure diminishes from either circumtropic latitude towards the corresponding pole, especially in the southern hemisphere, where the whirl around the pole can develop with the least disturbance. The zone of highest barometric pressure lies further from the equator in the northern than in the southern hemisphere (it lies in the former somewhat north of the 35th degree north latitude, but in the latter be- tween the 25th and 30th degrees south latitude), and the accumulation of air is less there since the process of circulation is more restricted and therefore less energetic. “This circulation of the atmosphere (delineated in the previous par- agraph according to Ferrel’s views as given by him in his Motions of 494 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1833. Fluids, &c.) is subject to an annual period. It is most intense in the hemisphere in which winter prevails, for in this hemisphere the differ- ence of temperature between the tropics and the higher latitudes is greatest, and therefore also the temperature gradient in the upper strata, which sets the circulatory current in action, and which latter, in its turn, brings into play the centrifugal forces. In the hemisphere that is enjoying summer the upper temperature gradient is slightest and the interchange of air between the tropics and the higher latitudes is feeblest. In general an accumulation of air exists always over the hemisphere that is enjoying winter. Since the northern hemisphere in its winter cools much lower than the southern in its, therefore also the upper currents of air are much stronger in the winter of the northern hemisphere than in the winter of the southern. The difference between the warmest and coldest latitudes in the northern hemisphere during its winter is about 60° C.; while on the other hand for the winter of the southern hemisphere it is only about 40° C. Since, also, during the winter of the northern hemisphere the local temperature differ- ences between the oceans and the land are very great, reaching, indeed, nearly the same amount as the general difference between the tropics and the pole, therefore the local circulation attains its greatest inten- sity and is able to materially modify the general circulation. There- tore there develop over the warmer northern oceans, the permanent cyclones of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans and tie anti-cyclones over the continents of Asia and North America. Parallel with this there is a more frequent and intense occurrence of smaller whirls—the ordi- nary cyclones—which, in the temperate zones, advance with the gen- eral movement of the atmosphere from west to east. This is therefore in general the season of the development of greatest activity in the movements of the earth’s atmosphere, the greatest differences of press- ure and greatest variations of pressure occur, and with these the great- est variability of temperature. In the winter of the southern hemi- sphere no similar increase in the motions of the atmosphere is to be expected, since its cooling is not, by far, so great as that of the north- ern hemisphere. Therefore, also, the upper temperature gradient is not so marked, and consequently the intensity of the upper air cur- rents toward the pole. At the same time also the temperature differ- ences of the meridians and the local currents fail because the conti- nents in high Jatitudes are missing. Consequently the currents of the general circulation can develop themselves much more regularly and intensely, as we have already seen is indeed the fact. The difference in the movements of the atmosphere between winter and summer is much slighter. Therefore, also, the change in the variations of baro- metric pressure from one season to the other and its consequences. Equally must the variability of the temperature be less. In short, the whole meteorological régime assumes a more constant type and shows a smaller annual periodicity. In the equatorial region of the Atlantic METEOROLOGY. 495 Ocean it has in fact been observed that above the trade winds more air is flowing at high altitudes (toward the pole) in that hemisphere in _ which winter is prevailing. Toynbee says that during the northern _ winter and spring the upper clouds above the trade winds move north- ward more frequently than in summer and autumn. The reverse is true during the winter of the southern hemisphere. “Tf the temperature of the tropic zone is subject to periodic changes, as K6éppen has shown is probable, since periods of greater intensity of solar radiation follow parallel with the periods of greater or less fre- quency of solar spots, then must similar changes also exist in the gen- eral atmospheric circulation. At the time when the temperature of the tropics attains a maximum the descent of air in the upper strata from the tropics towards the pole is greatest and the circulation most intense. The low pressure in the equatorial belt will experience a fur- ther diminution, while the high pressure in the middle latitudes will increase, and in the circumpolar regions the atmospheric pressure, in consequence of the increase in the rotating ring (vortex ring), will fur- ther diminish. The whole energy of the atmospheric movements will increase, but what influence this may have upon the temperature and precipitation in the middle and higher latitudes cannot easily be deductively inferred. On this point only investigations based upon sufficient observations can give satisfactory conclusions. ‘Recently, Blanford has called attention to a relation of this char- acter between the distribution of pressure in the tropics and in higher latitudes, in that’ he shows that the periods of low pressure in Indo- Australian tropical regions coincide with periods of high pressure on the northern Asiatic continent. Especially is this the case in winter. The air that flows at high altitudes out of the tropics streams towards and accumulates where the descent in the higher strata (the thermic gradient) is greatest. Since high atmospheric pressure (a maximum barometer) #s associated with greater and permanent clearness of the sky, therefore also with greater radiation of heat outwards and cool- ing of the lowest strata of air in winter (origin of a local pole of cold), whereby conversely the thermic gradient and the inflow of air from above is again increased—it is thus quite possible that periods of great warmth and low pressure in tropical regions should correspond with periods of great winter cold in high latitudes. “The discovery of such relations between the temperatures of the tropical zone and the general weather of the middle and higher latitudes is one of the most important present problems of meteorology and com- parative climatology. We have already seen that the influence of the tropics is actively opposed to that of the temperate zone of either hem- isphere in its winter season in the ratio of 10 to 6.5. The mean condi- tion as to temperature in the tropical zone on which depends the energy of the upper currents of air which become the prevailing ones in the temperate zone must, therefore, have the greatest influence upon the 496 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. general character of the weather in the latter zone. Therefore, by the observations in the temperate zone alone we can never completely trace its weather back to its fundamental causes.” _ In closing our summary of Hann’s important work we may be par- doned for referring to the great stride made during the past twenty years in our knowledge of meteorology, and to the Americans, Henry, Espy, and Ferrel, who have correctly penetrated to the ultimate causes and laws of the principal phenomena. Their views have a most pro- found influence in the daily work of the Weather Bureau of the Army Signal Office, and are amply illustrated in its daily maps and monthly reviews, and are now become the foundation of such works as the present by Hann. Especially has the present writer never ceased to urge the necessity of studying the atmosphere of the whole globe in one comprehensive chart. To this end the Bulletin of International Simultaneous Observations was undertaken, and it already offers data for solving the difficult climatological problems that Hann has so clearly set forth. Great mathematical problems delay the progress of the work ; as with Faraday in electricity, and many other physicists, so here, doubtless, the observational and inductive methods must always prepare the way for analysis, but on the whole they go hand in hand, first one step forward and then the other, as the parent teaches the child to walk, until finally both run together. (Hann, Handbuch der Klimatologie, Stuttgart, 1883.) Climate and agriculture. Friesenhof remarks, on the utilization of meteorology for agricultural purposes, that this may be divided into the following sections: (I) Cli- matology of the plants; (II) climatology of the region; (III) local me- teorological knowledge; (LV) weather predictions; (V) crop predictions. Each of the five sections demands a special study, and a practical active system of agrarian meteorology must carry them all on simultaneously. One central station will not suffice to solve all the problems, but it has its part to fulfill about as follows: I. The climatology of plants includes the sum of all climatological ele- ments that influence their prosperity. The influence of each element and of their most varied combinations must be studied; in other words, an investigation of the relation of the plant to the climate wherever it is cultivated throughout the world. This will require the following meteorological data: The quantity and distribution of precipitation; temperature, winds, cloudiness, insolation, and dew; these can be ob- tained with sufficient accuracy from the records of the present meteor- ological stations. Il. The climatology of the region gives information as to the unequal distribution of the individual meteorological elements in localities that are comparatively near together. This is the special problem of agri- cultural stations, and cannot be demanded of the central meteorological METEOROLOGY. 497 institute. The latter deals with general problems over very extended territories, and cannot possibly go into minute detail. Excepting bar- ometric pressure, these agricultural stations should observe all the atmospheric phenomena. As many as possible are needed in every land, reporting to the central agricultaral station. The most important subjects of observation are (1) rainfall, i. ¢, the quantity, time, and accompanying cloud motion; (2) temperature by means of self-record- ing maximum and minimum thermometers; (3) accurate notes of time and direction of thunder-storms, as well as the directions at which electric discharges are seen; (4) estimate of the dew, as none, light, moderate, heavy, very heavy; (5) maximum temperature of the air in the sun. If all of these cannot be observed, then the first item at the very least must be obtained. III. The local meteorological data differ only in form, not in kind, from the preceding. They include all climatic elements of any importance in agriculture; viz, (1) the pressure and its changes; (2) atmospheric moisture; (3) the temperature, its changes and extremes, both in shade and sunshine, and in protected secluded spots; also in the earth at va- rious depths, and at slight depths under various kinds of superficial soil; (4) wind force and direction; (5) cloudiness and its influence in diminishing insolation, to which latter end, in addition to the ordinary scale 0 to 10 of area covered by clouds, there should be an additional record (i. ¢., clear, somewhat obscured, moderately obscured, greatly, almost entirely, and entirely obscured), according to the measure of the deprivation of sunlight, and that, too, not only for the moment of obser- vation, but also the general average for the interval elapsed since the last record—in this regard the Campbell sunshine recorder is to be recommended; (6) precipitation, amount, times, and rapidity of fall; (7) dew measured instrumentally; (8) evaporation; (9) ozone, although its importance is not yet evident. All these current values, as observed, should be compared with the normal mean values, and the results, together with a similar compari- son of agricultural and phenological phenomena be fully published. The normal values should proceed by decades of days, as a month is too long, and daily means are not yet available.—(Z. O. G. M., xv, pp. 8-11.) The Deutsche Seewarte has published an important atlas, embracing thirty-six charts of the Atlantic Ocean, showing its physical relations, its commercial routes, &c.; especially interesting to the meteorologist are the charts of depth, temperature of water, and meteorological phe- nomena which occupy two-thirds of the volume, and are followed by magnetic and other charts. The work offers the most exact and ex- haustive collection of scientific data accessible for the student of the physics of the Atlantic Ocean. (Z. O. G. M., XVIII, pp. 44 and 70.) Angot has published for Paris the diurnal variations and the ex- tremes of temperature and pressure and vapor tension, based on H. Mis. 69 ——32 498 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. seven years of direct hourly observations by Renou at the observatory in the park of St. Maur. In ‘regard to this important work, Hann re- marks that it is notable that we have never before received for any part of France any similarly thorough work on diurnal variations, nor. have we as yet any systematic collection of climatic data for France, such as corresponds to the need of modern climatology, and is well illustrated in his own admirable text-book. (Z. O. G. M., xvu, p. 290.) Buchan has published in the new edition of the Encyclopedia Bri- tannica, vol. xvi, a general popular treatise on meteorology as distin- guished from climatology. There seems to have been a widespread expectation that this treatise would be substantially a new edition of his famous handy book of meteorology, for which many have been waiting these ten years past; but it may be doubted whether the 45 quarto pages of the Encyclopedia, excellent as they are, will be consid- ered to replace the hoped-for volume; in fact, no satisfactory philo- sophical treatise on meteorology can now be written without having as a basis the works of Espy, Ferrel, Guldberg, Mohn, Hann, and numer- ous other mathematical students of the mechanical and physical ques- tions involved, and such studies seem to beas yet entirely ignored in Great Britain (Haughton, Everett, and Archibald alone excepted). In fact, the hopeless confusion of ideas that there prevails cannot be better illustrated than by the fact that this same Encyclopedia divides me- teorology into two grand divisions, and allows the first as written by Buchan to be followed by a memoir (of 25 pages) on terrestrial mag- netism by Balfour Stewart. This second memoir is apparently a strong plea for the parallelism and interdependence of meteorology and mag- netism, the reader being throughout disarmed of all unreasonable pre- judice against this innovation by the frequent use of the expression ‘‘magnetic weather,” lately adopted by Stewart, and by which is strictly meant the fact that magnetic phenomena (declination, dip, force, and their variations) present many analogies with meteorological phenom- ena. The author, in his closing section (144), considers that terrestrial meteorology has somehow produced and maintained the magnetic state of the globe, and that, therefore, they ought to be studied together, as the phenomena of the one will explain those of the other. If this latter view is the proper one to take, then we have Meteor- ology the fundamental science, magnetism one of its many applications. The magnetist must understand meteorology, just as with the stu- dent of the tides, of navigation, of geographical distribution of plants, of hygiene, of climatology, or of geology and vulcanology, for all these and many other sciences have intimately to do with meteorology. But it would be folly to say that these constitute parts of the study of meteorology any more than of astronomy, or that the meteorologist must necessarily study these. Meteorology stands in a general way as the fundamental or parent science for the whole range of studies em- ita ia ee eee ee eee SO METEOROLOGY. 499 braced under the title of ‘terrestrial physics.” Therefore we regret, not to have found Balfour Stewart’s excellent article published in its proper place under ‘terrestrial magnetism,” in a succeeding volume of the Encyclopedia. Buchan’s treatise is too short to do much-more than touch upon the salient points of meteorology, which he declares to be restricted to the description and explanation of the atmosphere as grouped under the terms “weather” and “climate.” Ina few words relative to the histori- cal development of this study the author glances at the progress due to Humboldt, Dove, Loomis, Le Verrier. Perhaps it was impossible in the space at his disposal to do justice to all, but as the whole work is evi- dently written for the American and English public, and is not free from national prejudice, it seems strange that the great series of daily weather maps 1838 to 1843, published by Espy, and the great daily map of the Smithsonian Institution, 1854 to 1860, should have been passed by in the following very misleading sentence: “The method of practi- eally conducting this large inquiry (the paths of storms) in the most effective manner was devised by the genius of Le Verrier, and begun to be carried out in 1858 by the daily publication of the Bulletin Interna- tional, to which a weather map was added in September, 1863.” This paragraph seems to well illustrate the great difficulty of acquainting one’s self thoroughly with what is going on in divers countries, and em- phasizes the importance of such indexes to the Bibliography of Meteor- ology as those of Hellmann (Leipsic, 1883) and Symons (not yet pub- lished). The whole of this essay is divided into two capital sections— i. e., Diurnal phenomena” and “ Monthly annual and irregularly re- curring phenomena.” Under this head the respective phenomena are treated of in separate paragraphs apparently quite independent of or with a very slight thread of interdependence. In the former of these sections the illustrative examples are so frequently drawn from the re- sults of observations made on the Challenger, or from the publications that are due to Buchan, that we almost forget the numerous able co- workers in this field. Among the new data and results not heretofore published or but little known, the following are worthy of mention: The depth below the surface of the sea to which the influence of the sun’s heat is felt has been shown by the observations of the Challenger to be about 500 feet. The rate at which this heat is distributed in perfectly clear water at different depths is a problem that has not yet been worked out. During 1859 to 1863 Captain Thomas frequently observed hourly the surface temperature of the sea off the northwest coast of Scotland with the following results: Total mean daily oscillation of temperature, 0°.3 Fahr.; minimum, 0.17, at 6 A. M.; mean, 0.0, 10 A M. and 2 A. M.; maximum, +0.13, between 3 and 4 p. mM. From the records of the Challenger Buchan deduces the results of simultaneous 500 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. observations of sea and air temperatures as given in the first three col- umns of the following table: Observations on board H. M. S. Challenger, 1873-1876. { Departures from daily means of observations taken every g two hours. 5 = Ce ee ae a ay aS Force of wind. g Temperatures. astic Torce roe | 5 © : cnipersrares vapor. se “33 5 ase ee | & | BES \2u88 near [22 126 days in mid-| 76 days | S& 3 3 & & | 7 eo | Open sea, | haar = ocean. near land. a2. © EP Ea oH & | 650 days. 552 days. = dag | vg |4,%\22 54 S i SE) F [Pee sks = Og 1 — BF] lite pix +3 oam #od|sEaS2 =] Sea- 4 Ore =| Sj | Seo S Air Air Si $ (388! Same | Beaufort.| Beaufort. water. Gas Ste Bee | § an oon oF. Inch. | Inch. ' Perct.' Inch Pr. ct. PATER ES dod noe —1.13 | —0. 24 |.-..- poeee |—0. 015 |—0. 003 +2 | —0. 012 2.98 I. ous 59 Aramis taht. 1.40 a3 |f Min} /— 020 | .000| +2 |—.022/ 2.80 59 Giasmerssase. 1.41 PUN eee aero — .016 .010 | +1 | + .003 2. 82 ‘ e | 62 EST aaSene —0,21 | — .12 |.-.....-.-- — .007 |— .003 0 | + .028 2. 82 1. 73 62 AE ae gears +0.78 | + .06 |--..-----.|4+ .004 |+ .014| —1 | + .0382 2. 86 2.00 58 Wears oc saistias 1.45 24 |§ Mar. tly .o17| .o11| —2 | + .006| 2.92 2.29 56 24s segs ee 1.80 47) \Saetaccses 4 020 .007| —3 | — .043 2. 92 2. 36 58 4p.m... 1, 56 Cee + .017 .015 | —2 | —.055 2. 87 2. 30 59 Gyo meee ea +0. 73 si ene sae + .007 000 | —1 | — .028 2. 87 2. 02 57 we ola =O; BOF hie n02N a5. socenne + .002 — .004 0 + .004 2. 89 1.74 57 Pils See cose —0. 80 | — .19 |.-..------ — .005 — .005 | +1 + .013 2. 93 1. 68 57 Midnight Seton —1.02 | — .35 |.......--- + . 0038 lex 007 | +2 + .012 2.90 1.75 57 Thus the amplitude of the daily fluctuations of the air is 3.21, or nearly four times greater than that of the surface of the sea below it. Near the land on 76 days the daily range of air temperature was still larger. Part but not all of the observed greater range of air over the sea surface is doubtless owing to the effect of heating the vessel’s deck, but the general fact remains as one of considerable interest. The diurnal variations at sea of elastic force of vapor and of relative hu- midity are shown by the fifth and sixth columns of the table drawn from the Challenger observations. The disturbance induced by prox- imity to land is very notable. The land breeze delays the minimum va- por tension two hours, %. e., from 4 to 6 A. M., and the sea breeze pro- duces a secondary minimum, + 0.007 at 2 P. M.; similar minima occur . at Batavia and at Bombay, apparently owing to the same cause, namely, the mixing of descending dry air with the moist sea breeze. The diur- nal variation at sea of relative humidity is given in the seventh column and that of barometric pressure in the 8th; the latter evidently repre- sents only a small portion of the whole series of observations at his com- mand; these however are quoted by Buchan principally as illustrating his explanation of the origin of the diurnal period in pressure. On this interesting though comparatively unimportantsubject, Buchan has made a most extensive study, parts of which have been published some years: ago, both in thearticle “ Atmosphere” and in his memoir in the Edinburgh : 4 ‘ : ; METEOROLOGY. 501 Philosophical Transactions. In the present essay he gives his latest views, devoting to the subject four pages or rather more space than would have seemed appropriate had he not paid such special attention * to this subject. In the main, his argument is that the warming and ex- pansion of the atmosphere by the sun causes a compression or tension that increases until it overcomes the resistances due to the inertia and vis- cosity of air, when the latter by its expansive movement experiences re- lief and the tension diminishes until the accession of heat from all sources ceases. Moist air absorbs heat and expands more than dry, there- fore the diurnal fluctuation is greater over moist than over dry land, and is largest within 10° of the equator; the sea surface temperature varies so little during the day that the diurnal fluctuation of pressure over the ocean is not entirely due to that temperature but to direct heating by absorption by the molecules of air and vapor. These ex- pansions are followed by contractions at night, and as the air cannot mechanically flow to.and fro fast enough to fill the vacua, a consequent diminution of tension is observed. On land the heated ground imparts to the air a much larger diurnal variation of temperature, and by so much increases the barometric fluctuation which, other things being equal, is found to be greatest when the sky is clearest, 7. ¢., where the most sunshine reaches the earth, and least when it is covered with dense clouds and sunshine is cut off, being thus the reverse of what is observed over the open sea. [Although nothing is said about the diur- nal period due to the vapor thrown into the air by evaporation during sunshine, and abstracted by nocturnal cooling, yet such would seem to be equally important. The defects of this and all other similar theories, of which there are many, have long since led the present writer to abandon them, and in general adopt a view that he has frequently com- municated to others and referred to in various publications, ?¢. ¢., that this periodicity in pressure is principally a dynamic phenomenon deduc- ible from Ferrel’s formula for general and special atmospheric move- ments, whenever they shall have been satisfactorily developed into sine and cosine series, with the time as the argument. A matter however that at present offers more difficulties to the analyst than even the most complex of astronomical theorems relative to the motions of the heavenly bodies. | The Challenger cruise has also afforded Buchan excellent results as to the diurnal variations in the force of the wind at sea. In columns 9 and 10 we give the force in Beaufort’s scale numbers as read from Buchan’s illustrative wood-eut. The diurnal curve shows no distinct uniform or reliable maximum or minimum on the open sea, but a marked maximum at 1 or 2 P.M., when near land. The diurnal variation in in the wind force or velocity thus depends largely on heating of earth and water by direct solar radiation, and the explanation of Espy and K6ppen is practically adopted by Buchan in saying that the ascension of the air during the day thus brings down portions of the rapidly moving 502 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. upper strata, and communicates at least a portion of their greater velocity to the lower strata, or, as Buchan says, the influence of the higher temperature of the earth’s surface is ‘“‘to tend to counteract to : wes some extent the retardation of the wind’s velocity resulting from friction ~ and from the viscosity of the air.” [This explanation loses much of its force in cloudy weather, especially during extended heavy storms, when the wind velocity still shows a marked diurnal periodicity, but this has always seemed to the present writer explicable in consideration of the fact that the solar heat is then all absorbed at the upper surface of the cloud layer or of closely adjoining cumulus clouds and is doing its great work there, i. ¢., expanding them and evaporating their vapor particles and in both ways rendering them still lighter than the surrounding air; their ascensive force is thus increased, the up-draft of air from the earth the horizontal supply winds, and the rotatory in-draft, are increased, and thus the diurnal period in our winds is maintained; similarly the diurnal period in rainfall is maintained with a second maximum in the early morning hours due to radiation from upper cloud surface and con- sequent condensation of cloud particles into rain. Similarly the whole development of an extended storm passes through its diurnal period, including a periodic rise and fall of the barometric pressure due to the varying force of the wind and resulting whirl; all which, as has often been said, lies concealed in Ferrel’s dynamical formule. | The diurnal variation in the direction of the wind is illustrated by the following figures, whence we see that even at sea the influence of the sun in heating up neighboring lands or air masses makes itself visi- bly felt in this item: Mean wind direction. Challenger, 1873 In northeast trade | Mauritius observa- ) : regions. tory. | Divan MM bO\G AGP heh ea Setrereerne atoms ose aes ar EK. 47° 4a.M. | E. 22°98 HOMASAM: (0° (PM Let essen sere sere E. 56° N POMS |b Zess The percentage of sky covered with cloud is given in the last column — of the table of results of observations in the Challenger; the slight vari- ations do not seem to the present writer to exceed the probable uncer- tainty of the observations. The diurnal and annual variations in the times of the occurrence of thunder-storms, 7. e., the hours in which thunder is heard, and which is, therefore, equivalent to the hours in which lightning occurs, and is quite distinct from the attending rain, hail, or wind, is beautifully illustrated in the following table based on fourteen years (1859 to 1872) of observations at Ekaterineburg, Ural Mountains, which is given by Buchan without quoting the source (prob- ee es oh el a ee eee ee METEOROLOGY. 503 ably Woeikoff or Wesseloffski), to which we add the hourly distribution of 162 tornadoes in the United States as given by Finley (also quoted by Buchan, without mention of source): |: gz 8 BSe|?, $2 | "a8 es lol Frequency of thunder-storms at Ekaterine- ‘3 ele E : barg, 1859-1872. Secu Hour ending— = A S§3\|8s sa |e oe | St oF Oo m& |e : Six April.| May. | June.| July.) Aug. | Sept. | Year. | Year. vane cece ECO Sen eee onl Pree) erarsas 5 5 Si lesa 15 , 55 ED cee ie ge an RE aie Tees era tue Br 0 3) De ED SeseegecesboosEes) Gyeeen||Bosesc 1 4 dO rectal 6 5 1 ieee Semis Fe Sajna soci ccjadteeis.c 1 2 Stel eee 6 2S) Tp Wh pocessboseooansoos|leaseda|sansse 2 1 1 AC eee 4 3 9 OT ose cocasecesenseallagsocs| Soedse 3 Oval Pesce | nacee e 6 7! By Stoo Sse bose GEEEee OBS Gas amoes 2 Dy beleejosiecl| Sertone 5 , 4 1 3 pl GeS= SOR e eee Do} ssitoeis 5 2 pe [ses eee 10 PALME inisiste ssc sce cs Wo iencene 4 4 Dee scios 10 1 3 MEE Se oe eiciomee's ob oe 1 eee 6 7 Gy A eaenrse 19 ; lsat toe cls cmie casa. « BN [Sesser 8 12 AP wWescains 25 7 20 INDEN eee et ies fn tccine cee : 2 5 30 5 1 53 pM hia cts 0 ch 4 1 25 5 4 60 = Ap i Plea hep oo hl gow | Sch wg. ele 15 STE eee Bil 100! |\- 2) a5 ds ri late ta Oe fa PIs oo, cismc Sia saheut 3 6 26 45 20 Ly |. 107 DEPRUN Se ein. Soe tic wes ee 2 5 24 33 i) WeooBee 73 52 3 ()]tb 1 Sak eeapeepciseeers 1 6 25 30 11 2 75 ST eo re 2 7 15 20 ID Wscae 2 54 17 1 Bape Mee aomteielcciislcuis sc 2 5 16 20 Ose SHee 52 SPAM Se oe ee sis apsacine « 2 6 14 14 Gas eee 42 ~ 0 HORDE WMeeh 35 1oc celeriac: 2 3 8 10 5 1 29 UU TOE psaoeeoencedée Z606eu||S5a6ee 1 6 6 a Wlgsaaoo 18 4 0 PA MMIAHIPG cots os sshene's|oe~ <4 1 7 6 ad Bee 22 eS See Stans. 24-- se < 27 | 64 | 255 | 351 | 144 | 15 | 856 | 162 59 From these and other considerations Buchan concludes: ‘Given an initial difference of electric potential, it is easy to understand how the most violent thunder-storms are produced.” ‘‘The formation of the electrical manifestations of the thunder-storms and tornadoes requires aqueous vapor and that there shall be masses of descending cold air along with the ascending current of warm moist air; thus at Mauritius there are no thunder-storms so long as during June, July, August, and September the island remains in the heart of the southeast trades where the conditions of descending cold currents of any considerable volume are not present.” In our present almost utter ignorance of the actual electric potential of the air and vapor as dis. 504 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. ~ tinguished from that of the clouds, the earth, and the apparatus, it would seem best for the meteorologist to await the studies of the physicists and refrain from advancing crude explanations. Observa- tions and inductions are always in order; working hypotheses are very helpful as suggesting further observations and study, but they should not be put forward as satisfactory explanations. Perhaps the most | important new contribution in this essay is Buchan’s new charts, based ‘on the eleven years, 1870 to 1880, and giving the January and July isotherms, isobars, and winds; these must immediately replace his older ones of 1868, and even those of Ferrel, Met. Res., Part I, (1877,) after ap- plying the reduction of barometer to standard gravity, which has been omitted by Buchan. In his comments on these charts our author seems not to clearly state the mechanical problem of the connection between isobars and winds; he says, ‘“‘ Winds set in from where there is a surplus to where there is a depression of air, and observations teach that the isobars and the prevailing winds are in accordance with each other,” and in his sub- sequent detailed exposition of these accordances the fact seems to be lost sight of that our winds are primarily due to differences of temper- ature and moisture as affecting density, and that from the winds and the rotation of the earth follows the distribution of pressure, as shown on his valuable maps, whose isobars are, therefore, the result, not the cause, of the winds. This dynamic phenomenon, so ably exposed by Ferrel, Babinet, Everett, Hann, Finger, Sprung, Thiesen, Roth, Overbeck, Guldberg, and others, will, we hope, ere long be accepted by English meteorologists. In such sentences as, “differences of pressure and consequently all winds, origi- nate in changes of temperature, &c.,” or, ‘‘all winds may be regarded as caused directly by differences of pressure,” Buchan alludes to differ- ences measurable by the barometer as is generally the case in storms, and known as barometric gradients, whereas these gradients are the result and not the cause of the wind, the true cause being the very slight gradients of pressure due to differences of density ; these fundamental gradients are very slight, and in the exact direction of the wind, while the resulting ordinary barometric gradient is measured perpendicular to the isobars, and therefore frequently at a considerable angle to the wind. It is impossible for one familiar with recent advances in dynamic mete- orology to accept the explanation that Buchan offers of the cause of the general low pressure over the sea in winter and the land in summer, and perpetually at the equator and poles, based on the simple principle that moist air is lighter and that the condensation of moisture leaves a perceptible vacuum. ‘Air charged with vapor is specifically lighter than when without the vapor; the condensation of vapor in ascending air is the chief cause of the cooling effect, being somewhat less than that which a] j . i 4 oo me METEOROLOGY. 505 would be experienced by dry air. From these two principles, which were established, the former by Dalton and the latter by Joule and Sir William Thomson, it follows that the pressure of vapor in the air and its condensation exercise a powerful influence in diminishing the press- ure.” In this sentence the two principles are correct, and due to the physicists named, but the conclusion is Buchan’s, and, as stated, does not follow from these principles, but from others, about which he is silent. [If there were no vapor at all in the air, and were the seas replaced by polished silver and the continents by dry rock, we should still have a similar general distribution of pressure, due then, as now, not to vapor in and of itself, but to the winds that will themselves be produced by ‘unequal distribution of temperature and density. That the condensa- tion of vapor to fog and rain does not directly produce a diminution of barometric pressure has been thoroughly demonstrated: On the contrary, the latent heat evolved by condensation of vapor expands the air so much that a decided increase of pressure should result. The simple truth is that ascending currents must be followed by inflowing descending and horizontal currents to fill the vacancy. These soon set up a whirl, and the barometer falls as a result of the centrifugal forces developed by the two motions, ¢. ¢e., about the earth’s axis and about the center of low pressure. It is therefore very improper to say that the air flows inward because of the great observed barometric depression, or that the presence or the condensation of the aqueous vapor causes the depression. | [Buys Ballot’s law of wind and pressure, as worded by Buchan, is the expression of the concordance of two results, and is not an expression of physical laws connecting cause and effect. It is a rule, not a law. The frequent mention of Buys Ballot’s law by Buchan and others, especially English writers, long since led the present writer to look up the history and bibliography of this rule, and it will perhaps be a mat- ter of surprise to many to find that Buys Ballot himself never pub- lished or claimed it in anything like its present form. It would be much more proper to attribute the law as first enunciated by Buchan in 1866 to Buchan himself or to the cyclonologists Reid, Piddington, Redfield, &c., and attach Buys Ballot’s name merely to his own rule, namely: ‘‘In Holland, when on any day the barometric departures from normal values indicate a gradient between any two stations, then within the next twenty-four hours the wind will blow nearly at right angles to that gradient, and from left to right if one’s face be towards the lower barometric reading.” | In his section on the connection between steepness of barometric gradient and velocity of attending winds, Buchan gives recent results for 8 A. M., deduced by Whipple from the continuous anemometric records at Kew Observatory for 1875 to 1879, inclusive, as compared 506 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR. 1883. with the gradients on the morning weather-maps of the London Meteor- ological Office, as shown in the following table: Gradient. Wind velocities at Kew. Barometric change in | Barometric change in 1° of great 15 nautical miles. circle. Mean of the year. Inches. Miles per hour. 0. 002 0. 008 5.0 0. 005 . 020 a0 0. 007 . 028 5) . 010 . 040 9.2 . 012 . 048 11.6 . 015 . 060 12.6 .017 . 068 15.0 . 020 . 080 16.5 . 022 . 088 19.1 . 025 . 100 22.0 . 027 .108 22.0 . 030 . 120 25.5 Mean.. .016 0. 064 14. 4 Relative velocities for the same gradient. October, November, December .........-..---.--- 12.5 miles per hour. January, Pebruary, Marche .< 2. .csden once oan: 14.8 miles per hour. ATM aye SUNG fats. ake ice eS wien cue citer ace tes 17.2 miles per hour. July, August, Septem bers. 5.2 2) 2). oe clans yates 12.6 miles per hour. Whe Wears an sei So chek Sees cee es a ttaane hase 15.7 miles per hour. The increase of velocity in April, May, and June, Buchan explains as due to the fact that the wind blows over a surface warmer than itself. The variations are precisely parallel to the diurnal velocity of the wind where also the greatest velocity occurs when the air blows over sur- faces warmer than itself, ‘‘and the ascensional movement of the air tends to counteract the effect of friction and viscosity between the low- ermost stratum of the air and the ground. At night-time there is a deep descensional movement, and the friction between the wind and the surface of the earth is thereby increased.” It would seem that Bu- chan has here joined together as cause and effect phenomena that are only very indirectly related to each other. We have little or nothing to substantiate the idea that gaseous friction and viscosity diminish sensibly with rising temperature. It would seem much simpler to adopt at once the rigorous demonstration and clear explanation of these two phenomena given by Ferrel and K6éppen. J. A. Plumandon, adjoint meteorologist at the observatory of Puy- de-Déme, has published an excellent popular work on the prediction SO a eS RANE Doing 2 METEOROLOGY. 507 of weather, especially for central France, from which we take the fol- lowing notes for observers at isolated stations: The prediction of weather depends upon the possibility of discover- ing the existence, the position, and the future progress of areas of low and high barometric pressure. The direction of motion of the clouds is the direction of the true wind that has important meteorological in- fluence. The number of days that fine weather will last after the barom- eter has slowly risen is equal to the number of days that has elapsed between the preceding bad weather and the time of maximum pressure: The approach of very violent storms is indicated, (1) by a very sudden fall of barometer when the barometer is already quite low; (2) by the backing of winds and clouds towards the southwest and south;* (3) by the more or less complete but sudden disappearance and reappear- ance of clouds previously covering the sky; (4) by the rapidity with which the lower clouds traverse the sky; (5) by the presence of special clouds of an opaline whiteness that form in the region of the sky from which the wind blows. Thunder-storms are not local phenomenon, as was long supposed. They are a consequence of the general state of the atmosphere; the storm that devastates a single county is the result of atmospheric con- ditions over the area of several states. ‘The study of general depres- sions furnishes one of the best means of predicting thunder-storms two or three days in advance. The forecast is infallible if the approach of one of these depressions combined with the general situation of the atmosphere gives rise in our section to a belt of almost uniform press- ure.” It has been observed that at every season of the year the sky as- sumes a stormy appearance as soon as the pressure becomes uniform in central France. This uniformity of pressure may be considered as emi- nently proper for the production of thunder-storms in the zone where it manifests itself without the zone being subject to the direct action of a center of low pressure. Thunder-storms rarely occur when the barom- eter is high. The approach of a period of thunder-storms is announced by a fall of the barometer, by copious dews, and by very pronounced maxima and Ininima of temperature. Cumulus clouds do not always bring storms. Often, on the contrary, they accompany a long period of fine weather. When this is the case they are less developed and traverse the sky iso- lated, like balls of cotton. They disappear after sunset to reappear on the morrow at 9 or 10 o’clock in the morning. If they appear in the evening after sundown it is a sure indication that the weather is about to be stormy. The torrential rainfalls accompany thunder-storms or secondary de- pressions that are but slightly developed. The general rains of long duration in France are produced principally when a depression of low gradient prevails or a series of small depressions succeed each other *These directions for France would become northeast and east on our Atlantic coast. 508 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1833. rapidly. Rain may come with any wind, but principally with those be tween southwest and northwest; for France these are from the ocean, but for our Atlantic States the rain-winds are from northeast to south. Fogs frequently arise when a warm current succeeds a cold current or the reverse. They last longer in the second case than in the first. They always accompany the zones of high pressure when these zones are narrow and elongated between two depressions. The heat increases or the cold is tempered every time the barometer undergoes a notable depression, for at such times southerly winds pre- vail; cold weather comes with high barometer and the attending north- erly winds. Two kinds of hail are to be distinguished: (1) The hails of winter; (2) the hails of autumn and spring. Disastrous frosts coincide with short periods of fine spring and autumn weather, and are frequently produced by terrestrial radiation alone. The frosts of autumn and spring are easily foreseen two and even several days in advance. They are to be feared, (1) after a depression has passed over England and France, and (2) when a depression exists in the Mediterranean Sea. A remarkable case of nocturnal radiation occurred on July 29, 1881, in the middle of a long period of oppressive heat; the temperature was 38° centigrade in the sun, and fell during the night to 29.3 centigrade. This reduction during clear nights has led many to erroneously suppose that the moon is the cause of the frosts, an error that is now happily being rapidly dissipated. III.—APPARATUS AND METHODS. Hamberg describes a modification of Lamont’s earth thermometer that he uses in Sweden, and which for moderate depths may be recom- mended elsewhere. The thermometer proper is enveloped in glass and wood and muslin pads, both to protect it from injury and to cut off rapid changes of temperature. It is let down through a copper tube into the mercury contained in an iron cylinder fastened at a proper depth, and is pulled out, read off, and returned whenever an observa- tion is made. (Z. O. G. M., xvit, 116.) Sprung having devised a simple form of self-recording balance ba- rometer, described already in 1876, has lately published results of actual records as a demonstration of the high degree of accuracy attained by it. The formula of reduction for instrumental corrections as given by Sprung is exceedingly simple. The accuracy claimed is expressed by the ‘probable error” (or the error whose size is such that it is equally easy to make a smaller or larger error,—or one whose probability is 0.5), which is+0.11™™, as determined by comparative readings of a standard barometer, but only + 0.07 if determined by independent comparative readings of the barometer belonging to the barograph itself, a part of the difference being due to the sluggishness of the latter. A peculiarity of Sprung’s barograph is that the special appa- ee a, —— ss ee METEOROLOGY. 509 ratus for registration works with perfect correctness, and without injuri- - ous reflex action upon the accuracy of the barometer proper; it is sur- prising that many pieces of self-registering apparatus are still used in which this important condition is neglected. The probable error of the self-registering Hasler barometer (Wild’s), at St. Petersburg, has only lately and after several years of experience been brought down from 0.23 in 1871 to 0.085 in 1878, and this by virtue of many laborious computations and reductions. The probable error of the Schreiber baro-thermograph is still about 0.24. In general the per- formance of Sprung’s balance barograph—with sliding rod and sliding weight, and invariable position of barometer tube—has proved thoroughly satisfactory, and proves it to be an exception to the statement of Dr. Schreiber, in December, 1581 (Z. O. G. M., XVI, p. 500), that all other sys- tems of registration, except those depending on the motions of the barometer, are mere methods of interpolation. The insulation of the recording and the measuring portions of the apparatus as accomplished by Sprung has been applied by him to thermometers, rain-gauges, &c. [Was it not first applied to meteorological apparatus by G. W. Hough: at Albany, in 1861, whose printing barograph and thermograpbh still serve as the typical apparatus, though by no means giving such accu- rate results as those of Wild, Schreiber, and Sprung.] (2. 0. G. I, XVII, p. 46.) Crova has described a modification of Regnault’s dew-point hygrom- eter, which promises to give highly accurate results. Crova draws the air to be examined into the interior of a highly-polished tube, whose outer surface is cooled by evaporating ether or other processes, and whose temperature can be determined by a thermometer immersed therein. The dew is deposited on the interior of the polished tube, and its appearance and disappearance can be accurately detected. (Z. O. G. M., XVU, p. 374.) Mignon and Renard describe a condensation hygrometer so arranged that all the vapor present in the air is precipitated and is collected in a special vessel for measurement. TFonvielle suggests that this instru- ment is especially adapted to collect for investigation the dust parti- cles swimming in the atmosphere, and that interesting results would be obtained by such apparatus on balloon voyages among and above the clouds. (Z. 0. G. M., XvIl, p. 375.) Stellung and Wild have devised a form of evaporimeter which floats in a river or basin of water, thereby preserving the evaporating water at the same temperature and as nearly as possible under the same con- ditions as the main body of water in the river itself. The quantity of water evaporated is accurately measured to one-twentieth of a millime- ter. When rain falls and fills the evaporating dish above a certain level the surplus is carried into the interior of the apparatus and can subse- quently be poured away; if rainfall is too heavy, in consequence of 510 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. which the whole apparatus would sink beneath the river, then it is sup- ported by two wires. (Z. 0. G. M., XVII, p. 367.) Th. Langer publishes comparative observations with four Piche evap- orimeters exposed under various conditions: (1) in free sunshine and wind; (2) freely near a large mass of water; (3) shaded by tree or house; (4) within a shelter. The relative quantities evaporated were: 100, 98.3, 98.5, and 62.0, respectively. Langer concludes that for the sake of uniformity it will be advisab’e to use only evaporimeters lo- cated within shelters, as thereby the variations due to temperature of the water in the tube are greatly diminished. [As the direct effect of sunlight or solar heat upon the water in Piche’s tube can easily be obvi- ated by adapting a small shade, there seems no reason why the whole apparatus thus shaded should not be hung in a free exposure to the wind, whereby the above relative percentage of 62 would undoubtedly be increased.] (Z. O. G. DL., XVU, p. 375.) Of all the recent contributions to hygrometry, the short memoir of April 8, 1883, by Pernter, “‘Psychrometer Studien” (Sitzwngsbericht of the Vienna Academy, vol. Lxxxvu, 2 Abtheilung), is so excellent a sum- mary of the present state of our knowedge of this subject that the fol- lowing historical and critical portions are worthy of being reproduced in this place: “In recent times the psychrometer has been again much studied, -gince we have endeavored, both theoretically and experimentally, to arrive at a more accurate formula for the computation of the atmos- pheric moisture from the psychrometric data.* By the assistance of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Vienna it was also made possible for me to institute comparisons of psychrometers on the Ober at an altitude of 2048 meters above the sea-level. The apparatus that I applied to this purpose were: (1) a Wild’s ventilation psychrometer; (2) a Regnault’s dew-point hygrometer; and (3) a Schwackh6fer’s volume hygrometer.” [As these observations extended only over a few weeks, and were con- fessedly unsatisfactory, I need give only the following abstract of this portion of Pernter’s memoir: ‘¢ Let ¢ = dry-bulb temperature in Celsius degrees. t/ = wet-bulb temperature. ty) = observed dew-point temperature. po = true atmospheric vapor tension corresponding to tp. p, = the vapor tension corresponding to ¢’. P = atmospheric pressure in m m.” * Blanford, Journal Asiatic Society of Bengal, vol. xLv, part vi, 1876. Chistoni, Memorie e Notizie Meteorologiana Italiana, anno 1878, fasc. 1, 2, and 5. Chistoni, Annali della Meteorologi, Part I, 1380. Sworikin, Repertorium fiir Meteorologi, vii, No. 8, 1881. Angot, Jonrnal de Physique, 2d series, 1882, No. 1, p. 119. Maxwell and Stefan, Zeitschrift d. é6sterreichischen Gesell. Meteorologie, bd. XvI. (Maxwell’s original study is published in the Article Diffusion, Encyclopedia Bri- tannica, 9th ed., vol. VII.) 3 : ; METEOROLOGY. 511 Assuming t to be the true air temperature and the p to be correctly given by t, we have the ordinary psychrometer formula of August— po=pi — A (t—t,) P, whence, A =— Eoae Thirty observations of the dew-point and psychrometer gave Pernter A = 0.0010415, or considerably larger than as deduced from observa- tions at low altitudes. Pernter further considered that a similar re- sult, A = 0.001284, deduced from eight observations with the Schwack- héfer hygrometer, justifies at least the general conclusion that the factor A increases with diminution of pressure. ] “The object that such comparative observations always have is to construct empirically a formula whose application to psychrometric ob- servations will give the tension of atmospheric vapor with the greatest attainable accuracy. Regnault, long ago, and since him others, have shown that the theoretical deduction of the psychrometer formula gives no satisfactory result, and thus it might appear that one would do best to renounce the theory and simply seek an empirical formula that shall correspond to the results of observations. I, however, believe that it is precisely the theory of the psychrometer that gives the best starting- points, in order, with help of comparative observations, to arrive at a satisfactory formula, and I must therefore introduce some theoretical views. “From theoretical considerations we possess two forms of the psychrom- eter formula—the one deduced from the convection, the other from the diffusion and conduction theory of this instrument. It was August who first deduced his familiar.formula from the theory of convection. Max- well repeats this concisely in the following manner [see the reference be- fore given; but it should be noticed that the following is merely Max- well’s exposition of Dr. Apjohn’s reasoning. See Trans. Royal Irish Academy, 1834.] Let m = the mass of a quantity of atmosphere. t = temperature “ a wu po = true tension of the aqueous vapor. P = total barometric pressure. o = the density of aqueous vapor relative to air. A = the latent heat of evaporation. Then will nm o = the mass of the vapor in this quantity of atmosphere. Let pi = the vapor tension corresponding to the temperature ¢ to which the wet thermometer sinks; then will (P1— Po) > = the quantity of aqueous vapor evaporated from the wet bulb, and mo (1 — Po) P X = the quantity of heat necessary to such evaporation. 512 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. In the condition of equilibrium this amount of heat will be conveyed (to the wet bulb) from the quantity m of air with specific heat $ that flows past the wet-bulb thermometer; therefore, m (t—t!) S= (pi — po) “yA or— nag le BL iy Po=Pi— 5 (tt) vie Ona In this reasoning a small quantity has been neglected, which, how- ever, as can be easily shown, is entirely negligible.* *In respect to the individual cases of deduction of this formula, as given by August himself, and by Belli (Corso di fisica esperimentale ; Chistoni, Formale psichrometrische, Zeitschrift f. Met., Xvi, p. 81), I con- sider it important to demonstrate that with all the accuracy demanded by August and Belli, the above formula, as deduced by Maxwell, is equally accurate. August (Pogg. Ann., bd. v, p. 77) considers that aqueous vapor is also contained in the air that is flowing to the thermometer, and he intro- duces air and vapor according to their weights into the formula. If, then, p is the normal weight (at O°C., and 760™~) of the unit volume of air, we have— P— Pi ik 760 "I+at Weight of the original aqueous vapor = a Weight of the dry air = 1 Gig “3 l+at Weight of the evaporated aqueous vapor = Po po hey Therefore, if the specific heat of aqueous vapor under constant press- ure is k, the above formula for the condition of equilibrium becomes— (P—pi) 8S (¢—U) + pook (t— UV) = (pi — po) AT or— PS Ms Pi Po ko gy ihe wie ptrp* sg (¢ Vv) =pi Po Let us assume — = oe as is certainly allowable [in the first term], and we have— PS IM Pi a ko TATA AS aD: B 16 p (t =) )e ') = Pi — Po ome - (B) [We can estimate the accuracy of this approximation by the follow- ing considerations]: in the most unfavorable cases . may equal 0.02; 1— ko is a constant, and equals — 0.26, and therefore in the most Ss unfavorable case or the entire bracket equals 1.0052, and can therefore be put at unity, and the formula remains as given in the above text. Belli really deduced his formula under the same assumptions, it is therefore, a priori certain that it will lead to the same results; since, METEOROLOGY. 513 In this reasoning (of August, Apjohn, and Maxwell) no attention has been given to the influence of radiation; if one had considered this, then, however, Chistoni ascribes to it high importance, I will show that it also reduces to the formula given in the text: Belli starts with the masses of air and the vapor instead of with the weight, as did August. Let m be the total mass of both; the ratio of the masses of air and aqueous vapor is as P—py to poo so that the mass of the air is m (P — po) P—p+poo and the mass of the vapor is Mpy O P— po + Po and the sum of both is m. When the air has cooled to ¢/, and becomes saturated with vapor, then the new vapor-mass p, is to the mass of air which has remained unchanged, and is still m (P — po) P — po+ poo as p, o is to P — p,: whence mp; o P— po = oie — Po + Po O° P—p, and therefore the mass of the newly developed vapor is m P — po P— po + po o Pop —P) ¢ we have, therefore, as the equation for the permanent maintenance of this condition or P—Mm PS po fi—ak : 4 — a iL — — i “eee . P—p Pi apes sae Ee S ) |e “) (©) Since, now, poe *.is only alittle larger than unity and is in the most Sree alt unfavorable case 1.01, and since the expression Po ok i= S(1i- 5 is also, as before shown, only a little greater than unity, we can, there- fore, certainly replace each by 1 considering that in the result for po the hundredth part can never be exact and is not even necessary, and thus there remains again the expression given above in the text. I have not disdained this presentation, trivial as it may seem, because it frequently seems as though a psychrometer formula is considered as better the more complicated it is, and especially because Chistoni only recently (see his treatise above cited) has claimed for the formula of Belli an advantage over that of August, and declared it as the best that at present exists. The formula of August, as well as that of Belli, are both based on the consideration of convection, and by omitting the radiation give abso- lutely the same result. Therefore, theoretical considerations will not prove the more complicated formula to be the more accurate. H. Mis. 69-——33 514 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1888. since the radiation (7) can be put = OR (t—?#’), where O = the surface and R = the coefficient of radiation, we should have had OR (t—t’) + mS (t—t') = (p1 —po) _ or, apes =[ 1+ Seg] (e— th rh ee [This is, therefore, the Pernter-Maxwell formula, in which convection and radiation are both considered. | The deduction of psychrometer formule under the assumption of perfectly calm air (i. ¢., neglecting convéction and considering only radiation, conduction, and diffusion) has been completely given by Maxwell,* and Stefan,t and they have arrived at the following expres- sions, respectively: Maxwell, . . . pPo=pi— (Gime Ue io he Scents oer eae / (3+ +39 ro 5) £1) Ma re en Po= Pi py (K+ Rr) (ESO) ino eS Greene which latter becomes the same as the former if we put K’ = > 1. Bas is pe a: oy Me Seg Ra Maxwell-Stefan, . . . po=D mot Dp CET) hae ye ae eee In these equations we have [assumed the thermometer bulbs to be spherical and of radius r, and] put p = the normal weight of the unit of volume of the air; K = the coefficient of conduction of the air ; D = the coefficient of diffusion of aqueous vapor in the air. Since, now, K’ = x = 0.18, according to the experiments and com- putations of Stefan, and D is also = 0.18, according to the statement of Stefan, therefore the formula deduced for quiescent air acquires the same form, 7. @., igs} Rr P m= — 7, (14 8p (tt) as ee as that deduced from the convection theory.t This must arouse sus- *See Encyclopedia Britannica, 9th edition, Vol. vit, Art. Diffusion, London, 1878, and Zeit. Ost. Gesell. Met., Xv1. +See Zei schrift der ‘Gat. Gesell. fiir Meteorologie, Xvi, p. 177. t Since D, the coefficient of diffusion, may be an unfamiliar term, I will here, by its deduction from Stefan’s diffusion theory, briefly show what meaning it has in our formula. Let A. be a constant depending only upon the nature of aqueous vapor and the air, then the piocess of a Rae o-Ps ony : ? .! METEOROLOGY. 515 picions against the derivation from the convection theory, for the deriva- tion for quiescent air is certainly free from all objection.* In fact an hypothesis vas made in the assumption of the convection theory that certainly is not proper, namely, that the arriving air in the instant of its passing by gives up the whole quantity of heat mS (¢—t’) that is to say that it is cooled through the whole interval t—?t’; with this also diffusion is represented (see Stefan, Sitzungsbericht, Vienna Awademy, vol. LX VIII, page 385) by the formula: AaAi=— eds —Aje 1 po (U1 — Up) Ov where p; = the density of molecules of aqueous vapor; u; = the velocity of molecules of aqueous vapor ; p2 and w%, the same data for the air; éis the acceleration, which = 0 under the present assumed state of equilibrium ; ; so also in this case is the evaporation, or %=0. Therefore, we have Opi Ov ie AS P, pz Uy = OV Since, now, p2 : 0, = p, Ty: pol, where 6, is the normal density, for po = 60°", therefore, multiplying and dividing by 0,, we have Opi A J iiss To O2 OF pe Ov = Tp 01 A 4 But p. = P — p,; furthermore, p; % is the quantity of evaporation for the unit of surface; for the spherical bulb of the psychrometer, there- fore, this quantity is Q=477’?p,u. Therefore, if we put il Ag2 Ty 62 4 : we have P—p, dv 427°6,D and after integration Pi. Pe eas or D ? Q=4z r= (pi— po) : Ay mtly, 1 Sk Pe oe , whence, evidently, ApieTs Since p) = 760 and — mT can be put = 1 for the temperatures occurring in psychrometer observations, there- fore D is nearly constant. *[Even this derivation, however, implies certain assumptions that need further in- vestigation.—C. A.] . 516 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. falls the further hypothesis that as much vapor is developed as is nee- essary to the saturation of the air at ¢’ degrees. Both of these condi- tions are only approximately fulfilled. It is, therefore, certain that the convection theory affords only an approximate formula. Therefore, we abide by the hypothesis of perfectly quiescent air; for which case the Maxwell Stefan formula (F or G) holds good with per- fect exactness. If for this hypothesis we ae the factor. spin [Rt REPS assuming spherical thermometer bulbs, we obtain for the first part Dip =0.000630; and if we put R=0.000097, according to Stefan, and take r=0.57 centimeters, whence Rr=0.000055 the second part becomes Rr Disp 1] 2 = 0-000630 whence A=0.001260. > In fact, Regnault found A=0.001280 from observation in perfectly quiet air in a small closed room (Pogg. Annalen, LXXXVIII, p. 428), and Sworikin (Wild’s Repertorium, vu, No. 8, p. 17) finds from 0.001100 to 0.001500 for quiet air, therefore again on the average 0.001300. But in fact we almost never have to do with perfectly quiet air, and even because of the cooling of the air close to the wet thermometer a convection is always present there. If one would obtain results to any extent consistent with themselves he must, since convection is unavoid- able, provide for one that will assure a permanently uniform movement of the air. This is attained by means of the ventilation-psychrometer. If, therefore, we begin with assuming a ventilated psychrometer, and therefore strong convection, we have no theoretical formula for this case. We can, however, attempt to adapt the formula for quiescent air to the case of ventilation. Stefan (Zeit. f. Met., xvi, p.181) has remarked that in the formula [G] for quiescent air it can be assumed that the introduction of convec- é P ; : K tion simply causes K and D to increase uniformly; therefore, D will re- main very nearly constant. This being assumed, it is plain that for increasing values of D the second part of the factorwill therefore 7% Dips become smaller. Herein we find a reason why the theoretical value of the whole factor A is not attained in the comparisons of the ventilation psychrometer. In fact the value empirically determined for a barometric pressure of 760™™ is almost exactly 0.000800 on the average of the various METEOROLOGY. 517 trials.* Since now the faetor A consists of the constant invariable / i K : we can, since —- = 1 write the part ath and the variable part D Dipe formula thus (see the formula H): PS Rr / ae L+ang, |<" CR wy where a denotes a new coustant that under the assumption of a uniform ventilation and constant barometric pressure should be invariable. From this we see that the term depending on radiation can indeed be diminished by ventilation, but certainly not’ so much that it ean be wholly neglected. It will not be superfluous at this place to indicate how very erroneous it has been to neglect the influence of radiation in the deduction of the psychrometer formula. In faet it proves to be for still air quite as large as the theoretical factor in August’s formula, if one assumes a spherical thermometer bulb of 0.57 centimeters radius, as is the case at the observing stations of the Vienna K. K. Central Institute for Meteor- ology and Terrestrial Magnetism. If we would possess a uniform formula for all the various ther- mometers, we must seek a method of carrying out the suggestion of Kamtz.t He remarks, “ As a pendulum occupies only approximately equal times for a vibration over large and small ares, equally so differ- ent thermometers give only approximately equal results. As with the pendulum the ares must all be reduced to one of infinitely small ampli- tude, so with the thermometer we must undertake a reduction to an infinitely small one.” We can, however, in using the ventilation-psychrometer, consider this reduction as already partly made, since in that instrument the term that contains the influence of radiation is materially diminished. A further influence that has not at all been considered in the formula, is that of the muslin cover of the wet-bulb thermometer. In the de- duction of the formula no consideration was given to this. Now, Kimtz (being made observant by reason of the frequent cases that he had occasion to observet where the wet thermometer stood sometimes as high, and sometimes higher than the dry, when a comparison with the hair hygrometer showed the air to be not saturated with vapor) has in- vestigated the cause of the phenomenon, and found it in the muslin covering of the wet thermometer. According to his experiments, at low temperature the wet thermometer stood too high by 0.46° C. Due Po=Pi— * This is the value that aa gave as eae ago as 13845. The form of the psy- chrometer formula, as it has since then been almost universally adopted, contains this value; it reads t’ = p, — 0.480 —__-_p BoP : so is tKantz Repertorium fiir Meteorologie, bd. 11, p. 56. t Kantz Repertorium, bd. 1, p. 54. 518 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. If this is an influence of radiation, as undoubtedly it is with dry mus- lin, the consequence would be that this influence would increase with increasing difference (t—t’). But the fact is that this influence disappears in psychrometer comparisons more and more in proportion as (t—t’) increases at least with the air in motion. This behavior de- mands still more thorough investigation. I will, however, now mention that I consider this phenomenon as attributable to a “sluggishness” of the wet bulb in the neighborhood of the point of atmospheric satu- ration, so that with very damp air the evaporation does not proceed fast enough in proportion to the passing current of air. The experi- ments also confirm this view.* If one would in the formula take ac- count of this “‘sluggishness” of the psychrometer, then a correction to the psychrometer differences t—?t’ can be so applied that it shall be a maximum for t—t/=0 and be inversely proportional to this difference. If we call v the maximum value, then this correction will in general be (are i if, with Kimtz, we take v=0°.5 centigrade, then will this correction have a sensible influence only up to a depression (t—t’) of 9° C., in fact only up to those of 6° C. I have applied this correction to my observations and obtain, then, on the average A =0.000945 instead of 0.0010415. [Pernter here alludes to his thirty observations of dry and wet bulbs and dew-point on the sum- mit of the Obir, spoken of in the first part of this paper. In these obser- vations t—t’ ranged from 39.6 C. to 09.5 C., and its values, corrected by this new formula for sluggishness, ranged from 3°.7 C. to 0°.8 C.] There remains now only an investigation of the constant @ in our psychrometer formula. The psychrometer factor is [see (E) and (1)] Sf Ke Rr Ao|_D T EDS If the air is motionless, then willa=1. For adefinite velocity of venti- lation and equal air-pressures a increases to a value that is constant under these conditions. If however the rate of ventilation remains the same and the barometric pressure varies, then we must investigate whether or not a depends on the pressure of the air. This we attain in the follow- : , : Kes: ing way; for absolute calm at both high and low pressures D is equal i to unity. In the change from calm to constant rate of ventilation K/ and D increase uniformly (at least very nearly so) whether the change goes on at high or low pressures; aK’ will always remain equal to aD. Undoubtedly, however, aK’ will not be so large at low as at high press- ure, since certainly in the latter case the mass of the arriving air is *Wiillner and Grotrian found that fiuids in the neighborhood of their points of saturation almost entirely cease to evaporate, and that even when quite far from it, between glass rods (e. g., drops of water), dissipate only very slowly and with diffi- culty, and this certainly also applies to the meshes of muslin. (See Wiedemann, Annalen, XI, p. 553 to 555; also Macaluo, Grimaldi, Gazetta Chimica Italiana, vol. xu, 1881.) METEOROLOGY. 519 greater than in the former. Therefore, also, aD will be larger for high than for low pressures; that is to say, a must be greater for high press- ures than for low. But from this it follows that —/” “Dae is smaller for high and greater for low pressures; that therefore A increases with altitude above the ocean surface. And this is precisely what my observations give for the summit of the Obir. According to the preceding, it is to be expected that a stands in a simple direct ratio to the air-pressure, so that if a, is its value for 760™™, then for any other pressure a = ae ay. = For the investigation of this dependence there are some experiments at my disposal. Chistoni, Angot, and Blanford (see the previous refer- ences) have submitted a large quantity of material for high pressures.* I have taken the mean of their determinations, and find for A the fol- lowing values: Blanford 0.000827 Angot 000851 Chistoni .000851 Mean = 0.000845 Since these comparisons, especially those of Blanford, were made with large differences (¢—?’), I have not considered it necessary to apply the correction acl ass t—t+1 Since now [the preceding formula and reasonings give| A =0,0006304 2000080 where I have assumed for Rr a mean value of 0.000055 [ which, as before shown, is especially applicable to the thermometers of the Austrian observers], it follows that for the above three series of observations a=3.0. | ; 0.000630 | 1.6. = 0.0008 £5 —0.0006350 My own comparisons on the summit of the Obir, after applying the correction ; met give A=0.000945, whence a,.=2.0. If a’ is smaller in the ratio of the diminution of pressure, then should this latter have AOA given a@=3.0 595 =2.3 and A would have been found 0.000904 iustead of 0.000943. *Since Regnault’s time the factor 0.000800 has been generally retained. Still, all later investigators have from their comparisons deduced even larger factors. Only Sworikin finds 0.000725 and Macé de Lépinay with a swing-thermometer (thermo- metre 4 fronde) even 0.000693. This latter determination seems to differ too far from the others, especially the long series of Chistoni and Angot, for me to consider it quite reliable. o 520 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR® 1883. Now it seems to me that, considering the difference of the ther. mometers and ventilators employed, this difference is easily to be ex- plained, and although still further experiments remain to be made in this direction, they can only in substance confirm this result. I will now briefly collect the results of the investigation : (1.) The derivation of the psychrometer formula under this assumption of the existence of convection leads to no result,* since the hypothesis that the air flowing past is cooled from ¢ to ¢t/ by contact with the ther- mometer bulb does not agree with the facts. (2.) The derivation of the psychrometer formula of Maxwell and Stefan for absolutely motionless air is perfectly exact for this condition. If we endeavor to introduce into the formula a modification, in order that it may also hold good for moving air, then it undoubtedly loses its precision - but does give a very approximately correct expression, that when we consider the sluggishness of the psychrometer in the neighborhood of saturation, reads as follows: reper Mel eG v =p,— P — a lows ara ace tapes | | Nig in| or if we put v= 0°.5 C. and insert the other numer = values [as given above, assuming r = 0.57 centimeters], we have: 1 ; 0.5 = p, — P 0.000630] 1 + — t—t') +——"___ Po=Pi [ eal { esd (3.) The term depending on radiation does not disappear even for rapidly-moving air. For absolutely calm air it is, indeed (for bulbs of the radius 0.57), quite as great as that depending on conduction. (4.) For equal wind velocities and barometric pressures the constant a is invariable. Assuming equal velocities, it is smaller with lower pressures and most probably in the ratio a The maximum value of a for pressures of about 760™™ results from observations as a = 3.0; therefore, in general, Pp =o.) ——. 760 This value, introduced in the above formula, gives Po=p—P 0.000630 E 4 — [ ee is aay | or for stations at low levels Po=pi—9-000843 | —t’)+-, aint | P This simple formula, as has been eee ee n, should not be made more complicated by giving the factor A some other form, since in no case will a greater accuracy be thereby attained. * If we abstain from considering as an important expression the second term within the brackets in the convection formula (D), and seek only to find for m a numerical value that corresponds to the observations, we find m—=78.0 for barometric pressure 760™™, to which (since m indicates the mass of air) it is difficult to attach any intelli- gible idea. bos aims z METEOROLOGY. * 521 (5.) From all this it results, however, that we have little or no pros. pect of attaining to an exact psychrometer formula, and therefore need not expect to obtain the vapor tension accurate to 0.1™" by means of the psychrometer. (Pernter, Psychrometer Studien.) Wild, in some remarks upon the establishment of anemometers, op- poses the statement of Dr. Schreiber that the self-recording Robinson anemometer is better adapted than Wild’s tablet anemometer by the statement of his own convictions that the latter is not only much more convenient but also more accurate; in this last particular his anemo- ’ meter seems to have exceeded Wild’s expectations, his original idea 9 fo) having been merely to devise an instrument that should be more con- venient and simple, and therefore adapted for the use of numerous stations. In simplicity and cheapness the tablet anemometer apparently cannot be excelled. Wild’s experience in northern regions shows that the self-recording Robinson anemometer cannot be kept in continuous operation owing to the cold, the snow, and frost-work, and that it is only practicable to use it at second-class stations when the observers are thoroughly drilled as at the Army Signal Office. With regard to the Hagemann aspiration-anemometer, especially as made by Nyrop, in Copenhagen, he finls that it is simple, easy to use, convenient, and accurate to read, even at night time, since the dial can be placed within the building while the conical point is established above the roof; the price of this apparatus is twice that of the tablet anemometer, and this alone is an objection to its general introduction. (Z. 0. G.M., XVI, p. 211.) H. Louis F. Melsens presented to the Congress of Electricians ¢ memoir on the lightning conductor and its history since the days of, Benjamin Franklin. The two principal forms of protection against light- ning are, first, that of Gay Lussac, who advocates a small number of conductors having large sections and raised to great altitudes; and, second, the system of Melsens, who advocates the employinent of nu- merous conductors having small sections and numerous points not greatly elevated, the whole forming a sort of wire cage. He elaborates in full the scientific reasons that have led to these two forms of the original lightning conductor of Benjamin Franklin. (2. 0. G. M., Xvi, p. 49.) Dr. K. Weirauch contributes formule and methods for the convenient’ application of Bessel’s sine and cosine formula to meteorological obser- vations in hopes that from numerous such applications one may derive values of the constants for many localities by the study of which latter further progress may be made in climatology. He gives four methods for the determination of these constants from equidistant phases, namely, interpolation by differences (two methods), parabolic interpolations, goniometric interpolations. The differences between the results of these four methods are slight but important; the last two are rigorous and preferable. (Z. O. G. M., Xvi, p. 20.) id 522 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. IV.—CONSTITUTION AND PROPERTIES OF THE ATMOSPHERE. Prof. C. A. Vogler, of Bonn, reviews the question of the variations of the amount of oxygen in the atmosphere. His own views differ so radically from Morley, and are so important in connection with many climatological questions, especially the formula of barometric hypsome- try, that further investigations and observations are necessary; the question must still be considered as undecided as to whether the varia- | tions of oxygen may not explain the formation of barometric maxima, the cooling of the lower strata, and the variations in the coefficient of the hypsometric formula, and it is too early as yet to hope for a decision. (4. OG. M., XVI, p. 175.) Hill has used the observations of Hennessey, Cole, and Hodgkinson in India towards answering the question what gaseous constituent of the atmosphere it is that absorbs the solar heat. He concludes to at- tribute this to the aqueous vapor. (Z. O. @. 1, xvu, 334.) Hill has attempted to deduce the relative absorption of heat by aqueous vapor and by dry air from observations in India; he concludes the former to be 764 times greater than the latter, but the observations appear to us searcely sufficient to establish this result. (ZO. @. M,, XVII, p. 48.) Hennessey has published in full the actinic observations of October and November, 1879, from which the above results are deduced by Hill. Tbe sky was generally covered with thin haze or dust, which must have greatly affected the results. (Z. O. G M., xvii, p. 80.) H. Miintz and E. Aubin during a visit to the summit of the Pie du Midi have investigated the quantity of nitric acid contained in the water and snow at that height. Both the methods of Boussingault and Schlésing were employed. These observations determine the location in the atmosphere where nitric acid is formed, and that, in accordance with the views of Boussingault, the nitrate of ammonia does not exist in the atmosphere in a gaseous condition, for if it did it would be dis- tributed uniformly in the atmosphere precisely as are its components, nitric acid and ammonia. (Z. O. G. M., XVIII, p. 71.) V.—SOLAR RADIATION; TERRESTRIAL TEMPERATURE. Pernter gives an exhaustive summary of the record of the Campbell- Stokes sunshine records at Vienna for 1881. The total number of hours of full sunshine was 1676.3, or 37 per cent. of the 4472 that was possible for absolutely clear weather. During the winter the greatest duration cecurred at noon, but during the summer at 11 A. M. and 2 P. M., simi- larly asin 1880, owing to the cloudiness at 1 P.M. During the summer the total sunshine in the morning hours exceeds that of the afternoon, but during the winter the reverse takes place; this is contrary to the experience of 1880. Among the totals for each month July has the maximum, 290.5 hours, or 60 per cent. of all that was possible, and Oc- oe ce ee : METEOROLOGY. - §23 tober the minimum, 34.4 hours, or 10 per cent. of the possible total. The mean cloudiness for three observations daily, at 7 A. M., 2 P. M., and 9P.™M., gives figures closely following the reciprocals of the percentages of sunshine. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 100.) Prof. J. Liznar has investigated the relation between the eleven-year sun-spot period and the daily and annual variations of terrestrial tem- perature. For the daily variation he studies observations at thirteen stations, and finds that a maximum of sun-spots corresponds to a min- imum of daily variations, but the latter occurs about two years earlier than the former, a result agreeing with the similar variation in mean annual temperatures discovered by K6ppen. Liznar has also studied the annual temperature variations, by means of three long series of ob- servations extending from 1699 to 1873; he finds a close agreement between these and the maxima and minima of sun-spots from 1698 to 1750; but for the succeeding 60 years, like all previous similar investi- gations, these relations are disturbed and even completely inverted, the maxima of sun-spots now corresponding to minima in place of maxima of temperature. The relation between sun-spots and temperature is therefore still entirely unknown. (Z. O. G. M., Xvi, p. 495.) G. von Boguslawski gives a Summary of Hann’s memoir on the tem- perature of the southern hemisphere. The latter has carefully combined a number of recent observations, and has deduced a general formula fo: the temperature of southern latitudes apparently somewhat more reliable than those of Dove (1852), Hopkins (1852), Forbes (1859), Sar- torius von Waltershausen (1865), and Ferrel (1871). He arrives at the f llowing formula for the mean annual temperature at any degree of southern latitude: Ty = 26.0° + 6.94%sing — 45.289 sin’g According to this formula the southern hemisphere is warmer than the northern for all latitudes higher than 45°, the difference amounting to 13° at parallel 60 S. latitude. Forbes had arrived at exactly the Same result, namely, 424°. (Z. 0. G. M., xvu, p. 410.) Bilwiller notes that the severest cold weather in Switzerland always occurs when snow covers the ground; and that alihough the descending currents of air in anticyclones are visibly warming the air, yet at the ground severe cold is observed. ‘‘The influence of the snow on the temperature of the lower air lies in the fact that as a poor conductor of heat it breaks the connection between the earth and the air. The tem- perature changes at slight depths below the earth are f r smaller and slower than on the surface. In December the earth is decidedly warmer than the air which is thus warmed from below. If snow lies on the ground it cuts off this supply of heat from the air. The surface of the snow cools very rapidly by radiation under a clear sky, and this loss of heat is communicated directly to the air, but only very slowly to the earth. If the snow covering is wanting, an exchange of heat occurs between air and earth, preventing such a very low temperature in the lower-air stratum.” (Z. O. G. M., xvu, p. 98.) 524 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. [As this is a matter that in 1871 and 1872 became to the writer very important in his daily weather predictions, it is allowable to remark that the amount of heat given up by the upper layer of the soil or rock to the air or snow seemed to him very small and hardly worth men- tioning in the above explanation; it rarely amounts to enough to cause the melting of an inch of snowfall into a tenth inch of water. The special low night temperature over snow and ice should be wholly attributed to the clear, dry air, free from slightest haze or dust. which allows freer radiation, and to the exceptionally large ra- diating- power of snow and ice for the red and ultra red or heat rays. The low temperature during sunshine is due to the fact that solar heat is consumed in melting ice (latent heat of liquefaction 79.) instead of warming the air (specific heat 0.267). Similarly we should abstain from assuming, as is too frequently done, that warm air flowing up cold mountain sides is cooled by contact with the earth; 7. ¢., by conduction of its heat into the earth. This is wholly insignificant in comparison with the cooling due to expansion and to the evaporation of moisture. The heat given to the air by the earth surface at midday is not conducted upwards from any depth, but is a purely surface action, by which solar radi tion is converted into heat, or the short waves of the upper end of the spectrum and beyond are degenerated to the red end and returned to the air mostly by contact, conduction, and convection—slightly by radiation and absorption. | Maquenne has investigated the absorption and dissipation of heat by foliage. The results were— (1.) All leaves dissipate a part of the heat vertically ieidenie’ upon them; this dissipation amounts to 0.25 of the total heat when the radia- tion comes from a Bourbouze lamp,®out only a few hundredths when it comes from a Leslie cube. (2.) The leaves dissipate different amounts of heat from their two sur- faces ; ordinarily the lower side dissipates more than the upper, but oc- casionally we observe the contrary. (3.) The leaves absorb a sensible proportion of the heat radiated from a Bourbouze lamp; this absorption depends upon the presence of ab- sorbents in the texture, especially of chlorophyl and water, and upon the dissipation that takes place in the interior on the surface of each cell; it is ordinarily greater on the upper than on the lower side. (4.) The thick leaves absorb more than the thin ones. i (5.) The absorbing power for the heat of (bodies of the temperature of) boiling water is very nearly equal to that of lampblack. (6.) Leaves transmit heat better in proportion as they are thinner or younger. (7.) The radiating power of leaves is for great differences of tempera- tures nearly like that of lampblack; it diminishes a little as the ineli- nation increases. (8.) The absorbing power of chlorophyl is, on the average, like that of water for the radiation from the Bourbouze lamp, and increases in METEOROLOGY. 525 proportion as one goes in one direction or the other from the heat maxi- mum. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 21:) VI.—EVAPORATION, CONDENSATION, ETC. Stefan has given a summary of his investigations, 1874-1881, into the laws of evaporation, from which we gather the following: (1.) The rate of evaporation is proportional to the logarithm of a frae- tion whose denominator is the barometric pressure and whose numer- ator is this pressure diminished by the vapor tension. (2.) The rate of evaporation out of a tube is inversely proportional to the distance of the surface of the fluid below the open end of the tube. (3.) The rate of evaporation is independent of the diameter of the tube. (4.) Within a closed tube the evaporation is observed by the bubbles that form and rise to the surface, and it is found that the successive intervals within which equal numbers of bubbles develop are to each other.as the successive uneven numbers. (5.) In hydrogen, evaporation proceeds four times as fast as in air. (6.) The amount of evaporation in given intervals of time increases as the square root of the intervals. (7.) The amount of evaporation that ascends in a unit of time from a circular surface into the air (assumed perfectly quiet) is proportional to the circumference and not to the area of the circle, assuming that there are no banks or walls to protect the edges. This is also true, to within a tenth, of an elliptical surface of moderate eccentricity, 7. e., whose ma- jor axis is not more than four times greater than its minor axis. (8.) If now the vapor, instead of collecting close above the water sur- face, rises and moves off to a distance by diffusion, then the stream lines ‘for the evaporation are hyperbolas, and those that start from the periph- ery of the circular border of the basin constitute a hyperboloid of revolution. Like all stream surfaces, this has the property that no va- por penetrates through this hyperboloid so that it can be replaced by a solid wall. Such a hyperbolic border to an evaporating dish will there- fore not diminish the amount of evaporation in still air; its proper con- struction must be determined by Stefan’s formula. As the water sur- face sinks the evaporation diminishes in the ratio of r—h to h, where r is the radius of the dish and h the linear sinking. For large values of h or where = is nearly unity, the condition is nearly the same as in a deep tube. Small surfaces evaporate more than large in proportion to their area; this latter is also true for the evaporation due to convec- tion as well as diffusion. (Z. O. G. M., xvu, p. 65). Stelling has published the results of observations by Dohrandt at Nukuss on evaporation of water, and has discussed their connection with temperature and wind velocity. He shows, first, that the observa- tions are represented by Weilenmann’s formula somewhat better than 526 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. by Dalton’s, and quite as well as could be expected from the methods of observation. The formula requires the accurate determination of the temperature of the evaporating water and the velocity of the wind at its surface, and applies, therefore, strictly to a freely exposed surface. Evaporimeters established in protected places show great departures from the computed values. Inasecond memoir Stelling shows that this formula represents with sufficient accuracy the observations made upon a free large surface of water, as in the case of his floating evaporimeter, elsewhere described. (See chapter on apparatus.) In this evapo:imeter the temperature of the water in the surrounding river often differs by one degree from that ip the apparatus, and the PAGE is that required in the Sats which reads as follows: v=AZ(S—s)+B2(S—s)w. Where w is the velocity of wind, 8S is the tension of vapor corresponding to the temperature of water, s is the tension of vapor in the atmosphere, v is the amount of evaporation, A and B are constants, = is the sign of summation. (Z. 0. G. M., XVI, p. 372.) Chistoni discusses the relative merits of two views as to the origin and cause of dew that have sometimes been held to be antagonistic to each other, viz, whether it is the moisture condensed cut of the air that comes in contact with surfaces cooled by radiation, as maintained by Wells, 1819, or the moisture freshly evaporated from the earth and plants during the night-time, and which, being too much for the air to absorb, is carried in minute particies to neighboring surfaces that are cooled by radiation and evaporation; a view apparently maintained by Fusinieri, Zantedeschi, and Cantoni. By an extensive experimental investigation Chistoni demonstrates the following points: (1.) Bodies that stand free in the air and have unrestricted radiation into celestial space cool [as to their surfaces ?| decidedly below the sur- rounding air. [{Chistoni’s experiments seem to have been conducted as a wholly independent repetition and confirmation by newer instruments and methods of those of Wells, Glaisher, Melloni, &c.] (2.) Thermometers under, on, and above the surface of the ground show that when dew is being deposited, the lowest stratum of air is always colder than the ground below and colder than the air above. The temperature of the air increases upwards [a confirmation of Fusinieri’s results]. (3.) The quantity of moisture evaporated from the earth and the lower plants, and slowly ascending to be condensed as dew on the leaves of higher plants, is very abundant. (4.) The influence of electricity claimed by Zantedeschi is not per- ceptible. (5.) If we define dew as the aqueous precipitation that takes place during the interval from sunset to sunrise, and is not rain or fog, then its two chief causes are: (1) The cooling of bodies by radiation to tem- peratures below that of the surrounding air. (2) The larger evapora- hale . METEOROLOGY. 527 tion from the earth and the plants, frequently the latter and oceasion- ally the former, is the only cause of the dew, but generally both act together. Even in cloudy nights, radiation causes a precipitation at the base of blades of grass, and in connection with the existence of the coldest stratum of air near the earth, is the chief cause of dew. (Z. 0. ean, SVL, p.- 113.) Prof. J. M. Pernter has given an exhaustive mathematical analysis of the thermo-dynamic laws of the cooling and condensation of vapor that may occur when cold and warm air are mixed together according to Hutton’s theory of rain. Wettstein has contended that not the slight- est ra‘nfall can thus be produced. Hann had already shown by an approximate computation of a special case that slight precipitation can possibly occur. Pernter’s formula and method are perfectly general, although the computations are necessarily very tedious. He concludes that only for large differences of temperature can any sensible precipi- tation occur even sufficient to form eirrus clouds, and that the quantity of precipitation computed by his formula is so small that it is impos- sible to explain any heavy rainfall by Hutton’s theory. (Z. 0. G. M., XVI, p. 421.) Woeikoff has published a memoir on the cloudiness of the skies at Russian stations based on the ten years 1870~79, of which Képpen gives ashort summary. Dividing the Russian domain into thirteen portions, from the Baltic to the Pacific, it would appear that the maximum per- centage of cloudiness generally occurs in November and amounts to 85 per cent. for the White Sea, but only 65 per cent. for central Siberia. The annual means of cloudiness show the highest percentage (72) also for the White Sea, and the lowest (31) for the Aral Sea, the next lowest being 54 per cent. for the trans-Baikal stations. In general the stations may be divided into three groups: 1st, European Russia and the Aral, where the minimum is in summer and the maximum in winter ; 2d, from Lake Baikal north and west, where the maximum is in October or No- vember and the minimum in March: 3d, the trans-Baikal and the eastern coast of Asia, where the maximum is in summer and the minimum in January. (Z. O. G. M., Xvu, p. 358.) Dr. F. Vettin, as the result of three years’ continuous observations at Berlin of the heights and velocities of clouds, publiskes a very complete analysis of cloud movements. He measured the angular velocity by a fixed camera-obscura, on whose glass back the image of the cloud is seen to pass over a system of graduation lines. The actual velocity was measured by observations of the shadows of the clouds, as pro- jected upon the earth. From these two data is deduced the actual alti- tude. For other cases he observed the time at which the cloud was first illuminated by the rising sun or last illumined by the setting sun, whence he computed the actual altitude. He concludes that with in- creasing altitude the cloud forms alter according to a very definite rule, namely: (1) thatthe lowest cloud has indefinite boundaries similar to loose 528 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. masses of fog; 174 clouds of this description were distributed in alti- tude as shown in the following table: (2) As these clouds rise their boundaries become more definite, they assume rounded forms, appear much brighter, and throw deeper shadows; 246 cases of this kind are given in the accompanying table: (3) Above these latter is a third and very differentclass; these are smaller with more delicate illumination and shadows, and are generally arranged in platoons regularly grouped in many ways, sometimes giving the heavens a marbled appearance: (4) Far above these littleclouds is a group lying as high up ascondensed aqueous vapor is any way visible, and showing the well-known forms of cirrus known as “ mare’s-tails,” ‘‘mackerel-sky” ; 139 of this class are divided into two groups, the first (4) extending between 9,000 and 18,000, and having a maximum at 13,000; the second group (5) extending from 18,000 to 33,000 feet, and having a possible maximum of 22,000 feet. These five forms of clouds, and the corresponding altitudes of maximum fre- quency have an interesting relation to the corresponding atmospheric pressures. These latter he has computed by various hypsometric for- mulz with results as given in this table. The seventh column in this table gives the average “projected ve- locity” of the movement of the clouds in feet per second deduced by pro- jecting all apparent angular velocities upon a plane surface, separat- ing the middle of each layer. } ; | er Summer -| 492] 8.5, 17 | 1] 151| 2.5 42 | 2.4! 981.6 76 '4.4| 90) 1.5] 144 8.3, 59 1 | (251) | (14.5) Autumn. 650/120 16 | 1) 231 43 37 | 2.3! 198 2.4) 70 [4.4 | 91) 1.7) 133 8.3 54) 1 |(230) | (14.3) --| T70}10. 3; 14 1 | 277| 3.7) 32 | 2.3) 149, 2.0) 63 |4.5 | 119) 1.6) 117| 8.3) 75 1 | (203) | (14.3) ---| 490! 8.4! 16! 1 | 182i 2.6, 38 | 2.3) 110) 1 6) 74 -4.55] 101! 1.4) 124' 7 6) 70 | 1 | (231) | (14. 2) ee 626 10.0, 16 | 1] 198, 3.2' 38/24 116 1 a 724.51 97) 1.5 129 8.2) 63) 1) 230 | 144 al seolenad | ete) | H. Mis, 69 34 530 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. By studying the relative velocities and durations of the cloud motion and the winds for each direction, Vettin determines approximately the motions of the masses and volumes of the atmosphere, as shown in the following, Table III, where the figures represent the product of the per- centage of duration of each movement by the total movement, but for economy of space only the nearest hundreds are given: TABLE IIJ.—felative volume of air transported by each wind or cloud-direction. 2 ab : | Direction of movement from— Resultants. rag | S) 2+ |Classobserved.| ‘J = ona | | = ripe cote Hae | = | SW. |W. [ NW.) N. NEO) OSE. |S. | ei ga Li | < - a ica) = Ay == e = |— 2 “ | Feet 0.0 | Computed ..- |........ 20 20 15 6 1 1 1 9 74.4 | 30.5 | 22.6 0.2 | Computed .-..| 41,000 | 16 18 14 7 2 it 2 8 67.0 | 25.3 | 22.8 0.4 | Upper cirrus -| 23, 000 | 12 15 13 cds 2 1 2 6 59.6 | 20.6 | 22.2 0.6 | Lower cirrus .} 12,800] 9 13 12 7 2 1 2 5 51.8 | 16.4 | 21.2 0.75 | Mackerel sky.| 7,200 | 7 10 9 4 1 if 1 3 35.0 | 10.8 | 13.17 0:86 | Cumuli -..--... SHOOOH ES Oe sale VO Ges: 3 1 1 1 2 30.4 | 9.2 | 11.8 0. 94 Lowest clouds.) 1, 600 Cia Sl GE 10 4 2 2 he at 37.4 8.3 | 15.8 1.00 | Surface wind -|.--.---.| 4 | 4° | 8 2 2 1 Piaal ehe 19.8) 87] 63 | pee WE e aolee S | Yaar ale [eas Su la Mean. 5-| ae. -aee JEG RPE SC) a ES Gy Tet ne 9 TAP 1.5) 5.3 | 52.5 | 18.1 | 19.1 For the whole atmosphere the greatest average movement is from the west; the least is from the east. In general as much air flows from the north (the polar current) as from the south, the ratio being 19.1 to 18.1, and an exact equalization must therefore occur for a direction about 2° east of north. This direction is subject to annual variation on either side of the mean. (Z. 0. G. ML, XVII, pp. 267-351.) O. Jesse criticises Dr. Vettin’s method of computing cloud heights, but apparently does not impugn the general accuracy of the conclusion. (Z. O. G. M., p. 430, XVII.) In reply to some criticisms by Prof. O. Jesse, Dr. Vettin gives further details as to the method of measurement, and shows that in the case of the cirrus clouds his results are all confirmed by the separate consid- eration of the cases in which he has determined the altitude by either of the three methods, viz, the trigonometric, the sunset illumination, or the projected velocity. Vettin also describes in detail the camera-ob- seura and the formule used in the observation and computation of cloud altitudes. The great need and general dearth of accurate cloud observations should attract observers to the use of some equivalent apparatus; that used by Vettin consisted of a camera box or tube mounted with altitude and azimuth motion. The observer looking upon the lower end sees the cloud image thrown upon a ground-glass plate by the lens at the upper end of the camera; on this ground-glass plate a divided circle is etched. The observation consists in noting the sides of this plate towards which the cloud-image moves, and also the inclination to the vertical of the axis of the camera. The observation is thus made as simple and speedy as possible, while the formule and e * y : “a : ; as METEOROLOGY. ta tables give the true direction and velocity of cloud movement vith equal ease. (Z. O. G. M., Xvi, pp. 90-92.) Prof. O. Jesse describes three methods of determining the altitude of the clouds, as follows: First, a beam of brilliant light is thrown upon some spot on a cloud which being thus illuminated is observed as to altitude and azimuth from two stations, and a trigonometric calculation gives the altitude. Second, an observer is furnished with a simple plane table divided into small squares of 1™™ each; at an observed moment the-location of the cloud is observed on this plate; the same is done a second time without change of instrument, whence results the apparent movement of the cloud. Let the observer now change his location by a known distance- perpendicular to the direction of movement of the cloud and make a third and fourth observation of the cloud’s location on his plane table and he has at once all the material necessary for de- termining height and motion of the cloud. Third method: this is sim- ilar to the preceding, except that a camera-obscura replaces the plane table. [It may be worth while to note that in 1872 and 1874 the writer presented for the consideration of General Myer a sketch of numerous methods for determining the altitude and motions of clouds, some of which at that time had already been published, while others seemed new. Among these latter were the following: First, by means of two cameras mounted on alt-azimuth circles, successive photographs of clouds are to be taken, whence their altitudes and internal changes could be determined. Second, by a vertical beam of light and the observation of the illuminated spot overhead calculate the height of the lower surface of clouds at night. Third, by a mirror movable about horizontal and vertical axes observe the apparent altitude and van- ishing point of the horizontal movement of a cloud in any portion of the sky. Fourth, by two small houses a few hundred feet apart, fitted “up as camera-obscuras, with lenses overhead and horizontal tables below, record on sheets of graduated paper the locations at successive moments of the image of clouds, whence altitudes and motions can be calculated. While this note can at present have but slight historical interest, yet the subject continues to be one of growing importance, and will, it is hoped, commend itself to the attention of the reader.| oa. G. M., Xxxt, p. 181.) Dr. W. W. Linss publishes an essay on the origin of streaky forms of cirri ordinarily known as “ mare’s tails,” polar bands, and other varie- ties. The principal striz are either homogeneous masses or they show the beautiful incipient formation known as mackerelsky. The axes of the principal striz are almost always straight lines, and often of great length ; the secondary striz are either perpendicular or parallel to the original, forming a system of equidistant wave-marks. Linss maintains that the formation of these striz is ultimately due to the relative movement of the air and the clouds under the influence of gravity and the laws of hydro-dynamics; he rejects any influence of terrestrial magnetism or 532 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. atmospheric electricity; he allows the condensation of vapor by three methods, namely, thermo-dynamic cooling, by mixture of cold and warm air, and by radiation, to be of equal importance considering the various circumstances under which these thin clouds are formed. His views are elaborated with skill and corroborated by reference to actual obser- vations. (Z. O. G. M., xvi, pp. 57-81.) Hann has collected the records of diurnal periodicity of rainfall at several European stations. Confining ourselves especially to the rain- fall, but giving a little weight to the snowfall, the records of which are so much more difficult and uncertain, Hann finds in general an after- noon maximum between 2 and 4 p. m., and a night maximum between 2and4a.m. Atsome stations a third maximum between 10 p. in. and midnight, and at one, Vienna, the third maximum between 8 and 10 a. m. At one station, Bern, the afternoon (2 to 4 p.m.) maximum does not occur, but in its place a decided evening maximum between 10 and Litpem: (4. O02 - Gas SVE, 2503.) Sprung recommends the more detailed study of rainfall in connection with the movement of barometric depressions as theoretical considera- tions indicate the great relative importance of these two subjects. To this end continuous records must be made of rain, the same as tempera- ture and pressure; he recommends that Nipher’s rain-gauge be estab. lished upon the roof, the snow caught therein being warmed by the hot air ascending through a surrounding pipe, and the rain or melted snow conducted into the measuring apparatus in the room below. The ar- rangements for measuring and recording may be devised to suit the ‘observer’s ingenuity, but Sprung recommends a method of weighing and recording similar to that adopted by him for the pressure, temperature, and moisture, which methods have proven remarkably satisfactory. (2.0. G. M., XVII, p.: 140.) Dr. A. Augustin contributes to the study of the daily periodicity of rainfall some items additional to those collected by Hann. He finds for Castelton Moor and Greenwich three maxima and three minima of quantity but only two of frequency. For New York three maxima and minima exist both in respect to quantity and frequency. In all three stations during the colder portions of the year the morning and after- noon maxima occur closer together than during the warmer portion of the year. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 235.) Dr. F. Augustin has investigated the daily period in rainfall at Prague based on twenty years’ observation; he finds as above three maxima and three minima for both frequency and quantity. The intensity of rain, hamely, the quantity per minute and the probability of rain at any minute, has the same periods as the quantity and frequency. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 243.) Billwiller, from a study of the rainfallin Switzerland in the autumn of 18381, concluded that this season, as also that of August, 1880, studied by Hann, and other cases, shows “that in fact the advance of a barome METEOROLOGY. 533 tric maximum into the region of a dry stationary depression or the pre- cursor of such (especially when the latter lies between the zones of high atmospheric pressure or when the air, blowing out from the maximum, strikes a rising surface of ground) gives occasion for heavy protracted rainfalls. The practical art of weather predictions can sometimes take notice of this correction, even if we are still far from being able to sat- jsfactorily explain theoretically the process that goes on.” (Z. O. G. Mo XVI, p. 5.) G. Mantel, of Zurich, has studied the distribution of simultaneous rain- falls throughout Switzerland. If over an interval of a days among which there are r days on which more than half of the Swiss stations report rainfall and s dayson which more than half the stations show dry weather, then the law of probabilities give us a formula from which to compute how many stations have experienced a simultaneous rainfall. The per- centage of such stations varies from 80 for the winter and spring months to 84.7 for the summer and fall, the average being 82 per cent. for the whole six years; that is to say, on any day of the year 82 per cent. of the area of Switzerland simultaneously enjoys the same weather, namely, either dry or rainy. Similar computation was made some years ago by Winkelman for Southern Germany, from which seemed to follow that a prediction of uniform weather over either of these portions of Europe is not likely to be verified over more than 85 per cent. of the area. Per- centages greater than 85 are more frequent during dry weather than during rain. (Z. O. G. M., xvi, p. 377.) J. B. Lawes, J. H. Gilbert, and R. Warrington have communicated to the Journal of the Royal Agricultural Society of England the results of their observations since 1870 on the amount and composition of rain and drainage waters collected at Rothamsted. These experiments were conducted on a magnificent scale. The drainage is measured by collect- jng-vessels placed 20, 40, and 60 inches below the surface. The general average is shown in the following table: Drainage at depths of— Interval. | Rainfall. | : |20 inches. | 40 inches. | 60 inches. LS NEES eet cers it oe a 27.34| 9.68| 9.48 7.7 Lig SS PS ea ES RSs ae a es ee oe ee 34.19 | 16. 94 18. 54 16. 90 TESTES Se Se es a ae SY een 31. 45 14. 04 14. 92 13. 24 It is not clear why the 40-inch drain should, during 187580, have collected more than the 20 or 60 inch drains. The greatest drainage occurs in autumn and winter when the evaporation is a minimum. (Z. O. G. M., xvu1, 446.) Symons quotes the following as the best results of the studies of Phillips, Bach, Jevons, Dines, Field, and others, into the diminution of 534 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. rainfall with altitude: [The physical question is indeed thus far almost. entirely resolved into an instrumental one, 7. e., what are the sources of error, or how much are the rain-gauge records affected by local pe- culiarities. | Jevons and Dines have shown that the wind eddies, due to the very presence of the rain-gauge and its support, largely affect the result. The following points, however, may now be considered demonstrated : (1.) The ratio of the rainfall on a tower and on the earth depends upon the direction of the wind. (2.) In a calm the rainfalls on a tower and on the earth are equal. (3.) For a given prevailing wind the rainfaH on the tower on the windward side is smaller than on the earth, whilst on the leeward side the rainfall is equal to or greater than that on the ground. (4.) The excess on the leeward side compensates the deficiency on the windward side. (5.) On a very large roof the rainfall at the center is the same as on the ground. (Z. O. G. M., xvu, p. 114.) Whipple has published a discussion according to a simple method of the question whether five or thirteen year periods are any ways ap- parent in the long series of rainfall records at Paris, London, Milan, &c. He concludes that no periods, and especially none so short as these, are deducible. (Z. O. G. M., xvi, p. 47.) VII.—WINDS AND CURRENTS. Prof. A. Overbeck, of Halle, has published a highly important memoir on the movement of the atmosphere on the surface of the earth. Bo y The vapor tension is given on the assumption that the air is satu- / rated at the temperature given for each altitude. pew d | RY Pressure. 3 : : Holative Temperature. | Vapor tension, Altitude. * b | Absolute. 7 B s? _ EPs, ae —— se. mm. © Cent. mm. m. a 1 750 | + 20 | 17.4 0 a: & 625 + 10 9.2 1519 o é 500 0 4.6 BETH " | 325 == 10 2.1 5665 2 ‘ 250 — 20 0.9 8808 i 125 — 30 | 0.4 14084 K6éppen enforces careful attention to the fact that sensible horizontal and vertical gradients of pressure have each their respective import- an¢ée in the atmospheric motions. He attributes both to ditferences of density, due mostly to temperature; differences in a horizontal direc- tion give rise to the general atmospheric circulation and the extensive storms; differences in a vertical direction (i. ¢., departures from a condition of stable equilibrium) give rise to local motions, such as form ONES Sree ee re METEOROLOGY. s 543 cumulus clouds, water spouts, tornadoes, &c. “ In respect to the rate of diminution of temperature with ascent there is a notable difference between the front and back of a normal depression moving eastward. In the front part the south winds bring warm air, and even more in the middle than in the lowest atmospheric strata, because the currents move faster at an altitude, and because their direction is different, for _ they flow both from the south and from the minimum, bringing with - them the latent heat of the condensation of the precipitation going on within the inner portion of the depression, while the cooler air on the earth’s surface is drawn in from the regions that have not yet been reached by the minimum. Therefore, here the temperature diminution, with altitude at least in the lower half of the strata, is slow; but the general excess of heat over the region causes a general gradient directed outwards and a slow ascent of the air, the result of which is cloudy sky and continuous precipitation. In the rear of the depression it is otherwise. Here the wind in the middle strata of the atmosphere has, indeed, in general, the same direction, but the swifter motion of the upper layers and the contact of the lower layers with the surface of the earth still warm from the preceding mild weather [and the rapid evaporation of freshly fallen rain] cause even here an important dif- ference in the relations of the upper and lower portions of the stream of air, and especially a decidedly more rapid cooling of the upper re- gion; a very rapid fall of temperature with ascent for the lower half of the atmosphere, is the consequence. Hence the air in the rear of a minimum acquires the characteristic interchange of shower and sun- shine, due to the many local upbursts of the warm lower strata over the whole region where cold air is in the neighborhood of warmer, moister air to the eastward.” A third type of gradient is that presented by the high or anti cyclonic areas, within which the temperature gradient and atmospheric motions are, in general, directed downwards, but the lowest stratum, or sixth, the part of the atmosphere which, of course, has been stopped in its descent, its warming and its drying is found moving slowly outwards. In such anti-cyclones the perfect freedom from clouds favors the radia- tion of heat from the earth’s surface (in winter and at nights), produc- ing such great cooling as to lead to complete inversion of the normal vertical distribuuon of temperature and to the formation of fog in the lowest part of the stratum. K6ppen concludes as follows: “The cold over the continents directly causes the increased density of the air and the initiation of barometric maxima and their descending air currents. For even although the temperature does not suffice to explain the aver- age distribution of pressure with latitude, and mechanical influences have to be added thereto, still for the annual variations in the pressure over continents and ocean, the temperature is the deciding factor.” (Z. OG, M.,.xvi, p. 92.) Dr. W. Koppen, in discussing the question of the monthly range of 544 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. the barometer, states that Kaimtz had already, in 1834, in his Lehrbuch, graphically presented the lines of equal barometric ranges, a method that has been neglected until in most recent times, when Felberg (1878) and Képpen (1882) have published contributions to this subject not- withstanding the difficulty of obtaining uniform or homogeneous results for many countries. K6éppen has been able to make a very extensive collection, fairly representing the whole northern hemisphere, and with numerous points of comparison in the southern hemisphere, from which we extract the following table of mean monthly barometric variability: Summer. Winter. Latitude N. ee ee Ocean. | Continent. | Ocean. | Continent. WOR OE ee nee oh a eos ee A ae 5 (3) 6.5 (4) | 5 (3) 6 (4) Ries Ste eee en ee ears 6 (6) 8 /(6) | 5 (4) 6 (5) DOGS oN ONet Lo SRS Ts Sets SE Saree 8 11 6 8 (Rm CLs ee SAS RNC ON Cone op ples eek oe erect 16 13 9 11 (10) AO eee ee Se REL OIC RN ee dans 29 18 16 lee, Spe SA as pone Panes REC Re Re eee 38 25 25 14 GUNS dg tr ea RU as al ed 45 31 28 | 19 70 = : 40 33 25 18 By comparing the figures in this table with values based on dynam- ical formule due to Ferrel and Guldberg, K6ppen concludes that the great difference between the mean variability over the land and sea is to be referred to the variable influence of the earth’s rotation in differ- ent latitudes and the resistances offered by the surface of the earth to the movement of the air. He finds that in winter the quantity of air passing over any latitude in a unit of time is the same in all latitudes, but in summer the quantity is sensibly diminished north of latitude 10°, perhaps because of the greater quantity of vapor and latent heat in the tropics. The hypothesis that the friction increases the barometric variation especially explains the relative variations, which are greater on sea than on land in latitudes between 30° and 70° north, but at the equator are smaller on sea than on land. Finally, the inflow of air at the earth’s surface, or the outflow in the outer strata is approximately equal in all latitudes during the winter, but in summer diminishes, first rapidly then slowly for increase in latitudes. The general proportionality of the barometer variations to the mean barometric gradient gives us further corresponding variations with the mean velocity of the wind, &¢, (2505 G. MM... XVIil, p.' 7.) IX.—GENERAL AND LOCAL STORMS. K6ppen has published a chart showing the frequency of and princi- pal paths pursued by centers of barometric minima for the region be- tween the Rocky Mountains and the Ural. His charts are based on the ' METEOROLOGY. 545 q publications of the Army Signal Office, Hoffmeyer, Loomis, and the Deutsche Seewarte. He seems not to have aceess to the similar charts prepared by the present writer for the statistical atlas of the United ‘States Census Bureau and published in 1875. K6ppen’s charts show seven principal centers through which storm tracks are most likely to pass. Of these, two are in America on the parallel of 45°, and the cen- tral over Lake Superior and New Brunswick, respectively. Three be- long to the North Atlantic, near the parallel of 65°, and central, respect- ively, in Davis’s Straits, southwest of Iceland and northwest of Norway, The principal European center is central over Denmark and Southern Sweden. For all these six centers thirty or more barometric minima . occur.on the daily morning charts in the course of the year for each square of 5° in latitude and 10° in longitude. [This statistical presenta- tion of the frequency of storm centers seems imperfect in that it takes no account of the movement of the storm center from one morning until the next; it is simply a summation of what appears on the daily morn- jug maps. Thecharts of the United States statistical atlas, on the con- trary, were based upon actual storm tracks whose paths could be confi- dently laid down by means of the three or more tri-daily maps of the Army Signal Service ; this atlas therefore presents the total frequency for the whole year and the whole day. A new edition of these charts, embodying all the work of many years, has been prepared by Finley and is now in press.| In some remarks on his charts Dr. Képpen states that the minima which pass from America to the English Channel re- quire about six days to travel from the 70th to the 10th meridian of longitude, whereas the trans-atlantic storms require nine or ten days, but the irregularity in the rate of storm movement is very great, both by the ocean and the land. The greater part of the storms of America pass over Greenland and Iceland, and daily weather telegrams from islands and borders of the North Atlantic Ocean would afford to Euro- pean meteorologists a practically useful synopsis of the condition of the weather for the guidance of the navigators. K6ppen also remarks that the decided excess in the number of storms passing to the north of Europe over those passing to the south not only affects the climate by the characteristic warm and damp south and west winds, but is also the foundation of the so-called Dove’s law of the rotation of the winds according to which,in Europe, they change most frequently in the order east, south, west, north, or, as frequently expressed, shift with the sun, namely, in the direct and not the backward order of rotation. In Green- land, on the other hand, where the observer is iocated on the left-hand side of the storm-path the change of wind is in the opposite direction, or they are said to back against the sun or from the west through the south andeast. (Z. O. G. U., XVII, p. 257.) J. Spindler has published a collection of paths of typhoons in Chinese and Japanese waters, compiled for the years 1858 to 1878. He finds the turning-point in their parabolic paths about 30° north latitude. H. Mis. 69-35 546 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. August and September are the months of greatest frequency for Japan- ese typhoons, but September and October for Chinese. The velocity of movement is slowest near the apex, and is rather slower in the China than in the sea of Japan. (Z. O. G. M., XVU, p. 336.) Dr. Assman, director of the local meteorological station at Magde-- burg, whence special weather predictions are daily issued, has paid special attention to the phenomena of local thunder storms, and urges the establishment of more numerous stations whence data may be de- rived for plotting the phenomena of the storm as a whole at short in- tervals of time. His continuous records of temperature and wind show sudden oscillations of temperature that seem to him to indicate local evclonic movements. (Z. O. G. M. XvII,-p. 337.) A. Richter has analyzed the observation of thunder-storms during four years, 1877 to 1880, at seven stations in the department of Glatz. A thunder-storm is considered to have passed over any locality when the interval between the thunder and lightning is not greater than sixty seconds. The annual and daily periodicity is shown in the following table of frequency : I. i. III. Average | Total | Month. frequency. | Hours. number. December 0.1 |! 12 - 3a.m...... 6.0 | Uniform high pressure........----.--. Bh January -- 0.0 || 3a.m.- 6a.m-.-..-- 3.1 || Central region of maximum........--. 2.1 February ~ 0.0 || 6a.m.— 9a.m...... 2 bul Nieariaimaxiniume se s-cecs. eee ecesee ants | March 0.5 | 9a.m.-12noon..-.. 12.2 | Zone between maximum and minimum. 43.0 Aprile 1.7 || 12 - 3p.m....-- 45.6 || Neara minwmum......- .-------.----- 18.5 May.---- == 4.7 3p.m.— 6p.m..---- 63.5 || Central region of minimum........-.. 4.7 June.-.---- 8.6 6p.m.- 9p.m.-..--- 50.7 || Umtorm low pressure........-...----- 2.8 Sihyossece 6.4 || 9p.m.-12 midnight. 26.9 | August -. 5. 6 | —_—_—— September 2'5 | Totaly sseueeh 210.5 October. - 0.6 | November 0:1 | Wear...... 30. 4 | The distribution according to the location of the centers of maximum and minimum pressure is shown by the third table. When the tem- perature is above or below the normal, the storms occur as follows: O*9°t below: normals 2S ee eater see eae ae seo cnic Re meee eee eee aiake Serie ceenanees 17.9 O-90vahove Normale. wee S oteeice Secon ne See seats se Slee ee Sete siese cae nae eee ian PAO above MOLMALs a. oc tenes nese Oe eeR ae ee Dice siarsnier ecie se aineieiseeienieiets 26.9 A=GOra OVO NOLIN Bl ss =- 5 ssw ae eu emia ete seo este ore aie ere oe ore a eter et a errs ieee rene rater 12.5 (Z. O. G. M., XV, p. 329.) Dr. W. Holtz describes ingenious experiments to prove that tornadoes and water-spouts, &c., are caused by electricity, and are not the me- chanical effect of rotation of a portion of the atmosphere. He however quotes equally beautiful experiments of Xavier de Maistre (Bibl. Uni- vers, 1832, vol.L1; Silliman’s Amer. Jour., 1834, xxv), that fully support — the mechanical theory. (Z. 0. G. M., XVII, p. 370.) Se Saree METEOROLOGY. DAE X.—ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM, AURORAS, LIGHTNING. Freeman has investigated the electrical state of a plate or dish trom which water or other fluids is being evaporated. He finds no trace of electrification, and concludes that atmospheric electricity cannot be due to evaporation. L. J. Blake has investigated the electrified condition of the particles of vapor, both condensed and uncondensed, after they ascend from the evaporating dish, and finds that these also give no sign of electrifica- tion, whence also it follows that atmospheric electricity cannot be due to aqueous vapor. (Z. 0. G. M., XVU, p. 482.) Dr. Spring has attempted a more satisfactory hypothesis as to the origin of atmospheric electricity, replacing the widely-prevalent view according to which the atmosphere communicates its own electricity to the cloud particles at the moment of their formation by condensation, so that a cloud contains the total quantity of electricity that was pre- viously in the corresponding atmosphere, but in a higher degree of tension because of the change in condition of the aqueous vapor; this electricity now collects itself on the surface of the cloud which dis- charges itself toward a similar cloud or the earth’s surface like any electrified conductor. Spring shows that this explanation is both un- satisfactory and contradictory to well-known physical facts. Starting with certain observations in the Swiss Alps, where Spring had some- times found himself in the center of a thunder-storm, and had per- suaded himself that a cloud does not act asa single conductor, but that the individual drops or hail-stones retain the electric charge, he concludes that possibly the electricity may arise partly from the ascent of the moist air, partly from the friction of the falling drops, and the atmosphere. The intensity of the development of electricity increases with lower temperatures. Dr. Spring quotes in support of his views similar observations by Osborne Reynolds in 1878 and the observations made by H. Spring in 1875, which confirmed the view that the combina- tion of numerous small crystals into one larger is accompanied by enor- mous increase in the intensity. Dr. Spring made special experiments as to the possibility of elec- trifying a solid body by atmospheric friction. He found a decided electrification of a brass sphere produced by blowing against it a warm dry current of air, the effect being somewhat proportioned to the ve- locity of the current and the atmospheric pressure; he further observed that rapid variations took place in the electrification of the sphere while the current remained constant, as if a process of charging and dis- charging were alternately going on between the current and the sphere. (Z. O. G. M., XV, p. 486.) Prof. H. von Bezold describes an electric phenomenon occurring on February 19, 1882, which consisted essentially in a peculiar cloud reach- 548 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. ing from an altitude of 45° down to the south and southwest horizon, from which an intense mild light beamed in streaks resembling auroras, while the mass of the cloud exhibited a glow sointense that it was illu- minated as brightly as a whitewashed wall illuminated by a street lamp. This appearance continued until 8 P.M., shifting to various parts of the horizon, and demonstrably was not due either to the moon or the reflected lights of the city. Bezold concludes that this was a case of self-illuminated clouds similar to that described once by Sabine. At the same time in the distant Bavarian forest occurred a few peals of thun-— der with lightning flashes. [Similar phenomena have been observed in Washington, generally at the end of a period of warm southerly winds when cold westerly winds with light flurries of snow occur. Another form of lightning without thunder has been twice observed by the writer, namely, in Chicago, July 4, 1859, and again in Washington in July, 1874, on both of which occasions the heavens from the zenith to the horizon were for an hour or more brilliant with innumerable simultaneous flashes, stealing with comparative slowness in all directions, apparently on the under surface of a layer of thin, high clouds. No thunder was heard, nor did any rain fall.] (Z. O. G. M, xvut, p. 146.) Prof. Adams has studied the magnetic storms of March, 1879, by means of photographic traces at Lisbon, Coimbra, Stonyhurst, Vienna, St. Petersburg, and Bombay, in the northern hemisphere, and Mel- bourne and Mauritius, in the southern. He finds that a diminution of the horizontal intensity occurs with an eastern departure of declination greater at St. Petersburg than at Kew, and vice versa, an increase of horizontal intensity occurs with a west departure greater in St. Peters- — burg than in Kew. Adams also investigated the much stronger perturbations of August 11-14, 1880, by means of the curves from Lisbon, Kew, Vienna, St. Peters- burg, and Toronto. Vienna and Toronto show for hours together strong similarity in their curves and then change to great diversity. The to- tal magnetic intensity at St. Petersburg was changed by nearly one- eighth of its whole value. Any cause that is insufficient to explain the origin of the whole terrestial magnetism could scarcely be considered as sufficient to explain such enormous perturbations. (Z. 0. G. M., Xv1I, pp. 15, 16.) . Wild has also expressed his views as to the origin of terrestial mag- netism and magnetic storms in connection with a study of magnetic storms of 1880, August 11-14. From autographic records of Pavlosk, Kew, Zikawei, and Melbourne he concludes: (1) The disturbance of all three elements, declination, horizonal and vertical intensity, began and ended simultaneously. They originated, therefore, from either one single force or from forces that simultaneously began and ended. (2) The individual curves of disturbance at neighboring points, as Kew and Pavlosk, show some similarity, but those of Zikawei and Melbourne METEOROLOGY. 54Y are entirely discordant. (3) The characteristic features of this storm are as follows: Character of disturbances. Stations. Declination. Inclination. Total intensity. Kew. Strong. None. — Slight. Pavlosk. Moderate. None. Very strong. Zikawei. Slight. Strong. None, (4) The magnitude of the perturbation for each element, especially the intensity, and for each day, shows a diurnal period closely coinciding with normal daily variations. (5) It is probable that the sun is to be considered as the principal agent of the periodic and non-periodic vari- ations of the elements of terrestrial magnetism. However, it must be conceded that this conclusion would require that we assign to the sun a magnetization per unit of mass about 13,000 times that of a unit of the earth’s mass, and that at times of great perturbations this varies to and fro by thirty times its own amount; but our present knowledge only justifies our attributing to a unit of mass in the sun a magnetic power 2,000,.times that of a unit of the earth, even supposing the sun to be a fully saturated steel magnet. Therefore, it appears not likely that the . sun alone is the cause of the normal and abnormal variations. It will be more intelligible to adopt with De La Rive the view that the earth is a Leyden jar, whose inner covering is the surface of the ground, and whose outer surface is the highly attenuated upper strata of air, and that dis- charges from pole to equator in the atmosphere and also from pole to pole within the earth continually take place. The ordinary charges cause the normal deviations of the magnet, the abnormal cause the per- turbations. We have, then, only to assume that the daily position of the sun has an influence upon the direction and force of this discharge, and that the abnormal stronger discharge is caused by special occur- rences on the sun. In this way the cause is made present on the earth, and the sun comes in only as the medium releasing it and setting it into activity. Observations on,earth currents have been instituted in Pav- losk that will perhaps be further explanatory of this matter. (Z. Oc G. M., XVU, p. 14.) Prof. H. Wild has investigated the so-called magnetic weather of Jan- uary 30-February 1, 1881, by means of the records of magnetographs, at eleven places in America, Europe, India, China, and Australia. He finds that the perturbations began everywhere simultaneously, so far as the time scales enabled the moments to be determined. .--'...... Dp ? Suva so amr en see otek Ag (a) 107. 66 Geyniam We Sheek 2 Di T4AGRONN | Soditaumyae eee ane Na (a) 22.995 Rieu o2 2 oo 5 SL Ss E 166 Strontium ..........-| Sr (a) 87.3 @Maorine.:....5.-....| F (a) 19:06 |) Sulphur’-... 25... 2. 8 (a) 31.98 (Gallium ..-..-...-...) Ga 6979 . || Fantalum « <2.2 22.52.) -Ta 182 COIS L (oper a ae ee Au 196. 2 ellurinm, ste clare 4127.7 Elydrogen 22.2 -..2..- H (aye. OO!) TPerbiam~ ese)! Tb ? fimrlinitieess2=. occ 23-2 In (a) 113.4 Mhalliimrpssene.ss oe Tl 203.7 cline 52 oe wif I (a) 32655455) bhorinny 25 eee Th 221,96 ridin nies a5 se Ir (a) 192.5 Phahiumes- nesses Tr ? MrOneeeyae Oe oe eies case Fe (CBN eta a ratel oye Fay ba tL said a EE Se 9 Sn hbARS Banthanum <...:-.:- La 138.5 PRicamiim ss =e Ti 50, 25 Weadhans oe eee fee Pb (@) 206-39) so luranimn ee se el seen e U 939.8 Lithium... Sol Eat ae cae eel emt | (CQ) cele Wanadiomy. =. eee mvs Cayenlesl Magnesium ~..-.2-.-2 Mg 23.94 || Wolfram (Tungsten) LW: (a) 183. 6 Manganese alerate sy Mn Dan Sel varcang WV Shenae see see 2 LS VO ens eee Her (a) 19958 || Ntterbiumr-.--- sss. Yb 172.6 Molybdenum .--...-. Mo (a) 95.9 Miter eso. eee Y 89.6 Mosandrium .......- Ms bf (AS Qe a Eee | oV Ani 64, 88 INNGR Gliese yee cle et Ni (a) 58.6 ZITConiMN se ete ee ee 90, 4 *See determination in preceding pages. t Perhaps Te = 126.3. Experiments at remarkably low Temperatures ; Solidification of Alco- holand of Nitrogen.—The long-recognized distinction between condensi- ble vapors and permanent gases was forever abolished in December, 877, by the memorable experiments of Messrs. Cailletet and Raoul Pie tet. These gentlemen, working independently and with different ap- pliances, succeeded, it will be remembered, in liquefying oxygen, nitro- gen, and even hydrogen, in glass tubes. Since that date S. Wroblewski 634 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18383. and K. Olszewski have taken up the study of the liquefaction of gases with great success. In 1882 Cailletet had recommended liquefied ethy- lene as a means of producing intense cold; this liquid at the normal pressure boils at —105°C. Having compressed oxygen in a tube, and cooled it by means of liquid ethylene to —105°, Cailletet observed, when some of the gas was allowed to escape, ‘‘a tumultuous ebullition which lasted for an appreciable time and resembled the projection of a liquid into the cooled portion of the tube,” but the liquid and gas could not be separated. By means of a new apparatus, the Austrian chemists sub- jected comparatively large amounts of gas to a pressure of several hun- dred atmospheres, and thereby obtained some remarkably low tempera- tures ; carbon disulphide and alcohol were solidified, and oxygen was easily and completely liquefied. By allowing the liquefied ethylene to -boil in a vacuum a temperature of —136° was obtained, as determined by the hydrogen thermometer. Oxygen begins to liquefy at a pressure of 26.5 atmospheres and a temperature of —131.6°, and forms a colorless transparent liquid, very mobile, and yielding asharp meniscus. Carbon disulphide freezes at about —116°; alcohol becomes viscous like oil at about —129°, and solidifies to a white mass at —130.5°. These results were communicated to the French Academy of Sciences early in the year 1883, and on the last day of the same year Wroblewski announced the following additional results. Having succeeded in obtaining liquefied oxygen in large quantity he employed it as a refrigerating agent. When liquid oxygen is suddenly allowed to evaporate by release of the pressure it does not solidify like carbon dioxide, but it leaves a crystalline residue on the bottom of th® apparatus. Whether this is crystallized oxygen or not, Wroblewski> 7 was unable todetermine. In attempting to measure the temperature ot oxygen in a state of ebullition he made use of a thermo-electric method which admits of the registration of all the sudden changes of tempera- ture of the medium and is also very sensitive. Wroblewski gives the temperature of —186° C. “as the first approximation to the temperature produced by the sudden release from pressure of liquefied oxygen.” By submitting nitrogen to this low temperature, the compressed gas allowed to expand a little solidifies and ‘ falls like snow in crystals of remarka- ble size.” Experiments of this character demand great resources and are not - devoid of danger. Wroblewski states that since the apparatus is partly constructed of glass great inconvenience is caused by the constant dan- ger of serious explosions, and having experienced several accidents he and his assistants always work with masks before their faces. (Comptes rendus, XCVI, 1140 et seg. Also, abstracts in Am. Chem. Journ., V, 146, and Chem. News, XLrx, 13.) Radiant Matter Spectroscopy, a new Method of Spectrum Analysis.— William Crookes gave the Bakerian Lecture before the Royal Society CHEMISTRY. 635 on May 31, 1883, under the above title, and presented a novel and re- markable extension of investigations into the phenomena of radiant matter with which his name is identified. Many substances when struck by the molecular discharge from the negative pole ina highly exhausted tube emit phosphorescent light, some faintly and others with great intensity. On examining the emitted light in the spectroscope most bodies gave a faint continuous spectrum, and more rarely the spectrum of the phosphorescent light is disecon- tinuous. Especial attention has been directed to the latter phenomenon. After a long and laborious search for an unknown substance which gave under the above conditions a bright citron-colored band or line, Crookes found it belonged to yttrium. In the course of his investigations he worked up 10 pounds of North Carolina zircons, 2 pounds of orangite and thorite and about 15 pounds of North Carolina samarskite, review+ ing the characteristics of all the rare earths known to exist in these min- erals and those awaiting confirmation. Crookes finally narrowed the elusive substance down to yttrium, the spectrum of which in a radiant matter tube is very beautiful, consisting of an intensely brilliant citron band and two bright green bands together with fainter lines not charac- teristic. The best results are obtained with the sulphate; pure yttria precipitated by ammonia does not phosphoresce in the slightest degree. The extraordinary delicacy of this new test for yttrium is such that ‘the element was detected when present in one-millionth part. Crookes found in pink coral 1 part of yttrium in 200 parts; strontianite contains 1 in 500; calcite 1 in 10,000; ox bone 1 in 10,000; an earthy meteorite 1 in 100,000 ; and tobacco ash 1 part in 1,000,000. The wide distribution of yttrium is notable. (Chem. News, XLVII, 261.) Felation beticeen the Composition and Absorption Spectra of Organic Bodies —Gerhard Kriiss and S. GQconomides have examined the ab- sorption spectra of indigo and its methyl, ethyl, nitro-and amido-de- rivatives, with a view to determining the relation between chemical composition and absorption spectra. They conclude that the introduc- tion of methyl, oxymethyl, ethyl, and bromine in the place of an atom of hydrogen moves the absorption bands to the less refrangible end of the spectrum, and the introduction of the nitro and amido groups has an opposite effect. The apparatus employed was the universal spec- troscope, by A. Kriiss of Hanover, having fine adjustments. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XVI, 2051.) INORGANIC. Boron.—The substances obtained by the action of aluminium on boric acid at a very high temperature have been variously described by chemists; Deville and Wohler obtained yellowish or reddish regular octahedra, containing variable proportions of carbon and of alumin- ium, together with lustrous black scales or plates containing 2.4 per cent. carbon. On the other hand, Hampe assigned to the black crystal- 636 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. line plates the formula Al B, and to the yellow octahedra the formula ©,A1,B.,. These discrepancies have led to an examination of the sub- ject by A. Joly, who states that at the elevated temperature used by Deville and W6hler only very small quantities of the large black plates were obtained, but at a lower temperature, with small quantities of material, smaller black crystals united to the yellow ones are formed. It is this substanee that Deville and Wohler probably analyzed, while Hampe reduced boric acid in clay crucibles at a much lower temper- ature and obtained large black crystals containing but little carbon. Joly also finds that the yellow crystals AlB, dissolve readily in boiling nitric acid without @ residue, but the brown or black crystals obtained at a high temperature leave a carbonaceous residue when treated with the same oxidizing agent. The products of the reduction of boric acid by aluminium therefore embrace : (1) AIB, yellow hexagonal plates. (2) AlBg, large black crystalline scales. (3) Yellow cubical erystals containing Aland C. (4) Several compounds of carbon and boron not further character- ized. (Comptes rendus, xcvil, 456.) Hydrated Carbon Disulphide.—All who have worked with carbon disulphide are familiar with the peculiar cauliflower-like growth of a snow-white substance which forms when the volatile liquid is filtered or otherwise exposed to rapid evaporation. Berthelot, Wartha, Ballo, and others, have studied this substance, and the latter has recorded some experiments to prove that the white exerescence is a hydrate and not solid carbon disulphide. Prof. I’. P. Venable, of the University of North Carolina, has studied anew this body and obtained evidence that the amount of moisture in the air has a decided effect upon the ease and rapidity of its production. No fixed law, however, could be deduced. The following experiment is conclusive and confirms Ballo’s results: An open-necked bell-jar, ground, greased, and tightly fitting to a ground-glass plate was provided with a large rubber stopper pierced with two holes. Through one of these openings a calcium chloride tube 250 mm. long was inserted, and through the other-a glass tube with a glass rod working tightly in it and rendered air tight by rubber tubing. Inside the bell-jar was placed a watch glass contain- ing purified carbon disulphide supported above a vessel of fresh con- centrated sulphuric acid. A small strip of previously dried filter paper was attached to the end of the glass rod within the bell-jar, and when this was lowered it dipped into the volatile liquid; the liquid rose rap- idly in the pores of the paper, but even after some minutes no sign of a solid incrustation was visible. When, however, the sulphuric acid was replaced by water the solid began to form immediately after the lowering of the paper. By drawing air through the jar until it was filled with aqueous vapor the solid hydrate suddenly and completely melted away. During the evaporation of the carbon disulphide in an ee CHEMISTRY. 637 open shallow dish the liquid reached a temperature of —6°C. By for- cing air over it the thermometer fell to —19.5° C. (Am. Chem. Journ., v, 15.) Blue Chloride of Sodium.—This mineralogical curiosity occurs in small quantity in the salt mines of Stassfurt and the cause of the blue colora- tion has been studied by B. Wittjen and H. Precht. As already no- ticed by F. Bischof, the blue salt imparts no color to its aqueous solu- tion; and the authors of this paper find that no coloring matter can be extracted by ether or by carbon disulphide. §S. W. Johnson has sug- gested that the blue color is due to sodium subchloride, but these au- thors find that the color is not at all affected by heating the salt at 100° C. in chlorine gas. They therefore conclude that the blue color is an optical phenomenon. Pulverization and heating to 280° C. destroys the color, probably owing to the liberation of confined gases. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XVI, 1454.) The Fluorine compounds of Uranium were made the subject of inves- tigation in 1866 by H. Carrington Bolton. Ditte (Comptes rendus, 91) afterwards prepared the same bodies and gave analytical data differ- ing widely from those of Bolton. Arthur Smithells has now gone over the same ground and confirms the results previously obtained by Bol- ton, and shows that the compounds claimed by Ditte have no existence. (J..Chem. Soc., March, 1883.) Nitrogen Selenide has been prepared by M. Verneuil, by acting on a mixture of selenium perchloride and carbon dichloride with dry am- monia gas. Its composition is Se.N, and it forms a light orange amor- phous powder, insoluble in water, ether, and alcohol, slightly soluble in benzene and carbon disulphide. When dry it detonates if struck with a hard body, and explodes if heated to 230° C. (Bull. soe. chim., XXXVII, 548.) Occurrence of Thallium in Sylvite and Carnallite—Julian Schramm gives the following analysis of sylvite from Kalusz: La PORT Fra el OTT Te ee 99. 250 peli SEENTR OE Tis 10 Ce eR aR Agate ieee ers 0. 594 ROAM RIRENG CTUIGELO Go oooh cs =, zy nica a in ene 0. 012 APR PEUUDIAY SELUIIEAGE soe 52 oo 0 oa aie we 0. 143 PRE M C HOLT es oo \ 5 aia ds.o aoe a eee traces. 99. 999 The author found thallium in carnallite and in kainite; in the former it is associated with rubidium, but the latter contains neither rubidium nor cesium. He thinks this association gives additional grounds for classifying thallium with the alkali-metals: sodium, lithium and cesium occur together on one hand, and potassium, rubidium, and thallium on the other. (Liebig’s Annalen, CCXIX, 374.) 638 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1882. Researches on the Compounds of Gold.—P. Schottlinder has published an extended research on gold and its salts, in which he describes sey- eral new bodies and examines with care reactions already known. Au- ro-potassium bromide forms a very stable salt, neither deliquescent nor efflorescent and obtained in large crystals. The action of manganous acetate on neutral gold chloride yields a mixture of metallic gold and hydrated oxide of. manganese of varied composition. Hydrated gold monoxide Au";O0, (OH), forms a light crystalline powder of a pure black color. Hydrochloric acid decomposes it with formation of the metal, trioxide and water. Nitrate of goldtrioxinitrate, aurylnitrate, acid aurylsulphate and its potassium compound and gold monoxysulphate Au"SO, are further described in this paper. Schottlinder regards gold as divalent. (Liebig’s Annalen, CCXVIU, 312.) Manufacture of Aluminium.—Secular papers and scientific journals contain notices of improved methods in the industrial preparation of aluminium, some of which were patented in the year 1882, and great claims are advanced as respects the economy of the processes. Alumin- ium, it will be remembered, was first obtained in its metallic state by Friedrich Wohler in 1826, who decomposed the chloride by sodium, and although (with one exception) aluminium is the most abundant metal known, thirty years elapsed before its industrial preparation was suc- cessfully accomplished. This was done by Henri Sainte Claire Deville, who improved greatly the preparation of sodium, the most expensive ingredient used. Still the metal has sold at the relatively high price of $20 per pound, and its physical properties are such that its produce: tion at cheaper rates is most desirable. James Webster, an English chemist and metallurgist, has devised the following method for the preparation of alumina for the purpose of manufacturing the metal: Three parts of alam are mixed with one part of coal pitch, and the mixture heated to 200° to 260° for about three hours. The mass is cooled, broken into pieces, and hydrochloric acid of 20 to 25 per cent. is poured over them, giving rise to the evolution of sulphuretted hydrogen. When this gas ceases to come off about 5 per cent. of charcoal powder or lamp-black is added and enough water to make a thick mass. This mass is thoroughly broken up and mixed in a mill, and then worked into balls weighing about one-half kilogram each. These balls are per- forated to facilitate drying, and dried first in a chamber heated to 40° and then in a furnace at 95° to 150°. The balls are then placed in re- torts and heated to low redness for about three hours, while a mixture of two parts of water vapor and one of air is passed through, so that sul- phur and charcoal are converted into sulphur dioxide and carbon diox- ide and thus escape. The dry residue, consisting of aluminium, oxide and potassium sulphate, is removed from the retorts, cooled, ground to powder in a mill, and treated with about seven times its weight of water, and after boiling by means of steam, the solution containing potassium sulphate is run off and evaporated to dryness. The residue, consisting en CHEMISTRY. 639 of aluminium oxide, is washed and dried. At the Aluminium Crorn Metal Works, in Hollywood, under the direction of Mr. Webster, another method is said to be employed. The mineral beauxite, an aluminium- ferric hydrate, is ignited with sodium carbonate, and the sodium alumin- ate formed is decomposed with carbonic anhydride, yielding pure alu- mina; this is then heated with charcoal in a current of chlorine, forming a double chloride of sodium and aluminium, which is finally decomposed by sodium, furnishing aluminium. It is said that a ton of the metal costs by this process only 8500, whereas it formerly cost $5,000. At Webster’s works, it is said that the output of metal amounts to 20 (!) tons per week, a manifest exaggeration. J. Norris, of Uddington, near Glasgow, has obtained a patent for man- ufacturing aluminium by treating an intimate mixture of alumina and charcoal with carbonic anhydride at a low red heat, areaction which is regarded as doubtful by many chemists. Morris claims that the car- bonic anhydride is reduced to carbon monoxide by the charcoal, and that in turn reduces thealumina. The metal is obtained by this process as a porous, spongy mass which is melted and poured into molds. At Salindres, France, about 2,400 kilogrammes of aluminium are man- ufactured annually. The process is the old one of decomposing the double chloride of aluminium and sodium by metallic sodium, some cry- olite being added as a flux. The chief value of aluminium at present is in tempering or giving strength and a surface or body to alloys, bronzes, or metals so they will not corrode. In the bronze ;7455 part of aluminium tends to soften the brittle and hard nature of the baser metal. The tensile strength of alu- minium bronze is great; it bears a strain of 42 tons to the square inch, or 12 tons more than the best Bessemer steel. It is said to be une- qualed for pianos and telegraph wires. Dr. Gegring, of Land street, is reported to have invented an inexpensive process for coating ordinary iron with aluminium, and the coating can be given any color desired. (Dinglev’s polytechnisches Journal, and other sources.) Present Conditionof the Soda Industry in Europe.—Mr. Walter Weldon read an important paper on the above subject before the London section of the Society of Chemical Industry, on January §,1883. He stated that in recent years manufacturers of soda by the Leblane process had failed to reap satisfactory profits and in some cases had met with financial ruin. Of twenty-five alkali works which were in operation in the neighbor- hood of Newcastle-on-Tyne a very few years ago only thirteen are in operation now, and of the other twelve, not fewer than eight have been actually ramanntled: in utter despair of its ever again being possible to manufacture soda in them by the Leblanc process except at an absolute loss. In Belginm the industry has entirely ceased; inFrance, Germany, and Austria the industry still exists, being protected by impost duties. Aided by manufacturers in all parts of the world Mr. Weldon has 640 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. compiled the following table of the present soda production in various countries : Present soda production of the world. F Peeetaed soda Countries. eee eee aN Totals. per cent. of oe ee total soda. GreatiBritaine- seen see 350, 000 52, 000 432, 000 | 12.0 Brances ea woe tees Pees ee ces 70, 000 | 57125 27 2a 44.9 Gelrmanlyien ssh aoe ee eece cee see 56, 500 | 44, 000 100, 500 43.8 PATISUMEMG Ss one tan cits cae eee 39, 000 | 1, 000 40, 000 | 2.5 Belem MF acco. t caine qeseieail oo ee senereeins 8, 000 8, 000 | 100.0 UmitediStatesssseescecscseceoes Ngee ae iw 1, 100 1.100 | 100. 0 MTS ea seh ee ee eee oe | 545, 500 163, 225 708, 725 | 23.0 From this it is evident that the total quantity of soda now being man- ufactured annually is nearly 709,000 tons, of which more than 163,000 tons are made by the ammonia process. Although the ammonia process was first proposed by Dyer & Hem- ming more than forty-seven years ago, it is less than seventeen years since it has been carried on industrially. In 1866 Ernest Solvay, of Brussels, began to produce soda by the ammonia process at his works near Charleroi; in 1866~’67 he manufactured 179 tons; this increased to 11,580 tons in 1876~77, and 53,400 tons in 1881-82. Mr. Weldon estimates that about 40 per cent. of the total soda now made on the con- tinent is produced by the ammonia process. In England, also, the com- petition of the ammonia process has attained a magnitude which is alarming the makers of Leblane soda. Another circumstance is injuriously affecting the Leblanc system, viz, the loss of profits on the by-products. Originally, soda was the only commercial product of the process, the hydrochloric acid being turned to’no account. In time a demand grew up for chlorine, and the hydrochloric acid began to be utilized profitably ; then the soda ceased to be profitable, and became a by-product in the manufacture of chlo- rine; next, this source of profit failed and recourse was had to the “ burnt ore” or *‘ pyrites cinders ” obtained as a secondary product by roasting pyrites for sulphuric acid, and which is treated for copper, silver, and to some extent for gold. The Rio Tinto Company, of Spain, owning enormous deposits of pyrites, intend establishing in France and else- where works for manufacturing Leblanc soda, and expect to derive their profits neither from the soda nor from the chlorine, but from the copper and the residual oxide of iron. The extension of the ammonia process of manufacturing soda has led to devising plans for obtaining ammonia itself more cheaply, and it is - now collected from coke ovens in France and in England, and from blast furnaces in Scotland. From the latter source alone Mr. Weldon CHEMISTRY. 6A1 estimates the amount of ammonium sulphate produced at 20,000 tons per annum. To maintain the Leblanc industry in England, Mr. Weldon thinks the manufacturers must have cheaper pyrites, and must perfect methods for the recovery of sulphur from the alkali waste. He regards favorably the Schaffner and Helbig process for sulphur recovery, which consists of two operations indicated by the following equations: First operation. CaS + Mg Cl, + 2H,O = HLS 4+ Ca Cl, + Mg HO. Second operation. Ca Cl, + Mg H,0, + CO, = Mg Cl, + Ca CO; + H,0. In closing his interesting paper, of which we have given but a brief summary, Mr. Weldon states that the immediate future of the English Leblanc soda industry is somewhat gloomy, but suggests the motto nil desperandum. (Chem. News, XLVI, 67 et seq.) Phosphides of Platinum.—Prof. F. W. Clarke and Mr. O. T. Joslin have examined the bodies resulting from the fusion of platinum and phos- phorus, a process suggested by the discovery of Mr. Holland, recorded in our previous report. Professor Clarke finds proof of the Leieree of three simple phosphides, PtP,, PtP, and Pt,P, and of a double phosphide, Pt;P;. The monophosphide by airkie of its insolubility in aqua regia, is the most noteworthy. The compound Pt,P is malleable and is anal- ogous to Pt,P previously described, and called in the patent of Mr. Holland “ fused iridium.” The compound PtP, is probably identical with the phosphide described by Schrétter and obtained by heating the finely divided metal in phosphorus vapor. (Am. Chem. Jour., V, 231.) Researches on the Complex Inorganic Acids.—Dr. Wolcott Gibbs, in two additional papers, continues his investigations in the remarkable field mentioned in our report for 1882. He describes the preparation and properties, and discusses the structural formula of hypophospho-molyb- dates, hypophospho-tungstates, phosphoroso-molybdates, vanadio-mol- ybdates, vanadio-tungstates, phospho-vanadio-molybdates, vanadio-va- nadico-molybdates, vanadio-vanadico-tungstates, phospho- vanadio- va- nadico-tungstates. It is impossible in the brief space at our command to give an adequate idea of these remarkable researches. The evident beauty of many of the well crystallizing complex salts, the exceedingly difficult problems in analytical chemistry which are involved, and the admirable theoretical discussions conjoined, make these papers masterpieces in the science. (Am. Chem. J., V, 361 and 391.) Manufacture of Potash Alum from Feldspar.—In 1882 Mr. John Spiller published an article proposing to manufacture potash alum by treating H. Mis. 69-——41 642 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. feldspar with sulphuric acid and a fluoride, the latter being either fluor- spar or eryolite. Both these minerals can be had very cheaply, but Mr. Henry Pemberton, jr., undertakes to show that the difficulties of the process are such as to leave little or no margin for profit. The weak point in the process is the quantity of acid required, and in the produc- tion of three tons of bulky, insoluble, comparatively useless calcium sul- phate for every ton of alum made. Cryolite is shown to be too expen- sive, and moreover yields the wrong alkali, soda in place of potash. And if the necessary potash were added, enormous quantities of Glau- ber’s-salt would be left upon the manufacturer’s hands. (Journ. Frankl. Inst., 1883.) Analyses of the Geyser Waters and Deposits of the Yellowstone National Park. Dr. Henry Leffmann has published analyses of the waters of several of the Yellowstone Geysers and of the incrustations forming in their vicinity. From these we select the following: I.—Pearl Geyser. Grains in imp. gallon. Calcium sulphate |. 2. So. 2c ee. Se Se 1. 40 ® Sodium sulphate o63 8 sos Ce eae iio 1. 89 Sodigm ebloride 55.02) swe sis oe Secs He 61. 39 Sillea eo gace eck he ie 8 pe A oie SSE 7. 84 72, 52 At the bottom of the bottle containing this water impure gelatinous silica was found yielding after drying over strong sulphuric acid: Per cent. GH To) See Np ae REN Sah ORE cae eT, LAMA a) hs 4.9 PSTTG A eo sreeren Ne cre etn ere foot Sie an Tenet 79.1 AMINA? 625-5 cals cece See eee eee tors traces Herric OMe ot eerie ce See. er eee traces Osler ORIG Ge esate oe cee et ee traces II.—Opal Spring. The water of this spring is opalescent and on evaporation gelatinizeg before becoming dry: Grains in imp. gallon. NOGInM ChloTid@.: A=. heer oes eee ieee 72.18 Calciam:- sulphate ..2 2c. soe eiane tele 3. 22 Caleiam chloride 22. 2 ane hee eae cee ee 4. 06 PSLIU Ga facie Scie Soc rele ae eee ee eee eee ee eee 53. 76 CHEMISTRY. 643 IIl.— Water of Mammoth Hot Springs. Grains in imp. gallon. SOCIINE ROIPHALG. 22h so es. Sig 34, 44 DOCIULCHIORINes. go tS fae oe Oe See ee 18. 90 Caletim Carvonate +. 2.2.66 lhc core ee 17. 92 Magnesium carbonate ~..0.:-.<2..2. 255. 8. 68 BGS ec ee) yoda ere ee 3206 83. 30 IV .—Deposit from Mammoth Hot Springs. Calenim Carbonate <2. =. - o2s-eeeane oc 96. 80 Magnesium carbonate ................... 1. 36 Aiming and iron sj... -- Bee oe OAT 0. 45 SSTLIECE Main ale ade Cette ae ie RM eld 1 Dae 0. 25 NUE ee So ro ee On ore Ids cag 0. 50 99. 36 (Am. J. Sct., CXxv, 104 and 351.) Decomposition of Minerals by Citric Acid. H. Carrington Bolton has continued his investigations as to the action of organic acids on minerals, and publishes the following results. The acid employed was citric acid, which, as the author has shown, has a power of decomposing minerals little less than that of hydrochloric acid ; the effect of prolonged action at ordinary temperatures was espe- cially considered. Of the sulphides, chalcocite showed signs of decom- position at the end of ten days, and after several months a partial solu- tion of a green color was obtained; pyrite was attacked in eight days, and a month later a solution of a reddish yellow color was obtained ; chalcopyrite acted similarly ; one gram lost 11 per cent. after fourteen months’ contact with the citric acid solution. Of the oxides magnetite and limonite were strongly attacked in eight days, hematite yielding moreslowly. Of thesilicatesdatolite was the most quickly decomposed, yielding gelatinous silica after twenty-four hours; hornblende, pyrox- ene, almandite, epidote, and serpentine were decidedly decomposed in eight days, and after fourteen months the last named yielded a dry, ge- latinous mass. The feldspars are unequally attacked under like condi- tions ; labradorite yielded most easily. Muscovite and biotite yielded very slowly, the !atter showing signs of decomposition the sooner, mi- nute scales and slimy silica peparatte after two years’ subjection to the acid solution. 644 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Dr. Bolton gives the following: Table showing approximate relative disintegration of rock-forming (and. associated ) minerals by citric acid in solution. Quickly decomposed. | Slowly decomposed. Vers stoma deena Not decomposed. ; P . Carbonates. Serpentine. Orthoclase. Quartz. Phosphates. Pyroxene. Oligoclase. Corundum. Prochlorite. Hornblende. Albite. (?) Spinel. Chry solite. Labradorite. Biotite. Beryl. Nephelite. Garnet. Muscovite. Barite. Epidote. Tourmaline. Tale. (?) Vesuvianite. Staurolite. Kyanite. Pyrite. Hematite. Limonite. Magnetite. Gypsum. (?) ! (Proceedings Am. Assoc. Adv. Science, XXX1, 271.) New Explosives.—Pyronome is the name given by M. Sandoy to a new explosive mixture consisting of 69 parts saltpeter, 9 of sulphur, 10 of charcoal, 8 of metallic antimony, 5 of potassium chlorate, 4 of rye flour, and a few centigrams of potassium chromate. These are to be mixed in an equal volume of boiling water, and the mass evaporated down to a paste, dried and powdered as wanted. This mixture is said to be cheaper than dynamite, but its manufacture and use must be attended with considerable danger. S. H. Hinde proposes a new explosive mixture composed of 64 parts of nitro-glycerine, 12 of ammonium citrate, 0.25 of ethyl palmitate, 0.25 of calcium carbonate, 23 of coal, and 0.50 of sodium carbonate. The special advantages cf this complex mixture do not appear. A new explosive has just been patented in England by Dr. C. W. Siemens. The compound is a mixture of saltpeter, chlorate of potash, and a solid hydrocarbon, and is suitable both for mining purposes and fire-arms, while, if ignited in the open air, the combustion takes place slowly and imperfectly, and, therefore, without danger. The new com- pound, which has about the same density as ordinary gunpowder, and is very hard, possesses with equal volume more than double the ex- plosive force of the latter. The intensity of explosion can be regulated at will by varying the proportions of the ingredients and the size of the granules. (Munroe’s Notes on the Literature of Explosives.) Use of Limed Coal in Gas-making.—Prof. J. Alfred Wanklyn read a paper on the above subject before the British Association for the Ad- vancement of Science at the Southport meeting in August, 1883. As the gas manufacture is usually carried on, only a small part of the nitrogen contained in the coal is recovered in the form of ammonia; Rie en Pa oo a) CHEMISTRY. 645 whereas the coal might furnish 25 to 50 pounds of ammonia per ton of coal, only 5 or 6 pounds are actually obtained. By mixing a little lime with the coal before introducing it into the retort, the yield of ammonia is greatly increased, and at the same time the gas formed loses its fetid odor. The invention is patented, and is known as Cooper’s liming process. At the Beckton gas-works, where a series of experiments were carried on, the addition of lime produced a gain of 36 per cent. of ammonia. Besides this, there is a gain in tar and a diminution in the sulphuretted hydrogen and carbon disulphide. So marked is the latter feature that the lime purifier proves to be superfluous where the process is used, and gas-works, being no longer offensive, cease to be a public nuisance. (Chem. News, XLVI, 174.) ORGANIC. New Substances from Plants.—Jamaica dogwood (Piscidia erythrina) has been examined by Prof. Edward Hart, of Lafayette College, who obtained therefrom the active principle, piscidia, C.H,O0,. This body is insoluble in water, but crystallizes from alcohol in small colorless four or six sided prisms, which have a melting point of 192° C. It is easily soluble in benzene and in chloroform. Its physiological effects are that of a direct sedative, narcotic but refreshing. (Am. Chem. Journ., V, 39.) Algin is the name given by Edward C. C. Stanford to a new substance obtained from some of the commoner species of marine alge, and which possess valuable properties as a gelatizer. It has characteristic reac- tions distinguishing it from gelatin, from starch, from dextrin, pectin, gum arabic, and other gummy bodies. Dilute mineral acids generally coagulate it when in solution. Mr. Stanford thinks it can be used in the soluble form asa stiffener of fabrics; although not so rigid as starch, itis tougher, more elastic, and more transparent. It may also have some value as a food on account of its nitrogenous character. Its ag- glutinating power enables one to convert non-coherent bodies, such as silica, lime, magnesia, alumina, chalk, graphite, and charcoai, into solid hard blocks. A new “carbon cement” for covering steam-boilers con- sists of 97 per cent. charcoal and 3 per cent. algin. Inits insoluble form algin resembles horn, and may be used as a substitute for it. Algin is an excellent non-conductor of electricity, and can be used also in emul- -sifying oils and fining wines and spirits. (Chem. News, XLVI, 254.) A new acid has been obtained by Von Lippmann from the juice of the beet root. The incrustations formed on the pans in which beet juice is evaporated contains, besides citric, aconitic, tricarballylic, and malonic acids, a new acid which appears to be identical with the oxycitric de- scribed by Pawolleck. The new acid forms needle.shaped crystals, soluble in water, alcohol, and ether, having the formula C;H,O;. It is tribasic, its barium salt having the formula (CsH;O,)2 Ba, 5 H,O. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XVI, 1078.) 646 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. Saponin was discovered in 1809 by Schrader in the root of Saponaria rubra. Stiitz prepares it from the bark of Quillaja saponaria as follows: 10 kilograms are extracted with water, the evaporated liquid is dried, pulverized and extracted with hot alcohol, which on cooling yields flocks of saponin; these are purified by re-solution in hot alcohol. In this way 10 kilograms of bark yielded 200 grams of saponin. It is a white, amorphous powder, neutral and tasteless. It is soluble in water in all proportions, and even when dilute the solutions froth like a soap solu- tion. It has the composition expressed in the formula CjgH390;, but con- tains also 2.4 per cent. ash, consisting of the carbonates of magnesium, calcium, and potassium. Experiments lead the author to conclude that the constitution is expressed in the formula C;,H»; (OH);0.03. (Liebig’s Annalen, CCXVIII, 231.) A New Source of Mannite—L. Lindet has found this sugar quite abundant in the pineapple of Brazil, amounting, he claims, to 1 per cent. of the fresh fruit. The mannite is extracted from the fermented pulp by neutralization with sodium carbonate and evapoation to the consist- ence of molasses. On cooling small needle-shaped crystals, having a slightly sweet taste, are obtained; purified by solution in boiling al- cohol they give the true characters of mannite. He intends to pros- ecute the study with a view to ascertaining whether the mannite was formed during the fermentation or whether it exists already formed in the fruit itself. (Bull. soc. chem., eu 65.) Saccharone and Saccharine. ae fe action of calcium hydrate on dex- trose and on levulose Péligot obtained in 1880 a body having great sta- bility and crystallizing with facility, which he called saccharine. Hein- rich Kiliani, by acting on this body with concentrated nitric acid, has obtained a new substance, which he names saccharone, and which is both a lactone and a monobasic acid. Consequently both saccharone potassium C,;H,;OK and saccharonate of potassium Cs;H,0,K, are obtained when saccharone is treated with potassium, the latter at a boiling tem- perature. By the action of hydriodic acid on saccharone, saccharinic acid, a dibasic acid is obtained, having the formula CgH,.0,. (Liebig’s Annalen, CCXVIII, 361.) Borneol from Camphor.—Professors C. Loring Jackson and A. E. Menke recommend the following process for preparing borneol from camphor on account of its simplicity, rapidity, and economy. The cam- phor is dissolved in about ten times its weight of common alcohol, and an excess of sodium is added in pieces of somewhat less than a gram at atime. By working with quantities not over ten grams the action can be carried on in an open flask without cooling. As soon as all the sodium has disappeared, part of the alcohol is distilled off and water added, which precipitates crude borneol. This is freed from sodium hydroxide by washing with water, and crystallized from hota Icohol. 1 f a ‘ ee oe CHEMISTRY. 647 * - Borneol melts at 1979; 10 grams of camphor yield 9.5 grams of borneol being 94 per cent. of the theory. (Am. Chem. Journ., V, 2790.) Researches on Atropine.—In 1863, Kraut decomposed atropine by a boiling barium hydrate solution into atropic acid C,H,O., and tropine C,H,;NO,; the formula for the latter base was corrected by Lossen, who found C;H,;NO, and showed that atropic acid was only a secondary pro- duct of the decomposition, the primary being tropic acid C HQ. Ladenburg in late researches has affected the synthesis of atropine by the dehydration of tropate of tropine. The best results were obtained by the action of dilute hydrochloric acid. The identity of the artifi- Gal atropine with that extracted from atropa belladonna was fully estab- lished by chemical and physiological experiments. Tropate of tropine exerts no action whatever on the eye, even in a 10 per cent. solution. (Liebig’s Annalen, CCXVII, 74.) The Oxidation of Substitution Products of the Aromatic Hydrocarbons.— Dr. Ira Remsen is pursuing his investigations grouped under the above title, and publishes two additional contributions on the oxidation of betacymenesulphamide and of paradipropylbenzenesulphamide in which he has been assisted by Mr. W. C. Day and Dr. E. H. Keiser, respect- ively. By treating betacymenesulphamide with potassium pyrochromate and sulphuric acid a body was obtained which proved to be sulphamine- parapropylbenzoic acid having the formula— C,H, Cut} SO,NHz (0) CO.H (p) Under similar treatment paradipropylbenzenesulphamide yielded as a principal product alphasulphaminepropyllbenzoie acid, the formation -of which under the conditions given proves that the sulphamide group exerts a partial protective action upon one of the propyl groups. The protection, however, is not perfect, because sulpho-terephthalic acid is formed at the same time. These results are in perfect harmony with the views advanced some time ago by Dr. Remsen as to the law of pro- tection. (Am. Chem. Journ., V, p. 149.) Synthesis of Salicin.—Prof. Arthur Michael, of Tufts College, has the honor of accomplishing the first synthesis of a glucoside occurring in nature. Having obtained helicin synthetically by the action of sodium salicylaldehyde on acetochlorhydrose, he submitted the helicin to the action of sodium amalgam, as suggested by Lisenko, and obtained a body the properties and composition of which agree perfectly with natural salicin. (4m. Chem. Journ., V, p. 171.) A new Synthesis of Anthracene.—With the expectation of obtaining an isomeric tetraphenylethane, Anchiitz and Eltzbacker examined the ac- tion of aluminium chloride upon a benzene solution of acetylene tetra- 648 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1883. a bromide. The resulting hydrocarbon was easily isolated and proved to be anthracene. This synthesis establishes the fact that the middle carbon atoms in anthracene are directly united, a supposition generally held but not previously determined by experiment. The formula of anthracene is accordingly represented thus : CH Oe | >on. CH (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XV1, 623.) Pyridine and Quinoline Bases.—The close connection which has been established between several important alkaloids and the derivatives of pyridine and quinoline is being confirmed by numerous researches. All the evidence accumulated thus far is in harmony with the view that many of the important alkaloids are derivatives of pyridine, a constitu- ent of bone-oil and of coal-tar, which, moreover, has been obtained by the dry distillation of nicotine. The relation between these alkaloids and pyridine is somewhat analogous to that between the aromatic com- pounds and benzene. According to Korner pyridine is benzene in which one of the six CH groups is replaced by N, and this view has recently found additional support. The investigations of Kénigs, Skraup, and others go to establish a close connection between quinoline (and its homologues lepidine, dispo- line, and tetrabiroline) and such alkaloids as quinine, cinchonine, and their isomers. (HE. H. K. in Am. Chem. Journ., V, 60.) Constituents of the Petroleum of Galicia.— According to Lachowicz, the petroleum of Galicia contains a large number of hydrocarbons of the marsh-gas series, isopentane, normal pentane, hexane, both normal and secondary, and heptane, together with several of the aromatic series, benzene (benzol) toluol, isoxylol mesitylene, and the so-called Vreden’s hydrocarbons. Members of the ethylene series are entirely wanting. (Liebig’s Annalen, ccxx, 168.) | Products of the Dry Distillation of Wood at low Temperatures.—Prof. C. F. Mabery has examined the more volatile products of the dry dis- tillation of wood in the manufacture of acetic acid. The greater part of the product consists of methyl alcohol and methyl acetate; besides these are found acetic aldehyde, acetic acid, acetone, acetal, dimethyl- acetal, methylethylketone, and allyl alcohol, together with traces of the higher ketones. A new constituent is methyl formiate. The higher boiling oils contained furfurol, and by the action of alkalies upon it a small quantity of pyroxanthin. The proportion of acetone was small. (Am. Chem. Journ., V, 256.) The Constituents of Ozokerite.—Ozokerite from the island Tscheleken, in the Caspian Sea, has been examined by F. Beilstein and E. Wiegand. CHEMISTRY. 649 The raw material formed a brownish-black, sticky mass, almost wholly soluble in boiling benzine. On adding alcohol to the filtered solution most of the paraffine precipitates and the oils remain in solution. By treating the powdered ozokerite with ether nearly all the oily matters and coloring matters are removed from the paraffine, and this may be further purified by solution in benzine, boiling with animal charcoal and precipitation by alcohol. By repeating this process, shining white crystals, having a definite melting point, were obtained, which the authors name Lekene, from the island above referred to. Lekene has the following properties: Melting point, 79°; sp. gr., 0.93917. Soluble in 124.3 parts of benzine at 15°, 1334.8 parts of chloroform at 16°, 9534 parts of alcohol at 16°, and 15257 parts of absolute acetic ether at 16° C. It distills unaltered in vacuo, and hence may be obtained by this process on a commercial scale. Nitric acid diluted with two volumes of water scarcely attacks lekene at all; fuming sulphuric acid converts it quickly into a black, pulverulent mass. The analysis made gave fol- lowing figures: C=85.23 per cent., H=14.72 per cent. It does not ap- pear whether lekene belongs to the series C, H»,, or C, Hop 2. The oil extracted by ether from the ozokerite was purified by distillation in vacuo and gave 86.13 per cent. C. and 13.70 per cent. H. Its sp. gr.= 0.8450 at 18.59. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XV1, 1547). Researches into the Nature of Resins.—Prof. Arthur Michael has in- stituted an investigation into the action of aldehydes on phenols, and arrives at the following conclusions: (1) Mixtures of aromatic aldehydes and phenols are converted by mere traces of acids, more or less rapidly, according to the acids used, into white resins; (2) the re- sorcin-benzaldehyde resin is converted by the further action of dilute acids into two crystalline compounds, one of which is isomeric with the resin when the latter is dried at 100° C.; (5) fixed alkalies and potas- sium carbonate convert a mixture of resorcin and benzoic aldehyde into a resin; (4) the properties of the crystalline compound C.,H»O, resem- ble those of the so-called ecrystallizable resins. From its alkaline solu- tion it is precipitated by acids in the form of a resin, which separates in form of the original crystals from the alcoholic solution; (5) the above results make it extremely probable that the formation of at least some of the resins in the vegetable world is due to aldehydes and phe- nols coming in contact with the contents of the cells, as both of these classes of compounds are undoubtedly among the products formed in plant-life. (Am. Chem. Journ., V, 338.) Coniferin, the source of vanillin, has been found by Edmund O. von Lippmann to exist in the woody fiber of the sugar-beet. It is believed that the coniferin does not exist to any great amount ready formed in the woody fiber, but that it is produced by the decomposition of lignin in the process of extraction. Whether or not the sugar-beet will ever become a commercial source of vanillin has not been determined. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XVI, 44.) 650 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18383. NOTES. A simple and convenient apparatus for rapid gas analysis has been devised and described by Arthur H. Elliott. By its aidacomplete gas analysis can be made in less than one hour. For details and figure of the apparatus we refer to Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, Vol. II, No. 12, 1883. Carbon monoxide is conveniently prepared, according to E. Noack, by passing carbon dioxide over zinc dust heated in a glass tube below a red heat. In one hour 18 liters of CO, yielded 11 liters of CO. Dr. W. Spring continues his researches on the formation of chemical compounds by great pressure. He has prepared, under pressure of 6,500 atmospheres, compounds of arsenic with zinc, lead, copper, tin, and sil- ver direct from mixtures of the constituents. Also many metallic sul- phides in like manner. The composition of bleaching-powder has again been investigated by Lunge and Naef, who find that calcium chloride is decomposed at ordi- nary temperatures by hypochlorous acid, with the production of CaOCl, and Cl, These chemists hold to the formula Cl — Ca — OCI, first pro- posed by Odling, as the most correct. (Ber. d. chem. Ges., XVI, 840.) Water is decomposed by both sulphur and arsenic, according to C. Z. Cross and A. F. Higgin, yielding both the oxygen and hydrogen com- pounds of the elements. Dr. J. Lawrence Smith gives in the American Chemical Journal., V, p. 44, details of his method of decomposing and analyzing samarskite. The powdered and dried mineral is decomposed by fluorhydric acid and the insoluble portion treated with concentrated sulphuric acid and the con- tained earths converted into oxalates, which are then submitted to- careful analysis. Samarium, discovered in 1878 in samarskite by Lecoqg de Boisbaudran, has been carefully studied by P. T. Cleve, of Upsala. He obtained the pure oxide, Sm, O; and several salts, including the chloride, Sm Cl. 6 H,O, chloroplatinate, nitrate, Sm (NO,);. 6 HO, acetate, oxalate, and sulphate, Sm, (SO,)3.8 H,O. The salts in general agree closely in composition with the didymium salts, but are distinguished by a peculiar spectrum com- posed of several bands, four in the blue part being characteristic. (J. Chem. Soc., 1883, 362.) The emission spectra of scandium, ytterbium, and erbium have been examined by Th. Thalén. Scandium presents a notable spectrum, hay- ing many lines of medium intensity in the orange and the indigo, and very fine brilliant lines, forming several groups, in the yellow, green, and blue portions. Pure nickel, capable of being wrought, rolled, and hammered, is now made by Mr. Joseph Wharton at Camden. I) MA\ \ \\ iif® - GMB, ay tens Lipa, mY my ww Uff { Ml Ki My y nly Prem Cs nen AY aw /{\\ AWS Ys YA A DW \ SS aN =a : ; Fig. 4.—McClernard Mounds, Sangamon County, Illinois. the east of South Fork. high. PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. It SE. 4 See. 33, in Clear Lake Township, is a group of five mounds. lies on a hillside sloping toward the stream, and a quarter of a mile to The following plan shows grouping location : Mounds 1 to 3 are round, 50 or 60 feet in diameter, and 18 or 20 inches nigh. Mounds 4 and 5 are about 50 feet long, by 50 wide, and 18 inches Lines drawn through the center of 4 and 5, from end to end, These mounds are 100 feet apart. No would meet in the center of 1. exploration was attempted. The ground is in cultivation as grass Back on the bluff, to the land, but the mounds are still quite distinct. east a short distance, was the prairie; to the west a quarter of a mile, South Fork ; on the north and south small spring branches. WATSON MOUNDS. A. quarter of a mile south of the bridge, where the Clear Lake wagon- road crosses Sangamon River, in Clear Lake Township, on the SE. 4 of The following sketch will the SE. 4 See. 21, is a group of four mounds. show the location of the mounds with regard to each other, as well as to the surrounding natural features: ante mn Ts = Y Al ZB gr Yi WN Wy ype LD Ww 4D SNe Lh 1) tt Wea WA My M a Hl il IN) MD, yy Ly ony C Ui! AIS AW) q A Fic. 5.—Watson Mounds, Sangamon County, Illinois. Mounds 1 to 3 are round, 1 and 3 being probably 30 feet in diameter by 18 inches in height, while mound 2 is about 40 feet in diameter by Mound 4is about 40 feet long, east and west, 18 or 20 inches in h@ight. Mounds 1 and 2 are by 20 feet in breadth, and 18 inches in height. probably 50 feet apart; 2 and 3 are 150 yards apart; 3 and 4 about 100 The mounds follow the line of the bluff feet. No excavation was made. north and south. The ground at the south end of the bluff has been MOUNDS OF SANGAMON COUNTY, ILLINOIS. 831 in cultivation for several years, but the mounds are still quite distinct. The eastern face of the bluff is almost perpendicular. Between the bluff and river is low, marshy ground, but the river bends in to the bluff a little farther up. Mound 4 is in the timber, but tillable land, springs, and the river are near. LYON MOUNDS. Up Sugar Creek, about a mile from its junction with the Sangamon River, are two mounds, They are situated on the east bank of Sugar Creek, on a bluff 30 or 40 feet high, on the SE. 4 of the NW. 4 See. 28, in Clear Lake Township. The following sketch will give some idea of their situation: wi ly WY kD Teyana Fic. 6.—Lyon Mounds, Sangamon County, Illinois. Mound 1 is 50 feet long, north and south, and 30 feet wide; mound 2 is 70 feet long, east and west, and 50 feet wide; they are each 16 or 18 inches high, and are 180 feet apart. No exploration was made. The timber has been removed from the land, but the ground has not yet been explored. The builders of these mounds found in their vicin- ity an abundance of good water, hunting, fishing, and tillable land. FARR MOUNDS. On the north bluff of Sugar Creek, about 2 miles above its junction with Sangamon River, on the NE. 4 of the NE. 4 Sec. 29, in Clear Lake Township, is a group of nineteen mounds. The following plan (Fig. 7) shows the manner of grouping: Mound 1 is 80 feet, and mound 2 is 100 feet long ; they are each 40 feet wide and 2 feet high. Mound 5 differs from other mounds in that a pro- jecting arm from the northwest side connects it with a smaller mound. All the other members of the group are round, and range in diameter from 20 to 50 feet, and in height from 10 inches to 2 feet. Mounds 1 $32 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. and 2 are on the southern hillside and in the woods. The others are on land that has been in cultivation for twenty years, and stand on the top of the bluff. The writer made an excavation in 1, but found nothing. ph ‘i AN \\ AS \\\ \Kt \\\ \Wi’ 2 rss, AWA wv ot " a \ i) ai! Yuta nv i; yr oe \S iy ly : \\ ay \\ ~ hh yi yp yu wi < i \' ue ss Ss y LT ny Uy Hi \ = Fic. 7.—Farr Mounds, Sangamon County, Illinois. No particular arrangement of material was noticed. On mound 2 is a white-oak stump, 3 feet in diameter, and a standing white-oak tree 18 inches in diameter. On the end of the bluff where mounds 14 to 19 stand have been found some very large stone axes, weighing 9 or 10 pounds. To the north of this group, a quarter of a mile or less, was the prairie; on the north side of the bluff, springs; on the east, a spring branch; on the south, Sugar Creek. MUD LAKE MOUND. At the south end of Mud Lake, in Clear Lake Township, on the NE. 4 of the NE. 4 Sec. 17, is a mound that may with some propriety be called a ‘ connecting link” between the mound builders and the modern Indians. It is situated on the bluff 40 or 50 feet above the water, and MOUNDS OF SANGAMON COUNTY, ILLINOIS. 833 about the same distance to the westward of the lake. Originally the bluff was covered by a heavy growth of timber, but it has now been cleared, and will no doubt soon be in cultivation. Only one mound was found, the diameter of which is about 30 feet, and the height 18 inches. The material used in its erection seems to have been camp rubbish, broken pottery, bones, shells, &e. Near the mound are several depres- sious in the earth from 4 to 8 inches in depth and about 30 feet in di- ameter. In the memory of the “oldest inhabitant,” Indian wigwams have stood over similar depressions. It is not unreasonable to conclude, then, that this mound once stood in the center of an encampment of In- dians, by whom it was erected through the daily accumulation of rub- bish, bones, shells, &c. RICARD’S LAKE MOUND. Between Spring Creek and a small lake knewn as Ricard’s Lake, in Gardner Township, on the SW. 4 of the NW. 4 See. 25, is a mound sit- uated on aridge. The lake is about 200 yards south of the stream, and the mound is midway between thetwo. The diameter of the mound is 50 feet and the height 5 feet. The material with which it was built was taken from the surface of the earth immediately around the mound. If any particular arrangement of the material was attempted it was not apparent in the hasty and very imperfect excavation made. At adepth of 3 feet, at the center of the mound, two bowls of rude pottery were found. They were side by side, and though the settling of the dirt, after the completion of the mound, had broken the bottom and sides somewhat, it had notoverturned them. What they may have contained when first buried could not be ascertained from the inspection given after exhumation. The excavation was not carried deeper, and no other relics were discovered. The ridge on which this mound is located has never been cleared, although some of the larger trees have been cut for lumber. CONVERSE MOUNDS. On the west side of Spring Creek, and about a quarter of a mile from its junction with the Sangamon River, in Springfield Township, on the SE. 4 of the NE. 4 Sec. 10, was, at one time, a group of mounds. They were situated probably 100 yards back from the stream, on a broad hill- side sloping toward the south-and east. The ground has been cleared of the forest, and under cultivation so lopg that almost all traces of the mounds have been lost. —S “yy 7; \\ Wy, 77; “Vig “Uj BN pa ai Ge rh a, Mf] Zone Janae AN i I \\\ Sketch of earth-work in Highland County, Ohio. The small stream 0 once washed against this side and formed an irregu- lar embankment 12 feet high, with a steep declivity. From b to ¢ the artificial embankment skirts along the brow of the hill, has no accom- panying ditch, and extends a distance of 192 feet. On the exterior of MOUNDS IN BERRIEN COUNTY, GEORGIA. 853 the embankment, from c to d, is a ditch 312 feet long. At dis a wash which has taken place since the work was abandoned. From d to e is a distance of 192 feet. The wall f-g is removed inwards, owing to the irregularity of the land. It is 48 feet long and has no accompanying ditch. The gateway e-fis 25 feet wide, and that at g=h, 64 feet. At the latter gateway the land rapidly descends, and there is a small stream passing through it. That this is not a washout is proved by the fact that the wall h-i with its accompanying ditch, extends down the declivity a distance of 14 feet. This would also show that the de- pression, for the most part, was there at the time when the wall was con- structed. From h toj, isa distance of 424 feet. At 7 the stream p has encroached upon the wall, carrying a portion of it for a distance of 15 feet. The stream at this point is 32 feet below the embankment, pre- senting a perpendicular face, and is still encroaching upon the inclosure. Atj-k is another washout. “From k to ais a distance of 480 feet. The entire embankment has an average height of 3 feet and a base 24 feet in width. The accompanying ditch is 16 feet wide, with an average depth of 14 inches. At a distance of 288 feet from 7 is the large mound I, 6 feet in height and 60 feet in diameter at the base. It is encroached upon by the small mound m, 4 feet high and 42 feet in diameter at the base. The former has been partially opened, but no relics have been discovered. MOUNDS IN BERRIEN COUNTY, GEORGIA. By WIiLu1aAM J. TAayLor, of Alapaha, Ga. The Alapaha mound is situated 5 miles northeast of the town of _ Alapaha, on Alapaha River, on lot of land No. 328, fifth district of Berrien County, Georgia. It is 38 feet across, 6 feet above the level, and somewhat oval in shape. In the center of the mound was a burial vault 6 feet deep, 3 feet wide, and 6 feet long, north and south. Two bodies were deposited in this vault with the heads pointing south. From the appearance at the time of exploration the bodies had been deposited in the vault and then covered up with a large quantity of ashes and pine coals. The bones were very much decayed, and no im- plements were found with them. The Withlacoochee mound is situated 5 miles south of Nashville, on lot of land 278, in the tenth district of Berrien County. The dimensions are 18 feet base diameter and 3 feet in depth. No relics were found in this mound, and even the bones were so far decayed that it was impos- sible to tell the mode of burial. Reedy Creek mound is situated 10 miles northeast of the town of Alapaha, on Reedy Creek, on lot of land No. 24, in the fifth district of 854 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. Berrien County. There was a vault, or dug hole, 5 feet long, 3 feet wide, and 14 feet deep in the center of the mound, in which the bodies were burnt and afterwards covered. On this covering was a burnt mass 3 feet deep and 20 feet in diameter. This had been covered up and the burning process repeated. The dimensions of the mound were 48 feet base diameter, and 6 feet in depth. No relics were found. The French Ferry mound is situated on lot of land No. 415, in the tenth district of Berrien County, 10 miles south of Nashville, 7 miles southeast of Adell post-office. These two mounds are 1 mile down the river from the ferry, in a red-oak thicket, on a hillside facing south. The earth for the structure was obtained 30 yards diagonally up the hill. The work was built around a pine stump. No.1 is of yellow sand mixed with gravel and rock. In the middle was a mass of charcoal mixed with the earth. No relics were found. MOUNDS AND SHELL HEAPS ON THE WEST COAST OF FLORIDA. By 8. T. WALKER, of Milton Fla. During the past two years the explorations of the mounds and shell heaps on the western coast of Florida have been continued, and many of the principal remains left by the aborigines between Hillsborough County on the south and Pensacola Bay on the west have been located, thus connecting the work with that done in 1879, a full report of which may be found in the Smithsonian Report for that year. These explora- tions were necessarily confined to the coast lines, or to such points as could be reached by the rivers. In no case, however, were they pushed very far above the influence of the tide. On the accompanying map of Pensacola Bay and vicinity (Map 1) all the principal mounds and shell heaps may be seen at a glance. The mounds are generally quite small and were nearly all erected for domi- ciliary purposes. The shell heaps are also small in comparison with * those of Tampa Bay. The long residence of white men in this portion of the State has tended to obliterate all traces of aboriginal occupancy except the larger mounds and shell heaps, and, besides these, but little remains of their works excepting an occasional arrow-head or a frag- ment of broken pottery. This is especially the case in the immediate neighborhood of Warrington and Pensacola. It is probable that there was a large Indian population around the northern end of Escambia Bay and about the mouth of Escambia River, as many relics have been obtained in that region. At the former site of the old village of Florida Town, in the vicinity of Ferry Pass, a large stone mortar was found weighing 157 pounds. This singular utensil is formed out of a coarse sandstone which is still quite MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. $55 S. T. Walker. Florida. Smithsonian Report; 1883. Map 1.—Pensacola Bay and vicinity, Florida. 856 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. abundant at Acadia, about 4 miles east of the place where the mortar was found. The marks of an iron or steel tool are plainly visible on this mortar, and seem to point to the agency of the white man in its manu- facture, while its peculiar shape is characteristic of the savage artisan. Mr. Silas Jernagin, from whom this interesting relic was obtained, first saw it in the year 1828, at the house of a person who stated that it was found in a neighboring hammock many years previous to that time. As the latter person is dead, the precise facts in relation to its discovery cannot be obtained. The mortar is now in the Smithsonian Institution, and competent archeologists may be able to decide the matter. It was probably fashioned by an Indian, who had obtained an iron tool from the Spaniards, and who had gotten some idea of stone-cutting from communication with them. At the head of Escambia Bay there are numerous small shell heaps, but no large mounds are encountered until a place is reached 1 mile north of Garcon Point, the southern extremity of the peninsula dividing Es- cambia and Blackwater Bays. Here are three large shell heaps situated career) 1 ‘8 | John Browns. BLACKWATER BAY. pe Escribano Point: Map 2.—Escribano Point, Florida. in a small field about 200 or 300 yards from the water. They are quite regular in shape, and were probably used for domiciliary purposes. No relics were obtained here except a few fragments of broken pottery. A short distance from these mounds is a burial place, but as the evidences MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. 857 of its Indian origin were wanting, it was not disturbed, on the suppo- sition that it was formerly a Spanish burial place made by early set- tlers. No other Indian remains are on this peninsula excepting a small mound in Gilotown, which is of doubtful origin, as extensive digging brought to light no evidences of Indian occupation. At Escribano Point, however, on the eastern shore of the bay and about 7 miles be- low Milton, there is abundant evidences of ‘a large Indian population. This point was in every way suitable for aboriginal settlement, as the numerous oyster beds in the vicinity afforded an inexhaustible supply of that favorite food, while the existence of shoal water along the shore for several miles was peculiarly favorable for shooting and spearing fish. It is quite probable that there was a large town or village at this place, and that large numbers of people resorted to it for the pur- pose of obtaining fish and oysters. Immense quantities of broken pot- tery are strewn over the ground, and all the usual evidences of Indian occupation are present; but the most important circumstance in connec- tion with Esecribano Point is the discovery of a new and singular mode of burial, which Was practiced by the former inhabitants of this region. Fig. 1 gives a pretty good representation of this peculiar mode of bur- Ls WH i ET —— Fic. 1.—Mode of interment at Escribano Point, Florida. ialin section. It seems that the body was first deposited in a grave four or five feet in depth and covered with earth. Upon this, oyster shells and pine wood were piled in large quantities ; the heap was then set on fire, and the lime resulting from the burning of the oyster shells mixing 858 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. with the sand, formed, when melted, a strong slab of cement over the grave. The rosin from the wood also assisted in the formation and the penetration of the loose sand to a depth of two or three feet below the lime formed a very effective covering for the grave. These slabs are of all sizes, from 6 to 12 feet in diameter, and are from 2 to 4 feet in thickness. Evidences of intense and long-continued heat are plain in every case. The slabs are from 6 inches to 1 foot below the present surface of the soil, and were accidentally discovered in plowing the field. Ten or twelve were located by sounding with an iron rod, all in the area of 2 or 3 acres. Some time previous to the exploration above mentioned a complete skeleton had been washed out of the bluffs on the northern shore; but portions of the indurated sand slab are still in sight in the bank, and many fragments lay in the water at the base of the bluff. One of these pieces had some rude carvings of arrow or spear-heads cut into the surface. The fragment having these marks upon it seemed to be formed by the union of pine tar or pitch with sand, and was quite soft. The field in which these graves are located was in cultivation at the time, and it was almost impossible to dig without disturbing the grow- ing crop. Fortunately a grave was found at the intersection of two walks, and the penetration of the cement discovered portions of a hu- man skeleton, very much decayed, and quantities of broken pottery. The work, however, was extremely laborious, owing to the hardness of the cement and its great thickness. The tenant on the place stated that he started a well near his door, and that on penetrating a slab he came upon a human skeleton, whereupon he filled up the well and dug in another place. About half a mile north of Escribano Point there is a small sand mound, but it contains no relies. From this point the waters of East Bay continue very shallow for a considerable distance from the shore; oyster banks are numerous, and the beach is covered with shells and broken pottery. At the mouth of East River the shell heaps increase in size, and there are several quite large and of irregular shape. On the north bank of the East River, and about 1 mile from its mouth, there is a small earth mound 4 or 5 feet high and about 75 feet in diameter. The mound is situated within a short distance of the Mormon church, and as religious services were in progress at the time no examinations were made. On the opposite bank of the river, beginning in the field of Mr. Axelson, there are hun- dreds of shell heaps of various sizes, which extend along the shores for nearly a mile. No doubt this is the site of an ancient village. Imme- diately in the rear of Mr. Axelson’s residence, on the slope of a hill, at the foot of which is an excellent spring, is a large quadrangle formed by shell banks, which evidently marks the site of an Indian village. Numerous arrow heads and other relics have been obtained here, and no doubt many more will be brought to light as the lands are cultivated. MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. 859 Westward, along the shores of East River, are found great numbers of small shell heaps of all sizes in the hammock. West of the mouth of the river, near the residence of Colonel Hooper, is the site of another village. This was situated on the banks of a small bayou, and numerous small mounds mark the position of many houses or Wigwams. Excavations in these mounds revealed the situations of their fires and fragments of pottery and the usual refuse of culinary operations. Some years ago several skeletons were unearthed here by the plow. Altogether there is conclusive evidence of there having been a large population at the mouth of East River, and that there were probably two, or perhaps three, permanent villages located there. Proceeding still westward along the peninsula between Pensacola Bay and Santa Rosa Sound, the next mounds are about 4 miles east of Red- fish Point. Upon the bluffs here are two mounds, each about 12 feet high, constructed entirely of sand. Two days spent in digging revealed no objects of interest. Between these large mounds and Redfish Point many low circular mounds are scattered along the center of the penin- sula. These mounds are mere elevations from 2 to 4 feet high, with bases from 50 to 200 feet in diameter, and, judging from the nature of the country, which is low and marshy, they were intended for residences. About 14 miles east of Redfish Point, at a place called Forty-nine Pines, are two earth mounds, one of which is 5 feet high and 80 feet in diameter; the other has every appearance of having been left in an unfinished condition. The larger mound was trenched carefully, but no objects of interest were found. There are many small shell heaps in the vicinity, and several objects were obtained from persons living near. From this place to Town Point, the western extremity of the peninsula, there are but few traces of Indian occupation. Santa Rosa Sound is a stretch of water 35 miles in length, connecting Pensacola Bay and Choctawhatchee Bay. The sound is very narrow, and does not exceed 2 miles in width at the widest part. The traces of aboriginal residence along this body of water are nearly all confined to the mainland side. If Santa Rosa Island ever contained any mounds, the shifting sands have long since covered every trace of them. In | proceeding east the first shell heaps are met with at Dr. Rotherford’s place, about 2 miles east of the old Government Live Oak Plantation. Immense beds of shell and the usual indications mark this as the former residence of a large population. The slopes of the hills are covered with irregular beds of shell from 2 to 6 feet in thickness, which occupy an area of several acres. The beds contain large quantities of broken pottery and numerous implements made of shell. At this place was secured the first specimen of a clay image found in this section, a frag- ment of a rude imitation of a bird’s head. Shell heaps occur at various points between this place and Wheeler’s Spring, 6 miles west of Mary Esther post-office. At Wheeler’s Spring 860 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. two earth mounds of small size are found, neither of which is of special interest. Having thus briefly described the principal remains around Pensacola Bay and vicinity, let us turn to Choctawhatchee Bay, a map of which is presented. It is almost certain that the aborigines lived around these waters in vast numbers. Every cove and headland that is hab- itable was occupied; all points possessing unusual advantages for hunt- ing and fishing were densely peopled, and at several points towns of considerable size existed. There is hardly an acre of ground on the entire coast line of this bay that does not contain some evidence of aboriginal existence or occupation. These people seem also to have advanced somewhat beyond their brethren of less favored regions in the arts, for it is here that we find the first attempt to model images or figures in clay. Some of these figures are extremely rude, but others are no mean representations of the objects they are intended to imitate. The object of these images or the uses to which they were put is not evident. Most people who have expressed an opinion of them regard them as idols or objects of worship, but it would better accord with Indian customs to regard them as family totems. The southern shores of Choctawhatchee Bay and the region about the Narrows where Santa Rosa Sound leaves that bay were peculiarly suited for the support of a large population. From these points the Gulf shores are easy of access, and the shoal waters of the bay and sound furnished inexhaustible quantities of fish and oysters. Several large fresh-water lakes inland were swarming with fish, and game is still plentiful throughout the entire region. Two points seem to have been selected by the aborigines as sites for large towns, and both were located on points or peninsulas surrounded by shoal water, a condition necessary for this peculiar mode of fishing. The first and larger of these two towns was situated on the northern shores of Santa Rosa Sound, where it enters Choctawhatchee Bay. The sound here is only about one-fourth of a mile in width, and navigation is obstructed by numerous bars and shoals, which were once covered by oyster beds, though at present the oyster is entirely extinct in both bay and sound. On the east is Choctawhatchee Bay, and northwest lies a large branch of Garnier’s Bayou. Several bold springs of excellent water break out of the bluffs, and a small fresh-water stream empties into the sound here and once passed through the center of the town. The largest mound and shell heaps are situated near this stream and in the neighborhood of the finest of the springs. The position of the largest domiciliary mound in this portion of the State is marked by a large shell heap on the bluffs above the largest spring. This shell heap, which was converted into a fort by the Southern army during the civil war, is about 12 feet high, with a base about 200 feet in diameter. About 400 yards nearly due north of this heap, situated in a dense thicket of bushes and small trees, is the mound in question. It is cov- 861 MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. Smithsonian Report; 1883. S$. T. Walker. Florida. NXT 40 4IN9 Map 3.—Choctawhachee Bay, Florida, 862 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ered with a growth similar to that around it, and su dense and tangled is the growth of vines, briers, and bushes upon it that it is difficult either to measure or explore it. Its estimated height is 25 feet, its length 250 feet, and its width 135 feet. The measurements were taken along the top, which is nearly level; of course, the base is much greater. The sides are very steep, and on the south side is a sloping roadway leading to the top. Many excavations have been made from time to time by curiosity- seekers, and during the civil war Dr. Sandrum, of Milton, Fla., who belonged to the company which was stationed at the shell fort, made ex- plorations through a period of eleven months. Icannot learn that any- thing of importance has been found excepting human bones in the shell stratum beneath the sand. Dr.S. 8. Forbes, of Milton, also visited this mound in company with some gentlemen from the North, and made sey- eral large excavations in it. He reports the finding of human bones in the shell stratum, but the skulls were so decayed that preservation was _ not possible. Dr. Forbes also obtained several clay figures representing human and animal heads, some of which he kindly gave to the National Museum. The old cuttings made by former seekers were explored, and several new ones made, with but little reward in the way of relics ex- cepting human bones and teeth on the shell stratum, but not in it. The top stratum of this mound is composed of sand to a depth of 5 feet ; beneath this is a layer of shell from 2 to 3 feet in thickness. On the latter, but not in it, human bones were found, thus indicating that the bodies were deposited on the shells and covered with sand. A criti- cal examination of the shell stratum was made, and from the evidence it afforded the conclusion was reached that the mound was originally much lower, and that the shell deposit was an accumulation of kitchen refuse; that it was for a time a place of residence and used as a place of burial, and afterwards that the stratum of sand was added and the place once more fitted for residence. The facts which favor this view are, first, that the shell stratum con- tains the bones of bears, deer, birds, turtles, and fishes, the usual accom- paniments of Indian feasting, while the upper and lower stratums are composed of clean sand; second, that the depth of these human remains in the earth is unusual and not at all in keeping with what we already have observed in [Indian burials; and lastly, the pits or excavations from which the earth used in forming the mound was taken show in a very marked manner that the material was not all removed at the same time, some being mere depressions in the soil, while others are sharply defined and comparatively recent. The formation of this mound being by a series of additions to the original work may prove a key to the construction of many of the larger mounds heretofore described as being composed of “ alternate layers of sand and shell” (see Smithsonian Report for 1879, pp. 296 and 405), and will remove the greatest difficulty in the way of our admitting them to S. T. Walker. Florida. MOUNDS IN WES' FLORIDA. Cheats Givens oc Pe CHI he Fig. 4.. Fragment of Duck’s Head. Smithsonian Report; 1883. a $64 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. S. T. Walker. Florida. Plate II. Fig. 1. Human Head. Fig. 2. Human Head. 4 . * " a # +a xt * {, Fig. 3. Owls Head. Smithsonian Report; 1883. PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. 865 have been constructed by the modern Indians, viz, their inadaptibility to concerted and continued effort. For if the large mounds were the gradual growth of ages and varied by successive additions, by many generations, we can readily understand and accept the theory of their being the work of the modern Indian. West of the great mound are many small circles of shells covered with soil, from 40 to 60 feet in diameter, and the earth is covered with frag- ments of broken pottery. Over aspace reaching from the great mound to the beach, one-fourth of a mile in width, and extending along the beach for nearly a mile, are shell heaps of all shapes and sizes, from a mere bed a foot in thickness to large heaps 12 and 15 feet high. In the fields, the crops are growing in beds of shell, and the furrows are full of broken pottery and fragments of clay figures. The latter are generally repre- sentations of the heads of birds and animals, though human heads and busts are not uncommon. Many are extremely rude, rendering it diffi- cult to catch the particular form intended to be figured, while others are pretty fair imitations of the objects copied, and are quite creditable speci- mens of aboriginal art. They are composed of the same material of which the pottery was made, viz, black, red, or blue clay with a mixture of some white material resembling pounded shell. Some are composed of a reddish clay and afterward covered with a finer material, nearly black, which give the object the appearance of being glazed. In other specimens the body is formed of black clay and covered with red. As before remarked, the majority of the images represent the heads of animals and birds. Of the former the wolf or fox, the squirrel, and the beaver seem to have been the favorites, while the duck or goose is often copied among the birds, though the serpent and the owl were not for- gotten. In Plates I, I, and III, may be seen rough copies of several of these — images, which will give an idea of the most common forms, from the rudest up to the best hitherto obtained. These images are not found in the mounds or graves, but scattered about the fields, on the surface, or in the piles of shell, along with broken pottery. It is somewhat strange that these images are only found on the shores of Choctawhat- chee Bay and Santa Rosa Sound. In all the explorations along the west coast of Florida they have not been found, nor have any been heard of in any other portion of the State. Westward, however, they exist. Dr. George Taylor, of Mobile, has several which he obtained from the shell heaps on Bon Secour Bay, near Sand Island light, and they are said to have been found in the shell heaps, along the Mississippi coast. Many hundreds of these images have been recovered on Choctaw- hatchee Bay, and while a few have found their way into the National Museum, many have been destroyed or are in the hands of private par- ties. Others will doubtless be found as the lands are brought into cul- tivation. H: Mis, 69 59 866 MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. S. T. Walker. Florida. Plate III. idee e, FL Ras a < N if <1 Lax, Human Head of dark clay, with red enamel. Hig sSe Human Head of red clay, with black enamel. Side view of Fig. 1. Smithsonian Report; 1883, MOUNDS IN WEST FLORIDA. 867 Passing over for the present the mounds, &c., intervening, a second. great area of ancient population was about the center of the bay and. on its southern side, where a point 3 miles in length extends north be- tween Horseshoe and Hogtown Bayous, while on the south and between the point and the Gulf lies a large fresh-water lake, 7 miles in length and with an average width of a half-mile. The peculiar advantages of this point for an Indian town may be seen at a glance, viz: Fishing and hunting facilities unequaled and capable of easy defense in case of an attack. Evidences of a dense population once occupying this vantage ground begin one mile south of the extreme point and extend on both shores and down the center to the lake. These evidences con- sist of shell banks and heaps along the shores, and of low mounds along the center of the point. Some of the shell heaps are of immense size, while others are mere piles containing a few bushels. The mounds a short distance from the beach, and extending the whole length of the point, are slight elevations, and often five or six are placed in a straight line. Those measured were from 1 to 2 feet high and from 30 to 60 feet in diameter. The general surface of the country is low and flat, render- ing it necessary to have elevations for houses. The most important and interesting of all the aboriginal remains in this vicinity, however, is a canal leading from the head of Horseshoe Bayou into a large fresh-water lake, about 14 miles southeast of the bayou. This canal is about 14 feet in width at the top and 6 feet at the bottom. Its original depth was probably from 6 to 18 feet. At present it is not much over half that depth. At ordinary times the canal is dry, but during wet seasons the waters of the lake find an outlet through it to the bay. Excepting a slight angle at one place its course is straight, and the natural advantages of.the ground were disregarded in order to reach the desired point by the shortest route. It enters the lake through a marsh, which at a time previous to the cutting of the canal, was prob- ably a part of the lake, and this being drained by the canal, the an- cient engineers were forced to continue their work through the marsh until deep water was reached. The lake, which is nearly 7 miles in length, contains immense numbers of fish, and the canal was cut for the purpose of reaching it in canoes, as these must otherwise have been transported overland at great expense of time and labor. No burial places have been discovered in this region. Many clay images, however, of large size have been picked up at Mr. Henry Rad- dick’s place on Four-Mile Point. These were all lost or destroyed by the children, as their value to science was not known. Besides these two main centers of population, numerous smaller set- tlements existed at various points along the shores of Choctawhatchee Bay. Indeed, there is not a habitable spot that was not occupied, and there is not a point or cove without the characteristic shell heap. The inost important of them are all correctly marked on the accompanying map, and a detailed description of each of these would involve a repe- 868 PAPERS RELATING* TO ANTHROPOLOGY. tition that would be both tiresome and unnecessary. They present no peculiarities of structure or shape, and much labor expended in explor- ing them brought no new facts to light. The earth mounds were all probably domiciliary, and the shell heaps are the usual debris of feasts. Nearly all the shell heaps are composed of oyster shells, which are very large, and it is a fact worthy of note that the oyster is at present extinct in Choctawhatchee Bay. Most of the heaps. are covered with soil from 1 to 2 feet in thickness. From data obtained from the shell heaps of South Florida I have calculated that it requires at least fifty years to produce a stratum of soil 6 inches in thickness. From this it will appear that some of these heaps were completed from 100 to 200 years ago. ’ From this series of explorations the following facts seem to be pretty well established : 1. That promiscuous mound burial was practiced only to a limited extent in this locality. 2. That the races formerly inhabiting this district were further ad- vanced in civilization than those of South Florida. 3. That it is probable all the large domiciliary mounds were built by small additions through many successive generations, and hence may have been partly the work of the modern Indians. STONE MOUNDS OF HAMPSHIRE COUNTY, W. VA. By L. A. KENGLA, of Washington, D. C. The mounds or graves described in this paper are situated on the east- ern side of the South Branch Mountain, Hampshire County, West Vir- ginia, about 14 miles from the mouth of the South Branch River, on the property of Mr. Charles French. According to early accounts, the en- tire region between the Blue Ridge Mountains and the Ohio River was held by the Massawomee Indians.* The immediate locality (Fairfax Grant) was, however, the hunting ground of the Tauxenents, a band, perhaps, of the above-mentioned powerful tribe.t The settlement of this district by the whites drove this tribe across the Alleghanies; and, after their departure, the country seems to have been a border line of warfare between the Delawares of Pennsylvania and the Catawbas of Virginia. This narrow and rough valley, from the mouth of the river to Moorefield, Hardy County, West Virginia, and probably far beyond, is replete with traditions and evidences of many a stubborn struggle—not only between contending tribes, but also be- tween the Indians and the intrepid pioneers of West Virginia. The locality of these mounds, known as ‘*Shin Bottom,” was also the * History of West Virginia, page 34. De Hass. t ‘‘ Jefferson’s Notes” on Virginia, page 152. STONE MOUNDS IN WEST VIRGINIA. 869 theater of contending, bloodthirsty savages. In close proximity to the graves there is a great bowlder standing on the side of the wood, to which a very interesting tradition is attached. It is called ‘ Indian” or “* Painted Rock.” On its eastern face there is a figure, supposed to represent a man in the act of throwing a tomahawk. One can easily distinguish the rude outlines of a human figure, but the hand and toma- hawk have been rendered obscure by the frequent violence of curiosity seekers. The lines are clear, strong, and of a dim red color. The tra- dition, as given by the inhabitants, is in substance as follows: “ At this point two hostile tribes, probably the Catawbas and Dela- wares, met and fought a terrible battle, in which all, with one exception, were killed, on the conquered side, and he succeeded in making his es- cape. Exasperated at this the victors, to complete their direful work, followed, brought back, and killed the unfortunate wretch, and with his own blood traced this figure on the rock.” The same account is given by Mr. Samuel Kercheval in his ‘History of the Valley,” but with the variation that this warrior made a safe escape by jumping into the river and swimming with his head under water till he reached the Cohongornton, North Branch of the Potomac. (Page 48.) The upper portion of this rock protects the side upon which the figure is sketched, from destruction by the elements. The South Branch of the Potomac was called Wappatomaka by the Indians. Throughout this entire range of mountains Indian mounds are numerous, and a com- paratively unexplored field of archeological treasures awaits develop- ment. The frequency of stone graves may in some degree be accounted for by the abundance of material suitable for their construction, by their proximity to fields of contest, to village sites, and to a most abundant hunting ground. They are found in much greater proportion in this than in any of the neighboring ranges. Their position cannot be re- stricted to any particular locality, for they are found on either side, on top, at the foot of the motntain, and in various places throughout the valley ; sometimes on the river bank or on some small stream, or even in the central portions of the bottom lands. They are, however, less numerous on top of the ridges than in lower situations. These stone graves are quite numerous in the vicinity of the “Indian Rock.” In shape, both external and internal, they resemble modern graves; and since they contain an inclosure like a coffin, the term grave is very applicable to distinguish them from the earth mounds. They vary much in size, the smaller being mainly confined to the low lands while the largest are more frequently found on the tops and sides of the mountains. Those of any considerable dimensions are generally flat on top and the smaller convex. The stone of which they are made depends upon the locality; those opened were constructed of gray sandstone. The upper layers consisted of pieces as large as our street granite pay- 870 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ing blocks, which gradually increase in size as the interior or “coffin” of the mound is reached. The “coffin” is made of large bowlders of the same stone. These stones are rarely spherical, but range from a few inches square to a weight of several hundred pounds. No. 1, The first grave examined was situated midway on the side of the mountain. It was built in a small hollow or ravine, down which in wet seasons water flowed. Within 40 or 50 yards there were three others, two of which were opened and examined. It (1) was very large, about 50 feet in length, 25 in width, and from 4 to 5 in height. It was flat on top and extended lengthwise north and south. The excavation was commenced on top at the southern ex- tremity. After working downwards and northwards through the mass of rock for the distance of 3 feet, we came to some very large bowlders. Taking these as a guide we continued to work along the western side towards the north end of the mound. All the rock that remained at the north end and over the body of the “coffin” or cavity was next removed, and the earthy débris cleaned away. From the south end of the “coffin” was then removed the large rocks with which it was filled. Then began the examination of the dark earth with which the floor ‘was covered. The mass of the material was decayed wood-earth to- gether with a small quantity of light colored clay. At the lower end were found one long bone and more fragments, presumably leg or thigh bones, and at the north end a fragment of askull. No pottery or stone implement of any description was exhumed. The sides of the case- ment for the remains were constructed of large bowlders 14 foot high, placed closely together throughout the entire circuit. Beneath there was a floor of flat stones, and at the upper end one was raised about 2 inches above the rest, near which the fragments of skull were found. No. 1 B. As yet only half of the first mound had been torn away, and encouraged by the find, though we mainly directed our attention to the discovery of stone implements, the destruction of the remaining mass was begun. Commencing on the east side of the grave just opened we soon reached another wall of large bowlders, running in a direction parallel to and placed directly alongside of the wall of the former. Upon re- _ woving the stones from the sides and central portiens as before, the e Xcavation of the coffin was commenced. But a most careful search w; W ineffective in bringing to light any relics. The absence of all hm an remains may be possibly attributed to the position of the mound, whi. “2 was such that a very large quantity of water annually ee thro. ‘gh it, rendering the decomposition of the bones more rapid. No, 2 oe 20 yards to the right, when looking down the mountain and fac ‘ng the east, a second grave was opened, which was situated a little to the side of the hollow. This , ound, though not so large, extended in length in the same direction, 20rth and south, as the former. In appearance, (save that it was not fla. ¢,) both externally and internally, it was similar to that of the STONE MOUNDS IN WEST VIRGINIA. 871 one previously explored. It contained a single inclosure or coffin. No remains except a fragment of a long bone were found. No. 3. A third of this group, situated about 30 yards down the mountain and on the lower side of an old road, was examined. Its con- struction and general outlines were the same as those already described. No remains were discovered, and from its position in the deepest part of the hollow it is supposed that all traces had long since been de- stroyed. No. 4. The fourth mound was situated about 200 yards from the “ In- dian Rock,” near the base of the mountain. Though much smaller, it resembled the above in all particulars. A large number of fragments of bones belonging to various parts of the body were collected. The exterior shape of the mound had been very much disfigured by hunters. Mr. French, the owner of the property, needing stone for building purposes, had previously opened several graves and removed from them a quantity of bones and some pieces of pottery. There were no means by which we could judge the age of these mounds, even approximately. The first graves or stone heaps exam- ined were encircled by a grove of oak and locust trees of an inferior size. Near the fourth there grew several large oaks, but all were at too great a distance to be of any avail in such a determination. The amount of earthy matter on or within could not be relied upon as affording any definite clew, since very little could penetrate the grave, and what was there could easily have been deposited in the lapse of time by nature. The stones were not placed immediately upon the corpse, perhaps; but they rested upon logs and brush, which were supported by the walls of theinclosure. If this supposition be correct, the amount of debris could have been greatly increased. It is generally supposed that these mounds were quite small at first, and were increased in size by new interments and by the addition of stone from time to time. It is said that whenever a friendly Indian or tribe passed a grave, each individual, out of respect, added a stone or more to the heap. Though this may be plausible, it is just as likely that it was the final interment of the body, and that the size of the mound depended upon the rank and tribal standing of the person. If, on the other hand, these interments were only temporary, it is probable that the large mounds were the final resting places of a large number of bodies by secondary interment. ‘ This hypothesis is in accordance with the customs of many tribes, east and west, and was practiced by the natives of the lower districts of Virginia long after its settlement by the whites.* The total absence of all stone implements is accounted for by the residents, the supposition being that these were women’s graves or of those members of the tribes who were of minor importance. The find of pottery in one or two would strengthen this supposition. This theory is again to some extent sustained by the opening of sev- * * Jefferson’s Notes” on Virginia. 872 ‘PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. eral mounds on the top of this mountain yielding bones, pyrites (eubo- octohedral, crystal), arrow-heads, and fragments of pottery. In contra- diction, however, to the above, one grave, opened by Mr. Joseph Pan- cake on his farm in the river bottom, about 2 miles above Romney, in this county, contained a celt, a pipe, and some arrow-heads. On the front of this pipe, at the upper rim of the bowl, there was carved an eagle in a neat and tasteful manner. ‘Some years ago the party from whom were procured the above specimens opened a large mound in Mineral County, West Virginia, near the town of Ridgeville. In external appearances, according to report, it was similar to those described, but, instead of in a coffin-shaped repository, the body was buried in a sitting posture. The skeleton was nearly whole at the time of exhumation; the feet rested upon the floor; the legs against a wall, above which in the seat were the thigh bones; and against a second wall leaned the bones of the back and chest. Thearms seemed to have been placed in a careless position at the side, with the hands open and lying upon the shelf with the thigh bones. The head rested in a re- cumbent position on a third shelf. A fragment of pyrites was found near by, which is supposed tu have been placed in one hand. Among the bones and débris there was discovered a brass button of continental style. For the authenticity of his description the narrator referred to sev- eral gentlemen residing near the locality, who were present and assisted in the work, and in whose possession the bones were when last heard of. Other mounds and remains were found in abundance as the coun- try was cleared and the land cultivated. The specimens of pyrites and pottery found on the South Branch Mountain have been added to the collection of archeological remains from the district, deposited at Georgetown University. v REMAINS IN BUCKS COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA. By Joun A. Rutu, Riegelsville, Pa. Durham, the most northeastern township of Bucks County, Pennsyl- vania, is situated on the banks of the Delaware River, 9 miles south of Easton, and by railroad 76 miles north of Philadelphia. The township covers an area of about 9 square miles, and the greater part of it is drained by the Durham Creek and its tributaries. The surface is hilly, the soil fertile and in a high state of cultivation. To its original occu- pants it presented many natural advantages, and the remains of their workmanship found buried in the soil show that they saw these advan- tages and made use of them. The southeastern part of the township was their favorite resort. This part of the Delaware Valley is about 14 miles long, and about one-half mile in width at the widest part. It is bounded on the east by the Delaware River, and on the west and south by a range of bluffs extending from the village of Monroe to the REMAINS IN BUCKS COUNTY, PA. 873 Narrows, which rise perpendicularly to the height of nearly 400 feet. It is strongly defended by nature, and the scenery is not surpassed by any in the county. There are other localities in the township where relics are found, but nowhere in such abundance as in the locality just men- tioned. I shall now describe these and other remains in the order in which they are numbered on the map. MM ny Wy MM muy [ |» Zi a oie 72 yl) Uy aw 0 “My 2 5 a Mp LUN wy i, rm alta! Lb, =~ \ ye a lua" TI 4 Fk \ So / \ ym | : “My AW : my ' : / thingy ) fi “isfy Mf) “nh Zed 4 MW “mm \ Ss ee MyIN Uyuillf ut py Myy My WM, My wn My /$ = Z) 7 “lly, Wy Wy & Yim, MIM My Niy MI y UY] Wy MINN “Maing Zaman Remains in Durham Township, Bucks County, Pennsylvania. No. 1 is the site of what once was an extensive village, situated on the banks of the Delaware, near the mouth of Gallows Run, and about 874 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. one-quarter mile from Kintnerville. It extends along the Delaware several hundred yards, and back from the river about 50 yards. Its ex- tent may easily be traced by the broken cobblestones and chips of flint and jasper which are thickly strewn over the surface. Many of the cobblestones bear marks of fire. Among this refuse a large num- ber of relics have been found. They exhibit all degrees of workman- ship from the rudest to the most skillfully wrought. The most abun- dant relic is the arrow-point, of which have been here collected more than 400 specimens. Many show by their workmanship that they were made by a people who had advanced in the stone art to a high degree of skill. In this locality have also been found many hammers, spear- heads, scrapers, and plummets. The spear-heads found are generally broken. Among the rarer implements are drills, polishing-stones, axes, celts, knives, paint-cups, pestles, ceremonial hatchets, and amulets. The hatchets and amulets are all broken, but are highly polished and well proportioned. They show great skill and patience on the part of those who shaped them. Fragments of pottery are plentiful. Some of it is ornamented. Many of the fragments are well preserved, but others are crumbling and have the appearance of great age. The material used in the manufacture of the stone implements of this and the other vil- lage sites in the township is that found in the locality. Probably one- half of the arrow-points are made of trap, the remainder of jasper, quartz, red shale, &c. But few specimens are made of the last-named mineral, which is not a very durable material for stone implements. No. 2 is also the site of an ancient village, on the farm of Mr. Clark, one mile north of Holland Station, Hunterdon Connty, New Jersey. The extent of this village was not as great as that at No. 1, but it has - added to our collection many fine specimens. Among these is half of the bowl of a stone pipe, the only fragment of a stone pipe yet found. Its shape is similar to Fig. 179 in Dr. Abbott’s Stone Age in New Jer- sey. Two stone axes of very rude workmanship were picked up at this place. The rudest is an ordinary cobblestone notched at the sides, near one end, and slightly grooved half way across one side. The other is an oval cobblestone, 11 inches in length, with a narrow groove around one end. No attempt seems to have been made to sharpen either of these axes. No. 3 is a locality on the farm of Mr. Snyder, near Holland Church, where have been found a number of spear and arrow points, most of them broken. ‘Tradition tells us that this was an ancient battle-ground. Two tribes lived in the vicinity, and the children, in their wanderings, met each other and quarreled about a large grasshopper which one of them had found. This resulted in a war, and this locality is said to be the place where the decisive battle was fought. The conflict was wit- nessed by a white man from the opposite side of the river. Such is the tradition as it exists in the neighborhood. : REMAINS IN BUCKS COUNTY, PA. 875 No. 4is on the farm of Mr. Overpeck, near Monroe. This locality is peculiar in its relics, which consist of triangular arrow-points and fragments of finely ornamented pottery. Besides these, no other relies were discovered, except several pieces of clay pipe-stems, an amulet, - several celts, and fragments of pestles. Since the writer has collected at this place, he has found but one arrow-point with a stem, while of triangular arrow-points more than 100 specimens have been gathered, most of them broken. A large number of fragments of pottery were found scattered over the surface. They were in a good state of preser- vation, and many of them are finely ornamented, especially those pieces which formed the rim of the vessels, some of which are perforated. Chips of jasper occur in the soil, but very few broken cobble-stones. It is difficult to explain why all the arrow-points are triangles, and why the pottery is of better workmanship than that of any other locality in the township. No. 5 is the site of a small village on the farm of Mr. Tranger, of Monroe. Itis situated about 100 yards north of No. 4, but is quite differ- ent from it in the character of its relics. Here chips of flint and broken cobble-stones are found again. The relics are principally spear and arrow points, knives, scrapers, plummets, &c. No. 6 is a locality on the farm of Mr. Overpeck, where we find spear and arrow points, some rude pottery, hammers, and occasionally a few other implements. No. 7is on the edge of the bluff,on the farm of Mr. Aaron Tranger. -In the character of its relics it is similar to No. 6. Some of the arrow points are made of a material not found in the locality. This place was probably occupied by parties guarding the villages in the valley against invasion. The position commands a good view of the Delaware Valley toward the north. No. 8 is a locality on the farm of Cooper and Hewitt, one-half mile south of Riegelsville, where have been found arrow-points and a few other relics. The refuse scattered over the surface indicates that it was the site of a small village. No. 9 is on the farm of Mr. Riegel, near the mouth of the Musconet- cong Creek, Hunterdon County, New Jersey. Spear and arrow points are found here. No. 10 is on the farm of George Shick, between two springs, where have been found spear and arrow points, hammers, knives, scrapers, plummets, a fine drill, &c. No: 11 is also around a spring, on the farm of Jacob Richards. The relics are the same kind as those found at No. 10. No. 12 is an ancient jasper mine on the farm of Cooper and Hewitt. The excavation made in mining the jasper is still to be seen. Around it is a ridge of earth and stones, thrown out by the miners. The ground is overgrown with brush and small oak, and is not cultivated for a short distance around*he mine. The excavation is partly filled with stone 876 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. hauled from the adjoining fields. Very few arrow points are found around the mine. Chips of red and yellow jasper are found in large quantities, scattered over more than 20 acres around the mine. With them are found numerous river pebbles and cobblestones with hammer marks on them. Some are worn off around the entire edge; others were originally nearly round, and through use became still more so. Nearly all the hammers found on village sites have finger pits, but these have none, and are found only around this mine. These facts seem to indicate that they were used as hammers for blocking out the jasper into pieces of a suitable size for implements, and that these blocks were then car- ried to the villages, where they were finished. No. 13 is on the farm of Henry Adams, situated on the top of the hill. It commands a fine view of the Delaware and Muscanetcong Val- leys. Here have been found but two kinds of relics—a few arrow- points and several dozen plummets. Most of the plummets found on village sites are similar to Figs. 204 and 205 in Dr. Abbott’s Stone Age in New Jersey, but thosé found in this locality are nearly all like Fig. 203. No. 14. Durham Cave is the name given to a cavern in the lime- stone formation on the north side of the Durham Creek, near its mouth. The cave extends into the hill toward the west, parallel with the creek. A large part of it has been destroyed by quarrying the limestone, which is of excellent quality and was used in the furnace near by. The main passage was about 150 feet long, from 4 to 40 feet wide, and averaged about 12 feet in height. The floor descends as you enter, and at the farther end is a fine spring. A few stalactites formerly hung from the roof. About forty years ago, when the cave was opened, petrified bones were found in one of the rooms. They were removed by several scien- tists who had come from New York for that purpose, and were sent to some scientific association in that city. A number of interesting relics were also found, among them spear and arrow points, beads, and a skull. The latter is said to have been sent to some museum in Phila- delphia. A small room on the right of the main passage was, years ago, named Queen Esther’s Drawing-room, after an Indian woman. RELICS IN POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK, By Henry Booth, of Poughkeepsie, N. Y. In the southern part of Poughkeepsie, Dutchess County, New York, and extending beyond the city limits, there used to be a large deposit of molding sand. This has been dug out during the last seven or eight years and carted away. The accompanying map shows a part of this sand bed, which has proved to be of great interest. In October, 1882, some fragments of human skeletons were turned up by the laborers on RELICS IN POUGHKEEPSIE, NEW YORK. Fox’s Point. 877 This was reported to the writer by Mr. EH. W. Frazer, the foreman, who very kindly afforded every assistance in his power to make an examination of this part of the sand bed. The deposit of sand is over- laid by earth, which is generally about 1 foot deep. The stratum of sand varies from a few inches to 4 or 5 feet in depth. On top of this sand, directly below the soil, the larger part of the stone implements were found. At the place on Fox’s Point, marked on the map with three A WA TOUSEN gAt4 3 3 2 3 s 3 A Z 2 = ZS Z RAINE NINS AN uuenn ut Graves and relic sites in Poughkeepsie, New York. Greek crosses, the skeletons were dug up. The ground here is a few feet above the level of the Hudson River Railroad. Enough skulls and fragments of skulls were dug up to permit the supposition that six bodies had been buried here. These bones were found at depths vary- ing from 1 foot to 3 feet below the surface. Of four bodies there re- mained nothing but parts of the skulls, a few teeth, and fragments of ribs. Of another body there were leg bones, fragments of ribs, finger bones, vertebre, and a nearly complete skull, including the lower jaw. This skeleton lay on its right side, with the knees drawn up to the chin. Of another body there were a few vertebre and finger bones, and a nearly complete skull, including the lower jaw. This skull rested on 878 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. its chin, facing westward, or toward Hudson River. Underneath it was found a piece of burnt sandstone, rudely chipped into the form of an arrow-head. With the exception of this stone and a bit of chipped horn- stone, nothing was discovered with the bodies. In the hollow on Fox’s Point, below and west of this little hillock, the sand, when dug up, showed traces of fire, being red instead of yellow. Intermixed with it were a great number of broken stones, which also seemed to have been burned. Here were found many implements, both fragmentary and entire. They were pounders (oval or round cobble-stones with worked depressions on either side for the fingers), spear-heads, arrow- heads, pestles, &c. On top of the rising ground east of Fox’s Point and the railroad many stone implements were found. In 1876 Mr. E. W. Frazer picked up near this place half of a steatite dish, which is now in the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. No iron im- plements of any kind have been recovered here, and no bodies except those mentioned above. The total number of perfect implements from this locality, now in the writer’s possession, is as follows: Pounding- stones, 32; pestles, 5; arrow and spear points, 103; hoes, 6; axes, or hammers, 2; drill, 1; rubbing-stone,1. The fragments and flakes amount to several hundreds. NOTES ON THE WAMPANOAG INDIANS. By Henry E. CuHass, A. B., of Brookline, Mass. Every year the signs of Indian settlements along our coast are becom- ing fewer. The experience of the last two years has taught the writer that great ignorance prevails among those persons whom we might most reasonably expect to direct us to the sites of Indian towns. He has thought it worth while, therefore, to put on record, for the convenience of others, the exact sites of all the Indian shell heaps and other indica- tions of Indian settlement seen during the summers of 1882 and 1883. Besides the mere description of the towns in their present condition, and the implements, weapons, &c., found at or near them, a general history will be given of what has been recorded or is known on the sub- ject from other sources, together with a detailed account of the origin, language, customs, manners, traditions, and religion of these Indians, so far as it was possible ‘to gather them. Further study shows that much of this information is already in such available form in the works of Gookin, Williams, and a few other early writers, who had the best opportunities to study the Indians, that all subsequent scholars will prefer to consult them in the original. References will be made to these and other works which are useful in the study of the Indians referred to in these notes, and only so much of them will be quoted as is abso- lutely necessary to give one unacquainted with the Indian tribes of WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 879 New England a fair knowledge of the Wampanoag tribe, to which the Indians of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket belonged. The practice of the writer has been, after finding alone the site of some Indian town, and obtaining all the information available from the farmers and others living in the vicinity, to turn to the volumes of the Massachusetts Historical Society’s works and Barber’s Historical Collections, ‘a general collection of interesting facts, traditions, bio- graphical sketches, anecdotes, &c., relating to the history and antiqui- ties of every town in Massachusetts,” and learn what is there said of the Indians once living there. This information was sometimes very satisfactory, but until recently went ahead of the explorations, and there are still a few important additions to be made to the map of Indian settlements on Cape Cod. In the rambles in search of arrow- heads, stone hatchets, &c., little of the history of their former owners could be learned from persons now living near by, the usual information being to the effect that ‘“‘ when the oldest inhabitant was a boy,” an old Indian or squaw lived near the spot where the arrows or shell heaps exist. In a few other places, as at Mashpee and Gay Head, the mixed descendants of the Indians may still be seen; but, with the exception of a few names, like Pocknet and Attaquin, their names are English, and their hair inclined to curl, owing to their frequent intermarriage with the negroes. A friend who has given the matter some attention writes that there are now probably none of unmixed blood among the Indians of Mashpee, though many of the people have a strongly marked Indian appearance. Neither these Indians nor some of the same sort at Gay Head could give any exact information in regard to the sites of old Indian towns, and the conclusion is inevitable that they know less about such things than some small white boys living near by, who are in the habit of collecting arrow-heads. At several places on Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket people are becoming interested in Indian relics, and it is frequently impossible to buy a stone hatchet (which the owner may have thought worthless), because he heard that another man had sold such a grooved stone for a great price. Several boys have collections of arrow-heads amounting to two or three hundred; and middle-aged men have said that in certain places they could once find all the arrow-heads they wished, and have been surprised when there were found only one or two, perhaps not ‘one. Old men say that it was the habit of the farmers to plow up most regularly all those fields which had been already cleared by the natives, for these always gave the best crops, owing to the rich black soil that was usually found there. On the east side of Bass River, and on In- dian Neck, near Wellfleet Harbor, may be seen the wisdom of this practice; for at these places the most thrifty vegetables in the fields were those growing in the dark earth and scattered shell-heaps. But by this practice the most lasting monuments of the Indians have been erased, their graves levelled, their shell heaps scattered, and their weap- 880 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ons and implements of stone plowed under or picked up and removed. . On Nantucket and Martha’s Vineyard it was easier to get information on our subject, probably partly from the fact that Indian names have been more easily preserved on islands, where may still be found many descendants of the first white settlers, and partly, in the case of Nan- tucket, through the publication by the Old Colony Line of a historical map of that island, surveyed and drawn a few years ago by the Rev. E. C. Ewer, D.D. To give the reader a general idea of the tribes in- habiting New England, and the relative strength and country possessed by the tribe to which the Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket Indians belonged, a few quotations will be made from the writings of Mr. Daniel Gookin, one of the magistrates of Massachusetts colony, and for many years, commencing with 1656, ‘‘betrusted and employed for the civil government and conduct of the Indians in Massachusetts colony by order of the general court there.” “OF THE PRINCIPAL INDIANS THAT INHABIT NEW ENGLAND. ‘©, The principal nations of the Indians that did or do inhabit within the confines of New England, are five: 1, Pequots; 2, Narragansitts ; 3, Pawkunnawkuts; 4, Massachusetts, and 5, Pawtucketts. ©2. The Pequots or Pequods were a people seated in the most south- erly bounds of New England, whose country the English of Connecticut jurisdiction doth now, for the most part, possess. This nation were a very warlike and potent people about forty years since; at which time they were in their meridian. Their chief sachem held dominion over divers petty sagamores, as over part of Long Island, over the Mohe- gans, and over the sagamores of Quinapeake, yea, over all the people that dwelt upon Connecticut River, and over some of the most southerly inhabitants of the Nipmuck country, about Quinabaag. The principal sachem lived at or about Pequot, now called New London. These Pe- quots, as old Indians relate, could in former times raise four thousand men fit for war, and held hostility with their neighbors that lived bor- dering upon them to the east and north, called the Narragansitts, or Nechegansitts ; but now they are few, not above three hundred men, being made subject unto the English, who conquered and destroyed most of them upon their insolent deportment and just provocation, anno 1638, of which we shall have occasion to speak more particularly in the sequel of our history. . “3. The Narragansitts were a great people heretofore, and the terri- tory of their sachem extended about thirty or forty miles from Sekunk River and Narragansitt Bay, including Rhode Island and other islands in that bay, being their east and north bounds or border, and so run- ning westerly and southerly unto a place called Wekapage, four or five miles to the eastward of Pawcutuk River, which was reckoned for their south and west border, and the easternmost limits of the Pequots. This sachem held dominion over divers petty governors, as part of Long WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 881 island, Block Island, Cawesitt, Niantick, and others, and had tribute srom some of the Nipmuck Indians that lived remote from the sea. The chief seat of this sachem was about Narragansitt Bay and Cannonicut Island. The Narragansitts were reckoned in former times able to arm for war more than five thousand men, as ancient Indians say. All do agree they were a great people, and oftentimes waged war with the Paw- kunnakutts and Massachusetts, as well as with the Pequots. The juris diction of Rhode Island and Providence Plantations and part of Con necticut people, possess their country. These Indians are now but few, comparatively ; all that people cannot make above one thousand able men. “4. The Pawkunnawkutts were a great people heretofore. They lived to the east and northeast of the Narragansitts; and their chief sachem held dominion over divers other petty sagamores; as the sagamores upon the island of Nantucket and Nope, or Martha’s Vineyard, sev- eral others, and some of the Nipmucks. The country, for the most part, falls within the jurisdiction of New Plymouth Colony. This peo- ple were a potent nation in former times; and could raise, as the most credible and ancient Indians affirm, about three thousand men. They held war with the Narragansittsyand often joined with the Massachu- setts, as friends and confederates against the Narragansitts. This na- tion, a very great number of them, were swept away by an epidemical and unwonted sickness, An. 1612 and 1613, about seven or eight years before the English first arrived in those parts to settle the colony of New Plymouth. Thereby Divine Providence made way for the quiet and peaceful settlement of the English in those nations. What this disease was, that so generally and mortally swept away, not only these but other Indians, their neighbors, I cannot well learn. Doubtless it was some pestilential disease. I have discoursed with some old In- dians that were then youths, who say that the bodies all over were ex- ceedingly yellow, describing it by a yellow garment they showed me, both before they died and atterwards. _ 5, The Massachusetts, being the next great people northward, inhab- ited principally about that place in Massachusetts Bay where the body of the English now dwell. These were a numerous and great people. Their chief sachem held dominion over many other petty governors, as those of the Weechagaskas, Neponsitt, Pankapaog, Nonantum, Nasha- way, some of the Nipmuck people, as far as Pokomtakuke, as the old men of the Massachusetts affirmed. This people could, in former times, arm for war about three thousand men, as the old Indians declare. They were in hostility very often with the Pawkunnawkutts, who lived on the south border, and with the Pawtucketts, who inhabited on their north and northeast limits. In An. 1612 and 16135, these people were also sorely smitten by the hand of God with the same disease, before mentioned in the last section, which destroyed the most of them, and made room for the English people of Massachusetts colony, which peo- H. Mis. 69 56 §82 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ple this country, and the rest called Pawtuckett. There are not of this people left at this day above three hundred men, besides women and children. “6, Pawtuckett is the fifth and last great sachemship of Indians. Their country lieth north and northeast from the Massachusetts, whose dominion reacheth so far as the English jurisdiction, or colony of the Massachusetts, doth now extend, and had under them several other smaller sagamores, as the Pennakooks, Agawomes, Naamkeeks, Pas- catawayes, Accomintas, and others. They were also a considerable people heretofore, about three thousand men, and held amity with the people of Massachusetts. But these also were almost totally destroyed by the great sickness before mentioned, so that at this day they are not above two hundred and fifty men, besides women and children. This country is now inhabited by the English under the government of Massachusetts.” Pawkunnawkutt was the Indian name for the country around the present city of Bristol, R. I. King Philip, Pometacom, or Metacomet, lived here, and it was from this place the nation of which he was sachem derived its name. These Indians were, however, sometimes called the Wampanoags, or Wamponoags. Another writer says: ‘‘The east side of Narragansett Bay was inhabited by the Wampanoags (who are next in power to the Narragansetts), on the broad regions of country extending to Massachusetts Bay, Cape Cod, and Nantucket. The most powerful sachem of the Wampanoags, at the time of the arrival of the Plymouth settlers, was Massasoit, also called Osemequiu. His two sons and successors were Wamsutta, called by the English name of Alexander, and Metacomet, known as King Philip.” The five tribes of indians mentioned used the same language, with, however, some “slight difference in the expression, not unlike the differences found in several counties in England. They could readily understand each other, but could not understand some of the inland Indians, particu- larly the Mawhawks, or Maquas. ‘Their government is generally monarchieal, their chief sachem or sagamore’s will being their law; but yet the sachem had some chief men that he consults with as his special counselors. Among some of the Indians their government is mixed, partly monarchical and partly aristocratical, their sagamore doing not any weighty matter without the consent of his great men, or petty sagamores. Their sachems have not their men in such subjection but that very frequently their men will leave them, upon distaste or harsh dealing, and go and live under other sachems that can protect them; so that their principal endeavor is to carry it obligingly and lovingly unto their people, lest they should desert them, and thereby their strength, power, and tribute would be diminished.” This description of their government, given in Mr. Gookin’s history of the Indians in New Eng- land, shows the peculiar, uncertain hold which their rulers had upon them, and throws a good deal of light on the relation which soon came WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 883 to exist between the rulers of the Wampanoags, Wamsutta and Phillip, and their praying Indians upon Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket. Very early Massasoit saw that the English were acquiring a dangerous ascendancy over the minds of his Indians, and begged the English to stop trying to change the religion of his Wampanoags, for they were apt to become poor subjects to him. It is a suggestive fact that in two noted cases in which King Philip sought to administer justice in accordance with Indian law, that of John Gibbs, at Nantucket, tor speaking evil of Philip’s father, Massasoit, and that of John Sassa- mon, at Assawamsett Pond, for revealing Phillip’s plans to the English, the offenders were preachers of the Gospel to the praying Indians. The English tried to alienate still further the praying Indians from their allegiance to Philip by adding to their list of jurors at the trial of Sessamon’s executioners ‘six of the indifferentest, granest, and sage Indians,” that, by their concurrence with the white jurors, the Indians of the praying towns might be committed to the cause of the whites. To make the conviction of the culprits sure, however, they had the full number of twelve white men before adding the six Indians to the jury. The execution of these three Indians by the English was the immediate cause of the Indian war, threatened for some time, but purposely de- layed by Philip until he could get the aid of the Narragansetts. The names of Elliot and Williams will ever be associated with the conver- sion of the Indians under their charge near the Massachusetts and Providence Plantations; but to the less celebrated efforts of the May- hews, on Martha’s Vineyard and Nantucket, and of Mr. Treat, Mr. Bourne, and Mr. Cotton, on Cape Cod, are chiefly due the conversion of the Indians in those places, and the friendly attitude taken by these Indians during the war that devastated the region lying just west of them. The following quoéation in reference to the labors of the May- hews states very well the effect of their labors, and sets forth the tract- able nature of the Indians of Martha’s Vineyard, which, it may be added, were shared by those on Nantucket and Cape Cod: ‘At the timeof the settlement (Martha’s Vineyard, in 1642) the Indians were very numerous in this town (Edgartown), perhaps more so than in other parts of the island. The Indians of Martha’s Vineyard were hos- pitable, and more tractable than those on themain. Governor Mayhew and his son, as soon as they became settled, attempted to civilize them and introduce the Gospel among them, and their success surprised and delighted the pious of that age. The younger Mayhew labored in this benevolent work with diligence and fervor till his death, in 1657, when it was assumed by his father, and in a few years by his son, and it was carried on by some member of the family till the beginning of the pres- ent century. Nearly all the Indians on the island became professed Christians. At first they were called ‘catechumens,’ but were formed into a church in 1659, and from this another church arose in 1670. The English found most essential advantages from the ascendancy which 834 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. was gained over their minds; they were disarmed of their rage; they were made friends and fellow-subjects. In King Philip’s war all the Indian nations on the main were confederated against the English. Alarm and terror were diffused on every side; but Governor Mayhew was so well satisfied with the fidelity of these Indians that he employed them as a guard, furnished them with the necessary ammunition, and gave them instructions how to conduct themselves for the common safety in this time of imminent danger. So faithful were they that they not only rejected the strong and repeated solicitations of the natives on the ' main to engage in hostilities, but when any landed from it, in obedience to their orders which had been given them, they carried them, though sometimes their near relations, to the governor, to attend bis pleasure. The English, convinced by these proofs of the sincerity of their friendship, took no care of their own defense, but left it entirely to the Indians, and the storm ef war which raged on the continent was not suffered to ap- proach, but these islands enjoyed the calin of peace. This was the genuine aud happy effects of Mr. Mayhew’s wisdom and of the introduction of the Christian religion among the Indians.” The Indians of Cape Cod had been very generally christianized be- fore King Philip’s war broke out, and most of them remained faithful to their white neighbors, and aided in protecting the cape against hostile invasion. It is very probable that some of ihem left the praying towns to join Phillip, as did many from the praying towns near Boston. In the records of drafts of men levied in Massachusetts and Plymouth colonies to fight Philip are found the names of southern or friendly Indians. About twenty of these Indians, under the leadership of an Indian of the Wampanoag tribe, named Captain Amos, living at or near Cape Cod, took part in the disastrous fight near Rehoboth. Rev. Noah Newman, in writing of this encounter, states that Capt. Michael Peirse, with fifty-one of his soldiers and eleven of these friendly Indians, were killed. Because of the friendly attitude of the Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket Indians toward the whites, the Indian his- tory of these places is not so eventful as that of the rest of the Wampa- noag country lying between Buzzard’s Bay and Narragansett Bay. The farmers in the latter region have pointed out to me the past summer the swamp, at the foot of Mount Hope, where Philip was shot, and the place where Benjamin Church encountered Tuspaquin and his warriors on Assawamsett Neck, in Lakeville, Mass., and many other places made memorable during this bloody Indian war. On Cape Cod and adjacent islands there were no hostilities during King Phillip’s war, and ail encounters between these Indians and the whites took place at a very early date, when white explorers thought it expedient to plunder and kidnap the natives, and they in turn thought best to kill the crew of any shipwrecked vessel, and so secure the plunder. On Nantucket, Gookin writes that some bad Indians committed this of- . fense even later than the year 1649, and were punished for it. In the WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 885 year 1619, Capt. Thomas Dermer landed at Martha’s Vineyard and was attacked by the natives. He and his companions gallantly defended themselves with their swords and escaped. Several Indians were killed in the fray. When Bartholomew Gosnold visited that island, in 1602, it is written that he trafticked amicably with the natives of the vicinity, and it is very probable that Captain Dermer, or Martin Pring, who had spent the summer at Edgartown a few years before (in 1603), did something to provoke the Indians, or Captain Dermer would have been differently treated. Captain Weymouth had kid- napped five Indians in Maine, and one of Captain Smith’s commanders, named Hunt, carried off forcibly twenty-seven natives from Massachu- setts Bay—Squanto, afterwards the interpreter of the settlers at Ply- mouth, being one of the number. Such treatment of the Indians would not be likely to win their confidence, and it is no wonder that when the Pilgrims landed the natives should try to take revenge upon them, especially after they had been robbed of corn, themselves pursued, and the graves of their people disturbed by this very company of men. Three days before the landing of the Pilgrims at Patuxet, or Plymouth, while exploring in what afterward became the town of Eastham, they were attacked at night or early in the morning by the Nauset Indians, probably led by Aspinet, a subchief, who owed allegiance to Massasoit. This spot, called Namskeket by the Indians, was named by the English ‘The First Encounter.” Some years before this, the explorer Cham- plain had an encounter with the Indians of Cape Cod, or Cap Blane, and immediately started back to Europe. At atime of great want in Plymouth colony, through the assistance of Squanto and Massasoit, the colonists obtained supplies of corn from the Indians of Barnstable County. Very soon the land itself, which was so easily cultivated, attracted emigration from Plymouth, and from this time forward there was little to be recorded but the deeding of land to whites, the pov- ‘erty, drunkenness, and plagues of the natives, and the labors of good men like Mr. Treat to instruct them and improve their condition. We have few particulars in regard to Indian wars of the Wampanoags, either among themselves or with other tribes, those given by Gookin and in the history of Nantucket being almost the only ones. On Nan- tucket, according to their traditions, there were two tribessf Indians, one that crossed from the Vineyard and landed on the west end of the island, the other that came across from Monomoy, or Chatham, and landed upon the east end. These two tribes, or portions of the Wam- panoag tribe, engaged in a war about the year 1630, the last Indian war on the island, and the only one of which we have any knowledge. In studying the history of Indian tribes in almost any part of the coan. try one cannot fail to be strack by the terrible ravages that disease makes when once it enters their midst. Longfellow, in his tale of Hia- watha, did not overlook this sad feature in Indian life, and the descrip- tion of the pestilence is hardly too strong to represent the mortality 886 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. and distress produced among the Indians by many diseases not usually fatal to whites. On the sixteenth page of Barber’s Historical Collec- tions is given a very interesting account, first published in ‘‘Good News from New England,” of a visit made by Edward Winslow to Massasoit, whom the Plymouth colonists had heard was lying very ill at Matta- puyst. The sachem’s condition is graphically described, and the primi- tive means employed by the Indians to cure him. One passage of the description is as follows: ‘‘When we came thither (Puckanokick) we found the house sq full of men, as we could scarcely get in, though they used their best diligence to make way for us. There were they in the midst of their charms for him making such a hellish noise as it distem- pered us that were well, and therefore unlike to ease him that was sick, etc.” The simple but sensible methods used by Mr. Winslow for his recovery, and their success, Show what might often have been accom- ptished for others in a similar condition. According to early writers, the most general and fatal diseases among these Indians before the whites came were yellow fever, and a hectic fever ending in quick con- sumption. The traditional method for “laying” the yellow fever upon Martha’s Vineyard. would be most likely to spread the disease. Small- pox and even measles were very fatal in the Indian towns after the com- ing of the whites, if not before. Intemperance soon increased the nat- ural improvidence of the Indians, undermined their constitutions, and provoked quarrels among them which often ended in a fatal drunken fray. The following description of a portion of the Wampanoag tribe living at Middleborough, preserved in one of the earlier volumes of the Massachusetts Historical Society’s collections, gives a fair description of their methods of living, and of the prevalence of hectic complaints among all this tribe of Indians: ‘‘ Before the town (Middleborough) was incorporated this place went by the name of Namaskett, which was an ancient Indian name, and was formerly plentifully inhabited by the Indian natives, who were gov- erned by the noted sachem Tispacan. But when the town was incor- porated and began to be settled by the English, the natives began to scatter and decrease ; but there is now a settlement of them which de- scended from the ancients of Namaskett, which inhabit a part of said town known by the name of Betty’s Neck (which place took its name from an ancient Indian woman by the name of Betty Sesemore, who owned that neck), where there are now eight Indian houses and eight families. (About the year 1794.) The general number of Indians, old and young, that live there is between thirty and forty. Their houses are poor; they own some land; they live imprudent; are very fond of liquor. They till their land, which produces good crops of corn and rye, which they trade off for spirituous liquors with any retailer that is so destitute of principles as to trade with them, so that by the middle of the winter their corn and grain is generally gone. Then, by their baskets and brooms (which they make) they purchase it to supply WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 887 iinmediate necessity. They are very subject to hectic complaints, for more than half that are born are carried off young with consumptions.” Within the past summer I found living on Betty’s Neck only three Indians, all women, descendants of Massasoit, and relatives of Philip’s faithful follower, Tuspaquin, the Black Sachem, chief of all the Ne- maskett and Assawamsett Indians. [Full particulars of this interesting family, whose home is in North Abington, Mass., may be learned in a book published by the mother, Mrs. Zerviah Gould Mitchell, now aged 76 years. She claims to be a lineal descendant, in the seventh genera- tion, from the “great and good Massasoit.”. Both she and her daughters have received good education, and the mother became eloquent in de- scribing the treatment of Tuspaquin, Annawon, and some other Indians engaged in King Philip’s war. The mother and the daughter Melinda, or Teweeleema, have aquiline noses and long black hair, and are as good types of this tribe of Indians as I have ever seen. Itis only while their house in North Abington is let that they expect to remain on this spot, for which they appear to have a strong attachment. We were informed by the mother that the “men folks” of their family were dead or gone, and it is very probable that after this generation passes away no more Indians will ever live on Betty’s Neck, unless this family is quickly re-enforced by Indians of Mashpee or Gay Head. The native population on Cape Cod at the time the whites landed cannot be exactly known, but, through the labors of those men interested in the conver- sion of the Indians upon Cape Cod, not many years after its settlement, we know that there was once a large native population which dwin- dled rapidly away, and of which time has now left us hardly a trace. A letter dated Sandwich, July 1, 1674, from Richard Bourne to Daniel Gookin, on the “ Progress of the Gospel among the Indians in the colony of New Plymouth,” gives a list of the praying Indiansin the towns of Cape Cod at that date. He states explicitly that he has been ‘“ conver- sant with and employed amongst them these many years,” and it is very probable that the list includes all the places of any consequence at the time of his writing, for special mention is made of all places which still need religious aid. In the year 1792, when the first volume of the Massachusetts Historical Society was published, containing this letter from Mr. Bourne, the sites of some of the Indian towns mentioned by him were already forgotten, and so explanatory notes, written largely by the Hon. Nat. Freeman, of Sandwich, were inserted, now seen in- closed in brackets. The proportion of these converted Indians to the unconverted ones may have have been small at this early date, but in regard to the former Mr. Bourne appears to have gained exact infor- mation, even mentioning the number of those converted who could read and write. The number that could read and write will be omitted in the quotation, as it is for the names and sites of towns that the letter is valuable to us rather than their degree of culture. ‘“‘ First there is at Meeshawn, or near the head of the cape [Cape Cod. Part of tliese Indians probably tived in Provincetown, but the greatest 888 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. number in Truro] and at Punonakanit, or Billingsgate [New Wellfleet], that are praying Indians, that do frequently meet together upon the Lord’s Day to worship God; and likewise the rest as followeth, 72. ‘“Potonumaquut [the southeast part of Eastham], or Nawsett [the north part of Eastham], or Eastham, there are praying Indians 44. Mano- moyik [Chatham] there are praying Indians 71. Sawkattukett [the west part of Harwich], Nobsquassit [the northeast part of Yarmouth], Matakees [the land between Barnstable and Yarmouth Harbors, lying principally in the northwest part of Yarmouth and] Weequakut [pro- nounced at present Cheekwacket, the southwest part of the east precinct in Barnstable], praying Indians 122. Satuit, Pawpoesit, Coatuit [Coatuit is in the southwest part of Barnstable], Mashpee, Wakoquet [Satuit, or Sanctuit, Hawpoesit, and Wakoquet or Waquoit, are all within or near the limits of Mashpee] there is praying Indians 95. Cod- tannut [probably Canaumut Neck in Mashpee], Ashimut [or Shimuit. On the west line of Mashpee], Weesquobs [between Pokesset meeting- house and Wenaumut Neck in Sandwich], there is praying Indians 22. Pispogutt [concerning this see Mr. Freeman’s letter], Wawayontat [Waywayantic or Wewewantett, Wareham], Sokones [commonly pro- nounced Succonussett. Part of Falmouth], there is praying Indians 36. Cotuhtikut [or Titticut, part of Middleborough], Assoowamsoo [or Assoo- wamsett, part of Middleborough], there are praying Indians, one with another, 35.” Besides these places; Mr. Bourne mentions Mannamit [in Sandwich, near the bottom of Buzzard’s Bay], also Mananiet, which is supposed to be the same place. “As for lands set out to the Indians, distinct from the English lands, there are divers places already bounded, viz: Where I am most con- versant there is a tract of land preserved for them and theirs forever, under hand and seal, the which is near ten miles in length and five miles in breadth. There is the like done at Comassakumkanit [probably Her- ring Pond, in Plymouth], near Sandwich, and at Cotuhtikut.” Mr. John Cotton, pastor of the English church at Plymouth in 1674, writes to Mr. Gookin that he sometimes preached to a company of 40 praying Indians at a place called Kitteaumut {or Katamet, now spelled Cataumut; part of Sandwich, on Buzzard’s Bay]. Mr. Cotton spells Mashpee, Marshpang. The following letter of the Hon. Nat. Freeman, dated September 23, 1792, published in the same volume of the Magsa- chusetts Historical Society’s Collections, in reference to the sites of Indian towns on the cape, gives a fuller account of some of the places and Indians mentioned in the letter of Mr. Bourne: ‘‘ From the best of my own recollection, and the little additional information I have ob- tained, I believe there are not more than two or three Indians, and those females, remaining in Sandwich. In Barnstable I know of not one, ex- cept it be in a partof Mashpee included in Barnstable limits for taxing. These, as they are not within the boundaries of the township, are in- cluded in the number for Mashpee. In Falmouth proper there may be, at a place called Cataumet [the same which is noted in Holland’s map], WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 889 seven or eight, some of whom are mixed. An Indian territory, called Herring Pond, in the neighborhood of Sandwich, about 5 miles north- west from this village, and so extending thence along shore to Monu- ment Ponds, all included within the township of Plymouth, I am told by Joseph Nye, esq., one of their guardians, contains about a hundred and twenty souls, one-half of whom are mixed. The Indian name of this territory I never could learn. They appear to have been considered as a distinct tribe, now known by the name of the Herring Pond In- dians. Might not this place be Comassakumkanit?” (See Gookin’s Hist. Collection, p. 108.) The same Mr. Nye, who is guardian also to the Mashpee tribe, says that there are about two hundred and eighty souls in that place, of whom at least two thirds are mixed. I suppose the Indians have diminished since 1785, but the mixed race may be increased, as many negroes and mulattoes from abroad have, since that period, settled there. I know of none below Barnstable upon the Cape, except at Potanumaquut, a part of Harwich, and there, I believe, there may be six or seven souls only. The Rev. Mr. Damon thinks there is one in Truro. Wakoquet, Weequakut, or Coquit (see Gookin’s Hist. Collect., pp. 197-200), prob- ably may be Wawquoit. The latter seems as like the sound as either, but as the first is associated with Satuit, Pawpossit, Coatuit, and Mash- pee, it is most likely to be that. Then the second may be what is now called Chequocket, or by some Shequocket, which is in the southwest part of the east parish in Barnstable, where there is an inlet called Lewis’s Harbor, not the same as Lewis’s Bay, which is more easterly. Or if it comport better with the history, it may be a place and pond near Howland’s Ferry, Tiverton, R. L., called Quaket, or Quaket Pond. There is a place in Mashpee called Popponessit. This may be Pawpoe- sit. Weesquobs cannot be located. Great neck in Mashpee is a place famous for eels. The Indians, when they go in a canoe, with a torch, to catch eels in the night, call it Weequash, or, anglicized, weequash- ing. There was a great number of Indians formerly on this neck, and it seems now the metropolis of Mashpee. Whether any supposed affin- ity between Weesquobs and Weequash will justify a conjecture is hard tosay. Codtaumut may be Canaumut Neck, in Mashpee. Kitteaumut is probably Cataumut in Holland’s chart. Shumuit, which L suppose to be Ashimuit, is about equidistant from Cataumut, on Buzzard’s Bay, and Canaumut Neck; rather nearest the latter. It might be associated with either in Gookin’s Historical Collections. But if we suppose Wees- quobs to be Whakapee, a pond in Mashpee, then, most likely, Codtau- mut and Canaumut must be the same. If we associate Cataumut, Shu- muit, and Great Neck (for Weesquobs) together, there would then be other places not contiguous. Wawayontat is said to be Wareham. There are two rivers which pass through Wareham into the bay. That through the town is called Agawam, and the Indians generally call Wareham by that name. The other, which is near the west end of 890 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. the township, toward Rochester, is called Weantick. This may be Wawayontat. Falmouth still goes by the name of Sokonesset, and is undoubtedly the Sokones mentioned by Gookin. There is a place on Buzzard’s Bay, on Sandwich side, called Pokesset ; but I have been told Indians used to call it Poughkeeste. It is the second parish in Sand- wich, about 8 miles southwest from my house [near the meeting-house of the first parish], but not more than two leagues across the bay to the mouth of Weantick River, and lies on a line between Wareham and Falmouth, adjoining northerly on Cataumut, which is rather in the edge of Falmouth than Sandwich, as you supposed. Can Pokesset be the sane aS Pispogutt? There is a neck of land within Pokesset, called Pachawesit. This seems as dissimilar as the other. The place where Doctor Bourne’s house stands, viz, about two miles up Manumit River, and near the Herring Pond, is called Pumpisset ; and a neck of land in Wareham, next to Monument, or Manumit, and parted from it by a small gut, is called Cowesit. The syllable pis is in one of them; but Pokesset was the most noted Indian place. Besides these places, the writer has heard of the following places, which are spelled phonetically : Scusset, the next village westerly from this; Unset, or Onset, and Quan- sit, two little bays, or shores at the bottom of Buzzard’s Bay, within Wareham; Cohasset, the gut between Manumit and Cowesit; Wenau- mut, a neck within Pokesset; Mashne, an island in Buzzard’s Bay; Quisset, an inlet in Falmouth, north shore Buzzard’s Bay ; Nobska, near Wood’s Holl, a bluff shore or head; Naashawn, Nashawinna, Cutta- hunka, Pesk, Elizabeth’s Islands; Menemsha, a bight on the Vineyard shore ; Quashne, or Quashnet, a river in Mashpee; Shanton, or Scorton, the lower end of Sandwich; Muset, a creek in Sandwich off Spring Hill; Skunkamug, south side of the parish of Great Marshes; Hockanum, between Yarmouth and Nobscusset; the east parish of Yarmouth; Suet, or Sesuet, a neck in Yarmouth ; Naamskeket, the south side of Harwich ; Skeket, or Skaket, the lower part of Harwich next to Eastham. The following summary of the Indian population at different times on Cape Cod is found as a foot note to a part of Gookin’s Historical Collections, page 201, printed in 1792: “ Christianity met with much better success in Plymouth than in Massachusetts. In the year 1685, the praying In- dians in this colony amounted to fourteen hundred and thirty-nine, be- sides boys and girls under twelve years of age, who were supposed to be more than three times that number.” (Hutch., vol. i, p. 349.) In the year 1693 there were within the limits of Pasa (which then included Wellfleet and Orleans) 505 adult Indians, to whom Mr. Treat preached; 214 adults, besides stragglers, at Mashpee and places adja- cent, under the care of Mr. Rowland Cotton, minister of Sandwich; 180 Indians, to whom Mr. Thomas Tupper preached; and 400 more, under the care of Mr. John Cotton, minister of Plymouth. (Matthew May- hew’s Narrative, pp. 46-53. See also Mather’s Magnalia, book vi, p. 60, and Neal’s Hist., chap. vi, p. 256.) In the year 1764 there still remained WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 891 in the colony 905 Indians of every age, 223 of whom were in the county of Plymouth, 515 in the county of Barnstable, and 167 in the county of Bristol. Since that period their numbers are much lessened. There is at present [1792] no Indian church in the counties of Plymouth or Bristol, and Mashpee only, in the county of Barnstable. Of 134 Indians in Dartmouth and Freetown in 1764 there are now [1792] about 33 left. (Information of Rev. Mr. Backus.) In the other towns of Bristol they are probably extinct. There are four or five families of Indians in Middleborough, two or three in Pem- broke, five or six persons in Bridgewater, and probably a few scattered about in other parts of the county of Plymouth. (Inf. of Rev. Mr. B.) In the county of Barnstable a few Indians remain at Potanumaquut, a few in the town of Barnstable, and a few at Herring Pond, between Sandwich and Plymouth. But the great body of them reside at Mash- pee, where there are about 80 families, consisting principally of a mixed race, not more than 40 or 50 persons being pure Indians. (MS. Let. of Rev. Mr. Mellen.) In September 14, 1674, Mr. Cotton writes as follows of the Indian towns upon Martha’s Vineyard: ‘When I lived at the Vineyard the praying towns were Chappaquidgick [an island east of Martha’s Vine- vard, separated from it by a strait about a quarter of a mile wide. It is within the limits of Edgartown], Nashamoiess [the south part of Edgartown], Sengekontakit [also spelled Sanchecantacket, the north part of Edgartown], Toikiming [Taacame or Takame,Tisbury], Nash- uakemmink {Nashonohkamack, Chilmark], Talhamo [probably part of Chilmark], one church there gathered long before, but no officers. Since I lived here [Sandwich] I went over with Mr. Eliot thither [in the year 1670], and Hiacoomes was ordained pastor; John Tokinosh, teacher; John Nonoso and Joshua Mummeecheeg, ruling elders.” In the year 1692 the number of Indians on Martha’s Vineyard was much lessened. The church, however, at that time consisted of more than 100 persons. (Mat. Mayhew’s Nar., p. 28.) In the year 1720 there were on the Vineyard six small villages, con- taining about 155 families and about 800 souls. Each of these villages was supplied with an Indian preacher. There was also a small assembly at Winthrop’s Island; another, consisting of twelve or fourteen families, at Tucker’s Island and Nashaun, which lie near together. There were _a few Jndians left at No Man’s Land. Beside these Indian assemblies there was a small congregation of Baptists at Gay Head. [Exp. May- hew’s Nar. of Ind. on Mar. Vin., p.2.] For the state of the Indian Bap- tists on Martha’s Vineyard in the year 1774, see Backus’s Hist., vol I, p. 439. In the year 1764 there were remaining in Duke’s County 313 Indians, 86 of whum were in Edgartown, 39 in Tisbury, and 188 in Chil- mark. About that period they began to intermarry with negroes, in consequence of which the mixed race has increased in numbers and im- proved in temperance and industry. At present [about 1792] there are 892 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. of pure Indians and of the mixed race about 440 persons, 75 of whom live on Chappaquiddick [not more than one-third pure]; about 25 at Sanchecantacket [not more than one-fifth pure]; about 40 at Christian- town, in the north part of Tisbury, toward the Sound [about one-half pure}; about 24 at Nashonohkamuck [about three-quarters pure]; and about 276 at Gay Head [of which about one-quarter are pure]. In this account unmixed negroes are not reckoned. [Information of Captain Jerningham and Benjamin Bassett, esq.| Barber states in his Historical Collections that at the time of the settlement by the English of Nantucket, in 1660, there were nearly 3,000 Indians on the Island. Upon what authority he makes this statement I cannot discover; but another authority, probably much better than that on which he made the statement, places the number of Indians on the island, in the year 1659, at about 700. In the year 1694 the Indians on Nantucket were about 500 adults. There were five assemblies of praying Indians, and three churches; two Congregational, and one of Baptist. [Gardner’s Let. in Mather’s Magn., book vi, p. 56.| Three hundred and fifty-eight Indians were remaining the 16th of the eighth month, 1765, when a fever began among them, and lasted till the 16th of the second month, 1764. Of this distemper 222 died. [See Hutch. Hist., vol. 1, p. 35.] The Indians on the island are now [1792] reduced to 4 males and 16 females. [MS. of Friend Zaccheus Macy. | On Cape Cod, at present [1883], there is not a pure-blooded Indian, so far as I can learn. The notes accompanying the Rev. E. C. Ewer’s His- torical Map of Nantucket state that the last Indian on that island died in 1822, and the last man with Indian blood in him, Abram Quary, died in 1855. While near Shimmo, on Nantucket, last summer, this man, Abram Quary, was described to me by a white man who once knew him and evidently regarded him as a curiosity. While walking with my brother through the graveyard at Vineyard Haven, on Martha’s Vineyard, in the summer of 1882, studying the inscriptions on the stones, we came suddenly on an old grave-digger, busily at work pre- paring a grave. Weasked him a few questions about the most common Vineyard names, and also about the Indians on the island. He told us, beside a few other interesting facts, that he knew that the last pure- blooded Indian, a woman, had been buried on the island only a very few years before. In about 260 years, then, from the landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth, a race of men, then occupying eastern Massa- chusetts, has practically become extinct. Alas, for them, their day is o’er, Their fires are not from shore to shore ; No more for them the wild deer bounds, The plough is on their hunting-grounds ; The pale man’s axe rings through their woods, The pale man’s sail skims o’er their floods, Their pleasant springs are dry. (Charles Sprague’s Centennial Ode, 1830.) ee ee a a WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 893 Unlike the aids to the study of Egyptology, the monuments of the Indians are of the simplest kind, very apt to be wholly overlooked by the modern observer, or regarded by him as an interesting curiosity for his children to play with. In truth, this tribe of Indians appear to be almost wholly lacking in the spirit which prompted the Egyptians to raise lasting memorials of their lives aud deeds. These Indians were poor, and not very far advanced in the arts, and could not, there- fore, be expected to erect such monuments; but nevertheless, one would hardly expect, after having carefully passed over so large a region as that of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket, where we know that many Indians once lived, and where abundant evidence may still be seen of their skill and perseverance in fashioning articles of ornament, weapons, or utensils, to find not a trace of any attempt on the part of the natives, before their contact with the whites, to con- vey to later generations an idea, either historical or otherwise, in a form likely to last. It is possible that records of wars or other remark- able events in the history of this tribe may have been kept by them, as in the case of other tribes, preserved as pictographs embroidered on wampum; but these, of course, cannot now be found if they ever were in the possession of this part of the Wampanoag tribe. Inscribed tablets of stone, or bowlders with picture writings upon them, have, | believe, never been found in this region, if we except, of course, such instances as the gravestones at Gay Head, inscribed after the Indian language, had been reduced to writing by the whites. In an Indian burying- ground on Assawamset-neck, in Lakeville, near Middleboro’, on the land of Mr. Charles Jewett, containing twenty-five or more graves, was one bearing a peculiar inscription of two letters or characters. This graveyard is the resting place of the relatives, and some of the. ancestors of the three Indians before mentioned residing on Betty’s- Neck, descendants of Massasoit and Tuspaquin. The latter name, con- tracted into Squinn or Squeen, appears on one of the stones, lately broken into fragments by some vandal ‘Two or three of the graves have well engraved slate head-stones, uch like those in any old grave-yard of New England. Most of them have no stones whatever, and a few have a short, thick, plain slab of stone or bowlder at one or both ends. It is very probable that all these graves were made after the Indians had ceased to bury interesting relics with their dead. I mention this fact because I heard that the three surviving Indian women living near by were greatly distressed a short time ago to find that somé relic hunters had tried to dig up some of their ancestors. Considering the circum- stances of these burials, and the prominent part taken by the ancestors of these persons in the early Indian history of this vicinity, it seems a pity that the’graves cannot remain undisturbed as a reminder to future generations of the Indians of New England, now that so few monuments of them remain. Not to overlook entirely a very interesting rock about which there has been endless speculation, it may be well to mention 894 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. here the “Dighton Rock,” or “ Writing Rock,” which was found by the first white colonists beside the Taunton River, on the Berkley side, op- posite the landing-place for sloops at Dighton. This spot does not lie within the country of the Cape Cod Indians, but it is a part of the terri- tory of the Wampanoag tribe, to which they belong. Prof. F. W. Putnam, of Harvard College, assures me that it is now the belief of the best scholars that the inscription on this rock is noth- ing but an Indian pictograph, and that the attempt, by the aid of sub- jective drawings of it, to make it serve as testimony of a visit to this country by the Northmen, or Pheenicians, is pure folly in the light of later discoveries of pictographs, closely resembling it, in other parts of the United States. A picture of this rock, with a very good description of it, copied from the second volume of Kendall’s Travels, may be found on pages 117, 118, and 119 of Barber’s Historical Collections. Mr. Ken- dall traveled through the northern parts of the United States in 1807 and 1808. He made a careful examination of the Dighton Rock, visit- ing it several] times for the purpose. Mr. Kendall writes of another in- scribed rock as follows: ‘“*The only sculptures on any rock not on the Writing Rock consist in two or three figures or characters having some similitude to the letters XOO, and which are seen on the corner of a slab of stone lying within a few yards of the Writing Rock.” Mr. Ken- dall presents a series of wild conjectures and Indian traditions in re- gard to the origin of the Writing Rock, prevalent among the learned and unlearned of his time, to which list may be added that of Mr. Rh. B. Anderson in his work entitled “America not discovered by Colum- bus.” The latter writer attempts to prove the truth of the old Scandi- navian or Icelandic tales relating to the discovery of America by the Norsemen, 500 years before Columbus set sail, by appealing to the cir- cumstantial evidence of the skeleton in armor discovered at Fall River, the tower at Newport, and the Dighton Writing Rock. In the inter- pretation of the writing on the Dighton Rock, Mr. Anderson discovers some marks which he considers are Roman characters, copied by him as follows: CXXXI. This, he says, represents 151, for the Icelanders reckon 12 decades to the 100. Then he finds a small row-boat between the letters N and M. He makes N stand for Norse, the boat for sea- faring, and the M for men, and proceeding in this way confirms, to his own satisfaction, the truth of the old legends. He closes his fourteenth chapter as follows: ‘‘Upon the whole, the Dighton Writing Rock re- moves all doubt concerning the presence of Thorfiun Karlsefue and the Norsemen at Taunton River, in the beginning of the eleventh century.” The “skeleton in armor” discovered at Fall River will be described at length in speaking of certain relics once found upon Cape Cod which appear to throw some light upon the probable history of these far-famed remains. So far as I have been able to discover in my researches upon Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket, for evidence of a former Indian population there, all the testimony or evidence to be found is of WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 895 an unintentional sort on the part of the natives. The Indians appear to have expended unstinted labor, with considerable skill, in fashioning their implements, weapons, and ornaments of stone, but none whatever in preserving their history. Therefore the methods employed in tracing out the settlements of Indians in these places must be, or were for me, like those of a person discovering the camps of a very early prehistoric race. It is really surprising how little beside the remains usually found at preliistoric settlements can now be found on the sites of several of the largest Indian towns on Cape Cod, such as those at Wellfleet, prob- ably the seat of Mr. Treat’s labors among the praying Indians. After a careful examination of the site of one of these settlements near Drummer Pond, in South Wellfleet, which was evidently once of considerable importance, I was able to find only a few bricks, which had formed fire-places; a few bits of iron nearly rusted away; frag- ments of coal, and glass bottles, and a goodly number of broken clay pipes and pipe-stems of the ordinary Irishman’s style. Besides these, and to my eyes much more conspicuous, were the common indications of an Indian town, the shell heaps, bones of animals and fishes, with numberless chippings of quartz, porphyry, jasper, &c., made by the In- dians in fashioning their arrow-heads, Perfect arrow-heads were not common, but the desert expanse of coarse sand and gravel surround- ing the town was one of the best of places to find arrow-heads unless they had already been picked up. Along the coast, shell heaps are the most striking evidence that we have of prehistoric tribes. Shell heaps are found in almost all parts of the world upon the sea-coast, and their size and contents indicate a more or less prolonged halt or settlement there of a family or tribe. Some only mark stopping places on a jour- ney; others were the sites of villages long inhabited by the natives, but most of them, in the opinion of Professor Putnam, were places to which the Indians were in the habit of resorting from the interior to get sup- plies of mollusks, which they opened, smoked or dried, and laid up for winter use. Shell heaps are refuse heaps, the name given those on the Danish islands being Kjoekkenmoeddings, and the most common things found in them are of course like the most common indestructible refuse thrown from modern kitchens. Shells, and bones broken to extract the marrow, make up the great mass of the heaps, but there can usually be found with them, or near by, a few implements, weapons, ornaments, broken pottery, and even human bones, which may have fallen here by chance. Implements of stone and bone, for crushing open the edges of the shells and extracting the meat, are the relics properly belonging here, and it is very unusual in examining a large shell heap not to find at least several of these stones. Near or upon these shell heaps may usually be found black spots frequently surrounded by blackened stones, where the natives were in the habit of making their fires and cooking their food. Pieces of charcoal, even, may sometimes be found in the midst of these black heaps of ashes, and I have several times 896 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. had good success in hunting for fragments of broken pottery near these old fire-places. The shells composing the shell heaps of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket are mostly quahoags, oysters, clams, both the small kind and the large sea clam, fragments of razor shells, conches, periwinkles, a few scallops, and the large salt-water snail shell so commonly found clinging onrocks. At Edgartown, Martha’s Vineyard, near the “ Swim- ming Place,” and at one other place on Cape Cod, are found large numbers of land snail shells in little piles in the midst of the shell heap, which leaves little doubt that the Indians did not hesitate to eat even these when they could collect them in large enough numbers. It is possible that they were collected with a view to pierce and string them, for they would make better ornaments when strung than ordinary periwinkles. On Indian Neck, in South Wellfleet, Mr. Theophilus Rich, a few years since, while digging, found the skeleton of an Indian which was apparently, when first uncovered, well preserved, but soon crumbled all away ex- cepting the jaw-bone and teeth and a double row of common periwinkles which had hung about the neck and rested on the chest. The teeth were worn down close to the base, or were, as the discoverer affirmed, “double all the way around.” Among the quahoag and periwinkle shells near the oldest shell heaps lying to the north of Wellfleet Harbor were found some which had been perforated from within outward, ostensibly for the purpose of stringing. It was possible to tell roughly which shell heaps were the older, because some of them had the quahoag shells in them dented on the edges or broken in pieces by hammer stones, while in other piles which in other respects appeared equally old it could be seen that the quahoag shells had been opened by a knife, which could be in- serted to cut the strong adductor muscle and thus avoid breaking the shell. One shell heap, a very short distance from the most westeru large wharf, on the north side of Wellfleet Bay, was especially interest- ing from the fact that here occurred the shells of the long narrow native oysters, now extinct on the New England coast, but whose shells make up by far the larger part of the great shell heaps of Maine. It is a rare thing to tind these oyster shells so far toward the south, and a few of them discovered some years ago in the mud about Back Bay, Boston, are said to have created considerable comment at the Boston Natural History Rooms. The shells in the heap were very old, and the larger ones crumbled so easily that only one was preserved. Svon after the examination of this shell heap, Mr. Graham, living near by, showed a very fine large specimen of this oyster’s shell which he said he dredged up in the bay. Both valves were perfect, and looked as if the oceupant had just removed. The owner of it saw that it was very rare, and he refused an offer for itof $5. If itis true that this variety of oysters was once common along the coast of Cape Cod, and yet a thorough search should prove that the shell heaps of Cape Cod contain very few of them, will it not help to establish the fact that the Indians have not plenti WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 897 fully inbabited Cape Cod till a comparatively recent time? On Cape Cod scattered shells and a thin layer of rich black earth, often contain- ing a few stone chips, are found in the vicinity of nearly all Indian towns where the ground may have been fertilized by the natives for their crops, or where the soil was already best for their cultivation. This layer is usually from 6 inches to 1 foot below the surface, but in one or two places it occurred fully 2 feet down. This depth does not necessarily make the time of accumulation great, for the sand of Cape Cod is noted for its habit of shifting about under the action of the wind, and in some places, where arrow-heads occur most plentifully, the wind has removed all the sand which may once have covered them, and has left them on a smooth gravelly surface, where they may be easily seen. The writer was drawn to an examination of the “drift gravel” of the cape by the success which Dr. C. C. Abbott had in finding stone implements, &c., in the gravel near Trenton, N. J., but none have been found except where a bank had washed away, and the implements which belonged in the layer of soil above had sunk down into the gravel, and been covered up there by Jater slides. The laws which govern the distribution of Indian camps on Cape Cod, Martha’s Vine- yard, and Nantucket are much easier to apply than those which govern the distribution of our villages in the same regions. It is possible to predict with considerable certainty where will be found remains of Indian settlements. Indians did not dig wells, and they were largely dependent for food upon the fish and shell-fish which they caught at the mouths of streams and sheltered bays. Therefore they almost invari- ably chose a sheltered spot, near the shore of some indentation of the coast, or on some stream leading from such indentation. This they did for convenience in bringing their fish and shell-fish to their camps, which were placed as near as possible to a fresh-water stream or pond to obtain a ready supply of drinking water. It was an easier thing for them to adjust the position of their homes conveniently to these sup- plies than to bring them any distance to their homes; and so these matters were considerations of prime importance to them in selecting a camping: ground. Accordingly the ponds or brooks in the vicinity of bays that supply shell-fish and quiet fishing-grounds, help us to find vestiges of Indian settelment, provided they have not since been de- stroyed by cultivation of the ground. This method has proved very successful on the parts of Cape Cod visited, and if followed up further in the vicinity of Chatham Harbor, Barnstable Harbor, and the numer- ous inlets on the Falmouth shore, would probably bring to light many more shell heaps. The largest shell heaps found were about Wellfleet Bay, Bass River, Centreville River, and Buttermilk Bay, the exact spots being marked upon the map. In the vicinity of Wellfleet Bay, especially where the wind has taken all the soil from the rounded tops of the hills, the vis- itor cannot fail to notice the scattered shells and numberless chips of H. Mis. 69 57 898 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. quartz and porphyry marking the spots where the “ancient arrow maker” sat. Mr. Graham speaks of one man who went carefully over these hills, a few years ago, and collected in three days arrow-heads and other Indian relics which he sold for $15. There are still many imperfect arrow-heads, broken or unfinished, with numberless cores, chips, and hammer stones; but the best specimens have evidently been picked up in most of the places visited in the vicinity. It is fortunate for the collector of to-day in these regions that the soil of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket is very sterile in many places, and there is no accumulation of rich vegetable mold to attract cultivation or cover Indian relics such as exist at Mount Hope, R. I., and a few other celebrated Indian regions. The following list gives a summary of objects found during the days of the past two summers collecting on Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket. It must be first understood that with the exception of a visit of three days to Chilmark, Martha’s Vineyard, all were obtained in a few hours’ search, while on an excursion of a day each to these islands. At Well- fleet the writer camped three days with his brother, who assisted him in the search. The list cannot be specially interesting except to give an lea of what may still be accomplished in a very short time in collecting Indian relics in a State where such things are now generally supposed to be very rare. In the vicinity of Bass River, between Yarmouth and Dennis, were found a stone axhead, with a deep groove for receiving the withe or thong by which it was fastened to the handle; two stone drills for boring; a piece of stone 6 inches by 4 inches, chipped roughly to an edge all around, and probably used as an ax or hoe; a large fragment of a soap-stone pot, with handle or ear attached; thirty arrow-heads. Harwich.—F¥orty arrow-heads and 4 spear-heads; a polished celt of jasper; an unpolished hatchet, or tomahawk, of gneiss; pieces of soap- stone pottery, also pottery of clay baked with pounded shells or coarse sand; bones broken in lengths, and charcoal in fire-places; a piece of graphite worn by use in marking. Buttermilk Bay (at the head of Buzzard’s).—Twenty-five arrow-heads of quartz and porphyry, and 1 of brass; 1 broken stone knife. Chatham (near Taylor’s Pond,in South Chatham).—A water-worn pebble, of good quality graphite, 2 inches long and 14 inches wide, given by a friend, who found it beside a shell heap. Brewster.— Among some chips of stone made by the Indians in arrow- making, and collected by a friend, was one of siliceous chert, evidently from a limestone region. In the center of the siliceous portion was a minute spiral-shaped fossil shell. : Centreville-—Twelve stone arrow-heads, 2 spear-heads, and 1 arrow head of brass. North Truro.—Two arrow-heads, 3 spear-heads, West Yarmouth.—TLhree arrow-heads, WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. soy Cotuit.—Two arrow-heads. On Oyster Island, in the harbor, 2 arrow- heads and part of the skeleton of an Indian. Cataumet.—One arrow-head. Wellfleet and South Wellfleet_—F ive hammer stones, a number of cores, over 200 arrow-heads, 3 spear-heads, good pieces of clay pottery, a pipe- stem, and a club-head of syenite with a deep groove all around to fasten it to a handle, as seen in the club of the Massachusetts Historical So- ciety’s collection. At Assawamsett Pond, Middleborough.—One arrow-head and two fine pestles. Nantucket.—Thirty-three arrow-heads, 10 cores, 3 spear-heads, 1 celt of sandstone, and one gun-flint. Martha’s Vineyard, Chilmark.—Ten spear-heads, 48 arrow-heads, and 3 hammer-stones. Edgartown.—F¥ifteen arrow-heads, 2 hammer-stones, and 1 flake of stone with edges trimmed up as a minute celt, or scraper. Some of the spear-heads were of the type called leaf-shaped imple ments, but a few of them were much larger, and would have made for- midable weapons in a fight. Many of the arrow-heads and some of the spear-heads would ngt be preserved by some collectors; but they are saved, because they illustrate different stages of completion, from the core, out of which only one or two chips have been broken, down to the finished specimen off which not another chip could be taken without injuring the symmetry. Other specimens have been cast aside when nearly finished, owing to some imperfection in the stone itself, and, in one case, occurred several arrow-heads roughly blocked out and left in a pile, evidently with an intention, on the part of the maker, to finish them up at his leisure. Thevessels found on Cape Cod are of three sorts: First, those made of soap-stone; second, and most abundant, pottery made of clay mixed with pounded shells and baked after the proper shape had been given by molding the clay in a basket. The basket was burned away, leaving the outer surface much better baked and, in consequence, far redder than the dark clay within. The outer surface bore the im- print of the wickerwork of the basket, and the inner surface the marks of some tool used in applying and shaping the clay with which the bas- ket was lined. The clay must have been applied in three layers, for the broken shells in the center never appeared on the surface to weaken the pottery or mar the beauty. The third kind of pottery was made of clay and coarse sand uniformly mixed, and did not appear as tough and well baked as the preceding variety. Among the articles of Indian manufacture found on Cape Cod care was exercised to discover any indications of an ancient aboriginal trade by which the Indians may have been supplied with articles which they could not obtain in their vicinity. With the exception of the sin- gle flake of stone from Brewster containing a fossil shell, all the material from which arrow-heads were made upon Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, 900 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. and Nantucket, might have been collected on the spot; although one variety of jasper of which are made a good number of arrow-heads seems to be very rare in this region. Several pestles found on Cape Cod, and one from Middleborough, were made of a slate, belonging in the Carboniferous group, occurring abun- dantly in Rhode Island, and from which several pestles in the collection of Brown University are made. Besides these pestles the most interesting objects, which point to some sort of trade or an exchange by force between these Indians and the Narragansetts or some other tribe, are the broken pots of steatite, or soap-stone, found at Bass River, Winslow’s Narrows, and Harwich Port, and the pieces of graphite found at Taylor’s Pond and Harwich Port. The Narragansetts are mentioned first, because they were noted for their industry in manufacturing and exchanging articles with other tribes, and a comparison of the specimens from Cape Cod with some obtained this summer in Rhode Island lead to the belief that both the graphite and the soap-stone came from that region also. This summer the famous ledge of soap-stone at Johnston, R. I., just outside of Providence, was visited. To this the Indians must have re- sorted for years to obtain material for their stone pots and pipes. Rey. Fred. Denison, of the Rhode Island Historical Society, and one of the committee chosen to preserve this interesting relic, has published a circular which describes the condition of the quarry when first dis- covered. Extracts from this circular, prepared by Mr. Denison, will be given to show the importance of this quarry to the aborigines. “This largest excavation measures about 10 feet in length, 6 feet in width, and now 5 feet in depth. From the top to the ledge, as left by the glaciers, the excavation must have been carried down about 15 feet or more, inasmuch as, when it was opened, there lay across its top a fallen slab of slate-stone that once stood full 10 feet high above it, form- ing its eastern wall. ‘The excavation was found partly filled ap with dirt, débris of Indian art, some whole stone pots, some partly finished pots, some only blocked out, numerous stone hammers, and a few shells. Many of these valu- able relics have passed into private hands and are highly prized. The sides and bottom of this excavation contain about sixty distinct pits and knobs of places where pots and dishes were cut from the rock, while all parts bear marks and sears made by the stone implements of the swarthy quarrymen. IT'rom the excavations and their surroundings have been removed about three hundred horse-cart loads of the stone chips left by the Indian workmen, yet some have been preserved by Prof. J. W. P. Jenks, in the museum of Brown University.” In the possession of a friend on Cape Cod, is a broken soap-stone pipe which he found at Har- wich Port. In Rhode Island a perfect stone pipe of this same pattern was seen. The handles orears on some of the pots found at the quarry above described, were exactly like the handle on a piece of a stong¢ WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 901 pot found at Bass River. With the additional evidence that the stone itself is similarin the two places there can be little doubt that the John- ston, R. I., quarry supplied the Cape Cod Indians with their stone pots and pipes. The only other.interesting implements or weapons which were once in the possession of the Cape Cod Indians and found along with their other weapons of stone were two arrow-heads of brass, one of which the writer’s brother found at Buttermilk Bay, and the other was discovered by the writer at Centreville, while hunting for Indian relics. They are of very thin evenly wrought brass sheathing, and a notch in the edge of the one from Buttermilk Bay suggests that they were cut out by a metallic knife or shears with a good cutting edge. The one from Centreville and another which Professor Putnam found at Revere, Mass., were both made on the same pattern as the arrow-heads found with the celebrated “skeleton in armor” discovered at Fall River, with the exception that the latter were pierced with holes for better securing them to the shaft. It was the custom of the Indians of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket, to bury their dead in a sitting posture, wrapped in bark and, if a warrior, supplied with his usual weapons. On the east side of Bass River, just above the lower bridge, while digging for a well, a man found two Indians buried in this way. One of them had buried with him a stone knife, spear, and arrows. The arrows were in a quiver which, with the wooden shafts, soon crumbled on exposure to the air, Other Indians have been found buried in this way on other parts of Jape Cod, at Martha’s Vineyard and at Nantucket. At Cedar Pond, near Betty’s Neck, in Lakeville, another one, ‘‘curled up” and carefully wrapped in bark, was exhumed. Soon after their contact with the whites the Indians gave up this method of burial. The writer has the skull of an Indian buried at Chilmark, Martha’s Vineyard, soon after the whites settled on the island, the skeleton of which was lying hori- zontally amidst faint vestiges of a coffin. On the west shore of Oyster Island, in Cotuit Harbor, was found part of the skeleton of a large Indian buried ina sitting posture, but much disarranged by the sliding away of the bank which had uncovered it. During the period in which the Indians were gradually changing from their old method of interment to that of civilized nations, it was their habit to bury with their dead, ornaments and weapons obtained from the whites, while, in other respects, the burial may have been exactly similar to that of their ancestors. There is an account of such a grave in Florida, where was found an ornament of gold,amade from metal of about the standard weight of the coin taken to that coast by the first settlers. In another southern grave was found an old sword of the early settlers. Coats of mail were sent to the colonists in Vir- ginia and Plymouth colonies, to defend them from their enemies, the Indians. Armor was used as late as the time of King Philip’s war in 1675. The disasters connected with Indian warfare among the colonies, 902 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. and the chance of lost or cast away armor falling into the hands of the Indians is enough, in my opinion, to explain the presence of some few pieces of armor in their graves without going back to the early times of the Northmen’s explorations. The “skeleton in armor,” discovered at Fall River, is minutely described in an article written by Mr. John Stark, and published in the third volume of the American Magazine, at Boston, in the year 1837. This account may also be found on page 124 of Barber’s Historical Collections, with a drawing of the skeleton and armor in the position in which it was discovered. ‘The body was in a sitting posture and enveloped in a covering of coarse bark of a dark color. Within this envelope were found the remains of another of coarse cloth, made of fine bark and about the texture of a manila coffee bag. On the breast was a plate of brass 13 inches long, 6 broad at the upper end, and 5 at the lower. It was oval in form, the edges made irregular, apparently by corrosion. Below the breast plate and en- tirely encircling the body, was a belt composed of brass tubes, each four and a half inches in length, and three-sixteenths of an inch in diameter, arranged longitudinally and close together; the length of a tube being the width of the belt. The tubes are of thin brass, cast upon hollow reeds, and were fastened together by pieces of sinew. This-belt was so placed as to protect the lower parts of the body below: the breast-plate. The arrows are of brass, thin, flat, and triangular in shape, with a round hole cut through near the base. The shaft was fastened to the head by inserting the latter in an opening at the end of the wood, and then tying it with a sinew through the round hole—a mode of constructing the weapon never practiced by the Indians, not even with their arrows of thin shell. Parts of the shaft still remain on some of them. When first discovered the arrows were in a quiver of bark, which fell to pieces when exposed to the air.” The skull and a few other bones of the skeleton were much decayed, but the upper viscera were entire, and the flesh and skin on the hands, arms, one knee, and a part of the back were in a good state of preserva- tion, though the skin looked black as if it had been tanned. In connec- tion with the discovery of this skeleton in armor, this writer mentions the fact that the famous Dighton Rock, bearing an inscription “of which no sufficient explanation has yet been given,” lies on the edge of a river but a short distance away, and that near this rock brazen vessels have been found. All these signs seem to him to indicate that some mari- ners—the unwilling and unfortunate discoverers of a new world—lived some time after they landed, and, having written their names, perhaps their epitaphs, upon the rock at Dighton, died and were buried by the natives. In the summer of 1882 the writer learned that some few years before, the skeleton of an Indian had been discovered in Centreville by some workmen while making the cellar of Captain Crawford’s house. Buried with this skeleton was found a breast-plate of brass. Last summer if WAMPANOAG INDIANS Of MASSACHUSETTS. 903 was learned from Mrs. Crawford that such a breast-plate had been found, but that it had disappeared, she knew nct where. She remembered few particulars in regard to the position of the skeleton and any coverings that might have been on it, but remembered well holes near the edges of the breast-plate that vibe probably once been occupied by rivets or strap buckles to fasten it to the body. She felt sure it was an Indian, because all around the house on the sides of the little hill upon which the house was built there was an abundance of stone chippings and arrow-heads, and once a queer Indian pipe-bowl had been found. On the rear side of the little hill a good number of quartz and porphyry chips were then picked up, and at the house next door a fine leaf-shaped implement, which had been picked up on this hil], was exchanged for an old jack-knife. The first white explorers that visited New England found considerable copper in the possession of the natives which was used chiefly in the form of ornaments, but sometimes to head their ar- rows. Very soon, even before Gosnold or the Pilgrims arrived, the In- dians had in some way obtained brass of the traders and fishermen who visited their shores. In “ Mourt’s Relation or Journal of a Plantation settled at Plymouth in New England” we hear of arrows curiously ‘headed with brasse, some with Hart’s horne and others with Eagle’s claws.” Another writer, sending home to England an account of the settlement at New Ply- mouth, says of the Indians: “ For their weapons they have bowes and arrowes, some of them headed with bone, and some with brasse: I have sent you some of them for an example.” The following account of some copper articles in the possession of the Indians is taken from John Brereton’s “ Brief and True Relation of the Discovery of the North Part of Virginia, being a most pleasant fruit- ful and commodius soil.” Brereton was with Gosnold when he dis- covered Martha’s Vineyard in 1602. Even then they found an European rigged boat, the work of some Frenchmen, in the possession of the In- dians of New England. From these Frenchmen, or other traders and explorers, the articles of “‘ paler colored metal” described by Brereton as in the possession of the Indians that visited them while staying at Cuttyhunk may have come. The Indian probably told Brereton the truth in regard to the copper, which might have been dug up in some places in Connecticut or New Jersey, for afterward in these places the first white settlers sometimes found pieces of native copper, and even mined it, at the junction of the trap and red sandstone. Brereton’s account of the metal found in the possession of the Indians is as fol- lows: “They have also great store of copper, some very red and some of a paler color, none of them but have chains, ear-rings, or collars of this metal. They head some of their arrows herewith much like our broad arrow-heads, very workmanly made. Their chains are many hollow pieces cemented together, each piece of the bigness of one of our reeds, a 904 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ; finger in length, ten or twelve together on a string, which they wear about their necks. Their collars they wear about their bodies like bandoleers, a handful broad, all hollow pieces like the other, but somewhat shorter, four hundred pieces in a collar, very fine and evenly set together. Be- sides these they have large drinking-cups made like skulls, and other thin plates of copper much like our boar spear blades, all which they so little esteem, as they offered their fairest collars or chains for a knife or such like trifle, but we seemed little to regard it. Yet I was desirous to understand where they had such store of this metal, and made signs to one of them with whom I was very familfar, who, taking a piece of copper in his hand, made a hole with his finger in the ground and withal pointed to the main from whence they came.” With a knowledge of this custom of the Indians, that is, of stringing tubes of copper or brass in the form of wide belts and wearing them about the waist, the discovery of such a belt on the skeleton at Fall River buried in other respects like any Indian (with the exception of the breast plate) need not seem so strange, especially when we find that, brass and copper were quite abundant among them at an early date, and one other Indian at least had come into possession. of a brass breast- plate. Before the Pilgrims landed on Cape Cod it is certain that the Indians there had killed three Englishmen, and killed or retained as slaves the whole ship’s crew of a French vessel which landed there in distress. This they did for the sake of plunder, and very probably some copper or brass came into their possession at these times. Granting, then, that the Indian whose skeleton was found at Centreville did not engage in successful war with the colonists, or get the brass breast-plate from them by trade, it is still possible for him to have obtained it, or the material for it, at a still earlier date from these unlucky explorers. es account of the burial customs of the Indians on Cane Cod would be imperfect without reference at least being made to the description of an Indian burying ground discovered by the Pilgrims while exploring on Cape Cod before the settlement at Plymouth. This account may be found under the history of Gov. John Carver, in a book compiled by J. B. Moore, entitled ‘‘Governors of New Plymouth and Massachusetts Bay.” The place where Governor Carver and “nine of his principal men, well armed,” landed after leaving the Mayflower and rounding the point off Wellfleet Harbor, was probably on Indian Neck, where, it will be seen by consulting the map, many Indian shell heaps may now be found. On the shore Carver and his men saw ten or twelve Indians engaged in cutting up a large fish, but found it difficult to go directly to the shore where the fish lay, on account of the shoal water. The Indians ran off, taking with them all the fish they could carry. The shores of the shallow bay or cove in which they landed were almost lined with the remains of large fishes like that which the Indians had cut up. The WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 905 fish proved to be a grampus, and so the explorers called the bay Gramn- pus Bay. This bay is now called Blackfish Bay or Greek, and it is only a few yards to the north of this shallow bay that the shell heaps and other signs of Indian settlement, before described, around Drummer Pond may be found. With this explanation and a reference to the map, Sketch-map of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. the history of the discoveries made by the Pilgrims at this time may be more interesting, and should be read among the very first books by those who wish to become better acquainted with the history of the Indians in this vicinity. The traditions of the Indians of Cape Cod, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket have been wholly omitted in these notes, but may be found in full, together with many interesting facts in regard to the Indians’ dress, Wigwams, canoes, &c., in a few books the titles of which will soon be given. The fable in regard to the lignite and fossil bones of cetaceans or whales found abundantly in the Tertiary clay of Gay Head, Martha’s Vineyard, is very interesting. These Indians supposed that the black- ened wood or lignite marked the spot where the giant Manshope broiled the whale on a fire made of the largest trees, which he pulled up by the roots. The rest of the tradition is very interesting, but if repeated \ 906 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. would necessitate entering on the almost equally interesting traditions of the Indians of Nantucket and Cape Cod. Mr. Treat wrote that there were in 1693 under his care in Eastham, which then included Wellfleet and Orleans, four Indian villages where he was in the habit of visiting the natives in their wigwams. At this time there were five hundred adult persons in the villages; but notwith- standing every exertion made for the benefit of the Indians, they wasted away by fatal diseases and other causes, so that in 1764 they were re- duced to four individuals only. One reason why so few traces of settlement can now be found on the sites of these old Indian villages is undoubtedly owing to the fact that the civilized Indians persistently kept up the custom of living in wig- wams until they had become wholly extinct or had mixed with other races. As late as the year 1779 there was a cluster of wigwams about a mile from the mouth of Bass River, probably at the spot where the shell heapsand arrow-headsare so abundant. About this time thesmall- pox was prevalent and most of them died. In 1745 thirteen Indians from this company on Bass River and the immediate vicinity accompanied the Cape Breton expedition. The con- dition of their embarking was that Mr. Thacher, of Yarmouth, should be their captain. Of these thirteen only three lived to return, two being killed by the enemy, and eight dying of disease. One of Thach- er’s Indians, hired by Colonel Vaughan for a bottle of brandy, was the first of the provincials who entered the grand battery at Louisburg. He crawled in at an embrasure and opened the gate, which Vaughan imme- diately entered, the enemy having withdrawn from this battery, though at the time this circumstance was not known. This information is from an extract made from ‘“Alden’s Collection,” on page 60 of Barber’s His- torical Collections, and it adds several other interesting stories of the Indians of this vicinity. Very little interesting information exists about the Indians of Cen- treville and Buttermilk Bay, where the shell heaps would indicate a population nearly as great as that at Bass River and Wellfleet Bay. Until the breast-plate of the Skeleton in Armor is found, and a thorough investigation can be made, the history of this warrior must remain a mystery, and we may regard him as a very ordinary and vain Indian, buried in his finery, or we may think of him as a successful warrior safely returned from a secret participation in King Philip’s war, and afterwards buried in the spoils which he had stripped from a fallen foe. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SUBJECT. Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society.—V OL. 1.—1792. His- torical Collections of Indians. By Daniel Gookin. [Contains much valuable information on the subject; Indian inscription on a grave-stone at Gay Head.] VOL, 11.—1793,. P.40 [Letter from King Phillip to Governor Prince]. VOL, 111,—1794, P,1:; Description of Middleborough, P.15: A Top- WAMPANOAG INDIANS OF MASSACHUSETTS. 907 ographical Description of Barnstable. Pp. 118 and 120. A Topograph- ical Description of Wellfleet. P.148. A Historical Account of Middle- borough. P. 158. Macy’s Account of Nantucket. Pp. 170-172. A Topographical Description of Raynham. Pp. 188-193. Anecdotes re- specting Sandwich and Mashpee. P. 203. A Key into the Language of America; Or, an Help to the Language of the Natives in that part of America called New England. Together with brief Observations of the Customs, Manners, and Worship, etc., of the aforesaid Natives, in Peace and War, in Life and Death. By Roger Williams, of Providence, in New England. 1795. P.50: Account of the Western Indians and some account of the Indians of Martha’s Vineyard, Nantucket, and in the counties of Barnstable and Plymouth. 1798. P.6: General Lincoln’s Observations on the Indians. P. 32: Historical and characteristic traits of the American Indians in general, and those of Natick in particular. P.54: Memorabilia of Yarmouth. [This account contains a tradition of the Indians of Nantucket] VoL. v1.—1799. [Some letters in reference to King Phillip’s War, and some more on the 197th page and beyond between the Governor, Daniel Gookin, and the praying Indians at Natick and others, the last letter ending on the 211th page.]} VoL. vul.—Description of Chatham, p. 151. History of Eastham, pp. 159-176. Pp. 203-239: A Relation or Journal of a Plantation settled at Plymouth, in New England, and Proceedings thereof: First printed in 1622 and abbreviated in Purchas’s Pilgrims, book x, chapteriv. Lon- don, 1625. [This is sometimes called Mourt’s Relation.] P. 239: Good News from New England; Or, A Relation of things remarkable in that Plantation. Written by E. Winslow. Hutchinson’s History. Prince’s Annals. Mather’s Relations of Troubles in New England. Belknap’s Biography. Alden’s Collections. “Brief and True Relation of the Discovery of the North Part of Vir- ginia, being a most pleasant, fruitful, and commodious soil.” |The above is found in the 3d series, Vol. vit, of the Mass. Hist. Society’s Collec- tions. | “Chronicles of the Pilgrim Fathers of the Colony of Plymouth, from 1602 to 1625, now first collected from original records and contempora- neous printed documents,” by Alexander Young. ‘Governors of New Plymouth and Massachusetts Bay.” J.B. Moore. “Drake’s Book of the Indians.” “Defense of the Rhode Island system of treatment of the Indians.” By Zach. Allen. W. Hubbard.—‘“‘ Indian Wars in New England.” Barber's Historical Collections, pp. 14, 16, 33, 38, 43, 46, 54, 56, 59, 117, 124, 131, 135, 147, 150, 154, 447. 908 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ANTIQUITIES FROM OMETEPE, NICARAGUA. By CHARLES C. NUTTING. Although the name of this island has been spelled “ Ometepec” by previous explorers, I have decided to adopt the spelling of the inhab- itants of the country, which is also that used in official papers. This latter fact I discovered through reading official reports of the eruption of the volcano published in “El Centro Americano,” a Nicara- guan newspaper. This island is situated about 9 miles from the town of San Jorge on the west shore of Lake Nicaragua. It is about 20 miles long by 10 wide, and the greater part of its surface is covered by two volcanoes, which are prominent features of the scenery from all parts of the lake. The Voleano Madera is of greater bulk than its companion and much more irregular inform. So far as I could learn it has never been known to give signs of activity within historic times. The Voleano Ometepe, situated on the northern end of the island, is said to be one of the most regular in form in the world, being a perfect cone from all points of view. It is about 5,000 feet high. This has also been considered an extinct voleano, but, during my visit, it began showing signs of activity. On March 6, 1883, a thin column of smoke was seen to issue from the exact summit, and about six weeks afterward there was a slight flow of lava on the southeastern side. Ometepe has the reputation of having been an object of worship by the peoples of past ages, and the large number of stone images found on the island would seem to indicate that it was sacred ground. It was evidently a chosen spot for burial, as the immense number of graves and burial urns still testify. The present inhabitants of the island are mostly Indians of a rather purer type than is found on the adjacent mainland, although many of them show a mixture of Spanish blood and a few are partly negro. For a description of the appearance of the pure-blooded native, I can not improve upon that given by Dr. J. F. Bransford, in his “ Archeo- logical Researches in Nicaragua,” page 6: ‘In physique the Indians are usually rather short, low-browed, with dark copper skin and coarse hair. On and near Madera are a few of commanding stature, many of the men being over 6 feet high and the women proportionately large. The head is short, the features strongly marked, with heavy lower jaw and large teeth.” I was unable to discover any remnant of reverence among the natives for the old idols found on the island, nor did they offer the slightest objection to the removal of one of them, although they were convinced that said removal was simply a freak of insanity on my part. One prominent characteristic of these Indians is the deference and ANTIQUITIES FROM NICARAGUA. 909 obedience which they pay to the opinion and will of their wives, whom they consult on all matters of importance. This fact is well illustrated by an instance which is, perhaps, worth recounting. . While digging for antiquities the writer found a spot peculiarly rich in the objects of his search, but it was on land owned, or at least worked, by an Indian who proved unusually avaricious and demanded payment for every yard of earth disturbed. He also put in a bill for damages done to his crop of yourg plantains by my men passing over them on their way to and from work. I con- sidered the bill a just one and offered to pay it while settling up my other accounts, when, to my great surprise, he refused to accept the money. Upon being pressed for a reason he said that his “ mujer,” or “woman,” had forbidden his takitg the money. In order to test the extent of his obedience I urged him to take the money, telling him that his mujer” peed know nothing of the matter. He steadily refused, however, and gravely stated that ‘‘women knew everything.” The Catholic Church is here, as elsewhere in Central America, the con- trolling power among the Indians. But they still retain some curious remnants of their own ancient superstitions, among which may be men- tioned an almost universal belief in the personality of the great forces and features of nature. They attribute life and passion to Lake Nicaragua, for instance, not only in a figurative but also in a literal sense. This power of ancient superstition was well illustrated by an instance which occurred during my ascent of the Volcano Ometepe. This ascent was made at the request of the ‘“ alealde” of the town of Moyogalpa, who furnished me with six men to carry water and provis- ions. After entering the dense forest which clothes the summit of the peak, I became convinced that the men knew nothing about the trail, and ac- cordingly determined to make a way for myself and, selecting the most intelligent of the men for my companion, | pushed on ahead leaving the others to shift for themselves. After toiling upward for an hour or so, wishing to ascertain the where- abouts of the rest of the party, I asked my companion to shout, and see if they were within hearing. He seemed extremely reluctant to do so, and I gave the call myself, much to his evident alarm. After shouting several times without any response, I was informed by the Indian that my efforts were useless as the others wouldn’t answer even if they heard me. Upon inquiring the cause of this, I was told that they were “afraid to make a noise so near old “Ometepe” as it might make bim “muy bravio” (very angry)! I found, upon rejoining the others shortly afterward, that it was even 910 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. so, and that my calls were plainly heard, but not answered for the rea- son given. | The Indians are good-natured and indolent, as a rule, and rarely quarrelsome or dangerous, except when under the influence of liquor. I found it much easier to lead than to drive them. Their good-will is readily gained, and more can be accomplished through that than through either fear or money. The antiquities secured by me may be divided into two general classes: (1) Sculptures in stone; (2) Vessels of clay and their contents, including all objects found in the burial places. Among the stone sculptures I saw a number of human figures about life size, besides smaller articles comprising images of men and animals, and also utensils such as grinding stones and vessels for various pur- poses. I saw and examined seven human figures carved in stone and of nearly life size. No. 1. A large human figure, sitting, about 5 feet high. The head, upper arm, and knee are wanting. Found lying, half embedded in the gravel on the lake shore, about 3 miles north of Moyogalpa. This is probably the figure referred to by Dr. Bransford as ‘‘an image without a head lying in the edge of the lake.” No. 2. Companion to the last, about the same length, but of slighter build, from which I judge that it was intended for a female. This fig- ure also differs from No. 1 in having the arms bent at the elbows with the hands resting on the knees, while in No. 1 the hands hung down straight at the sides. Both Nos. 1 and 2 are headless, and the latter is probably the one referred to by Dr. Bransford as follows: ‘‘Another was said to be uncovered at low water during the dry season.” At the time of my visit the figure was lying in the water, by which it was nearly covered. Nos. 3 and 4 are Dr. Bransford’s Nos. 1 and 2. They have been taken from their original position in the forest and set up as gate posts at the Catholic church at Los Angeles. They are now the property of Dr. Earl Flint, of Rivas, who bought them from the church and intends shipping them to this country. No. 5 is a very much worn figure of “‘a man in a standing position.” The basalt rock is worn almost smooth, but it bears evidence of work- manship. I must confess that I could not make out the figure of the man, and give it as such on the authority of the native who guided me to it. No. 6 was a seated female figure found in the dense forest south of Los Angeles. This figure also was headless, and I failed to find the missing part. No. 7 was the companion to the last, and in better condition than any of the others | examined. The head was off, but I found it lying near, and found that it fitted well, having been broken off at a comparatively recent date, This figure I determined to secure for the National Mu- ANTIQUITIES FROM NICARAGUA. 911 seum, and succeeded in transporting it down to the lake shore, across the lake and over the mountains to the Pacific coast, where I placed it in charge of the Pacific Mail Steamship Company. The idol is now in the National Museum at Washington, and forms the subject of the following illustration : Ses (a dens eres Front and side view of stone figure from Ometepe. (Size=-/5.) The figure is that of a man seated. It is about life size, but the legs are swall in proportion to the body. The head is large and is sur- mounted by the head of some animal. The arms are separated from the body at the elbows and hang straight down. The following are some of the measurements: Height of figure with- out base, 4 feet 3 inches; height of figure and base, 5 feet 9 inches; 912 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. width of seat, 2 feet 1 inch; height of seat, 1 foot 7 inches; sole of foot to knee, 1 foot 2 inches; arm and hand, 2 feet 1 inch; greatest girth of body, 3 feet 11 inches; greatest girth of base, 5 feet 11 inches; girth of neck under chin, 3 feet 6 inches; girth of arm, 1 foot 4? inches; height of head from shoulder, 1 foot 25 inches; across knees, 1 foot 25 inches; knee to back of figure, 1 foot 10} inches. I also shipped to the museum a figure, supposed to be that of a mon- key. The head only is distinct. It was found in a cacao plantation, about one-half mile northwest of Moyogalpa. This figure is said by the natives to have been worshipped by their ancestors. The burial urns and their contents and accompanying objects of clay, bone, shells, and human remains were all found in two localities, which are called, for convenience in reference, graves Nos. 1 and 2, although it must be understood that each was a burial ground of some extent, and not a simple grave. GRAVE No. 1 was located some 400 or 500 yards from the soak where the idol last mentioned was found, being more to the southwest and nearer the shore of the lake. It was situated in a plantain patch owned by an Indian. The fact that the spot was exposed to the direct rays of the tropical sun rendered it a trying place to work, and I have nothing but praise for the three men (Indians) who toiled faithfully day after day in the excavations at this place. The surface ground here is of rich loamy soil about 8 inches in depth, under which isa bed of sand nearly 2 feet in depth. Underlying this sand is a hard bed of ashes and grit, through which the excavations did not penetrate. The burial urns were of two general classes, round and shoe-shaped. The natives call the former ‘ Ollas,” and the latter ‘+ Burrugas.” Although carefully packed in soft grass, all the large vessels that I secured were badly broken,and at the time of writing only two of them have been mended so that measurements can be taken. No. 61,713 was the first vessel encountered, and was found covering the mouth of a large shoe-shaped urn, being inverted over the same. It is a large basin-shaped dish, round at the bottom, being 7 inches deep and 18} broad. No. 61,712 was also used as a cover to an urn of similar shape. It has a flaring rim at the top, and foot at the bottom, and is 144 inches high by 18 broad at the top. No. 61,714 was a rather small round urn. No. 61,708. A shoe shaped urn which is being restored. No. 61,710 is a round deep urn. No. 61,711 is a round medium-sized urn. No. 61,709 is a shoe-shaped vessel. No. 61,750 is a shoe-shaped vessel. No. 61,707 is a small urn, made of the same material as the preced- ANTIQUITIES FROM NICARAGUA. 913 ing. It resembles No. 61,712 in shape and measures as follows: Depth, 83 inches ; greatest breadth, 103 inches. These large urns were generally found at a depth of about 2 feet. The round ones generally had covers of material similar to the urns themselves, while the shoe-shaped vessels were more often covered with more delicate, painted bowls. Fragments of human bones were found in nearly every urn, but they crumbled at a touch upon being exposed to the air. Many articles of more delicate construction and finer workmanship were found. They were often used as covers to the shoe-shaped urns, or buried near the latter, or placed within the urns, where bowls were sometimes found inverted over the scull of the occupant, apparently serving as a cap or protection to the head. I was much surprised to find, in several ‘instances, that bowls had been broken, and afterwards placed within the urns. This is proved by the fact that many of the bowls which were found in pieces inside of the urns were too large to pass through the mouth of the urn when entire. No. 61,691. Bowl, painted on outside. Found inside of round urn: Depth, 3f inches; width, 83 inches. No. 61,692. Bowl, painted on outside. Found as cover for shoe-urn. Depth, 44 inches; width, 935 inches. No. 61,693. Bowl, painted on outside. Found at a depth of 5 feet, in- inside of round urn containingskull. Depth, 4% inches; width, 9 inches. No. 61,694. Bowl, painted on outside. Found outside ofurn. Depth, 4inchés; width, 84 inches. No. 61,695. Small bowl painted on outside. Two red lines around inside close to the top. Iound inside of round urn. Depth, 3 inches; width, 54 inches. - No. 61,696. Small bowl painted on outside. One indistinct red line around inside of urn. -Found inside of round urn. Depth, 24 inches; width, 5 inches. ; No. 61,697. Bowl with raised figure of human face on each side. Painted on the outside. A brown line around inside of rim with a red line immediately under it. Found covering a shoe-shaped urn. Paint very fresh. Depth, 44 inches; width, 94 inches. No. 61,698. Bowl with raised figure similar to preceding. Painted on outside with a delicate pattern in fine lines and dots. Painted on in- side with rather coarser pattern covering entire inner surface. Found covering aburialurn. Paint very fresh and distinct. Depth, 33 inches; width, 10 inches. No. 61,699. Bowl with raised figure somewhat distorted. Painted inside and out with rather a ruder pattern than the last, and not so carefully executed. Colors remarkably fresh and distinct. Found out- side of burial urn. Depth, 34 inches; width, 84 inches. H. Mis. 69-58 | 914 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTIHROPG@LOGY. No 61,700. Shallow bow] painted inside and out with similar patterns. On the outside there is a series of twelve hieroglyph like figures of two kinds in alternation. On the iuside are ten similar figures also alterna- ting. This bowl is thicker and more solid in construction than any of the others. I have been unable to find another like it in the collection of the National Museum. It was found inside of a round urn where it served as a cover fora human skull. Depth, 24 inches; width, 7 in ches. No. 61,701. Shallow dish with flat bottom and flaring sides. Painted on outside simply in black and red lines broken by short vertical lines extending around its circumference. On the inside the design is much more elaborate, being more like that found on some of the larger bowls. This also was found inside of a round urn and bad been used as a skull cover. Depth, 24 inches; width, 73 inches. No. 61,702. Shallow dish with bottom more rounded and sides more flaring than the last. Painted inside and out with very elaborate de- signs. Paint scaled offin many places. Found near a shoe-shaped urn. Depth, 13 inch; width, 64 inches. No. 61,703. Deep dish with rounded bottom and flaring sides. This dish is ornamented both inside and out with designs more intricate and elaborate than any other that I have seen from Ometepe. The colors are quite fresh and distinct. Found inside of round burial urn. Depth, 2 inches; width, 53 inches. No. 61,704. Deep, narrow-mouthed, bowl-shaped vessel ornamented on the outside with a series of red and black lines, and oblong longi- tudinal panels inclosing circular and square figures. Lower half of out- side and entire inside not ornamented. Found inside of a shoe-shaped burial urn. Depth, 4 inches; width, 53 inches. No. 61,705. Deep, flat-bottomed, straight-sided vessel, painted red, - and ornamented with incised lines on the outside near the rim. Found outside of burial urn. Contained human bones. Depth, 32 inches; width, 64 inches. No. 61,706. Two miniature shoe-shaped vessels joined together, facing in opposite directions with a handle on top (broken off). The two ves- sels are joined together inside by around hole. This specimen is unique in the collections of the National Museum. Depth, 23 inches; width, 48 inches. No. 61,744. Under this number come the numerous legs or feet of tripod vessels of clay encountered in all parts of the excavations. They almost always are made to represent the head of man or some ani- mal, are hollow inside, and often have a little ball of hard clay within which makes a rattling noise when shaken. They are always painted in designs corresponding to those found on the vessels to which they belong. Although dozens of these legs were found I did not encounter a Single entire tripod. No. 61,745. Two vase ornaments representing heads of animals well ANTIQUITIES FROM NICARAGUA. 915 executed and much more elaborate in form than the preceding. Un- painted. No. 61,743. Clay “Sinkers.” An intelligent native told me that he considered that these objects commonly called ‘“‘sinkers” were, in reality, tools used for molding the various clay vessels with which they are associated. No. 61,746. A small round fragment of painted ware, perforated so as . to form aring. Probably an ornament of some sort. No. 61,747. Shell implement found in burial urn. No. 61,748. Fish vertebra found in burial urn. No. 61,749. Flint flakes found in burial urns. Said by the natives to have been used in fashioning the incised ornaments on pottery. No. 61,715. Clay disc; I can think of no probable use whatever for this article. It is simply a round hard burnt disk 44 inches wide by about § inches thick with rounded edges. No. 61,716. Arrow-head found beside a skeleton which had been buried outside of burial urns, and stretched at full length with face up. No. 61,717. Small portion of a semi-fossilized human bone, probably the ulna. Found inside of burial urn, at a depth of 5 feet below surface of ground. No. 61,693, was found in the same urn. A great number of skulls and other portions of human skeletons were encountered both inside and without the urns. Those inside the urns were extremely fragmentary and crumbled at the slightest touch. I brought the fragments of a skull found at a depth of five feet along with Nos. 61,717 and 61,693. LT also collected a large number of bones from skeletons found outside of urns. These seemed to be in a much better state of preservation, but were all jolted to pieces on the homeward voyage. Some of these skulls are remarkably thick with a good facial angle. It seems hard to account for these two modes of burial in the same spot. Skeletons were often found stretched out right by the side of the urns. , The fact that those found outside of urns were in a much better state of preservation than those inside would seem to preclude the idea of the two modes being contemporaneous; the urns being an excellent protection for the latter. The indications are that a considerable lapse of time must have intervened between the two modes of burial, and that the urn burial is the older method, and that the full-length inter- ment was practiced by a subsequent race. This subsequent race must have exposed the urns in digging their graves, and the question arises. Why were the urns left undisturbed ? Dr. Bransford has suggested to me the most plausible answer to this question which is substantially as follows: ‘All mankind, both savage 7 916 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. and civilized, have a peculiar reverence for the graves of the dead, and, among many uncivilized races, this reverence has taken the form of a deep-rooted superstition which forbids the molestation of any grave. This was probably the feeling which induced the ‘subsequent race, spoken of above, to leave unmolested the urns containing the remains of human beings.” GRAVE No. 2.—This place of burial was found at a spot only 200 or 300 yards northwest of Grave No. 1. The character of the ground is much the same here as at No. 1, but the urns were found much nearer the surface, the tops of the vessels generally coming within a foot of the surface of the ground. Most of the large urns were broken by roots of trees which had pene- trated them in ali directions, but they seem to be of the same style as those found in No.1, with perhaps a little more attempt at ornamentation. No. 61,737. A large, ornamented, shoe-shaped urn, much like No. 22,343 of Dr. Bransford’s collection in size, shape, and ornamentation. No. 61,738. A very large round urn which IJ succeeded in getting out of the ground intact, but it was badly smashed on the voyage. No. 61,739. Medium-sized shoe urn, also badly broken. There was one vessel, badly broken by roots of trees, that had an ornamentation which I have not seen elsewhere among specimens brought from Ome- tepe. The vessel was about size and shape of Dr. Bransford’s No. 22,320, but was rather more regularly formed. The ornamentation consisted in a regular, five-pointed star formed of raised lines. One of the points was missing. The smaller articles of pottery from Grave No. 2 differ from those’ found at No. 1 in several important particulars. They have, in general, an appearance of greater age, and are more often ornamented with raised figures or designs. The painting is less elaborate and the paint much less fresh and distinct. No. 61,718. Deep bowl, painted on the outside in a rather elaborate pattern. The design in color differs from that of similarly shaped ves- sels from Grave No. 1 in having the color laid on in bolder and more massive bands and patches. Shows slight traces of having been over the fire. Perhaps it was a vessel used in cooking. Depth, 34 inches; width, 64 inches. No. 61,719. Shallow bowl painted outside in a crude pattern, and in- side in an elaborate one. Found in burial urn. Depth, 14 inches; width, 4 inches. No. 61,720. Large bow] with raised figures of human face on each side, the nose and mouth being much more prominent than in similar vessels from Grave No.1. This bowl shows decided evidence of being subjected to action of heat, being scorched and blackened, and having a large proportion of the paint worn or scaled off. Painted in elaborate de- signs both inside and out. Found outside of burial urn. Depth, 4 inches ; width, 94 inches. ANTIQUITIES FROM NICARAGUA. S17 No. 61,721. Narrow-mouthed pot or vessel, of peculiar sh@pe. This peculiarity consists in a deep, broad groove extending from rim to bot- tom on one side. This may be a suggestion of the double shoe-shaped vessel, No. 61,706. Depth, 34 inches; width, 43 inches. No. 61,722. Wide-mouthed bowl with an crnament consisting of a projecting turtle’s head, well executed, on each side. It is ornamented also by broad raised bands, a flaring rim, a ring or pedestal for a stand, and three rings of incised dots, two of which rings extend entirely around the vessel, while the third is interrupted only by the turtle’s heads. Col- ors red and perhaps originally black. Found outside of burial urns. Depth, 24 inches; width, 54 inches. No. 61,723. Bowl with flat bottom and slightly concave sides, and in- cised pattern running entirely around on the outside near the rim. Col- ored like preceding. Found outside of urns. Depth, 2h inches; width, 54 inches. No. 61,724. Hemispherical bow] with cireular standard. Unorna- mented. Found outside of urns. Depth, 44 inches; width, 8 inches. No. 61,725. Small, shoe-shaped vessel with raised ornament repre- senting the face of some animal (tiger?). Black, polished. Found in urn. Depth, 44 inches; width, 44 inches; length, 5 inches; width of mouth, 24 inches. No. 61,726. Small, wide-mouthed shoe-shaped vessel. Unornamented and unglazed. Found outside of urn. Depth, 5 inches; width, 43 inches; length,.74 inches; width of mouth, 4 inches. No. 61,727. Small, shoe-shaped urn, similar to last with the exception of a raised handle at smallend. Front part missing. Found outside of urn. Depth, 5 inches; width, 42 inches; length, (?) inches; width of mouth, 34 inches. No. 61,728. In form this vessel seems to be intermediate between the shoe-shaped and round styles. There is a slight vertical depression on the smaller end, and also two crescent-shaped ridges in imitation of the rope or chain ornaments found on the large, shoe-shaped urns. The material is either very old or poorly burnt, it being very “rotten.” Depth, 5 inches; width, 6 inches; length, 7 inches; width of mouth, (?) inches. No. 61,733. Diminutive, shoe-shaped urn, with raised ornaments at each end. Found in urn. Depth, 24 inches; width, 13 inch; length, 24 inches ; width of mouth, { inch. No» 61,730. Similar to last. Unornamented. Found inurn. Depth, 24 inches; width, 2 inches; length 23 inches; width of mouth, 14 inch. No. 61,729. Narrow-mouthed round vessel, with a series of vertical depressions and corresponding elevations running around the upper part. There is also a raised ornament, probably a head, on each side near the top. These ornaments are connected by a “‘rope ornament” extending entirely around the vessel. The combination of form and 918 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ornamentation is different from that seen in any other specimen from Nicaragua. Depth, 63 inches; width, 8 inches. No. 61,731. Miniature of round urn, unornamented and unpainted. Found inside of round urn. Depth, 14 inches; width, 1? inches. No. 61,732. Same as last. . No. 61,734, 61,735. Ornaments from a large, curiously shaped dish which served as a cover for No. 61,738, but had been broken to pieces by roots. These ornaments were intended to represent the head of some animal, and show considerable care in design and execution. No. 61,736. Beak of parrot in clay. Many legs of tripod dishes were found, bearing a general resemblance to those of Grave No.1. Very few bones were found, and those were even more fragmentary than in Grave No. 1. ‘ No. 61,740 is arude carving of a face in stone, found inside of burial urn. ON THE COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES.* By Rev. J. OWEN DORSEY, of the Bureau of Ethnology. The term “Siouan” has been applied to that family of Indians which has been known heretofore as the ‘‘ Dakotan Family.” It is unfortunate that we are obliged to use this adjective, which is derived from ‘‘Sioux,” as the latter is not a genuine Indian word. Ac- cording to Dr. J. H. Trumbull, “Sioux is the termination of the French plural of the Ottawa Nadowessi, by which a Dakota was designated. The Ottawa plural is Nadowessiwag (or -ak); the French made it Nado- wessioux, and the couriers de bois reduced it to Sioux.” ‘+ Dakotan” should have been the appellative, as the Sioux call themselves ‘“ Da- kota” and “Lakota.” But, in honor of Albert Gallatin, who was the first to classify the Indians of this family as the “ Sioux,” the Bureau of Ethnology of the Smithsonian Institution has adopted the new term, **Siouan,” as the name of this family. The writer is responsible for “$6-gi-ha¥ as the name of the second group appearing in the following list, and for ‘“ yoi-wé-re,” the name of the third group. @egiha means, “ Belonging to the people of this land,” or, ‘Those dwelling here,” 7. e., the aborigines or home people. When an Omaha was challenged in the dark, if on his own territory, he usually replied, “I am a Gegiha.” So might a Ponka reply; under similar cir- cumstances, when at home. A Kansas would say, ‘‘I am a Ye-ga-ha,” of which the Osage equivalent is, “I am a (e-y4-ha.” These answer to the Oto “ yoi-wé-re” and the Iowa “ yoé-yi-wé-re.” “To speak the home dialect” is called “Qegiha ie” by the Ponkas and Omahas, “ Yegaha ie” by the Kansas, “ yoiwere itc‘e” by the Otos, and “ yoeyiwere itc‘e” by the Iowas. When an Indian was challenged in the dark, if away from home, he must give his tribal name, saying, “I am an Omaha,” “T am a Ponka,” ete. LANGUAGES OF THE SIOUAN FAMILY. 1. Dakota, in four dialects: Santee, Yankton, Teton, and Assinibom. 2. Pegiha, in four dialects: Ponka (spoken by Ponkas and Omahas), Kansas, Osage, and Kwapa. * Read before Am. Assoc. A. S., Section ‘‘H,” at Montreal, August, 1882. 919 921) COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 3. poiwere, in two (?) dialects: spoken by the Iowas, Otos, and Mis- souris. 4. Hoteaiigara or Winnebago. 5. Mandan, in two dialects. 6. Hidatsa, in two dialects: Hidatsa and Absaroka. 7. Ye-sa®, or Tutelo. The three surviving Tutelos are with the Six Nations, in Canada, and the Hon. Horatio Hale has been making special investigations concern- ing their history and language. The writer has obtained about 20,000 words of the Ponka dialect, 4,900 Kansas words, 3,500 Osage words, about 9,000 of the yoiwere, and over 1,100 of the Hotcatigara. He gained over 1,000 Kwapa words, but he is unwilling to publish any of this material at present. TABLE I.—THE SIOUAN ALPHABET. This alphabet includes all the sounds which the writer has found among the tribes speaking the four languages, Dakota, @egiha, yoiwere, and Hoteafigara. It is substantially that adopted by the Bureau of Ethnology in 1880, and used by the writer in his monograph, ‘The Ge- giha Language,” to be published as “Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. VIL.” a as in father. w a sound between u and o. a nearly as in what, or as 0 in not. ‘a an initially exploded u. ar a nasalized a. ti as the Germ. umlaut, in kiissen. a" a nasalized 4. N. B.—It has a short sound in ‘a an initially exploded a. some Osage words. ‘4 its short sound. tim a nasalized ti. ‘a0 a nasalized ‘a. a as in hat. ai as in aisle. e as in they. y ei asi in ice, nice.* é as in get. au asowincow; Germ. Haus. ‘ean initially exploded e. yu asuin tune; ew in new. ‘6 its short sound. ui asin Germ., pfui!* i as in machine. i as in it. Prolonged vowels: a+, a+, e+, i+, "+, 0+, im a nasalized 1. oD+, U+, UP+. i" ~~ a nasalized 1. b as in be. § an initially exploded i. c as sh in she. 42 a nasalized ‘1. A) a medial sh, between sh and zh. o as in no. c as th in thin. o" a nasalized o. 5 a medial th, between th and dh. ‘o an initially exploded o. d as in do. ‘on a nasalized ‘o. ¢ as th in the. u as in rule. g as in go. ti * as 60 in foot. h as in he. u® a nasalized u. j as Z in azure. ti” =a nasalized it. k as in kick. ‘as an initially exploded u. Df a medial k, between k and g. ‘a a nasalized ‘u. k’ an explosive k. * Rarely used. COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOVAN LANGUAGES 921 m= asin me. 7 a medial t, between t and d. um a medial m (m, w, b), sometimes | t’ an explosive t. synthetic (?). w asin we. n as in no. A =©6 a sound between b and w. hn a pure nasal, the h being expelled | x as gh, the sonant of a (kh). through the nostrils. y as in you. fi as ng in sing, singer. Z as z and s in zones. Pp as in pipe. : dj asj in judge. d a medial p, between p and b. te asch in church. p’_ an explosive p. yo amedial te, between te and dj. q a kh, as in Germ. ach. te’? an explosive te. x as in row. ts as in tés. 8 as in see. 4s a medial ts, between ts and dz.* 8 a medial s, between s and z. ny as fi in canon. t as in two. | hw as wh in when, what. Almost any consonant can be prolonged by adding the plus sign (++). The consonants may be arranged as in the following table: TABLE II.—CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. A.—MUTEsS. Sonant- Explo- Sonants. racial Surds inca! Nasals | AeEDISIS\ s.-o2% 22 bd d Pp p’ m | ur w rt Danbalsse..2.2e soe = d 4 t t Tw piltesdecwsoe ed See PalAtaIS <0 9cese~- g y k k’ ii | ny Vo eles B.—SPIRANTS. ESE RE Oe a 1 DMEM Is Ppneine aesDee RSS| ORE? Pe eves sac cae lstincsee ce aise nsaaccl| see ccaae cs |sseew as ame hn Saiea awe Seance eee ee eo Wentals 2 <3. <-.--5- ¢ i) 2) Cee ee es) aac c) as aermene bee ora ie, aD To Palatals ........... ody) jlakeSasacee T° | besaceSee8) peeeascssd HASsrest eal bass sos-ne Esso ssesee C.—SIBILANTS. TGR sta =< Z 8 8 Spirants ..-........ J o) c Compounds ..... -- dj 49 te 1D EASE Pe ore seo boeeenceee | qs ts In the Dakota books which have been published up to date, no dis- tinections have been made between long and short vowels. The writer cannot say that such distinctions do exist in Dakota, but he knows that they are essential in @egiha, yoiwere, and Hotcaiigara. In Ponka ‘‘o” and its compounds are always wanting, but that dialect has the diphthongs, which have not been found in Dakota. The Dakota never use the following: ¢, r, ¢, and the sonant-surds (according to Mr. Riggs). The yoiwere does not use b, g,j,1,s,and z. In the Osage, the only sonants are ¢ and x, the sonant-surds taking the places of their corresponding sonants. The vowels, ug, ti, and ti", are peculiar to the Kansas, Osage, and Kwapa. Inverted m and w are used by the Kansas. *No ‘‘dz” has been found, so far, by the writer in any of these languages. 922 COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. The initially modified or exploded (?) vowels are indispensable. Im- portant distinctions are made by means of them. Thus, in Ponka, we find e, that (aforesaid); but ‘e, to dig; i, to be coming hither for the first time; but ‘i, to give; i", to wear, as a robe; but ‘i, to carry on the back ; gaaxe, to uncover an object by blowing off a robe, ete. (said of the wind); but ga‘axe, to strike and glance off, to make the sound heard when metal or abone is hit. Rev. A. L. Riggs admits that these explosive vowels are found in Dakota; but his father, the late Dr. S. R. Riggs, gave them as simple vowels in his dictionary and grammar, describing the initial modification of the vowel as “‘a hiatus.” A few of the words contain- ing these modified vowels may be seen by turning to Table III, .Nos. 170 to 180. Sonant-surds.—These sounds have been found by the writer in Gegiha, yolwere, and Hotcangara, as well as in some of the languages of the Indians now on the Siletz reservation, Oregon. Dr. 8S. R. Riggs was inclined to the view that such sounds are possible, but his son, Rey. A. L. Riggs, holds the contrary opinion. The writer uses the term, ‘“so- nant-surd” tentatively. He is ready to accept any other term which may be suggested by scholars, if it be sufficiently descriptive of the nature of this class of sounds. By “sonant-surd” is meant a sound between a sonant and its corresponding surd. A few Ponka examples are given, showing the difference between three sonant-surds and the corresponding sonants, surds, and explosives. P-mutes.—ba (sonant), a verbal modal prefix; da (sonant-surd), head, nose; p*‘a (surd), bitter; bi, verbal prefix; di, liver; pi, good; p’i*xe, puckered, corrugated. K-mutes.—ga, verbal modal prefix; yaxa, a crow ; kage, third son, male friend; k’axe, verbal root. T-mutes.—de, while, during; 4e, buffalo; te, a future sign; te, dead; di, adverbial terminal particle; 4i, lodge; ti, to have come hither for the first time; t?i™xe, verbal root, drawn up, as the mouth of a bag. The Dakota “hn” is heard in such words as hnaka and hi-hnaku. It differs from the (egiha “hn.” The “h” in the former is expelled from the mouth, but in the latter it comes through the nostrils, with a very slight effort, often escaping the notice of a white man. It is generally used in the 2d. sing. of verbs in ¢a (ya) and ¢i (yii). EXAMPLES. _ English. Ponka. Kansas. MOUIEO weer niece aeioeer = hne or one (of ¢e) hne (of ye) Woulcount?----scu=+-ssee- hnawa, onawa (of ¢awa) hnawa (of yawa) You finish, stop.......... hnicta*, orficta" (of ¢icta®) | hniicta® (of yiicta”) Except in contractions, all syllables end in a vowel, pure or nasalized. In Dakota there are a few words that seem exceptions to this rule, of COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 923: which Dr. Riggs said, ‘‘These may possibly be forms of contraction, but we have not now the means of showing the fact.” Almost any sound can be prolonged in (egiha and yoiwere, if it be alone, or stand at the end of asyllable. Prolongation occurs in many interjections, and is often used for emphasis. H. g. ha®ega*tce, the morning; ha®ega"tcéqtci, very early in the morning; ha®+ega*tceqtci, ve—ry early in the morning! Weahide, far; wet+ahide, fa—r ! Sound-shifting—As far back as 1872, the writer began to notice many examples of sound-shifting, while comparing the Dakota with the Ponka. After a study of the goiwere and Hotcangara, begun at the Omaha and Winnebago reservations, Nebraska, in 1878, he began the formulation of the principles discov pusde One of the ee important ones is that of triliteral syllables. A triliteral monosyllable in yoiwere (and often the corresponding ones in Dakota and (egiha) is changed into a quad- riliteral dissyllable in Hotcaigara, when the first letter of the mono- syllable is a mute, a palatal spirant, or a spirant sibilant; and the see- ond consonant is a labial or dental mute, or a dental spirant. The first consonant of the Hotcafigara dissyllable is always a surd, the second is,. as in the corresponding yoiwere word, a labial or dental mute, or else a dental spirant; and each consonant (in Hotcafgara) must be followed by the same vowel sound. In no case, as far as examples have been gained, can any mute stand next to one of the same order; e. g., a labial cannot precede a labial. It is probable that the Dakota biliteral monosyllables ‘‘da” and “du” were originally triliteral syllables, an initial ‘‘c” having been dropped. That is, Nos. 32, 33, 34, 36, and 37 of the Dakota column in Table III were originally cda, cda-tka®, eda, edu, and cduxo, respectively. This. seems very probable when we find clo (Teton for cdo), in No. 35, equiv- alent to the @egiha onu, and cda (No. 31) equivalent to the Gegiha ona. In No. 58 there seems to have been a transposition of syllables, final -ha being equivalent to Pegiha initial a, and initial du to Gegiha final oni. So, Dakota mdu, equivalent to Pegiha b¢i, and mdu-ha to Gegiha a-b¢i"; Dakota yu to (egiha ¢i, and yu-ha to Gegiha a-¢i*. In comparing the Ponka with itself, or with the Dakota, we find in- stances of permutations of sound, as follows: ¢ and q, x and z, ¢ and n. The words in which these occur are not always synonyms, but when we find a word in which “c,” for example, is used, we may infer that the language contains another word, differing from it only in the substitu- tion of “q” for “ec.” Or, one language uses “c” where the other em- ploys “q.” The meanings of the words and syllables in the following table will! be found at the end of this article. 924 COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. TABLE III.—SoUND SHIFTING. | COs CrP whe Dakota. mda, bla mda-, bla- ; mdaya, f blaya mdaska, blaska mdaza mdaja wiktce-mna mni pe-mni (see No. EY wamdn-ckada® wamdu-da® ihdi hdi hna ahnaka octehda -nana qtca sde-tca ha"ska b¢e b¢eda®, bebeda® b¢eya b¢e- ionuga oni-, hni- wagticka wag¢i weg¢i &ti gear ag¢a®™ gg¢ar g¢angs gi-da- ca-de cpa- ona, hna* Loiwere. See ees ee ee ee as pre-pri® prege pro pro-ye proproye pru ha-tei-, ha-tu- Hoteafigara. pa-ra qa- paracke puru pram nakpa yre-pra" -pri® ta-nyi ru-pri® ora ora- ora-ta™ ore 0-9TO ori-, oru-, oro- orixo yra- yrata® re yre yrewe ayre yreve yru-, 4ri-, Yro- wayri (egiha. Kansas. Osage. bla d¢a bla- d¢a- blacka d¢acka blaya d¢a¢a blaska, blak’a | p¢aska, d¢ak’a blazé d¢ase Hiaxre. | Weare Fcc ul tee ee ble d¢e ble d¢e bleda blek‘a d¢ek‘a bye-bli= d¢e-p¢ir hea eo Maio iden Paar blu-ga d¢u-ya blii- d¢ii-, d¢u-, d¢i- bliije ‘plas, bli= | dpa blii"-xe Bee ae 6-bla® y¢e-d¢ar -bli2 -d¢i a-blia ¢a-d¢i" La ¢u-d¢in cta cta hna- cta- hna-ta® cka-tar hne ctse icttiiga ictinya hni- ctu-, cgi, cti-, otya, ctsii-, ete. hnixu ctiixu la- y¢a- lata y¢ata® le y¢e le ¢e lebe y¢ede ald ayg¢e leje y¢eoe lu- y¢u-, Hti-, W¢u-, etc. walticka wax¢iicka walé wayti uyeli wey ¢i li y¢i laiige y¢anyze alan ay¢a" 1, la® qu larye y¢ante Cie P ae! lp eetee eas cae ca-ps ca-ps cpa- cpa- Pains seboacusacs hna®, hni a-hni® a-hni® qlas q¢ar gpa qpa huqpe huqpe qlu-ge q¢u-7e latent ani qtalay shee stye- fe -stse-[e stye-dje stse-jse na"ta na"ta Gini cA ra- cdra-tcka”na cére 0-c6do-da curu- (See No. 191.) ka-ra- kdératcka"’-na ke-re kere weresere, Wwa- rasere, (Alex- ander). etcd-keré-na kirikiricke kt-ru- wakidi ‘séretco i-tea-wa-ga-Ta na-te4-wa ma *° COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 925 The following are some of the vowel changes which have been ob- The references are to the examples which precede or follow. served. No. Dakota. Ponka. 69 a a (See Nos. 1-8.) 70 a i (See No. 64.) 71 a e (See Nos. 9, 61.) 72 e C) (See Nos. 13, 26, 41.) 73 i i (See Nos. 49,120—a variation.) 74 i e (See No. 48.) 75 ° a (See Nos. 16, 17.) 76 u i (See No. 58.) 77 i u (See Nos. 19, 20, 22.) Gegiha. Loiwere. | Hotcafigara. Kansas Osage a a a a i i iY wi PRtecooess . e r) e ei C) ® ® e i i i i ) e i i ua GE. o ° i i i i a a a a No. Dakota. pa- hde-pa (see No. capa depa sapa tea -pl poxa* pa j pe- (see No. 13.) Other consonant changes follow, but the list is not exhaustive. The references are to the examples which precede and follow. s Cegiha. Loiwere. Hotcaigara Ponka. Kansas. Osage ma- ba- da- da- ma® mu- bu- du- do- do- bi- , bii- du- Wie) eS hae eee ee ma ba da da wa-ra ma® maz ma® ma? ma?-na ma*.ji maja ma*-ou ma*-yu ma.-woju-ra Wit or witaqtci) mi" or mi*qtci | mix or misqtsi | iya" or iyanke eee hijafi- . ki 6-be bye de Wwayeron! "(1/9 (50 feo ee eee mi-ya mi-k‘a mi-k‘&or mi®- | mi®-ke or mi- | wa-ke ka ke mi® mi®, miPiba | mi®, mi®-i-da | di -wi-da we- ulye- we- wi- hi- (see No. 48) manga manga mManyar MN aelsaeecansen = ku»-cke-da mange mange manye mane maige-ra ma*¢i® ma"yi® ma¢i®, ma*yi® | ma-nyi mani-na ma-qpi ma-qpul ma-qpu ma-xu (I.), | maxi-da maxue (Ot.) wi wi wi-e mi-re, mi*’-re | ne a- ba- da- wa- wa- da (see nacki) yeas, bye- | we¢iiq¢i na*gu nasu-ra qliz he (see No. 145)| pye PICO ih ete reetetetete le winters | meat acl ire . ahe apye BBOOU | joa eet ais aon ee oe ec ehe epye, epce epce ihe ihe-na juhe jupye oupce DD VIEW) |) | i eabdasnae ee remte jahe japye oapce aware }- |. "|scccsnsgemeceme a‘athe ak’uhe ak’u"he at’a™we e}0a-t’t"p- u‘athe uk’uhe uk’uthe OUR WON ms Sl emec entation = pube stym-be. . § |s.2 Seeseehe de. Gri-wen ) ta) |oekoacceeaeeee ~ 2). cabe, dark; | cabe, dark cade, dark cewe, dark; | cép, eto., dark onabe, sowed igewara, soiled mi ‘abe k’abe k’ade, yede QaWee | -qelsccotepeee cane ~ sabé sabé sadé gewe sép, etc abe jabe oade rawe daba-ra e-, b¢e- bye- d pio Oe eee eeshi age “i -be -de -wi, of 2d and | -wi, of 2d and 1st pl. 1st pl. bixa® Dixae gee © Sow esseree-core: wixhe’ 97) ("|.222- cewteseeees da pa pa pa. para poxe TABLE III.—SounpD SuHIrTinc—Continued. ‘926 COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. Hotcafigara. wic'‘aye (Ot.) “qgoxe (sic) ahuka-da winahi-da “‘swallower”’ 4i qa- wanaxi-da naba-ra_ wana"p’i® wakanacke-da ni Ta- ya- ru- na-wal-ga-ra rexe (or reqe) dezi-de ce-ga-ra he-ga-da teo-ra, tee-da te’e-na cujoe-ra qi-da kandje-ra tcoqgo- eage-ra ctnk qata-ra, ciink qete-ra hi-siika-ra (See No. 177.) Cegiha. Dakota. Loiwere. Ponka Kansas. Osage it‘e de ye pe, ps pe da na PI | WSS SRSE eB CrSSe S45 A ccabecodds ka-dopa ga-nade ga-dadje yapzayse, mire kata nakade akadje gakayse qaqra® ska? naska® daska® gaska®™ qacka" enija nat'ega dats’ega qats’eya yate’exe do, ete nuya duk‘a quk‘a 40ke doksi nusi dusii qusit -, roggi rogi dote nude dudje quise 407396 oe ¢e ye ¢e 406 den e¢a yega ¢eya Ns he a (jégiha Yegaha (bexdha Loiwére (I.), Loéyiwére (Ot.) deja neje djeje gse0e ide ine Gdjey 2 ESS see oe soci |to cece stele noe ocll eet meiner som ideya ine¢é Wales 1 Ib Std en odensho asec Haentessecsges|atccence sootinn == teeti ne¢ di ey qse¢d e}0e UB dekeitku inegi injert ae he ih-jseyxi 1oeya \ eye ( mde, bde ne Qje ewe Mees Oe ecaeclese teeta mdo nu du 40 40 mdoka nuga duga quya qoya mdokaska nuski duski quski ho-cka mndoketu nuge duge quye joye mdoza nuzé dui®ze quse qogi na- na- da- a qa- naxi and wa- | wa-naxé Wanaxe - ANAKO)/}!)," i2sseese ss cece naxi nape na®be niibe or ni"be | nade nawe wanap’i" wana"p’i" Wwana"p’i? want"p’i" wana®p’i= nacka and hna- | Jebi‘a teebiik’a (gen- | tsediik’a, tse- | wayracke, H. cka eric.) dyuk’a (ge- neric) ni ¢i ue ¢i Ti ya- ¢a ¢a- ra- (See No. 33. i ° ; ya- ¢a- a- ¢a- a- ee No. 29.) yu- yii- ¢ii-, ¢u-, or ¢i- | ru-, ri-, or ro- - ey (See No. 30.) ee . ¢ ca-poni-ka (see | ¢a-hafi-ge or | ya-pail-ge pu- ¢a-pan-ye Ta-wat-e or ¢a- Nos. 96-100.) ane -ge zee styedje : wail-e teexa fore, nexe djexe qsexe Texe tee-hu-pa ¢e-ba ye-ba Ge-Gank pe Oe eee seeerraamceies teeji ¢ezd yezé ¢ese rede tcap’a (see No. {100 ) teapa jabe (see No. |108.) tce-tea je-ga je-ga e-4a Te-ye ce-tca qe-ga qe-ga qe-4a qe-3e he-tea he-ga he-ga he-ya he-ye to qu, Ju-qude tu, tuhu, tu- | t‘uhu, t‘uhg- | to “hu-qudje quise t’a t’e ts’e s’e te’e ca jide jiidje oiijse cujoe cota cude eudje cujse coe ka"ta yande kandje Kangsen ( 9) lesser ce area= kute kide kiidje kiiyse yujoe ka- ga- ga- ya- yi- ® ki- gi | gi-, gii’- yi-, yya- xi- kiteaxa giaxe kixe kcixe ypius ki- gi- gi-, gu- yi, [yu- yra- ku gi gu yy yu qo-ka qu-ga qinga gquya qoye coka euga | cuga cuya coye cake cage cageyaha cayeha caye cunka-waka®, | cange cinge, kawa | kawa, kaw4 cili-e etc. stikaku i-salga isuga, isu"ya"| isunya igtiii-e k’a, k’e ‘e we we 1e k’exa k’axe, k’exe, | k’axe k’axe q‘axe, ‘q‘exe, ‘axe 4 ‘exe depa (see No. 106.) cuta ¢i-‘a, ¢ic‘a yuts‘age ¢iits ‘aye ruy ‘aye (1.), ruc ‘aye (Ot.) a dhelesaeranletenine bi‘a, bic‘a bits ‘age diits ‘aye wiy‘aye (L.), COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 927 TABLE III.—Sounp SuHirTinc—Continued. Gegiha. No. Dakota. Loiwere. Hotcafigara. Ponka. Kansas. Osage. 175 | duzaha* ‘atsage k’a®sage k'a®saye qratoaye, Kat |2s.0.5 oes soe a aye , 176 | ao"pa a‘athe ak’uhe (See No. 101.) - 177 | oxcida ¢a-‘e-¢3 ya-k’e-yd ¢a-k’e¢d nattuta™ (See No. 170.) 178 | k’i® ‘je kin kis k’i> kina 179 | k'u 3 ki ki ok'u® ho-k’u"™-na UU See eee -u -k’u SUE Pn, We) RR cate ici eee ae 181 | ha*hepi, ha*ye- | ha® hatis ha*ie ha*he hathe-na tu 182 | toha" and tohan) ata® haka® hatqa®, hakqa™) tata™ tea-tca® 183 | eta®ha® e-ya-ta®, 6-di- | 6-dji-kas 6-4si-tqa» Aa-wit., (9). peso ees ta" 184 | pehaa deta™ peka®, pye-ka® | pe-tqa® peta petca™-na 185 | opeha® ubeta® phere ubye- Cy ude- || oweta®. |) io eee a sqa" 186 | toka, foe ukit‘s EPC E UC ORM 2s Sct oc were okitce | okiktce 187 | o-ki-he, joint ukit’d ukiitce ukiitse o-cti®-cil” bios ae a 188 | hi ti tei tsi tei tei-na 189 | xana xabe SGN EE See Speeoeee xawer § 9) \|c.: 22s eee 190 | kaxa gaxe gaxe yaxe u ‘u™-na 191 | yuxo ¢ixu | yiixu ¢iixu rixo (See Nos. 37 | and 204.) 192 | aze maze | baze dase dade | Waza-ra 193 | puza bize | biize diise duse qakasi-de 194 | mdaza (see No. |6.) 195 | mdoza (see No. |135.) | 196 | sapa (see No. 1,07.) 197 | sa® sa" satha® satha® astaml 6) Ge eset atone 198 | siha | si si si, sithii ¢i si-ra 199 | si"te sinde sindje sinjse einqoe sinjoé-ra 200 | ska ska | ska, waska ska, waska eka ska 201 | skuya skigé BkaIMG, 1 Perea eee ¢ku sku 202 | c ¢ c c c c (See Nos. 55, /105, 157, 166, 167), 168.) 203 | c \q q 1g q c (see No. 152.) 204 | quxa qixe quxe qiixe goxe, qoxe qoxa NOTES ON TABLE III. In the yoiwere column, ‘‘I.” stands for “Iowa dialect,” ‘Ot.” for ‘Oto dialect,” and ‘“‘H.” for Rey. Wm. Hamilton, formerly missionary to the Iowas. In the Ho- teangara column, ‘‘Alexander” stands for Jas. Alexander, a full-blood Winnebago, the writer’s principal authority. No. 1. The Santee ‘‘md” is now written ‘‘bd” by some of the missionaries. Its Teton equivalent is “bl.” Mda (bda, bla), verbal root, separated, as layers or slices.— 2. mda, bla, fragment-pronoun, first singular of verbs in ya.—3. b¢acka, applied to a dish, &c., that is low and spreads out, with a rim not on a level with the bottom.— 4. mdaya, level, spread out.—5. mdaska, flat, as boards; in Kansas and Osage, a dis- tinction is made between blaska (dt¢aska), flat, as the edge of a board, and blak'a (d¢ak’a), flat, as the wide surface or side of a board.—6. mdaza, ripped or torn open.—7. mdaja, straddling.—8. b¢axe, wider at one end than at the other.—9. mda, J go.—10. The first syllable in Nos. 11-15.—11. b¢eda®, thin.—12. Ditto.—13. pemni, twisted.—14. A pelican.—15. Intelligent.—16. The first syllable in Nos. 17 and 18.—17. omdoto®, cor- nered, having corners; but b¢uga, circular, all around, the whole.—18. Having the cor- ners rounded off.—19. Pulverized.—20, Fragment-pronoun, first singular of verbs in yu (di, yii, ¢ti, ru, ru).—21. Spinning around; pushed aside.—22. Mixed together, as water and grease, or manure and earth; fine, as flour.—23. To smell, emit an odor.—24. A crunching sound, as on ice or snow.—25. Fine, as thread, etc.—26. Ten.—27. Turned around, as a gimlet.—29. Three.—30. To turn around, as an auger.—31. Bare, smooth.— 32. Fragment-pronoun, second singular of verbs in ya (¢a, ya, ¢a, ra, ra).—33. You drink.—34. You go.—35. The right (hand, foot, ete.).—36. Fragment-pronoun, second singular of verbsin yu (see 20 above).—37. You draw a mark (such as is on an arrow).— 928 COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 38. Fragment-pronoun, third singular of the possessive of werbs in ya and ka.—39. To drink his own milk, ete.—40. To go back or homeward.—41. The first syllable in Nos. 42-44.—42. To vomit.—43. To set up an upright inanimate object.—44, Spotted.—45. Frag- ment-pronoun, third singular, possessive of verbs in yu.—46. Insects.—47. Maggots.— 48. Grease.-—49. To have come back or home.—50. See Dakota, hi-hna-ku, her husband; g¢a, to take a wife (Ponka, eg¢atige, her husband).—51. To place a curvilinear object, a plaster, etc., on something else.—52. To revile, curse.—53. Broad.—54. Fragmen t- pronoun, third singular possessive of verbs in pa (ba, ba, da, wa, wa).—55. Six.—56. Fragment-pronoun, second singular of verbs in pa.—57. Alone, only.—58. You have.— 59. Second syllable of gaq¢a" (yaqla®, etc.), lo gohunting with a large party or the whole tribe.—60. A syllable in Dakota waqpanitca, poor; iqpaya, hi®qpaya, etc., to fall from a height, ete.—61. To cough.—62. Verbal root, make a hole through.—63. Good (or bad), in Hotcatigara it also means large. Used in forming the verb to love, honor, ete., in some of the languages.—64. Very.—65. Split.—66. Long, tall.—67. Muskrat.—68. Ear.— 78. Fragment-pronoun, third singular, denoting action by cutting with a knife or saw.—79. Fragment-pronoun, third singular, action by shooting, etc.—80. Fragment- pronoun, third singular, action by weight or pressure, blowing with the mouth, etc. (N. B. These are not exactly synonymous in all the dialects).—81. Snow.—82. Arrow.—83. Quiver.—84. One.—85. Who.—86. Raccoon.—87. Sun, moon. Mi® sometimes means both, in Kansas and Osage, but mi2t"ba (mi™i™da) always means the moon. In Hoteaigara, ha"p-wida, the sun, and ha™he-wida, the moon.—-88. Prefix showing the means or instrument, ordinal numerals, ete.—89. Skunk.—90. Chest.—91. To walk.— 92. Cloud.—93. I, me.—94. Fragment-pronoun, third singular, action by pushing with the hands, ete.—95. Head.—96. To pound, as corn, in a mortar.—97. To go along over (land, ete.).—98. I say.—99. To wade or ford.—100. To stab.—101. To lay a horizontal inanimate object on something else.—102. To lay such an object in something else.— 103. To lick.—105. Blackened, defiled. (Cegiha, cabe, black, in the distance (as distinct from sabe), dark, as a color.—l06. Notched (once); but demdepa, ‘a‘abe, k’ak’abe, ete., notched many times.—107. Black, near at hand. See Nos. 197 and 200.—108. Bea- ver.—110. Plural ending of verbs.—111. To blow with the mouth.—112. Nose.—113. Forehead.—114. To beg.—115. To get mired, as cattle.—116. Hot.—117. Melted, thawed, to melt or thaw.—118. Withered, dead, as vegetation.—119. Moist, wet.—120. Arm-pits.— 121. Throat.—122. This.—123. Here.—124. Belonging here, the home people, etc.—125. To urinate.—126. A blaze.—127. To cause to blaze, to kindle a fire.—128. To make a fire. The jyoiwere is, literally, ‘“‘ Fire to-make.”—129. His or her mother’s brother. The Kan- sas distinguishes between idjegi, his mother’s brother, and idjeyé, her mother’s brother. In ihjseyi, and other Osage kinship terms, the “h” is slightly audible, and approxi- mates ‘fq” (kh).—130. Lake.—131. Potato, potatoes.—132. A male animal.—133. To belch or hiccough.—134. Summer.—135. A loon.—136. Verbal modal prefix, showing action of heat, cold, etc.—137. Ghost, spirit.—138. Hand, paw, etc.—139. Necklace.—140. The com- mon frog. Note the resemblance between the Dakota, Joiwere, and Hotcaigara, on the one hand, and the three @egiha words on the other. Bull-frog is to*to"taika in Dakota, yebi‘a yafga in Ponka, teebiik’a-téiga in Kansas, tsediik’ata® in Osage, and tetu™tceu®-na in Hoteatigara.—1l41. Thee, you.u—142. Verbal modal prefix, third singular, of action with the mouth, lips, teeth, or tongue, also fragment-pronoun, second singular, of first conjugation in Dakota, Ponka, poiwere, and Hotcanigara.—144. Verbal modal prefix, third singular, of action by pulling with the hands, etc.—145. Mosquito.—146. Ket- tle.—147. Jaw.—148. Tongue.—151. Thigh.—152. Dry, as grass.—153. A buzzard.—154. Blue, green; yuqude, ete., blue-gray(?).—155. To die, dead.—156. Red.—157. Smoke.—158. Plums.—159. To shoot at.—160. Verbal modal prefix, third singular, action by hitting, falling, blowing of the wind.—161. Verbal prefix, third singular, first dative, of most conjugations.—162, To make -for or to (dative of action without request, etc.).—163. Verbal prefix, third singular, possessive, of certain verbs beginning with conso- nants.—164. To be returning, coming back.—165. Badger.—166. Thick.—167. Nails, claws, In Kansas and Osage, cage (caye) means fingers.—168. Horse. Dakota, cuika waka®, COMPARATIVE PHONOLOGY OF FOUR SIOUAN LANGUAGES. 929 mysterious dog; or cufik-tafika, big dog.—169. His younger brother.—170. To dig.—171 Verbal root, scraping sound.—173. cuta, to fail. The writer has been unable to find synonyms of this in Dakota. Bnt in the other languages they abound: thus, ¢i‘a, ¢ic‘a, to fail in pulling with the hands, or in working, for want of time; ¢ig¢a®a, to make a mistake in pulling, etc., to miss in trying to grasp an object, which is too large; ¢iona®, to fail to hold an object ; ¢iona™¢a, ditto; $iirijl, to fail to produce the desired effect in pulling, working, rowing, writing, etc.—174. To fail in bearing or pressing on (also, in Ponka, in blowing with the mouth; in Kansas, in pushing with the hands). So there are big¢a™¢a, bi- ona®, biiraji, dag¢arda, ¢a‘a, ¢ac‘a, ¢aona®, ¢aiijl, ba‘a, bac‘a, bag¢at¢a, etc., in Ponka, with their equivalents in Kansas, Osage, and yoiwere.—175. Swift, as a horse.—177. To be merciful, to pity.x—178. To carry on the back.—179. To give—180. Verbal root, to scrape, as with the finger-nails.—181. Night. The Santees say, ha"yetu; the Yank- tons and Tetons, ha®hepi.—182. When? how long? how far? In Dakota the time word is tohan, and the space-word, toha™.—183. From.—184. A crane.—185. To fold or wrap up in, to make a bundle of.—183. To have come hither for the first time.—189. Verbal root, to flay (animals, not persons).—190. To make, do.—191. To draw a mark, such as is on an arrow.—l92. The female breasts,—193. Dry, not wet.—197. White, in the distance. See Nos. 105 and 107.—198. Foot, feet. Siihii, in Osage, a bird’s legs.—199. A tail.—200. White, near by. See No. 107.—201. Sweet, sour.—204. Verbal root, staved in, broken in, as a hollow object. H.Mis.69——59 INDEX A. Page. BNE ne. PLOpOLiM ONE MOLCOLOlO LY oc. s spac cis'cnl nals owcinnineecinu cade seseee seen 483 PRONE HICOME CH ON OMIM IMOLAG, sem 1st win.ce) tains = eo Sat Secon MoSeloc nc teense 50 PMO TSAO yet MOUs sa/ Ses yee ies Soe. dal s)ave= -lejewleiset sat cee see eee 19 CMT POUUOLV Le NOL LOW cs sate eles He ss Ses aes Desc oS ote woes 179 Rte OM Olea Pe ne eae wii tosom lne oe oxic 2 asa adm a cies Sates = Seis ceases 52 Accessions to co]lections during London Fisheries Exhibit..--.. ........---- 85 Accessions to the collections of the National Museum... -- 180, 182, 200, 208, 216, 220, 225, 228, 241, 246, 250, 260, 261, 263, 267, 268, 272, 329 Account department National: Museum -.-:-=....-.25s---22 ssss0c. sss cs son eee 163, 169 Ackerman, Ensign A. A., collection made by -......:.-..-.-2 /.------------ 14, 41, 252 PME PUERDTLC LOLs seer ay aS ey me ao au sian ous oid ow oka eaeiee emcee cn eeee 40, 41 Wy eOMSuOATNe Le HAL DAULORS As craaiect est dss cee rode Coase cise Se eicee aur 14, 41 SUEISYIREDS) DE a se See ee eae rN ae en ae ee ee Steere eet ee 14, 269 Rann Led omens! Otay ONS 255.5 Seeees oe x wee iste ej alate mc Slernin o Se ists sie eoe 165 Acting Secretary of the Institution, provision for..........-....--.--.------ 3 Resolution of Board of Regents relative to ....-. -.2-22---2.-<=s. ----=5=2-- XIL MGS te. 15-, collection presented: by. <2 2u2 soto - oe hee cece tet Saco eee 226 Adams, W. H., mounds in Spoon River Valley, Dlinois.........---..---.---- 835 Addresses at unveiling of Henry statue .----.-.----.-----+---. ++ .-+-2- VMI, KOK, NORE pimimisteaiioniot National: Museum. 2.2520 20:--2.5 -20s-peec> Pek ee son oe 165 ret MOSM SLO UGlO Mies sete Ae erie siesta ee ater testa a ee ee ree eo ers eget fa Alaska Commercial Company, co-operation of..........-+.-.--. ...---.=---- 17 ‘SETS 20 eel eae eal ee ee Re re ae Te op eC Pe et ee el ene ea 16, 17,18 Pel ee oEXD LOLACLOUS Ibs /ccicts sec Scie Soe cies ae Seise seen Sac Sees wept eee 16 BRIG Hanes Mas MOIRA Yi n= sce sayeses aad Ueine ce wm ec ceincs nee tae haa cc erdeceer 16 Der eeighere emery. cia Sak oa aes case cis cae pe eee Hee ete eens ae 16 ibieuisGammandernH By. NiGhOls)£2-2 i.e. ces soeene ia ee eeielo Seen 17 Bion: SelVvICEiSLAblONSe asin aca se lie Sool ae ecm eee aes eo ace mtn 16,17 ‘Dead eg fe) AY SY XS) ee le Ts ol ee ee ree rs Ase cere 17,18 SmAlbatirosa: COMeChONS Mad euDyiow s- 22 oss ccie coe acces noe mae meee anaes = 22 Completion! of sat ccs ees Rec se Goals, oe olay aDiae aire nee sete thee 82 Lo TPeU Ty Ca SS Ae oa Se OSE eee ep en ae ae eS 14 Mingna, Mich... Habching Stator Bibs sao 2 Japa ean etese eee) eae ean ss eal 82 American Colonization Society, co-operation of......<-.--......----.------- 36 American Institute of Mining Engineers, collections of, presented... --..----- 8 American Pharmaceutical Association, meeting of -.......--..---.---------- 9 PAL Siscol 1000. PIOGUCHIONA 6 os a5 4-3 see a eee a cee see Ae olay to oes Sola 52 Anchor Steamship Company, co-operation/of.....-..---..-s-2. .-----.--<. é 36 Paciedtiralice ah Daybon, Onig 25 deceit d ame ets ect iat o ap eb eet oaees 838 Ancient remains in Bucks County, phen crn SA Te ects Seen came yee ene 872 AMarews sb, H.. POrtraLiioL War wills 2 0s soe. eee eras So ee eel yenfe ces 49 Anguilla Island, contents of bone-cave in, memoir on ...-....----------.--- | 932 INDEX. a Page Avgpplopoma fimbrias 2a stirss socceclccss ae see 363 MEL Cem TEAnSMiCbiNe TOPOLl .< sa casescce tec see ee ec ee ene hone eerste ee III READE DOD Vane ee ve cisecetuh 2 oo set eu yeaa to cries Sam ee casin Set Re ee ee 277 Selected as honorary pall-bearer at Noon of John Howard Payne ..-.. 51 Perales is Gen eeCOSULUUM eee ate ere = cans rience ere) ee eee epee anne ee ces ae oe 24 Baltimore and Ohio Railroad Company, co-operation of ......-...---- ee 37 Benen eOrgevl,rOpOlul ONLPUYSICS2scs-0 =e. = So selene ice aone ae eee aa eee 571 Pasir Chins, Ae pariMen viOl enn sosini ass soe = 5 ts sais ase nase ecm eee é 54 Beadilonuh ks, (CO-OPperaulOly Ole t ea on ano. Seyainis see cai aere one eae SSS 36, 98 edn tbe Ach ASSIStedel ho BOAles 6 ceca deca ota wets teem sti e wae : 54 Collechiom) presen ted@MWYqsas ea aa asen'e Saks aeieess secu soe eer Noses ae 226 (SDT D SHO) Seperate Ro Re OME Iran recat Sn Eee re 185, 239 Bean, Dr. Tarleton H., catalogue of collection of fishes....-.-...-..--. ---- 84 Curator United States National Museum..........2--.....2.....--- 54, 185, 298, 275 Waren to ssondonshisherlesieexniDih, so 528 oc shoe oe dea ecco ee ac eeeee 83, 237 MUTI TOL Ose Ae ee om eeteon amen e conse Hoesen Seer Babes be eames 237 PEAPOVe DYie2 . ocer -om ea ome ceaw ae eincieae waceite esac as oe eee os Soee 211,210,249 APESOAN COS? OF =o sise a epee ae tsi e rere ts Mace ee ee erate ala SE OP ae ranean 237 hepartion department of HSHORIA- 2.260 SS casas obec ac noes Sees tee ee pene 228 Bean, Tarleton H., and G. Brown Goode, paper by ...-.-...--...----..----- 288 934 INDEX. - : Page. Bébian: i. de; co-operation Of 25 --- ocjscta-spiecn asl seeee Man Sona eee eee 36 Belding, collection made, Dye se- = = grciacre me eee te = ee ete eee ee 226 EESPlOUAMOUS DY seca ee ea eee Be edo ono see) cera Sebo ede msne 20, 21 Papers Wy i. 2 = = seinen oe ase ie eee gene ele Ee erlang een ae Se ale 313 Bell James; collection presented Dyjc--+-2--5 ee eee ee eee 226 Bendire, Capt. Charles, co-operation of.......--..-.--. eit Je oteeis eect ene 19 Honorary curator United States National Museum ..--....---.-.........: 275 Benedict; James E., diploma for = 22.5 seee2e ees ae a eee cee eee eee 954 Services of. ss oe Scare lac ie sec iets Mien eave oe oe ie ahaha eee ete 256 Bernadou,Bnsign.d.’B:; detail of23 22.0.2 ee oe eee oe ee 40 Explorawions Py, soe conc stato ae ee me ee a a areal ere ee 26, 41 Berrien’ County, Georgia, mound in -2-2)--e- ess saan ee nee ee eee eee 853 Beshowe, or blackcod,; discovered: 2-22. (ses ca. sea nee sel ciieee ea ieee 19 Bipliostaphy of anthropology esas wsee ae ne = eee ieee eee saewespers 764 INS HAD ION iG 5360 GGe5o Hoes GOGO aE otONss ste CoTe.conse5 Sanaense os05 Sucese 432 Wey eeKO Re hoya op SS Rea ean Seog onan sess aoe osonsesos0 sos casos ecb oeace 556 WES PUNO So ee Br con ctco ete G0 acess Sooces Saad oc Shiono die coo etaeccde = 676 lela a555 Aeacoa dns daueao Hees se5 990 Seen ssmmads beso ego ssobusornosos noes 623, 652 I SUUO APSE S ce Scan: SaoCoEl ear ooees] BaTesa seeque tdessdondoso ssogsecdeses 738 Billings) DreJohn S., lecture Dy -22-2.2--2 = acess eee ae eee eee 9 IBinn eyeeWi, Gs cd Ona ONS LOM ee ome tale leat mie ee eee eee eee ete eee 245 BiolopicalySocieuy, fOLesu INGUIN se seem se tse ae es ease eee 44 LETTS 32 Sy ee SBS ape 2 cae ees ee eh rina a rl em in le 9 IMeebingS OL Ss hacis Sos ci st Marae bop ae eevee a= Sietaia meee ae ne ieee ene 10, 174 Birbeck, -Hdward, aid tendered (by =o 2 estes sacienise ets eee eee re eee eee 84 Birds, aquatic and fish eating, catalogue of....---..--.-...-.-1-.---2------ 84 Department of, United States National Museum..--.........--.--.. 53, 164, 185, 220 INCCOSHIODSS shis Sae ce nme cial ae ee cee cee eo ie cee oe aie eo eee ee 220 Arrangement ofcollections.--- «pees eee tem ee eee eee ee eet eee 222, 223 Bibliographyso£ publicaiiOns a->--s-eee rena seeee Gesoropreseessaccs 224 Wesrdersta sea cs tcree cwislee= Sese 2 cetacean spice Sete ane ee eee 225 Disimibuton Of specimens se see eae ee see eee eee eee Soccsooco= 223 Numberiof specimens imicollectionte- see eee eee eee eee ee Be 224 Eresent state of collections). ..5--- cs. pecan ocie - e s ee eee 224 Report of Curatortes: 2.2otssc kook cecoee wea e Ae cen eae eee 220 Robert Rideway, CuratOte..- sa-. sae seem ere sae eae eta eee ee 185, 220, 275 Routine work te. 2. 2425.2. 5 o-2 SORE oe cee icine Seren eee eee 222 Bisby, Ehomas;i& Co. co-operation, Of. 2s emeienets see eee ee eee : 36 Black codfish discovered by J: Gas walls. oe oasis see ace ee ele eae 19 Bland) Thomas, co-operation Of: - 2... s-ss dee sem commas ses eae ee eee ee eee 36 Blish; JsB:; detail of. ss. a tesce -\ ater oue eer ceive: oshae tees = ae eee eee 40 s0nrdiot hesents; Annual Report obese = sae ease aan nae ele I Journaliof, proceedings. s-c) peas eee ee ee eee ween oe eee eee ae XI Méetingr ot: 32.3222 oi See ab silceu one eee eo hocaice ce eee soe eee a eee XI Resolutions Of J. 24: .2022 2 coi eae RR ect clte eiee eet eae ieee XII Boehmer, George H., report on Smithsonian exchanges.... -.--..--.--.------- 91 Bolton, Dr. H. Carrington, general catalogue of scientific aan Mcdecce 30 Ropore On cheinistry - poe yh: Syn Oe eee Ara ee 629 Bone-cave in the island of Anguilla, memoir on punts of Be aefeisinc GES EO OE 27 Booth, Henry, relics'in Ponghkeepsie, N.Y .-2--> eee gee eee eee ee 876 Borland, BOR: co-opersition:0f s. -c-2s2 5 oe ee eee ee eee 36 Boston Foreign: Exhibition.<2 22% v2.2. sets eee eee ee ee eee 44 Botanists; necrology-of = cee ee ee ee Fae 697 INDEX. 95> Page. . Botany Division, United States National Museum ...........-...2.22-..---.- 164, 187 DEPArUMNEMt OF LOSS PLAUISee sate ee oo occ aitcln ocieroeec= sca age wate: aan 164, 188, 263 (ROWED) JO EVM Sonal ha topo tno on Ce Ges Boe OREO SE ea ee cms hae. ae te 164,187 Botany, report on, by Prof. William G. Farlow .......-....... cc. e200 eeee-- 681 EAM SLONO WOE I cl aeheSCARONESIOMEE sce ce ccion's sees one ce ese es cote Sig eA 199 Brewster, Hon. Benjamin H., member ex officio ..-.-...---.....-..---. ---- -- XXXVIII EE MAUCL VV LAI, Ga POLS VE = emails ie ae = saad lacs ooo Dee woeuro ce eeoeee . 313, 314 PUSH UA MOLiCa., CONCESSIOUATOU ssaayse hiss) wee asalosscisssc,- 20 osc seee sees Madece 43 PEEtIG OOM PIA, CX PlOTAMIONS IM shen w secre f= os wee see esa ces conan = Sei 19 eRe MAN ehe bende emcees a ecesier mis iocs Coa cerscesacmc ot nyse o cee sence 19 FEROS) aye OM Paliverase ssa iec acess ao isis. sos Zoe'e vadnic is anise seenlaneice 19 ees GON eee See en te temarteera ces Sone Sains wesc wen kad ooas eo een ee 19 PE xmeaneranee Aen Creat ONT AUTO Ly LOM appear as Jaioat seta sss eia nae es cee ieee 210 Brown ames: Lomple;papers DY, 2-15-22 oe, -wac.-o Sec ces so wisimens cece teccuwee 279 itheiwhale fishery-andsitsyappliances = 2... ..2.-- 2-2-2. tens eeeeee 84 Brown, Stephen C., registrar United States National Museum ..... -......- 165, 276 MON ern On) de! CO. CO-OPCratlONlOl ses 25 =< 326 ct sces sces vate ce tnmeeos 36 ipeuso-swall electric light Company, -- 2. oc -'\2 <<. i -cics ssc nace dees oe 10, 44, 170, 174 Hrassels conference of exchanges, report.on -.--- 2 .----- 22. 2220.2 ces cone at 120 iBucke:County, Pennsylvania, remainsim 2. -. 5... -- 2222. scene ss2- cos sons 872 MMOS AT IMOLY (UN GIN Pras tose cise ate lsais/ot c's o.oo oc gcse See see occa neels 6 HeaReRe EP TESISTLIT EEE ETP) 2s Se oar nico aoe an wees odes ao vocs ewccce 5 Novant IN COLYAWOEKSNOD-cso tec Se oot ce oecle = coecoed = secon ee cca eee 6 SNE MASON TAM GDN gn te Salad arate Seine sain haa eat wialniciew anelese san nace setes 4 Buildings and labor department, United States National Museum.........-. 163, 169 Building for Museum and Geological Survey needed ........---...-.-------- 7,8 isnilouMneG tues has n< COMMISSION. sccciew eae Sse Sts sce cies Sate cekiee see 83 United "States National Museum =<. < $232 -sss2 252 + ncece vce cee 31, 84, 166, 276, 277 Baresaon Hthnolopy, appropriation for — .-.. <-s2 s-22-< s2 canocC heoa6 BoUee eget nese Bee = 20 VC) we VEE pA rooe bo cocese Been deco Se Doo bse Nobo cE re dH od Sobeee sconeoee 20 Pues eS COAT 2 24250 canes feet Snpobd Packer Sac Sarees ete aoe 20 cal OThia SRLNIOH, NaLONINS OF) o.oo =| cca eas ok apec tem occ nwo matedan ese 82 aiiorminy out, HALCHINE OF <4. > 252 324 Je ccs oe nes ane awe sve dee sere wn eats 82 936 INDEX. Page Cambridge, Mass., Museum of Comparative Zoology, collection received from. 250, 251 Gameron; RaW .c& Coz, co-operation of2< 22-5 sosce cee ese cea ee eee eee 36 CapesMendocino signal statlomrnens «oss s~ da alerenien ine eel eeee cn sera eeee ae 20 Cardieatalorue of fish collechione- 2: cereecere-soepe ee eee sae eee 5 OnPaece aaa deg Ral OPH el)" ooo Boss eee moo oe sclaces Goer Sedans sccm eacobane = 55 CarlislesbHon. John-G, letter oj. cles samen ascisine sae eee ee eee eee IIL Carpe Success) wabli yn cieecte cee ers ate rerere etek eee eee telat oe ee oe 83 Carpenter, Dr. William B., collection received from ...-...-.........--..-..- 251 Casts presented by Pierre Lorillard.....-.:.----.-.-.--- Fea me CHE Sg 25 Catalogue of scientific periodicals. —--- s--nes-.-- estes tee eee seen 30 Catalocues for London Hisheries Exhibition): 5 2-222 ose ss) asters 84 Catlin collectionvot in dams palm tio gece estes ea ekee ite ete te ete 53, 181 Cave research, instructions 102, «422-22 22 saerne Sa sacs ame eee ea erase ne 50 Cazaux,H., co-operation le . < <2 cts :case -eoeassonsela ts soee ee eee sees Ee 2d James MeN pissin Hepes oa wis Soe ope Ses Cone Dee e an eae eee Se eee eee eee 25 CO CANUEN Ge. Soo sess fails oe oe epics eins Se ee eae ees eels eee Eee 20 DG HeOled One. meg. ci2 tnd sais ceta ete ete eels San caters eiee ee rarer ey cree eee 25 Ceremonies at unveiling of Henrysstabueee = -cos- oe a neeeeoe eae tees 1, 2, XVIII Circulars, United States National Museum:...--. .2.--.- 22. 3-222 cceceness-- 277 Chambers; We Oldham yacknowledgment duet 2 os -s5- 9-2) soee eee eee 24 Chandler Hon sjwolhamvbs, member ecvojictor «2-22 t een eben ae aoe eee XXXVIIL Chase, Henry E., notes on the Wampanoag Indians ..-....-......-.---.----: 878 Chase, JES ad etal Of. se. Se ae alert te elo he er 40 Chemical laboratory suggested for department of metallurgy...-. ..---.... 271 Chemisiry; bibliography, of 322 ao ee aa ae ee ee a ere 652 Keport_on;-by H. Carrington Boltone-- =... o5- lao eee eee ee eee 629 Chester, H. C., detailed to London Fisheries Exhibit:....2222..-2- sles eee 83 ChicacorRailway Exposition) 142: to calc soem See eee See ee 44 China;ex plorations (ie: - i. 235 seco tee eee eee ee ek eee ee ¥ 26 PAE OY), «os cies hehe cs leprae NC OE Se a 26 Steainer<* Palos? ss. Soa = cere oe ae ee ee ee Ore ee 26 Clark, A. Howard, acting librarian United States National Museum ..--..-- 275 Assistant United States National Museum-.-...-.-.-....-<-:---2..---<--- 275 Detailed to Wondon Fisheries, .-2-2:--:-2-acceseeuseeces = eer 681 Silvernmedalstor sy sci ges note se 28 eo sere oe GOO SSS tee eee 254 Faxon, Prof. Walter, identification of specimens.........-.....--.----.----- 257 HeddersenvArthur -\.!2. ose seco ass cee ee eee 228 Canlestalogus 552 250\.50 5. Eos ee eee 185, 236 Entries in the:catalogues... ..!-) Js2 sence oe we ae coe ee ae eee 238 Exchanges effected by curator. 222.7555 coe nea een tae eee 237 Present state of collection \.. 2 ..5-fc te ee eee © 2238 Recommendations by the curator... ..- 208 See eee eee 239 Researches: by: curator. 22.2.2 tA ee 0 ae a aay a 236, 237 Reportiof curators. 5 Ve Ree oA i Bat ar ae SI oe 228 Farleton H. Bean, carator, 3.00.5 see ee ee 185, 228, 275 Work done upon the fishes:.< si. fos Se 2s es 236 Work upon the collection ..........-- Ried vy wdicdede da bone eee aan 238 INDEX. 941 Page. USM MAC ARNOLLADAI Ac se wee wiet nes co islosifgts oeisieces ce oe mice we Melee oe Saree ae 24 Mletouer oT ODEN’, LeChOULe DYis— 225.0252 e 022 cosh tic cule oa eee Seen eieeee 10 Flint, Dr. James M., honorary curator United States National Museum. .178, 190, 275 eG a ne as eee Se otis a cine clic es oS boos sok San Sec w(t eee See 40, 41 inieharre\ormateriarmedica section 2... =- 3.22.04 <2... 2 oe wo eee 52 eS ete Asie nis ec cho tac olen Sa ca.enbimantote seem eee nee Rese 285 Report onematenianmedica collection... j2- 422... 5. -.2doce fuse Wee eee eee 190 Hionida,. West; mounds and shell-heapsin.- 2... 2.2.2. <.2cc. tee coe ee wee 854 Foerste, Aug. A., ancient relics at Dayton, Ohio............/......-. .----- 838 Polper Hon schanies:.l., member 6b Oficio. 2.205... sce is... 25 eee XXXViii MOGd SHES PLOPASAON Ofee= ho soo cckc cc n sasiles wee etext sone tere = 82 ERINUBHTOOHCHOM. Alia V RIOT san a es at oats co. Ss oe eae ee 52 Foods and textiles, section of, United States National Museum...-....---- 52, 182, 196 BHOLOM TOW ALC CONAMOM DY, 2. toscs-5% 225.0 o-%es soo. a dacciteeh cose ote see 182 PiaPATRnUG RCN ONY COW am set sels 452 hic eine) sane s's s jceein oo fe ma oO Oe EEO 37, 91, 95 eee Overiments FOlAhONS 10... 2072.42 2-5. Os UL ened G2 oe eee eee 42 SIAR TOME INENTINE TENG 58 fo I ar 2 aon ices ooo Sais Ae We ee 44 Fossil invertebrates, department of, U. S. National Museum ...-.-. 55, 164, 187, 260, 261 MERE ZO1O ROGIION ts a ee eee ne Ss cee ots cas. bl ee ae See Sees 260 FNC RES SIONS eyo rece ats ae mina) oe cai Sad pin aatetaabae am eeereee eee ees 260 Nesp niu sha lelGi COWMCCHLONS) = 2r9 Goode, G. Brow n, and Newton BP. Studder; paper: byp == o-paee eee ees 289 Goodrich; J. Kine \papersiDy <2 4-as8 a. '\e eeisciae seein eet ele eels saree este 2x9 Servicessof ee case Ase ose Saale eee igen ats Seo e SrahaWomreperere eer ere ae ee 179 Government exchanges. ¢22)- 25 ee eee eee ae een ea eee ree he SON es Piersat, Wood's Holl <-. sess22t hoc. osc ee ook ee eee mee eee sete eare ae 82 Publications; Mist: Of 22)seekevee Se Sock ae ree eee gees Oe Pea ee 150 Gray, Dr. Asa, Regent. ---- BA Been OO CoS Bab d SA UeM et sone Eres Kj OMT, KX VN NO OSD. Rees EARS aOMnrtr Mm ne Sera A kocc.os saedindob se Saas oaauer es Sag XII Grebnitizkyy Ni jaidby oa: .22 hese e cere = Seimeiarieie tree ie ne ne ee eae 18 freely Lieutenant, exp) onblOM ena ss carne phere sete ete ie gree ee 14,41 Green, Commanders. Mi. report) on ceogntaphygsesan pease eee eee aera 465 Greenhill amie blestOfsa: elmer eerie peers ee nae eres Bes Has 44 Inyvcharse of electric services. 2232s eieao see ae ee nee eee eae 170 Greenland; explorations|in.. 4.22 22-225 gba eee ee eee eee 14 Tiéutenamb Greely. 22855 1. 5215 beso teste ee (eee ee 14 SlonalsService expedition:..- 222. S22 524. eee seh eaoee teens Reese 2 14 Proteus,” VOyaAge Ofie | oss sis on eee ae cee ccemate ws eens era tate tee ee 14 {CVANbiG,”: VOY are Of sateen Dee eeere sos, nie ee eee a eer eee eae 14 Gresham, -Hon-W..Q:, membered oficioy.- -- so-maeeaeease ee eee ee eee eee XXXVIII Guatemala astronomer for... 22 eee = ae oe oe eee eee coe eee ne ee eee ee 25, 20 Guatemala and. Mexico boundary, surwey 2-4-2220 --4s eee ee een ee enone ee 26 Guycti, Prof. A., physical and meteorological tables............-....--._1--- 31 INDEX. 943 na Page. BURNS pert eee Bos a5 Eon doe d sheen nee So geet eS: xl Hamburg-American Packet Company, co-operation of ........---.-----.---- 36 SEAT EE ESTES re, So a ee ee EL = eens XII, 2 METRE GLO TaN eee ee eee ata Rc fae era kine cle naa See ein oe eee ane 152 Conrressional -appropriablONMtOn sco. = ass sence ene See ae is seeienate ee XVII RO WOLL Olen, semen eee ers eae ee ern nea anie oe Saag Sas shaeenten te sac XII, XVII Report of Hxecutuve Committees.-ss 225-5. ss-5-4s>-2-5-5055- ene ee 5 XVII NOTORSOR fab, se ome = eee ee eer che ee Na cee Beem ete mewn oe ctemastae XVII WUnvyelline- ceremonies <2 --cs.- oe -2 cee. steele setae cele se cee eee XVUI-XXXx VII Address: by Chick Justice WalbOr 2. 2-)s.c6 cots soe aee ewe see eet XX, XXUI Coneressional- action: 20-22-22 -2ats ss sone ees es snes ee - esse ee eases XIX OrGOM DyiOV. WL NOn noe OLbOD tae soa ate ase aie a alacle niin eters ane XG, eV) Pravien by: neve Ati Ax, OOP o-me an anata noite Sara se ne oe oe oe ne see KOK RoR Highland County, Ohio, earthwork in............--...----+ 22-- 0.---2 +--+: 851 ete ett. 1s. fold MeO 100.2 .ecn sos -n3 oes eee aes Sarna ee eee 254 Hell elon Nabhaniele., Repent ..-c ..22-5 moe sone oe oe ee ee aces XS, Xd, XS VIM Historical relics, section of, United States National Museum...-..-...------ Bisa byl Hitchcock, Romyn, acting curator United States National Museum.. --52, 182, 196, 275 TRY SA GLE LORY GES SARE es Se i SR te or oe oe en Up eONnOT 289 Report on section of foods and textiles/...........--.------.-.---- ees 196 aamelon. Georve h., erent 2. i2~- oa. <2 on sad eee ee Se eee eee x Resignation of ..--- Ere ar Spero care Wain lath teal ate aes nin XI, 3 roy. A.A, .prayer DY... .<.>.--<---22024e0+ seb =~ Soden = me esos aes XX, XXII Holden, Prof. Edward S., report on astronomy... ..-----.-------------------- 365 Holmes, W. H., report on American aboriginal pottery-...-..--.---------.- 179 RIMOEDOULONY 22 0-2-2 - tooo 2s Soa Senn Seen hea Bae aetna 52 PR PaTRBOROL = oe tne ono es eons sg hace See ete eae elm elo oe ee ance 199 Horan, Henry, Superintendent United States National Museum. ....-..----- 276 Horn, George H., Drs. J. L. Le Conte and, classification of Coleoptera of North J ATETGTINCE oS Sa eee a Sr, Ah Ret gs | eae 29 Hornaday, W..T., chief taxidermist United States National Museum .. .----- 75 JEG POSEN ee eee ee Brae eae Met Oop yee 289 LS DIKES: U1 RS ee et Siena” SRR OUy Spe Pe tae rae ee ee es ee Pe 171 944 INDEX. Page. Horticultural Mxhibition, St. Petersburg. cece sccic-ce e ee ee eee eae 45 Howitt, A. W., on Australian Group Relations ............ 2.2. 2.-2-2------- 797 Howland; Henry, 8., co-operationvats.2 20) 2 eck ene ceases ee Pee 22 Hubbard) Daniel S.,/co-operationiOfa-s. aa eect do-\s see e ieee ee eee 23 Hubrecht, A‘ A: W..,:papers bye; 42555... ss eee ce ee arse eee Deen ee 315 Hudson Bay Company, co-operation of .. 22-2 2..55. sols Seles cece eee coe eee - 12,19 Hunt, Sterry, reportion ceeloty-c..co-ees obser eee eee cee eee eee 443 Hutchinson, Kehl, Phillipens & Co., aid rendered by.--.-...----.-.-..--.--- 18 Huxley, Professor, acknowledgment) due@=jasesioso2)--tsaee aces eee eee eee 84 Hy viene: Naval:Museuni Off 2. 2/s28 se coe eee cnelo ne eee eee eee 49 ie > Lilinois; Sangamon County, mounds\of--9- os --. ee eee een a eee eee 625 Spoon River Valley, mounds:in s2/622 5222 cs ee ceace nina eee eee eee 835 Illustrations, list of - 3 acts aeete ir aah Many eet OS NRE ord ene yaaa ee SOE Ty Apt 1. Ix Indian paintings, Catlin Golesi of. wialoe eirek fee Sate NM Ne local Wart teal meee 181 Indians Of Puget Pound 222s. tas sci mcascioen eee eee oe eee ee eee eee 19 Industry, department of artiand2s os. sees aso ee eee eee eee eee 51 Inland and Seaboard Coasting Company, concessions made by -.....-.----.-.--- 43 Inman Steamship Company, co-operation of ........... --...---+- ------ +--+ 36 Insects, department of, United States National Museum ...--......... 54, 184, 186, 239 PNCGRSSIONG aco s ce dire sitar cert nels Meise ots cies Um Ba SIR ERR eeu ete ae eerie 241 Co SATS YoIE NO KO Vol 0 Vee are aR REra NaN ion nel oer Mia A pS ST «NN RY SE IE pee Fes nel Doe FS 240 RGAE Gt NOROLALY; CULALOL seein Spee oe iage cece se cee te eee eee ee eee 239 alles ierote Cs... honorary Curabol =n ces) oa Bae eee eee 186, 239, 275 Instructions tor cave research se-20 5 tctecn 2 sco cemales = ene eee See eee 50 Interior Department, co-operation of...-...------.---- Oh AEE See ot eee 42 International ete? Silsje (eS ntoine elaine ogee clap ile amimenieisie ce eee cee Masee eae 35 1 3p-d chil Cys (0) vee Ae AE ee ae ne emer ee Sa SS beh abe bet Food 4s 43 Fisheries Daman S. Ss Eves ar Sistas Bate Scien are chau ale yas ere ana tat isle ne errs ares eee ee 83 Horticultural exhibition, St. Petersburg saath ciate shal Sia eer ta ee ete ee 45 Invertebrate fossils, department of. 2: s.4. 25-125 oer eee ene eae See 55 imshicoracle; donationiot .2 nea ssa eee eee ie eee ee ores eee eee 85 J. James, U, Ps, specimens presented by .-\-5.-- 220-2 -soene seach eee weet ae 262 Japan, Dirdstof!so2. cs Saas daeced ose oe ee cea eee oe Seen a aeew ee acters 26 Bxplorations ih 22) socc seein sh Oe Oe OR Ee ee re eee ae eine 26 Jelreys; iJ. Gwyl,collectioniof---crcers ae hee eeees eee ae ee eee eee ee 54, 246 Johnson, Lawrence C., collection:sent by :2---2).--2- )2scee she ences es eoe 261 Jordan, David S., and Charles H. Gilbert, papers by ...--------. --..---- 315, 316, 317 Jordan, David S., and Jeseph Swain, paper by ..---....----. -.---. ---- ---- 317 Jouy,; Pierre 1onis;- collections from se soc ee eee cee ce ee eee eee 210 MS : County; Ohio. > se eee oa a eae eee eee 844 IntHamipshireCounby, swish Vireiniaassnseesse os eteeee sae e eee a ames eee 868 Ini SpooncRiver Valley, Iilinois:-eesssceseses: eee cee See ee eee 835 ImiWiestsPlorida2 Sess i352 to PS er ree ne MRORe © Teall wee eee Ns emer 854 Of-Sangamon'; County; Tinos 7:4. ee ae oe ceed hea Soe ee aeee 825 Mutioz y Espriella, co-operation “Of 220 523455 Sees ea eee ane coerce een 36 Murdoch vd)... collectionsmadeibyecesme eee ee eee ee eee eee 14 Munray; Werris|&'Co.,(co-operationzotae: saaeease- teense reecas Goons eee eee 36 Museum building, necessity of additional.-=-—.)_- 2.2 222.222 -2 2s sees eee 7,8 OfgEly c1ene (see National Miseumi)ree omens nace nee soeieieee Se eee 49 Mnsi¢cat unveilme of Henry statworccseeces 2. Uo. ee et ate eee ee eee eee xx Musical anstruments, collection ofeece seek a ate eae an ee nega 182 N. National Academy of Sciences, meeting Of...... ...222-.ec220 saaces esas snes 9,174 National Museum.-..-....... = UEEee techs en tetce scan Meee Ree en create memes 161 et seq. Aboriginal’ pottery sechion. = sce cices keke each eee eee ee eee 52 Antiquities;;departmentiofs:-<.2-.- 24 Seen pee ee eee 53 Appropriation asked for anew building.........2.. 222+ sesees see--+ eee 8 Att and andustry.,; department Of 2222 320-2 So. ee eee eee 51 Bibliography» ees x oe ae Ss Nee ee Se eae ea ne Peet er en 5. . i84 276 eS = a INDEX. 949 National Museum— Continued. Fae. Polrcamops OmpneMUnseul: st. 1 so ocuclcs ost al. Sos eee ee ee 276 PARR E EB Ee eet ss S054 55 53525222 Sak Ve Uae e eee aeameneene 277 et seq. Le) EAB US SUI ELGTS 1 ee 0 eS ne a eee ec kA Sa Daal Lee iy 53 Baleiingeeermeme eet Ss oe es Sos ce See Oe 31,84 SlassiheaiourOMmaepaniments sc). sides. sls Seles iss. coe le eee 51, 163 J NTU GOES Se Se OO See ae Seen Sb fig uy ie. PT ORAN CPI OMA LM VE sete Iamreis 3 Mate coach a Ge ehewek uc ne Se emraey Bee 164, 175 MU ce oh EGae ode gos SaaS SEO SOIE ORES ae res Ae Ie once be ie 3 164, 185, 220 BVO CINIGESCIVICO Natya e ee 2)-hra Sa aa se Pose ede e oS o aoe. Ja ee 164, 170 MOTs tense erste eye epee es, eect ane 281 cae etic ken che ae Se, lS e RT ogee 164, 184, 208 fei Pee DON a Meet ea esta ee ed emia ah) Sct ae Soho oo ee ee 164, 171 RG CRIO IEE see eine ot ate ik canis Soa SS As SO eee 164, 183 Eee PiMleReM On Da ORAC MILAM Coo bee). sain sions soos Pabates Meee aoe 164, 185, 225 Ganinmes architecture section; &.222552--2--.2.22. <2.ce 8.25 ee 53 IMEEMES Crean es fe mcine Ate Ae SSS Seo 2 og feed. S25 Se es eee 51, 163 et seq. ECON eee PSS e ae Se enn Sosee woos Soc aos ease coos See eee 163, 169 LTCC Soe Cage ae A CO APE hae a a ae Senne ner reeeeice.. 28 Sy. 163, 165 RAMU IE TeAr ER HOOD tects Beret ed =o chet cio cate aS gel Dads oe we REE 163, 169 RMI ase ett A eee wanes 5 sce paper ee oars Nes eee 164, 190 BUS IEACOSD SS epee as Se aoe tetctorei at fe: wio lo orcicla Datla ae Rigo ciewee sae eee 164, 186, 250 DRE SUMIN SSE BOSS ae Seo eee a ee ee ee ee Se eS Ag 163, 165 PENRO UON AUC: CRONAN TOS 52> 5°17). SSC oe Sa se eee als ene cee sea 163, 167 Bermemutiesiiall iH ysiOlOp ye. 2A oat Ja oe socio ooh Sek 164, 190 PeEporaion and! field work 2 2<;ss225¢62242so5e~ e222 sche settee eee 164, 189 RTS eS ete te oe eee Be oy | Seer et Set Sota rs tation erica wearer 164, 185, 228 HOssilsplaniS se. eae o's oa ste ee ake eine otc s sinc eee a eee eee 164, 188, 263 Mirae Chis ce at otatoeet otolatet tal o Sate a tafatay alalervat= lores ma isla aloe ae slat eeine oralete te aiaie 164, 186, 239 imvervebrate fossils /-4ie- 2 ees ck wn Sk ee eect ei ee nee tee 164, 187, 260, 261 MM TeUyAe tT tr ea tee tee era est dee eta SOMA eA’ 163, 166, 271 imitholosy and physical geology. ccs oa. oa See la sl 164, 188, 263 Metaliuney: and: economicireologyac--<- 32 -- += cee eo eo See 164, 189, 268 MimeralOO yee sane e =n otee cm ata ne eral al eins sala eet ees ante mee ates 164, 185, 206 IMG RIES 3 SES oe Sota eee estes tus e phase te aes 164, 186, 244 utticnbiong® .¢ 2922502 ss 5.24 se een eee POSE PEE ne palit ne ss Ae eee 163, 166 PRODOELY ANOS Pes. sees meee = pial tor iniasniat aero ke -ricloers Selae a ou een 163, 167 eae eEbeS ANd pLOLOZOANS == ae = —oaa cece enema sem eee sata see eee sae 164, 186, 250 LhGGRiih MET Ba oo ne Ree ECONO Sos an6 GODr CooaeoeE OSS ates See 164, 187 Regisiny and storage ----- --2--= -- 2. 2.2 oem eee niente = n= a metsce ee 163, 165 VHIRGHT a Rec BO eS See Be aaa eee a Aas A aR ODAC Sa 5S eons < 164, 190 "OEE RN Sie re Os es Tee cect ak eek eae 164, 186, 250 Wepre oad MInNIShLahlones= 2.22 sess soa coat tes on Sone ae eee eee SL PriisiousOtAdimMiMIstcatiOn.. sa JU sas ccens Se ae ela ne hee eel nemenaye aie 163, 165 JAI Helle) DONC Roos Sees aes BeaaC EEE Ee Been Se Saereccosc pseeat Sore sSocc - 164,175 SCHR hia as O80 Se ASB RO Sea Se Ae e ae Sete Beene BOCs 3G se eaic ne) Jee 164, 187 Exploration and experiment ..---..------.---- ----22---- 2--, ---=------ 164, 189 RE NOR eter le eye etal lenin eral e7m/ ote alarmed ale lp ino aie ao ele ee lance alate fag hme mie = 164, 188 JUN Oy pe SaS Bee Oe BeOS Renee ene 2 Eee Ge saa Noa ciadie Shoat cece oth 164, 184 Exhibition of the Pharmaceutical Association....-.--..---.-------------- 174 Mrshes department Of... ss. --- sain geome seman ee min ers Sees 54 pOUR and tAXtles SCCtlOM: —. 2. a) a5 sa Someta cle lee o a =e) oaratmtetelw win =f 52 Fossil plants, department of..-....-..-.---------------- 122-22 eens eee 55 stoma! TELCOS RECHION! ssc Sasso ae sole vee sane etna smal seme ere aise 53 Imereased Space needed for, 2.2.//2 222: -2 2.25255 So - = 5-2 = een See einnn eon 7,8 Insects, department of .... .....-.--- 2-0 + eee ne cee ween cece cece eee noes 54 950 INDEX. - Page. National Museun—Continued. Thsuticrent: accommodations for display -s-2- 222: -=--4- +e sees einsee oe oe A 7,6 invertebrate fossils, department ofs.2. coco cent eo. eae ee ee eee 55 Lithology and physical geology, department of ........----.....---.....- 55 Mammals, departmental - onc. 2. e <2 a enc) Sees See eee ee a 53 Marimeumvertelrates, Ge partment Of asec ses ose el ete = aie ede eee ae 54 Materianmedica section. coc. a ate eels see eee ne Sea eee eeeaeeeee 52 Meetings .andléctnres' 2 222 .dinco.< See yn nna tae ete eee eee 174 Metallurgy and economic geology, department of .-.....-........---.-... : 55} Methods-of transportation ;sectlony Of. saor seen ieee lene ee eee eeeree 52 Minerals; department:of- 22 222). ane ces see cata geen ecco eee 55 Mollnsks, epabi meni On 22 saiece renter megs apetee ope atl eae ara 54 Officers... ucofobe lop te eye cree awe ee a a eee gn oe 275 Organization of departments = et os saoe ase eee e e ee eee eee 163 Preliminary, exhibitionsof fishery collection)... sesso ee eee eer ieaae 173 Mlle Ufo We eer sera Sacre AamS oe as soso ees usceaoc Socesrecks a ose 31 Recent plants} department Of--2-). =. s-ape os e eree oee ee ee ee ae eee 55 Reporb-of-Assistanb Director. ss-ci-ctoe. see cele eee eines 51, 161, et seq. Professor Baird's. 252. .cas coe hoes os bone Geese eee eee marae eee ee 51 Reptiles and batrachians, department of..-.-.--..--..2-.--.-.-.--2------ 54 Séchioniorssheries<-. cmchc memo iee Seed anise seein see ee meraeeee aoe 176 Costumes eo. oe oe een Sob ee eben oboe secs os eee oe een nara emer 179 Boodsjand> textiles, ..2 252 sss Sains sce does som eerste ete aeie See as 182, 196 Histonirealireliesy: Sec ce cht Se ses cee eee ie See eee ea ene eo ee 177 Ceramics, J S362 sities dees Saee cane sobs weee ec aise em eee aaee eres 178 Materianmedic ac sack Sse beets eee eon coca ee ee nee ee eee 177, 190 Naval architecture............ Soo isiols Sila aa ecto, SoS ye eer ee eee 178 Southerp: Exposition at Lonisville: <2. 3:2.) -o.5e seas ee eee eee ee 174 WAI E) 11) eahot Soe oo ao eee Gachos aoe soo aouciudande abcocdcéactho cbcsss 175 Work of the preparators) -2)2)22 S25 jesse sstacete ee sees ate Beton 51 National Museum building . 252.06. ieee eake sence le bee ae eames seater areas 5 imperfectdraimages. -. eos kaa ctios b cee oe Steele mee easee one eee 5 Meetings of scientific bodies in .. -..- bank Se ee Sato Se ce ere alee eae 9 Natural-history: workshop™ 2222 2c J s- secs ole ee ee ieee ieee z 6 Naval architecture, section of, in United States National Museum -...-..----. 178 Naval museum‘of shy pienes. 2222 So. 26 ete ice See seer ee ee OE ee eee 49 Navy Department, co-operation Ofe!2. .- s224- 225222 eco eae eee eee 39, 40, 41 Newberry, Johbn.S., paper byscs. css oo se-clsnes cee ene oe eee eee ee ene 317 NG@GROlOGY~ foins de Sais sie See oe ee et cinta s See en eS CSRS eke ein ee ee ee 45 Of POtaniSts:. 25 nacho cose Paes ete ine Sea es coeciasee aici eee eee 697 Of 2oolomisis:. 2536 <2 See. ee Psd hat eke = Bes Pate ee eee Drees 750 Nelson Mr, collections madejbyie {2 eecer sce sees eat see ee eee eee eee 16 Nelsons Drak collection presented Dye. ss see a=) eee ete eee eee 226 Netherlands-American Steam Navigation Company, co-operation of....----- 36 Newfoundland; explorations ip = 222.-2-0 2s bes eee see ee eee eee 12 News Mexico, explora blomsiim: se 2- 00 eit ete ee aigte epee eee eet erent 20, 59, 60, 61 Mrs Crooks: 2.25 Voss Ses e.ok VA ce 2 oe wantstoe seca ee ne See ene ee = ae er ee 22 United States/Geolocical Survey=.cc.ec-ss-icesssoee sae See ae eee 21 Professor Kiert.s.'2 3 sos ce loc. eee ere nie Cae cae Sige se eager eet ete 22 NSN Robinson 225/250 53.20 i226 osc kee con Ieee Bee ee Eee ee eee aioe ie Dr shiteldthes=sa5--2- sees ees CSE SEE E eae d Be See eet elok etter eer 21 James SlovensOM.. 2. ese l oe seen ee) eee eee ene eee 21 George Holley. j.c222 Sie). onc hoe eae Ree ee eee Oe ee eae 21 New York and Brazil Steamship Company, co-operation of.....--...-------- 36 New York and Mexico Steamship Company, co-operation of .....--.-.------ 36 “= — =e INDEX. 951 Page. Nema works eh OuohkGesle; TOMCS IN -c. 2-5 .e'c nce ce Sec oeccs seneecges Sese Lae 876 PM Ae men Pe KOCCRIL OL. 5. aan a igoees one ens ve smaieseuewaccaaes 40 SGVAGGD) WLS ESS 5 SOE AE i et a eae J wee gadis Seeeemen Ans tee 179 IG OMUEO Lem ene ee 2s sacle re aaa achat ne Sooty waemiseeeeins seen ee oe 180 MAiCArAriA, Omerepe, anviquities from .... 5.22... 5 alc... 22 é Beeene seenee seen 908 Nichols, Lieut. Commander H. E., collections made by-.-...-.......-...----- 17, 252 Pelininane Mina Anes, SBEVICES Of 2225.0 o. 2 ose ea ne'se ee swanseesoecee gene 245 Norn ville Machsshatchino stabion at. 2. 22 sash 22 1S. ceikcce cas nce leek g2 MocuhiGermantbioyd. co-Operation Of. 6... 22.2. 22 edcoe esd oe ndasemee see 36 ONGOLuhiSiat. sbeam whaler, crushed imice ..2..-5.2-2sctoce-c--2 --5 2 scseee 15 OTM OO Cet DAMS COL -t.da 5. vc ccine ofc eco cac+ sasees at seas Seceoe seasons 182 ge nie Aad OMA! GhAbION 2.202. - 5 sous noes ce eos sand cow wae one 16 Nutting, Charles C., antiquities from Omotepe, Nicaragua .... -- ere ee 908 Explorations by -.--..---- neiare ce Ae ads Sb GOS OM SONS SEeE ORR b esc ce 25 nn EMRE EE PERM ENVIS ane atone aid Sem na eloy anna osle pia eae ee wee wee esis woe 213 NIEMANN Sed ae aaa eae le aie sicivie Diente =ingiel Uae we ee we Soe Salemi ym 317 Pew iiana; jr. .collection made by 2... 27...) 2. co. eles Sone sees doce ence 253 LEESIBIE |IAY secede ne neien pp oop oncbse soc oe menos dean Dacbonosdacseedpsoe hS66cc 317 O. Spee IUCR! Se cee cele ln aa ee ava sw 9 2 eo oe — aise ete een man te eee =e 42 CORE TOE PETE NES oo Se5 6 Scls0o DS SeSr ECeO nao BOOMISE ae aeeScors SOUS =o cameo = 42 einen) 0.1 CO-OPCLaulODsOLl - .e o-oo 52 nes wei - se 2 3 cies er ecig a ote setae ne 36 Sere enneramirhMinen 3-822 = aG o = Sak ges 2s ac ee sen ss et So. coe ~ DE eee RELVICES OL soa to aoc Sache Reiss ebkiaee sien « SdeSeciccwecr —ocastenu 269 WhO ws WheT GOunby.-MOUNGS Iso oes cals leisi= caine nel cee) emails e isin aia cisl =e 844 DPT CMCSA CLUNE tema Ate oo eo orkeSpomoreoe Spo ds ocd a cucd secoeueCuSEe 838 Pacman OUn hy, CATE WORK IWi ro a).4 yacaciniciac ao Qoo sattem ee Seana eee 851 Wmetepe, Nicaracua, cate cane ose iceman = = seine atria 19 Osteological collection in National Museum.......-. ..--..-.-..------------- 211 Owen, Sir Philip Cunliffe, acknowledgment due. .........--..----.----.---- 84 Wwsornyonow oe. CO., ald rendered: Dy sas. =.2 2520 5- coche ses so ones ea cecel 26 OMSIGR, TAWESHIEG nah BAS BOSS obo Le oben Goes sbocSue soca casey aceaiscoaeacee 83 1 Pacific Mail Steamship Company, co-operation of ......---...-.------------ 36 Paintings (see Catlin collection) -.--...--.- -------- ---- 0-226 se eee = eee eons alates Paleozoic section of department of fossil invertebeates .......------.------- 261 Palmer, Dr. Edward, collections received from. ......-...--. ---< .-2.-------5 251 Palmer, Joseph, chief modeler, United States National Museum ........---. il ¢l Palmer, William, modeler, United States National Museum....-.....------- 171 Panama Railroad Company, co-operation of.....-.--........----.----.----- 36 Papers by investigators not officers of the Museum..-.-......--..------------ 276, 313 Papers by officers of the Museum...-....--..--------..----- -+------+----- -- 276, 277 Parker, Hon. Peter, member of Executive Committee ---.. ---.- XT, XVI, RD VE VGUIONIGEY rls ec tate cin = a aioe a ote ween elasem ee mine om ole ee ile talk rararate Se XII RODE om man onc cw al-iwa sie me elen ol eee perianal wictinapainie) oe ie X, Rl, ko Ve Parker, Peter, jr., services Of... .. 3.02. eens Saad eee om eer er nedesneein e+ seae- 185, 239 (NSS ea Dee EE) 1 ee Oe ee ASA OSC mer eA oomE et toe apriote 54 otacont VCOMCCHIOUS {LOM -+ vac. aw sceleting ess eele*lpicisv vicesievir= wey em gay 20 952 INDEX. Page Patents, Commissioner of, transfer of Washington relics by -.......-------- 3 i) Patton; Viekers & Co.,;\co-operationobs-- =) 0220" oe. aoe cutee ase cn a 36 Leeyahieintovovabala iuey Kodaly Kees Seca woes Jos sO GoesS tao aoc asses oocb a Sse 83 Payne; John Howard,-Gbsequies Of: c5> .-.- 2--eta-ee pe atleineoian et ae oe ere 50 Peary, sh. ©, presented: coral -- oo apkens 41 Plants: fossil department Of. oo. see Bee eer ee oe See eters eee eee ee 55 Recent, CeparbumMenmtlOe iow 222. c ye sis at meron eileen ee eee epee 55 Posy. Dr. Pilipey thanks?du @) 222222), Seer co arte eee ee eee 209 Pomp Barrow expeditions. 2. 26. 2225 asst es eke eee eee ee eee ee 14,15, 16 ENO EI HOI PORK Bee Sea oob cease bose sonShe coe oso gsecse doses oesose 24 Porter, Rey. Dr. Noah, address of, at unveiling of Henry statue.........-.. XX, XXV Regent ...--- -----cee cee ee n eee ne we nm Sow ene we owns ww ene Ay My RKXKV UT iReiAmMhH Ol Why Ohi eosamnesen one Ao boo sacs Sess coueeencdoLsos bssedesesc code 49 Pottery, aboricinal, sechion OL; nee ee este eee ie ieee eee 52 IMG MOOI! WSSU Geseeaoe sen sone 6665 oace Seetioses Segomass esos se tosodd basen: 179 Potts, Hdward; bronze medal fors so saesseeee eet - > > Sas teen oe eee een 254 Collection:received from 2. < oo. S222 ease ciacin ince ees ee espe ees eee ai! Poughkeepsie, N.. Y., relicsiam): . 2.4 -2-2-msceclee <5 =e cielo wee ee eine 876 Powell} Maye). W.. address DYyie2 peat ero eeese ee eee eee aerate 10 Director United States Geological Survey -------------..------------2-ecs 67 Injehareeiof Bureauior dithnolosyees=s--- esses eee ae ae eee eae 56 IBG\CHin2) NU eae acne Aer aac anos oooce- Se Sabo nccisom cosoperncsay ocandeds.ce 9, 44 Behe, ADE TMH nNOS = SoMa ones ceaticoson9 Casson deta oases Sees oosaae 182 1 PAVE eral Oye enn etS Oe le tafe leven Oa ESE DIES Be Shine cons Sooo OnE esdo See .OGSO-it Prentiss, Dr. .D, Webster, Lectures) piyjeai esata aera ate ae aa nee teeter 9,10, 174 Mhanks:-to,*for lectures: 25:2 waosc a aa aera eee eee eee eee 10 Preparation department, United States National Museumise-oer ss seeeee er 171 IBUICSHLey cLellcste tee tat sen aerate wc ehaugceipid ale 2 ylaee aie es Sie eee lates cote 49 INDEX. 953 Page. ela ets GEPNOUBGNNE, WE co oso on oe aa sab Se con's boa ees gueuesaden ce 24 Printing of Smithsonian Report for 1883 ordered ...-......-..----..----..--- II Prizes aluondonisheries exhibition -<=-2- 22-2 5- ssc. <2 See eet ee ck odes 177 Awarded to preparators of United States National Museum .............-. 171 Reccivedsanmuondon hisheries MxXbiDIb.. 20 6.52 2c... b att see eine sae eee 86 Proceedings of the United States National Museum ..---.. 2.222.222... 31, 32, 166, 276 RIE UNO HIG CTD UME TIBNEE cee ao oh 0) 5 aoe mo wien ee = oie wien ess Adages eae 82 Property and supply department, United States National Museum........-- 163, 167 PeEUOeds Steamer, OXpPequulon OF, .5 22.0 Sese cc occ6 2255 ah55-Soawe bee noe ee 14, 41 RN a GL leer eee eae again onc rcnmtloe sp Socles a eAeT ae eee ReRE 13, 41 perio miatianmal ClOdONe: sasen foe ao 52 cia cas ah Hoiniss cho ocle dee sae see Tame 22 Publications of the United States Geological Survey........-......----..--- 81 Wamtadusiabes: Government. List: Of. - 52 ss. 5<. sous s-5 ad o- oe BES EES 150 mnbed States) National) Musetim:--. 3-225 oo s.c.-. 2s. tks Je 22 ese A 6BEI66,276 Deion OAn WOOULOR ae asis 5 seScl=:- 2s seiscisijenss. 2 7 Sb.n/ Neate aes eee olaeiee 166 PEP HSO MICU EONS UL GU G1 OMe 2) aco) aerate S.aia| Salsa! oS 01 c.5 clans, Sa gels Sees enn eee See HOU OG: SEMEL IIT ESE Sorte fee a oo icine s\ a4) ae aa sia, mina Se SSeS ob ea a nee OES PP UMOUINSOMoHoUNAnONM MUSOU, 2. sia. cscsc.c Soden cond eect coon enaeaee 31,52 ANT GAblLON, Oly 6 OleOp tela =2s 44-5502 222 os soe ce ska s weet Wace none 29 WOME UNIONS tOMKn OWE Seneca reo s.cgs ca scieen cos sSscsseeoseeee eee 27 General catalogue of scientific periodicals...........--..-..----.-+----- 30 Miscellaneous iC ONSCHONS) 255. naa s 2 ecco a 5 sae ceo oe soe. cicism mmaee eee 27 invaiealvandmencorolocical tables: .226- 232, 2< acca ese. ek neces eens 31 Pmeredimps of the National: Museum: 22.2 f. 22. S22 shee ches seks 32 emery mee SMMAN TD NUR UUM ANAS) 2 ee Pe seh npe) ta a a es Se ase aelaa =| ae SSeS 19 Q. Qusen, Charlotte:Islands,,explorationsiin.-. 25 i25..4205. sseo2 = asc cess Seek 19 R. Races of men, departinent of, United States National Museum .----..... ..-- 164, 18:3 Railroad entering Armory building reservation .......-..---.----.----.--....- 6 Ray winorelsuhore:-Collechiom scOM? = 22 2-\2 =~, nase oimcie wae otenee Coss. so ee ae ee 44 Rajah Siminaro Mohun Tagore, nec DYkccccectan Seat ee ee coe Senior 182 Rathbun, Richard, curator United States National Museum ......---. 54, 186, 250, 275 Catalogue of collections pects scientific investigations of the sea and SBEHHEW ALORS, oe siciele = so ssscics Sees Joe cowelsale eet sabe ese saateeaets 34 Catalogue of collection of economic ¢ aa NE ee ee SE Se 84 PAPEIS DY = =. 2 = = Bans may aieye Seielatate ales aialal Se amin aa .= Soseten ene Report of, on f depatancan of marine facet eniee Ba ou nd Soe eats ae meee 250 Rau, Charles, curator United States National Museum ........ Teen. 183, 198, 275 inicharge of department, Of antiquities -\.. AR HOOesrinaeoregnoe XVI 954 INDEX. 7 Page. Record Of scientific Progress... cos ais spe ete ee ee ee een ae : 363 Anthropolosy, ©. 1. Mason), (ace.cailicies Semeaae le ee eae eee rena eee eee 753 Astronomy, 1. “[. TLOlMOm aie Sere sears ole ore neo epee ea ete tte 365 Botany, WG Bh arlo Wiese sens © mae tae ave ae foe era eee ee eee 681 Chemistry, H.-C. Bolton so22 2. 2.225 Jasin “nee hen 23 ie eee eee eee ea ies 629 Geopraphy, EM Green 52s e'seanien eel ne eee re See ee vals 465 Geology. 1 Le Sterry SEMIN iciee eters e septa cee oe healt eae eee ee 443 Introduction, by S. E.. Baird..-.-..=:2- LS OUR OS ae EAP Rete ea sisi ae 363 Meteorology, Co ADDG (22 i aacensemtencmiaoa eae See se sas sao 483 Mineralogy; H.sS: Danan ic chess ejaaie neuen sets lsicle wis cece estas ae race ee 661 Physies, 'G:.,Ei, Barkers. 25022 cise a aes o) eae ee eee re ee eee 571 Zoology; Theodore Gill. 232325 2 See pasate se ee eee see eee 699 Recordsiin department of reptiles soci > seen saosin cae eee ere 227 Kept in department of marine invertebrates -.---.-.--2-.-2..--2---2---- 259 Red:Star Line, co-operation of---...---..2---- 2+. --22 Uo Rees ats sau eee 36 Recents of thesnshitution s< soc 03. -ceemeeee a ese anne ee aa ae een x PRP POUNUOG: Paro sie! rere cw oh r= eae ie ete em a alt XI Chan res of (2 Se canto 2 cele al rn ete le ene oe 3 Expiration Of térms/ass,...2 s..g2 saseseeeoele nce ses ad Oe Ee ee eee eee XI Journalor proceedings a5. /2- sje seis ore sorte ete eld ee eet ete eee XI Meetingsi08 a2. cece nooo aeia ee eres pares ee = ne a eae ete Bae et 3, XI iO POLbIOE oa. Se sii Sa,sieie) "sie oie ee seis wie See tet Sees SECO eee ee eee I Reso] UGLONMS HD, <3 ss, a2) eich tee pee a) settee ae Fe eae XII Registry and storage department, United States National Museum ..-.-..... 163, 165 Relations to:fercion Governments... 55.252 s-- ons ee eee et eee 42 Kelics ‘ancientuat Dayton) ObiOsssoos. coset eae ee eee eee eee eee 838 Historical, section of, United States National Museum .........-...-...... Hog ldd In-Poughkeepsie,.N. ¥i< 52. Ca. Ses et ek he ee ee eee ee eS eeeeae 876 Of Washington... 4-2 ne sc ets ee eee eee > See eae eae eee eee 42 Report of Board of Regents.---...--. -..-- No Ree jotol a weal e ee Selo alee eee I ORE xecubive: COMMIbtCe2 ss aco Ree ets eat a a a eet XII, XIII--XVI On-the: Henry statueys2: sisson noone ce eee ee eee eee eee ee XVIL Reporu lof - Professor, Bait. - a eee eee ee Se ee ee OEE eee ee inl Bureann: Of Be tHMOlOg yess so 2 Secs ere ete otra acl a ree eee ee 56 International Conference on Exchanges at Brussels. ...-.. .--.-.---.:----- 120 On aboriginal pottery. 1.25 spol eee ee eo a ee eee ren eee 52 Smithsomlanrexchan ~ Os: se ese ee ee eye ee te ee 91 United S tatessbish Wom miissto mss) se oe ee eset oe eee cae ee ra 381 United States Geolorical Survey... 255.2. -asesse ae Sa0i-= a6 eee eae 66 Reptiles, department of, United States National Museum ...----...-.-- 54, 164, 185, 225 Collections: Tecelvieds:e=., 2 Set oe Sa eee ae eee ee eee 185, 225, 226, 227 Numberof specimens onyhandersesat tesserae ee ee eee een ee 227 Re ponvial-cuLraAtOL oss sae R tee Ae ee ree ee ee ee ee 225 Suggestions made by curator 2555522 sase-- soe ojos es eee eee 228 He warrow: honorary 22sec s Sees ace es ees Case 24 MESES RON ac tad Noe a a ne oe eke bys dn wea etiee ee Ue a cee ee 21, 24 Ruth, John A., remains in Bucks County, Pennnsylvania.-..---.........-.. 872 Hyder; John A., biologist of Fish Commission........0...2....222-3 2062200. 83 MEL VSTSa\ te cad aac orl 2 Ao rn ama kde toe, te Tonaags ot ee a te ee 317, 318 iyder, ohn A, .and:Dheodore Gill; papers:by 2=-22 i. s-s-.252-2 22-2 oe. eee 315 Ss. Saitord, Ensign W. E., assisted Mr. Rathbun... .....-.-.- 22-2. sec sae eee 55 DRUID: < Gees Sei eee eee ere ee SESE ae RHO sara cee age alctey Seis ee S 40 SISTING) le 6 ce SES EE Re ORE Soke Caer SIGE OC ASAI ABO SSORUA EH So aoe 245, 256 MNS LUC EHS Ol, F552 Sas 2-= 2m Selene ae es) So may i aioe a ee 82 Salamon COUN ty, LMINOIS. MOUNGS! OL. -35 see coe = Sees Sate ee eee aee e 825 MAME Cuvee CGUIRES sear ents Sn ave cee o's ci se cine este eee oa baa ee Sees 9, 10 Bchenek. Dred.; collection: presented: DY -2.c.222 cas eo osesiecca suc ene cE ee ~ 226 Sueno ann,, Os) We wSCLVAG@s! OL jo! 2.2 sess0 Aes eee GaSe eee cone aeeaies 169 SCHUMACHKET “Eat NCChOLO Patios oo. 2) cnmeeceiee Seco a ee eee ea ae Ree 45 SaMmMachentiw. COrnCO-OPelrauloniOla- =. 2 =< =e Soccer eae a ere Sele 36 Science Observer in regard to astronomical announcements ...........---..- 33, 87, 89 Stemi bodies, mech o Ofiesen 1 seo toe ey as = Se ee ore tates oe eee eee 9 ernodicals, soneral catalopue On. 1.2 > sem Saye a aie eee enn to Se Ree ce 30 PROPTCEN TOCOLG: Obes ns ctnaae ia etc neee ea ae sate anise site soeiaaecwes hase 363 AV Es ote DORE DE ER OUIIN Ss 2c eles ie en Dele ope es ata rep eta an mgs XII SO MGiete wala MAP OIS YON i = a niatecraee ie catam gab omen: sna. ooks eoUCeS 318 Scudder, Newton P., and G. Brown Goode, papers by .---..-..-------------- 289 Sea-COWee a5 - Sao oases ee oe nae Soe Cee CaaS te ce ewan gat ue we 17,18 Seal; American, natural history. Of: <2. coor tio a= ses eae dee cea ee sheet 13 Sealarcollectiont0le::—<-tysc c= setass enstaacuae saan ke wan Shei toe oe ee ee 184, 209 Preeninoene pipe OL ce Sows No ouiey gat. geese oa cena byte t dade eouey lat Soee.beee 14 956 INDEX. Page Schetmeier, We B., donation bysss- 32s 2b Ss ose seer een a eee oes 85 Senators appointed to represent Congress at unveiling of Henry statue...--. XIX Shell-heaps in West Florida ..-...-....-- SOS RE See Opie Hosea = sec S60 wins = 854 Sherman, General: William I); Regent .-c22s)-.222s2 ao ase. cues nee USS, BRD, ERERGXGVAE Member of Executive Committee ....---....--- tne eee cree Se XVI, XXI, XXXVIIL Motion-by ssc. n2ioi. ah. se te oes oe een eee aq welie seh Se oer Seat ek te XIL elindlerGAs 7 scarhish G9 nes oso sate ee ae tee eee JSF EVE eieessoeee 172 Shoemaker, George, collections made by.------.---- Sbicibtckeniaay alae See ee 225, 240 NGCLOLO RY hate ee ed LS Sache ci Sarees nee oe aw eeise ne) Oe teteetee eats ere eee AT Shuteldt;- Dr. Robert Wi, collections madeiy.- 25-2 ~~ aa ela eee 225, 240, 252 Hxploration by {226 5sci-A0 ts sk eee caer & Seno eee ee eel eee 21 Papers by: acsisek idee hoa oe Se AR aA slee secre eral Sage ee Tee EES 304, 305, 306 Researches Of 2.3.2 se Sere faa Se tat re ha So ee aeons Sie See ree 227 Siamese collections presented by Rajah of Lahore ..-.. NETS RS SE as Mets 44 Sional:Ofice, co-operatioue Dy seaeeee ae ose ee eae eee eee eer at M1 Stenal: Service, co-operation of 2... 22 S2 eee ee ee ee eee eee Se ees 41 Wx pea Lion) oe js Sasa ec ates G ccreicte boca te See eer ee eae ee 14, 41 Sisshee,(Commander/©..D) goldsmedal tors eoesae- eee ene ae eee ete eee 254 Silver medals awarded at London Fisheries Exhibition........--4..--.----- 254 Singleton, Hon,0:; RK. appombed: Recetas. sseee soe see eee eee eee XI, 3 ROC ONT Wace : Aa Se eee Se ees tae ie EE OES eee oem eee X, XI, XXXVIII Siouan languages, comparative phonology of...-..---..--- Rear eer a Lert ae 919 Skins; collections of aneNational: Museumre-e a. seas se ae eee eee 211 Smillie, T. W., photographer United States National Museum. ...-..-..----- 275 Photographie work :0fse 32 so ious soko Sela surat aes ele ats ee Set ee een 172 Smith, John Lawrence, necrology-....---- PRES SR ERSaie mas ScsSds ae ao (oe 46 Smith, Middleton, collections made by.--...- "note oaoaNas eae eae 14 Smith; Rosa; papers DY ee ies Ses oe ew ase ets =e soe ane ae 318 Smith; ‘Sandersom,researches, of, s.n20-- eee ene he see ee ee ee ee 256 shogun Dy, wsikelibrenye ise Jovy oleriMl Ny teeta noeke etec esac agen ee Eee tae rea 319 Smithsonian Dull dine jire=pr0 0. O10 fees saree ne ees arate ena ee eer eee 4 Smithsonian exchanges, centers of distribution 2 2--. 22s slee eae oo eee 101 Correspondence relative to Government exchange..-....-.2..-...-.-.---- 111 Domesticrexchanee divisione-s.-.2-.- 452 == sere BAe eS Sone. 91, 102 Moreign exchanme. division comes fos.) tte eee) sattarsbar ye aye oie ee reece ane 91, 95 Goveroment exchan ve divasions.te sors e eee eae eee eee eee ooo Eee eee 92, 105 List of United States official publications ---.....---..--- Sta atat are age a ee 150 RECelpts 200.) soe Soe eee sate ae Sia ep erste sian e aS ao ora eet ner 93 Recordediviston! \. 3. sche oS sa cee Gos aeeeeece es oe eee ee skon eee reer 91 Reportaby Georve HH. Boehmeteones-- sees eee ovo fou eels een see mee 3, 91 heportionzBbrussels:conterence sm. ose e eres acre a en eeae eee eee eae 120 Shippinb lists: jo.k. 2 eee eee ee Seca ae esos be ee eee ae eee 99 PrangMissiOus 2s.) Fo-s ofc seseinees coe eee eles Lies SEE Oa ee a eer eeeeneee 95 Eransportatlon) COMpanies —steceseste> eee Soe hee emer ree eee eee eee 98 Spinney, JOseplies...cO-operablon: Oleeee crs as eteeoe cee eel = ee eee 36 Sponges, catalocueluf ies iss a. ees ase eee ee cee ee ae eee Bee eee seee 84 Spoon River Valley, Illinois, mounds in..-.--.-.-. Se ea ae eee ees SS oe 835 Sociologicall'systeniofthe Aunis) 2)... 2e2 cee eee ets eee eee ee eee 63 South-America, explorabions iyo. = sce ae eae eee eee eee eee eei eee : 26 WascW es ONang 2 oo/5a) Sets acces lees oe rater e at sage arenes a renee tea etree 26 icutenanh Very ses oes sees ese ae Cee eee eee ee en eee 26 SOUthEeTI HX position ab ous ville sess ees eee a ee eee ee 174 St. Petersburg Horticultural Exhibition................-. SSC RO AS caS a Ane 45 Standard time at United States National Museum ....-....2--ssec-+ e0-- ---- 170 Page ATC M NTI DB ema oe Meare amo ait oe Scala o = wien wt Sas /St eee ep ee eee Nee 43 Statistics of international exchanges... .- 2.02.00 eset. celeb eSoece ell: 35 Stearns, Robert E. C., adjunct curator United States National Museum ..... 275 a Meee QT cite fay bere ani Saw 2e) ioe ok cde dd Gots os Cou decabetamee eee 54 PERE STIR IRILG Aree cre oF ce mia ne ae wit ease bs Load sercd see eee eee 20 Mma OMAUNOCAL MOC TOM ease = ain coco ss = Seek a a wid, woe Soe ecte ee eee 245, 253 ne ee eee te wa ais 5 tas das O83 ve 306 Stejneger, Dr. Leonhard, collections made by -..-......---..--. 18, 53, 184, 185, 208, 252 RAR EDOMU LT NEES eae et cielo cies orn Sadia ence 32s A Cea Lak yo seee eee 17,18 SRE SETAE CUMIN ofa lelarn oats, o whe oa win Sala ood nance dane Inagsaekeee 20, 306, 307 PePenannrat. peanneN Wee lOU ANON DY eo.